Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutB06-0196 Project Manual Volume 1 05/2006s .1 SUMMARY PERMIT SET May 12, 2006 Volume 1 Divisions 1-14 FOUR SEASONS RESORT at VAIL Vail, Colorado e HILL GLAZIER ARCHITECTS 925 ALMA STREET PALO ALTO CALIFORNIA 94301-2405 T: 650.617.0366 F: 650.617.0373 -%W/1 PROJECT MANUAL AND SPECIFICATIONS G", : PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 1 (Divisions 1-14) DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 Summary of Work 05-12-06 HGA 01027 Unit Prices 04-07-06 HGA 01250 Contract Modification Procedures 04-07-06 HGA 01290 Payment Procedures 04-07-06 HGA 01310 Project Coordination 05-12-06 HGA 01312 Project Meetings 04-07-06 HGA 01330 Submittal Procedures 04-07-06 HGA 01450 Quality Control 04-07-06 HGA 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 04-07-06 HGA 01600 Product Requirements 04-07-06 HGA 01630 Product Substitution Procedures 04-07-06 HGA 01640 Owner-Furnished Equipment 04-07-06 HGA 01722 Field Engineering 04-07-06 HGA 01740 Cleaning 04-07-06 HGA 01780 Closeout Submittals 04-07-06 HGA 01788 Product Warranties and Bonds 04-07-06 HGA 01789 Form of Warranty 04-07-06 HGA -10' DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 02210 Fine Grading 04-07-06 EDAW 02220 Excavating, Backfilling, and Compacting (Landscape) 04-07-06 EDAW 02221 Site Demolition (Civil) 04-07-06 AE 02230 Site Clearing 05-12-06 AE 02260 Excavation Support and Protection 05-12-06 AE 02300 Earthwork 05-12-06 AE 02370 Erosion Sedimentation Control 05-12-06 AE 02480 Electric, Communication and Gas Systems 04-07-06 AE 02510 Water Distribution 05-12-06 AE 02526 Stone Paving 05-12-06 EDAW 02530 Sanitary Sewerage (Civil) 05-12-06 AE 02531 Unit Pavers (Landscape) 04-07-06 EDAW 02580 Electric, Communication and Gas System 05-12-06 AE 02620 Subdrainage Systems 05-12-06 HGA 02630 Storm Drainage 05-12-06 AE 02720 Landscape Drainage 04-07-06 EDAW 02740 Flexible Pavement 05-12-06 AE 02752 Decorative Concrete Paving 02765 Pavement Marking 04-07-06 HGA 02810 Irrigation Systems 04-07-06 EDAW 02848 Parking Bumpers 04-07-06 HGA 02920 Soil Preparation 04-07-06 EDAW 02930 Lawns and Grasses 04-07-06 EDAW 02950 Trees, Plants and Groundcover 04-07-06 EDAW 02970 Landscape Maintenance 04-07-06 EDAW DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Formwork 040-70-6 NM 03150 Concrete Accessories 05-12-06 HGA 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 04-07-06 NM 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 05-12-06 NM 03310 Site Concrete (Landscape) 05-12-06 EDAW 03311 Site Concrete (Civil) 05-12-06 AE 03352 Stained Concrete Finish 04-07-06 HGA 03365 Concrete Post-Tensioning 05-12-06 NM 03480 Architectural Precast Concrete Specialties 04-07-06 HGA 05-12-06 TABLE OF CONTENTS Summary Permit Set Page -1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04220 Concrete Unit Masonry 05-12-06 NM 04410 Exterior Rough Stone Veneer 04-07-06 HGA 04415 Site Stone Walls 05-12-06 EDAW 04440 Stone Counter Tops 04-07-06 HGA 04580 Masonry Fireplaces 04-07-06 HGA DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 Structural Steel 05-12-06 NM 05300 Metal Decking 05-12-06 NM 05400 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 04-07-06 HGA 05500 Metal Fabrications 04-07-06 NM 05510 Miscellaneous Metals 05-12-06 NM 05511 Prefabricated Steel Stair Systems 04-07-06 HGA 05515 Ladders 04-07-06 HGA 05521 Prefinished Railings 04-07-06 HGA DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06070 Wood Treatment 04-07-06 HGA 06101 Miscellaneous Carpentry 04-07-06 HGA 06200 Finish Carpentry 04-07-06 HGA 06401 Exterior Architectural Woodwork 04-07-06 HGA 06402 Interior Architectural Woodwork 04-07-06 HGA 06410 Custom Cabinetwork 04-07-06 HGA 06411 Decorative Hardware Selections 04-07-06 BHDS 06460 Wood Entrances and Storefronts 04-07-06 HGA 06608 Plastic Paneling (FRP) 04-07-06 HGA DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07112 Bituminous Dampproofing 04-07-06 HGA 07132 Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing 04-07-06 HGA 07136 Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing 04-07-06 HGA 07139 Roofing Undedayment 04-07-06 HGA 07142 Elastomeric Liquid Waterproofing 04-07-06 HGA 07144 Hot-Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing 04-07-06 HGA 07170 Betonite Waterproofing 04-07-06 HGA 07180 Water Repellent Traffic Coating 04-07-06 HGA 07190 Water Repellent Coatings 04-07-06 HGA 07195 Wall Membrane 04-07-06 HGA 07210 Building Insulation 04-07-06 HGA 07220 Roof Board Insulation 04-07-06 HGA 07262 Sheathing Paper 04-07-06 HGA 07264 Underslab Vapor Barrier 05-12-06 HGA 07311 Asphalt Shingles 04-07-06 HGA 07314 Copper Shingles 04-07-06 HGA 07326 Slate Shingles 04-07-06 HGA 07327 Simulated Slate Shingles 04-07-06 HGA 07550 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 04-07-06 HGA 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 04-07-06 HGA 07656 Modified Bituminous Sheet Flashing 04-07-06 HGA 07657 Window and Door Flashing (Flexible Flashing) 04-07-06 HGA 07724 Roof Hatches 04-07-06 HGA 07728 Snow Guards(Snow Brackets) 04-07-06 HGA 07812 Cementitious Fireproofing 04-07-06 HGA 07822 Fire Resistive Duct Wrap 04-07-06 HGA 07840 Firestopping 04-07-06 HGA 07920 Joint Sealants 04-07-06 HGA 05.12-06 TABLE OF CONTENTS Summary Permit Set Page - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 8 DOO - RS AND WINDOWS 08001 Door Schedule 04-07-06 HGA 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 04-07-06 HGA 08212 Flush Wood Doors 04-07-06 HGA 08216 Stile and Rail Wood Doors 04-07-06 HGA 08264 Wood Terrace Doors 04-07-06 HGA 08310 Access Doors and Frames 04-07-06 HGA 08312 Wood Sliding Glass Doors 04-07-06 HGA 08331 Coiling Counter Doors 04-07-06 HGA 08333 Overhead Coiling Doors 04-07-06 HGA 08358 Electric Sliding Doors 04-07-06 HGA 08550 Wood Windows 04-07-06 HGA 08710 Door Hardware 05-12-06 DHC 08735 Elevator Door Smoke Containment Seals (Smoke Control Curtains) 04-07-06 HGA 08800 Glazing 04-07-06 HGA DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09001 Interior Finish Selections 05-12-06 BHDS 09002 Architectural Finish Schedule 05-12-06 HGA 09110 Non-Load Bearing Wall Framing 04-07-06 HGA 09120 Ceiling Suspension 04-07-06 HGA 09130 Acoustical Suspension 04-07-06 HGA 09207 Metal Lath and Accessories 04-07-06 HGA 09220 Portland-Cement Plaster 04-07-06 HGA 09250 Gypsum Board 05-12-06 HGA 09252 Gypsum Sheathing 04-07-06 HGA 09264 Shaft Wall Assemblies 04-07-06 HGA 09300 Tile 04-07-06 HGA 09390 Interior Tile Backer Board 04-07-06 HGA 09511 Acoustical Ceiling Panels 04-07-06 HGA 09600 Stone Flooring 04-07-06 HGA 09611 Concrete Floor Sealer/ Liquid Hardener 04-07-06 HGA 09641 Cushioned Wood Flooring 04-07-06 HGA 09648 Wood Strip Flooring 04-07-06 HGA 09652 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 04-07-06 HGA 09656 Resilient Tile Flooring 04-07-06 HGA 09671 Elastomeric Liquid Flooring 04-07-06 HGA 09676 Epoxy Flooring 04-07-06 HGA 09699 Water Vapor Emission Control Systems 04-07-06 HGA 09820 Acoustical Insulation and Sealants 04-07-06 HGA 09840 Acoustical Wall Panels 04-07-06 HGA 09890 Synthetic Plaster Finish Coat 04-07-06 HGA 09900 Painting 04-07-06 HGA DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10100 Visual Display Boards 04-07-06 HGA 10160 Toilet Compartments 04-07-06 HGA 10210 Wall Louvers 04-07-06 HGA 10260 Wall and Corner Guards 05-12-06 HGA 10305 Manufactured Fireplaces 04-07-06 HGA 10350 Flagpoles 04-07-06 HGA 10430 Exterior Signage 04-07-06 HGA 10440 Interior Signage (Back of House Areas) 04-07-06 HGA 10505 Metal Lockers 04-07-06 HGA 10510 Wood Lockers 04-07-06 HGA 10520 Fire Protection Specialties 04-07-06 HGA 10605 Wire Mesh Partitions 0407-06 HGA 10652 Operable Panel Partitions 04-07-06 HGA 10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories 04-07-06 HGA 10801 10822 Accessory Selections Shower Doors and Enclosures 05-12-06 BHDS 04-07-06 HGA 05-12-06 TABLE OF CONTENTS Summary Permit Set Page - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO TABLE OF CONTENTS 10990 Miscellaneous Specialties (includes roof snow melt system) 04-07-06 HGA DIVISION 11- EQUIPMENT 11100 Laundry Equipment 05-12-06 RND 11132 Projection Screens 04-07-06 HGA 11150 Parking Control Equipment 04-07-06 HGA 11160 Loading Dock Equipment 04-07-06 HGA 11400 Foodservice Equipment 05-12-06 RND 11452 Residential Appliances 04-07-06 HGA 11453 Residential Appliance Selections 04-07-06 BHDS DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS - NOT USED DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13052 Saunas 04-07-06 HGA 13054 Steam Rooms 04-07-06 HGA 13080 Sound Control Matting 04-07-06 HGA 13082 Acoustic Floor System 04-07-06 HGA 13156 Swimming Pool Spas and Fountains 04-07-06 EDAW 13650 Swimming Pool / Spa Equipment 05-12-06 WLS DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING DEVICES 14200 Elevators 05-12-06 HKA 14560 Linen Chutes 04-07-06 HGA VOLUME 2 (Divisions 15 -16) MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC DESIGN BRIEF (Revision 1) DIVISION 15- ME CHANICAL 15010 Mechanical Work General Instructions 04-07-06 RSG 15050 Basic Materials and Methods 04-07-06 RSG 15250 Insulation 04-07-06 RSG 15400 Plumbing Systems 04-07-06 RSG 15450 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 04-07-06 RSG 15451 Plumbing Fixture Selections 05-12-06 BHDS 15500 Fire Protection 04-07-06 RSG 15600 Power and Heat Generation 05-12-06 RSG 15650 Refrigeration Equipment 04-07-06 RSG 15700 Liquid Heat Transfer 05-12-06 RSG 15850 Air Handling 04-07-06 RSG 15880 Air Distribution 04-07-06 RSG 15890 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 04-07-06 RSG 15900 Automatic Controls and Instrumentation 04-07-06 RSG 15995 Commissioning/Mechanical Systems 04-07-06 RSG DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 Electrical Work General Conditions 04-07-06 RSG 16050 Basic Materials and Methods 05-12-06 RSG 16051 Electrical Identifications 04-07-06 RSG 16200 Power Generation 04-07-06 RSG 16400 Electrical Service and Distribution 05-15-06 RSG 16401 Grounding 04-07-06 RSG 16402 Communications Grounding 04-07-06 RSG 16500 Lighting-Back of House 04-07-06 RSG 16510 Lighting-Front of House 04-07-06 RSG 16511 Lighting Selections 05-12-06 BA 16512 Lighting Control Systems (Dimming Systems) 05-12-06 BA i 16513 Remote Control Station Schedule 05-12-06 BA 05-12-06 TABLE OF CONTENTS Summary Permit Set Page - 4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO TABLE OF CONTENTS 16700 Fire Alarm System 05-12-06 RSG 16710 Special Communication Systems 04-07-06 RSG 16750 Network Cabling System 04-07-06 RSG 16850 Electrical Heating 05-12-06 RSG 16995 Commissioning/Electrical Systems 04-07-06 RSG END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS (60~ 05.12-06 Summary Permit Set TABLE OF CONTENTS Page - 5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01010 VAIL, COLORADO SUMMARY OF WORK SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The work of this Contract comprises construction of the Four Seasons Hotel and Resort in Vail, Colorado. B. Perform work in accordance with the codes, ordinances, and amendments in effect in Vail, Colorado. C. Materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with the Four Seasons Design Standards. Wherever these Specifications contradict the Four Seasons Design Standards, the more restrictive materials or requirements shall govern. 1.02 CONTRACTS A. Perform the work per the executed Agreement between Owner and Contractor. 1.03 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents include Drawings and Specifications prepared by various design and engineering consultants. These Drawings and Specifications are complementary and shall be taken as a whole. What is required by one consultant's Drawings or Specifications shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required to the extent consistent with all the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. B. Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings into various consultant sets shall not control nor guide the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of the Work to be performed by any trade. Division of the Work between the Contractor and Subcontractors shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and based on the Contractor's determinations. C. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. 1.04 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Limit use of the premises for work of this Project to allow for occupancy of adjacent buildings. B. Use of Site: Confine operations at the Site to areas permitted under the Contract. Portions of the Site beyond areas of work of this Project are not to be disturbed. Conform to Site rules and regulations affecting the work while engaged in construction of the Project. C. Access: Keep existing driveways, roads and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. D. Parking: Restrict parking to areas designated by the Owner's Representative. E. Debris Collection and Removal: Locate debris box where designated by the Owner's Representative. Storage: Do not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. Confine stockpiling of materials to Project area. 1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. During the construction period, the Contractor shall have limited use of the premises for construction operations, including use of the site. Coordinate site limitations with the Owner's Representative. 05-12-06 SUMMARY OF WORK Summary Permit Set 01010.1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01010 VAIL, COLORADO SUMMARY OF WORK 1.06 ADJACENT SITE CONDITION SURVEY A. Prior to commencement of work, jointly survey the site, paving, plant life, and other items with the Owner's Representative, noting and recording existing damage such as cracks, sags, unhealthy plant life, and other damage. B. This record shall serve as a basis for determination of subsequent damage to these items due to settlement, movement, or Contractor's operations. C. Existing damage observed shall be marked and the official record of existing damage shall be signed by the parties making the survey. D. Cracks, sags, and damage to the site, paving, plant life, and other items not noted in the original survey but subsequently observed shall be reported immediately to the Owner's Representative. 05-12-06 SUMMARY OF WORK Summary Peak Set 01010 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01010 VAIL, COLORADO SUMMARY OF WORK 1.07 PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES A. The Drawings may not show all existing above and below grade drainage lines; storm drains; sewers; water, gas, and electrical lines; and other items existing in the area of the work. B. Locate these existing installations before proceeding with demolition, construction or other operations which may cause damage, maintain them in service where appropriate, and repair damage caused by the performance of the work, at no increase in the Contract Sum. C. In addition to notification, if a utility is damaged, take appropriate action as specified in the General Conditions. D. Additional compensation or extension of time due to below grade structures not shown or brought to the Contractor's attention, including reasonable action taken to protect, relocate, and repair damage to same, shall be determined as specified in the General Conditions. 1.08 USE AND OCCUPANCY OF WORK PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER A. The Owner may use and occupy any or all of the renovated buildings before formal acceptance under the following conditions: 1. A Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be prepared and executed as provided in the General Conditions. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be accompanied by a written endorsement of the Contractor's insurance carrier and surety permitting occupancy by the Owner during the remaining period of the work. 2. Occupancy by the Owner shall not be construed as being an acceptance of that part of the work occupied. 3. The Contractor will not be held responsible for damage to the occupied part of the work resulting from the Owner's occupancy. 4. Occupancy by the Owner shall not be deemed to constitute a waiver of existing claims the Owner or Contractor may have against each other. 5. If required by the Owner for areas it has occupied, the Contractor shall make available, on a 24 hour-a-day, 7 day-a-week basis, utility services, heating, and cooling which are in condition to be put in operation when such use and occupancy is taken. Responsibility for the operation and maintenance shall remain with the Contractor until the building is complete and the areas occupied, at which time operation and maintenance shall be assumed by the Owner if Contract requirements for such equipment have been met. 6. Make an itemized list of each piece of equipment operated during occupancy, with the date operation commences; submit to the Architect. This list shall be the basis for the commencement of guaranteetwarranty periods on the equipment operated during the Owner's occupancy. 7. The Owner will pay for utility costs associated with occupancy during construction. 8. A Certificate of Occupancy will be obtained by the Owner. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 05.12-06 SUMMARY OF WORK Summary Permit Set 01010 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01027 VAIL, COLORADO UNIT PRICES SECTION 01027 - UNIT PRICES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. 1. A unit price is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Form as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services that will be added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by Change Order in the event the estimated quantities of work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. 2. Unit prices include all necessary material, overhead, profit and applicable taxes. 3. Refer to individual Sections for construction activities requiring the establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurements and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. B. A Unit Price Schedule is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials and methods described under each unit price. C. The Owner reserves the right to reject the Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices, and to have this work measured by an independent surveyor acceptable to the Contractor at the Owner's expense. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 UNIT PRICE SCHEDULE A. Item No. 1: 1. Description: Interior partitions. 2. Unit of Measurement: Cost per lineal foot of each type of partition used in the Project B. Item No. 2: 1. Description: Suspended gypsum board ceilings. 2 Unit of Measurement Cost per square foot, including suspension system and gypsum board, finished and painted. END OF SECTION 0407-06 Progress CD Set UNrr PRICES 01027-1 t A PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01250 VAIL, COLORADO CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES SECTION 01250 -CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. 1.02 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Proposed changes in the work that will require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time will be issued by the Architect, with a detailed description of the proposed change and supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications, if necessary. Bulletins issued by the Architect as a Proposal Request are for information only. Do not consider them instruction either to stop work in progress, or to execute the proposed change. 2. Unless otherwise indicated in the proposal request, within 20-days of receipt of the proposal request, submit to the Owner an estimate of cost necessary to execute the proposed change. a. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs, along with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the work will have on the Contract Time. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposed Change Orders (PCO): When latent or other unforseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Owner. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs along with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Comply with requirements in Section 01600 if the proposed change in the work requires the substitution of one product or system for a product or system specified. 5. Proposed Change Order Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 or similar as approved by the Owner. 1.03 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A Construction Change Directive: When the Owner and Contractor are not in total agreement on the terms of a Proposed Change Order, the Architect or Owner may issue a Construction Change Directive, Instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The Construction Change Directive will contain a complete description of the change in the work and designate the method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 0407-06 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES Progress CD Set 01250-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01250 VAIL, COLORADO CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES C. After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. 1.04 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. Upon the Owner's approval of a Proposed Change Order, the Contractor shall issue a Change Order for signatures of the Owner and Architect on AIA Form G701, as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES Progress CD Set 01250-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01290 VAIL, COLORADO PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 01290 • PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. General: Submit notarized Applications for Payment to the Architect in accordance with the schedule established by the General Conditions and the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. B. Format and Data Required: Submit itemized applications typed on ALA Document G702, "Application and Certificate for Payment; and Continuation Sheet G703. 1. Line items and dollar values shall be from the schedule of values accepted by the Owner. 2. Include names, categories of work, and amounts for Subcontractors. 3. Overhead and profit shall be a line item each month for the Contractor and Subcontractors on their G703 sheets. C. Preparation of Application for Each Progress Payment: 1. Application Form: a. Fill in required information, including that for Change Orders executed prior to the date submittal of application. b. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with the respective totals indicated on the Continuation Sheets. C. Execute certification with the signature of a person authorized to bind the contracting firm in such matters. 2. Continuation Sheets: a. Fill in total list of scheduled component items of work, with item number and the schedule dollar value for each item. b. Fill in the dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when work has been performed or products stored as approved. Round off values to nearest dollar, unless other- wise specified for the schedule of values. C. At the end of the Continuation Sheets list each Change Order executed prior to the date of submission. List by Change Order number, description, and breakdown of costs as for an original component item of work. D. Substantiating Data for Progress Payments: 1. When substantiating data are required, submit suitable information as specified in Section 01330 with a cover letter identifying: a. Project b. Application number and date. c. Detailed list of enclosures. d. For stored products: 1) Item number and identification as shown on application. 2) Specific description of product. 04-07.06 PAYMENT PROCEDURES Progress CD Set 01290-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR.SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01290 VAIL, COLORADO PAYMENT PROCEDURES 2. Submit one copy of data and cover letter for each copy of application. E. Preparation of Application for Final Payment: 1. FBI in application form as specified for progress payments. 2. Use Continuation Sheets for presenting the final statement of accounting. F. Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit Applications for Payment to the Owner at the times stipulated in the Agreement. 2. Number. Five copies of each application. 1.02 CHANGE ORDERS A. Backup data submitted with Applications for Payment may be used as basis for approving or rejecting casts submitted in Change Orders. B. Submit an estimated cost breakdown for each Change Order request. C. Limits of markup for Change Order costs shall be as specified in the Supplementary Conditions or as otherwise stipulated in the Agreement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 0407-06 PAYMENT PROCEDURES Progress CD Set 01290 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01310 VAIL, COLORADO PROJECT COORDINATION SECTION 01310 • PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section specifies administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for Project coordination including, but not necessarily limited to: 1. Coordination. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. General installation provisions. 4. Cleaning and protection. 5. Correlation and intent of the Contract Documents - Refer to section 01010 Summary of Work. 1.02 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction activities included under various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections of the Specifications that are dependent upon each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Where installation of one part of the work is dependent on installation of other components, either before or after its own installation, schedule construction activities in the sequence required to obtain the best results. 2. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate Contractors where coordination of their work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of the work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. 3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Progress meetings. 5. Project Close-out activities. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare and submit coordination Drawings where close and careful coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated off-site by separate entities, and where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components. 1. Show the interrelationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. 05.12.06 PROJECT COORDINATION Summary Perms Set 01310.1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01310 VAIL, COLORADO PROJECT COORDINATION 2. Indicate required installation sequences. 3. Comply with requirements contained in Section 01330. 4. Refer to Division 15 and Division 16 for specific coordination Drawing requirements for Mechanical and electrical installations. B. Staff Names: Within 15 days of Notice to Proceed, submit a list of the Contractor's principal staff assignments, including the Project Manager, Superintendent, and other personnel in attendance at the site; identify individuals, their duties and responsibilities; list their addresses and telephone numbers. Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room, the temporary field office, and each temporary telephone. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS A. General: The provisions in this Article are in addition to and are intended to supplement specific installation requirements specified in other Sections. B. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents. D. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective items. E. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing work. Secure work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed work. Arrange joints in exposed work to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the Architect for final decision. G. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation. H. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensure the best possible results. Isolate each part of the completed construction from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. J. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install individual components at standard mounting heights recognized within the industry for the particular application indicated. Refer questionable mounting height decisions to the Architect for final decision. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. B. Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction 05.12-06 PROJECT COORDINATION Summary Pemit Set 01310.2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01310 VAIL, COLORADO PROJECT COORDINATION period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction activities to ensure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. END OF SECTION 05-12.06 PROJECT COORDINATION Summary Permit Set 01310 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01312 VAIL, COLORADO PROJECT MEETINGS SECTION 01312 - PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings including but not limited to: 1. Pre-Construction Conference. 2. Pre-Installation Conferences. 3. Coordination Meetings. 4. Progress Meetings. 1.02 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Schedule a pre-construction conference and organizational meeting at the Project site or other convenient location no later than 15-days after execution of the Agreement and prior to commencement of construction activities. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. B. Contractor shall take and distribute meeting notes to the attendees. Attendees taking exception to any item on the meeting notes shall notify the Contractor within 3-days following receipt C. Attendees: The Owner's Representative, Architect and their consultants, the Contractor and its superintendent, major subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers and other concerned parties shall each be represented at the conference by persons familiar with and authorized. to conclude matters relating to the work. D. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress including such topics as: 1. Tentative construction schedule. 2. Critical work sequencing. 3. Designation of responsible personnel. 4. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. 5. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. 6. Distribution of Contract Documents. 7. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 8. Preparation of record documents. 9. Use of the premises. 10. Office, work and storage areas. 11. Equipment deliveries and priorities. 12. Security. 13. Housekeeping. 14. Working hours. 007-06 Progress CD Set c PROJECT MEETINGS 01312-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01312 VAIL, COLORADO PROJECT MEETINGS 1.03 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. Conduct a pre-installation conference at the site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. The Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation, and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise the Architect of scheduled meeting dates. B. Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under considera- tion at each pre-installation conference, including requirements for: 1. Contract Documents. 2. Options. 3. Related Change Orders. • 4. Purchases. 5. Deliveries. 6. Shop Drawings, Product Data and quality control Samples. 7. Possible conflicts. 8. Compatibility problems. 9. Time schedules. 10. Weather limitations. 11. Manufacturer's recommendations. V. Compatibility of materials. 13. Acceptability of substrates. 14. Temporary facilities. 15. Space and access limitations. 16. Governing regulations. 17. Safety. 18. Inspection and testing requirements. 19. Required performance results. 20. Recording requirements. 21. Protection. C. Record significant discussions and agreements and disagreements of each conference, along with the approved schedule. Distribute the record of the meeting to everyone concerned, promptly, including the Owner's Representative and Architect. D. Do not proceed if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date. 04-07-06 PROJECT MEETINGS Progress CD Set 01312-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01312 VAIL, COLORADO PROJECT MEETINGS 1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Conduct progress meetings at the Project site at regularly scheduled intervals. Notify the Architect of scheduled meeting dates. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of the payment request. B. Attendees: In addition to Owner's Representafive and Architect, each subcontractor, supplier or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings by persons familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to progress. C. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress, Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the current status of the Project. D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor's Construction Schedule, whether on Erne or ahead or behind schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. E. Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including such items as: 1. Interface requirements. 2. Time. 3. Sequences. 4. Deliveries. 5. Off-site fabrication problems. 6. Access. 7. Site utilization. 8. Temporary facilities and services. 9. Hours of work. 10. Hazards and risks. 11. Housekeeping. 12. Quality and work standards. 13. Change Orders. 14. Documentation of information for payment requests. F. Reporting: Take and distribute copies of minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties who should have been present no later than 3-days after each progress meeting date. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report G. Schedule Updating: Revise the construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used. 0407-06 PROJECT MEETINGS Progress CD Set 01312-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01312 VAIL, COLORADO PROJECT MEETINGS PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 PROJECT MEETINGS Progress CD Set 01312 - 4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01330 fi VAIL, COLORADO SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Make all submittals to the Architect. The Architect with review the submital for compliance with the Constriction Documents. B. Timing: 1. Make submittals within the specified time. 2. Make submittals in advance of scheduled dates of installation to provide time for reviews, for securing necessary approvals, for possible revision and re-submittal, and for placing orders and securing delivery. C. Identification: 1. Identify each submittal and re-submittal with the following information: a. Project name and address as they appear in the Contract Documents. b. Contract name. C. Contractor's name and address. d. Date of submission. 2. Identify each submittal with the following additional identification: a. Contractor's stamp with initials or signature, certifying to review and approval of submittal, compliance with Contract Documents, and verification of field measurements. b. Specification Section number - start with #1 for Section's first submittal and continue sequentially thru all submittals in each Section. C. Drawing and Specification Section numbers to which the submittal applies. d. Subcontractor's or supplier's name and address. e. Name and telephone number of the individual to contact for additional information regar*hg the submittal. f. Whether it is an original submittal or a re-submittal. g. Date of submission. h. Completion checklist derived from the submittal requirements fisted in each Section of these Specifications. D. Quantity: To be established at the Pre-construction Conference. E. Coordination of Submittals: 1. General: Prior to submittal to the Architect, coordinate material, including the following procedures: a. Determine and verify field dimensions and conditions, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data. b. Coordinate as required with others providing work and public agencies involved. 0¢07-06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Progress CD Set 01330-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01330 VAIL, COLORADO SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES C. Secure necessary approvals from public agencies and others and signify by stamp, or other means. d. Unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Architect, make submittals in groups containing associated items. F. Completeness: Submittals shall be complete. Partial submittals or submittals stamped but not reviewed by the Contractor will be returned. Schedule demands, procurement delays, long lead time requirements, or other similar issues shall not give reason for incomplete, partial, fractured or un-reviewed submittals. 1.02 SCHEDULES A General: Submit required schedules prior to submitting first Application for Payment, unless otherwise specified. B. Progress Schedule: 1. Submit floppy disk and printout using IBM PC compatible computer-generated program from "Primave- ra Project Planner' or compatible system, such as "Microsoft Project Planner". Submit floppy disk and printout no later than 15-calendar days after issuance of Notice to Proceed. 2. Form: Network diagram CPM, or other form acceptable to the Owner. 3. Maximum Sheet Size: 24-inches x 36-inches. 4. If Progress Schedule requires more than one sheet, submit summary sheet in addition. 5. Include subcontractors' input in formulating a realistic construction schedule. 6. Coordinate with submittal schedule. 7. Content: a. Complete sequence of construction by activity, with number of activities adequate to explain the various stages of construction. b. Dated for beginning and completion of each major construction element. t~ Projected percentage of completion for each element, as of the first day of the month. d. Activities shall be cost- and manpower-loaded. 8. Updated Progress Schedule: a. Submit updated disk and printout periodically, as appropriate to the progress of the work, but not less often than with each Application for Payment b. Fumish accompanying report as needed to explain changes. C. Distribute copies as required for initial distribution. C. Proposed Cash-Flow Schedule: Submit with Progress Schedule. D. Schedule of Values: 1. Form and Content a. Type Schedule on 8.112-inch x 11-inch white paper, Contractors standard forms and automated printout will be considered for approval upon request. b. List the installed value of the component parts of the work broken down into sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction. 0407-06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Progress CD Set 01330-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01330 VAIL, COLORADO SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES C. Identify each fine item with the number and title of the respective Specification Section. d. For each major line item list sub-values of products or operations under the item. e. For various portions of the work: 1) Include a separate One item for amount of the overhead and profit drawn on a monthly basis. 2) For portions of work in excess of ten thousand dollars ($10,000) in cost, identify labor and material costs. f. The sum of values listed in the schedule plus overhead and profit shall equal the total Contract Sum. 2. Subschedule of Unit Material Costs: a. Submit for stored products on which progress payments will be requested. b. The form of submittal shall parallel that of the schedule of values, with each item identified the same as the line item in the schedule of values. C. The unit quantity for bulk materials shall include an allowance for normal waste. d. The unit values for the materials shall be broken down into: 1) Cost of the material, delivered and unloaded at the site, with applicable taxes paid. 2) installation costs. e. The installed unit value multiplied by the quantity listed shall equal the costof that item in the schedule of values. E. Submittal Schedule: Organize schedule to allow reasonable and adequate review times and sequencing by the Architect and Owner. Include submittal date for each submittal required by the Contract Documents. No action will be taken on such submittals without prior receipt, review; and acceptance of Submittal Schedule. 1. Submit within 15-calendar days after award of Contract, for the Architect's review. 2. Instruct recipients to promptly report problems anticipated by dates or sequences shown in the schedule. 3. Update submittal schedule and report status at each progress meeting. 1.03 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI'S) A. In the event a Contractor determines that some portion of the Contract Documents requires clarification or interpretation by the Architect, the Contractor shall submit a Request for Information (RFI) in writing to the Architect. Requests for information may only be submitted by the Contractor and shall only be submitted on the Request for Information Forms approved by the Architect. The Contractor shall dearly and concisely set forth the issue for which clarification or interpretation is sought and why a response is needed from the Architect. In the RFI, set forth an interpretation or understanding of the requirement along with reasons why such an understanding was reached. B. The Architect will review all RFI's to determine whether they are RFPs within the meaning of this term. If the Architect determines that the document is not an RFI request, it will be returned to the Contractor, un-reviewed as to content, for re-submittal on the proper form and in the proper manner. 04-07-06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Progress CD Set 01330-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01330 VAIL, COLORADO SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES C. Responses to RFI's will be issued within 5 working days of receipt unless the Architect determines that a longer time is required to provide an adequate response. If a longer time is determined to be required, the Architect will, within 5 working days of receipt of the request, notify the Contractor of the anticipated response time. If the Contractor submits a RFI on an activity with 5 working days or less of float on the current project schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any time extension due to the time It takes the Architect to respond to the RFI provided the Architect responds within the 5 working days. D. Responses from the Architect will not change any requirement of the Contract Documents. In the event the Contractor believes that a response to a RF I will cause a change to the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately give written notice to the Architect stating that the Contractor considers the response to be a Change Order. Failure to give such written notice immediately shall waive the Contractor's right to seek additional time or cost under the Changes article of the General Conditions. E. Drawing/Plan Clarification: An answer from the Architect in response to an inquiry from the Contractor, intended to make some requirement(s) of the drawings dearly understood. Drawing/plan clarifications may be sketches, drawings, or in narrative form and will not change any requirements of the drawings. F. Project Communications: Routine written communications between the Architect and Contractor shall be in writing, field memo, e-mail, or FAX Such communications shall not be identified as RFI's.. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES AND OTHER SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Submit as required by the various Specification Sections. Do not submit shop drawings, product data, samples or other submittals unless specifically required. 2. Submit in accordance with the accepted submittal schedule. 3. Submit in the manner and quantities established at the Pre-construction Conference. 4. Allow a minimum of 15-working days for processing by the Architect and by the Architects Consultants or the Owner's consultants. Some submittals may require more processing time based upon consultant's input and the complexity of the submittal. If certain submittals are critical, they shall be identified at time of submission to assure priority review. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit one reproducible Xerox or bond original to the Architect 2. Submitted shop drawing shall bear the Contractor's stamp indicating review and approval. Shop drawings shall bear indication the Contractor has actually performed a detailed review. 3. The Architect will review the Shop Drawings and forward to his consultants, or the Owner's oonsultarits, as applicable for final review. The Architect or appropriate consultant will mark the shop drawings with required revisions, and stamp and return the shop drawings to the Contractor for distribution. 4. Review the returned shop drawings and take appropriate action as indicated. 5. Revise and resubmit rejected submittals. 6. The Architect or his consultants, or the Owner's consultants, as applicable, will review the re-submittal and take action, as appropriate, in the same manner as for the original submittal. 7. As with the original submittal, review the returned shop drawings and take appropriate action as indicated. Continue to resubmit and review until final action is taken by the Architect or his consultants, or the Owner's consultants, as applicable. 8. Following final action by the Architect or his consultants, or the Owner's consultants, as applicable, make copies and distribute as required for accomplishment and inspection of the indicated work. 007-06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Progress CD Set 01330-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01330 VAIL, COLORADO SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 9. The Architect or his consultants, or the Owner's consultants, as applicable, may review at their discretion up to one resubmittal and take action, as appropriate, in the same manner as for the original submittal. If more than one resubmittal is required, any associated costs as a result of additional reviews shall be processed as a deductive Change Order in accordance with the General Conditions. 10. Only those Shop Drawings that bear stamps showing final review of the Architect or Architect's consultants, or the Owner's consultants, as applicable, shall be used. 11. Reproduction and Mailing Costs: Pay the reproduction and mailing costs of the shop drawings and all prints. 12. Architect, Consultants, Owner, and Contractor will make copies as required for their use and records. C. Product Data: Submit in the quantity established at the Pre-construction Conference, together with two copies each of brochures, catalog cuts, and similar material. 2. Review, processing, and distribution of Product Data will be the same as for Shop Drawings. D. Samples: 1. Submit in the size specified in the individual Specification Sections, and in the quantity required to be returned, together with one additional Sample, which will be retained by the Architect or the Architects consultants, or the Owner's consultants, as applicable. 2. Where Samples have natural variations in texture, color, or dimension, submit Samples showing the full range of variation. 3. Ship samples to the Architect for distribution to the Architect's consultants or Owner's consultant, as applicable. E. Other Submittals: Submit as specified in the individual Specification Sections. 1.05 PATTERNS AND COLORS A. Unless the exact pattern and color of a product are indicated in the Contract Documents, submit accurate color and pattern charts to the Architect for review and selection. 1.06 CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE A. Submit certificates of compliance with the associated Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples required for the product. B. Submit on 8-1124nch x 11-inch white paper. C. The Architect will retain the certificates of compliance; no approval reply is intended. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 04-07M SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Progress CD Set 01330-5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01450 VAIL, COLORADO QUALITY CONTROL SECTION 01450 - QUALITY CONTROL PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS A. Soils Engineer: A geotechnical engineer, licensed in the State of Colorado, retained and paid by the Owner to perform services as specified. B. Testing Laboratory: An independent commercial testing organization, retained and paid per the terms of the Owner-Contractor Agreement to perform tests and report on work as specified and as required. 1.02 SOILS ENGINEER A. Services of a Soils Engineer are required for work specified in other Sections. 1.03 TESTING LABORATORY A. General: Services of a Testing Laboratory are required for work specified in other Sections. B. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Cooperate with Testing Laboratory personnel. 2. Secure and deliver to the Testing Laboratory adequate quantities of representational samples of materials proposed for use for which testing is required. 3. Furnish copies of product test reports as required. 4. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to work to be tested. b. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to be tested. C. To facilitate inspections and tests. d. For storage and curing of test samples. 5. Notify the Architect sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for Testing Laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. a. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse the Owner for the Testing Laboratory personnel and travel expenses incurred. 1.04 TEST REPORTS A. The Testing Laboratory Y40 distribute reports as follows: 1. Architect: One copy. 2. Applicable Consultant: One copy. 3. Owner's Representative: One copy. 4. Number of copies for Contractor and supplier will be determined upon commencement of the work. 5. City and state agencies as appropriate. 0407.06 QUALITY CONTROL Progress CD Set 01450-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01450 VAIL, COLORADO QUALITY CONTROL 1.05 RETESTING A If the Architect or Owner's Representative have reasonable doubt that materials comply with Specification requirements, additional tests shall be made as directed. If additional tests establish that materials comply with Specification requirements, costs for such tests will be paid by the Owner. 2. If additional tests establish that materials do no comply with Specification requirements, costs for such tests shall be paid by the Contractor. B. The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of required inspections, tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicated compliance with the Contract Documents. Cost of retesting shall be paid for by the Contractor. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 0407-06 QUALITY CONTROL Progress CD Set 01450-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01500 VAIL, COLORADO TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish, install, and maintain temporary utilities as required to perform the work. B. Materials, installation, and maintenance of temporary utilities shall be in compliance with applicable regulatory requirements. C. Remove temporary utilities, including associated materials and equipment when no longer required. Restore and recondition areas of the site damaged or disturbed by temporary utilities or their installation. Remove and property dispose of debris resulting from removal and reconditioning operations. 1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Temporary Electric Power and Lighting: 1. Arrange with electric utility service company to provide service for power and lighting. Pay the costs for service and for power used. 2. Distribute electric power and lighting. 3. Provide lighting and convenience outlets in the temporary structures, and as otherwise required for the performance of the work. B. Temporary Heat and Ventilation: Pay the costs of installation, maintenance, operation, and removal of temporary heat and ventilation, including costs for fuel consumed, required for the performance of the work. If permanently installed equipment is used, do not operate without filters, and replace filters and clean grills and registers before Contract Closeout C. Temporary Water. 1. Arrange with utility service company to provide temporary water service and distribution; pay the costs for service and for water used. 2. Following permanent service installation, temporary water may be taken from permanent source. 3. Instal branch piping with taps located so that water for construction purposes is available throughout the work by the use of hoses. 4. Make potable water available for human consumption. D. Temporary Sanitary Facilities: Locate as approved by the Owner. Maintain in a neat, sanitary condition, adequately supplied. E. Temporary Telephone Service: 1. Arrange with local telephone service company for the following telephone service for use of construction personnel and employees. a. One telephone and dedicated FAX machine tine in Contractor's field office. b. Provide a telephone capable of adequately conducting conference calls within the conference roan. C. Other telephones, including coin-operated telephone for general use, at the option of the Contractor, or as required by regulatory requirements. d. One DSL line for intemet access. g4.07-06 TEMPORARYFACILITIES AND CONTROLS Progress CD Set 01500-1 -t '3JECT #02028 ,,R SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01500 J: VAIL, COLORADO TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 2. Pay costs for telephone installation, maintenance, service, and removal. F. Temporary Fire Protection: Provide and maintain fire extinguishers, fire hoses, and other equipment necessary for proper fire protection during the progress of the work. Equipment shall be designed for fire protection only. Comply with requirements contained in the fire protection plan and report. 1.03 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Plant and Equipment Furnish, operate, and maintain a complete plant for fabricating, handling, conveying, installing, and erecting work and materials required under the Contrail. Include hoists and conveyances for transporting workers and transporting and placing materials; debris chutes; and tools, appliances, power equipment, and other required items. Furnish, arrange, and set up the plant to facilitate the proper and timely performance of the work. 2. Maintain plant and equipment in safe operating condition. Repair damages due to the use of defective plant and equipment, at no increase in Contract Sum. 1.04 BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES A. Provide and maintain suitable temporary barriers as required to prevent public entry; protect the work and existing facilities, persons, and trees and plants from damage or injury from construction operations. B. Tree and Plant Protection: 1. Preserve and protect existing trees and plants not designated or required to be removed, and those adjacent to the site. 2. Consult with the Owner prior to removal of roots and branches which interfere with construction operations. 3. Provide barriers to a minimum height of 6'-0' around each tree and plant, or around groups in the proximity of construction operations. 4. Prohibit vehicular traffic or parking, storage of materials or products, prevent dumping of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids or ponding or continuous running water within drip lines. 5. Supervise excavating, grading, and filling, and subsequent operations to prevent damage. 6. Replace, or suitably repair trees and plants designated to remain that are damaged or destroyed as a result of construction operations, at no increase in Contract Sum. 7. Remove and replace sol that has been contaminated during the performance of the work by materials harmful to trees and plants, at no increase in Contract Sum. 1.05 SECURITY A. Secure, maintain, and protect the work, stored materials, equipment, and temporary facilities until time of acceptance, or such earlier time as Owner may choose to assume such responsibility. B. Instal temporary enclosure of partially completed construction areas to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism and theft. C. Secure temporary storage areas as required to prevent theft. 1.06 TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Noise and Vibration Control: Comply with applicable regulatory requirements for the operation of powered construction equipment. 04.07.06 TEMPORARYFACILMES AND CONTROLS Pmgress CD Set 01500 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01500 VAIL, COLORADO TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 2. Equipment and impact tools shall have intake and exhaust mufflers. 3. Secure written permission from Owner at least three working days prior to using noisy and vibratory equipment, such as jack-hammers, concrete saws, impact tools, and high frequency electrical equipment. 4. Cooperate with Owner if the use of noisy equipment becomes objectionable. B. Dust and Dirt Control: 1. Conduct construction operations to prevent windblown dust and dirt from interfering with the progress of the work. 2. Periodically water exterior construction areas as required to minimize the generation of dust and dirt. 3. Hauling equipment and trucks carrying bads of soil and debris shall have their loads sprayed with water or covered with tarpaulins. 4. Prevent dust and dirt from accumulating on walks, roadways, parking areas, and planting, and from washing into sewer and storm drains. C. Water Control: Do not permit surface or subsurface water, and other liquids to accumulate on or in areas adjacent to the Project site. Should such conditions be encountered or develop, control the water, or other liquid, and suitably dispose of by means of temporary pumps, piping, drainage lines, troughs, ditches, dams, or other methods. D. Pollution Control: No burning of refuse, debris, or other materials will be permitted on or in the vicinity of the Project site. 2. Comply with regulatory requirements and antipollution ordinances during the performance of demolition, construction and disposal operations. 1.07 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. Provide and maintain a Project identification sign of the size, design, text, and colors designated by the Owner, locate sign as directed. B. Signs other than the specified Project sign will not be permitted, unless otherwise approved in advance by the Owner. C. Materials: 1. Structure and Framing: Structurally sound, new or used wood or metal; wood shall be nominal 24nch x 4-inch minimum size. 2. Sign Surface: Minimum 3144nch exterior grade plywood. 3. Rough Hardware: Galvanized. D. Fabrication: 1. Fabricate to provide smooth, even surface for painting. 2. Size: As indicated or directed. 3. Paint exposed surfaces of supports, framing, and surface material with one coat of primer and one coat of finish paint. 4. Text and Graphics: As directed by the Owner. 04-07-06 TEMPORARYFACILITIES AND CONTROLS Progress CD Set 01500-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01500 VAIL, COLORADO TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.08 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. Space within an exsting building may be used as a field office if arranged with and approved in advance by the Owner's Representative. B. If existing space is inadequate, furnish, install, and maintain field offices and sheds in accordance with the Owner-Contractor Agreement. 1. Provide a separate office for the Owner's Representative and the Architects Representative. 2. Construct, install, and maintain field offices and sheds in compliance with applicable regulatory requirements. 3. Construction shall be structurally sound, weathertight, with floors raised above the ground, sturdy doors with provisions for locking, temperature transmission resistance compatible with occupancy and storage requirements, and neat appearance maintained throughout duration of work. 4. Portable or mobile buildings complying with the specified requirements may be used. 5. Obtain Owner's approval of locations for field offices and storage sheds prior to commencing site preparation for the structures. 6. Construct field offices and sheds on proper foundations, and provide connections for utility services. Fill and grade sites for field offices and storage sheds to facilitate surface drainage. 7. Remove field offices and sheds from the site as soon as the progress of the work permits. Remove foundations, steps, landings, utility services and contents. Grade and restore portions of the site occupied by the temporary structures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 04-07.06 TEMPORARYFACILMES AND CONTROLS Progress CD Set 01500- 4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS BILTMORE HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Material and equipment incorporated in the work shall be: 1. New, unless otherwise specified. 2. In a condition acceptable t0 the Architect and Owner's Representative. 3. Suitable for the intended use. 4. In conformance with EPA codes and regulations and applicable air quality control district. B. No material or equipment shall be used for purposes other than that for which designed or specified. C. No material shall contain asbestos. D. No materials or products shall contain formaldehyde in excess of the amount recommended by applicable department of health, or other regulatory agencies. 1.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Deliver manufactured products in the manufacturers' original unbroken containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. B. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and reviewed submittals, and verify that products are properly protected and undamaged. C. Handle products and packages in a manner to avoid soiling or damaging. D. Promptly remove damaged or defective products from the site, and replace at no increase in Contract Sum. 1.03 STORAGE A. Store manufactured products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weathertight enclosures. 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges specified by the manufacturers. B. Exterior Storage: 1. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids, to prevent soiling and staining. 2. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings; provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. 3. Store loose granular material in a well drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter. C. Arrange storage to facilitate inspection. D. Periodically inspect stored products to assure that specified conditions are maintained and the products are free from damage or deterioration. 04-07-06 Progress CD Set PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS BILTMORE HOTELS & RESORTS VAII r l ORADO SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS E. Protection after Installation: Provide coverings necessary to protect installed products from damage due to traffic or construction operations. Remove coverings when no longer needed. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions for interior equipment and finish products in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 0407-06 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-2 Progress CD Se! PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01630 VAIL, COLORADO PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES SECTION 01630 - PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish and install products specified, under options and conditions for substitutions stated in this Section. 1.02 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS A. For products specified only by reference standard, select product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of products and manufacturers named which complies with Specification. C. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers, submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or manufacturer which is not specifically named. D. Wherever catalogue numbers and specific brands or trade names are listed as the only product specified in conjunction with material or equipment required by the Specifications, no substitutions will be considered. 1.03 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Catalog numbers and specific brands or trade names are used in conjunction wit material and equipment required by the Specifications to establish the standard of quality, utility, and appearance required. Substitutions which are equal in quality, utility, and appearance to those specified may be accepted subject to the following provisions: 1. All substitutions must be accepted in writing by the Owner's Representative. 2. The determination of the Architect after consultation with the Owner shall be final. 3. Contractor shall submit to tie Owner's Representative, within 15 business days after the date of commencement specified in the Notice to Proceed, a typewritten list containing a description of each substitute material or equipment a. After end of that period, a request of substitution will be considered only in case of product unavailability or other conditions beyond the control of Contractor. b. Product unavailability shall be verified in writing by manufacturer. 4. Failure of Contractor to submit proposed substitutions for approval in the manner described above and within the time prescribed shall be sufficient cause for disapproval by the Architect of any substitutions otherwise proposed. 5. Contractor shall provide supporting data as specified in Paragraph 1.04.6. 6. The Owner's Representative will accept, in writing, proposed substitutions that are in Architect's opinion equal in quality, utility, and appearance to the material or equipment specified. 7. Such acceptance shall not relieve Contractor from complying with the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. 0447-06 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Pmgress CD Set 01630-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 01630 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 8. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs of any changes resulting from Contractor's proposed substitution which affect other parts of the work or the work of Separate Contractors, including the cost of the Architect's additional services, testing, permits thereby made necessary. B. Requests for substitutions will only be considered if the Contractor submits the following: 1. Complete technical data including drawings, performance specifications, samples, and test reports of the article proposed for substitution; and any additional information required by the Owner's Representative. 2. Data described in Subparagraph B.1 for the specified item for which substitution is proposed. 3. Complete breakdown of costs, which shall include savings generated by the proposed substitution and shall indicate the amount, if any, to be deducted from the Contract Sum if the proposed substitution is accepted. Only substitutions that provide a credit to the Owner will be considered. 4. Statement by the Contractor that the proposed substitution is in full compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and Applicable Code Requirement. 5. List of other trades, if any, which may be affected by the substitution. 6. If the proposed substitution requires that portions of the Project be redesigned or construction be removed in order to accommodate the substituted item, submit design and engineering calculations prepared by a properly licensed design professional. The Contractor shall bear all costs resulting from the substitution. C. Submit separate request for each substitution. Support each request with: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with requirements stated in Contract Documents. a. Product identification including manufacture's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature; identify: 1) Products description. 2) Reference standards. 3) Performance and test data. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and date of each installation. 2. Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified; list significant variations. 3. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. 4. Any effect of substitution on separate contracts. 5. List of changes required on other work or products. 6. Accurate cost data comparing proposed substitution with product specified. Only substitutions that provide a credit to the Owner will be considered. J 04-07M PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Progress CD Set 01630 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01630 VAIL, COLORADO PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 7. Designation of required license fees or royalties. 8. Designation of availability of maintenance services, sources of replacement materials. D. Substitutions will not be considered for acceptance when: 1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without a formal request from Contractor. 2. They are requested directly by a subcontractor or supplier. 3. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. 4. Insufficient information is submitted. E. Availability of Specified Items: 1. Verify prior to bidding that all specified items will be available in time for installation during orderly and timely progress of the work. 2. In the event specified item or items will not be so available, notify the Architect prior to receipt of bids. 3. Costs of delays because of non-availability of specified items, when such delays could have been avoided by the Contractor, will be bads-charged as necessary and shall not be bome by the Owner. F. Substitutions shall be considered as a Change Order and be approved by the Owner prior to fabrication or use. 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION A. In making a formal request for substitution, Contractor represents that 1. He has investigated proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 2. He wig provide same warranties for substitution as for product specified. 3. He wig coordinate instaaation of accepted substitution into the work and will make such changes as may be required for the work to be complete in all respects. 4. He waives claims for additional costs caused by substitution which may subsequently become apparent PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 PRODUCT SUBSTTMJTION PROCEDURES Progress CD Set 01630 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01640 VAIL, COLORADO OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT SECTION 01640 - OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for the following: 1. OFCI Equipment Items: Provide utility and rough-ins and installing Owner-furnished equipment 2. OF01 Equipment Items: Provide utility and rough-ins as required for Owner-furnished and installed equipment 1.02 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and handle products upright and in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. B. Protect equipment items as required to prevent damage during storage and construction. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Contractors Responsibili ies: 1. Verify mounting and utility requirements for specified equipment items. 2. Provide mounting and utility rough-in for equipment items where required, regardless of equipment responsibility designation. a. Rough-in locations, sizes, capacities, and similar type items shall be as indicated and required by product manufacturer. b. If the Owner substitutes items similar to those scheduled, there shall be no change in rough-in cost, unless substitution occurs after rough4n has been completed or rough-in involves other mounting requirements, utilities or utilities of different capacity from that required by item originally specified. 3. For equipment designated to be Owner furnished, the Owner will make available manulac6uers literature or information and shop drawings showing required mounting and rough-in information. B. Equipment furnished by the Owner, installed by the Contractor (OFCI). 1. General: The Owner and the Contractor will coordinate deliveries of equipment to coincide with construction schedule. 2. The Owner mil fumish specified equipment with rough-in dimensions and dwaderistics indicated and tailgate dealer equipment to the site. 3. The Contractor Shall: a. Receive equipment at site and give written receipt at time of delivery, noting vtsthle defects or omissions; if such declaration is not given, the Contractor shall assume responsrbility for such defects and omissions. 04-07-06 OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT Progress CD Set 01640-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL. COLORADO SECTION 01640 OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT b. Store equipment until ready for installation and protect from loss and damage. C. Uncrate, assemble, and set in place. d. Provide required backing plates. e. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers recommendations, instnxtions, and shop drawings under supervision of manufacturers representative where specified, supplying labor and material required and making mechanical, plumbing, and electrical connections required to operate equipment C. Compatibility with Space and Service Requirements: 1. Equipment items shall be compatible with space limitations indicated and With mechanical and electrical services indicated and specified in other Sections. 2. Modifications to equipment items required to conform with space limitations or with utility services specified for rough-in shall not cause additional cost to the Owner. D. Manufacturers printed descriptions, specifications, and instructions shall govem the work unless specifically indicated or otherwise specified. E. Specifications, standards, tests, and recommended methods cited in this Section to govern use of items of equipment shall also govern component parts. 2.02 OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT A. Owner-fumished equipment items are indicated in the documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Install equipment items in accordance With the manufacturers' instructions. B. Set equipment items securely in place, rigidly or flexibly mounted in accordance With manufacturers directions. C. Securely attach to backing plates as required. D. Where equipment items are welded to embeds or similar installed supports, welding when exposed in the oompleted work, shall be smooth, flush and imperceptible. E. Make electrical and mechanical connections as Indicated and required. F. Touch-up and restore damaged or defaced finishes. 3.02 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Repair or replace items not acceptable to the Architect B. Upon completion of installation, dean equipment items in accordance With manufacturers' recommendations, and protect from damage until final acceptance of the work. J 04-07-06 OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT Progress CD Set 01640 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 01640 OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT 3.03 TESTING A. Contractor-installed equipment shall be tested after installation in the presence of the Owner, Architect, and equipment manufacturer. B. Correct defects or replace and retest as required. Repairs, replacement, and re-testing shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 0407-06 OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT Progress CD Set 01640-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01722 VAIL, COLORADO FIELD ENGINEERING SECTION 01722 - FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field engineering services. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: Certificate signed by land surveyor or. engineering certifying that the location and elevation of improvements comply with Contract Documents. B. Project Record Documents: Furnish a record of work performed and record survey data as specified in Sections 01330 and 01780. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surveyor. Engage a Registered Land Surveyor registered in the State of Colorado, to perform land surveying services required. B. Engineer: Engage a Professional Engineer of the discipline required, registered in the State of Colorado to perform required engineering services. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. The Owner will identify existing control points and property line comer stakes. B. Verify layout information indicated, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks before proceeding to layout the work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve permanent reference points during construction. Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without prior written approval. Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points, or requirements to relocate reference points because of necessary changes in grades or locations. 2. Promptly replace lost or destroyed project control points. Base replacements on the original survey control points. 3. Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced to data established by survey control points. C. Eoasting Utilities and Equipment: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction. Prior to construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer and water service piping. 3.02 PERFORMANCE A. Working from lines and levels established by the property survey, establish benchmarks and markers to set fines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to properly locate each element of the Project Calculate and measure required dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to determine dimensions. 04.07.06 FIELD ENGINEERING Progress CD Set 01772-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01722 VAIL, COLORADO FIELD ENGINEERING Advise entities engaged in construction activities, of marked lines and levels provided for their use. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level and plumb. Surveyor's Log: Maintain a surveyor's log of control and other survey work. Make this log available for reference. Record deviations from required lines and levels, and advise the Architect when deviations that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected. On Project Record Drawings, record deviations that are accepted and not corrected. Upon completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles and elevations of construction and sitework. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, stakes for grading, fiti and topsoil placement, utility slopes and invert elevations by instrumentation and similar appropriate means. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and layout batter boards for structures, building foundations, column grids and locations, floor levels and control lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical work. E. Existing Utilities: Fumish information necessary to adjust, move or relocate existing structures, utility poles, fines, services or other appurtenances located in, or affected by construction. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 0407-06 FIELD ENGINEERING Progress CD Set 01722-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01740 VAII., COLORADO CLEANING SECTION 01740 - CLEANING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Perform cleaning and disposal operations during the progress and completion of the work. B. Cleaning for specific products or work is specified in the individual Specification Sections. 1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with applicable regulatory requirements during cleaning and disposal operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Use cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property or cause damage to products. B. Use cleaning materials and methods recommended by the manufacturers of the products to be cleaned. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Project site and construction areas shall be maintained dean and orderly to the Owner's satisfaction. Perform cleaning operations as required during construction to prevent accumulations of dust, dirt, soil, and debris. 3.02 DUST CONTROL A. Clean interior spaces prior to the start of finish painting and the application of other finishes, and continue cleaning as required until such work is completed. B. Schedule cleaning operations to prevent dust and other contaminants from adhering to wet or newly finished surfaces. 3.03 FINAL CLEANING A. Remove dust, dirt, grease, stains, fingerprints, labels, spilled and spattered, and other materials from interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view. B. Wash and shine glazing and mirrors. C. Polish glossy surfaces to a dear shine. D. Venttiating Systems: Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters of units operated during construction. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils of units operated during construction. E. Vacuum and wipe insides of electrical panels and cabinetwork. F. Broom dean interior spaces. G. Broom dean exterior paving. H. Rake dean ground surfaces. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 CLEANING Progress CD Set 01740-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 01780 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS In addition to the previously specified requirements for record drawings: 1) Keep up to date during the entire progress of the work, and make available to the Architect. 2) Furnish additional drawings necessary for clarification. 3) Record deviations from the sizes, locations, and other features of installations shown in the Contract Documents. 4) Establish locations of underground work by dimensions to column Ines of walls, locating toms, and by referenced centerline or invert elevations and rates of fall. 5) Give sufficient information to locate work concealed in the Building. 6) Drawing to Scale: a) Locate main runs of piping, conduit, ductwork, and similar items by di- mensions. b) Locate other items either by dimensions or in relation to spaces within the building. 2. Furnish reproducible record drawings, made from final Shop Drawings, updated to show actual conditions, for specified work. D. "As-Built" Drawings: At time of acceptance of the work and prior to final payment, using the record drawings for reference, prepare "As-Bulr drawings on permanent, reproducible prints. 2. Employ a professional draftsman to prepare the "As-Built" drawings from the record drawings; record information in ink. E. Specifications and Addenda: 1. Mark each Specification Section to record: a. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product and item of equipment incorporated in the work. b. Changes made by Change Order and other modifications described in the General Conditions. F. Large Scale Layout Drawings: 1. The preparation of large scale detailed layout drawings may be required for the work of Divisions 15 and 16 of the Specifications. These layout drawings are not Shop Drawings as defined by the General Conditions, but, together with Shop Drawings or layout drawings of affected Sections, are used to check, coordinate, and integrate the work of the various Sections. 2. If furnished, include the layout drawings as part of the Project record documents. G. Record Construction Schedule: Using the latest Progress Schedule required by Section 01330 as a reference, submit a Record Construction Schedule showing the actual dates and duration of construction activities. H. Sign and date the completed Project record documents; deliver to the Owner's Representative who will delver to the Owner after final acceptance of the work. 0407-06 CLOSEOUT SUBMrfrALS Progress CD Set 01780 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01780 VAIL, COLORADO CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1.03 PRODUCT DATA A. Fumish three copies of manufacturers' product data, specifications, installation instructions, and maintenance instructions for products incorporated in the work; information specified herein shall be for products in addition to equipment items requiring operating and maintenance data specified elsewhere in this Section. Ail product data pertaining to an item shall be assembled together. B. Sign and date the completed product data, and submit to the Architect, who will deliver them to the Owner. 1.04 OPERATION TESTS A. Conduct operational tests as required to demonstrate that all systems have been completed and are in compliance with all requirements. B. Furnish a written record of test results using recording type instruments where applicable and as directed. 1.05 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A General: Where maintenance manuals, record data, and operating instructions are specified, assemble in high- quality three ring, plastic binders sized for 8-112-inch x 11-inch sheets; include the following: 1. Identification on, or readable through, the front cover containing the Project name and address and the general subject matter in the manual. 2. Typewritten index near the front of the manual indicating locations of emergency data for equipment included in the manual. 3. Instructions regarding operation and maintenance of the equipment included in the manual. 4. Replaceable parts, part numbers, cost, and name and address of nearest parts distributor. 5. Copy of each warranty and service contract issued for the equipment included in the manual. 6. Include additional data required for the Owner's operation and maintenance. B. Catalog Data: Where contents of manuals include manufacturers' catalog pages, indicate the items included in the Project and delete data that is not applicable. C. Shop Drawings: Furnish one set of reviewed Shop Drawings showing changes made during construction. D. Number of Copies Required: 1. Submit manuals in the quantity required to be returned, plus the following to be retained by the Architect: a. Four copies of Mechanical and Electrical Manuals. b. Two copies of other manuals. 1.06 INSTRUCTION OF THE OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Where specified, furnish qualified personnel for on the job instruction of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. B. Where possible, furnish instruction, including special start-ups and running time, prior to occupancy of the building, including special start-ups and running time, at no additional expense to the Owner. 1.07 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTS A. Compile, review, and submit specified service and maintenance contracts as specified for warranties and bonds. 0407-M CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Progress CD Set 01780-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01780 VAIL, COLORADO CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1.08 PREPARATION FOR FINAL INSPECTION A. Perform final cleaning as specified in Section 01740. B. Assemble warranties, service and maintenance contracts, operating and maintenance instructions, and other items as specified, and submit to the Architect. C. Remove temporary tapes, wrapping, coatings, paper labels, and other similar items. Dust, mop, wash, or wipe exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. D. At the Contractor`s request, the Architect will attend a pre-final detailed Project review, to allow the Contractor to gather the majority of punch list items while the subcontractors are still on the Project Provide a typewritten list of all items remaining to be completed or corrected; list by room number and item number. Segregate plumbing, HVAC, and electrical on separate lists. E. At the Contractor's request and as approved by the Owner, the Architect will make a final Project review when the items in the pre-final punch list have been completed and after final cleanup, operation tests and the like have been performed. F. When the Architect determines that the Project is substantially complete and that final punch list items are completed, a final Project Inspection Report shall be executed. G. Upon execution of the Final Project Inspection Report, record and pay for Notice of Completion and furnish copies to the Owner and the Architect. 1.09 RESTORATION OF DAMAGED WORK A. Restore or replace damaged materials and finishes caused by movement of equipment or other operations as specified or directed by the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Restoration shall be equal to the original work, and finishes shall match the appearance of existing adjacent work. 1.10 REMEDIAL WORK A. Replace work due to faulty workmanship or materials at no additional Cost to the Owner. B. Coordinate work with the Owner and perform at such time and manner to cause minimal interruption and incon- venience to the Owner's operations. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Where specified, provide extra materials in the quantities and manner specified. B. Delivery and certification of extra materials shall be prerequisite to Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Progress CD Set 01780 - 4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 01788 PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND BONDS SECTION 01788 - PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds mgt*vd by the Contract Documents, including manufacturer's standard warranties on products and special warranties. B. Refer to the General conditions for terms of the Contractor's special warranty of workmanship and materials. C. Specific requirements fa warranties for the work and products and installations that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 16. D. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. E. Disclaimers and Lirrlitations: Manufacturers disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufac- turers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Standard Product Warranties are pre-printed written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner. 1.03 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted work that has failed, remove and replace other work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted work. B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable addustment for depreciation. C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. D. Owners Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to flied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. 1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. E. The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept work for the Project where a special warranty, certification, or Similar commitment is required on such work or part of the work, until evidence is presented that entities requiied to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. 04-07-06 PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND BONDS Progress CD Set 01788-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO 1.05 SUBMITTALS SECTION.01788 PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. ff the Arctttt ds Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the work, or a designated portion of the work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect. 1. When a designated portion of the work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect within fifteen days of completion of that designated portion of the work. B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate term and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Architect for approval prior to final execution. C. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion compile two copies of each required warranty and bond property executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. Use warranty form in Section 01789. D. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/24nch by 11-inch paper. 1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, inducing the name, of the product, and the name, address and telephone number of the installer. 2. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the Wed or printed title 'WARRANTIES AND BONDS', the Project title or name, and the name of the Contractor. 3. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION 04-07-06 PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND BONDS Progress CD Set 01788 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 01789 VAIL, COLORADO FORM OF WARRANTY SECTION 01789 - FORM OF WARRANTY WARRANTY FOR We hereby warrant that the we have provided has been completed in accordance with the requirements of the Specification Section and the Contract Documents. We agree to repair or replace our work, together with other adjacent work which may be displaced by so doing, that may prove to be defective in its workmanship or material within a period of from the Date of Acceptance of the above named Project by the Owner, and we also agree to repair damages resulting from such defects, without expense to the Owner, ordinary wear and tear and unusual abuse or neglect excepted. In the event of our failure to comply with the above mentioned conditions within 15-days after being notified in writing by the Owner, we collectively or separately do hereby authorize the Owner to proceed to have such defective work repaired or replaced and made good at our expense, and we will honor and pay the costs and charges therefor upon demand. Signed Date (Subcontractor's name, address, and license number) Countersigned Date (Contractor's name, address, and license number, or manufacturer's name and address) [OR] Signed Date (Contractor's name, address, and license number) END OF SECTION 04-07-06 FORM OF WARRANTY Progress CD Set 01789-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02210 VAIL, COLORADO FINE GRADING SECTION 02210 - FINE GRADING 1.01 DESCRIPTION A Related Requirements: Review the General. Contract Conditions and Division One, General Requirements, which contain information and requirements that apply to this Section. B Work Included: Execute finish grades complete, as shown, and as specified. The work includes but is not limited to: 1. Site grading and filling to indicated elevations, profiles and contours. 2. Sub-grade preparation for slabs, curbs, walks and paving. 3. Finish grading. C Related Work in Other Sections: Soil Preparation - Section 02920 Lawns and Grasses - Section 02930 Trees, Plants and Groundcover - Section 02950 1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Known underground and surface utility lines indicated on the drawings are for information only. The contractor is responsible for verifying all utility locations prior to commencing. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A General: Perform work in accordance with all applicable laws, codes and regulations required by local government authority. B Testing Agency: Selected and paid for by Owner, retesting paid for by Contractor. C Field Density Tests: Intervals not exceeding 2 R fill height with compaction tests made by Testing Agency. D Overcuttimg: Replace and compact all overcut material to required compaction determined per the Soils Report 1.04 LAYOUT AND SURVEY A Licensed Surveyor or Civil Engineer. Employ a licensed surveyor or civil engineer to stake out lines and levels. B Discrepancies: Right is reserved to make minor adjustments as necessary and if discrepancies are found. 1.05 SITE MAINTENANCE A Standing Water. Keep site free of standing water at all times. Provide and maintain ditches, grading or pumping as necessary to prevent erosion, softening of compacted surfaces and formation of mud in trenches and excavation. 04-07-2005 FINE GRADING Progress Construction Documents 02210-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 02210 FINE GRADING B Dust: Assume full responsibility for all alleviation or prevention of dust nuisance on or about the site. C Bulkheading and Shoring: Provide as necessary, and maintain temporary slopes during construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL: Refer to Section 02920 - Soil Preparation PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A Suspension of Work: If grading is suspended, disturbed areas shall be brought to required grade and immediately seeded and mulched. B Verification of Previous Work: Verify that all areas to receive imported topsoil have been completed prior to commencement of fine grading. 3.02 PREPARATION A Establish extent of grading by area and elevation. Designate and identify datum elevation and project engineering reference points. Set required lines, levels and elevations. B Do not cover or enclose work of this Section or other trades and Sections before obtaining required observations, tests, approvals, and location recording. 3.03 EXISTING UTILITIES A Before starting grading, establish the location and extent of underground utilities in the work area. Exercise care to protect existing utilities during fine grading operations. Perform excavation work near utilities by hand and provide necessary shoring, sheeting, and supports as the work progresses. B Maintain, protect, relocate, or extend as required existing utility lines to remain which pass through work area. Pay costs for this work, except as covered by the applicable utility companies. C Protect active utility services uncovered by excavation. 3.04 MOISTURE CONTENT A Inadequate Moisture Content Add water and thoroughly mix into fill material until the moisture necessary is uniformly dispersed throughout B Excessive Moisture Content Aerate fill material by blading or other acceptable methods until moisture content is uniformly reduced to achieve required compaction. 3.05 COMPACTION A Percent Compaction: ASTM Test Method D 1557 maximum dry density. B Existing Sub-grade: Compact fill areas by scarifying to required depths. 04-07.2005 FINE GRADING Progress Consimction Documents 02210-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 02210 FINE GRADING C Planting Areas: Compact fill material as determined by Subsurface Investigation Report for the top 3 R in bermed areas. 3.06 FINISH GRADING A General: Grade smooth all planting areas after weeding, topsoil spreading, soil preparation, and sail conditioning have been completed and soil has been thoroughly compacted. 2. Provide finish sub-grade elevations parallel to finished surface grades to allow for pavement depths, topsoil, soil amendments and mulch. Provide uniform levels and slopes. 3. Provide all grades for natural runoff of water without low spots or pockets. Accurately set flow fine grades at 2°/6 minimum gradient unless otherwise noted in Drawings. 4. Finish grades shall be smooth, even and on a uniform plane with no abrupt changes of surface. Slope uniformly between given spot elevations. 5. Grades not otherwise indicated shall be uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are given, or between points established by walks, paving, curbs or catch basins. 6. Tops and toes of all slopes shall be rounded to produce a gradual and natural-appearing transition between relatively level areas and slopes. B Grades: Tolerance: All planting areas, including lawn areas, shall be true to grade within 1 in. when tested in any direction with a 10 ft. straightedge. 2. Finished Grades of Shrub. Perennial, and Groundcover Areas: 1 in. below top of adjacent pavement, headers, curbs, or walls unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 3. Finished Grades of Lawn Areas: 1' below top of adjacent pavement, curbs or headers. C Areas to Receive Sodded Lavin: Immediately install sod upon completion and acceptance of finished grades. 3.07 CLEAN-UP A Keep all areas of work dean, neat and orderly at all times. B Clean up and remove all equipment, deleterious materials and debris from the entire work area prior to Final Acceptance. END OF SECTION 0407-2005 FINE GRADING Progress Cor strucGon Documents 02210-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02220 VAIL, COLORADO EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING SECTION 02220 - EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A Related Requirements: Review the General Contract Conditions and Division One, General Requirements, which contain information and requirements that apply to this Section. B Work Included: Execute excavation, backfilling and compaction, complete, as shown, and as specified. C Solis Reports: Review the project soils report on file in the Owner's construction trailer before commencing work and conform to all necessary requirements related to the work contained in this report D Related Work in Other Sections: Fine Grading - Section 02210 Landscape Drainage - Section 02720 Soil Preparation - Section 02920 Site Concrete - Section 03310 Concrete Unit Masonry - Section 04220 Site Stone Walls - Section 04415 Swimming Pool, Spas and Fountain - Section 13156 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A General: Perform work in accordance with all applicable laws, codes and regulations required by local government authority. B Applicable Standards: Apply the current or latest editions of the standards described below: ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials AASHO - American Association of State Highway Officials IBC - International Building Code C Testing Agency and Soils Engineer Selected and paid for by Owner. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Protection and Maintenance of Existing Improvements: Furnish, place, and maintain all supports, shoring and sheet piling which may be required for the sides of the excavation or for protection of adjacent existing improvements. The adequacy of such systems shall be the complete responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Assessment of damages shall be by the Landscape Architect and Owner and all replacement and repair to be to the Owner's satisfaction. Cost of replacement of all damaged improvements to be bome by the Contractor. 04-07-2M EXCAVATING, BACKF LUNG AND COMPACTING Progress Construction Do=nwts 02220-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 02220 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING 3. Maintain all bench marks, monuments, and other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, replace as directed. Cost of replacement to be bome by the Contractor. 1.04 LAYOUT AND SURVEY A Licensed Surveyor or Civil Engineer. Employ a licensed surveyor or civil engineer to stake out benchmark, reference points and when applicable provide lines and levels. B Discrepancies: Right is reserved to make minor adjustments as necessary and if discrepancies are found. 1.05 SITE MAINTENANCE A Standing Water. Keep site free of standing water at all times. Provide and maintain grading or pumping as necessary to prevent erosion, softening of compacted surfaces and formation of mud in trenches and excavation. 2. Run all surface or subsurface seepage encountered to temporary sumps located where required or directed. From the sumps, pump water out and legally dispose of in a manner that will keep the entire site in workable condition at all times. B Dust: Assume full responsibility for all alleviation or prevention of dust nuisance on or about the site. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 FILLS A General: All fill material shall be approved by the Soils Engineer. 2. Excavated materials from the site may be used if approved by Soils Engineer. B Im ed Fill: Non-expansive, predominantly granular soil, free from organic matter, deleterious substances, and not containing materials over 2 in. in greatest dimension. 2. Do not use materiil having a dimension greater than 2 in. in the upper 6 in. of fill. C Backfill Material Behind Retaining Walls: Granular material consisting of gravel containing no sizes larger than 1 in. and not more than 15% passing the #200 sieve. D Stockpiling: Material accepted for filling and bac kfilling maybe stoc kpiled on site at locations acceptable to the landscape Architect and Owner. 2.02 AGGREGATE BASE FOR ON-GRADE SLABS AND GRANULAR BACKFILL A Material: Uncrushed gravel, free of adobe, vegetable matter, loam, and deleterious matter. Do not use bank run or crusher run gravel. 04-07-2 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING Progress Cwish4w Documents 02220-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 02220 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING B Physical Characteristics: Sieve Size Percent Passing Sieve 1 in. 100 314 in. 90-100 #4 0-10 #100 0-3 Minimum "R' value 40 Max Expansion Pressure 100 PSF Maximum Plasticity Index 12 Sand Equivalent 20 MIN 2.03 TOPSOIL See Section 02920 - Soil Preparation PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A General: Excavate for structures, site walls and slabs to elevations and dimensions shown. Extend excavation a sufficient distance from foundations to permit placing and removal of formwork, installation of materials, services, and inspection. Hand trim foundation excavations to final grade just before concrete is placed. Remove loose, soft materials, and all organic matter. Footings shall bear on approved undisturbed bearing soil or compacted fill material. Owner will not pay for excavations carried below indicated grades without written authorization necessary. B 2. Obtain compaction testing for foundation excavations before concrete is placed. 3. Excavate for walls, walks, and paving to elevations and grades indicated. Allow for necessary base material. 4. Earth excavation shall include the satlsfacbry removal and disposal of all materials encountered, regardless of the nature of the materials, the condition of the materials at the time they are excavated, or the manner in which they were excavated, except materials classified as rock excavation. 5. AN materials to be excavated shall be non-classified and shall include earth fills, gravels, and other materials encountered. 6. If backfilling and compacting is suspended, disturbed areas shall be brought to required grade and immediately seeded and mulched. Earth Forms: Concrete for footings below grade only may be poured against vertical excavated surfaces provided the material will stand without caving, and provided that minimum reinforcing steel clearances indicated on Drawings are maintained, and suitable provisions are taken to prevent raveling of top edges. C Wood Forms: Pour excavated width of concrete section as shown on Drawings. Excavation for formed 0407-2006 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING Progress Construction Documents 02220-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL. COLORADO SECTION 02220 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING concrete shall be of sufficient width to allow for convenient construction and removal of forms. D Below-Grade Walls: Coordinate and allow for application of drainage materials as specified under Section 02720 - Landscape Drainage. E On-Grade Slabs: Verify proposed finish paving to allow for fills and aggregate base, all as indicated and required. Expansive Soils: 1. Maintain excavations in a moist condition where expansive subgrade soils occur beneath foundations and on-grade slabs. 2. Do not allow soil to dry out and crack prior to covering with subsequent construction. 3. Slowly and uniformly moisten soils as required to close all shrinkage cracks and to minimize expansion of soil subsequent to construction. G Planting Areas: Where necessary, excavate to allow for the placement of topsoil under Section 02920 - Soil Preparation. 3.02 EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIAL A Unsuitable Material: Legally dispose of off the site, all materials determined unsuitable for use as fills or topsoil. B Unauthorized Excavation: Where unauthorized excavations are made below indicated elevations under slabs, restore to proper elevations as specified for compacted backfilling. If under footings, increase wall or footing depth as directed. C Payment: No additional payments shall be made for unauthorized excavation nor for all labor and materials to correct such work. 3.03 PLACEMENT OF FILLS A Supervision: Place al structural fills as specified. Notify Landscape Architect for necessary supervision by the Soils Engineer. B Surface Preparation: 1. Scarify to a depth of 6 in. all areas to receive fill in all landscape areas and all areas to be paved. Moisture condition as required to maintain fiA material within 2 percent above or below optimum moisture content for compaction. 2. Where slopes exceed 1 vertical to 4 horizontal, pow, step or bench subgrade in such a manner that fills will bond with base material. C Spreading: Spread fill material in uniform lifts of not more than eight (8) in. in uncompacted thickness. 2. Fill material shall be moisture conditioned to within 2% above the optimum moisture content as 04-07-2006 EXCAVATING, BACKF LUNG AND COMPACTING Progress Construction Documents 02220-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 02220 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING defined by ASTM D-698 to permit proper compaction. Place and compact each layer of fill to indicated density before placing additional fen material. Repeat filing until proposed grade, profile, or contour is attained. Suspend fill operations when satisfactory results cannot be obtained because of environmental or other unsatisfactory site conditions. Do not use muddy or frozen sub-grade surface. Do not place fill material on muddy or frozen sub-grade surface. Topsoil is not permitted as fin or backfill material. Precaution: Do not drop fill on any structure. Do not place backfill around, against, or upon any concrete or masonry structure until structure has attained sufficient strength to withstand the bads imposed. Backfilling. Prior to Approval: Do not allow or use any of the work performed or installed to be covered up or enclosed by work of this Section prior to all required inspections, tests, and approvals. Should any of the work be so enclosed or covered up before it has been approved, uncover all such work at no additional cost to the Owner. After the work has been completely tested, inspected, and approved, make all repairs and replacements necessary to restore the work to the condition in which it was found at the time of the uncovering, all at no additional cost to the Owner. Maintain surface conditions which permit adequate drainage of rain water and prevent ponding of surface water in pockets. When fill placement is interrupted by rain, remove wet surface materials or permit to dry before placing additional fill material. 3.04 EXISTING UTILITIES Notification: Where unmarked utility lines or other underground obstructions or piping may be uncovered within the work area, notify the Owner or the agencies or service utility companies having jurisdiction thereof, and take necessary measures to prevent interruption of service (if live). Damaoe or Interruption: Should such lines or services be damaged, broken, or interrupted through the Contractor's own negligence, immediately repair and restore at no additional expense to Owner. Abandoned Imarovements: Remove, plug or cap abandoned lines, meters and boxes, obstructions or piping, in accordance with the requirements and approval of the agencies affected, or as directed by the Owner. Coordinate an such work with applicable mechanical or electrical trade having responsibility. Reprove all abandoned utility lines, pipes, conduits, etc., to a point 5 ft. outside new bulking lines or at the property lines if closer. 3.05 COMPACTION Percent Compaction: ASTM Test Method D 1557 or AASHO T180 maximum dry density. Extent: Compact an areas to receive fills and an areas to be paved. Extend compaction to not less than 5 ft beyond building lines and pavement edges, except at areas proposed for planting. C Dens' : Refer to Subsurface Investigation Report prepared by HP Geotech, June 22, 2005 and as amended 04.07-4006 EXCAVATING, BAWILLING AND COMPACTING Progress Construction Documents 02220-5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02220 VAIL, COLORADO EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING on July 19, 2005 and August 19, 2005. D Equipment Use compacting rollers, pneumatic or vibratory compactors, or other equipment and methods approved by the Soils Engineer. 3.06 SPREADING OF TOPSOIL: See Section 02920 - Soil Preparation 3.07 FINISH GRADING: See Section 02210 -Fine Grading 3.08 TESTING A Supervision: All excavation, backfil ing, and compaction shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of the Soils Engineer. B Densi : 1. Standards: Per ASTM or AASHO test methods where fill, backfill, or in-place materials are required to be compacted to a specified density. The results of these tests shall be the basis upon which satisfactory completion of work will be judged. 2. Intervals: Not exceeding two (2) ft fill height with compaction tests made by Soils Engineer. 3. Unacceptable Installations: Any area or portion thereof that does not meet minimum density requirements shall be reworked and recompacted until it meets the project density requirements. Retest reworked areas as specified herein. C Fees for Additional Testing: Fees for all additional testing made necessary by inadequate compaction, replacement of unacceptable material, or other work not complying with the Drawings and Specifications, will be deducted from the contract price. 3.09 CLEAN-UP A Keep all areas of work dean, neat and orderly at all times. B Upon completion of work, remove off the site all surplus materials, tools, equipment, rubbish and debris resulting from the work. END OF SECTION 04407-2006 EXCAVATING, BACKFILUNG AND COMPACTING PnogrmConstrudon Documents 02220-6 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02221 VAIL. COLORADO SITE DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Removal and satisfactory disposal of buildings, foundations, fences, signs, structures, pavements, traffic control devices, utilities, and other obstructions not designated or permitted to remain. B. Related Work: I . Site Clearing: Section 02230 2. Earthwork: Section 02300 3. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Section 02370 1.02 PERMITS A. Town of Vail Public Way Permit B. Stormwater Discharge Permit (NPDES) C. Construction Dewatering (NPDES) 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Protection: Protect all vegetation, utilities, structures, and other facilities to remain, from damage in manner acceptable to Engineer. Maintain designated temporary roadways, walkways, and detours. PART2PRODUCTS None PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PAVEMENTS, CURBS, GUTTER, FLATWORK A. Remove all pavements, curbs, gutter, and flatwork not designated to remain. Where existing construction is to be partially removed, saw edges to remain in place on straight line with vertical face. B. Break up concrete to be broken and left in place so largest fragment does not exceed one (1) square yard surface area. 3.02 BRIDGES, SEWERS, CULVERTS, DRAINAGE STRUCTURES A. Do not remove structures in use until arrangements have been made to accommodate traffic. B. Maintain satisfactory traffic bypass at all times. 04-07-06 Progress CD Set SITE DEMOLITION 02221-1 s PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02221 VAIL. COLORADO SITE DEMOLITION 3.03 STRUCTURES A. Remove structures within project limits or as shown on drawings. Protect portions to remain from damage. Damage to be repaired at Contractor's expense. 3.04 UTILITIES A. Remove designated utility lines within project limits, properly capping or plugging existing lines to remain. 3.05 DISPOSAL A. Deposit all removed material in designated waste areas. Grade and shape disposal site. Complete topsoil and reseeding of site if required. Where disposal sites are not designated, remove and dispose of all waste materials off site. 3.06 RESTORATION A. After removal of obstruction, fill and compact to finish grade in accordance with these specifications. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 SITE DEMOLITION Progress CD Set 02221-2 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02230 VAIL COLORADO SITE CLEARING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Clearing, grubbing, removing and disposing of all vegetation and debris within work limits and from borrow pits, and such other areas as required, except objects designated to remain or to be removed. Also includes preservation from injury or defacement of all vegetation and objects designated to remain. B. Related Work: 1. Earthwork: Section 02300 2. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Section 02370 1.02 PERMITS A. Stormwater Discharge Permit (NPDES) B. Construction Dewatering (NPDES) 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Protection: Protect trees, shrubs and planted areas to remain from damage or from unnecessary vehicular traffic, in manner acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Protect bench marks, staking, existing structures, roads, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from damage. Maintain designated temporary roadways, walkways, and detours. Burning is not permitted. PART 2 NONE PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING A. Clear and/or grub all surface objects and all trees, stumps, roots, bushes and other protruding obstructions, not designated to remain. 3.02 DISPOSAL A. Deposit all waste material in designated waste areas. Grade and shape disposal site to satisfaction of Engineer. Where disposal sites are not designated, remove and dispose of all waste materials off site. END OF SECTION 05-12-06 SUMMARY PERMIT SET SITE CLEARING 02230-1 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02260 VAIL, COLORADO EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Design and installation of shoring and underpinning system to protect excavation perimeter from movement or collapse. 2. Protection of adjacent buildings and improvements from movement, settlement or collapse. B. Related Sections: Earthwork: Section 02300 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Criteria: Contractor shall be solely responsible for design of shoring and underpinning system as required to resist lateral earth pressures and surcharges due to traffic, storage of materials, adjacent structures and all other loads imposed on adjacent soil during the construction period. Comply with requirements of soil and foundation investigation. Type of system used must be compatible with construction procedures and structural details and acceptable to the Structural Engineer and General Contractor. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirement: Obtain permits and permission of adjacent property owners as required. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Investigate to determine the location of adjacent existing underground improvements. B. Subsurface Investigation: A subsurface investigation report has been prepared for the Owner. This information is available for Bidders. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Excavation Support System: Provide piles, piers, walers, lagging, sheeting, anchors and structures as required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: Examine existing conditions to determine shoring and underpinning requirements. Examine existing adjacent improvements to determine their condition before starting work. Record their condition by written report, survey and photographs as required. 05-12-06 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02260-1 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02260 VAIL, COLORADO EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 3.02 PROTECTION A. Take all necessary precautions and make provisions to protect adjacent existing improvements from damage from shoring, underpinning and excavation operations. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Design and install systems as required. B. Make proper allowances for building structure and improvements including waterproofing, damp proofing and foundation drainage systems. C. Install shoring as concrete formwork for outside walls where required. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Make periodic inspections and surveys of existing adjacent improvements. Keep accurate records of movements or changes in their condition. 3.05 REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT A. Repair any damage or replace damaged existing adjacent improvements. 3.06 REMOVAL A. Remove shoring and underpinning systems as required after permanent structure is in place. Leaving shoring in place where serving as outside wall forming. END OF SECTION 05-12-06 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02260-2 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02300 VAIL COLORADO EARTHWORK PART IGENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation and borrow pits, removing and satisfactorily disposing of all materials taken from within work limits, including excavation for ditches and channels, inlet and outlet ditches for culverts and structures, all necessary . shaping and sloping for the construction, preparation, and completion of all backfill, embankments, subgrade shoulders, slopes and intersections, to required alignment, grade, and typical cross section shown on drawings. B. Related Work: Site Clearing: Section 02230 2. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Section 02370 C. Definitions: 1. Suitable Material: Earth fill material consisting of on-site or similar non-organic sands, gravels, clays, silts and mixtures thereof with maximum size of 6". Bedrock that breaks down to specified soil types and sizes during excavation, hauling, and placement may be considered as suitable material. Rock fill material which consists predominantly of cobbles or boulder- sized pieces of blasted or broken rock with maximum size of 6". 2. Unsuitable Material: Any material containing vegetable or organic matter, muck, peat, organic silt, topsoil, frozen materials, trees, stumps, certain manmade deposits, or industrial waste, sludge or landfill, or other undesirable materials. 3. Unclassified Excavation: Any and all materials, including surface boulders, encountered during construction. Rock formations that can be removed by ripping with D-9 tractor in good repair with single tooth hydraulic ripper are considered as unclassified excavation. 4. Rock Excavation: Rock formations which cannot be excavated without blasting. Includes removal and disposal of all rock. 5. Backfill and Embankment: Embankments, including preparation of area upon which they are to be placed, dikes within or outside right-of-way. Placing and compacting approved material within areas where unsuitable materials have been removed. Placing and compacting of material in holes, pits and other depressions to lines and grades shown on drawings. Use only suitable materials in construction of embankments and backfills. 6. Borrow: Backfill or embankment material which must be acquired from designated borrow areas to make up deficiencies which cannot be completed from excavation within work limits. Borrow material must be agreed to by Engineer. 7. Proof Rolling: Applying test loads over subgrade surface by means of heavy pneumatic-tired roller of specified design, to locate weak areas in subgrade. 05-12-06 EARTHWORK SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02300-1 PROJECT 1127990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02300 VAIL COLORADO EARTHWORK 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Permits: 1. Town of Vail Public Way Permit 2. Stormwater Discharge Permit (NPDES) 3. Construction Dewatering (NPDES) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL AND EMBANKMENT MATERIAL A. Any suitable material or borrow as defined above. Free-running water shall be drained from materials before placement. 2.02 CONSTRUCTION WATER A. Acceptable water shall be provided at Contractor's expense. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. Unclassified Excavation: All excess or unsuitable excavated materials, including rock and boulders, that cannot be used in backfill and embankments, shall be placed in designated disposal areas or disposed of off site. Where shown on drawings or considered necessary, construct intercepting ditches above top of cut slopes and carry to outlets near ends of cuts. To blend intersection of cut slopes with slope of adjacent natural ground surfaces in uniform manner, shape tops of all cut slopes, except those in solid rock, for flattening and rounding in accordance with details shown on drawings. Treat earth overburden above solid rock cuts in same manner as earth cut. Engineer reserves the right to change cut slopes during progress of excavation. Scale all exposed rippable rock cuts of loose, potentially falling rock at Contractor's expense. 3.02 PROOF ROLLING A. Proof rolling will be required to determine whether certain areas of subgrade meet compaction requirements. Proof roll designated areas with heavy rubber-tired roller approved by Engineer. Areas found to be weak or fail the test shall be repaired in accordance with recommendations by the Engineer. 3.03 SU13GRADE PREPARATION A. Adjust completed subgrade from slope or grade stakes to assure surface width conforms to typical section, dimensions, lines, and grades on drawings. Compact subgrade in accordance with compaction requirements. 3.04 EMBANKMENT AND FILL CONSTRUCTION A. Place earthfill materials for backfill or embankment in thin horizontal layers and compact as specified before next layer is placed. Use effective spreading equipment on each lift to obtain uniform thickness prior to compacting. As compaction of each layer progresses, continuously level and manipulate to assure uniform density. Add or remove water as necessary to obtain maximum density. When directed by Engineer, remove excess moisture in bridging across streams, ponds, and swampy ground. Place embankment in layers not greater than 12" which have been demonstrated to meet compaction standards. 05-12-06 EARTHWORK SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02300-2 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02300 VAIL, COLORADO EARTHWORK 05-12-06 EARTHWORK SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02300-3 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02300 VAIL COLORADO EARTHWORK Occasional cobble pieces of excavated rocks to 6", may be placed in earth fill if agreed to by Engineer Space large rocks so compaction of earth fill will meet compaction requirements. B. When embankment is to be placed and compacted on hillsides, or when new embankment is to be compacted against existing embankments, or when embankment is built one-half width at a time, slopes which are steeper than 4:1 measured longitudinally or at right angles to roadway shall be continuously benched over as-work is brought up in layers. Benching shall be well keyed into existing slopes a minimum of 8' wide. Begin each horizontal bench at intersection of original ground and sides of previous benches. Material benched shall be excavated and recompacted along with new embankment material at Contractor's expense. C. Rock fill embankment material consists predominantly of rock 6" in diameter placed in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer provided material is carefully placed, large stones well distributed, and voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth, sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer with suitable equipment, distributing soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. Embankment above an elevation of 2' below finished subgrade shall be composed of suitable material smoothed and placed in layers not exceeding 8" in loose thickness and compacted as specified. D. Remove all sod and vegetable matter from surface upon which embankment is to be placed. Completely break up cleared surface by plowing, scarifying, or stepping a minimum of 6" to insure a bond between embankment and original ground. Recompact to specifications. E. Frozen materials shall not be used in construction of embankments. F. During construction maintain area in such condition that it will be well-drained at all times. G. At the end of every construction day all fill areas must be flat rolled to provide proper drainage. 3.05 BORROW A. Provide test pit if required by Engineer to evaluate acceptability and limits of source at Contractor's expense. If more borrow is placed than required, amount of overrun will be deducted from borrow volume. Contractor shall notify Engineer at least 10 working days in advance of need before opening borrow area. Strip all borrow pits of sod, topsoil, and unsuitable materials. Restore borrow area, grade and shape to provide proper drainage before placement of topsoil, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.06 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS A. Deposit all surplus materials or unsuitable materials in such places as designated on drawings or approved by Engineer. Deposit all waste material in designated waste areas. Grade and shape disposal site. Complete topsoil and reseeding of site if required. Where disposal sites are not designated, remove and dispose of all waste material off site. 3.07 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS A. Thoroughly scarify surface upon which embankment is to be placed to depth of 6". 05-12-06 EARTHWORK SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02300-4 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02300 VAIL COLORADO EARTHWORK B. Compacted fill may consist of the natural sand and gravel, existing on-site gravelly sand fill free of deleterious material, or approved imported fill. Deleterious material includes building materials, trash, topsoil, organics, etc. The imported fill may consist of non-expansive silty or clayey sands or gravels with up to 15 percent passing the No. 200 sieve and a maximum plasticity index of 10. No gravel or cobbles larger than 6 inches should be placed in fin-areas. Fill areas should be stripped of all vegetation and loose soils, and then scarified, moisture treated, and compacted. Fill should be placed in thin loose lifts; moisture treated, and compacted as shown in the following table. The required compaction varies for the given use of the fill. -Required Compaction Percentage of the Percentage of the Percentage of the Use of Fill Standard Proctor Modified Proctor Optimum Moisture Maximum Dry Maximum Dry Density Content (ASTM D- Density (ASTM D- (ASTM D-1557) 698 or D-1557)' 698 Below Structure Foundations 98 95 -2 to +2 Below Slab-on-grade Floors 95 90 -2 to +2 Utility Trench Backfill 95 90 -2 to +2 Utility Trench Backfill 98 95 -2 to +1 Below Structure Foundations Backfill non-structural 95 90 -2 to +2 NOTES: 1. For clay soils the moisture content should be 0 to +2 percent of the optimum moisture content. For granular soils the moisture content should be -2 to +2 of the optimum moisture content. All structural fill placed below foundations shall have the following characteristics: Sieve Size Maximum Percent Passing Upper Limit 3" 100 Lower Limit No. 4 5 The structural fill shall be compacted using a vibratory compactor and should be compacted to at least 98 percent of the standard Proctor density (ASTM D698). END OF SECTION 05-12-06 EARTHWORK SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02300-5 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02370 VAIL, COLORADO EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART IGENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, grading, and installation of riprap, filter material, jute netting, straw bale sediment barriers, and all necessary appurtenances. B. Related Work: 1. Site clearing: Section 02230 2. Earthwork: Section 02300 3. Storm Drainage: Section 02630 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: If requested, furnish copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory 1. Gradation and Soundness of Riprap. 2. Gradation of Filter Material. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RIPRAP A. Hard, dense, sound, rough fractured stone meeting AASHTO T 85. Excavated shot rock maybe used if agreed to by the Owner's representative and the Engineer. Neither breadth nor thickness of single stone to be less than one-third its length. Nominal Size Min. Volume Min. Weight 9" 0.25 CF 301bs. 12" 0.5 CF 75 lbs. 18" 1.8 CF 250 lbs. 24" 4 CF 600 lbs. Size of stone and total thickness of riprap as shown on drawings. Stone well graded so voids can be filled, and at least 50% of mass equal to or larger than size called for on drawings. 2.02 FILTER MATERIAL A. Aggregate Filter: Conform to following gradation: Sieve Size Percentage by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves 3" 100 3/4" 20-90 No. 4 0-20 No. 200 0-3 05-12-06 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02370-1 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02370 VAIL COLORADO EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 2.03 FILTER FABRIC A. Manufactured especially for stability of erosion control construction. Made from polyethylene and polypropylene yams, in accordance with following: Weight 4.0 oz/yd ASTM D1910 Thickness 15 mils ASTM D1777 Grab Strength 1301bs. ASTM D1682 Elongation Break 62% ASTM D1682 Burst Strength 125 psi ASTM D7742 Trapezoid Tear Strength 70 lb. ASTM 2263 Water Permeability 0.02 cm/se CFMC Water Flow Rate 4.80 gal/min/ft CFMC Equivalent Opening Size 70-100 U.S. Sieve ASTM D422 2.04 JUTE NETTING A. Heavy-woven jute mesh of a rugged construction. Made of undyed and unbleached, twisted jute fibers, having smolder resistant treatment. Provide in rolls 225' by 4' wide containing 100 square yards weighing approximately 90 pounds. 2.05 SILT FENCE A. Silt Fence Fabric: The fabric shall meet the following specifications: Fabric Properties Minimum Acceptable Value Grab Tensile Strength (lbs) 90 Elongation at Failure 50 Mullen Burst Strength (PSI) 190 Puncture Strength (lbs) 40 Slurry Flow Rate (gal/min/sf ) 0.3 Equivalent Opening Size 40-80 Ultraviolet Radiation Stability % 90 Test Method ASTM D1682 ASTM D1682 ASTM D3786 ASTM D751 (modified) US Std Sieve CW-02215 ASTM-G-26 B. Fence Posts (for fabricated units): The length shall be a minimum of 36 inches long. Wood posts will be of sound quality hardwood with a minimum cross sectional area of 3.0 square inches. Steel posts will be standard T and U section weighing not less than 1.00 pound per linear foot. C. Wire Fence (for fabricated units): Wire fencing shall be a minimum 14-1/4 gage with a maximum 6" mesh opening, or as approved. D. Prefabricated Units: Envirofence or approved equal may be used in lieu of the above method providing the unit is installed per manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FILTER FABRIC A. Place fabric over shaped surface loosely where, when large stones are placed, they will not cause stretching of fabric beyond elastic limits. Overlap joining sections Tat edges. Secure overlapped edges to subgrade with cinch pins. If riprap is dropped, place aggregate bedding 2" thick over fabric. Place riprap in a manner that fabric will not be damaged by stretching, punching, or ripping. 05-12-06 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02370-2 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02370 VAIL, COLORADO EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 3.02 RIPRAP A. Reasonably well-graded from smallest to maximum size specified. Stones smaller than 10% of smallest size not permitted. Control gradation of riprap by visual inspection to assure thickness of riprap conforms with drawings. B. Hand Placed: Rectangular to facilitate butt placement. Fill openings with loose, well-graded road aggregate base material. 3.03 FILTER MATERIAL A. Wet subgrade, reasonably shape, and compact prior to placing filter material. Filter material may be backdragged with loader bucket to a reasonably smooth surface for placement to lines and grades of drawings. 3.04 WATER BARS/INTERCEPTOR TRENCHES A. Construct ditch in accordance with drawings. Flow line of water bar not steeper than 1%. Discharge on existing vegetated slopes alternately to avoid erosion. 3.05 STRAW BALE SEDIMENT BARRIER A. Use straw bale barriers at storm drain inlets, across minor swales and ditches, and other applications where barrier is of temporary nature. Bind straw bales with nylon or baling wire, not twine. Anchor bales to ground with two posts per bale. 3.06 JUTE NETTING A. Start jute roll at top of slope or channel and unroll down grade. Lay second strip parallel to first and allow 2" overlap. Bury top end of roll in trench, minimum 4" deep. Anchor jute roll to earth surface with stakes of 8 gauge steel, 8" long, approximately 12" apart. Staple outside edges 4' to 10' apart and along overlap edges. Overlap end rolls by 4" and anchor securely. 3.07 CHECK DAMS A. Install bottom of check dam at least 6" below maximum depth of newly graded channel. Extend to 6" above maximum design water depth. Install materials in accordance with drawings. 3.08 FILTER BERM/SEDIMENT POND A. Field construct berm as directed by Engineer. Place washed 1" to 1-1/2" aggregate with 2' tog and 3:1 side slopes extending to bottom of channel. Berm to retain sediments by retarding and filtering runoff. Place sand on face of berm for future replacement of filter material. Construct in accordance with drawings. 3.09 SILT FENCE A. Install silt fence in accordance with drawings. END OF SECTION 05-12-06 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02370-3 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02510 VAIL COLORADO WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 GENERAL. 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, backfill, bedding, and installation of pipe, valves, fittings, fire hydrants, vaults, service lines, curb stops, valve boxes, pressure reducing valves, meters, and all necessary appurtenances. B. Related Work: 1. Site Clearing: Section 02230 C. Defmition: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation; All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket with bucket curling force and stick crowd force of 35,000 lbs. each, and requiring drilling and blasting. D. Eagle River Water and Sanitation District Specifications: All work shall conform to the standard specifications for water lines as adopted by Eagle River Water and Sanitation District. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for: 1. Valves and Valve Boxes 2. Fittings 3. Fire Hydrants 4. Vaults 5. Service Lines 6. Meters B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, and compression test. C. Permits: Submit copies of all permits issued for project. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat falls below 35 degrees F and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F at time of placing. 05-12-06 WATER DISTRIBUTION SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02510-1 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02510 VAIL COLORADO WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 2 PRODUCTS - All materials shall conform to the local water district's specifications. N3 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS All ductile iron pipe and fittings used shall meet the latest AWWA Specifications. A. Pipe Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, working pressure 350 psi, minimum thickness class 52, with cement-mortar lining, AWWA C104. Bituminous outside coating one mil thick. Pipe joints, push-on type utilizing rubber ring gasket, AWWA CI 11. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Couplings: AWWA C900, working pressure 200 psi, with push- on joints ASTM D1869. six inch (6"), eight inch (8") and twelve inch (12") PVC water lines shall be Class 200 dimension ratio 14 (DR 14). PVC pipe may be used only in corrosive areas and in the Edwards Metropolitan District provided the static water pressure does not exceed 170 psi. Installation of PVC pipe in corrosive areas must have prior written authorizations from the District. 3. Steel Pipe: All steel pipe and fittings shall be fabricated in accordance with AWWA C200 Standard for Steel Water Pipe-eight inches (8") and larger-and AWWA M-11 Steel Pipe Manual. Working pressure shall be 350 psi. All material used shall be acceptable under ASTM A283 Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates of Structural Quality or ASTM A36 Standard Specifications for Structural Steel. For mill-type pipe, all material used shall be acceptable under ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. All fittings shall be fabricated from tested pipe and dye checked in accordance with AWWA C208. All steel pipe and fittings shall be prepared, primed, lined, coated, painted or wrapped as hereinafter specified: a. Exterior Surfaces - Tape coating system conforming to AWWA C209 and C214. b. Interior Surfaces - Cement-mortar lining conforming to AWWA C205. 4. HDPE Pipe: With authorization from the engineer and approval by the District, this pipe may be used as an alternative in those applications where "hot soils" are determined to be found. 5. Fittings: Fittings shall be made of ductile iron and in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C153, pressure rating 350 psi. Mechanical joints shall conform to AWWA C111. Bolts and nuts shall be low-alloy steel. All fittings shall be cement-mortar lined, AWWA C104. Bituminous outside coating shall be a minimum of one-mil (1) thick. 6. Joint Restraint Devices: Joint restraint devices shall be made of ductile iron. Twist-off nuts, sized the same as the tee-head bolts, shall be used to ensure proper actuating of restraining devices. Joint restraint devices shall be EBAA Iron, Inc., Megalug Series 1100 or 1700 or Uni-Flange Corp. Series 1400 for new pipe restraint and EBAA Iron Sales, Megalug Series I IOOSD or 1100HD or Uni-Flange UFR1300-C or UFR1390-C for existing pipe restraint or accepted equal. 05-12-06 WATER DISTRIBUTION SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02510-2 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02510 VAIL COLORADO WATER DISTRIBUTION Solid Sleeves: Solid sleeves shall be made of ductile iron, mechanical joint, long body. Sleeves shall have a minimum pressure rating of 350 psi. Where a solid sleeve is used to join two pieces of pipe of the same diameter, a "wedding band" is to be inserted between the two pipes inside of the solid sleeve. Tapping Sleeves: Wet taps shall only be made with the use of a tapping sleeve. The District will allow epoxy-coated Smith Blair 620, Mueller H304, JCM 412 or equivalent. No tapping sleeves will be allowed for any application with a working pressure of 150 psi or higher. For those applications where working pressure exceeds 150 psi, the District will require the use of a tee. B. Fittings Fittings shall be ductile iron and in accordance with the requirements of AW WA C 153, pressure rating 350 psi. Mechanical joints shall conform to AW WA C 111. Bolts and nuts shall be low-alloy steel. All fittings cement-mortar lined, AWWA C104. Bituminous outside coating one mil thick. 2.02 VALVES The valves shall be the same size as the main. A. Gate Valves Gate valves shall be Mueller A-2360, Waterous AFC-2500 or U.S. Pipe Metroseal with an epoxy-coated interior and exterior cast iron or ductile iron body, pressure rating 250 psi, bronze-mounted, AWWA C509. Resilient seat (wedge) rubber encapsulated gate, flanged or mechanical joint as required. Valves with ring stem seal, two-inch (T) square operating nut, open left must be used. Resilient wedge gate valves on all pipe sizes up to and including 12 inches are required. Direction of Opening: All valves are to open left. Specifications: Gate valves in sizes through twenty-four inches (24") shall be of the iron body, non-rising bronze stem, resilient seated wedge type manufactured to equal or exceed ANSI/AWWA Standard C509-80 and the specific requirements outlined in these Special Provisions. Valves shall have a bottle-tight working water pressure of 250 psi with zero leakage and be capable of flow in either direction. End connections shall be mechanical joint and shall be furnished with all necessary joint materials. Valve openings shall be furnished and installed with valve stacks and covers in accordance with locate water district specifications. Valve body, bonnet, stuffing box and disc cast shall be manufactured of either gray or ductile iron. The exterior of the valve shall have epoxy coating per AW WA standards, applied to the ferrous parts of the valve, except for finished or seating surfaces. All internal ferrous metal surfaces shall be coated with a two-part thermosetting epoxy coating. The coating shall be non-toxic, impart no taste to water, protect all seating and adjacent surfaces from corrosion and prevent build-up of scale or tuberculation. 05-12-06 WATER DISTRIBUTION SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02510-3 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02510 VAIL, COLORADO WATER DISTRIBUTION The valve shall be structurally designed so that if excessive torque is applied to the stem in the closing direction, with the disc seated, failure of the pressure retaining parts does not occur. Stem failure under such conditions shall occur externally at such a point as to enable the stem to be safely turned in the opening direct by use of a pipe wrench. B. Valve Boxes Valve boxes shall be Tyler 6668-2. All buried valves shall be provided with a six-inch (6") cast iron, valve box, screw type. The valve box shall be of a design which will not transmit shock or stress to the valve and which shall have enough extension capability to be raised to final street grade. The valve box shall be cast iron, adjustable screw type, with minimum five-inch (5") diameter shaft provided with cover, marked "Water". C. Pressure Reducing Valves All pressure reducing valves shall be CLA-VAL 92G-0 I ABXCKDS as appropriate and determined by the Engineer. In addition, the PRV is to have the following features: 1. Pressure reducing pilotry with pressure control ranges for correct valve operation where installed. Pilot material shall be bronze body only, brass and stainless-steel trim. Tubing shall be copper. 2. Epoxy coated interior and exterior suitable for potable water contact. 3. Dura-clean stem design shall be installed. 4. Valve opening shall be regulated by means of a "speed control valve" for flow control. 5. Ductile iron, globe body, minimum 150-pound ANSI flanges or as may be required by system pressures, bronze trim. 6. Pilotry flow-clean strainer and minimum of three (3) pilot cocks. D. Pressure Reducing Valves-Bypass Line The PRV shall be CLA-VAL 90-01 valve, sized appropriately to allow low flow to bypass around the main PRV. The valve shall have a ductile iron globe body with screwed ends. Pilotry is to be equipped with a flow wye strainer and isolation cocks. E. Air Release/Vacuum Valves Shall be an APCO air vacuum combination valve sized by the engineer as manufactured by Valve and Primer Corporation or an equivalent valve that has been approved by the local water district. The valve shall have a cast iron body, cover and baffle with a stainless-steel float. The seat shall be fastened into the valve cover, without distortion and shall be easily removed, if necessary. Air release/vacuum valves shall be installed at all high points in the system on any main line extensions. F. Check Valves Golden-Anderson Silent Check Valve (Figure 280). Bronze mounted, AWWA C508. High strength cast iron gate with bronze gate ring. Bronze, back-faced seat ring. Solid bronze Y-shaped hinge. 05-12-06 WATER DISTRIBUTION SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02510-4 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02510 VAIL, COLORADO WATER DISTRIBUTION 2.03 FIRE HYDRANTS A. Fire hydrants shall be Mueller Centurion A423, Kennedy K81A-250 certified, AVK Series 2700 or 2780, Waterous Pacer or U.S. Pipe M-94 which conform to AWWA Standard C502 with a working pressure of 250 psi. They also shall be six-inch (6") mechanical joint inlet, minimum 5% inches, compression-type main valve that closes with pressure, two 2%s hose nozzles, one 4%z-inch pump nozzle, nozzle threads ANSI B26. Nozzles must be easily replaceable in the field with standard tools. Operating and cap nuts must be 1 %-inch, Number 17 National Standard hex main valve which open to the LEFT. An arrow cast on top of hydrant shall indicate direction opening. These shall be a breakable section that permits clean break at or near ground level, preventing water loss in case of breakage. Working parts must be removable for maintenance or repair without excavation. Also required are operating mechanism non-wetting, oil reservoir lubricated, with O-ring seals and barrel drain bronze mounted with at least two (2) outlets, which operate automatically with main valve. Fire hydrants must be installed at the end of all main lines. Finish grade of the fire hydrant shall be twelve inches (12") below the flange for final grade and paving inspection. B. Fire Hydrant Extensions New Installations: All new installations shall be installed at the standard 7-foot to 9-foot of cover measured from the top of the pipe to finish grade. All fire hydrants shall consist of a single solid shaft. No fire hydrant extensions will be allowed. Any special circumstance will require written approval from the local water district prior to installation. Existing Fire Hydrants: No more than one (1), two-foot (2) long, fire hydrant grade extension (extension section) shall be used or installed on fire hydrant assemblies. All hydrants shall be installed with a guard valve to isolate the hydrant for repair while maintaining service to main. No service line taps will be allowed between the guard valve and hydrant. Guard valves shall be installed on the tee off of the water main. The maximum distance from the guard valve to the fire hydrant shall not exceed fifty feet (50') Fire hydrants shall be installed at the end of all dead-end mains. C. Fire Hydrant Marker Flags Install fire hydrant marker flags for all newly constructed fire hydrants. The required flat is a Nordic Flex Flag, FF2-72 inches. 2.04 SERVICE LINES A. Copper Tubing Type "K", ASTM B88. Connections to be compression or silver soldered. B. Corporation Stops Mueller 300 Ball Valve No. B-25008 or B25028, AWWA C800. All brass construction with compression connection. McDonald No. 4701 BT or 4704 BT, AWWA C800. Ford cc/comp FB-1000-G Ford IPS/comp FB-1100-G 05-12-06 WATER DISTRIBUTION SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02510-5 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02510 VAIL COLORADO WATER DISTRIBUTION C. Curb Stops Mueller 300 Ball Curve Valve No. 25209, Ford B44 with compression connections, AWWA C-800. McDonald Ball Curb Valve - 6100 T, AWWA C800. D. Curb Boxes For curb stops up to 1 Mueller H10314 with 89982 lid or McDonald 5601 with 5601 L lid. For curb stops larger than I": Mueller H10314 with 89982 lid and Tyler 6500 Series Enlarged Base #144809 or McDonald 5603 with 5601 L lid. Shaft diameter shall be 1" and the top of the shaft shall be a minimum of 18" from final grade and lid. E. Saddles Ductile Iron Saddle: Mueller DE2A, JCM402, Smith & Blair 313, Ford F202, McDonald 3825, 3826 or equal and approved by the District. The saddle must have a double flat strap design with ductile iron body. Said saddle must conform to AWWA C800. 2.05 METERS Rockwell SR Compound Meter A. All services are required to have a positive displacement Rockwell meter with ECR touch-read pad. Conformance per AWWA C702 Standard for Cold Water Meters - Compound Type. 1. SR 2. SR2 3. Compound 4. Meter type will be determined by the District. B. Installation must be in freeze-proof, accessible area. C. A telephone jack must be installed within five feet (5) of the meter to provide for future automated meter reading. D. Installation will be near floor level in a horizontal position. Isolation valves shall be located before the PRV and after the meter (i.e. valve, PRV, meter, valve). E. Customer shall install wire from meter location to touch-read pad prior to meter installation. F. Touch-read pad will be located on street side of building, five feet (S) above the ground in an accessible location free from snow. G. Master Meter Vaults: All master meter vaults will be required to have a six inch (6") Rockwell turbine meter with a two inch (2") positive displacement low flow meter. The Contractor will be required to submit a piping schematic to the District and Engineer prior to any installation. Refer to Details for additional information. 05-12-06 WATER DISTRIBUTION SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02510-6 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02510 VAIL. COLORADO WATER DISTRIBUTION 2.06 BEDDING A. Granular material can be 3/4"-inch or 3/8"-inch screened rock or class 6 aggregate base course (ABC) as defined by the Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT). The bedding material shall be free of corrosive properties and shall conform to the following gradation limits when tested by means of laboratory sieves: Road base must have 95% compaction, at 2% optimum moisture content prior to installation of any pipe. All bedding shall be tamped to the spring line of the pipe. Local water district personnel shall inspect all installations prior to backfilling. Laboratory Maximum Density: Laboratory maximum density of soil shall be determined by ASTM D- 1557-78. Field Density: Density of soil shall be determined by ASTM D-1556-56 sane cone method, or by ASTM D-2922-81, nuclear method. 3/4" Screened Rock (CDOT Table 703-1, Number 7) Sieve Size Total Percent Passing by Weight 3/4 inch 100 1 /2 inch 90-100 3/8 inch 40-70 No. 4 0-15 No. 8 0-5 3/8" Screened Rock (CDOT Table 703-1, Number 8) Sieve Size Total Percent Passing by Weight 1/2 inch 100 3/8 inch 85-100 No. 4 10-30 No. 8 0-10 No. 16 0-5 B. In specific areas, such as where access is extremely limited, the use of on-site materials may be allowed and when used, must be on-site 1 Y2 inches minus well-graded screened material, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris or other suitable materials. Use of on-site bedding material must have prior written District and Engineer approval. C. Service line bedding shall consist of 3/8 inch or Y4-inch minus screened rock, select native or sand material free of any organic material. 2.07 TRENCH BACKFILL A. Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No rocks over six inches (6") in diameter in trench. 05-12-06 WATER DISTRIBUTION SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02510-7 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02510 VAIL COLORADO WATER DISTRIBUTION 2.08 NON-DETECTABLE MARKING TAPE The installation of "blue" marking tape is required on all water mains and service lines. The tape shall be installed approximately twenty-four inches (2') above the main or line. The tape shall meet the following specifications: A. Four (4) mil thick PVC material. B. Solid "blue" color with black lettering C. Six inches (6") in width 2.09 CONCRETE MATERIAL A. General: All materials shall be furnished from sources agreed to by the Engineer. B. Cement: ASTM C-150 for Portland Cement, Type Il. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acids, salt, alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. 2.10 CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix 1. Proportions Cement 5-1/2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate - 43% Water - 5.5 gallons per sack Maximum size aggregate - 3/4" 2. Slump: 4" maximum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5% - 7% B. Job-Mixed Concrete Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less than 10 minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready-Mixed Concrete Proportioned, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. 2.11 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT When required by the District, a polyethylene encasement material shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C105, with the following additional requirements. The raw material used to manufacture polyethylene film shall be Type 1, Class A, Grade E-1, in accordance with ASTM D-1248. J J 05-12-06 WATER DISTRIBUTION SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02510-8 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02510 VAIL COLORADO WATER DISTRIBUTION 2.12 THRUST BLOCKS AND ANCHORS A. Concrete thrust blocks and anchors shall be sized for the internal pipe pressure and soil bearing capacity. Standard sizes and shapes of thrust blocks and anchors are shown on the details. No thrust block shall be smaller than that size required for an eight inch (8") main. Thrust reaction blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than I part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand and 5 parts stone, and having a compressive strength of not less than 3000 P.S.I. after 28 days. Megalug joint restraint devices shall be used in conjunction with thrust blocks. All thrust blocks shall be formed in accordance with the local water district's specifications. See detail. The Water District shall inspect all thrust blocks. 2.13 PRESSURE REDUCER VAULTS A. All proposed installations shall be "factory-built" vault including the appropriately sized main line inlet and outlet. PRV installations shall include an appropriately sized manual bypass with an approved gate valve; two (2) appropriately sized CLA-VAL Model 90G-0IABK pressure reducing valves with approved isolating gate valves. All vault installations shall include a 120/240-volt power panel; all assembled, tested and painted. Minimum dimensions of the vault shall be 7' (H) x 8' (L) x 6' (W), skid - mounted capsule with Bilco Model MNB-50 access hatch, ladder, fluorescent light, gravity drain in sump, dehumidifier, 240 volt heater, exhaust fan and two (2) magnesium anode packs. All proposed vault installations must be pre- approved by the local water district. 2.14 CASING SPACERS A. Carrier pipes to be installed inside casings shall be installed with self-restraining casing spacers. Casing spacers shall provide axial thrust restraint to prevent pipe joint separation during and after installation. They shall also provide dielectric insulation between the carrier pipe and the casing and facilitate installation of the carrier pipe into the casing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. B. Rock Trench Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation C. Blasting: In general, blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by the local authority having jurisdiction granted. All explosives and appurtenances shall be transported, handled, stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local, state and federal governments, as applicable. All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of life and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24-hour notification to Engineer. 05-12-06 WATER DISTRIBUTION SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02510-9 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02510 VAIL COLORADO WATER DISTRIBUTION D. Trench Support: The trench shall be adequately supported and the safety of workers provided for as required by the most recent standards adopted by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards Board. Sheeting and shoring shall be utilized where required to prevent any excessive widening or sloughing of the trench, which may be detrimental to human safety, to the pipe and appurtenances being installed, to existing utilities, to existing structures, or to any other existing facility or item. 3.02 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM AND EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL A. If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed, the subgrade shall be accepted by the Engineer. 3.03 BEDDING A. Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 4" below bottom ofpipe to centerline for entire width of trench. 3.04 PIPE INSTALLATION A. General: Deliver, handle, store, and install in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations and the applicable paragraphs of AWWA C600, AWWA C603, and ASTM D2321. Carefully examine all pipe and fittings for cracks and other defects. Groove in bells of ductile iron pipe to be full and continuous or be rejected. Remove all foreign matter from interior and ends of pipe and appurtenances before lowering into trench. Carefully lower all pipe, fittings, valves, and hydrants into trench piece by piece to prevent damage to pipe materials, protective coatings, and linings. Do not dump into trench. If pipe cannot be lowered into trench and into place without getting earth into it, place heavy, tightly woven canvas bag over each end and leave in place until joints are made. During pipe laying, place no debris, tools, clothing or other materials in pipe. Keep trenches free from water during pipe laying and jointing. Dewatering of trench considered as incidental to construction an all costs included in contract prices. When pipe laying is not in progress, close open ends of pipe by watertight plug, or other means approved by Engineer. B. Deflection of Pipe: Pipe deflections are discouraged. Do not exceed 50% of the deflection limits for each type of pipe as recommended by pipe manufacturer. C. Pipe Jointing 1. General: Cut pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces in neat and workmanlike manner with no damage to pipe or lining. Leave smooth end at right angles to axis of pipe. 2. Mechanical Joints: Thoroughly clean last 8" of spigot and inside bell to remove oil, grit, tar, and other foreign matter. Coat spigot and gasket with solution furnished by pipe manufacturer. Slip cast-iron gland on spigot end of pipe with lip extension of gland toward spigot end. Coat gasket with joint lubricant and place on spigot end of pipe to be laid, with thick edge toward gland. J Push entire section forward to seat spigot in bell of pipe in place. Press gasket into place within bell, even around entire joint. Move ductile-iron gland along pipe into position for bolting all nuts with suitable torque wrench. Alternately tighten nuts 180 degrees apart to produce equal pressure on all parts of gland. 05-12-06 WATER DISTRIBUTION SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02510-10 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02510 VAIL COLORADO WATER DISTRIBUTION Pipe Size Bolt Size Range of Torque Inches Inches Ft.-Lb. 3" 5/8 45 - 60 4"-24" 3/4 75 - 90 Push-on Joints: Thoroughly clean exterior 4" of pipe spigot and inside of adjoining bell to remove all oil, grit, tar, and other matter. Place gasket in bell with large round side of gasket pointing inside pipe bell. Apply thin film joint lubricant over gasket's entire exposed surface. Wipe spigot end of pipe clean and insert into bell to contact gasket. Force pipe into bell to manufacturer's jointing mark. 4. Flanged Joints: Thoroughly clean faces of flanges of all oil, grease, and other material. Thoroughly clean rubber gaskets and check for proper fit. Assure proper seating of flanged gasket. Tighten blots so pressure on gasket is uniform. Use torque wrenches to insure uniform bearing. If joints leak when hydrostatic test applied, remove and replace gaskets and retighten bolts. D. Thrust Restraint: Concrete thrust blocks are required. 3.05 SANITARY SEWER CROSSING A. Normal Conditions: Whenever possible lay water mains over sanitary sewers to provide vertical separation of at least 18" between invert of water main and crown of sewer. B. Unusual Conditions: If above separation cannot be met, use following: 1. Sewer passing over or less than 18" under water main. a. One continuous length of watertight pressure pipe C900 PVC 20' long centered on water main. Joints between different pipes encased in concrete 6" thick and extending 6" either side of joint; or Water mains passing under sewers: If vertical separation less than 18" provide structural support for sewer. 3.06 TAPPING PIPE A. Use experienced workmen with tools in good repair and proper adapters for size of pipe being tapped. Drilling and tapping machines proposed for tapping directly into pipe agreed to by Engineer. If tap is improperly installed with leakage around threads or, in opinion of Engineer, connection is substandard, provide tap saddle at Contractors' expense. If damage to pipe cannot be repaired by saddle, install approved repair sleeve over injured portion and retap at Contractor's expense. Install corporation stop and couplings, flanged coupling adapters, and service saddles to provide clean seat. Wipe gaskets clean before installation. Flexible couplings and flanged coupling adapter gaskets may be lubricated for installation on pipe ends. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Tighten bolts progressively from opposite sides until all bolts have uniform tightness. Use torque wrenches or other approved equipment. 3.07 SERVICE LINE A. Place true to line and grade in accordance with drawings, from main line to curb stop or meter, in shortest direct route by continuous section of pipe with no splices. Locate 10' horizontally from all sewer lines. Terminate near center of each lot or as shown on drawings. 05-12-06 WATER DISTRIBUTION SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02510-11 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02510 VAIL, COLORADO WATER DISTRIBUTION 3.08 VALVES AND HYDRANTS A. Carefully inspect valve and hydrant before installation. Clean interior. Operate valve and hydrant to determine parts in proper working order, with valves seating and drain valve operating properly. Set plumb and securely braced into place. Set hydrant with bury line at finish grade, with hose nozzles parallel to and pumper nozzle facing pavement, at least 6" behind curb or sidewalk and 18" from property line or as shown on drawings. Provide drainage pit having 9 square feet of surface area and 2' of depth below seep hole. Backfill pits with 1-1/2" washed rock to 6" above barrel drain hole. Provide thrust blocking at bowl of each hydrant as shown on drawings. Do not obstruct barrel drain hole. Hydrants and valves backfilled by installing 1-1/2" aggregate road base to subgrade. Valve boxes centered and plumb over the operating nut. Valve boxes supported by bricks or other means to prevent any shock or stress transmitted to pipe or valve. Set valve box covers to just below subgrade level to prevent damage during construction of surfacing if applicable. Adjust to grade of surfacing. 3.09 PLUGGING DEAD ENDS A. Install standard plugs or caps at dead ends of all fittings and pipe in accordance with drawings. If dead end is not to be extended, place water service line as near dead end as practical. 3.10 VAULTS A. Construct vaults to line and grade shown on drawings. 3.11 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible in order to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, from rain, and flowing water for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing, cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. 3.12 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use 3/4" screened rock for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean soil, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to F above top of pipe. Place in lifts to a density of 85 to 90%, AASHTO T99. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No rocks over 6" in diameter in trench. J 05-12-06 WATER DISTRIBUTION SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02510-12 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02510 VAIL COLORADO WATER DISTRIBUTION 3.13 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs, or compaction is not being achieved, then demonstrate new method. B. Compaction requirements for all trenches: Predominantly cohesive soils where AASHTO T99 procedures are applicable: Compact uniformly throughout each lift to 95%, AASHTO T99. For granular soils the moisture content shall be -2 to +2 of optimum moisture content. For clay soils the moisture content shall be 0 to +2 of optimum moisture content. 2. Predominately of rock, to 6" in diameter: Place in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer, provided material is carefully placed and large stones well distributed with voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth, sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer to distribute soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. No rocks over 6" in diameter are allowed in the backfill. 3.14 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT A. Score existing surface with a cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose of existing surface and aggregate base course. Leave 6" undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 95% AASHTO T 180. Replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these Specifications. Compact asphalt to 95% ASTM D1559; consolidate concrete with vibrators. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before pipe is to be tested. B. Hydrostatic Testing 1. General: Make pressure and leakage tests on all newly laid pipe. Test two or more valved sections not to exceed 1000 feet. Test first section of pipe laid to verify if watertight. Lay no additional pipe until first test section has passed tests. Furnish the following equipment and materials for tests, unless otherwise directed by Engineer- 2 Graduated containers 2 Pressure gauges 1 Suitable hose and suction pipe as required 2. Testing Procedure: Test each 1000 feet of line installed while trench is partially backfilled and joints are left exposed for examination for leaks. Do not conduct pressure tests until 48 hours after placement of concrete thrust blocks. After pipe has been partially backfilled, slowly let water into line. Vent to allow air in line to be released. Flush line as necessary for cleaning. Leave water in line for 24 hours prior to pressure test. Test at 1-1/2 times working pressure, calculated for low point of test section, or 150 psi, whichever is greater. Valve off pump and hold pressure in line for test. Test for two hours or as agreed to by Engineer. At end of test, operate pump until test pressure is again attained. Calibrate container of water for pump suction to determine amount of water to replace leakage. 05-12-06 WATER DISTRIBUTION SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02510-13 PROJ ECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02510 VAIL, COLORADO WATER DISTRIBUTION 3. Leakage Allowance: Leakage is quantity of water necessary to refill line at end of test period. No installation will be accepted until leakage is less than: ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE PER 1000' OF PIPE IN GPH Avg. Test Nominal Pipe Diameter - in. Pressure psi 6 8 10 12 18 200 0.64 0.85 1.06 1.28 1.91 175 0.59 0.80 0.99 1.19 1.79 150 0.55 0.74 0.92 1.10 1.66 125 0.50 0.67 0.84 1.01 1.51 100 0.45 0.60 0.75 0.90 1.35 *For pipe with 18' nominal lengths. To obtain recommended allowable leakage for pipe with 20' nominal lengths, multiply the leakage calculated from the table by 0.9. If pipeline under test contains sections of various diameters, allowable leakage will be sum of computed leakage for each size. Reduce allowable leakage proportionately for sections less than 1000 R. 3.16 FLUSHING AND DISINFECTING A. General: In accordance with AW WA C601. Acceptable chlorine disinfectants are calcium hypochlorite granules and sodium hypochlorite solutions. B. Chlorine-water solution method: Chlorine Required to Produce 25 mg/L Concentration in 100 feet of Pipe - by Diameter Pipe 100 Percent 1 Percent Diameter Chlorine Chlorine Solution In. Lb. Gal. 4 .013 .16 6 .030 .36 8 .054 .65 10 .085 1.02 12 .120 1.44 16 .217 2.60 Induce chlorine solution into pipeline at a continuous feed rate to attain a concentration of 25 Mg/L free chlorine. C. Chlorination Test: Assure valves are closed on existing system to prevent chlorine solution flowing into existing system. Retain 25 mg/L chlorinated water in pipeline for minimum of 24 hours. During retention period operate all valves and hydrants to disinfect. At end of 24 hour period, chlorine in system to be no less than 10 mg/L throughout length tested. When section being tested meets 10 mg/L chlorine after 24 hours, flush main. Water samples taken shall show no coliform organisms. If water in pipe does not meet the governing health agency requirements, repeat disinfection procedure, at Contractor's expense, until requirements are met. Furnish acceptance forms from governing agency to Engineer. 05-12-06 WATER DISTRIBUTION SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02510-14 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02510 VAIL, COLORADO WATER DISTRIBUTION 3.17 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION A. Restore all pavements, curbs, gutters, utilities, fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Engineer. Deposit all waste material in designated waste areas. Grade and shape disposal site. Complete topsoil and reseeding of site, if required. Where disposal sites are not designated, remove and dispose of all waste material off site. END OF SECTION 05-12-06 WATER DISTRIBUTION SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02510-15 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02526 VAIL, COLORADO STONE PAVING SECTION 02526 - STONE PAVING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A Related Requirements: Review the General Contract Conditions and Division One, General Requirements, which contain information and requirements that apply to this section. B Work Included: Provide stone paving and pieces, complete, as shown and as specified including: 1. Stone pavers set in sand setting bed. 2. Stone pavers set in mortar setting bed. C Related Work: 1. Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting - Section 02220 2. Site Concrete- Section 03310 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Source: Stone of specified colors shall come from a single quarry. B Applicable Standards: Apply the current or latest editions of the standards described below: ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials. C Fabricator/Installer's Qualifications: Show successful experience in stone work, including not less than 5 years experience in installation of these stone systems similar to the work required for this project 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Product Data: Submit manufacturer's latest catalogue arts and specifications for each specified product B Samples: Stone Pavers: Four (4) for each size, finish and color. 2. Grout Compound: Color sample for each type. 3. Expansion Joint Material: Two samples of each type and color. 4. On-site Sample Panels: Minimum 6 ft. square complete installation showing all finishes, colors, paving patterns and jointing materials for each type paving. Protect site sample until Final Acceptance of stone work. Dispose of all samples off site thereafter. Contractor has option to provide samples as part of final installation. Samples, however, must be approved by Landscape Architect prior to continuing work. Any rejected work shall be removed or corrected by Contractor at no cost to Owner. 05-12-2006 STONE PAVING Summary Permit Set 02526-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02526 VAIL, COLORADO STONE PAVING C Test Data: Submit copies of all laboratory test data of all stone pieces. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A Labeling: Furnish standard products in manufacturer's standard containers bearing original labels legibly showing quantity, analysis and name of manufacturer. Delivery: Deliver all materials and unload at the job site on pallets and bound in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product during hauling, handling or unloading. C Protection: Insure that pavers are not stained or chipped. Stack units at the site in accordance with the supplier's current recommendation. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen sub-grade or setting beds. Remove and replace stone paving work damaged by frost or freezing. B. Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout: Comply with the following requirements: Cold-Weather Requirements: Protect unit paver work against freezing when atmospheric temperature is 40 deg F and falling. Heat materials to provide mortar and grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. Provide the following protection for completed portions of work for 24 hours after installation when the mean daily air temperature is as indicated: below 40 deg F, cover with weather-resistant membrane; below 25 deg F cover with insulating blankets; below 20 deg F, provide enclosure and temporary heat to maintain temperature above 32 deg F. 2. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect stone paver work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of setting beds and grout. Provide artificial shade and windbreaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F and higher. a. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 or 90 deg F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph set pavers within 1 minute of spreading setting-bed mortar. 1.06 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A Review Date: Hold in conjunction with the final review of all landscape paving work. Completion: Work will be accepted upon satisfactory completion of all stone work. C Responsibility Upon Final Acceptance, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance of the work. Said assumption does not relieve Contractor of obligations under Warranty. 05-12-2006 STONE PAVING Summary Permit Set 02526 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02526 VAIL, COLORADO STONE PAVING 1.07 WARRANTY A Description: In addition to manufacturer's guarantees or warranties, warrant all work against defects in materials and workmanship by Contractor for a period of one year after Final Acceptance. Re airs: Warranty shall also cover repair of damage to all parts of the premises resulting from defects in materials and workmanship to the satisfaction of the Owner. 1.08 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A Contractor's Responsibility: Stone systems indicated establish the basic dimensions, profiles and sight lines. Within the limitations established by Drawings and Specifications, the Contractor is responsible for the fabrication and installation of the entire stone work, in conjunction with the concrete sub-slab constructed as part of the Soils Report. Tolerances and Clearances- 1 . Provide clearance for thermal movements. Assume that surface temperature of stone and concrete sub-base can change at least 100 degrees F above and below the temperature at time of setting. 2. Provide additional clearance required to accommodate manufacturing tolerance, setting tolerance and slab movement. 3. All components including adhesives and sealants must be able to withstand the specified temperature change. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GRANITE PAVING - VEHICULAR - TYPE 'D' A Items: Vehicular paving at Porte Cochere B Tie: Cold Springs Split Paver. C Source: Cold Spring Granite Contact: Jerry Cunningham, ph: 425.836.0670 D Color. Royal Sable, Camelian and Radiant Red mix.. E Finish: Thermal flamed top, split four side with sawn bottom F Thickness: 3" G Sizes: 4" x 8" 05.12-2006 STONE PAVING Summary Permit Set 02526-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02526 VAIL, COLORADO STONE PAVING 2.02 GRANITE PAVING - TYPE 'E' A Items: Pedestrian Paving and curbs at Porte Cochere, as indicated on drawings. B Tie: Cold Spring sawn pavers/curbing C Source: Cold Spring Granite Contact: Jerry Cunningham, ph: 425.836.0670 D Color & Sizes: Amber Gold; 6" x 30" and 15" x 30" E Finish: Diamond 10, sawn edges F Thickness: 2" thick 2.03 SANDSTONE PAVING - TYPE 'F' A Items: Price as alternate for paving at banquet breakout area and emergency exit walks as indicated on drawings. B Source: Colorado Stone Company, Longmont, CO Contact: ph: 303.776.0674 C Color/Tye: Colorado Rose Sandstone D Finish: Natural cleft top with split edges E Thickness: 2" F Sizes: Flagstone pattern; refer to drawings for variations 2.04 QUARTZITE FLAGSTONE PAVING - TYPE 'G' A Items: Paving at pool terrace as indicated on drawings. Provide pricing as alternate paving material at on- grade gueshmm patios, Restaurant Terrace, Lobby Terrace B Source: Gallegos Masonry, 100 Yacht Club Dr., Wolcott, Colorado or approved equal Contact ph: 970.926.3737 C Color/Type: Gray/ Silver D Finish: Standard natural cleft top with split edges E Thickness: 3/4' to 1' F Sizes: Flagstone pattern; refer to drawings for variations 05-12-2006 STONE PAVING Summary Permit Set 02526 - 4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02526 VAIL, COLORADO STONE PAVING 2.05 GRANITE'FLOWLINE INTEGRATED ART ELEMENT - TYPE T A Items: Paving band in West Meadow Drive pedestrian walkway.. B Source: Cold Spring Granite Contact: Jerry Cunningham, ph: 425.836.0670 C Color/Type: Colorado Rose Sandstone D Finish: Natural deft top with sawn edges E Thickness: 21/4" F Sizes: 6' wide x varying length, 8" to 18" 2.06 GRANITE TRUNCATED DOME PAVER - TYPE'J' A Items: ADA warning strip at Porte Cochere. B Source: Cold Spring Granite Contact Jerry Cunningham, ph: 425.836.0670 C Colortrvpe: Academy Black D Finish: Truncated Dome E Thickness: 2' F Sizes: 6" x 30", 12" x 30 and 15" x 30" 2.07 GRANITE COPING STONE -TYPE'K' A Refer to Section 13156 - Swimming Pools, Spas and Fountains 2.08 MATERIAL ASTM C33 or AASHTO M43, #10 graded clean course concrete sand. Depth as indicated on drawings. 2.09 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS A. Graded Aggregate for Sub-base: ASTM D 2940, sub-base material. B. Graded Aggregate for Base: ASTM D 2940, base material. Geotextile (if required based on Soils Report): Woven or non-woven geotextile manufactured from polyester or polypropylene fibers, with a permeability rating 10 times greater than that of soil on which paving is founded and an apparent opening size small enough to prevent passage of fines from leveling course into graded aggregate of base course below. 05-12-2006 STONE PAVING Summary Permit Set 02526 - 5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02526 VAIL, COLORADO STONE PAVING D. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with gradation requirements of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate. E. Stone Screenings for Leveling Course: Sound stone screenings complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 10. F. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 sieve. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color. 2.10 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II; natural color, white, or a blend to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207. 1. For pigmented mortars, use colored portland cement-lime mix of formulation required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard formulations. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight for mineral oxides nor 2 percent for carbon black. D Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as indicated below: 1. For joints narrower than 1/4 inch, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve. 2. For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve. 3. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural, colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone, as required to match Architect's sample. E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with record of satisfactory performance in stone mortars. F. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. ANSI All 18.4, composition as follows: Water-Emulsion Latex Additive: Add at Project site to factory-packaged dry-mortar mix specified or as recommended by latex additive manufacturer. G. Water: Potable. 2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES 05'12-2006 STONE PAVING Summary Permit Set 02526 - 6 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02526 VAIL, COLORADO STONE PAVING A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions for mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing times, and other procedures needed to produce setting-bed and joint materials of uniform quality and with optimum performance characteristics. Discard mortars and grout when they have reached their initial set. 1. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride. 2. Mixing: Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious materials, water, and aggregates in a mechanical batch mixer, unless otherwise indicated. Discard mortar and grout when they have reached initial set. B. Latex-Modified-Portland Cement Setting-Bed Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement, aggregate, and latex additive for setting bed to comply with latex additive manufacturer's written instructions and as necessary to produce stiff mixture with a moist surface when bed is ready to receive stone. C. Cement-Paste Slush Coat: Mix bond coat to a consistency similar to that of thick cream and consisting of either neat cement and water or cement, sand, and water. 1. For latex-modified-portland cement setting-bed mortar, substitute latex admixture for part or all of water according to latex additive manufacturer's written instructions. D. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Slurry Bond Coat: Proportion and mix portland cement, aggregate, and latex additive for slung bond coat to comply with latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions. E. Pointing Mortar. Provide pointing mortar mixed to match Architect's sample and complying with requirements indicated above for setting mortar, including type and the following: 1. Pigmented Pointing Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10, by weight. 2. Packaged Portland Cement-Lime Mix Mortar. Use portland cement-lime mix of selected color. 3. Colored-Aggregate Pointing Mortar. Produce color required by combining colored aggregates with portland cement of selected color. F. Job-Mixed, Pigmented Grout Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1 to 10, by weight. 2.12 PENETRATING PROTECTIVE SEALER A. ProSoCo'StandofP Limestone and Marble Protector clear, penetrating water and oil repellant protective sealer for stone paving as manufactured by ProSoCo Inc., Kansas City, KS. It shall comply with all state of Colorado regulations for the acceptable quantities of volatile organic compounds. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITION OF SUB-BASE: Verify that the aggregate base or concrete sub-slab has been installed to finish grades shown on the drawings. Obtain Landscape Architect's review and approval of finished concrete base before placing 05-12-2006 STONE PAVING Summary Permit Set 02526 - 7 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02526 VAIL, COLORADO STONE PAVING bedding and leveling course materials. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Vacuum clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles. B. Remove substances, from concrete substrates, that could impair mortar bond, including curing and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance. C. Proof-roll prepared sub-grade surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional compaction. Proceed with paver installation only after deficient sub-grades have been corrected and are ready to receive sub-base for unit pavers. 3.03 CONDITION OF PAVERS A General: Do not install paver that has chips, cracks, holes, spalls, patches, scratches, stains or other defects. B Cleaning: Clean pavers before setting by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and follow with a thorough drenching with clean water. Use only mild cleaning compounds containing no caustic or harsh fillers or abrasives. C Size Range: Do not install any piece smaller than one quarter full size of stone. D Cutting: Cut paving units with block splitter or motor driven saw equipment designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work deafly. Use fill units without cutting whenever possible. Where cutting is required, use the largest size units possible. Avoid the use of small pieces of pavers or large joint widths. E Provide steps made of stone as indicated. Install stone steps before installing adjacent pavers. 3.04 STONE PAVER ON COMPACTED BASE A. Compact soil sub-grade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 laboratory density. B. Place geotextile (if required by Soils Engineer) over prepared sub-grade, overlapping ends and edges at least 18 inches. D. Place aggregate sub-base and base over compacted sub-grade. Provide compacted thickness indicated. Compact sub-base and base to 100 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum laboratory density and screed to depth required to allow setting of pavers. E. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-112 inches, taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted. E. Set pavers with a joint as shown on the drawings, being careful not to disturb leveling base. Use string lines to keep straight lines where applicable. 05-12-2006 STONE PAVING Summary Permit Set 02526 - 8 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02526 VAIL, COLORADO STONE PAVING Spread topsoil to fill joints immediately after setting pavers into leveling course. Tamp pavers and add topsoil in joints to allow for planting or sod placement. 3.05 STONE PAVER INSTALLATION ON CONCRETE BASE A Saturate concrete sub-base with dean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove surface water about one hour before placing setting bed. B. Apply cement-paste bond coat over surface of concrete sub-base about 15 minutes before placing setting bed. Limit area of bond coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting bed. Do not exceed 1/16-inch thickness for bond coat. C. Apply mortar setting bed over cement-paste slush coat immediately after slush coat has been applied. Spread and screed setting bed to uniform thickness at sub-grade elevations required for accurate setting of pavers to finished grades indicated. D. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with stone before initial set. Cut back, bevel edge, remove, and discard setting-bed material that has reached initial set before placing pavers. E. Place stone before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing pavers on setting bed, apply uniform 1/16-inch- thick, slurry bond coat to bed or to back of each paver with a flat trowel. Tamp or beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver in a single operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set and disturb pavers for purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints. G. Spaced Joint Widths: Provide 1/2 inch nominal joint width with variations not exceeding plus or minus 118 inch. H. Point joints after setting. Fill full with mortar type and color indicated. Tool joints flat, uniform, and smooth, without visible voids. 3.06 REPAIR, CLEANING AND PROTECTION A Re air. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement B Cleaning: After all pointing has been completed; carefully clean all stone work of dirt, stains and other defacements. 2. Use stainless steel wire brushes or wool for cleaning. 3. Do not use other wire brushes or acid solutions that may cause discoloration in pavers. 05.12-2006 STONE PAVING Summary Permit Set 02526 - 9 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02526 VAIL, COLORADO STONE PAVING Protection: All completed or in progress stone work shall be protected at all times during construction until Final Acceptance. Disposal: Upon completion of work, remove from the premises all surplus materials, tools, equipment, rubbish and debris resulting from the work. 3.07 PENETRATING PROTECTIVE SEALER A. Following cleaning of installed stone pavers, apply clear penetrating oligomeric siloxane sealer to surface of pavers per manufacturers recommendations and as follows. Clean all surfaces to be treated prior to application so that they are dry, free of dust, surface dirt, efflorescence and contaminants. Sealer is highly flammable and should be handled accordingly. Follow manufacturer's safety precautions. Apply sealer as packaged, do not dilute. Apply sealant with low pressure (20 psi) airless spray equipment, protect any lawns or adjacent plant material and soils from over spray using polyethylene film. Apply sufficient material to thoroughly saturate the surface making sure to brush out excess material that does not penetrate. Surface residues, pools, and puddles will be broomed out thoroughly until they penetrate into the surface. Remove any excess sealer which has not penetrated the surface within three minutes of application. Pavement will show no sign of sealant following drying. END OF SECTION 05-12-2006 STONE PAVING Summary Permit Set 02526-10 PROJECT # 27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02530 VAIL COLORADO SANITARY SEWERAGE PARTIGENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, backfill, bedding, and installation of pipe, manholes, service wyes, service lines, force mains and all necessary appurtenances. B. Related Work: Site Clearing: Section 02230 C. Definitions: Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation: All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a CAT 375 backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket, and requiring drilling and blasting. D. Eagle River Water and Sanitation District Specifications: All work shall conform to the standard specifications for sewer lines as approved by the Eagle River Water and Sanitation District. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for pipe, fittings, and manholes; or certifications that products conform with specifications. B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, and compression test. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat, falls below 35 degrees F, and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F at time of placing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): 4"-15", ASTM D3034, Type PSM, SDR 35;18"-27", ASTM F679. Push-on joints and molded rubber gaskets. Maximum pipe length 13'. B. Ductile Iron: AWWA C151, Class 52. Push-on joints. Poly-lined or Griffin "Sewper Coat" ASTM A746. C. Yelomine: Restrained joint PVC pressure pipe and fittings. Conform to ASTM D2241 "Standard Specifications for PVC, pressure rated pipe (SDR Series)". D. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Couplings: AWWA C900, working pressure 200 psi with push-on joints ASTM D 1869. Transition coupling from SDR35 to C-900, pressure pipe shall be Harco Manufacturing 337-080, Class 150 and ASTM3139. All spigot ends shall be beveled to manufacturer's specifications. 05-12-06 SANITARY SEWERAGE SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02530-1 PROJECT # 27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02530 VAIL. COLORADO SANITARY SEWERAGE 2.02' MANHOLES A. Manhole bases: Precast concrete ASTM C478. B. Manhole Sections: ASTM C478. Precast concrete (wetcast) with the lip outside with minimum wall thickness 1/12 of internal diameter. Cones eccentric. C. Manhole Rings and Covers: Cast iron, ASTM A48 with a flat lid with the lettering "Sewer" cast on the cover. Ring and cover combined weight greater than 255 lbs., machined to fit securely. Non-rocking cover. Hot dipped in asphalt. HS20 traffic loading. D&L A-1043 or accepted equal. D. Manhole Grade Rings: An alternative to concrete grade rings is high-density polyethylene (HDPE) as defined in ASTM D1248-84 with a "wedge" design. E. Manhole Steps: Two non-skid grooves in surface of step and capable of carrying load of 1,000 pounds, six inches (6") from face of manhole. F. Manhole Joint Sealant: Double Rub-R-Nek with primer. One inch (I") on 48"-inch diameter manholes; 1 %2- inch on all larger numbers. 2.03 BEDDING A. Granular material can be 3/4"-inch or 3/8" -inch screened rock or class 6 aggregate base course (ABC) as defined by the Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT). The bedding material shall be free of corrosive properties and shall conform to the following gradation limits when tested by means of laboratory sieves: Road base must have 9595 compaction, at 295 optimum moisture content prior to installation of any pipe. All bedding shall be tamped to the spring line of the pipe. Local water district personnel shall inspect all installations prior to backfilling. Laboratory Maximum Density: Laboratory maximum density of soil shall be determined by ASTM D- 1557-78. Field Density: Density of soil shall be determined by ASTM D-1556-56 sane cone method, or by ASTM D-2922-81, nuclear method. 3/4" Screened Rock (CDOT Table 703-1, Number 7) Sieve Size Total Percent Passing by Weight 3/4 inch 100 1/2 inch 90-100 3/8 inch 40-70 No. 4 0-15 No. 8 0-5 05-12-06 SANITARY SEWERAGE SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02530-2 PROJECT # 27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02530 VAIL COLORADO SANITARY SEWERAGE 3/8" Screened Rock (CDOT Table 703-1, Number 8) Sieve Size Total Percent Passing by Weight 1/2 inch 100 3/8 inch 85-100 No. 4 10-30 No. 8 0-10 No. 16 0-5 B. In specific areas, such as where access is extremely limited, the use of on-site materials may be allowed and when used, must be on-site 1 1/Z inches minus well-graded screened material, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris or other suitable materials. Use of on-site bedding material must have prior written District and Engineer approval. C. Service line bedding shall consist of 3/8 inch or N -inch minus screened rock, select native or sand material free of any organic material. 2.04 CONCRETE MATERIAL A. General: All materials furnished from sources agreed to by the District. B. Cement: ASTM C-150 for Portland Cement, Type II. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acids, salt, alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. 2.05 CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix 1. Proportions: Cement 5-1/2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate - 43% Water - 5.5 gallons per sack Maximum size aggregate - 3/4" 2. Slump: 4" maximum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5% - 7% B. Job-Mixed Concrete Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less than ten (10) minutes after all materials are in drum. 05-12-06 SANITARY SEWERAGE SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02530-3 PROJECT # 27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02530 VAIL. COLORADO SANITARY SEWERAGE C. Ready-Mixed Concrete Proportioned, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. 2.06 TRACER WIRE A. applications. 2.07 MARKETING/LOCATING DISK A. The District will provide 3M "Green" marking disks to the contractor. The contractor shall ensure their correct installation. 2.08 NON-DETECTABLE MARKING TAPE A. The installation of "green" marking tape is required on all sewer mains and service lines. The tape shall be installed approximately two feet (2') above the main or line. The tape shall meet the following specifications: 4-mil thick PVC material Tracer wire shall be ten (10) gauge insulated copper wire and be required on all curve-linear 2. Solid green color with black lettering 3. Six inches (6') in width 2.09 CASING SPACERS A. Carrier pipes to be installed inside casings shall be installed with self-restraining casing spacers. Casing spacers shall provide axial thrust restraint to prevent pipe joint separation during and after installation. They shall also provide dielectric insulation between the carrier pipe and the casing and facilitate installation of the carrier pipe into the casing. Restrained casing spacers shall be provided at all pipe joints. In addition, casing spacers shall be installed every ten feet (10') of the pipeline to support the pipe barrel and the weight of its contents. Restrained casing spacers shall be Uni-Flange Series UFRCS 1300 or URFCS 1390, or an approved equal restrained joint device and Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing Company, Model CCM casing spacers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. B. Rock Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation. C. Blasting: In general, blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by the local authority having jurisdiction is granted. All explosives and appurtenances shall be transported, handled, stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local, state and federal governments, as applicable. All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of life and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24-hour notification to Engineer. 05-12-06 SANITARY SEWERAGE SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02530-4 PROJECT # 27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02530 VAIL COLORADO SANITARY SEWERAGE D. Trench Support: The trench shall be adequately supported and the safety of workers provided for as required by the most recent standards adopted by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards Board. Sheeting and shoring shall be utilized where required to prevent any excessive widening or sloughing of the trench, which may be detrimental to human safety, to the pipe and appurtenances being installed, to existing utilities, to existing structures, or to any other existing facility or item. 3.02 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM AND EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL A. If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure, then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed, the subgrade shall be accepted by the District. 3.03 BEDDING A. Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of4" below bottom ofpipe to centerline for entire width of trench. 3.04 UNDERDRAIN A. Water seeping from trench banks, but not flowing in trench bottom: Install gravel underdrain in accordance with drawings. B. Water flowing in trench bottom: Install underdrain pipe in addition to gravel where water volume will fill a 4" pipe 1/4 full. Cleanouts at each manhole in conformance with drawings. C. Daylight all underdrains as shown on drawings or as directed by Engineer. 3.05 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Construct pipe accurately to line and grade shown on drawings. Pipe installation will be lamped daily by Engineer. Remove and replace pipe not conforming to line and grade at Contractor's expense. B. Install to manufacturer's recommendations, continuously upgrade. Bell ends face upgrade. Prior to making joints, clean and dry all surfaces. Use lubricants in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations for insertion of pipe in joint. Set pipe in position and check line and grade. Keep dirt from entering all exposed pipe ends. Joints watertight. C. Wyes and Risers for Service Connections: Angle upward so 1/8 bend connected to fitting will make service line invert equal to inside crown of sewer main. Where elevation of top of service is more than 12' below finished grade, install riser pipe as directed by Engineer. 3.06 WATER LINE CROSSING A. Normal Conditions: Whenever possible, lay water mains over sanitary sewers to provide vertical separation of at least 18" between invert of water main and crown of sewer. B. Unusual Conditions: If above separation cannot be met, use following: Sewer passing over or less than 18" under water main: a. One continuous length of watertight pressure pipe C900 PVC 20 feet long centered on water main. Joints between different pipes shall have a transition coupling Harco Manufacturing 337-080, Class 150, ASTM 3139. All spigot ends shall be beveled to manufacturers specifications. 05-12-06 SANITARY SEWERAGE SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02530-5 PROJECT # 27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02530 VAIL COLORADO SANITARY SEWERAGE 2. Water mains passing under sewers: If vertical separation less than 18", provide structural support for sewer. 3.07 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION A. Manhole: Construct in accordance with drawings. Extend concrete manhole base at least 8" below pipe barrel. Slope floor of manhole from centerline of pipe to maximum of 2" above top of pipe at face of manhole. Shape invert when manhole is set. Construct side branches with as large radius of curvature as possible to connect to main invert. Inverts shall be smooth and clean with no obstructions, allowing insertion of an expandable plug in pipe. Place complete and continuous roll of joint sealant on base ring in sufficient quantity so there will be no spaces allowing infiltration. Join each succeeding manhole section in similar manner. Trim away all excess material and repair all lifting holes. Turn eccentric cone and steps away from roadway ditch. B. Manhole Ring and Cover: Install at grade of finished surface. Where surface will be completed after manhole construction, set top of cone so maximum of six, two-inch reinforced concrete rings will adjust ring and cover to final grade. 3.08 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLE A. Make connections to existing manholes, where no pipe is stubbed out, in similar manner as new manhole. Break small opening in existing manhole as necessary to insert new pipe and attain watertight seal. Chip existing concrete bench inside manhole to provide enough thickness for mortar bed to make new smooth continuous invert. Place expandable waterstop around portion of sewer pipe inserted into existing manhole. Use expandable grout to completely fill hole in manhole to create watertight repair. 3.09 SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LINES A. Place true to line and grade in accordance with drawings, from main line to house service, in shortest direct route. Locate 10' from all water lines. Terminate 5' from lowest comer of lot or as shown on drawings. Where wyes have not been installed in main sewer, tap by machine drilling hole in main, sized to fit saddle for service line. Each wye or drilled tap and saddle shall be inspected prior to backfilling. Service line minimum grade of 1/4" per foot. If service line is to be stopped at property line, place 6-foot steel fence post at end, extending 2' above finished ground. Place watertight plug in end of service line. 3.10 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible in order to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb, or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing with or without additional cement, aggregate or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, rain, and flowing water, for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing, cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs exposed by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. 05-12-06 SANITARY SEWERAGE SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02530-6 PROJECT t# 27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02530 VAIL COLORADO SANITARY SEWERAGE 3.11 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use 3/4" screened rock for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean soil, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris, or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to 1' above top of pipe for entire trench width. Place in lifts to a density of 90% AASHTO T99. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No rocks over 6" in trench. 3.12 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until providing one acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs, or compaction is not being achieved, then demonstrate new method. B. Compaction requirements for all trenches: 1. Predominantly of cohesive soils where AASHTO T99 procedures are applicable: Compacted uniformly throughout each lift to 95% AASHTO T99. For granular soils the moisture content shall be -2 to +2 of the optimum moisture content. For clay soil the moisture content shall be 0 to +2 of the optimum moisture content. 2. Predominately of rock 6" in diameter: Place in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer, provided material is carefully placed and large stones well distributed with voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth, sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer to distribute soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. No rocks larger than 6" in diameter are allowed in the backfill. Trenches backfill below foundations shall have the following characteristics: Sieve Size Maximum Percent Passing Upper Limit 3" 100 Lower Limit No. 4 5 The trench backfcll shall be compacted using a vibratory compactor and should be compacted to at least 98 percent of the standard Proctor density (ASTM D698). 3.13 3.14 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT A. Score existing surface with cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose of existing surface and aggregate base course leave 6" undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfclled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements, or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 95% AASHTO T180. Replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact asphalt to 95% ASTM D1559; consolidate concrete with vibrators. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before pipe is to be tested. 05-12-06 SANITARY SEWERAGE SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02530-7 PROJECT # 27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02530 VAIL COLORADO SANITARY SEWERAGE B. Testing General: Conduct infiltration or exfiltration test for each section between manholes. Test fast section of pipe laid to verify if watertight. Testing may be required during course of work where infiltration appears to be grater than maximum allowable, or quality of work is questionable. No sewer line will be accepted where water tightness tests show leakage exceeding 200 gallons per inch diameter per mile per day. Flush and clean sewer line prior to testing, wetting pipe, and cleaning out debris. Plug all pipe outlets to resist test pressure. Infiltration Test: In high ground water table installation only. Plug upper manhole to determine leakage in section of line between consecutive manholes. Record quantity of water collected in time period to calculate infiltration rate. Exfiltration Test by Air: Test each section of pipe between consecutive manholes to determine test duration for section by computation from Air Test Tables. Pressure-holding time is based on an average holding pressure of 3 psi gauge or a drop from 3.5 psi to 2.5 psi gauge. Add air until internal air pressure of sewer line is raised to approximately 4.0 psi gauge. After intemal pressure of approximately 4.0 psi is obtained, allow time for air pressure to stabilize. Pressure will normally show some drop until temperature of air in test section stabilizes. When pressure has stabilized and is at or above starting test pressure of 3.5 psi gauge, commence test. Before starting test, pressure may be allowed to drop to 3.5 psi. Record drop in pressure for test period. If pressure has dropped more than 1.0 psi gauge during test line has failed. Test may be discontinued when prescribed test time has been completed even though 1.0 psi drop has not occurred. ASTM C828 "Low Pressure Air Test for Sanitary Sewers". Pipe Size Time Inches Minutes 4 2-1/2 6 4 8 5 10 6-1/2 12 7-1/2 15 9-1/2 18 12 21 14 24 15-1/2 3.15 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION A. Restore all pavements, curbs, gutters, utilities, fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Engineer. Deposit all waste material in designated waste areas. Grade and shape disposal site. Complete topsoil and reseeding of site, is required. Where disposal sites are not designated, remove and dispose of all waster material off site. END OF SECTION 05-12-06 SANITARY SEWERAGE SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02530-8 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02531 VAIL, COLORADO UNIT PAVERS SECTION 02531- UNIT PAVERS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A This Section includes the following: 1. Precast Concrete Unit Pavers set on a compacted sand setting bed. a. 60mm (2-3181 thick for pedestrian areas and sidewalks b. 80mm (31 thick for vehicular use areas (West Meadow Drive) 2. Edge restraints for unit pavers. B. Related Sections include the following: Excavating, Backfilfing & Compacting - Section 02220, for compacted sub-grade and sub-base course un- der unit pavers. 2. Fine Grading - Section 02210 3. Site Concrete - Section 03310 1.3 SUBMITTALS A Product Data: For the following: Manufacturer's literature for color, texture, installation and pattern alternatives for each unit paver type shown on the plans. 2. Manufacturer's certifications of materials and testing - compressive strength, resistance to spalling and efflo- rescence, installation instructions and warranty. 3. Manufacturer's literature for edge restraint B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturers color samples consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of unit paver indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of material for joints and accessories involving color selection. C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated; in sets for each color, texture, and pat- tern specified, showing the full range of variations expected In these characteristics. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance' Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include fists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of ar- chitects and owners, and other information specified. 0407-2006 UNIT PAVERS Pmgress Construdan Docwwts 02531-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02531 VAIL, COLORADO UNIT PAVERS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed unit paver installations similar in material, de- sign, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of suc- cessful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material from one source with re- sources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. C. Mockups: Install a 7 It. x 7 ft. (2 m x 2 m) paver. This area will be used to determine, joint sizes, lines, laying pat- tem(s), color(s), and texture of the job. This area shall be the standard from which the work will be judged. Consid- eration shall be given with regard to differences in age of materials from time of mock-up erection to time of actual product delivery: 1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, I not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting unit paver installation. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Comple- tion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver concrete pavers to the site in steel banded, plastic banded, or plastic wrapped cubes capable of transfer by fork lift or damp lift. Unload pavers at job site in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product. B. Protect unit pavers and aggregate during storage and construction against soiling or contamination from earth and other materials. Cover pavers with plastic or use other packaging materials that will prevent rust marks from steel strapping. C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious ma- terials that have become damp. D. Sand shall be covered with waterproof covering to prevent exposure to rainfall or removal by wind. The covering shall be secured in place. E. Store liquids in tightly dosed containers protected from freezing. Store asphalt cement and other bituminous materials in tightly dosed containers. G. Coordinate delivery and paving schedule to minimize interference with normal use of buildings adjacent to paving. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen sub-grade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work damaged by frost or freezing. 0407.2006 UNrr PAVERS Pray m Construction Documents 02531-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02531 VAIL, COLORADO UNIT PAVERS B. Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Cold-Weather Requirements: Protect unit paver work against freezing when atmospheric temperature is 40 deg F and falling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS A. Paving Type'B'- Walkways 1. Thickness: 6.0 cm for pedestrian areas and 8.0 cm in vehicular area. 2. Size: Soldier Course- 4'x8" paver unit Herringbone Field - 4"x8' paver unit 3. Color: 'Vail Town Blend' 4. Supplied by: Pavestone Company, Denver, CO: (800) 289-2562 B. Paving Type'H'- Rumble Strips at West Meadow Drive 1. Thickness: 8.0 cm in vehicular area. 2. Size: Soldier: 4"x4" paver unit 3. Color., 'Charcoal' 5. Supplied by: Pavestone Company, Denver, CO. (800) 289-2562 C. Pavers shall meet the following requirements set forth in ASTM C 936, Standard Specification for Interlocking Con- crete Paving Units: 1. Average compressive strength of 8,000 psi (55 MPa) with no individual unit under 7,200 psi (50 MPa). 2. Average absorption of 5% with no unit greater than 7% when tested in accordance with ASTM C 140. 3. Resistance to 50 freeze-thaw cycles when tested in accordance with ASTM C 67. 4. Pigment in concrete pavers shall conform to ASTM C. 979. 5. Material shall be manufactured in individual layers on production pallets. 6. Materials shall be manufactured to produce a solid homogeneous matrix in the produced unit 7. All units shag be sound and free of defects that would interfere with the proper placing of unit or impair the strength or permanence of the construction. 8. Minor cracks incidental to the usual methods of manufacture, or chipping resulting from customary methods of handling in shipment and degvery, shall not be deemed grounds for rejection 0447-2006 UNIT PAVERS Progress Constr x0m Documents 02531-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02531 VAIL, COLORADO UNIT PAVERS 2.2 ACCESSORIES B. Edge Restraints: Commercial galvanized steel or aluminum edging with loops or holes to receive stakes at maxi- mum 36 inches o.c., and at least 3 steel stakes 15 inches long for each section: Border Concepts, Inc. 2. Ryerson: J. T. Ryerson & Son, Inc 3. Triangular or L shaped edges 3116 inch (4.8 mm) thick. 2.3 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS A. Sub-base: Graded Aggregate or foam for Base: Compact to density specified under Excavation. B. Geotextile: Woven or non-woven geotextile manufactured from polyester or polypropylene fibers, with a permeability rating 10 times greater than that of soil on which paving is founded and an apparent opening size small enough to prevent passage of fines from leveling course into graded aggregate of base course below. C. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with gradation require- ments of ASTM C-33 for fine aggregate. D. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 sieve. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify that sub-grade preparation, compacted density and elevations conform to the specifications. Compaction of the soil sub-grade to at least 95% Standard Proctor Density per ASTM D 698 is recommended. 98% Standard Proc- tor Density per ASTM D 1557 shall be required for areas subject to continual vehicular traffic. Stabilization of the subgrade and/or base material may be necessary with weak or saturated sub-grade soils. The Architect/Engineer should inspect subgrade preparation, elevations, and conduct density tests for conformance to specifications. C. Verify that geotextiles, if applicable, have been placed according to specifications. D. Verify that aggregate base materials, thickness, compaction, surface tolerances, and elevations conform to the specifications. E. Verify location, type, installatign and elevations of edge restraints around the perimeter area to be paved. Verify that base is dry, uniform, even, and ready to support sand, pavers, and imposed loads. G. Beginning of bedding sand and paver installation means acceptance of base and edge restraints. 04-07-2006 UNIT PAVERS Progress Construction Documents =I -4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02531 VAIL, COLORADO UNIT PAVERS 3.2 PREPARATION A. Proof-roll prepared subgrade surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional compaction. Pro- ceed with unit paver installation only after deficient subgrades have been corrected and are ready to receive unit pavers. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might be visible or cause staining in finished work. B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. C. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide dean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cut ling is not acceptable. D. Joint Pattern: Custom for each unit paver type per plans, specifications and approved shop drawings. E. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1132-inch unit-to-unit offset from flush Oippage) nor 118 inch in 10 feet from level, or indi- cated slope, for finished surface of paving. F. Provide edge restraints where indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers. 1. Install edge restraints to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install stakes at intervals required to hold edge restraints in place during and after unit paver installation. 3.4 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED PAVER APPLICATIONS A. Place sub-base material over compacted subgrade or structure. Provide compacted thickness required to meet final grades. Compact base to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum laboratory density and screed to depth required to allow setting of pavers. B. Place sand leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-112 inches, taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted. C. Treat leveling base with soil sterilizer to inhibit growth of grass and weeds. D. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1116 inch and a maximum of 118 inch, being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars. Use string lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between units that exceed 318 inch with pieces cut to fit from full-size unit pavers. 1. When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only unit pavers with spacer bars on sides of each unit. E. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000-lbf compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Perform at least three passes across paving with vibrator. Vibrate under the following con& bons: 1. After edge pavers are installed and there is a completed surface or before. surface is exposed to rain. 2. Before ending each day's work, fully compact installed concrete pavers to within 36 inches of the laying face. Cover open layers with non-staining plastic sheets overlapped 48 inches on each side of the laying face to protect it from rain. 047-2M UNrr PAVERS Progress Consbuction Dommmts 02531-5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02531 VAIL, COLORADO UNIT PAVERS F. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint fill- ing. G. Where required apply sealantibinder to joints. H. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints. 1. Repeat joint-filling process 30 days later. END OF SECTION 02530 04-07-2M6 UNIT PAVERS Progress Construction Documents 02531-6 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02580 VAIL COLORADO ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION AND GAS SYSTEMS 1 PARTIGENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, rock excavation, blasting, rock disposal, dewatering, backfill, bedding, compaction, installation of conduits, vaults, pads and all necessary appurtenances and coordination with the telephone, cable television, electric and gas companies. B. Related Work: Site Clearing: Section 02230 C. Definitions: Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. Rock Excavation: All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket with bucket curling force and stick crowd force 35,000 lbs each, and requiring drilling and blasting. D. Utility Company Specifications: All work shall conform to the standard specifications of the telephone company, the cable television company, the electric company and the gas company. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for pipe, fittings, and vaults; or certifications that products conform with specifications. B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, and compression test. C. Permits: Submit copies of all permits issued for project. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat, falls below 35 degrees F, and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F at time of placing. PART2PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): 2"-8", Schedule 40 PVC. Electric rated for electric application. B. Electric primary conduit supplied by Holy Cross Energy. C Gas pipe to be supplied and place by gas company. 05-12-06 ELECTRIC, COMMUNICATION AND GAS SYSTEMS SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02580-1 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02580 VAIL, COLORADO ELECTRIC. COMMUNICATION AND GAS SYSTEMS 2.02 VAULTS A. All switchgear, transformer, splice vaults, pads, and bases to be supplied by Holy Cross Energy. 2.03 BEDDING A. Granular material - 3/4" screened rock. B. On-site 1-1/2" minus well graded screened material, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris, or other suitable materials. Use of on-site bedding material must have prior written approval of the utility company and Engineer. 2.04 CONCRETE MATERIAL A. General: All materials furnished from sources agreed to by the District. B. Cement: ASTM C-150 for Portland Cement, Type II. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acids, salt, alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. 2.05 CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix 1. Proportions: Cement 5-1/2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate - 43% Water - 5.5 gallons per sack Maximum size aggregate - 3/4" 2. Slump: 4" maximum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5% - 7% B. Job-Mixed Concrete Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less than ten (10) minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready Mixed Concrete Proportioned, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. J 05-12-06 ELECTRIC, COMMUNICATION AND GAS SYSTEMS SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02580-2 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02580 VAIL COLORADO ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION AND GAS SYSTEMS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. B. Rock Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation C. Blasting: In general, blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by the local authority having jurisdiction is granted. All explosives and appurtenances shall be transported, handled, stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local, state and federal governments, as applicable. All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of life and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24 hour notification to Owner, Engineer and Fire Department. D. Trench Support: The trench shall be adequately supported and the safety of workers provided for as required by the most recent standards adopted by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards Board. Sheeting and shoring shall be utilized where required to prevent any excessive widening or sloughing of the trench, which may be detrimental to human safety, to the pipe and appurtenances being installed, to existing utilities, to existing structures, or to any other existing facility or item. 3.02 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM AND EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL A. If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure, then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed, the subgrade shall be accepted by the Engineer. 3.03 BEDDING A. Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 3" below bottom of pipe to centerline for entire width of trench. 3.04 UNDERDRAIN A. Water seeping from trench banks, but not flowing in trench bottom: Install gravel underdrain in accordance with drawings. B. Water flowing in trench bottom: Install underdrain pipe in addition to gravel where water volume will fill a 4" pipe 1/4 full. Cleanouts at each manhole in conformance with drawings. C. Daylight all underdrains as shown on drawings or as directed by Engineer. 3.05 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Construct pipe accurately to line and grade shown on drawings. Remove and replace pipe not conforming to line and grade at Contractor's expense. B. Install to manufacturer's recommendations, continuously upgrade. Bell ends face upgrade. Prior to C making joints, clean and dry all surfaces. Use lubricants in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations for insertion of pipe in joint. Set pipe in position and check line and grade. Keep dirt from entering all exposed pipe ends. Joints watertight. 05-12-06 ELECTRIC, COMMUNICATION AND GAS SYSTEMS SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02580-3 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02580 VAIL COLORADO ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION AND GAS SYSTEMS 3.06 PADS AND VAULTS A. Install pads and vaults to line and grade shown on drawings. 3.07 PULL STRING A. Pull string shall be labeled to identify which utility company or spare conduit the use of the conduit is intended for. 3.08 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible in order to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb, or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, rain, and flowing water, for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing, cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs exposed by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. 3.09 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use 3/4" screened rock or on-site screened material (if approved by Engineer) for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean soil, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris, or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to above top of pipe for entire trench width. Place in lifts to a density of 90% AASHTO T99. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No rocks over 6" in diameter in top 12" of trench. 3.10 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until providing one acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs, or compaction is not being achieved, then demonstrate new method. B. Compaction requirements for all trenches: Predominantly of cohesive soils where AASHTO T99 procedures are applicable: Compacted uniformly throughout each lift to 95%AASHTO T99. For granular soils the moisture content shall be -2 to +2 of the optimum moisture content. For clay soils the moisture content shall be 0 to +2 of the optimum moisture content. 2. Predominately of rock 6" in diameter: Place in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer, provided material is carefully placed and large stones well distributed with voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth, sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer to distribute soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate 05-12-06 ELECTRIC, COMMUNICATION AND GAS SYSTEMS SUMMARY PERMIT SET 025804 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02580 VAIL COLORADO ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION AND GAS SYSTEMS compaction prior to placing additional lifts. No rocks over 6" in diameter shall be backfilled. 3.11 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT A. Score existing surface with cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose of existing surface and aggregate base course leave 6" undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements, or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 95% AASHTO T180. Replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact asphalt to 95% ASTM D1559; consolidate concrete with vibrators. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before pipe is to be tested. B. Testing General: Conduct testing in accordance with procedures approved by the appropriate utility company. 3.13 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION A. Restore all pavements, curbs, gutters, utilities, fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Engineer. Deposit all waste material in designated waste areas. Grade and shape disposal site. Complete topsoil and reseeding of site, is required. Where disposal sites are not designated, remove and dispose of all waste material off site. END OF SECTION 05-12-06 ELECTRIC, COMMUNICATION AND GAS SYSTEMS SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02580-5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02620 VAIL, COLORADO SUBDRAINAGE SYSTEMS SECTION 02620 - SUBDRAINAGE SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for providing underground subdrainage systems, including: 1. Perimeter drainage piping system. 2. Prefabricated in-plane wall drainage system (composite drainage board). B. Related Sections: 1. Excavation and compaction are specified in Section 02220. 2. Waterproofing is specified in Section 07170. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Furnish product data for each type of foundation drainage material required. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and interfacing with total site drainage system. C. Certification: Signed by Contractor and installer that materials conform to specified requirements and were successfully checked and tested prior to covering with filtering and drainage fill. 1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate foundation drain work with adjacent earthwork backfilling operations. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 DRAINAGE PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Furnish drainage pipe complete with bends, reducers, adapters, couplings, collars, and joint materials. B. Perforated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe: ASTM D2729. C. Joint Screening: Heavy mesh burlap, coal-tar saturated felt, 18-14 mesh copper screening, corrosion-resistant metal bands, or synthetic drainage fabric. 2.02 COMPOSITE DRAINAGE BOARD A. Approved Manufacturers: American Wick Drain Corp. 'Amerdrain 500", Akzo Industrial Systems Co. "Enkadrain 9120", Grace Construction Products "Hydroduct 2", Mirafi, Inc. "Miradrain 6200" or approved equal. B. General: Provide prefabricated composite drainage board as part of overall foundation drainage system. C. Drainage Core: Manufacturer's standard three-dimensional, nonbiodegradable, plastic material designed to effectively conduct water to foundation drainage system under maximum soil pressures. D. Filter Fabric: Manufacturer's standard nonwoven geotextile fabric of polypropylene or polyester fibers, or a combination. 2.03 SOIL MATERIALS A. Drainage Fill: Evenly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural sand with 100-percent passing a 1/2-inch sieve and 0- to 5-percent passing a No. 50 sieve. B. Filtering Material: Evenly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural sand, with 100-percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0- to 5-percent passing a No. 50 sieve. 05.12-06 SUBDRAINAGE SYSTEMS Summary Permit Set 02620-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02620 VAIL, COLORADO SUBDRAINAGE SYSTEMS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Filtering Material: Place supporting layer of filtering material over compacted subgrade where drainage pipe is to be laid, and compact to a depth not less than 4-inches, or as indicated. After testing drain lines, place additional filtering material to a 4-inch depth around sides and top of drains. Laying Drain Pipe: Lay drain pipe solidly bedded in filtering material to true grades and alignment, and continuous slope in direction of flow. Provide full bearing for each pipe section throughout its length. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down and joints tightly closed in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Provide collars and couplings as required. Provide recesses in excavation bottom to receive bells for drain pipe having bell and spigot ends. Lay pipe with bells facing up slope with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell. Testing Drain Lines: Visually check lines before backfilling. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and retest system until satisfactory results are obtained. After testing drain lines, place additional filtering material to a depth of 4-inches around sides and top of drains. Composite Drainage Board: Coordinate placement of drainage mat with other foundation drainage materials. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for securing matting to substrate. Use adhesives and mechanical fasteners as recommended by matting manufacturer. Lap edges of fabric and extend fabric around foundation drainage pipe in accordance with mat manufacturer's recommendations. Protect in-place matting during backfill operations in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not use drainage mat as protection board over waterproof membrane unless otherwise approved by membrane manufacturer. Drainage Fill: Place drainage fill over drain lines after testing and covering with filtering material. Cover to a minimum width of 6-inches on each side, and above top of pipe. Place fill material in layers not exceeding 3-inches in loose depth and compact. Overlay drainage fill material with one layer of 15-pound asphalt saturated felt or synthetic drainage fabric; overlap edges at least 4-inches. Fill to Grade: Apply fill material over compacted drainage fill at footing drains, placing material in layers not exceeding 12-inches in loose depth or as approved by the Soils Engineer and compact. Carry fill to indicated finish elevations and slope away from building. END OF SECTION 05.12-06 SUBDRAINAGE SYSTEMS Summary Permit Set 02620-2 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02630 VAIL COLORADO STORM DRAINAGE PART 1GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Excavation, backfill, bedding, and installation of pipe, manholes, catch basins, inlets, outlets, underdrains, irrigation ditches, channelization, detention storage, siphons and all necessary appurtenances. B. Related Work: 1. Site clearing: Section 02230 C. Definition: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation: All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket with bucket curling force and stick crowd force of 35,000 lbs. each, and requiring drilling and blasting. 1.02 SUBMITTAL A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for. 1. Precast Manholes 2. Precast Catch Basins 3. Frames, Grates, Covers B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, and compression test. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat falls below 35 degrees F. and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F. at time of placing. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Non-Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C 14 B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C76, circular; ASTM 506, arch; ASTM 507, vertical or horizontal elliptical. Class pipe as shown on drawings. C. Concrete End Section: Same ASTM specification as pipe. Equivalent in area as circular pipe. D. Corrugated Steel Pipe and Arches: AASHTO M36, gauge as shown on drawings. Bands shall conform to following: 05-12-06 STORM DRAINAGE SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02630-1 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02630 VAIL COLORADO STORM DRAINAGE Pipe Size Corrugations Number Bolts Inches 2-2/3" x 1/2" 3" x 1" 6-30 7" - 2 ea 36-60 12" 14" 3 ea 66-120 24" 20" 5 ea Thickness of band one gauge less than pipe but not less than 16 gauge. E. Corrugated Steel Pipe End Section: Sizes and dimensions shown on drawings. Materials same as corrugated steel pipe. F. Bituminous Coating: Where required on corrugated steel pipe and fittings, AASHTO M190, Type A, with minimum thickness of 0.03". Coupling bands fully coated. 2.02 UNDERDRAIN PIPE A. Corrugated Steel: AASHTO M36 Type III. Holes 3/8" double row each side of pipe for 6"-10" size pipe. Triple row each side of pipe for 12"-21" pipe. Spaced in center of each depressed corrugation nearest to center pipe. Install hole row each side of pipe for 6"-10" pipe; triple row each side of pipe for 12"-21" pipe. B. Rigid PVC Schedule 35. C. Flexible Polypropelene or Polyethylene/Hancor. 2.03 PREFABRICATED INLETS AND OUTLETS A. Corrugated Steel Units: Conform to drawing dimensions, AASHTO M36. Bituminous coating when specified, AASHTO M190, Type A. Steps fabricated into units. B. Precast Concrete Units: In accordance with drawings, ASTM C478 and C789, wall "B", wall thickness 1/12 internal diameter. Steps precast into units. 2.04 MANHOLE A. Manhole Bases: Precast concrete. Manhole base and first barrier section cast monolithic per ASTM - C478. B. Manhole Sections: ASTM C478. Precast concrete with minimum wall thickness 1/12 of internal diameter. Cones eccentric. C. Manhole Ring and Cover: Cast iron, ASTM A48. Ring and cover combined weight greater than 400 lbs., machined to fit securely. Non-rocking cover. Hot dipped in asphalt. D. Manhole Steps: Two non-skid grooves in the surface of step and capable of carrying load of 1,000 lbs. 6" from face of manhole. E. Manhole Joint Sealant: RubberNek. 05-12-06 STORM DRAINAGE SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02630-2 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02630 VAIL COLORADO STORM DRAINAGE 2.05 SLOTTED DRAIN A. AASHTO M36 with grate assembly, ASTM A123. Joint and couplers of ring compression type. Where required, expanded wire mesh attached across top of drain opening. Fittings provided with annular ends for hugger-type bands. 2.06 FRAMES, GRATES, COVERS, AND STEP A. Metal units conform to drain dimensions and to following for designated material. B. Gray Iron Castings: AASHTO M105. C. Carbon-Steel Castings: AASHTO M103. D. Ductile Iron Castings: ASTM A536. E. Structural Steel: AASHTO M 183 and ASTM A283, Grade B. Galvanizing, where specified, AASHTO M111. 2.07 BEDDING A. Pipe and culvert - roadbase, percent by weight passing square mesh sieves: 3/4", 100; No.4, 30-65; No. 8, 25-55; No. 200, 3-12. B. Underdrain - washed gravel: percent by weight passing square mesh sieves: 1", 100%; 3/4", 95-100%; No.4, 0-5%. 2.08 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. General: All materials furnished from sources approved by Engineer. B. Cement: ASTM C150 for Portland Cement, Type II. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps, caked cement and have been exposed to inclement weather shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acids, salt, alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. 2.09 CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix: 1. Proportions: Cement 5-1/2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate 43% Water 5.5 Gallons per sack Maximum size aggregate 3/4" 2. Slump: 4" maximum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5%-7% 05-12-06 STORM DRAINAGE SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02630-3 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02630 VAIL COLORADO STORM DRAINAGE B. Job Mixed Concrete: Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less than 10 minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready Mixed Concrete: Proportioned, mixed, and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. B. Rock Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation C. Blasting: In general blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by the local authority having jurisdiction is granted. All explosives and appurtenances shall be transported, handled, stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local, state and federal governments, as applicable. All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of life and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24 hour notification to Engineer. 3.02 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM, EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL A. If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure, then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed, the subgrade shall be accepted by the Engineer. 3.03 BEDDING OTHER THAN UNDERDRAINS A. Pipe: Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 4" below bottom of pipe to centerline for full width of trench. B. Culvert: Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 6" below bottom of pipe to centerline of pipe for entire width of trench. 3.04 PIPE INSTALLATION A. General: For new embankments, place fill so width each side of pipe is at least five (5) times pipe diameter. After embankment is placed, proceed with trenching. Begin all pipe installation at downstream end. Bell or groove ends of rigid conduit and outside circumferential laps of flexible conduit facing upstream. Place flexible conduits with longitudinal laps or seams at sides. B. Corrugated Steel Pipe: Remove all loose excavated materials from bottom of trench and install bedding to required thickness. Install pipe true to line and grade. Install remaining bedding material along sides of pipe to avoid any voids. Repair bituminous coating damage using similar coating material. Lubricate coupler bands. Vertical elongation caused by backfill operation shall not exceed 3% of pipe diameter. Compact backfill to 90% AASHTO T99 and continue to F over top of pipe. 05-12-06 STORM DRAINAGE SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02630-4 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02630 VAIL COLORADO STORM DRAINAGE C. Concrete Pipe: Extend bedding around bell where bell and spigot pipe is used. Place pipe on bedding as shown on drawings. Place remaining bedding along pipe sides with no voids. Compact backfill to 95% AASHTO T99 and continue to 1' over pipe. D. Underdrain Pipe: General: Install to lines and grades shown on drawings. Extend underdrain material a minimum of 6" over top of pipe. Cover underdrain material for entire width of trench with filter fabric. If shown on drawings, line trench with fabric before installing pipe and underdrain material. 2. Concrete Pipe: Install with bell resting on trench bottom facing up grade, with underdrain material supporting pipe. 3. Corrugated Steel or PVC Pipe: Holes or perforations placed down with maximum 1" underdrain material under pipe. Joint according to manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 SLOTTED DRAIN INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with drawings. Trench as narrow as possible and backfill to create uniform foundation side support. Install true to line and grade. 3.06 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION A. Manhole: Construct in accordance with drawings. Extend concrete manhole base at least 8" below pipe barrel. Slope floor of manhole from centerline of pipe to maximum of 2" above top of pipe at face of manhole. Shape invert after manhole is set. Construct side branches with as large radius of curvature as possible to connect to main invert. Inverts shall be smooth and clean with no obstructions, allowing insertion of expandable plug in pipe. Place complete and continuous roll of joint sealant on base ring in sufficient quantity, so there will be no spaces allowing infiltration. Join each succeeding manhole section in similar manner. Trim away all excess material and repair all lifting holes. Turn eccentric cone and steps away from roadway ditch. B. Manhole Ring and Cover: Install at grade of finished surface. Where surface will be completed after manhole construction, set top of cone so maximum of six - two inch thick reinforced concrete rings will adjust ring and cover to final grade. 3.07 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLE A. Make connections to existing manholes, where no pipe is stubbed out, in similar manner as new manhole. Break small opening in existing manhole as necessary to insert new pipe and attain watertight seal. Chip existing concrete bench inside manhole to provide enough thickness for mortar bed to make new smooth continuous invert. Place expandable waterstop around portion of sewer pipe inserted into existing manhole. Use expandable grout to completely fill hole in manhole to create watertight repair. 3.08 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb, or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. 05-12-06 SUMMARY PERMIT SET STORM DRAINAGE 02630-5 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02630 VAIL COLORADO STORM DRAINAGE C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, rain, or flowing water, for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing, cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. 3.09 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe:- Use 3/4" road base for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to V above top of pipe. Place in lifts to a density of 90% AASHTO T99, at a point 6" above top of pipe. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No rocks over 6" in diameter in top 12" of trench. 3.10 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until providing one acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs, or required compaction is not being achieved, then demonstrate new method. B. Compaction requirements for all trenches within limits of pavement, shoulders, or back of curbs: 1. Predominantly of cohesive soils where AASHTO T99 procures are applicable: Compact uniformly throughout each lift to 95% AASHTO T99. For granular soils the moisture content shall be -2 to +2 of the optimum moisture content. For clay soils the moisture content shall be 0 to +2 of the optimum moisture content. Predominantly of rock, to 6" in diameter: Place in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer, provided material is carefully placed and large stones well distributed with voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth, sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer to distribute soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. 3. All backfill placed below foundations shall have the following characteristics : Sieve Size Maximum Percent Passing Upper Limit 3" 100 Lower Limit No. 4 5 The backfill shall be compacted using a vibratory compactor and should be compacted to at least 98 percent of the standard Proctor density (ASTM D698). 3.11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES A. General: Cast-in-place concrete conforming to dimensions shown on the drawings and accurate to tolerances of 1/4". Install forms so all fmished lines will be true and straight. Install reinforcing steel with the spacing between the forms and between bars as shown on drawings. Keep excavation dry during construction. Compaction requirements same as above. 05-12-06 SUMMARY PERMIT SET STORM DRAINAGE 02630-6 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02630 VAIL. COLORADO STORM DRAINAGE B. Inlets and Outlets: Either cast-in-place or precast units, in accordance with drawings. When required, set castings accurately to grade with adjustment courses of brick in full mortar beds. Construct pipe inverts or smooth concrete inverts same size as pipe up to centerline of pipe, with bench to stand on. C. Frames, Grates, Covers, and Steps: Install accurately according to drawings. Anchor castings in place and set in adjustment mortar to assure firm foundation. D. Trash Guards: Install in accordance with drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. 3.12 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT A. Score existing surface with cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose of existing surface and aggregate base course. Leave 6" undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 95% AASHTO T180. Replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact asphalt to 95% ASTM D1559; consolidate concrete with vibrators. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. 3.14 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION A. Restore all pavements, curbs, gutters, utilities, fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Engineer. Deposit all waste materials in designated waste areas. Grade and shape disposal site. Complete topsoil and reseeding of site if required. Where disposal sites are not designated, remove and dispose of all waste materials off site. END OF SECTION 05-12-06 STORM DRAINAGE SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02630-7 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02720 VAIL, COLORADO LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE SECTION 02720 - LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A Related Requirements: Review the General Contract Conditions and Division One, General Requirements, which contain information and requirements that apply to this Section. B Work Included: Provide landscape drainage, complete, as shown and as specified. C Related Work in Other Sections: Fine Grading - Section 02210 Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting - Section 02220 Stone Paving - Section 02526 Soil Preparation - Section 02920 Lawns and Grasses - Section 02930 Trees, Plants and Groundcovers - Section 02950 Site Concrete - Section 03310 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A General: Perform work in accordance with all applicable laws, codes and regulations required by local government authorities. B Applicable Standards: Apply the current or latest editions of the standards from "ASTM" - American Society for Testing and Materials 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Product Data: Manufacturer's latest catalog cuts and specifications for each specified product B Samples: 1. Filter Fabric: Six (6) in. x six (6) in. C Test Data: Manufacturer's laboratory test data of all materials. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Protection of ExIstina Plants to Remain: See Section 02950 - Trees, Shrubs, Vines and Groundcover. B Protection of Utilities: 1. Provide temporary support and protection of underground and surface utility structures, drains, services and other improvements noted to remain. 2. Restore all damaged improvements to original condition at no additional cost to Owner. 04-07-2006 LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE Progress Construction Doamients 02M-1 E i i t f PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02720 VAIL, COLORADO LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE 1.05 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A Storage: Protect materials from damage, water and rust. Store pipes on beds which are full length of pipe. (Protect plastic materials from direct sunlight) B Pike: Cap openings against entry by foreign matter where required. C Damaged Materials: Remove all damaged materials and replace at no expense to Owner. 1.06 COORDINATION A Concealed Work: Verify locations of existing stubouts to receive landscape area drains. (Verify and locate existing pipes and structures to be coordinated with landscape drainage work.) B Field Measurements: Establish lines and levels for each drainage system and coordinate with other systems to prevent conflicts and maintain proper clearances. C Notification: Submit to landscape Architect written notification of all discrepancies in the Drawings or existing conditions which preclude successful installation of landscape drainage work as specified. 1.07 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A Completion: Work will be accepted upon satisfactory completion of all landscape drainage work. B Responsibility Upon Final Acceptance, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance of the work. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPES AND FITTINGS A Perforated Drain Pipe: D: Perforated ASTM D2729 polyvinyl chloride pipe (PVC). Provide types and sizes indicated. Provide matching reducers, adapters, couplings, fittings and accessory components to ensure continuity of the sub-drainage system. 2. Perforations: 318 in. diameter, 4 in. apart center to center longitudinally, in two rows 120 degrees apart 3. Manufacturer: Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc., Columbus, OH 43221; Tel. (614) 457-3051, or accepted equal. 2.02 SAND BACKFILL: Fine granular material naturally produced by the disintegration of rock, free of organic material, mica, loam, day and other deleterious substances to be thoroughly suitable for pipe bedding. 2.03 PERMEABLE BACKFILL• 318' to 314' dean uniformly graded stone or gravel for back of wall drain lines. 2.04 STRUCTURAL BACKFILL: See Excavating, Backfilling and Compactions - Section 02220. 2.05 FILTER FABRIC: "Mirafi 1402" as manufactured by Celanese Corporation, or approved equal. 2.06 DRAINAGE MATTING FOR BACK OF WALL DRAINS 04-07-2016 LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE Pm9ressConshidion Dowwnts 02720-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS 8 RESORTS SECTION 02720 VAIL, COLORADO LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE A TDe: "Enkadrain" No. 9120 or No. 9010 (as detailed) by American Enka Co., Enka, NC; Tel. (704) 667- 7713. B Distributor. American Excelsior Co., Arlington, TX 76011; TeL (817) 640-1555, of Sacramento, CA 95824; Tel. (916) 383-3635. 2.07 PAVEMENT AREA DRAIN: J.R. Smith Co., Tel. No. (205) 277-8520, Catalog No. 2670, cast iron body, bronze dome with stainless steel mesh screen; 3" outlet size; or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A Existing Utilities: Where grade or alignment of pipe is obstructed by existing utility structures such as conduits, ducts or pipes, permanently support, relocate, remove or reconstruct the obstruction. B Verification: Verify exact locations and quantity of all drains relative to planting areas and adjacent to paving, prior to beginning of work. Immediately report to Landscape Architect all discrepancies found prior to installation of drains. C Deviations: Make no deviations from specified line or grade without written acceptance of change by Landscape Architect 3.02 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A General: See Section 02220 - Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting. B Compaction of Backfill: Refer to Subsurface Investigation Report prepared by HP Geotech, June 22, 2005 and as amended on July 19, 2005 and August 19, 2005. C Backfill: Use for backfilling around the pipe and to 12 in above the top of the pipe. Backfil the remaining trench with excavated material. If excavated material is unsuitable for compaction, use imported suitable material. 2. Do not permit sand backfill material to mix with structural backfill within the subdrain area. 3.03 PIPE INSTALLATION A PVC Pipe: Install as detailed in the Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's current printed recommendations. 3.04 AREA DRAINS: Install to grades shown and as detailed on the Drawings. Connect to pipe stubouts in strict accordance with the manufacturer's current printed specifications. 0407-2M LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE Progress Construction Documents 02720-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02720 VAIL, COLORADO LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE 3.05 FRENCH DRAIN A Preparation of Trench: Accurately excavate trench as shown on the Drawings. B Filter Fabric: Place fabric in bottom of trench and extend up sides and beyond trench. Overlap 12 in. at ends of Too. C Drain Rock and Pipe: Install bedding portion of drain rock and bed pipe in place. Do not damage or displace filter fabric. D Review: Prior to installing remaining drain rock backfill, request review by Landscape Architect for progress of the work. E Closing: Upon acceptance, add remaining drain rock and lap over the ends of the filter fabric as shown on the Drawings. F Soil Backfill: Backfill with permeable planting soil mix to a minimum depth of 6 in. above filter fabric as shown on Drawings. 3.06 CLEAN-UP A Keep all areas of work dean, neat and orderly at all times. B Upon completion of work, remove off the site all surplus materials, tools, equipment, rubbish and debris resulting from the work. END OF SECTION 0407_M6 LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE Progress Construction Documents 02720-4 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02740 VAIL COLORADO FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT PART 1GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnishing, laying, and compacting hot-mixed asphaltic concrete pavement in conformance with lines, grades, and typical cross-sections shown on the drawings. B. Related Work: 1. Unbound Base Course: Section 02720 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source: Engineer shall have access to batching plant at all times work is in progress. B. Record of Work: Contractor shall keep record of time and date of placement, temperature, and weather conditions. Retain until completion and furnish copy to Engineer. C. Owner will arrange and pay for all field tests to determine compliance of base course and pavement materials and compaction with the specification and the approved design mix formula. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: If requested, provide samples of proposed materials. B. Test Reports: If requested, furnish copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory: 1. Aggregate - AASHTO T96, CP-45, AASHTO '304, AASHTO T176, AASHTO T89, AASHTO T90 2. PG Graded Binders, use PG 58 - 28 - AASHTO T48, TP48, TP5 AND T51 3. Liquid Asphalt - AASHTO M81, M82; ASTM D2026 4. Emulsified Asphalt - AASHTO M140 or M208 5. Compaction - Colorado Procedure 51, CP44 or CP81 C. Job Mix Formula: The Contractor shall submit the following to the Engineer. 1. A proposed job - mix gradation as required by the contract, which shall be wholly within the Master Range Table of Table 703 - 3 of the CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (CDOT Specifications) before the tolerances shown in Table 401 - 1, of the CDOT Specifications, are applied. The job- mix formula shall establish a single percentage of aggregate passing each required sieve size. A single percentage of bituminous material to be added to the aggregate and a single temperature for the mixture at the discharge point of the plant. 05-12-06 FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT SUMMARY PERMIT SET 02740-1 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02740 VAIL COLORADO FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Trucks used for hauling bituminous mixtures shall have tight, clean, smooth metal beds thinly coated with a minimum amount of paraffin oil, lime solution, or other approved release agent. Petroleum distillates such as kerosene or fuel oil will not be permitted. Each truck shall have a cover of canvas or other suitable material to protect the mixture from the weather. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Bituminous plant mix shall be placed only on properly constructed surfaces that are free from water, snow, or ice. The bituminous mixtures shall be placed in accordance with the temperature limitations of Table 401-3 "of the CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction" and only when weather conditions permit the pavement to be properly placed and finished, as determined by the Engineer. B. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on asphaltic concrete pavement until cooled and hardened. Provide barricades, flagmen, and warning devices as required to protect pavement. Maintain pedestrian and vehicular traffic as required. Cover openings of structures in paving until permanent coverings are placed. C. Confirm in writing, aggregate base course constructed by others has been compacted to requirements of these specifications. Use any means necessary to proof roll or test to confirm aggregate base is satisfactory to receive asphaltic concrete. Notify in writing to Owner any deficient areas so they may be brought into conformance with specifications prior to placement of asphaltic concrete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AGGREGATE Clean, hard, durable particles of crushed stone, crushed gravel, natural gravel, or crushed slag with not more than 45% of wear, AASHTO T96. Sieve Percentage by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves Grading SX 1-1/2" 1" 3/4" 100 1/2" 90-100 3/8" - #4 - #8 28-58 #30 - #200 2-10 Sizes #8 and larger, tolerances + 8%; #30 + 6%; #200 + 3%; where 100% passing, no tolerance. Use Grading SX for this project. 05-12-06 SUMMARY PERMIT SET FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 02740-2 J PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02740 VAIL. COLORADO FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 2.02 ASPHALTIC CEMENT A. Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M226, Table 2. B. Superpave Performance Graded Binders shall conform to AASHTO Provisional Standard MP 1 for PG 58-28 Performance Graded Binders 2.03 TACK COAT One of the following, grade and type as recommended by supplier: A. Emulsified asphalt, AASHTO M140 B. Cationic emulsified asphalt, AASHTO M208 2.05 MIX DESIGN A. Use Grading SX, 75 Design Gyrations, PG 58-28 Binder. 1. Job - Mix Formula as defined in the Submittal Section (02740 - 1, Part 1.03 Q. B. Furnish aggregate gradation. C. Accepted design mix shall meet compaction requirements of these specifications. 2.06 MIXING A. General: Comply with ASTM D995 for material storage, control, mixing, and plant equipment and operation. B. Aggregates: Keep each component of various-sized combined aggregates in separate stockpiles. Maintain so separate aggregate sizes will not be intermixed and to prevent segregation. Heat-dry aggregates to reduce moisture content to not more than 2%. Deliver dry aggregate to mixer at recommended temperature to suit penetration, grade, and viscosity characteristics of asphaltic cement, ambient temperature, and workability of mixture. C. Asphaltic Cement: Heat bitumen to viscosity at which it can be uniformly distributed throughout mixture. Select temperature range of 275 degrees F to 350 degrees F to suit temperature - viscosity characteristics of asphalt. Do not exceed 350 degrees F. D. Mixing: Accurately weigh or measure dry aggregates and weigh or meter asphaltic cement to comply with job-mix formula requirements. Mix aggregate and asphaltic cement to achieve 95% minimum coated particles for base mixtures in accordance with AASHTO TI 95 and 85-90% coated particles for surface mixtures when tested in accordance with ASTM D2489. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Base Course: Blade, shape, and smooth aggregate base course to uniform section. Remove loose materials. Clean the surface to be paved by mechanical sweepers, blowers, or hand brooms, until surface is free from dust. B. Existing Surfaces: Clean of all foreign materials. Fill holes and low places with leveling courses and compact prior to surface placement. Tack coat existing surfacing at 0.1 gallon per square yard. Apply only to areas on which surfacing is to be placed immediately. Do not extend more than 2000' ahead of 05-12-06 SUMMARY PERMIT SET FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 02740-3 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02740 VAIL. COLORADO FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT paving equipment. Prevent traffic from traveling on tack coat. 3.02 FRAME ADJUSTMENTS Set frames of structures to final grade. Place compacted asphaltic concrete to top of frame. If permanent covers are not in place, provide temporary covers over openings until compaction is complete. Where frames and covers are paved over, mark so crews can find on emergency basis until cut out and adjusted to final surfacing. 3.03 SPREADING AND FINISHING A. Place at temperatures of not less than 275 degrees F, or more than 350 degrees F. If temperature is below 50 degrees F and falling, asphaltic concrete mix shall not be less than 300 degrees F, while on trucks just prior to laydown. Mechanical, self-powered pavers shall be capable of spreading mix within specified tolerances, true to line, grade, and crown as indicated on drawings. Road grader equipped with automatic blade control may be used for leveling courses. Pavers shall be equipped with hoppers and distribution screws which place mix evenly in front of adjustable screeds. Screed shall be adjustable for height and crown, equipped with controlled heating device for use as required. Screed shall strike off mix without tearing, shaving or gouging surface, to depth and cross-section specified, without aid of manual adjustment during operation. Paver shall be capable of placing courses in thicknesses from 1/2" to 4" and from widths of 8' to 15'. Extensions and cut-off shall permit changes in widths by increments of 6". B. Strike finish surface smooth; true to cross section; uniform in density and texture; free from hollows, transverse corrugations, and other irregularities. Paint contact surfaces between gutters, manhole rings, catch basins, and other similar structures with thin, uniform coating of tack coat. Final surface shall be 1/4" above all structures and gutters sloping away from paving, flush with gutters sloping towards paving. C. Hand Placement: Where certain areas because of irregularity, inaccessibility, or unavoidable obstacles, do not lend themselves to machine placement, Engineer may agree to hand placement. Spread and compact to same fmish and compaction tolerances of these specifications. D. Joints: Make joints between old and new pavement, or between successive day's work, to insure thorough bond between old and new surfaces. Clean surfaces free of sand, dirt, dust, or other materials, and apply tack coat. Construction joints must have same texture, density, and smoothness tolerances as other surfacing. 1. Construct transverse joints to existing material by cutting material back to expose full depth edge. Paint thin uniform tack coat on joint and place new asphaltic concrete. 2. Prepare longitudinal joints by overlapping screed 1" on existing surface. Deposit sufficient material to complete joint. Push excess by hand rake 1/2" on new mat leaving vertical uncompacted face approximately 1" high. Compact against joint by rolling equipment. No depression allowed exceeding 1/8" for width of 6", after final compaction. E. Finish Tolerance: Place leveling courses within 1/2" of design grade. Finished surfaces will be tested with 10' straightedge, parallel to center line at location of wheel paths for each lane. Straightedge will be advanced 5' and space under straight edge shall not exceed 1/4". Correct areas deficient in smoothness by completely removing surface material and replacing. Overlay corrections may be made only if approved by Owner. F. Thickness Tolerance: Compacted thickness shall be no less than that shown on drawings. Any surfacing which does not meet minimum thickness shall be removed and replaced. 05-12-06 SUMMARY PERMIT SET FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 02740-4 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02740 VAIL COLORADO FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 3.04 COMPACTION A. General: Provide one pneumatic-tired and one steel-wheel roller to obtain required density, surface texture, and rideability. Begin rolling operations immediately following placement of asphaltic concrete. Do not permit heavy equipment, rollers, etc. to stand on finished surface where deformation may occur. End each pass of roller in different place. B. Rollers 1. Steel-wheel rollers self-propelled, developing contact pressure under compression wheels of 250 to 350 psi per inch of width of roller wheel. Rollers equipped with adjustable scrapers and means for keeping wheel wet to prevent mix from sticking. 2. Pneumatic-tired rollers self-propelled, developing contact pressure under each tire of 85 to 110 psi. Wheels so spaced that one pass will accomplish one. complete coverage equal to rolling width of machine. Wheels oscillate but not wobble. Remove and replace immediately any tires picking up fines. C. Compaction Procedures 1. Compact longitudinal joints and edges first, starting at outside edge and gradually progress towards center of pavement. Begin superelevated curves rolling on low side on previously transversely compacted material. Successive passes should overlap by one half width of roller. Mat temperature must not be below 185 degrees F. 2. Immediately follow rolling of longitudinal joint and edges with breakdown rolling. Place drive wheel nearest paver and pull roller towards paver. Return roller to existing surface and make ANK gradual shift to overlap previous pass by half roller width. Operate pneumatic-tired rollers as close to paver as necessary to obtain density required. Make enough passes for reasonably smooth surface. 3. Final rolling by a combination of steel and pneumatic rollers to obtain density, surface texture, and surface tolerances required. D. Pavement shall be compacted to a density of 92% to 96% of the maximum theoretical density, determined according to Colorado Procedure 51. Field density determinations will be made in accordance with Colorado Procedure 44 or 81. 3.05 PATCHING Cut out and fill with fresh, hot asphaltic concrete. Remove deficient areas for full depth of surface and base course. Cut sides perpendicular and parallel, and perpendicular to direction of traffic to extent of failure. Apply tack coat to exposed surfaces before placing new pavement. Compact and finish to specification. 3.06 CLEAN UP After completing operations, clean surfaces, pick up excess paving materials, and clean work area. END OF SECTION 05-12-06 SUMMARY PERMIT SET FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 02740-5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02752 VAIL, COLORADO DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 02752 • DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for providing the following type(s) of decorative concrete paving: 1. Integrally colored concrete with silica sand top coating. 2. Shake-on color hardener. B. Related Sections: 1. Prepared subgrades are specified in Division 2. 2. Waterproofing is specified in Section 07144. 3. Joint sealers are specified in Section 07920. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Sample Panel: Minimum 48-inch x 48-inch sample panel of each type of decorative concrete. Resubmit until samples are accepted by the Architect Approved samples shall be retained at the Project site for use as a standard of quality and appearance. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with local governing regulations if more stringent than the requirements specified in this Section. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. Provide flagmen, barricades, warning signs and lights as required. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Forms: Steel, wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain alignment until removal. 1. Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects. 2. Use fle)dble spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. 3. Coat with a non-staining form release agent that will not discolor or deface concrete. B. Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A185. C. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A615, Grade 40. D. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, 11, or V depending on sod conditions; white where required to achieve selected color. E. Aggregates: ASTM C33. F. Water. Fresh, dean, potable. G. Admixtures: 0407-06 DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAYING Progress CD Set 02752-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02752 VAIL COLORADO DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING l 1. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260. 2. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494. H. Concrete Colorant L.M. Scotield'Chromix' or approved equal, color as selected by Archited Final selection and acceptance based on approval of on-site mockup. K. Color Sealer: L. M. Scofield "Colorcure Concrete Sealer' or as recommended by concrete stain manufacturer, color to match stain. M. Silica Sand: Type and size as required to match approved mock-up panel. 2.02 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN AND TESTING A. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 Sections for concrete mix design, sampling, and testing, and quality control. B. Design mix to produce normal-weight concrete consisting of porliand cement, aggregate, water-reducing or high-range water reducing admixture, air-entraining admixture and water to produce the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength: 3,500-psi, minimum at 28-days. 2. Slump Range: 3- to 44nches. C. Mix integrally colored concrete and textured in accordance with colorant manufacturers' instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove loose material from compacted subgrade immediately before placing concrete. B. Proof-roll prepared subgrade surface to check for unstable areas and required additional compaction. C. Do not begin paving work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Set forms to required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. 1. Install sufficient quantity to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24-hours after concrete placement 2. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances: a. Top of forms not more than 3184nch in 10-feet b. Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 114-inch in 10-feet 3. Clean forms after each use, and coat with form release agent as required. 3.03 REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice to "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, or other bond-reducing materials. C. Arrange, space, and securely be bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement Maintain minimum cover. 0407-06 DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING Progress CD Set 02752 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02752 VAIL, COLORADO DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace sprxm with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 3.04 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: Comply with requirements of Sections of Division 3, for mixing and placing concrete, and as speafied. B. Do not place concrete until subgrade and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten subgrade if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. 2. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures unfit they are at required finish elevations and alignment C. Place concrete using methods that prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement and side forms. 2. Use only square faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Carefully consolidate tiD avoid dislocating reinforcing, dowels and joints. 3. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. If placement is interrupted for more than 1-hour, provide a construction joint 4. Use bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete. ~r 3.05 JOINTS A. General: Construct expansion, weakened-plane, and construction joints true to line with face perpendicular to concrete surfaces. 1. When joining existing structures, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated. B. Weakened-Plane Joints: Provide joints sectioning concrete surfaces into areas indicated. Construct for a depth equal to at least 1/4 concrete thickness, by saw cutting. C. Construction Joints: Place at end of placements and where placement operations are stopped for a period of more than 1-hour, except where placements terminate at expansion joints. D. Expansion Joints: Provide premolded joint Mier for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walls and other fixed objects, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, and not less than 1/2-inch or more than 1-inch below finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. If no joint sealer is indicated, place top of filler flush with concrete surface. 2. Provide joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed. If more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. 3. Protect top edge of pint filler during concrete placement with a metal cap or other temporary material. Remove after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint 3.06 INTEGRALLY COLORED CONCRETE WITH SILICA SAND TOP COATING A. After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and floating. Adjust floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture. 0407.06 DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING Progress CD Set 02752-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02752 VAIL COLORADO DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING B. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10-foot straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous smooth finish. C. Work edges of slabs an edging tool, and round to 1/24nch radius, unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate tool marks. D. Silica Sand Finish: After completion of floating and troweling, broadcast silica sand to completely cover and embed into surface of wet concrete. E. Sawcutting: After concrete has cured adequately to bond the silica sand surface but is still "green', saw cut joint pattern as indicated on drawings. Remove remaining loose silica sand. 3.07 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace cracked, broken, or defective areas that are unacceptable to the Architect B. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Prohibit traffic for at least 14-days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, remove surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. 2. Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discoloration, dirt and other foreign material prior to final inspection. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING Progress CD Set 02752-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02765 VAIL, COLORADO PAVEMENT MARKING SECTION 02765 - PAVEMENT MARKING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and applying painted pavement markings at parking garage areas 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive and technical data. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) shall not exceed limits permitted undercurrent regulations for architectural coatings of the local Air Pollution Control District. B. Pavement markings for accessibility of disabled persons shall comply with ADA Accessibility Guidelines. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Do not apply pavement marking until after completion of work that may adversely affect durability or appearance of pavement marking. B. Do not apply pavement markings until pavement, including seal coats when required, have cured for at least 30-days or longer if necessary to ensure that substrate materials and conditions will not adversely affect pavement markings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PAINT A. Approved Manufacturers: Sherwin-Williams "Set Fast Dry Latex Traffic Paint' TM226f225, Dunn-Edwards Corp. "Vin-L-Stripe' W 801 or approved equal. B. Colors:. 1. Stripping and Lettering: White. 2. Limited Parking: Green. 3. Uksabled Access: Blue. Blue paint shall match Color No. 15090 of Federal Standard 595A 4. Caution and Loading: Yellow. 5. Fire Lane: Red. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Remove dirt, oil, grease and other foreign material from areas of pavement to be marked. B. Provide measured layouts, temporary markings, templates, and other means necessary to provide required marking. 3.02 PAVEMENT MARKING A. Prepare and apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply paint by spray to achieve complete coverage free from voids and thin spots. B. Lines shall be accurately formed and true to line and form; lines shall be straight and uniform in width. C. Painted edges shall be clean cut and free from raggedness, and corners shall be cut sharp and square. 04-07-06 PAVEMENT MARKING Progress CD Set 02765-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02765 VAIL, COLORADO PAVEMENT MARKING D. Tolerances: Apply markings to widths indicated within a tolerance of 1i44nch on straight sections and 1l24nch on curved sections. 3.03 COMPLETION A. When complete, pavement markings shall be clean and free from stains, discoloration, and other defects and damage. B. Adjacent surfaces shall be free from marking paint spi8s, splatters, and overruns. END OF SECTION 0407.06 PAVEMENT MARK NG Progress CD Set 02765-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02810 VAIL, COLORADO IRRIGATION SYSTEM SECTION 02810 - IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A This Section includes piping, valves, sprinklers, specialties, controls, and wiring for automatic control irrigation system. B. Related Sections include the following: Division 2 Section "Water Distribution' for water supply from water service piping, water meters, protective enclosures, and baclcflow preventors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Circuit Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain valves. Piping is under pressure during flow. B. Drain Piping: Downstream from circuit-piping drain valves. Piping is not under pressure. C. Irrigation Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and including, control valves. Piping is under water-distribution-system pressure. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish afi labor, materials, supplies, equipment, tools, and transportation, and perform all operations in connection with and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of the irrigation system, and guarantee/warranty as shown on the drawings, the installation details, and as specified herein. B. Location of Sprinklers and Specialties: Design location is approArnate. Make minor adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards. Maintain efficient water coverage of planting areas indicated. C. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for piping, valves, and specialties, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Irrigation Main Piping: 200 psig 2. Circuit Piping: 150 psig 3. Drain Piping: 100 psig 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List: Include pipe, fittings, mainline components, water emission components, control system components. Quantities of materials need not be included. C 04-07-2006 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Progress Cmhudw Do xwits 02610 -1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02810 VAIL, COLORADO IRRIGATION SYSTEM B. Manufacturers' Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts, specifications, and operating instructions for equipment shown on the materials list C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings called for in the installation details. Shop products required for proper instal- lation, their relative locations, and critical dimensions. Note modifications to the installation detail. Feld quality- control test reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For irrigation systems, to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.8 REVIEWS A. Sprinkler Layout Review: 1. Notify Owner's Authorized Representative three days in advance of review. Static pressure at water supply must be verified prior to review. 2. Stake each sprinkler location, remote control valve assembly, gate valve, and all other irrigation system as- semblies. Different sprinkler types shall be clearly marked. Revise layout as directed by Owner's Authorized Representative. Layout review may be repeated at discretion of Owner's Authorized Representative. 3. Ali landscape edging, tree locations, and other known site features including athletic fields must be staked or dearly marked prior to sprinkler layout review. - 4. Where the irrigation system must be modified due to discrepancies between the irrigation plans and actual site conditions, the layout shall be modified per the direction of the Owner's Authorized Representative. 5. Layout review shall occur prior to installation of irrigation system unless otherwise directed by Owner's Au- thorized Representative. If layout review is not completed and properly documented, contractor assumes all liability for the location of all irrigation system components. B. Pre-maintenance review will occur at substantial completion of irrigation system and record (as-built) drawings and controller charts. Construction maintenance period will begin at time of substantial completion. 1.9 GUARANTEE, WARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT A. The purpose of this guaranteetwarranty is to insure that the Owner receives irrigation materials of prime quality, in- stalled and maintained in a thorough and careful manner. B. For a period of one year from the date of final completion and commencement of the formal maintenance period, guaranteetwarranty irrigation materials, equipment, and workmanship against defects. Fill and repair depressions. 04-07-2006 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Progress Construction Documents 02810 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02810 VAIL, COLORADO IRRIGATION SYSTEM Restore landscape or structural features damaged by the settlement of irrigation trenches or excavations. Repair damage to the premises caused by a defective item. Make repairs within three days of notification from the Owner's Authorized Representative. Contractor is responsible for the winterization for the first season following installation. C. Contract documents govem replacements the same as new work. Make replacements at no cost in contract price. D. Guaranteelwarranty applies to originally installed materials and equipment and replacements made during the guar- anteelwarranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 QUALITY A. Materials used in the system shall be new and without flaws or defects of any type, and shall be the best of their class and kind. 2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions are not encouraged and as a general rule will not be allowed. B. Submit requests for substitutions within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement. Subsequent requests for substitutions will be considered only when a product becomes unavailable. C. Submit complete data showing compliance with the Contract Documents. D. In making a request for substitution, the Contractor represents that he: 1. Has investigated the proposed substitution and found that it is of the same or better quality level, capacity, function, or appearance than the specified product. 2. Will coordinate installation and make modifications to the work which may be required for complete installa- tion. 3. Will bear all costs resulting from necessary changes caused by the substitution. E. The Owner's Authorized Representative will determine acceptability of proposed substitution and will notify Contrac- tOr of acceptance or rejection. F. Pipe sizes referenced in the construction documents are minimum sizes, and may be increased at the option of the Contractor. 2.3 SLEEVING A Install separate sleeve beneath paved areas to route each run of irrigation pipe or wiring bundle. B. Sleeving material beneath pedestrian pavements shall be PVC Class 200 pipe with solvent welded joints. C. Sleeving beneath drives and streets shall be PVC Class 200 pipe with solvent welded joints. D. Sleeving Diameter. Twice the diameter of the pipe or wire bundle passing through it. 2.4 PIPE AND FITTINGS 04-07-2006 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Progress Consinxlim Doanrwis 02810 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02810 VAIL, COLORADO IRRIGATION SYSTEM A. Lateral Pipe and Fittings: 1. Use rigid, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 1120, 1220 National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved pipe, extruded from material meeting the requirements of Cell Classification 12454-A or 12454-B, ASTM Standard D1784, with an integral belled end. 2. Use Schedule 40, conforming to the dimensions and tolerances established by ASTM Standard D1785 3. Use Schedule 40, Type 1, PVC solvent weld fittings conforming to ASTM Standards D2466 and D1784. Use primer approved by the pipe manufacturer. Solvent cement to conform to ASTM Standard D2564. B. Lateral Pipe and Fittings: 1. Use rigid, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 1120, 1220 National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved pipe, extruded from material meeting the requirements of Cell Classification 12454-A or 12454-B, ASTM Stan- dard D1784, with an integral belled end. 2. Use Class 200, SDR-21, rated at 200 psi, conforming to the dimensions and tolerances established by ASTM Standard D2241 3. Use Schedule 40, Type 1, PVC solvent weld fittings conforming to ASTM Standards D2466 and D1784. Use primer approved by the pipe manufacturer. Solvent cement to conform to ASTM Standard D2564. C. Drip Tubing: 1. For drip irrigation laterals downstream of zone control valves, use UV radiation resistant polyethylene pipe manufactured from Prime Union Carbide G-resin 7510 Natural 7 manufactured by Union Carbide or a Union Carbide Licensee with a minimum 2% carbon black. 2. Fittings shall be PVC compression fittings compatible with the drip lateral pipe, as presented in the installa- tion details. Use tubing stakes to hold above-ground pipe in place. D. Specialized Pipe and Fittings: 1. Copper pipe: Type "r rigid conforming to ASTM Standard B88. Fittings shall be wrought upper or cast bronze, soldered or threaded per the installation details. Solder shall be 95% tin and 5% antimony. 2. Galvanized and steel pipe: Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, ASTM Standard Al 20. Fittings shall be gal- vanized, threaded, standard weight, malleable iron fittings. 3. Use a dielectric union wherever a copper-based metal (copper, brass, bronze) is joined to an iron-based metal (iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel). 4. Assemblies calling for threaded pipe connections shall utilize PVC Schedule 80 nipples and PVC Schedule 40 threaded fittings. 5. Joint sealant: Use only Teflon-type tape pipe joint sealant on plastic threads. Use non-hardening, nontoxic pipe joint sealant formulated for use on water-carrying pipes on metal threaded connections. 2.5 MAINLINE COMPONENTS A. Isolation Gate Valve Assembly: As presented in the installation details. B. Quids Coupling Valve Assembly: Double swing joint arrangement as presented in the installation details. 2.6 SPRINKLER AND DRIP IRRIGATION COMPONENTS J 04-07-2006 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Progress Construction Dwxwts 02810 - 4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02810 VAIL, COLORADO IRRIGATION SYSTEM A. Remote Control Valve (RCV) Assembly for Sprinkler and Bubbler Laterals: As presented in the installation details. B. Sprinkler Assembly: As presented in the drawings and installation details. C. Drip Assembly: As presented in the drawings and installation details. 2.7 CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Irrigation Controller Unit 1. As presented in the drawings and installation details. 2. Wire markers: Pre-numbered or labeled with indelible non-fading ink, made of permanent, non-fading mate- rial. 3. Primary surge protection arrestors: As per manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Valve output surge protection arrestors: As per manufacturer's recommendations. B. Control Wire: 1. Electric wire from the controller unit to each remote control valve shall be American Wire Gauge (AWG) No. 14 solid copper, Type OF cable, UL approved for direct underground burial. Common wire shall be AWG No. 14 solid copper, Type OF cable, UL approved for underground burial. 2. Color. Wire color shall be continuous over its entire length. Use white for common ground wire. Use easily distinguished colors for other control wires. Spare control wires shall be of a color different from that of the active control wire. 3. Splices: As presented in installation details. 4. Encase wiring not located near PVC irrigation pipe in PVC Schedule 40 electrical conduit Wire located near PVC mainline may be marked with warning tape indicating `Irrigation Control Wire Below' Or as approved by the owner. 2.8 OTHER COMPONENTS A. Tools and Spare Parts: Provide operating keys, servicing tools, test equipment, other items, and spare parts indi- cated in the General Notes of the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTIONS AND REVIEWS A. Site Inspections: 1. Verify site conditions and note irregularities affecting work of this section. Report irregularities to the Owner's Authorized Representative prior to beginning work. 2. Beginning work of this section implies acceptance of existing conditions. B. Irrigation System Layout Review: Irrigation system layout review will occur after the layout has been completed. No- tify the Owner's Authorized Representative two days in advance of review. Modifications will be identified by the Owners Authorized Representative at this review. C. Verify locations of underground utilities. 007-2006 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Progress Construction Documents 02810 - 5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02810 VAIL, COLORADO IRRIGATION SYSTEM 3.2 LAYOUT OF WORK A Stake out the irrigation system. Items staked include: sprinklers, pipe, control valves, controller, and isolation valves. 3.3 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING A. Excavate to permit the pipes to be laid at the intended elevations and to permit work space for installing connections and fittings. B. Minimum cover over all pipe and wire shall be as presented in the installation details. C. Backfill only after lines have been reviewed and tested. D. Excavated material is generally satisfactory for backfill. Backfill shall be free from rubbish, vegetable matter, frozen materials, and stones larger than 2 inches in maximum dimension. Remove material not suitable for backfill. Backfill placed next to pipe shall be free of sharp objects which may damage the pipe. E. Backfill unsleeved pipe in either of the following manners: 1. Backfill and puddle the lower half of the trench. Allow to dry 24 hours. Backfill the remainder of the trench in 6-inch layers. Compact to density of surrounding soil. 2. Backfill the trench by depositing the backfill material equally on both sides of the pipe in 6-inch layers and compacting to the density of surrounding soil. F. Enclose pipe and wiring beneath roadways, walks, curbs, etc., in sleeves. Minimum compaction of backfill for sleeves shall be 95% Standard Proctor Density, ASTM D 698-78. Use of water for compaction around sleeves, 'puddling; will not be permitted. G. Dress backfilled areas to original grade. Incorporate excess backliill into existing site grades. H. Where utilities interfere with irrigation trenching and pipe work, contact the Owner's Authorized Representative for trench depth adjustments. 3.4 SLEEVING AND BORING A. Install sleeving at a depth which permits the encased pipe or wiring to remain at the specified burial depth. B. Extend sleeve ends six inches beyond the edge of the paved surface. Cover pipe ends and mark with stakes. Mark concrete with a chiseled "r at sleeve end locations. C. Bore for sleeves under obstructions which cannot be removed. Employ equipment and methods designed for hori- zontal boring. 3.5 ASSEMBLING PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General: 1. Keep pipe free from dirt and pipe scale. Cut pipe ends square and debur. Clean pipe ends. 2. Keep ends of assembled pipe capped. Remove caps only when necessary to continue assembly. B. Lateral Pipe and Fittings: 007-2006 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Progress Construction Documents 02810-6 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02810 VAIL, COLORADO IRRIGATION SYSTEM 1. Use only strap-type friction wrenches for threaded plastic pipe. 2. PVC Solvent Weld Pipe: a. Use primer and solvent cement. Join pipe in the manner recommended by manufacturer and in accor- dance with accepted industry practices. b. Cure for 30 minutes before handling and 24 hours before allowing water in pipe. c. Snake pipe from side to side within the trench. 3. UV Radiation Resistant Polyethylene Pipe: a. Join pipe in the manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. b. Snake pipe from side to side on the soil surface, and hold in place with tubing stakes spaced every four feet. C. Specialized Pipe and Fittings: 1. Copper Pipe: a. Buff surfaces to be joined to a bright finish. Coat with solder flux b. Solder so that a continuous bead shows around the joint circumference. 2. Insert a dielectric union wherever a copper-based metal (copper, brass, bronze) and an iron-based metal (iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel) are joined. 3. PVC Threaded Connections: a. Use only factory-formed threads. Feld-cut threads are not permitted. b. Use only Teflon-type tape. c. When connection is plastic-to-metal, the plastic component shall have male 4. Make metal-to-metal, threaded connections with Teflon-type tape or pipe joint compound applied to the male threads only. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF MAINLINE COMPONENTS A. Isolation Gate Valve Assembly: Install where indicated on the drawings. B. Quick Coupling Valve Assembly- Install where indicated on the drawings 33 INSTALLATION OF SPRINKLER AND BUBBLER IRRIGATION COMPONENTS A. Remote Control Valve (RCV) Assembly for Sprinkler and Bubbler Laterals: 1. Flush mainline before installation of RCV assembly. 2. Instal where indicated on the drawings. Wire connectors and waterproof sealant shall be used to connect control wires to remote control valve wires. Instal connecWs and sealant per the manufacturer's recommen- dations. 3. Adjust RCV to regulate the downstream operating pressure. B. Sprinkler Assembly: 04-07-2006 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Progress Construction Documents 02810 - 7 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02810 VAIL, COLORADO IRRIGATION SYSTEM 1. Flush lateral pipe before installing sprinkler assembly. 2. Install per the installation details at locations shown on the drawings. 3. Set sprinklers perpendicular to the finish grade. 4. Supply appropriate nozzle or adjust arc of coverage of each sprinkler for best performance. 5. Adjust the radius of throw of each sprinkler for best performance. C. Drip Irrigation: Install drip irrigation per the installation details at locations shown on the drawings and details. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Control Wire: 1. Bundle control wires where two or more are in the same trench. Bundle with pipe wrapping tape spaced at 10-foot intervals. 2. Control wiring may be pulled into the soil utilizing a vibratory plow device specifically manufactured for pipe pulling. Minimum burial depth equals minimum cover previously listed. 3. Provide a 244nch excess length of wire in an 8 inch diameter loop at each 90° change of direction, at both ends of sleeves, and at 100-foot intervals along continuous runs of wiring. Do not tie wiring loop. Coil 244nch length of wire within each remote control valve box. 4. Install common ground wire and one control wire for each remote control valve. Multiple valves on a single control wire are not permitted. Install 4 spare control wires along the entire length of the mainline or wire run. Provide a 244nch length of wire from each end of the spare control wires coiled in the control enclosure, and provide a 244nc h length of coiled wire for each spare control wire in a 64nch round valve box at each distal end of the mainline pipe. 5. If a control wire must be spliced, make splice with wire connectors and waterproof sealant, installed per the manufacturer's instructions. Locate splice in a valve box which contains an irrigation valve assembly, or in a separate 64inch round valve box. Use same procedure for connection to valves as for in-line splices. 6. Unless noted on plans, install wire parallel with and under PVC mainline pipe. 7. Encase wire not installed with PVC mainline pipe in electrical conduit. Wire located near PVC mainline may be marked with warning tape indicating'Inigation Control Wire Below" 3.9 INSTALLATION OF OTHER COMPONENTS A. Tools and Spare Parts: 1. Prior to the Pre-Maintenance Review, supply to the Owner operating keys, servicing tools, test equipment, and any other items indicated on the drawings. 2. Prior to Final Review, supply to the Owner the spare parts indicated in the General Notes on the drawings. B. Other Materials: Install other materials or equipment shown on the drawings or installation detads to be part of the ir- rigation system, even though such items may not have been referenced in these specifications. 3.10 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS A. Prior to Pre-Maintenance Review, obtain from the Owner's Authorized Representative a reproducible mylar copy of the Drawings. Using technical drafting pen, duplicate information contained on the Record Drawings maintained on site. B. Label each sheet "Record Drawing'. On the first sheet, the Contractor or resident superintendent shall execute the following statement: J J 04-07-2M IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 9rm Cordnam Dwx wts - 8 ~ PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02810 VAIL, COLORADO IRRIGATION SYSTEM C. Having reviewed this document and all attachments, I affirm that, to the best of my knowledge, the information pre- sented here is true and accurate. Signed: Position: Date: D. Record pipe and wiring network alterations. Record work which is Installed differently than shown on the construction drawings. Record accurate reference dimensions, measured from at least two permanent reference points, of each irrigation system valve, each bac kfiow prevention device, each controller or control unit, each sleeve end, and other irrigation components enclosed within a valve box 3.11 CONTROLLER CHARTS A. Prior to Pre-Maintenance Review, prepare a reduced copy of the as-built plans, with valve numbering dearly high- lighted at the reduced scale. The reduced plan shall be sized to fit flat within the controller, laminated in plastic, and placed in the controller. B. Provide controller charts for each controller. Controller charts should be developed with the highest irrigation water demand for the season (usually peak of the summer) as the basis for the schedule. If repeat cycles are used, note the proper number of repeat operations and the timing of each repeat. END OF SECTION 02810 04-07-2006 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Progress Conshuc6on Doarnerds 02810 - 9 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02848 VAIL, COLORADO PARKING BUMPERS SECTION 02848 - PARKING BUMPERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing precaskoncrete parking bumpers. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Parking Bumpers: Standard precast-concrete units of 3,500-psi air-entrained concrete, approximately 6-inches high, 94nches wide, 6-feet king. 1. Coker: Standard cement gray. 2. Exposed Surfaces: Smooth, free from pits and holes, with smooth and rounded comers and edges. 3. Reinforcing: Two steel bars each unit B. Adhesive: Epoxy type. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Do not instal parking bumpers until pavements are thoroughly cured. B. Clean substrates free from dirt, dust, and other foreign matter. C. Install one parking bumper for each parking stag where indicated or where required to protect equipment or the building. Secure bumpers to paving surfaces with epoxy adhesive. D. Each parking bumper shall be uniformly spaced, accurately aligned, and securely adhered. E. Exposed surfaces shall be dean and free from chips, cracks, stains, discoloration, and other defects and damage. END OF SECTION k t O W-06 PARKING BUMPERS Progress CD Set 02W-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02920 VAIL, COLORADO SOIL PREPARATION SECTION 02920 - SOIL PREPARATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A Related Requirements: Review the General Contract Conditions and Division One, General Requirements, which contain information and requirements that apply to this Section. B Work Included: Provide all products and execute all labor to achieve soil preparation, complete as shown and as specified. C Related Work in Other Sections: Fine Grading - Section 02210 Lawns and Grasses - Section 02930 Trees, Plants and Groundcover - Section 02950 Landscape Maintenance - Section 02970 D Work Under Another Contract: Rough Grading 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Submit certificates of inspection required by law for transportation with invoice. File copies of certificates after acceptance of material. B Inspection by governmental officials at point of origin does not preclude rejection of materials at project site. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Protection of Exisdng Plants to Remain: See Section 02950 - Trees, Shrubs, Vines and Groundcover. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A Samples and Product Data: Prior to delivery to site, submit samples and manufacturers' literature for the following items: 1. Organic Amendments: 1 pint for each type 2. TTopsoi: % pound 3. Soil Mixes: Y2 pound for each type B ' Test Data Laboratory test data for each specified material. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A Labeling: Furnish standard products in unopened manufacturer's standard containers bearing original labels showing quantity, analysis and name of manufacturer. B Storage: Store products with protection from weather or other conditions which would damage or impair the effectiveness of the product. 04.07-MM SOIL PREPARATION Progress Construction Documents 02920-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02920 VAIL, COLORADO SOIL PREPARATION 1.06 ANALYSES OF SAMPLES AND SOILS A Sampling: Samples of materials may be taken and analyzed for conformity to specifications at any time. Fumish samples as requested. B Obtain an agricultural suitability analysis of the on site soil from an accredited soils laboratory at the contractors cost The analysis shall verify the suitability of the existing soils, analyze the existing soil texture, organic and chemical qualities and recommend additional soil amendments beyond those specified. Additional amendments recommended by the analysis beyond those specified shall be an additional cost. A minimum of three (3) samples shall be taken from the site. The soil amendments currently specified will be the minimum incorporated. C Rejected Materials: Remove rejected materials immediately from the site at Contractor's expense. D Testing Agency: Triple "S' Lab, Inc., Box 678 Loveland, Colorado 80537; 303-667-5671 or approved accredited soils laboratory. Pay cost of testing of materials not meeting specifications. 1.07 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A Acceptance: Work will not be accepted until satisfactory completion of all soil preparation work. B Notification: Give notification of completion of soil preparation prior to proceeding with planting operations. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A General Qualifications. Composition: Use as a planting medium for the project only fertile, friable, well-drained soil, of uniform quality, free of stones over 1 in. diameter, sticks, oils, chemicals, plaster, concrete, pests and infestations and other deleterious materials. Submit soil analysis as indicated above in 1.06 for import topsoil. B Areas to receive imported topsoil shall include bac kfill mix for trees and planter beds. C Imported Topsoil: Furnish imported topsoil from sources accepted by the Landscape Architect which meets the standards specified under "General Qualifications' above. Verification: Quantity of topsoil to complete the work shall be calculated by the Contractor and included in their base bid price. 2. An sis: Obtain an agricultural suitability analysis and soil texture analysis of the proposed topsoil from an accredited soils laboratory at Contractor's cost. 3. Acceptance: Submit soils analysis and recommendations to the Landscape Architect for acceptance. Amend topsoil per accepted soils analysis report. 4. Samples: The Landscape Architect reserves the right to take samples of the imported topsoil delivered to the site for conformance to the Specifications. 04.07-MM SOIL PREPARATION Progress Construction Documents 02920-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02920 VAIL, COLORADO SOIL PREPARATION 5. Rejected Topsoil: Immediately remove rejected topsoil off the site at Contractor's expense. 6. Stockpiling: If stockpiling is requested, locations and amounts of stockpiles will be designated by Landscape Architect 2.02 ORGANIC AMENDMENTS A Compost: A-1 Organics "Premium 3" Compost as produced by A-1 Organics, Eaton, Colorado; 970454- 2113 or approved equal. 2.03 FINE SAND A Physical Properties (dry weight basis): Percent Passing 100 95-100 65-100 0-50 0-20 0- 5 Sieve Size 4.76 mm (4,4 mesh) 1.00 mm (#18,16 mesh) 500 micron (#35, 32 mesh) 250 micron (#60, 60 mesh) 105 micron (#140,150 mesh) 53 micron (#270, 270 mesh) B Chemical Properties: 1. Salini . The saturation extract conductivity shall not exceed 3.0 milliohms/cm @ 25 degrees C. 2. Boron: The concentration in the saturation extract shall not exceed 1.0 ppm. 3. Sodium: The sodium absorption ratio (SAR) as calculated from analysis of the saturation extract shall not exceed 6.0. 2.04 CHEMICAL ADDITIVES The following additives may or may not be used depending on the outcome of the soils agricultural suitability report A Ground Limestone: Agricultural limestone containing not less than 85% of total carbonates, ground to such fineness that 50% will pass #100 sieve and 90% will pass #20 sieve. B Dolomite Lime: Agricultural grade mineral soil conditioner containing 35% minimum magnesium carbonate and 49% minimum calcium carbonate, 100% passing #65 sieve. 'Kaiser Dolomite 65 AG' as manufactured by Kaiser, inc. Mineral Products Department, or equal. C Gypsum : Agricultural grade product containing 80% minimum calcium sulphate. D Iron Sulfate (Ferric or Ferrous): Supplied by a commercial fertilizer supplier, containing 20% to 30% Von and 35% to 40% sulphur. E Sulphate of Potash: Agricultural grade containing 50% to 53% of water-soluble potash. Single Superphosphate: Commercial product containing 20% to 25% available phosphoric acid. 0407-mm SOIL PREPARATION Progress Construction Documents 029M-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02920 VAIL, COLORADO SOIL PREPARATION G Ammonium Sulphate: Commercial product containing approximately 21% ammonia. H Ammonium Nitrate: Commercial product containing approximately 34% ammonia. Calcium Nitrate: Agricultural grade containing 15-1/2% nitrogen. J Urea Formaldehyde: Granular commercial product containing 38% nitrogen. K I.B.D.U. (Iso-Butyldiene Diurea): Commercial product containing 31% nitrogen. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SOIL PREPARATION A General: 1. Moisture Content: Do not work soil when moisture content is so great that excessive compaction will occur, nor when it is so dry that dust will form in air or that clods will not break readily. Apply water, if necessary to bring soil to optimum moisture content for tilling and planting. Maintain within 2 percent above or below optimum moisture content at all times during the work. 2. Clearing of Debris: Clear all planting areas of stones 2 in. diameter and larger, weeds, debris and other extraneous materials prior to amending existing soil incorporating imported topsoil. B Preparation of Existing Soil to be Soil Conditioned: 1. Verification of Existing Grades: Verify that grades are within 1 in. plus or minus of the required finished grades or finish sub-grades. Report all variations. 2. Cultivation: Rip or cultivate all areas to be soil conditioned to a depth of 6 in. for all lawn and grass area and 10' for all shrub beds, perennial and ground cover areas immediately prior to amending existing soil. 3. Trees to Remain: Hand cultivate within the dripline of existing trees to remain. Depth of cultivation shall not exceed 2 in. Cultivate immediately prior to amending existing soli. 3.02 SOIL CONDITIONING A Amending of Existing Sod: 1. Verification: Do not commence amending of existing sod prior to acceptance of finish grade or finish sub-grade. Import approved topsoil as necessary to meet finish grade as shown on the grading plans. 2. AAppGCation Rate: Apply organic compost at the following rates: - a. Lawn areas - 4 cubic yards per 1,000 square feet b. Perennial beds & planting beds - 5 cubic yards per 1,000 square feet 3. Incorporation of Amendments: Incorporate thoroughly with top 6 in. of soil layer in lawn areas and 007-M6 SOIL PREPARATION Progress ConsUuc mDoc mmis 02920-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02920 VAIL, COLORADO SOIL PREPARATION top 10 in. of soil layer in planting beds with roto-tiller and bring amended soil to finish grades and elevations shown on Drawings. Do not work soils under frozen or muddy conditions. B Bac kfill Mix for On-Grade Plant Pits: 70% Native soil excavated from plant pit 30% Imported topsoil (with necessary amendments per analysis) 3.03 PRE-EMERGENT HERBICIDE A Apply pre-emergent week control to all areas to receive woody, non-lawn ornamental planting after amendment of topsoil. B Apply strictly according to manufacturer's current printed specifications. 3.04 PLACEMENT OF DRAINAGE MATERIALS: A Perforated and Solid Drain Pipe: Install where shown in accordance with manufacturer's latest printed instructions. B Filter Fabric: Install per details. Lap joints 8 in. minimum and return filter fabric up walls of planting areas to 6 in. below top of walls. C Protection of Filter Fabric: Provide a 2 in. protective layer of specified planting mix over filter fabric. D Placement of Soil Mix: 1. Compaction: Compact initial placement of soil mix by thoroughly watering or jetting the entire process until final finish grades are achieved. 2. Filter Fabric Do not disturb or damage filter fabric during placement of soil mix. 3.05 DRAINAGE OF PLANTING AREAS A Surface Drainage: 1. Discrepancies: Provide positive surface drainage of planted areas. Submit in writing all discrepancies in the Drawings of Specifications, or prior work done by others, which Contractor feels precludes establishing proper drainage. 2. Correction: Include description of work required for correction or relief of said condition. B Detrimental Drainage. Soils and Obstructions: 1. Notification: Submit in writing all soils or drainage conditions considered detrimental to growth of plant materials. State condition and submit proposal and cost estimate for correcting condition. 2. Correction: Submit for acceptance a written proposal and cost estimate for the correction before proceeding with work. 3. Obstructions: If rock, underground construction work, tree roots or other obstructions are 0407-2006 SOIL PREPARATION Progress Coraftucbm► Documents 02920 - 5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02920 VAIL, COLORADO SOIL PREPARATION encountered in the performance of work under this section, submit cost required to remove the obstructions to a depth of not less than 6 in. below the required soil depth . 3.06 CLEAN-UP A Keep all areas of work clean, neat and orderly at all times. Clean up and remove all deleterious materials and debris from the entire work area prior to Final Acceptance. END OF SECTION 04-07 2006 SOIL PREPARATION 029 Progress ConMctan Documents 20-6 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02930 VAIL, COLORADO LAWNS AND GRASSES SECTION 02930 - LAWNS AND GRASSES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A Related Reouiremenis: Review the General Contract Conditions and Division One, General Requirements, which contain information and requirements that apply to this Section. Work Included: Provide complete as shown and as specified. 1. Fine Grading. 2. Placing topsoil. 3. Sodding 4. Seeding and Mulching of native grass areas 5. Establishment, maintenance and guarantee of all new seeded and sodded areas. C Related Work in Other Sections: Fine Grading - Section 02210 Irrigation System - Section 02810 Soil Preparation - Section 02920 Trees, Plants and Groundcover - Section 02950 Landscape Maintenance - Section 02970 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Certificates of Inspection: Submit as required by law for transportation of each shipment of sod along with invoice. Submit copies of certificates after acceptance of material. B Inspection by Federal or State Governments at place of growth does not preclude rejection at project site. C Supplier Experience: Require supplier to have not less than 5 years experience in the supplying of the types of products specified. D Installer Experience: Require installation contractor to have not less than 3 years successful experience in the installation of similar types of products specified. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Notify Landscape Architect seven (7) days prior to start of sodding and seeding operations. B Protect existing utilities, paving, and other facilities from damage caused by sodding operations. C Perform seeding and sod installation only after fine grading, planting and other work affecting ground surface has been completed. D Restrict traffic from lawn areas until grass is established. Erect signs and barriers as required. E Provide hose and lawn watering equipment as required. 04-07-2006 LAWNS AND MSSES Progress Construction Documents 02930-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02930 VAIL, COLORADO LAWNS AND GRASSES The irrigation system will be installed prior to sodding and seeding. Locate, protect, and maintain the irrigation system during sodding operations. Repair irrigation system components damaged during sodding operations at this Contractors expense. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A Submit the Following Materials Certification and Product Data: 1. Sod : Certification labels showing sod blend and name of grower. 2. Seed Mix (es): Certifications for each type B Test Data: Laboratory test data for each specified material. 1. Seed Varieties: Guaranteed statement of composition, mixture and percentage of purity and germination of each variety. 1.05 WORK SCHEDULE Proceed with the work as rapidly as the site becomes available, consistent with normal seasonal limitations for planting work in accordance with locally accepted practice. 1.06 SELECTION AND ORDERING OF SOD AND SEED A Documentation: Submit documentation within 30 days after award of Contract that all seed and sod has been ordered. B Unavailable Materials: If proof is submitted that any sod is not obtainable, a proposal will be considered for use of the nearest equivalent variety with corresponding adjustment of Contract price. Substantiate such proof in writing no later than 30 days after award of contract. 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Seed: Delivery: Furnish standard seed in unopened manufacturers standard containers bearing original certification labels showing quantity, analysis and name of manufacturer. 2. Storage: Store seed with protection from weather or other conditions that would damage or impair the effectiveness of the product B Sod: Harvest and Derivety Harvest from the source and deliver to project site within 24 hours. Deliver only as much sod as can be installed in one day's work. 2. Review: Sod not transplanted within this time period shall be reviewed prior to installation. C Mulch: Store mulch with protection from weather or other conditions which would damage or impair the effectiveness of the product 0407_M LAWNS AND GRPSSES Progress Construction Documents 02930 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02930 VAIL, COLORADO LAWNS AND GRASSES D Fertilizer: Deliver in manufacturer's original container printed With manufacturer's name, material weight and guaranteed analysis. Store fertilizer with protection from weather or other conditions which would damage or impair the effectiveness of the product. 1.08 ANALYSES OF SAMPLES AND TESTS A Samples: Samples of materials may be taken'and analyzed for conformity to specifications at any time. Fumish samples as requested. B Rejected Materials: Remove rejected materials immediately from the site at Contractor's expense. Pay cost of testing of materials not meeting specifications. 1.09 MAINTENANCE PERIOD AND FINAL ACCEPTANCE See Section 02970 - Landscape Maintenance 1.10 WARRANTY PERIOD A Time Period: Warrant that all lawns and grasses shall be in a healthy and flourishing condition of active growth one year from final date of Final Acceptance. Appearance During Warranty: Lawns and grasses shall be free of dead or dying patches, and all areas shall show foliage of a normal density, size and color. C Delays: All delays in completion of planting operations which extend the planting into more than one planting season shall extend the Warranty Period correspondingly. D Exceptions: Contractor shall not be held responsible for failures due to neglect by Owner, vandalism, etc., during Warranty Period. Report such conditions in writing of insufficient maintenance to Landscape Architect and Owner. If no notice is given installation contractor shall remain responsible. 1.11 REPLACEMENTS A Unacceptable Workmanship: Lawn and grass areas exhibiting conditions which are determined as unacceptable workmanship shall be repaired and/or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. B Replacements: Replace, Without cost to Owner, and as soon as weather conditions permit, all lawn and grass not in a vigorous, thriving condition, as directed during and at the end of Warranty Period. Guarantee does not cover damage as a result of de-icing compounds, fertilizers, pesticides or other applications not supervised by the Contractor or as a result of acts of God or vandalism. C Matchi : Closely match all replacement sod with adjacent areas of lawn or grass. Apply all requirements of this Specification to all replacements. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SOD A One year old, nursery grown sod, grown with three (3) blends of Bluegrass. The sod source shah be 0407-2006 LAWNS AND GRASSES Progress Conshxbon Documents 02930-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02930 VAIL, COLORADO LAWNS AND GRASSES identified and approved prior to installation. B. Sod Standards: Healthy, thick turf having undergone a program of regular fertilization, mowing and weed control; free of objectionable weeds; uniform in green color, leaf texture and density; healthy, vigorous root system; inspected and found free of disease, nematodes, pests and pest larvae by the entomologist of the State Department of Agriculture. 1. Each piece of Sod: Sandy-loam soil base that will not break, crumble or tear during sod installation. 2. Thickness: 1-1/7 thick, excluding top growth and thatch. 3. Thatch: Not to exceed 1/4' uncompressed. 4. Size: Cut in strips 18' wide no more than 24 hours prior to delivery. C Sod shall be dense, healthy, field-grown on fumigated soil with the grass having been mowed at 1 in. height before lifting from field. D Sod shall be dark green in color, relatively free of thatch, free from diseases, weeks and harmful insects. E Sod shall be reasonably free of objectionable grassy and broadleaf weeds. Sod shall be considered weed free if no more than 10 such weeds are found per 100 sq. It. of sod. F Sod shall be rejected if found to contain the following weeds: common bermudagrass, quackgrass, johnsongrass, poison ivy, nimbleweed, thistle, bindweed, bentgrass, perennial sorrel, bromegrass. 2.02 GRASS SEED A. Composition: Fresh, dean, certified new crop seed of the following varieties mixed by commonly approved methods in the proportions as shown. Native Grass/Wildflower Seed Mix % of Mix Ephraim Crested Wheatgrass 30 SR3200 Blue Fescue 20 Dwarf Perennial Ryegrass 20 Reubens Canada Bluegrass 15 Chewings Fescue 10 Native Wildflowers 05 Total 100 Application Rate: minimum of 60 lbs. pure live seed/acre. Increase rate 30% if broadcast seeding method is used. Add the following: 2. Mix: Rocky Mtn. Wildflower Mix: Available at Arkansas Valley Seed Company (303) 320-7500. Application Rate: minimum of 10 tbs. pure live seedlacre. This application is in addition to the application of the above native grass seed mix. B All seed shall be furnished in bags or containers dearly labeled to show the name and address of the supplier, the seed name, the lot number, net weight, the percent of weed seed content and the guaranteed percentage of purity and germination. All brands furnished shall be free from such noxious seeds as Russian 04-07-2006 LAWNS AND GRAMS Progress Con*uction Doamwb 02930-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02930 VAIL, COLORADO LAWNS AND GRASSES or Canadian Thistle, European Bindweed, Johnson Grass and Leafy Spurge. The contractor shag furnish to the Landscape Architect a signed statement certifying that the seed furnished is from a lot that has been tested by a recognized laboratory for seed testing within six months prior to the date of delivery. Seed which has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit or in storage will not be acceptable. C Seed and seed labels shall conform to all current State and Federal regulations and will be subject to the testing provisions of the Association of Official Seed Analysis. Submit seed labels to Landscape Architect for approval prior to seeding. D Seed shall not exceed 1% of weed content If seed available on the market does not meet the minimum purity and germination percentages of purity or germination by furnishing sufficient additional seed to equal the specified product Product comparison shall be made on the basis of pure five seed in pounds. The formula used for determining the quantity of pure live seed (PLS) shall be: Pounds of Seed x (Purity X Germination) = Pounds of pure Live Seed (PLS) 2.03 SOIL AMENDMENTS: See Section 02920 - Soil Preparation. 2.04 FERTILIZER: A Granular, non-burning product composed of not less than 50% organic, slow acting, guaranteed analysis professional fertilizer. Starter fertilizer for sod areas shall be Triple super Phosphate (0-46-0). No fertilizer shag be applied to native seed areas B Top Dress Fertilizer. Complete fertilizer, 50% of the nitrogen to be derived from natural organic sources of urea-form. Available phosphoric acid shall be from superphosphate, bone or tankage. Potash shall be derived from muriate of potash containing 60% potash. 18% Nitrogen 46% Phosphoric Acid 0% Potash Applicable at the rate of 150 Ibs/acre. 2.05 STRAW OR HAY MULCH: Materials for straw mulching shall consist of straw of oats, barley, wheat or rye. May mulch shag consist of dean field hay. Straw or hay in an advanced stage of decomposition that will smother or retard the normal growth of grass, or that is not free of noxious weed seed, will not be accepted. Old dry straw that breaks in the crimping process will not be accepted. 2.06 HYDRO-MULCH A. General: 1. Tacidfier. Liquid concentrate diluted with water forming a transparent 3-dimensional film like crust permeable to water and air and containing no agents toxic to seed germination. 2. Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch: Degradable green dyed wood cellulose fiber or 100% recycled kmg fiber pulp, free from weeds or other foreign matter toxic to seed germination and suitable from hydromulching. 0407-2006 LAWNS AND GRASSES PmgressCorishuction Documents 02930-5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02930 VAIL, COLORADO LAWNS AND GRASSES 3. Water: Free of substance harmful to seed growth. Hoses or other methods of transportation furnished by Contractor. 4. Dispersion in Slum: Mulch shall be manufactured in such manner that after addition to and agitation in slurry tanks with fertilizer, seed, water and other approved additives, fibers in the material will become uniformly suspended to form a homogeneous slurry. 5. Absorotion Capacity: When hydraulically sprayed on the ground, the material will form a blotter-like groundcover impregnated uniformly with seed which will allow the absorption of moisture and allow rainfall to percolate to the underlying soil. B. Specifications: 1. Weight: Weight specifications of this material from suppliers, and for all applications, shall refer only to air dry weight of the fiber material. Absolute air dry weight is based on the normal standards of the Technical Association of the Pulp and Paper Industry for wood cellulose and is considered equivalent to 10% moisture. 2. Labelin : Each package of the cellulose fiber shall be marked by the manufacturer to show the air dry weight content 3. Product: "EcoAegis Bonded Fiber Matrix" 'Silva Fiber," "X 100 Spra-mulch," or'Conwed' 2.07 HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT FOR HYDRO-MULCHING A. Mixer: Use a commercial type hydro-seeder for the application of slurry. Equipment shall have a built-in agitation system with an operating capacity sufficient to agitate, suspend and homogeneously mix slung. B. Distribution Lines: Large enough to prevent stoppage and to provide even distribution of the slurry over the ground. C. Pump Capacity: Operable at 100 gallons per minute and at 100 psi at the nozzle, unless otherwise directed. 2.08 HERBICIDE: Refer to Section 02920 - Soil Preparation. 2.09 WATER: Potable water as furnished by Owner. Transport as required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A Examine finish surfaces, grades, topsoil quality, and depth. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify availability of water from existing irrigation system. It is the intent that all plant materials receive water from the existing irrigation system or new irrigation systems immediately after installation. B Sodded Areas: 1. Limit preparation to areas which will be immediately sodded. 0407.2006 LAWNS AND GMSES Progress Construction Documents 02930-6 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02930 VAIL, COLORADO LAWNS AND GRASSES 2. Till surface of lawn areas to minimum depth of 4". Remove clods and stones over 1' in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and extraneous matter. 3. Grade sod areas to a smooth, free draining even surface with a loose, moderately coarse texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions as required to drain. 4. Apply starter fertilizer to all seed and sod areas at a rate equal to 1.0 lb. per 1,000 sq. R (200 Ibslacre) or as recommended by the soil testing laboratory. 5. Apply fertilizers by mechanical rotary or drop type distributor, thoroughly and evenly incorporated with soil to a depth of 3" by discing or other approved method. Fertilize areas inaccessible to power equipment with hand tools and incorporate into soil. 6. Restore prepared areas to specified condition if eroded, settled, or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and prior to seeding. 3.02 SOD INSTALLATION A Sodding Operations: Starter Strip: Lay the first row of sod in a straight fine, with subsequent rows parallel to building or walk edge and tightly against each other, with no spaces between strips. Stagger lateral joints. Do not stretch or overlap sod. Butt all joints tightly to eliminate all voids. 2. Cutting: Use a sharp knife to cut sod to fit 3. Tamping: Thoroughly tamp and roll sod to make contact with sod bed. 4. Slopes of 3:1 or Greater: Lay sod with staggered joints secured by pegs driven through sod into soil until pegs are flush with turf. Space pegs 18 in. on center. Pegs to be 1 in. square x 6 in. pine or 6 in. lengths of lath. 5. Watering: Thoroughly water sod immediately after installation to wet the underside of the new sod pad and the soil immediately below to a depth of 6 in. 6. Top-Dress Fertilizer: Apply at a rate of 7 pounds per 1,000 square feet at 25 days and at 50 days after sodding. 3.03 SEED INSTALLATION A Seed Operation: Seed immediately after preparation of seed bed. Spring seeding between spring thaw and June 15 and fag seeding between August 1 and ground freeze or at such other times acceptable to the Landscape Architect Due to freeze conditions, spring thaw and ground freeze shag be defined as that time in which the surface soil either allows or prevents burying the seed's in. through normal drill seeding operations. 2. Seed indicated areas within contract limits and areas adjoining contract limits disturbed as a result of construction operations. 04-07-2006 LAWNS AND GRASSES Progress Coaslrudon Documents 02930- 7 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02930 VAIL, COLORADO LAWNS AND GRASSES 3. Perform seeding operations when the soil is dry and when winds do not exceed 5 miles per hour velocity. Seed shall not be sown, drilled or planted when the surface soil is in a frozen or crusted state. 4. Sow grass seed at rates indicated. 5. Seeding shall be accomplished by mechanical landscape type drills. When requested by the Contractor and approved by the Landscape Architect, seeding may be accomplished by broadcast or hydraulic type seeders. 6. Seeding shall follow as closely behind the tilling of the fertilizer as necessary to make special seed bed preparation unnecessary. All slopes 2:1 and flatter shall be seeded by mechanical power drawn drills followed by packer wheels or drag chains. Mechanical power drawn drills shall have depths bands set to maintain a planting depth of at least 1/4 inch and shall be set to space the rows not more than seven inches apart Seed that is extremely small shall be sowed from a separate hopper adjusted to the proper rate of application. Mulchin : Mulching may be accomplished by the hydraulic method using wood cellulose fiber mulch, or by the crimping method using straw or hay, or by other materials or methods approved of by the Landscape Architect Hydro-mulching: Use a hydro-mulcher (sprayer) and apply mixture(s) at the following rates. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Apply hydro mulch slurry uniformly to seeded areas Hydraulic mulching shall not be done when free standing water is present. Apply hydro mulch slurry to indicated areas. a. Wood cellulose fiber mulch: 2000 tbs./acre. b. Tackifier:100 gallons per acre. c. Limestone: Rate as determined by soil test. Hay or Straw Mulching: Within 24 hours after seeding has been completed, hay or straw shall be uniformly applied at a rate sufficient to cover 50% of the ground surface % inch to inch deep. It shall be crimped in with a crimper or other approved equipment. Areas not mulched and crimped within 24 hours after seeding shall be reseeded with the specific seed mix at the Contractor's expense, prior to mulching and crimping Erosion Control Blanket: On slopes steeper than 2:1 or other designated area blanketing materials, anchored and secured shall be used and installed per manufacturer's specifications. Straw Bales: Provide straw bale checking in ditches or problem swales at intervals required to adequately slow water velocity and impede soil loss. 3.04 MAINTENANCE Refer to Section 02970 - Landscape Maintenance per requirements. 0407-2006 LAWNS AND GRASSES Progress Gonstrudbn Documerfs 02930-8 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02930 VAIL, COLORADO LAWNS AND GRASSES 3.05 ACCEPTANCE A Inspection to determine acceptance of lawns will be made by the Landscape Architect, upon ContracWs request. Provide notification at least 10 working days before requested inspection date. 1. Seeded and sod areas will be acceptable provided all requirements, including maintenance, have been complied with, and a healthy, uniform, dose stand of the specified grass is established free of weeds, undesirable grass species, disease, and insects. 2. No individual lawn areas shall have bare spots or unacceptable cover totaling more than 2% of the individual areas, in areas requested to be inspected. Upon acceptance, the Owner will assume lawn maintenance. 3.06 CLEANING A Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work. Remove from site all excess materials, debris, and equipment. Repair damage resulting from sodding operations. END OF SECTION 04-07-2006 LAWNS AND GRASSES Progress Construction Doaunenfs 02930-9 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02950 VAIL, COLORADO TREES, PLANTS AND GROUNDCOVER SECTION 02950 - TREES, PLANTS AND GROUNDCOVER PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A Related Requirements: Review the General Contract Conditions and Division One, General Requirements, which contain information and requirements that apply to this Section. B Work Included: Provide planting of trees, shrubs, vines, groundcover, perennials complete as shown and as specified. C Related Work in Other Sections: Fine Grading - Section 02210 Sol Preparation - Section 02920 Lawns and Grasses - Section 02930 Landscape Maintenance - Section 02970 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Certificates: 1. Submit certificates of inspection as may be required by local law for transportation of each shipment of plants along with invoice. 2. File copies of certificates after acceptance of material. Inspection by Federal or State Governments at place of growth does not preclude rejection of plants at project site. B Applicable Standards: Apply standards for plant materials as described in the following: 1. "American Standard for Nursery Stock,' November 6, 1996 Edition, American Association of Nurserymen, Inc. This shall supersede these criteria in the event of contradiction or ambiguity. 2. Hortus III -1976 Edition, Bailey Horatodum, Cornell University. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Samples : Submit prior to delivery to site. Attach product name, address of manufacturer and/or supplier to each sarriple. 1. Mulch: One (1) pint each type. 1.04 WORK SCHEDULE A Proceed with the work as rapidly as the site becomes available, consistent with normal seasonal limitations for planting work. 1.05 SELECTION, TAGGING AND ORDERING OF PLANT MATERIAL A Documentation: Submit documentation within 10 days after award of Contract that all plant materials have 04-07-MM TREES, PLANTS & GROUNDCOVERS Progress CWstrucdon Documents 02950-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02950 VAIL, COLORADO TREES, PLANTS AND GROUNDCOVER been ordered. Arrange procedure for review of plant materials at time of submission. B Review: Request for review of plant materials and quantity at place of growth or from nursery shipment site at least 7 days in advance of shipping to site. Right is reserved to refuse review at this time if, in Landscape Architect's judgment, a sufficient quantity of plants is not available. C Transportation: Contractor shall accompany Landscape Architect to all review(s) of plant materials at the nursery. Landscape Architect wtil review and tag plants at place of growth and upon delivery for conformity to specifications. D Distant Material: Submit photographs with a person adjacent to plants for preliminary review. Such review shall not impair the right of review and rejection during progress of the work. E Unavailable Material: If proof is submitted that any plant specified is not obtainable, a proposal will be considered for use of the nearest equivalent size or variety with corresponding adjustment of Contract price. Substantiate such proof in writing no later than 20 days after award of contract. Late substitutions are at the sole approval of the Landscape Architect 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A Labeling: Furnish standard products in manufacturer's standard containers bearing original labels legibly showing quantity, analysis, genus/species and name of manufacturedgrower. B Storage: Store products with protection from weather or other conditions which would damage or impair the effectiveness of the product Protect metal containers from sun during summer months with temperatures above 80 degrees F. C Handling: Do not lift or handle container plants by tops, stems or trunks at any time. Do not bind or handle plants with wire or rope at any time. D Anti-Desiccant: At Contractor's option, spray all evergreen or deciduous plant material in full leaf immediately before transporting with anti-desiccant. Apply an adequate film over trunks, branches, twigs and foliage. E Digging: Dig ball and burlap plants with firm, natural balls of earth of diameter not less than that recommended by USDA Standard for Nursery Stock, and of sufficient depth to include the fibrous and feeding roots. 1.07 ANALYSES OF SAMPLES AND TESTS A Sa in : Right is reserved to take and analyze samples of materials for conformity to specifications at any time. Furnish samples upon request. Rejected Materials: Remove rejected materials immediately from the site at Contractor's expense. Pay cost of testing of materials not meeting specifications. 1.08 MAINTENANCE PERIOD AND FINAL ACCEPTANCE: See Section 02970 - Landscape Maintenance 1.09 WARRANTY PERIOD 04-07-2006 TREES, PLANTS & GROUNDCOVERS Progress Construdion Davments 02950 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02950 VAIL, COLORADO TREES, PLANTS AND GROUNDCOVER A Warranties: 1. Correct Species: Warrant that all plant materials are true to species and variety. 2. Yqor Warrant that all trees and shrubs planted under this Contract will be healthy and in fkxlrishN condition of active growth one year from date of Final Acceptance. Similarly warranty perennial and groundoover for one full growing season from date of Final Acceptance. B Delays: AN delays in completion of planting operations which extend the planting into more than one planting season shall extend the Warranty Period correspondingly. C Condition of Plants: Plants shall be free of dead or dying branches and branch tips, with all foliage of a normal density, size and color. ` D Replacements: As soon as weather conditions permit, replace, without cost to Owner all dead plants and all plants not in a vigorous, thriving condition, as determined by Project Manager during and at the end of Warranty Period. Replacement trees shall have similar warranty for one year from date of replacement planting. Exclusions: Contractor shall not be held responsible for failures due to neglect by Owner, vandalism, etc., during Warranty Period. Report such conditions in writing to the Landscape Architect. 1.10 REPLACEMENTS A Guarantee: For a period of one (1) year after final acceptance of all work and at no additional cost to the Owner, the Contractor is to replace any new or transplanted plant material that is dead, or that is, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, in unhealthy or unsightly condition, or that has lost their natural shape due to dead branches or excessive pruning of dead branches, or that has been damaged beyond repair due, in the judgment of the Landscape Architect, to inadequate maintenance and/or protection from animal damage or the natural elements. B Failed Materials: 1. Plant materials exhibiting conditions which are determined as being unacceptable due to workmanship by the Contractor shall be repaired and/or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner as determined by Landscape Architect. 2. Closely match replacements to adjacent specimens of the same species. Apply all requirements of this Specification to all replacements. 3. Contractor shall be held responsible for a maximum of two (2) replacements for each failed tree and shrub after final acceptance during warranty period. C Incorrect Materials: 1. During Warranty Period, replace at no cost to Owner all plants revealed as being untrue to name. 2. Provide replacements of a size and quality to match the planted materials at the time the mistake is discovered. 0407-2006 TREES, PLANTS & GROUNDCOVERS Prog MCm*udw Documents 02950-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02950 VAIL, COLORADO TREES, PLANTS AND GROUNDCOVER PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PLANT MATERIALS A General: Verify that all container stock has been grown in the containers in which delivered for at least two (2) months, but not over two (2) years for shrubs or one (1) year for perennial and groundcovers. Do not install container plants that have cracked or broken balls of earth when taken from container. 1. Growing Conditions: Plants shall be nursery-grown in accordance with good horticultural practices under similar climatic conditions to those of the project for at least two years unless otherwise specifically authorized. Collected material shall be identified for approval by the Landscape Architect 2. Appearance: All plants shall be exceptionally heavy, symmetrical, tightly knit, and so trained or favored in development and appearance as to be superior in form for their species, with regard to number of branches, compactness and symmetry. 3. Vigor Plants shall be sound, healthy and vigorous, well branched and densely foliated when in leaf. They shall be free of disease, insect pests, eggs, or larvae. They shall have healthy, well-developed root systems. Plants shall be free from physical damage or adverse conditions which would prevent thriving growth. B Condition of Root System: Samples must prove to be completely free of circling, kinked or girdling trunk surface and center roots and show no evidence of a root-bound condition. C Measurements: 1. General: Measure plants when branches are in their normal upright position. Height and spread dimensions specified refer to main body of plant and not branch tip to tip. Take caliper measurement at a point on the trunk 6 in. above natural ground line for trees up to 4 in. in caliper and at a point 12 in. above the natural ground line for trees over 4 in. in caliper. Evergreen trees shall be measured from the base of the tree to the midpoint of the top central leader. 2. Size Range: If a range of size is given, do not use plant materials less than the minimum size. Not less than 40 percent of the plants shall be as large as the maximum size specified. The measurements specified are the minimum size acceptable and are the measurements after pruning, where pruning is required. Plants that meet the measurements specified, but not possess a normal balance between height and spread shall be rejected. 3. Substitutions: Substituted plants shall be true to species and variety and shall conform to measurements specified except that plants larger than specified may be used if accepted. Use of such plants shall not increase Contract price. If larger plants are accepted, increase the ball of earth in proportion to the size of the plant D Pruning Do not prune plants before delivery. For pruning after installation, see Section 02970 - Landscape Maintenance. E Condition: Trees which have multiple leaders, unless specified, or damaged or crooked leaders, will be rejected. Trees having a main leader shall not have been headed back. Trees with abrasions of the bark, sunscalds, disfiguring knots, or fresh cuts of limbs over 314 in. which have not completely callused, will be rejected. 04.07.4006 TREES, PLANTS & GROUNDCOVERS ProgrmCoralm ion Documents 02950-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02950 VAIL, COLORADO TREES, PLANTS AND GROUNDCOVER 2.02 PLANTING BACKFILL MIX FOR ON-GRADE PLANT PITS AND PLANT BEDS: See Section 02920- Soil Preparation. 2.03 COMMERCIAL FERTILIZERS A Too-dress Fertilizer. Complete fertilizer, 50 percent of the nitrogen to be derived from natural organic sources or urea-form. Available phosphoric acid shall be from superphosphate, bone or tankage. Potash shall be derived from muriate of potash containing 60 percent potash: 16% Nitrogen 6% Phosphoric Acid 8% Potash B Perennials: Diammonium Phosphate (18-46-0). 2.04 STAKING MATERIALS A Tree Stakes: Lodgepole Pine, 2 Diameter with 10 in. tapered driving point and chamfered top, treated with copper napthanate or pentachlorophenol to heartwood, green color, as available through Direct Landscape Supply, Littleton, CO (303) 781-2270, or accepted equal. B Ties: 12' x 1 % nylon/cotton weave ties with'/,' grommets and 12 gauge wire. 2.05 GUYING MATERIALS A Anchor and Hardware: 1. 'Duckbill Anchors' as manufactured by Forsight Products. Distributed by Little Valley Nursery, Brighton, CO (303) 659-6708, (800) 221-3241. 2. Hardware: Pre-assembled anchors, collars, cables, clamps and turnbuckles sized according to manufacturer's recommendation for size tree planted. 3. Plastic Guy Covers: 318 in. diameter x 3 ft. long white plastic tubing. Provide for all guyed installations as identified in the field by the Landscape Architect. 4. Provide for all guyed installations of evergreen trees. 2.06 WATER A Clean, fresh and potable, furnished and paid for by Owner. 2.07 MULCH A Type 1 for Trees and Shrubs: 'Small Fir Fiber Mulch', as supplied by Jensen Sales Company, Littleton, CO, Tel. (303) 791-4250 or approved equal. B Type 2 for Perennials Areas: '114 minus Supreme Mulch', as supplied by Direct Landscape supplies, Littleton, CO, Tel. (303) 781-2270 or approved equal. 2.08 ANTI-DESICCANT 04.07-2006 Progress Construction Documents TREES, PLANTS & GROUNDCOVERS 02950-5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02950 VAIL, COLORADO TREES, PLANTS AND GROUNDCOVER A Type: Anti-desiccants for retarding excessive loss of plant moisture and inhibiting wilt shall be sprayable, water insoluble vinyl-vinyledine complex which will produce a moisture retarding barrier not removable by rain or snow. B Manufacturer. Wilt-pruf Formula NCF as manufactured by Nursery Specialty Products, Greenwich, CT, or accepted equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPIANT REVIEW A General: Do not commence planting work prior to acceptance of soil preparation. B Finish Grades: Finish grades for all planting areas shall have been established in accordance with Section 02210. Verify that all grades are within 1 in. plus or minus of required finish grade and that all soil amendments have been installed as specified under Section 02920_Soil Preparation. Fine rake planting beds prior to planting shrubs. C Notification: Submit written notification of all conditions inconsistent with specifications for soil preparation and mixing as described in Section 02920 - Soil Preparation. 3.02 DRAINAGE OF PLANTING AREAS A Surface Drainage: Maintain positive surface drainage of planted areas as shown on grading plans. B Discrepancies: Submit in writing, all discrepancies in the Drawings or Specifications, obstructions on the site, or prior work done by others, which Contractor feels precludes maintaining proper drainage; include description of all work required for correction or relief of said discrepancies. C Detrimental Drainage. Soils and Obstructions: Notification: Supply written notification of all conditions detrimental to growth of plant material. State condition and submit proposal and cost estimate for correcting condition. 2. Testing: Test drainage of plant beds and pits by filling with water twice in succession. Give written notification of conditions permitting the retention of water in planting beds for more than twenty-four (24) tours. 3. Correction: Submit for acceptance a written proposal and cost estimate for the correction of poor drainage conditions before proceeding with work. 4. Obstructions: If rock, underground construction work, tree roots or other obstructions are encountered in the excavation of plant pits, alternate locations may be used as directed by Landscape Architect. Where locations cannot be changed, submit cost required to remove the obstructions to a depth of not less than 6 in. below the required pit depth. Proceed with work after acceptance. D Subsurface Drainage: See Landscape Drainage - Section 02720. 0¢07-2op6 TREES, PLANTS & GROUNDCOVERS Progress Construction Dommwts 02950 - 6 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02950 VAIL, COLORADO TREES, PLANTS AND GROUNDCOVER 3.03 LAYOUT AND EXCAVATION OF PLANTING AREAS A Layout and Staking: Lay out all trees, shrubs and container locations as shown on Drawings. Review. Locations of plants will be checked in the field and will be adjusted to exact position before planting begins. Right is reserved to refuse review at this time if, in the Landscape Architects opinion, an insufficient quantity of plants is available. C Equipment for Digging Plant Pits: Use of an auger or vernier spade to dig plant pits is prohibited. Bac khoe is acceptable, with scarification of the tree pit after excavation - see below. D Plant Pits: Excavate tree and shrub to a minimum of twice the diameter of the ball or container, in accordance with Drawings. 3.04 PLANTING OPERATIONS A General: Protect plants at all times from sun or drying winds. 2. Keep plants that cannot be planted immediately upon delivery in the shade, well-protected and well-watered. 3. Heel in and protect with burlap all B&B plant materials which cannot be planted upon delivery. B Handling and De-potting of Plant Materials: 1. Metal Containers: Cut can on two sides with accepted cutting tool. Do not use spade 2. Plastic Containers: Tip container to horizontal orientation and carefully remove shrub. Support rootball during installation to prevent cracking or shedding of soil. 3. Balled and Burlap Plants: Avoid all damage to rootballs. If rootball is cracked or broken during handling, plant will be rejected. Lift and carry by bottom of ball only. Do not remove wrapping until plant is set In plant pit. Cut and remove all wire completely from around root ball and peel burlap away from upper 1/3 of rootball prior to backfilling. C Installation: 1. Scarification: a. Plant Rootball: After removing plant from container, scarify the sides of the rootball to a depth of 1 in. at four to six equally-spaced locations around the perimeter of the ball. Completely sever or remove all circling roots over 3/8 in. diameter. b. Plant Pit: Excavate deep enough to accommodate the ball and bed (no less than 6' depth) of prepared back Of mix. Compact before setting of plants. Scarify sides of plant pit, thoroughly breaking up all surfaces and eliminating all 'glazed" areas. 2. Positioning: Backfill plant pit as required to allow setting crown of plant 2 in. above new finish grade. Thoroughly foot tamp all backfill. Position plant in planting pit, maintaining plumb condition. 0407-2006 TREES, PLANTS & GROUNDCOVERS Progress Construction Docummb 02950-7 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02950 VAIL, COLORADO TREES, PLANTS AND GROUNDCOVER 3. Backfilling: a. Use backfill mix as specified in Section 02920 - Soil Preparation, to badcfill plant pits. Brace each plant plumb and rigidly in position until planting soil has been tamped solidly around the bail and roots. b. When plant pits have been backfilled approximately 2/3 full, water thoroughly and saturate rootball, before installing remainder of the backfill mix to top of pit, eliminating all air pockets. 4. Staking and/or Guying: When required, stake or guy as detailed. D Adlustment Adjust plants so that after full settlement has occurred, the grade at the base of the plants is 2 in. above the adjacent planting finish grade. E Watering Basin: Form saucer with 3 in. high berm centered around tree and shrub pits 12 in. wider than ball diameter. Watering: Water all plants immediately after completion of planting operations. G. Labels: Remove all nursery-type plant labels, wires and ties from plants. 3.05 STAKING AND GUYING A General: 1. Trees shall be able to stand upright without support, and shall return to the vertical after their tops have been deflected horizontally and released. Stake or guy trees which do not meet this qualification. 2. All plant materials shall remain plumb and straight for all given conditions from installation through the guarantee period. B Staking (Deciduous Trees): 1. Locate stakes in a line with trunk of tree, perpendicular to prevailing wind and as dose to the main trunk as is practical, avoiding root injury. Drive stakes at least 30 in. into firm ground. See Planting Details. 2. Wire support straps shall be placed around the trunk in a single loop. Run wire throw grommets on support strap, tighten, and keep taut C Guying (Evergreen Trees): 1. Guy Evergreen trees at points of branching 1/3 height of tree, with three (3) guys spaced equally around and outside perimeter of bail, in accordance with Drawings. 2. Gins: Provide pre-assembled anchors, collars, cables, damps and tumbuckles sized according to manufacturers recommendation for size tree planted. Place white plastic guy covers on all guys. 3.06 PRUNING: See Section 02970 - Landscape Maintenance 3.07 MULCHING: Install a 3 in. deep layer of specified mulch over all planting areas including tree and shrub watering basins unless otherwise noted on drawings. 04.07.2006 TREES, PLANTS & GROUNDCOVERS Progress Construction Documents 02950-8 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02950 VAIL, COLORADO TREES, PLANTS AND GROUNDCOVER 3.08 SHRUB AND PERENNIAL PLANTING A Plantin : Plant plants at optimum depth for proper growth. Avoid air pockets. Equally spaced triangularly, at distances called for in the Drawings. See Planting Details. B Fertilizers: Apply top-dress fertilizer at the rate of 3 pounds per 1,000 square feet immediately after planting. C Watering Water bed thoroughly after fertilizer application. Wash all fertilizer from leaves of plant materials. D Mulching: Install 3" deep layer of specified mulch over all shrub and perennial beds. 3.09 CLEAN-UP A Keep all areas of work clean, neat and orderly at all times. B Clean up and remove all deleterious materials and debris from the entire work area prior to Final Acceptance. END OF SECTION 04-07-zoos Progress Constnuftn Doounents TREES. PLANTS & GROUNDCOVERS 02950-9 fi E f PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02970 VAIL, COLORADO LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE SECTION 02970 - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A Related Requirements: Review the General Contract Conditions and Division One, General Requirements, which contain information and requirements that apply to this Section. B Work Included: Provide Landscape Maintenance, complete as specified. 1. Work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals needed to provide complete landscape and irrigation maintenance program to the Owner during the installation period and for 90 days following date of Final Acceptance. Maintenance items shall include all items constructed under this Contract 2. Work specifically included for maintenance includes: a. Watering, pruning, weed control and replacement of mulch for trees, shrubs, groundcovers, and perennials. b. Mowing, edging, fertilization, watering and weed control within turf areas. C. Irrigation system start-up and related adjustment d. Twice weekly inspection of irrigation system and repair of damages caused by Contractor. e. Irrigation controller programming. f. Irrigation system shut down. g. Winter watering as required. h. Monthly site inspection of potential insect, pest and disease problems and filing of monthly status report 1. Weekly clean-up of trash, litter and debris. 3. Work which may be required under this Section, but which K required will be considered a claim for extra work (see General Conditions), include the following: a. Insect, pest and disease control. b. Plant replacement due to theft, vandalism, or accidental damage by others after final acceptance. (Supplemental unit prices will apply for one (1) year following final acceptance). C. Repair of damages to the irrigation system which have not been caused by Contracts maintenance practices or negligence. 0407-2006 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE Progress Construction Documents 02970-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02970 VAIL, COLORADO LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE C Related Work in Other Sections: Irrigation System - Section 02810 Soil Preparation - Section 02920 Lawns and Grasses - Section 02930 Trees, Plants and Groundcover - Section 02950 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 1. Perform all work in accordance with all applicable laws, codes, and regulations required by authorities having jurisdiction over such work. 2. Provide for all inspections and permits required by Federal, State, or local authorities in famishing, transporting, and installing of all agricultural chemicals. B 6MIicable Standards: Workmanship and overall maintenance program shall conform to the highest level of industry standards. C Work Force: 1. Experience: The landscape maintenance firm shall have a full time foreman assigned to the job for the duration of the contract. He shall have a minimum of four years experience in landscape maintenance supervision, with experience or training in entomology, pest control, soils, fertilizers and plant identification. 2. Labor Force: The landscape maintenance firm's labor force shall be thoroughly familiar and trained in the work to be accomplished and perform the task in a competent, efficient manner acceptable to the Owner. 3. Supervision: The foreman shall directly employ and supervise the work force at all times. Notify Landscape Architect of all changes in supervision. 4. Identification: Provide proper identification at all times for landscape maintenance firm's vehicles and labor force. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Submit two (2) copies each of the following items: 1. Schedule of maintenance operations and monthly status report including list of all equipment and materials proposed for the job. 2. All licenses and insurances required by the local governing authority and the State of Colorado pertaining to this work. 3. Monthly record of all herbicides, insecticides and disease control chemicals used for the project 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Site Visit: At beginning of maintenance period, visit and walk the site with the Landscape Architect to clarify scope of work and understand existing project/site conditions. 04-07-2006 LANDSCAPE MAKMNANCE Progress Consh rfion Documents 02970-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02970 VAIL, COLORADO LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE B Documentation of Conditions: Document general condition of existing trees, shrubs, vines, groundcovers and lawn recording all plant materials which are damaged or dying, if any. C Irrigation System: Document general condition of existing irrigation system, making sure that fauKy electrical controllers, broken or inoperable sprinkler heads or emitters are reported. 1.05 SCHEDULING A Perform all maintenance during hours mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor. B Work force shall be present at the project site at least once a week and as often as necessary to perform specified maintenance in accordance with the approved maintenance schedule. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A Fertilizers: Sierra Chemical Company 1001 Yosemite Drive qw~ Milipitas, CA 95035 (408) 263-8080 W.R. Grace and Co. Agricultural Chemicals Group Memphis, TN 38101 BFC Chemicals, Inc. Wilmington, DE 19805 Or Approved Equal Product B Herbicides: Chevron Chemical Company 575 Market Street San Francisco, CA 94105 (415) 8940880 Rhone-Poulenc Chemical Company Agro Chemical Division P.O. Box 125 Mon Mouth Junction, NJ 08852 (201) 297-0100 Ciba-Geigy Corporation Agricultural Division P.O. Box 1830 C Greensboro, NC 27419 (919) 292-7100 0407-2006 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE Progress Construction Domments 02970-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02970 VAIL, COLORADO LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE Elanco Products Company 740 S. Alabama St Indianapolis, IN 46285 (317) 261-3638 The DOW Chemical Company P.O. Box 1706 Midland, MI 48640 (517) 636-0236 3M Company-Agri Chemicals Project 3M Center, Bldg. 223-6SE St Paul, MN 55144 (317) 261-3000 Or Approved Equal Product 2.02 MATERIALS A General: All materials and equipment, unless otherwise indicated, shall be provided by the Contractor. B Water. Clean, potable and fresh, furnished and paid for by the Owner. C Fertilizers: 1. Tightly-compressed, slow-release and long-lasting complete fertilizer tablets bearing manufacturer's label of guaranteed analysis of chemicals present 2. Balanced, once-a-season application controlled-release fertilizers with a blend of coated prills which supply controlled-release nitrogen, phosphorus and potassium, and uncoated, rapidly soluble prills containing nitrogen and phosphorous. D Herbicides, Insecticides, and Fungicides: 1. Obtain best quality materials with original manufacturers' containers, properly labeled with guaranteed analysis. 2 Use non-staining materials. E Annuals/Perennials: Nursery-grown in 4 in. or 6 in. pots, full, healthy plants just ready to bloom. F Lawn Seed for Reseeding: Match existing lawn mix. G Lawn Sod for Resoddina: Match existing sodded lawn. H Replacement Tree Guys, Stakes. Ties and Wires: Match exstng materials on the site. Provide detail(s) in 8-112 in. x 11 in. format I necessary. I Compost A-10rganics 'Premium Compost as provided by Organics, Eaton, CO, Tel. (970) 484-2113 or approved equal. 0407-2OD6 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE Progress Constnnlion Documents 02970 - 4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02970 VAIL, COLORADO LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A Duration: Continuously maintain each plant and each portion of groundcover area after installation, during progress of work, and for a period of 90 days after completion of all planting work until Final Acceptance. B Protection: 1. Protect all planting areas from damage of all kinds from beginning of work until Final Acceptance. 2. Maintenance includes temporary protection fences, barriers and signs as required for animal protection. C Replacements: Immediately treat or replace all plants that become damaged or injured as a result of Contractor's operations or negligence, as directed by Landscape Architect at no additional cost to Owner. 2. Replacement plants shall be of acceptable size, condition and variety. 3.02 TREES, SHRUBS AND VINES A Watering Basins: Maintain all watering basins around plants so that enough water can be applied to establish moisture through major root zones. 2. For supplemental hand watering of watering basins, use a water wand to break the water force. Do not permit crown roots to become exposed to air through dislodging of soil and mulch. 3. Maintain originally called for depth of mulch to reduce evaporation and frequency of watering. 4. In rainy season, open basins to allow surface drainage away from the root crown where excess water may accumulate. Restore watering basins at end of rainy season. B Resetting: Reset plants to proper grades or upright position. C Weed Control: 1. All areas between plants, including watering basins, shall be weed free. 2. Use only recommended and legally approved herbicides to control weed growth. 3. Control weeds through proper cultural practices including cultivation, hand removal and hoeing, being careful to avoid damage to plant material. 4. Proceed with the application of pre-emergent and selective systemic herbicides only at the approval of the Owner's Representative. 0407-2006 LANDSCAPE MAKrENANCE Progress Consh bon Documents 02970-5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02970 VAIL, COLORADO LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE D Pruning: 1. Prune trees to select and develop permanent scaffold branches that are smaller in diameter than the trunk or branch to which they are attached, and which have vertical spacing of 18 in. to 48 in. in radial orientation so as not to overlay one another. 2. Prune trees to eliminate diseased or damaged growth, and narrow V-shaped branch forks that lads strength. Reduce toppling and wind damage by thinning out crowns. 3. Prune trees to maintain growth within space limitations, maintaining a natural appearance and balancing crown with roots. 4. Stripping of lower branches ("raising up') of young trees will not be permitted. 5. Retain lower branches in a 'tipped bads' or pinched condition to promote caliper trunk growth (tapered trunk). Do not cut back to fewer than six buds or leaves on such branches. Only cut lower branches flush with the trunk after the tree is able to stand erect without staking or other support. . 6. Thin out and shape evergreen trees when necessary to prevent wind and storm damage. Do primary pruning of deciduous trees during the dormant season. Do not permit any pruning of trees prone to excessive "bleeding' during growth season. 7. Prune damaged trees or those that constitute health or safety hazards at any time of year as required. 8. Make all cuts dean and dose W the trunk, without cutting into the branch collar. 'Stubbing" will not be permitted. Cut smaller branches flush with trunk or lateral branch. Make larger cuts (1 in. in diameter or larger) parallel to shoulder rings with the top edge of the cut at the trunk or lateral branch. 9. Branches too heavy to handle shall be precut in three stages to prevent splitting or peeling of bark. Make the first two cuts 18 in. or more from the trunk to remove the branch. Make the third cut at the trunk to remove the resulting stub. 10. Do not prune or dip shrubs into balled or boxed forms unless specifically called for by design. 11. Clip shrubs to be hedged when branches project 2 in. beyond limit of dipped hedge shown on the Drawings. Staking or Guyina of Trees: Inspect stakes and guys at least once a month to died for rubbing that causes bark wounds. 2. Conform to the recommended procedures of staking and guying as outlined in Section 02950 Trees, Plants and Groundcovers. Maintenance of Existing Trees and Shrubs to Remain: 1. General: Conform to all applicable paragraphs regarding pruning, watering, spraying and fertilizing of new plant materials as specified in this section. 2. Be alert to symptoms of construction damage to root systems of existing trees and shrubs as 007-2006 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE Progress Construction Dox►menis 02970 - 6 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02970 VAIL, COLORADO LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE evidenced by wilting, unseasonal or early flowering or loss of leaves, and insect or disease infestation due to declining vigor. 3. Give notification in writing of all evidence of declining tree or shrub vigor immediately upon discerning the problem. Take appropriate interim measures to mitigate the severity of the problem as specified in this section. 4. Submit written proposal and cost estimate for the correction of all conditions before proceeding with permanent correction work. 3.03 GROUNDCOVERS A Watering: 1. Check for moisture penetration throughout the root zone at lease twice a month. 2. Water as frequently as necessary to maintain healthy growth of groundcovers. 3.04 LAWNS A Watering: 1. Water lawns at such frequency as weather conditions require, to replenish soil moisture to 6 in. below root zone. 2. Provide a total of 1-1/2 in. of water weekly during hot summer weather, in three (3) applications per week. 3. Water at night if irrigation system is electrically controlled. Otherwise, watering shall be done during early mornings. B Weed Control: 1. Control broadleaf weeds with selective herbicides. 2. In areas where crabgrass has infested the lawn, apply a selective post-emergent herbicide as soon as possible, and prior to flowering. 3. Apply pre-emergent herbicides such as Dacthal, Balan, or Betasan prior to crabgrass germination. 4. Do not irrigate for 48 hours after application of all herbicide sprays. 5. Coordinate application of herbicides with thatch control and reseeding schedule as described below. C Mowing and Edging: 1. Mow lawns when they reach 2 in. high. 2. Mow and bale hay field once in the autumn. 0407--2006 . LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE Progress Construdon Dowwts 02970-7 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02970 VAIL, COLORADO LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE D Reseeding of Lawn Areas: Match existing seed mix of adjacent areas. E Renovating: 1. Top Dress Fertilizer. See Section 02930 - Lawns and Grasses. 3.05 SEEDED GRASSES A Watering: 1. Water lawns at such frequency as weather conditions require, to replenish soil moisture to 6 in. below root zone. 2. Provide a total of 11/2 in. of water weekly during hot summer weather, in one (1) applications per week. 3. Water at night 9 irrigation system is electrically controlled. Otherwise, watering shall be done during early momings. B Weed Control: 1. Control broadleaf weeds, primarily Canadian Thistle with selective herbicides. 2. In areas where crabgrass has infested the lawn, apply a selective post-emergent herbicide as soon as possible, and prior to flowering. 3. Apply pre-emergent herbicides such as Dacthal, Balan, or Betasan prior to crabgrass germination. 4. Do not irrigate for 48 hours after application of all herbicide sprays. 5. Coordinate application of herbicides with thatch control and reseeding schedule as described below. C Mowing and Edging: 1. Mow grasses as directed by the Owner. D Reseeding of Lawn Areas: Match existing seed mix of adjacent areas. E Renovating: 1. Too Dress Fertilizer: Top dress with 1/4' of compost in early spring. 3.06 ANNUALS AND PERENNIALS A Watering: 1. Species, sizes of plants, container sizes and orientation shall dictate frequency of watering. Submit to Owner a watering schedule for different seasonal requirements. B Weed Control: All planting beds with annuals and perennials shall be weed-free at all times. 0407-2008 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE Progress Construction Documents 02970-8 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02970 VAIL, COLORADO LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE C Prunin : 1. Limit pruning to removal of damaged or dead twigs and foliage. 2. Remove spent flowers on a weekly basis. D Realacements of Annuals: 1. Replace annuals when materials exhibit a'spent7 condition. 2. Thoroughly cultivate soil after removal of 'spent" or "dead' plants prior to planting new materials. 3. Incorporate slow release fertilizers and rake smooth. 3.07 INSECTS, PESTS, AND DISEASE CONTROL A Inspection: Inspect all plant materials for signs of stress, damage and potential trouble from the following: 1. Presence of insects, moles, voles, gophers, ground squirrels, snails and slugs in planting areas. 2. Discolored or blotching leaves or needles. 3. Unusually fight green or yellowish green color inconsistent with normal green color of leaves. B Personnel: Perform spraying for insect, pest and disease control only by licensed, qualified, trained personnel. C AyMication: Spray with extreme care to avoid all hazards to any person or pet in the area or adjacent areas. 3.08 IRRIGATION SYSTEM A General: 1. Repair without charge to Owner all damages to system caused by Contractor's operations. Perform all repairs within one (1) watering period. 2. Report promptly to Owner all accidental damage not resulting from Contractor's negligence or operations. 3. Set and program automatic controllers for seasonal water requirements. 4. Twice a month, use a probe or other acceptable tool to check the rootball moisture of representative plants as well as the surrounding Sol. B Cleaning and Monitoring the System: 1. Continually monitor the irrigation systems to verify that they are functioning properly as designed. Make program adjustments required by changing field conditions. 2. Clean pump filter and strainer once a year and as often as necessary to keep the irrigation systems 04-07-2006 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE Progress ConsWcdon Documents 02970- 9 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02970 VAIL, COLORADO LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE free of sand and other debris. 3. Prevent spraying on windows, building walls, and site structures by balancing the throttle control on the control valves and the adjustment screws on the sprinkler heads. Do not allow water to atomize and drUL C Winterization: The irrigation system is designed to be completely drained to protect pipe from bursting prior to freezing temperatures. To adequately drain the system, the following procedure must be followed: Air blow-out a. Set automatic control stations t0 2-112 minutes timing. b. Attach hose from portable air compressor to 1 in. air inlet installed on main line at backfiow preventer. C. Operate compressor at 100 cu. ft. per second at 60-80 PSI. 2. Manual drain valves: Open manual drain valves located at low points on the main line to drain main completely after air blow-out has been completed. 3. Backftow Preventer: Rotate backfiow unit at unions and open pet cocks and drain. Reverse operation and tighten unions to resume irrigation. 3.09 THE 90 DAY MAINTENANCE PERIOD A Preliminary Review: As soon as all plantings are completed per Contract Documents, hold a preliminary review to determine the condition of the work. B Date of Review: Submit a written request at least five (5) working days prior to anticipated date of review. C Beginning of the 90 Day Maintenance Period: The date on which the Landscape Architect issues a letter of Preliminary Acceptance to the Contractor. 3.10 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A Acceptance: 1. Work will be accepted by the Landscape Architect upon satisfactory completion of all work, including maintenance period, but exclusive of replacement of materials under the Warranty Period. 2. Submit a written request to Landscape Architect for review of Final Acceptance at least five (5) working days prior to anticipated Final Review date, which is at the end of the Maintenance Period. B Corrective Work: 1. Work requiring corrective action or replacement shall be performed within ten (10) calendar days after the Final Review. 2. Perform corrective work and materials replacement in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, and shall be made by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. 0407-2006 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE Progress Con5hcUon Documents 02970-10 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 02970 VAIL, COLORADO LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 3. After corrective work is completed, the Contractor shall again request a Final Review for Final Acceptance as outlined above. 4. Continue maintenance of all landscaped areas until such time as all corrective measures have been completed and accepted. C Conditions for Acceptance of Work at End of Maintenance Period: Each plant shall be alive and thriving, showing signs of growth and no signs of stress, disease, or any other weaknesses. 2. All plants not meeting these conditions shall be replaced and a 90 Day Maintenance Period commenced for such plants. D Final Acceptance Date: The date on which the Landscape Architect issues a Letter of Final Acceptance. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance of the work. 3.11 WARRANTY PERIOD AND REPLACEMENTS OF PLANT MATERIALS A Specific Requirements: Lawns and Grasses - Refer to Section 02930. 2. Trees, Plants and Groundcover- Section 02950. a. Vim: Warrant that all trees and shrubs planted under this Contract will be healthy and in flourishing condition of active growth one year from date of Final Acceptance. Similarly warranty perennial and groundcover for one full growing season from date of Final Acceptance. b. Condition of Plants: Plants shall be free of dead or dying branches and branch tips, with all foliage of a normal density, size and color. C. Replacements: As soon as weather conditions permit, replace, without cost to Owner all dead plants not in a vigorous, thriving condition, as determined by Project Manager during and at the end of Warranty Period. Replacement trees shag extend warranty period correspondingly for one year from date of replacement planting. d. Exclusions: Contractor shall not be held responsible for failures due to neglect by Owner, vandalism, etc., during Warranty Period. Report such conditions in writing to the Landscape Architect END OF SECTION 0407-MM LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE PmgmessCwshction Documents 02970-11 PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL; COLORADO SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK A. Formwork for cast-in-plaoe concrete, complete with shoring, bracing and anchorage. B. Form openings for mechanical and electrical work. C. Coordinate installation of items supplies under other specification sections. D. Pre-formed construction joints. E. Waterstops. F. Flashing reglets. G. Void forms. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 Cast4n-Place Concrete B. Section 05500: Metal fabrications to be embedded in concrete. C. Mechanical and electrical items to be embedded in concrete. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Requirements: 1. Responsibility: Design of formwork is the Subcontractor's responsibility and shall be reviewed and approved by a Civil Engineer licensed in Colorado. 2. Standards: Comply with the following, except as modified by the Building Code or these specifications. a. ACI 301-'Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.' b. ACI 347 -'Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.' C. ACI 3038 - "Guide to Cast in-Place Architectural Concrete Practice.' 3. Allowable Tolerances: a. Construct formwork to provide completed cast-in-place concrete surfaces corrtplyeog with the tolerances specified in ACI 347. Architechxal concrete formwork shall conform to the recommendations of AC1303R. 1) All exterior exposed concrete shall be considered architectural concrete. 'Exposed' includes painted as well as unpainted concrete. 0407-06 CONCRETE FORANVORK Progress CD Set 03100 -1 PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS 6 RESORTS SECTION 03100 VAIL, COLORADO CONCRETE FORMWORK Form openings for inserted work such as doors, glazing frames, and windows to ACI 347 tolerances and indicated dimensions so that at least 1/4' clearance is available for shimming and sealant joint. Note special Werance requirements for locations of certain area drains, as indicated on drawings. B. Shoring and Bracing: Design of Shoring and Bracing for Formwork: Conform to the fogowing for additional shoring required as work of this section: Pursuant to tabor Code 6707, the Subcontractor shag include in his bid all costs incidental to the provision of adequate shoring, bracing or equivalent method for the protection of life or limb, which shag conform to applicable Federal and State Safety orders. The Subcontractor shag submit to the contractor a detailed plan showing the design of shoring, bracing, or other provisions to be made for worker protection. The proposed plan shag comply with the standards established by the Local Construction Safety orders. If the detailed plan varies from such shoring system standards, it shag be prepared by a registered civil engineer whose name and registration number shall be indicated on the drawing. The cost of required engineering services shag be bome by the Subcontractor and shag be deemed to have been included in the amount bid for the work as stated in the Agreement The Subcontractor shag not submit to the Contractor for approval a shoring, bracing, or other protective system less effective than that required by the Division of Industrial Safety Construction Safety Orders. The Subcontractor shag comply with Safety Code of the State relating to lateral, general and sub-adjacent supports wherever structures or improvements adjacent to an excavation may be damaged by such excavation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing location and types of architectural concrete and finWm, type of forming material, location and treatment of form joints, On of form ties, location and treatment of form ties, nrstiration maWriai, location of rustication, methods of sealing form joints and methods of sealing forms at construction joints. Obtain Architects review of drawings before fabricating ardritectural concrete formwork. ArchiWs review is for c onforrnanc a to architectural detail and compliance with specifications only, Subcontractor is responsible for engineering design of formwork. B. Product Data Subunit Manufacturer's data and Installation instructions for proprietary materials such as form coatings, manufactured form systems, ties and accessories. C. Submit manufacturer's certification that form release agent will provide dean, stainfree surfaces of concrete and not interfere with bond of applied finishes. D. Formwork Design: Furnish for record purposes certification that the formwork, shoring and bracing designs have been reviewed and signed by a Civil or Structural Engineer registered in the State of Colorado. Certification may be in the form of a letter on the Engineer's letterhead and bearing the Engineer's stamp. 04-07-06 CONCRETE FORMWORK Progress CD Set 03100 - 2 PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL COLORADO SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Schedule: Furnish for information-planned schedule of form removal and shoring removal. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver form release agents in manufacturer's sealed and trademarked containers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. General: Form material shall be as required to produce continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. Materials selected shall be satisfactory to Architect for effect on finished appearance of concrete. Architectural concrete formwork shall be of one material throughout the worts, for all similar types of concrete surfaces. Architectural Concrete: High Density Overlaid Concrete Form, plastic coated, smooth faced, with sharp edges for flush butt joints between forms. C. Exposed Non-Architectural Concrete: Metal or APA graded Plyform, Grade BB, Class I or It, or HDO plywood exterior type, each piece graded, no mill oiling. Use one form face material throughout the project for similar types of concrete surfaces. Provide material and bracing with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection. D. Round Columns and Supports: Provide metal two-piece column forms of sufficient wall thickness to resist loads imposed by the concrete without deformation. Form shall be full height of column. Provide for attachment of tracing without penetrations of the form wall, as for bolts. E. Concealed Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Provide lumber that is dressed on at least 2 edges and 1 side. 'Concealed' means not visible in the completed structure. (Painted concrete is not to be considered 'concealed'.) F. Form Ties: Provide snap Iles with plastic cones of same size and shape and of same manufacturer as cement cone hole plugs provided under Concrete Section. Wire ties and site fabricated ties and wood separators are not acceptable. G. Form Coatings: Commercial forrradation resin-based fomn-coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond, or adhesion, nor impede the wetting of surfaces to be coed with water or curing compounds. Oils and petroleum olsti later are not acceptable. Verity compatibility of form coating with proposed surface finish. H. Metal Inserts: Provide metal inserts for anchorage of materials or equipment to concrete construction, where not supplied by other trades and required for the work. 1. Rustications and Reveals: Milled wood, sealed with two coats of W.R. Grace Form Film, or neoprene rubber, Symons Corporation, or equal. 0407-06 CONCRETE FORMWM Progress CD Set 03100 - 3 PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03100 VAIL, COLORADO CONCRETE FORMWORK Provide curved rustication strips where required, smoothly curved to correct radius. 2.02 FORMWORK SYSTEMS A. Design, erect support, brad and maintain formwork so that it will safely support vertical and lateral loads that nit be applied, until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Cant' vertical and lateral loads to ground by formwork system and in-place construction that has attained adequate strength for that purpose. Construct formwork so that concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. B. Design forms and falsework to include assumed values of five bad, dead load, weight of moving equipment operated on formwork, concrete mix, height of concrete drop, vibrator frequency, ambient temperature, foundation pressures, stresses, lateral stability, and other factors pertinent to safety of structuring during construction. C. Provide shores and struts with positive means of adjustment capable of taking up formwork settlement dhft concrete placing operations, using wedges or jacks or a combination thereof. Provide trussed supports when adequate foundations for shores and struts cannot be secured. D. Support form facing materials by structural members spaced sufficiently close to prevent deflection. Fit forms placed in successive units for continuous surfaces to accurate alignment, free from irregularities and within allowable toieranoes. Provide camber in formwork as required for anticipated deflections due to weight and pressures of fresh concrete and construction loads. E. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast4n-place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. F. Provide formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement past during concrete placement Solidly butt and gasket joints and provide backup material at joints to prevent leakage and fins. G. Earth forms are pemnitted only where shown. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces and conditions receiving or affecting the work. Do not proceed until unsuitable conditions have been corrected. 3.02 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. General: Construct forms complying with ACI 347 and ACI 303R, as applicable to the sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown, and to accurate alignment, location, grades, levels, and plumbness. Provide for openings, sleeves, offsets, recesses, reglets, chamfers, inserts, and Oda feahures required. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Before placing concrete, dmck the fines and levels of erected formwork. Make corrections and cAustrnents to erne proper size and locatioru of concrete members and stability of forming system. 1. RkIW, fns, depressions, and plugs are not acceptable in exposed architectural concrete work. 04.07.06 CONCRETE FORMNYORK Progress CD Set 03100 - 4 PROJECT 97083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL. COLORADO SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK 2. Fabricate farms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where the slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, regrets, recesses, and the line, to prevent swelling and assure ease of removal. 3. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for deanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Brace temporary closures and set tighly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms in as Inconspicuous location as possible, consistent with project requirements. Start forms with a 60, minimum, wide space to provide continuous cleanout space. Locate deanouts in unexposed areas of architectural concrete. 4. Form intersecting planes to provide true, dean-cut comers, with edge grain of plywood not exposed as form for concrete. 5. Place steel forms with ribs perpendicular to supports and secure with plug welds to each nb occurring over supports. B. Fassework: Erect falsework and support, brace and maintain it to safely support vertical, lateral and asymmetrical loads applied until such bads can be supported by in-place concrete structures. Construct falsework so that adjustment can be made for take-up and settlement Provide wedges, jacks or camber strips to facilitate vertical adjustments. Carefully Inspect falsework and formwork ftWg and after concrete placement operations to determine abnormal deflection or signs of failure; make necessary adjustments to produce work of required dimensions. Be responsible for the proper strength, safety and adequacy of all falsework, supports, and other work of this Section. Falsework and supports shall be adequate in size and strength to support the bads imposed on them without excessive deformation, deflection, or settlement C. Forms for Exposed Concrete: 1. Dn71 forms to suit ties used and to prevent leakage of concrete mortar around tie holes. Do not sprinter forms by driving ties through improperly prepared tales. 2. Do not use metal cover plates or plastic plugs for patching holes or defects in forms for concrete that will be permanently exposed in the finished work. 3. Provide sharp, dean edges at Intersecting planes, without visible edges or offsets. Back joints with extra skids or girts to maintain true, square intersections. 4. Use extra skids, walers and bracing to prevent bowing of forms between studs and to avoid bowed appearance in concrete. Do not use narrow strips of form material, which will produce bow. 5. Assemble forms so they may be readily removed without damage to exposed concrete surfaces. 6. Form recesses and projections with smooth finish materials, and install in forms with sealed joints to prevent displacement 7. Seal foram joints with foam tape or other demonstrated effective means. Bads form joints with supporting members to prevent movement during erection and concrete casting. 0407-06 CONCRETE FORMWORK Progress CD Set 03100 - 5 PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03100 VAIL, COLORADO CONCRETE FORMWORK 8. Align resticatlon joints horizontally and vertically across openings. 9. Make joints in form facing at centerline of reveals and rustications. There shall be no joints between reveals and rustication in the field of plane surfaces of architectural concrete. 10. Provide a means to seal the bottom of form at construction joints, such as foam tape or other gasket device. 11. After erection, seal all cracks, holes, slits, gaps and apertures in forms, wherever located, with moulding plaster sanded smooth so that they will withstand the pressure and remain mortar tight. D. Ties: Spacing: Space ties in a uniform pattern satisfactory to the Architect. Rest cones firmly against forms and seal to prevent leakage. E. Comer Treatment 1. Make comers square and true unless shown as chamfered or shaped. 2. Form chamfers with 314' x 314' strips, unless otherwise shown, accurately formed and surfaced to produce uniformly straight fines and fight edge joints. Extent terminal edges to required limit and miter chamfer strips at changes in direction. 3. Concealed comers may be formed either square or chamfered. F. Control Joints: See Concrete Section for treatment of control and construction joints. G. Provision for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Size and location of openings, recesses and chases are the responsibility of the trade requiring such items. Accurately place and semely support items built into forms. Openings for doors and windows shall be formed with a tolerance of minus V and plus 11T from indicated dimensions. H. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly dean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is to be placed. Retighten forms immediately after concrete placement as required to eliminate mortar leaks. 3.03 FORM COATINGS A. Coat form contact surfaces with form coaling compound before reinforcemnt is placed. Do not allow excess farm coating material to accumulate in the forms or to cane into contact with surfaces, which will be bonded to fresh concrete. Apply in comptiamoe with marwfachmer's instructions. B. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventive form coating or otherwise protect against rusting. Rust- stained steel formwork is not acceptable. Do not use oil or other petroleum based coatings, or any coating that will stain concrete or adversely effect later surface treatments. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Generale Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded Items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, concrete. Use top and bottom tenhplates, settling drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached thereto. B. Coordinate and schedule the work of this Section with the work of other Sections required to be set in, on, or contiguous with forms. 04-07-06 CONGRUE FORMWORK Progress CD Set 03100 - 6 PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03100 VM COLORADO CONCRETE FORMWORK C. Anchor bobs out of position or plumb by more than 114" shall. be reinstalled in correct position and plumb at no increase in Contract Price. D. Edge forms and screeds strips for slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and inWrmectate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide and secure units to support types of screeds required. 3.05 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Remove forms completely. Exposed surfaces of concrete shall be dean, smooth and free of irregularities. B. Form Ties: Do not remove ties until concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit removal without damaging concrete. Do not spat concrete on exposed surfaces. Pug ties of type that are wholly withdrawn from the wag toward the inside face. Cutting ties hack from face of wag will not be permitted. Plug be rod holes as specified in Concrete Section. C. Do not pry against face of concrete. Use wooden wedges only. D. Forms: 1. Remove forms in manner to ensure safety of members. Do not disturb supporting forms until concrete has hardened sufficiently to pert removal with safety and without damage to concrete surface. Construct forms to permit their removal without dWurbing the original shoring. 2. Time of Removal: Time of removal will depend on weather conditions, the results of cylGxler tests and effectiveness of curing. The following periods between depositing of concrete and removal of forms shag be considered a minimum, which may be extended if deemed necessary by the Architect. Forms Slabs and beam and girder soffits 10 days (or immediately after post-tensioning) Beam and girder sides 3 days Foundation sides 2 days Wells and columns 2 days 3. Stripping, shoring, re Vwdng and removal of shoring shag conform to the requirements of ACI-347. E. Shores and Re-shores: Storing is defined as the total shoring system from the level being poured down through the Intermediate framed levels below to the ground. Shores at lower levels must remain in place (before, during and after pouring higher level) and not be removed; times given are for the highest level; then all shores may be removed. Refer also to the structural drawings for additional shoring requirements. 04.07M CONCRETE FORMWORK Pmgress CD Set 03100 - 7 PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 0310D VAIL, COLORADO CONCRETE FORMWORK Design and place shores so that load from successive parts of the structure Mail be transmitted directly through the shores to adequate support, without creating bending or shearing stresses in the concrete. Do riot remove shores until supported members have attained sufficient strength to carry the imposed bads. Leave shoring in place to support hoisting equipment Do not support cranes or other hoisting equipment from urrshored slabs. 3.06 REUSE OF FORMS A Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re-used in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete contact surfaces as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to dose all joints. Akjn and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use plugged or patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces. END OF SECTION NVA CONCRETE FORMWORK Progress CD Set 03100 - 8 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 03150 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES SECTION 03150 - CONCRETE ACCESSORIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Ssection includes the following concrete accessories: 1. Rigid plastic and elastomeric form liners for texturing architectural concrete, including fasteners, sealants, back-up strips, form release agents, and sealers. B. Related Sections: 1. Concrete formwork is specified in Section 03100. 2. Cast-in-place concrete is specified in Section 03300. 3. Stained concrete finish is specified in Section 03352. 4. Waterstop sealant is specified in Section 07920. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's installation instructions and Product Data which indicates compliance with specifications. B. Shop Drawings indicating form liner layout and termination details. Indicate backup, rustication, reveal, and chamfer strip locations. Include jointing, form tie location and pattern of placement. C. Samples 12 inch by 12 inch of each pattern indicated. D. Compliance Certification by release agent manufacturer for local regulations controlling VOC's. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide full scale mock-up using actual job specific materials, methods and workmanship. These include concrete mix cement type, aggregate gradation, slump, water/cement ratios, plasticizers and additives, forming system ties, liner, and formwork, form release agents, placement rate, form pressures, joint sealing, vibrating and stripping practices. In addition, demonstrate patching and repair procedures for spalled concrete, and voids caused by honeycombing or bugholes. Incorporate formwork accessories and minimum one vertical and one horizontal form liner joint. 1. Approved mock-up will be standard by which remaining work will be evaluated for technical and aesthetic merit. Accepted mock-up is a prerequisite to beginning job formwork. Submit variations from mock-up materials or techniques for approval prior to use. 2. Apply concrete stain to cured concrete to verify that form release agent does not affect penetration or required appearance of the concrete stain. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Cover form liners to protect from oil, dirt and UV exposure. B. Handle rigid form liner panels with care at temperatures below 25oF. 05-12-06 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES Summary Permit Set 03150-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS SECTION 03150 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES A. Form Liners: Greenstreak Plastic Products Co., Inc., Pattern Number 346 or approved equal. 2.02 FORM LINER MATERIALS A. GREENSTREAK Uni-Cast, Multi-Cast, or Dura-Cast® Form Liner Material: Thermoformed rigid polymer alloy sheets. B. Form liners shall accommodate form pressures to a maximum 1000-psf. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for support of large or deep patterns which may deform under pressure. C. Form Liner Accessories: Provide form release agent verified to be compatible with the form liner material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FORM LINER A. Preparation: 1. Before placing concrete, verify lines and levels of formwork and form liner patterns are within allowable tolerances. 2. On multiple use liners, clean liner before each use. Replace damaged liner whose continued use or repair would negatively impact the aesthetics of the concrete finish 3. Apply form liner compatible release agent at rate recommended by manufacturer. Attempt to schedule concrete pour soon after application of release agent to avoid precipitation, dust, and debris. Protect reinforcing steel from exposure to release agents. B. Installation: 1. Seal form liner joints, form liner accessories' joints, and be holes to prevent cement paste from bleeding. 2. Provide solid backing at form liner butt joints to prevent deflection. 3. Construct form liner and accessories to sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown. 4. Provide openings, offsets, keyways, recesses, chamfers, blocking, and screeds as required to achieve architectural concrete textured finish. 5. Drill or pierce liner to accommodate form ties. 6. Anchor liner to form on centers not to exceed 18-inches. Decrease centers as necessary to accommodate form stripping pressures without damaging liner intended for multiple use. 7. Install backup strips as required to prevent deflection of the liner due to form pressures. 8. Tightly form corners indicated to be chamfered with PVC chamfer of profile indicated. Chamfered corners shall be smooth, solid, unbroken, continuous lines, which are uniformly straight. 05-12-06 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES Summary Permit Set 03150-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03150 VAIL, COLORADO CONCRETE ACCESSORIES C. Concrete Placement: Coordinate with the work of Section 03300. 1. Form pressures not to exceed 1000-psf. 2. Keep concrete lifts less than 24-inches. Thoroughly vibrate concrete to achieve good consolidation, and eliminate entrapped air thereby minimizing voids. Internally vibrate through to previous lift to avoid lift lines. Avoid vibrator contact with the form liner. END OF SECTION 05-12-06 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES Summary Permit Set 03150-3 PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03200 VAIL, COLORADO CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Reinfora Q steel bars, and welded steel we fabric or fabricated steel bar or rod mats for castin-ptace concrete, complete with be wire. B. Support cteirs, bolsters, bars supports, spacers, and other accessories for reinforcing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03100: Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03300. Cast in-Place Concrete. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform concrete reinforcing work in accordance with CRSI 63 and 65 and ACI 301, 315 and 318, unless specified otherwise in this Section. B. Submit certified copies of all test report of suppled concrete reinforcing, indcating physical and chemical analysis. 1.04 REFERENCES A ACI 301- American Concrete Institute - Specification for Structural C aete for Buildings. B. AC1315 - American Concrete Institute - Details and Detaling of Concrete Reinforcement C. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. D. CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars. E. CRSI 65 - Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and Nomenclature. F. AWS D1.4 - Stnxiural Wel ft Code - Reinforcing Steel. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings including appropriate plans and details. Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel and wine fabric, benclng and cutting sclaides, and supporting and spacir g devices. 04-07.06 Progress CD Set CONCRETE REWORCEMENT 03200-1 r I. PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03200 VAIL, COLORADO CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCING A. Reinforcing Steel: 60 ksi yield grade, defamed type as indicated on drawings. Bars: Billet siW ASTM 615; as indicated. 2. Finish: Plain unless irdcated galvanized on drawings or so specified. B. Reinforcement in frame members and in wait boundary members shall comply with UBC Standard No. 264 for low alloy A706. Billet steel A615, Grades 40 and 60, reinforcement may be used in Use members if (1) the actual yield strength based on mill tests does not exceed the specified yield strength by more than 18,000 psi (retests shall not exceed this value by more than an additional 3000 ps), and (2) the ratio of the actual ultimate tensile stress 10 the actual tensile yield strength is not less than 1.25. Reinforcement in frame members shall not be welded. C. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type conforming tD ASTM A185 as required as indicated on drawings. Finish shall be plain unless indicated gatmized on drawings. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A Tie Wire: Minimum 16-gage annealed type, or patented system accepted by Architect. B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcing during construction conditions. C. Special Chairs. Bolsters, Bar supports, Spacers: Stainless steel, sized and shaped as required. Use plastio- coated units where so directed. 2.03 FABRICATION A FaV=te concrete reinforcing in accordance with ACI 315. B. Locate reinforcing sptiCes, not indicated on drawings, at points of minimum stress. Location of splices shall be reviewed by Architect. C. Where indicated, weld remkm*Q bars in accordance with AWS D12.1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT A Place reinforcing supported and secured against displacemenL Do not deviate from true alignment B. Before pkrc M concrete, ensure reinforcing is dean, free of loose scale, dirt, or other foreign coatings, which would reduce bond to concrete END OF SECTION 04-07a CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Progress CD Set 03200 - 2 NISHKIAN MENNINGER PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03300 VAIL, COLORADO CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast-in-place concrete footings, foundations and grade beams. B. Cast-in-place walls, columns, beams and supported slabs. C. Floors and slabs on grade. D. Cast-in-place equipment pads. E. Vapor barrier under slabs on grade. F. Surface finish of floors and walls. G. Preparation of concrete base slabs to receive toppings. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03100: Formwork for Concrete B. Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement C. Section 03365: Concrete Post-tensioning D. Section 03480: Architectural Precast Concrete Specialists E. Section 05500: Metal Fabrications to be Cast in Concrete. F. Divisions 15 and 16: Mechanical and Electrical Items to be Cast in Concrete. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with ACI 318, unless specified otherwise in this Section. B. Inspection and testing will be performed by owner's testing laboratory. C. Provide free access to work and cooperate with appointed firm. D. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm and Architect for review prior to commencement of work. E. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with requirements stated herein. F. Three (3) concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 100 cu. yds. of each class of concrete placed. G. One (1) additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting, and be cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. 05-12-06 Summary Permit Set b i CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-1 i G NISHKIAN MENNINGER PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03300 VAIL, COLORADO CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE H. One (1) slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. Prepare drying shrinkage specimens for concrete slabs. Specimens shall be made, stored, dried, and measured in accordance with ASTM C157. 1. Thirty (30) days before placing any concrete slabs, prepare a trial batch of each mix design, using the same aggregates, cement and admixtures (if any) proposed for use on the project Prepare at least 3 specimens for determining the drying shrinkage of the mix design. 2. During the progress of the work, take drying shrinkage specimens of each different mix of concrete to insure continued compliance with these Specifications. Take at least one set of 3 specimens from each 3000 cubic yards of concrete used for preparing compression test specimens. 3. The drying shrinkage specimens shall be 4'x4"x11" prisms. Measure and report separately for 7,14, 21 and 28 days of drying, after 7 days of moist curing. The effective gauge length of the specimens shall be 10". 4. The average drying shrinkage of the test specimens after 28 days of drying shall not exceed 0.04% for hardrock concrete. J. The manufacturer of transit-mix concrete shall deliver to job inspector a certificate with each mixer truck. Certificate shall bear signature of representative of Testing Laboratory, stating quantity of cement, water, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, and admixtures contained in load. Certificates shall indicate time, to the nearest minute, that batch was mixed. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete B. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing concrete. C. ACI 301- Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. D. ACI 305 - Hot Weather Concreting. E. ACI 306 - Cold Weather Concreting. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: Portland, Type II; ASTM C150. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33 for normal weight concrete; ASTM C330 for lightweight concrete. Aggregate shall be from established sources with proven history of successful use in producing concrete with minimum shrinkage. The average drying shrinkage after 28 days shall not exceed 0.04% for hardrock concrete. C. Water. Clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious material. D. Source of aggregate shall remain constant for the duration of the work. 05-12.06 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Summary Permit Set 03300 - 2 G PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS NISHKIAN MENNINGER SECTION 03300 VAIL, COLORADO CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.02 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. B. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A, and containing not more than 0.1 % chloride ions. C. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D, and containing not more than 0.1 % chloride ions. D. Pozzolan: ASTM A618, containing not more than 0.1 % chloride ions. E. Calcium Chloride not permitted. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent 'Anvil Bond' as manufactured by Master Builders or approved equal. B. Vapor Barrier. 10-mil polyethylene sheet or approved equal. C. Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2400 psi in two days and 7000 psi in 28 days. D. Absorptive Mats: Cotton fabric or burlap-polyethylene, minimum 8oz./sq. yd; bonded to prevent separation during handling, placement and curing. E. Liquid Membrane-Forming curing Compound: Conforming to ASTM C309, Type I, and which will not discolor concrete or affect bonding or other finish applied thereover, and which restricts loss of water to not more than 0.500 grams per sq. cm. of surface when tested per ASTM C156. 2.04 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If trial batch method used, use an independent testing facility acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing Willy shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by Architect C. Provide concrete of following strength: Compressive strength (28 day) shall be as shown on Structural Drawings. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301, 3.8 by Method 1, 2 or 3 as applicable. Add air-entraining agent to concrete to entrain air as indicated in ACI 301 Table 3.4.1. D. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, water, test results, or other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to Owner and as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by architect before using in work. 05-12-06 Summary Permit Set CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3 NISHKIAN MENNINGER PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03300 VAIL, COLORADO CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE E. Admixtures: Use water-reducing admixture or high-range, water-reducing admixture (super plasticizer), may be used in concrete subject to approval by Architect. 2. Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 F (10C). 3. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air- entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having air content of 4% to 6%. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement of 3 inches +1-1 inch. 2.05 CONCRETE MIXES A. Ready-Mix Concrete: All concrete shall be ready-mix concrete unless otherwise approved by the Architect PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PLACING CONCRETE A Pre-placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. Moisten wood forms immediately before placing concrete where form coatings are not used. B. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304, and as herein specified. C. Notify Structural Engineer minimum 48 hours prior to placing of concrete. D. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs-on-grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal. Do not disturb or damage vapor barrier while placing concrete reinforcing. If damage occurs, repair areas before placing concrete. Use vapor barrier material, lapped over damaged areas minimum 6 inches in both directions and seal. E. Ensure anchors, seats, plates, and other items to be cast into concrete are placed, held securely, and will not cause problems in placing concrete. Rectify misplacements and proceed with work. F. Maintain records of poured concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature and test samples taken. G. Ensure reinforcement, embedded parts, formed expansion and contraction joints, and other inserts are not disturbed during concrete placement H. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying. bonding agent Apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified only with prior approval of the Architect Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to this final location to avoid aggregation. 05-12.06 CAST4N-PLACE CONCRETE Summary Permit Set 03300 - 4 PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO NISHKIAN MENNINGER SECTION 03300 r AST-Iti-DI Ar`C rrnnlrocTr J. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid indeed construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. K. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI recommended practices. L. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. M. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. N. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into comers. 0. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straight-edge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. P. Pour floor slabs in checkerboard or saw-cut pattern no farther than 36-0" on center. Align with column lines. Saw cut control joints within 24 hours after finishing. Use 3116 inch thick blade, cutting into 114 depth of slab thickness. Do not place saw-cut joint in mid-third of span. Q. In locations where new concrete is dowelled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solidly with non-shrink grout. R. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Architect immediately on discovery. S. Conform to AC1305 when concreting during hot weather. T. Conform to ACI 306 when concreting during cold weather. 3.02 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed-to-view in finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise indicted. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projects exceeding 114" in height rubbed down or chipped off. Smooth Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaced exposed-104ew, or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or other similar system. This is as cast arranged orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas, with fins or other projects completely removed and smoothed. 05-12-06 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Summary Permit Set 03300 - 5 PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS NISHKIAN MENNINGER SECTION 03300 VAIL, COLORADO CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.03 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive mortar setting beds for file, where mortar set file is indicated on drawings. After placing slabs, plane surface to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10' when tested with a 10' straightedge. Slop surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set, with staff brushes, brooms, or rakes. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces scheduled to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10' when tested with a 10' straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slop surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, re-float surfaces to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. C. Trowel Finish: Unless otherwise noted, apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be left exposed-to-view, or scheduled to receive floor finishes other than setting bed types. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 114" in 10' when tested with a 10' straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects, which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. D. Non-Slip Broom Finish: Apply non-slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.04 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Start curing procedures as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Continue curing as directed by Architect and in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. 05-12-06 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Summary Permit Set 03300 - 6 NISHKIAN MENNINGER PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03300 VAIL, COLORADO CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by either moist curing, by moisture retaining cover curing, membrane curing, or by combinations thereof, as herein specified. Provide moisture curing by following methods: Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. Continuous water-fog spray. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed at widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. Provide liquid membrane curing as follows: a. Apply the specified membrane-forming curing compound to damp concrete surfaces as soon as possible after final finishing operations are complete, but not later than 2 hours. Apply uniformly in a continuous operation by power spray equipment or roller equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas that are subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain the continuity of the coating and repair damage to the coat during the entire curing period. b. Verify compatibility of membrane curing compounds on surfaces that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to the concrete or with a covering material bonded to the concrete, such as other concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect Do not use curing compounds that will diminish bond of subsequent materials. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. I forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor flopping, and other flat surfaces by any of the methods specified herein, as applicable. 3.05 PATCHING A. Allow Architect/Structural Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. Patch imperfections as directed. 05-12-06 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Summary Permit Set 03300 - T PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS NISHKIAN MENNINGER SECTION 03300 VAIL, COLORADO CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.06 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required lines, details, and elevations. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed resulting in excessive honeycombing and other defects. Patch, fill, touch up, repair, or replace exposed architectural concrete for each individual area in accordance with Architects particular directions. END OF SECTION J 05-12-06 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Summary Perm ft Set 03300 - 8 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03310 VAIL, COLORADO SITE CONCRETE SECTION 03310 - SITE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A Related Requirements: Review the General Contract Conditions and Division One, General Requirements, which contain information and requirements that apply to this Section. B Work Included: Provide Portland cement concrete piers, grade beams and sub-slabs, and integral colored paving and stains (Paving Type'A') complete as shown and as specified. C Related Work in Other Sections: Fine Grading - Section 02210 Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting - Section 02220 Landscape Drainage - Section 02720 Stone Paving - Section 02526 D Unit Pricing: Item Unit Pricing Piers, Grade Beams Cubic Yard Sub-slabs Square Foot Steps Lineal Foot Concrete Band Linear Foot Paving Square Foot 1.02 REFERENCES A Applicable Standards: Apply the current or latest editions of the standards described below: ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials ACI - American Concrete Institute, Manual of Concrete Practice 1.03 DEFINITIONS A Percent Compaction: ASTM D1557, percentage of the maximum in-place dry density of the same material as determined by Soils Engineer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A Shop Data: Contractor to submit a jointing plan identifying locations and types of jointing for all fialwork for landscape architects approval prior to construction. B Test Data: Test for compressive strength of Portland cement concrete paving. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Certification: Certified copies of concrete design mix including colorant, air entrainment, aggregates 05-12-2006 SITE CONCRETE Summary Permit Set 03310-1 s PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03310 VAIL, COLORADO SITE CONCRETE and glare-reducing agent used. B Lines and Levels: To be established by a licensed Surveyor or registered Civil Engineer. C Mock-up Panel: Construct 5'x 5' mock-up panel of each color and finish of colored concrete flatwork specified herein. Include final finish, jointing, colored joint sealer and finish sealant. Protect site sample until Final Acceptance of concrete work. Dispose of all samples off site thereafter. 2. Additional samples may be required by the Landscape Architect. All mock-up panels shall remain on site until work has been accepted by Owner. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A General: 1. Deliver ready-mixed concrete in conformance with ASTM C94. 2. The Architect and Landscape Architect shall have free access to the mixing plant at all times. 3. Ready-mixed concrete supplier shall have a plant of sufficient capacity and adequate transit mixing or agitator truck facilities to assure continuous delivery at the rate required and shall schedule his commitments to avoid conflicting simultaneous operations. 4. The frequency of delivery to the site shall permit continuous, uninterrupted placing throughout each scheduled placement 5. Discharge at site shall be within 90 minutes after water is introduced into the mixer if ambient temperature is less than 90 degrees F. If ambient temperature is more than 90 degrees F., mixing time shall be reduced. B Components and Accessories: Fittings and Reinforcements: Protect from rust, soil and oil contamination at all times. Store on pallets above ground. 2. Templates: Protect from damage. Test accuracy prior to each use. 1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A Water and Dust Control: Maintain control of concrete dust and water at all times. Do not permit adjacent planting areas to be contaminated. Clean up all debris resulting from this work at the end of each day's work. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A Coordination: Coordinate all items of other trades to be furnished and set in place. Coordinate proper installation of all accessories embedded in the concrete and for the provision of holes and openings necessary to the execution of the work of the trades. B Attachments: Insure that such portions of their work which are all or in part embedded, built-in, 05-12-2006 SITE CONCRETE Summary Permit Set 03310 - 2 J PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03310 VAIL, COLORADO SITE CONCRETE attached to, supported by or covered over by the concrete work are executed by them in ample time that progress of the work is not delayed. C Cutting or Patching: Perform as necessary to comply with above injunction. D Reinforcing Steel: Install progressively with work of other trades. Coordinate each other's schedules so as to avoid disturbing or moving work already installed by one trade to admit the work of another. Each trade shall be entirely responsible for proper installation and securing of their accessories and components during placing of concrete. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1/II Portland Cement Use only one brand and type for entire job. B Color Concrete: Use ASTM C33 hard durable, uncoated, washed, graded, cleaned and screened brown tones, rounded aggregates. C Coarse Aggregate: Description: ASTM C33 hard, durable, uncoated, washed, graded, cleaned and screened crushed rock or gravel aggregate for regular grey concrete slabs and walls. Do not use crusher-run stone or bank-run gravel. 2. Grading: Do not use aggregate which has a maximum size exceeding 1/5 of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms of the member for which the concrete is to be used, nor larger than 3/4 of the minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars. Do not use coarse aggregate that exceeds 3/4 in. for concrete bands. D Fine Aggregate: Description: ASTM C33, clean, hard and durable sand. Do not use sand coated with injurious amounts of silt, loam, clay or other deleterious matter. 2. Grading Requirements: Sieve Size Percent Passing #16 45-70 #50 15-30 #100 3-8 E Water: Fresh, dean, potable concrete mixing water free from injurious amounts of salts, oils, acids, alkalis, organic materials or other deleterious matter. As furnished by Owner. Transport by Contractor as required. F Air Entrainment ASTM C260, Master Builders "MB-VR" or approved equal. 2.02 CONCRETE DESIGN MIX TYPES 0&12-2006 Summary Permit Set SITE CONCRETE 03310-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03310 VAIL, COLORADO SITE CONCRETE A Sub- Slabs & Flatwork: 1. Concrete Mix a. 3,500 psi minimum strength b. 0.48 water to cement ratio c. 564 lbs. of cement minimum d. 6% air content e. 4' +/-1"slump B Piers: 1. Concrete Mix a. 3,000 psi minimum strength b. 0.52 water to cement ratio c. 517 lbs. of cement minimum d. 0% air content f. 6' +/-1" slump C Grade Beams: a. 3,000 psi minimum strength b. 0.52 water to cement ratio c. 517 lbs. of cement minimum d. 6% air content g. 4" +/-1 "maximum slump 1. Concrete Mix 2.03 MIXTURE COMPONENTS A Coloring Agent (for flatwork): 1. Type: Pigments shall contain pure, concentrated mineral pigments especially processed for mixing into concrete and complying with ASTM C979. 2. Percentage: Maximum 10 of the cement content by weight. 3. Product: Davis Colors manufactured by Davis Colors; phone 213-269-7311 or approved equal. 4. Color: Davis Color'Mesa Beige' 5. Mixing a. Pigments: Mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Mix until pigments are uniformly dispersed throughout mixture and disintegrating bags, if used, have disintegrated. b. Schedule delivery of concrete to provide consistent mix times from batching until discharge. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A Reinforcements: 1. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615 Grade 60 deformed billet-steel bars, clean and free from rust, scale, or coating that will reduce bond. 05-12-2006 SITE CONCRETE Summary Permit Set 03310 - 4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03310 VAIL, COLORADO SITE CONCRETE 2. Dowels for Expansion Joints: ASTM A615, smooth, billet-steel bars. 3. Tie Wires: 18 ga. min. black annealed. Expansion Joint Materials: Pre-molded Joint Filler: ASTM D1751, non-extruding and bituminous type resilient filler, compatible with sealant and backer rod. 2. Sealant Backer Rod: a. Tyke: Compressible polyethylene foam rod or other flexible, permanent, durable non-absorptive material as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer for compatibility with joint sealer. b. Product: "Sonofoam Backer-Rod" as manufactured by Sonnebom Building Products, (612) 835-3434 or (415) 889-9899. 3. Joint Sealer: a. Type: Multi-component polyurethane sealant, FS TT-S-00227, Class A, type as recommended by manufacturer for exterior locations subject to foot traffic. b. Product: ASTM C290, non-snag sealant "Dynatred" by Pecora Corporation, (214) 278-8158, or "Sonolastic Sealant Two-Part" by Sonnebom Building Products, (612) 835-3434. C. Colors: To be selected by Landscape Architect. 4. Bond Breaker: Polyethylene tape as recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where bond to joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of joint sealer. C Curinq Compound for Colored Concrete: Curing compound shall comply with ASTM C309 and be approved by pigment manufacturer for use with colored concrete. Provide W-1000 Clear Cure & Seal manufactured by Davis Colors. 2.05 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, metal, or other approved panel materials. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. D. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic concrete bads without detrimental deformation. 05-12-2006 SITE CONCRETE Summary Permit Set 03310 - 5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03310 VAIL, COLORADO SITE CONCRETE E. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verification of Conditions: 1. Previous Compacted Fill: Scarify and recompact 8' minimum plus any zone with loose or disturbed soil by ongoing construction. 2. Existing Soil Conditions : Sub-excavate 7-0", examine the base of the sub-excavation, remove and recompact any loose soil in bottom of excavation. Bring up to sub-grade as specified in the subsurface investigation and engineering report. Reprocessing may include scarification, moisture conditioning and reoompaction. B Surface Drainage: Report in writing conflicts discovered on the site or prior work done by others, which would prevent drainage. 2. No "birdbaths" or other surface irregularities will be permitted. Properly correct irregularities. 3. Provide for positive drainage on all concrete paving surfaces. 3.02 PREPARATION A Templates: Use templates for all anchor plates, bolts, inserts and other items embedded in concrete. Accurately secure so that they will not be displaced during placing of concrete. Base Course: Compact base course as specified in soils report. C Remove loose material and debris from base surface before placing concrete. D Install, set and build-in items fumished by other trades. Provide adequate notification for installation of necessary items. Coordinate with all irrigation, electrical, utility and mechanical installations. Coordinate installation of irrigation sleeving under pavements, walls, and curbs. Refer to engineer's plans for approximate locations and requirements. 3.03 INSTALLATION 05-12-2006 SITE CONCRETE Summary Permit Set 03310-6 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03310 VAIL, COLORADO SITE CONCRETE A Formwork: 1. Construct forms accurately to dimensions, plumb and true to line and grade. Use forms that are substantial, mortar tight and braced so as to maintain position and shape during placing of reinforcing and concrete. Concrete work showing wavy slab surfaces will be rejected. 2. Carefully verify and check all forms for alignment and level as the work proceeds. Promptly make all needed adjustments or additional bracing. 3. Extend wood forms for all exposed concrete at least 6 in. below finish grade. 4. Construct forms and assemble them in such a manner that joints occur at accepted locations. Edges: Except where tooled comers are indicated, provide all exposed concrete finish work with smooth, even surfaces of dense concrete with clean, sharp arises and outside corners. C Recesses and Openings: As shown on the Drawings or as directed at the site. D Reinforcements: Placement: Clean, bend and place reinforcements per ACI Manual of Concrete Practice. Accurately and securely fasten to prevent displacement before or during pouring. 2. Reinforcement Splices: 36 bar diameters minimum, except as otherwise noted. E Tolerances: No more than 114 in. measured with a 10 ft. metal straightedge, except at grade changes. F Wood Forms: Remove after concrete has cured. Do not damage concrete when removing forms. Smooth off all irregularities at edges of concrete. Dispose of wood forms off site. 3.04 FINISHES A Sub-Slabs: 1. Float finish all grey concrete sub-slabs. Form joints prior to floating. Finish to extend to joint edge. 2. No sealers or curing compounds shall be used on concrete slabs which are to be covered with Cast stone or Unit Pavers. Such slabs shall be covered and wet cured for a minimum of seven (7) days. Allow slab to cure 28 days at 700 F (21 ° C) prior to installation of materials. Areas that are to receive paving, installed by the thin bed method, shall have a wood float finish, be true to within 118" in 10 ft. and pitched to drains where required. Areas requiring fill, patching or leveling shall be prepared by the General Contractor using Latricrete 3701 Mortar Admix and Latricrete 225 Thick Bed Mortar Mix in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Gypsum or asphalt based leveling compounds shall not be permitted. The surface which is to be covered shall be left clean, free of dust, plaster, sealers or curing compounds and form oil. Any such contamination shall be removed by the Contractor who applied the material. Sand-Blast Finish: 05-12-2006 SITE CONCRETE Summary Permit Set 03310-7 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 03310 SITE CONCRETE 1. Time Restriction: Allow concrete to cure to sufficient strength that it will not be damaged by blasting but not less than seven days. Use light sandblasting to remove cement mortar from surface and expose aggregate. 2. Continui : Perform in as continuous an operation as possible, utilizing the same work Grew to maintain continuity of finish. 3. Depth of Cut: Use an abrasive grit of the proper type and gradation to expose the aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces to match sample panel as follows: Light Cut: Approx. to 1/16 in. depth. 4. Backup Boards: Using backup boards to maintain a uniform comer or edge line. 5. Uniformi : Use same nozzle, nozzle pressure and blasting technique as used for sample panel. 6. Control: Maintain control of abrasive grit and concrete dust in each area of blasting. 7. Clean Up: Remove all expended abrasive grit, concrete dust and debris at the end of each day of blasting operations. 3.05 JOINTS A Expansion Joints: 1. Locations: Provide joints at locations and intervals shown on the Drawings, and where concrete paving abuts buildings, curbs, vertical surfaces or other structures. 2. Placement: Place joint materials with top edge % in. below the pave surface. Securely hold in place to prevent movement. 3. Forming: Form joints and other edges, prior to finishing, in the fresh concrete using an edging tool to provide a smooth uniform impression. 4. Sealing: After the curing period, carefully clean expansion joints and fill with joint compound to 1/8 in. below adjacent paved surface. Do not permit spillage on paved surfaces or overflow from joint. B Score Joints: 1. Form in fresh concrete using a jointer to cut the groove so that a smooth, uniform impression is obtained. 2. Perform in a continuous manner, avoiding misalignment. Redo all crooked or misaligned joints at no cost to Owner. 3. Form joint prior to finishing concrete. C Sawcut Joints 1. Restrictions: Sawcut within twenty four (24) hours after installation. J 2. Cutting: Use acceptable mechanical concrete saw. Employ only experienced personnel. Perform 05.12-2006 SITE CONCRETE Summary Permit Set 03310-8 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03310 VAIL, COLORADO SITE CONCRETE all cuts cleanly and smoothly, to a constant and equal depth. Perform in as continuous an operation as possible to avoid misalignment of joints. Use forms or templates as required to achieve consistent lines. 3. Controls: Accurately align joints with all adjacent improvements. 4. Protection: Protect all adjacent site improvements during construction of this work and guard against any potential damage to embedded snowmelt system. Repair all damage to the satisfaction of the Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.06 PROTECTION AND CURING A Protection: Protect concrete against frost, rapid drying and damage by rain. 2. Keep moist for at least 7 days after installation. Secure approval of proposed method. During this period, maintain concrete above 70 degrees F. for at least 3 days or above 50 degrees F. for at least 5 days. Spraying: Spray concrete during the curing period as frequently a drying conditions may require. C Curing: Cure concrete in accordance with the ACI Manual of Concrete Practice. Cure colored concrete as per manufacture's specifications. D Damage and Defacement: Protect all concrete work against damage and defacement during subsequent construction operations until Final Acceptance. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Samples: Owner will select a qualified testing agency to take samples for testing during the course of the work as considered necessary. 8 Cost of Testing: Paid for by Owner. C Notification: Notify the testing agency in sufficient time to allow taking of samples at time of pour. D Reiected Materials: Remove off the site all concrete below specified strength and retesting. E Cost of Removal and Retesting: Pay for all costs of removal of rejected concrete, and its replacement with concrete of specified strength and retesting. 3.08 CLEANING AND PATCHING A Cleaning: Removal: Remove all projecting fins, bolts, wire, nails, etc., not necessary for the work, or cut them back 1 in. from the surface and patch in an inconspicuous manner. 2. Voids: Fill holes with a 1:3 cement and sand mortar with the same color as the adjoining concrete. Mix and place the mortar as dry as possible and finish flush with the adjacent 05-12-2006 SITE CONCRETE Summary Permit Set 03310-9 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03310 VAIL, COLORADO SITE CONCRETE surface. B Patchinq: 1.. Corrective Patching: Correct all defects in concrete work. Chip all voids to a depth of at least 1 in. with the edges perpendicular to the surface and parallel to form markings. Fill all voids, surface irregularities, or honeycombing by patching or rubbing. Insure that all concrete surfaces so repaired duplicate the appearance of the unpatched work. 2. Defective Work: Remove in its entirety and replace all defective concrete work which after corrective patching, rubbing, etc., fails to duplicate the appearance of unpatched work and/or conform to the standards set forth in these Specifications. END OF SECTION 05-12-2006 SITE CONCRETE Summary Permit Set 03310-10 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03311 VAIL COLORADO SITE CONCRETE PARTIGENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Related Requirements: Review the General Contract Conditions and Division One, General Requirements, which contain information and requirements that apply to this Section. ALL CONCRETE WORK PERFORMED IN THE CDOT RIGHT-OF-WAY SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH CDOT MATERIALS AND SPECIFICATIONS. B. Work Included: 1. Concrete sidewalk and pavement. 2. Colored Concrete bands and pavement C. Related Work in Other Sections: 1. Earthwork: Section 02300 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable Standards: Apply the current or latest editions of the standards described below: 1. "ASTM" - American Society for Testing and Materials 2. "ACI" - American Concrete Institute, Manual of Concrete Practice. B. Contractor Experience: 1. The work shall be done in a thorough, workmanlike manner by contractors experienced in patterned concrete construction. 2. Contractor references for five similar, successfully executed projects will be required. 3. The Contractor(s) guarantee their respective work against defective materials or faulty workmanship for a period of one year. C. Coordination: 1. Coordinate all items of other trades to be furnished and set in place. 2. Insure that such portions of their work which are all or in part embedded, built-in, attached to, supported by or covered over by the concrete work are executed by them in ample time that progress of the work is not delayed. 3. Do all cutting or patching made necessary to comply with above injunction. 4. Coordinate proper installation of all accessories embedded in the concrete necessary to the execution of the work of the trades. D. Lines and Levels: A licensed Surveyor or registered Civil Engineer shall lay out and establish all lines, levels, grades and positions of all parts of the work. C 05-12-06 SITE CONCRETE Summary Permit Set 03311-1 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03311 VAIL COLORADO SITE CONCRETE E. Sample panel: Before installing concrete work, provide a sample panel, minimum six (6) feet square, using specified materials. Show color, texture, pattern, edging and joint treatments. Correct and rebuild sample panel until Landscape Architect's acceptance of the work. Retain panel during construction as a standard for completed concrete paving work. The approved sample panel may be a portion of the work and remain in place. Location as directed by the Landscape Architect. 2. Provide a sample panel for each type of finish specified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Test Data: Submit copies of all laboratory tests and reports of all materials. B. Samples: Furnish manufacturers samples of colored concrete. 1.04 TESTS A. General: Refer to Section 1400 - Quality Control. B. Quality Control: Concrete Testing Service: The following sampling and testing shall occur during concrete placement, as follow: 1. Sampling: ASTM C172, "Specific Gravity and Absorption of Concrete Aggregate." ASTM C31, "Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field." 2. Slump: ASTM C143, "Slump of Portland Cement Concrete," one test for each set of compressive test specimens taken at point discharge. 3. Air Content: ASTM C231, "Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method," one for each set of compressive strength specimens. 4. Report test results in writing to the Owner's Authorized Representative, Engineer, Architect, Contractor, and Concrete Producer on same day tests are made. C. Submit proposed mix design to testing laboratory for review prior to commencement of work. For standard premix concrete mixes, the supplier's quality control records may be substituted for job mix testing. D. Testing laboratory will take cylinders and perform slump and air entrainment tests in accordance with ACI. E. Cost of Removal and Retesting: Pay for full costs of removal of rejected concrete and its replacement with concrete of specified strength and retesting. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Cold Weather Placement: When placing concrete when the mean daily temperatures are below 40 degrees F, follow recommendations of ACI 306. 05-12-06 SITE CONCRETE Summary Permit Set 03311-2 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03311 VAIL COLORADO SITE CONCRETE 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Hauling Time: Discharge concrete transmitted in a truck mixer, agitator or other transportation device within 1-1/2 hours after the mixing water has been added. B. Extra Water: Deliver concrete to the job in exact quantities required by the design mix. Any additional water added to the mix after leaving the batch plant shall be indicated on the truck ticket and signed by the person responsible. Where extra water is added to the concrete it shall be mixed thoroughly for 40 revolutions of the drum or 3-1/2 minutes at mixing speed, whichever is greater. PART2PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide materials of same brand and source throughout the project unless otherwise noted. 2.02 CEMENT A. ASTM C150, Type I or II Portland cement as required. 2.03 WATER-REDUCING ADMIXTURES A. ANSI/ASTM C494; type as required to suit project conditions. Only use admixtures which have been tested and accepted in mix design, unless otherwise acceptable. 2.04 AIR-ENTRAINING ADMIXTURE A. ASTM C260; providing not less than 5% nor more than 7% entrained air concrete exposed to freezing and thawing. 2.05 COURSE AGGREGATE A. Description: ASTM C33, hard, durable, uncoated, washed, graded, cleaned and screened crushed rock or gravel aggregate for regular weight concrete. Do not use crusher-run stone or bank-run gravel. B. Grading: Do not use aggregate which has a maximum size exceeding 115 of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms of the member for which the concrete is to be used nor larger than 3/4 of the minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars. Do not use coarse aggregate which exceeds 3/4 in. for paving. 2.06 FINE AGGREGATE A. Description: ASTM C33, clean, hard and durable sand. Do not use sand coated with injurious silt loam, clay or other deleterious matter. B. Grading: Percent Passing Sieve Size 45-70.1.1 #16 15-30.1.1 #50 3-8.1.1 100 2.07 REINFORCEMENTS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, grade 40 derformed billet-steel bars, clean and free from rust, scale, or coating that will reduce bond. 05-12-06 SITE CONCRETE Summary Permit Set 03311-3 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03311 VAIL COLORADO SITE CONCRETE B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. Leave tags designating wire size and spacing on each roll until ready for use. C. Dowels: ASTMS A615, grade 40, plain steel, uncoated finish; matched sleeve and cap one end. Provide dowel basket to hold dowels in parallel alignment. 2.08 WATER A. Clean, potable, concrete mixing water free from injurious amounts of salts, oils, acids, alkalis, organic materials or other deleterious matter. 2.09 EXPANSION JOINT MATERIALS A. Premolded Joint Filler: ASTM D 1751, non-extruding and bituminous type resilient filler. B. Joint Sealant: Two component polysulfide or polyurethane elastomeric type, self leveling and designed for foot traffic. Color to match concrete where specified. 2.10 INTEGRAL COLOR PIGMENTS: Pure, non-fading, non-staining, mineral oxides color conforming to ASTM C979 and designed and mixed to provide uniform color finish. A. Color: Rose, to match existing colored concrete in the pedestrian mall. Submit samples for approval. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: L.M. Scofield/Chromix, Davis Colors/True Tone Colors. PART 3EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Surface Drainage: 1. Provide for positive drainage on all concrete paving surfaces. 2. Report in writing all discrepancies or omissions on drawings and conditions on the site which would prevent proper drainage. 3. Do not permit finished surfaces to vary more than 1/4 in. measured with a 10 ft. metal straightedge, except at grade changes. 4. No "birdbaths" or other surface irregularities will be permitted. Properly correct irregularities. B. Subgrade Preparation: Proof roll the subgrade and do all necessary rolling and compacting to obtain fim4 even subgrade surface,. Fill and consolidate depressed areas. Remove uncompactable materials, replace with clean granular fill and compact to 95% Standard Proctor Density (ASTM A- 698). C. Remove loose material and debris from base surface before placing concrete. 05-12-06 SITE CONCRETE Summary Permit Set 03311-4 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03311 VAIL COLORADO SITE CONCRETE D. Install, align, and level forms. Stake and brace forms in place. Maintain following grade and alignment tolerances. Top of form: Maximum 1/8" in 10'-0". 2. Vertical face: Maximum 1/4" in 10'-0". E. Thoroughly wet subgrade with clean water immediately before placing concrete. F. Coat form surfaces in contact with concrete with form release agent. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as necessary to assure separation from concrete without damage. G. Install, set, and build-in items furnished by other trades. Provide adequate notification for installation of necessary items. Coordinate with all irrigation, electrical, utility, mechanical and site furnishing installations. Coordinate installation of irrigation sleeving by Irrigation Contractor under pavements, walls, and curbs. Refer to irrigation plans for approximate locations and requirements. H. Securement: Use templates for all anchor plates, bolts, inserts and other items embedded in concrete. Accurately secure so that they will not be displaced during placing of concrete. 1. Electrical Conduit: Do not embed piping, other than electrical conduit, in structural concrete. Locate conduit to maintain strength of structures at maximum Verify size, length and location of electrical conduit. 3.02 BASE COURSE A. Compact base course to thickness shown on Drawings by rolling or other acceptable method to 95% of the standard proctor density. 3.03 CONCRETE MIXES A. Design: Proportion ingredients for mixes in accordance with ACI 301, Section 3.8.2., Method 1 or 2, or Section 3.8.3. Obtain this information in accordance with the latest ASTM Specifications. Should a special mix be required due to structural. B. Admixtures: No admixtures will be allowed except as specified herein, unless authorized by the Owner's Representative. Requests for approval or substitution must be accompanied by sufficient information and test data for evaluation. C. Slump: Design water-cement ratio to provide slumps indicated under mix-type. D. ALL CONCRETE WORK PERFORMED IN THE CDOT RIGHT-OF-WAY SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH CDOT MATERIALS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 3.04 CONCRETE MIX TYPES A. Concrete Mixes: Employ approved commercial testing laboratory to design concrete mixes as follows: 4500 psi Compressive Strength at 28 Days AASHTO M85 Type II Cement, 564 pounds/cubic yard 3/4 Maximum Course Aggregate Size Slump 4" Maximum Water to cement ratio 0.45 maximum 6%+/-1 '/2% Air Entrainment 05-12-06 SITE CONCRETE Summary Permit Set 03311-5 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03311 VAIL COLORADO SITE CONCRETE Fibermesh fibers: Collated fibrillated polyropylene olefin fibers, `/z,'/< and 2" length as provided by the Fibermesh Company, or equal, at the rate of 1.5 pounds/cubic yard 3.05 FORMWORK A. General: Construct forms accurately to dimensions, plumb and true to line and grade. Use forms that are substantial, mortar tight, braced and tied so as to maintain position and shape during placing of reinforcing and concrete. 2. Wavy surfaces and bulged walls or slab surfaces resulting from settlement or springing of formwork will be rejected. 3. Carefully verify and check all forms for alignment and level as the work proceeds. Promptly make all needed adjustments or additional bracing. B. Construction Joints: Construct forms and assemble them in such a manner that joints occur at accepted locations. Thoroughly clean forms before pouring concrete. C. Details: Take extreme care in all details of forming, setting and reinforcing. Except where tooled comers are indicated, provide all exposed concrete finish work with smooth, even surfaces of dense concrete with clean sharp arises and outside corners. D. Coordination: After forms have been placed and accepted, insure that all other trades have been properly notified and are given sufficient time to complete installation of their work. E. Recesses and Openings: Provide as shown on the Drawings or as may be directed at the site. F. Reinforcing Steel: Install progressively with work of other trades. Coordinate each other's schedules so as to avoid disturbing or moving work already installed by one trade to admit the work of another. G. Responsibility: Each trade shall be entirely responsible for proper installation and securing of the work during placing of concrete. H. Prior to Pouring Concrete: 1. Thoroughly clean out all forms to be used. 2. Thoroughly wet wood forms as required where form coatings are not used. 1. Removal of Forms: 1. Do not remove supporting forms or shoring until concrete has sufficient strength to carry its own weight and other loads upon it. 2. Remove forms only after concrete has properly set and without damaging concrete. 05-12-06 SITE CONCRETE Summary Permit Set 03311-6 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03311 VAIL COLORADO SITE CONCRETE 3.06 REINFORCEMENTS AND EMBEDMENTS A. Supports: Accurately and securely fasten or support reinforcements to prevent displacement before or during pouring. Hang footing bars from forms. Support wire mesh with suitable metal cradles. B. Placement: Clean, bend and place reinforcements per ACI Manual of Concrete Practice. C. Reinforcement Splices: 1. Welded Wire Fabric - lap one mesh minimum. 2. Reinforcing Bars - 36 times the bar diameter minimum, but no less than 12" except as otherwise noted. D. Dowels: Grease sleeves, insert dowels and through from; secure dowel basket against movement. 3.07 FINISHES A. Medium Broom Finish: Medium broom finish on all concrete walks and plaza areas. Edge outside edges with a radius edging tool. B. Smooth Finish: Smooth finish on bands. 3.08 CONTROL JOINTS A. Control Joints shall penetrate 1/3 slab thickness. B. Tooled Joints: Tooled joints shall have a 1/4" radius and shall not incorporate a trowelled edge unless specifically noted on the drawings. Place joints in pattern and at spacing indicated. When not indicated, provide spacing equal to slab width and not greater than 10'-0" on center. 3.09 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Locations: Provide joints at locations and intervals shown on the Drawings, and where concrete paving abuts buildings, curbs, or other structures or a maximum of 50 feet on center for walks. B. Placement: Place joint materials with top edge 1/2 in. below the paved surface. Securely hold in place to prevent movement. C. Forming: Form joints and other edges in the fresh concrete using an edging tool to provide a smooth uniform impression. Strike all edges before and after exposing aggregate. D. Sealing: After the curing period, carefully clean expansion joints and fill with joint compound to 1/8 in. below adjacent paved surface. Avoid spilling on paved surfaces or overflow from joint. 3.10 PROTECTION AND CURING A. Protection: Protect concrete against frost, rapid drying and damage by rain. Keep moist for at least 7 days after protecting with wet burlap, canvas covering or liquid curing compound. Secure approval of proposed method. During this period, maintain surface of concrete above 70 degrees F. for at least 3 days or above 50 degrees F. for at least 5 days. 05-12-06 SITE CONCRETE Summary Permit Set 03311-7 PROJECT #27990 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03311 VAIL COLORADO SITE CONCRETE B. Spraying: Spray concrete during the curing period as frequently as drying conditions may require. Use a concrete covering that will not stain or discolor finished concrete surfaces. C. Curing: Cure concrete in accordance with the ACI "Manual of Concrete Practice". D. Damage and Defacement: Protect all concrete work against damage and defacement . during subsequent construction operations until final acceptance. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. 3.12 CLEAN-UP A. General: Upon completion of work, immediately remove from the premises all surplus materials, tools, equipment, rubbish and debris resulting from the work. B. Cleaning and Patching: 1. Removal: Remove all projecting fins, bolts, wire, nails, etc., not necessary for the work, or cut them back 1 in. from the surface and patch in an inconspicuous manner. 2. Voids: Fill holes with a 1:3 cement and sand mortar with the same color as the adjoining concrete. Mix and place the mortar as dry as possible and finish flush with the adjacent surface. 3. Corrective Patching: Correct all defects in concrete work. Chip all voids to a depth of at least 1 in. with the edges perpendicular to the surface and parallel to form markings. Fill all voids, surface irregularities, or honeycombing by patching or rubbing. Insure that all concrete surfaces so repaired duplicate the appearance of the unpatched work. 4. Defective Work: Remove in its entirety and replace all defective concrete work which after corrective patching, rubbing, etc. fails to duplicate the appearance of unpatched work and/or conform to the standards set forth in these Specifications. END OF SECTION 05-12-06 SITE CONCRETE Summary Permit Set 03311-8 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03352 VAIL, COLORADO STAINED CONCRETE FINISH SECTION 03352 - STAINED CONCRETE FINISH PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for providing stained concrete finish and sealer on top and underside surfaces of projecting balconies. B. Related Sections: 1. Concrete accessories are specified in Section 03150. 2. Cast-in-place concrete is specified in Section 03300. 3. Decorative concrete paving is specified in Section 02752. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data and application and installation instructions. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A Coordinate curing and protection of cast-in-place concrete with the work of Division 3. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete Stain: QC Construction Products 'QC CemTint', L.M. Scofield "Littiochrome Chemical Stain or approved equal, two colors as selected by the Architect A different color will be used on top and underside surfaces of projecting balconies. Chemical stain shall be an addic, water-based solution of metallic salts that penetrate and read with chemicals in cured concrete to produce insoluble color deposits in the concrete matrix The formulation shall contain no pigments or resins. B. Clear Sealer: QC Construction Products "QC Cemsear, LM. Scofield 'Cementone Clear Sealer" or approved equal. Sealer shall be a semi-gloss, water-bsed, modified methyl-methaaylate emulsion. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Prepare concrete by filing holes, crevices, spalled or disintegrated areas. B. Surfaces shag be cured a minimum of 14-days as recommended by stain manufacturer, and shall be free of sail, loose material, dust, oil, grease, soap, plaster, paint, curing and parting compounds, dark alkali spots, and other foreign material. C. Cure freshly placed concrete with new and unwrinkled, nor-staining kraft paper. Keep laps and taped seams at a minimum. D. Do not stack anything on slabs during the initial 2-weeks of curing. E. Clean cured and or existing floors and slabs with a neutral PH floor cleaner and rinse thoroughly with dean hot water. F. Existing concrete surfaces may require additional cleaning to remove coatings, waxes, and adhesives. G. Surfaces that cannot be successfully cleaned by other methods shall be ground with 24 grit diamond stone or silicon carbide stone and polished with 80 grit silicon carbide stone. 0407-06 Progress CD Set STAINED CONCRETE FINW 03352-1 i PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL. COLORADO SECTION 03352 STAINED CONCRETE FINISH H. Do not use acid washing as a cleaning procedure. i. Dense hard-troweled slabs may require sanding andlor sandblasting to make them penetrable. 3.02 STAINED CONCRETE FINISH A. Stain: 1. Apply concrete stain to cured concrete surfaces in accordance with manufacturers instructions. 2. Apply stain with add resisting equipment. 3. Scrub stain solution into surface maintaining a wet edge. Keep surface uniformly saturated and do not over-apply or puddle. 4. Allow stain to remain between applications and after final application a minimum of 4-hours. 5. Application rates shall be based on approved mock-up samples. 6. Remove reacted residue by wet scrubbing with a commercial detergent and hot water. Rinse until surface is completely dean, more than one wash down may be required. B. Clear Sealer: Allow slabs to dry a minimum of 24-hours and apply two coats of dear sealer at manufacturers recommended rate. END OF SECTION J 04 07 06 STAINED CONCRETE FINISH 03352 Progress CD Set - 2 NISHKIAN MENNINGER PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03365 VAIL, COLORADO CONCRETE POST-TENSIONING SECTION 03365 - CONCRETE POST-TENSIONING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section specifies requirements for post-tensioning cast-in-place concrete slabs. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement B. Section 03300: Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturer. Provide post-tensioning system, which is the product of a manufacturer whose complete system has been previously approved by governing Building Department. B. Survey: Contractor shall survey the post-tensioned concrete floor elevations both before and immediately after the post-tensioning is completed, and again 30 days later. Survey shall be at a minimum of 12 locations at each floor equally divided between columns and mid-span. C. Mix designs for concrete to be post-tensioned shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with Section 03300. 1.04 TESTING AND MATERIAL A. Material Tests: Owner's testing laboratory will provide all material tests indicated on the structural drawings, and as required by governing Building Department. Samples, submitted for testing, shall be accompanied by supplier's certification that the samples are representative of the material being furnished. 2. Pre-stressing steel shall be tested for tensile strength and elongation at rupture. B. System Tests: In the event that adequate information concerning the suitability of pre-stressing system cannot be furnished, the Structural Engineer may require tests to be made of the system at Contractor's expense. C. Inspections: Owner will arrange and pay for the services of qualified Inspector for continuous inspection of all post-tensioning work. Inspector will inspect the placing of post-tensioning materials and will be continuously present during the post-tensioning operations, and will make written reports to Architect, and Structural Engineer, and certifications to Building Department as to compliance with Building Code Requirements and Contract Drawings and Specifications. D. Field Quality Control: Contractor shall furnish the following samples to Testing Laboratory. One sample strand (uncoated and not wrapped), with complete stressing hardware, of each reel, heat, or lot number. 2. One sample of wire for each 5000 pounds, or fraction thereof, from each heat of wire to be used. 05.12-06 CONCRETE POST-TENSIONING Summary Permit Set 03365-1 NISHKIAN MENNINGER PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03365 VAIL, COLORADO CONCRETE POST-TENSIONING 3. Samples to be labeled and kept at jobsite. If requested by Structural Engineer, samples shall be tested by testing laboratory for modulus of elasticity and tensile strength and elongation at rupture. 1.05 PRODUCT DATA A Submit manufacturer's technical data for post-tensioning products, including certification that each product complies with specified requirements. Include instructions for handling, storage, installation and protection of each product. 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS, POST-TENSIONING WORK A. Submit shop drawings showing complete information for the post-tensioning work as follows: 1. Show tendon layout and dimensions locating tendons in horizontal plan at all points. Detail horizontal curvature of tendons at block-outs and anchorages; show all openings in slabs and beams, show all imbeds. 2. Provide tendon profiles showing chair heights and locations, and any required placement steel. Show clearly the location of each tendon and the method of tendon support. 3. Furnish details of reinforcement around stressing pockets and closures, or where interference with post-tension tendons may occur. 4. Furnish calculations, or test results, as to the adequacy of the anchorage. The anchorage shall develop a minimum of 100% of the specified ultimate strength of the tendons. 5. Show required elongation of each tendon at jacking point 6. Furnish complete pre-stressing procedure: a. Jacking-force and jacking pressure. b. Maximum temporary jacking force and jacking pressure. C. Certified jack calibrations and method of jack identification. NOTE: Non-calibrated jack and pump combination shall not be used on the job. d. Method of determining slack, if any. e. Method of determining anchor force, or force remaining in tendons after anchorage. 7. Furnish method of burning-off excess tendons, after anchorage. 8. Provide method of sealing tendons. 9. Provide manufacturer's written guarantee that post-tensioning material is of the strength required. 10. Furnish calculations of friction losses. J 05-12-06 CONCRETE POST-TENSIONING Summary Permit Set 03365 - 2 PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS NISHKIAN MENNINGER SECTION 03365 VAIL, COLORADO CONCRETE POST-TENSIONING Architect's, and Structural Engineer's review of shop drawings will be for general consideration only. Compliance with requirements for materials, fabrication, and performance of post-tensioning work is the Contractor's responsibility. Information: Contractor shall furnish following information to Structural Engineer and Testing Laboratory. 1. Gage calibration chart for each set of stressing equipment. 2. Gage calibration curve, dated just prior to use of equipment. 3. Field stressing procedure. 4. Mill test reports. 5. Strand schedule. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Design and configuration of bearing plates, anchorage devices, stressing grippers, slippage sheathing, and related materials shall be those which are standard for the method of post-tensioning used, and shall conform to system manufacturer's data. Materials shall have ICBO approval. B. Concrete shall conform to approved mix design. C. Pre-stressing steel shall be cold-drawing stress-relieved 7-wire strands, 1/2 inch diameter, having a guaranteed minimum ultimate tensile strength of 270,000 psi, conforming to ASTM A416, Grade 270. Approximate modulus of elasticity shall be 28,000,000 psi. D. Distribution Plates and anchorages: Pre-stressing steel shall be secured at ends with approved anchoring devices. E. Anchoring devices: Designed so that wires shall not kink, neck down or otherwise be damaged, and shall hold the pre-stressing steel without slip of more than 1/8 inch at load equal to 80% of the minimum ultimate tensile strength of the wire. F. Distribution plates shall be welded steel or cast steel bearing assemblies that will support and distribute the bad from anchoring devices. Bending stresses in the plates induced by pull of pre-stressing steel shall not exceed 27,000 psi for structural steel and 15,000 psi for cast steel, except as experimental data may indicate that higher stresses are satisfactory for higher quality materials as required to meet strain requirements. Bearing plates and load distribution plates, anchor bolts, bearing bars, and other metal work shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication where exposed and not protected from the weather. Welding shall be inspected and approved before galvanizing. Distribution plates may be omitted if the bearing area of any anchoring device is sufficiently large so that the local concentrated bearing compressive stresses do not exceed the allowable maximum stresses or cause local failure. Special reinforcement, required for the satisfactory performance of the anchorage, shall be designed, supplied and installed by the pre-stress Contractor. Such reinforcement shall not be less than shown on the Drawings. G. Maximum stresses in concrete from bearing plates and anchorage devices shall not exceed that allowed by ACI 318-02 Section 18.4.1. 05-12-06 CONCRETE POST-TENSIONING Summary Permit Set 03365 - 3 NISHKIAN MENNINGER PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03365 VAIL, COLORADO CONCRETE POST-TENSIONING H. Design, fabrication and erection shall conform to latest AISC Standards and AWS Welding Standards including Qualification Test of Welders. End bearing forces and grouting shall be provided as specified herein. Metal anchorage shall be recessed to provide minimum grout or concrete coverage as indicated or approved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION OF SUBSTRATES Examine the areas and conditions under which post-tensioning work is to be performed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsuitable conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PRESTRESSING CRITERIA Allowable stresses for pre-stressing steel are as follows: 1. Maximum Stress: Tendons may be temporarily stressed to a value higher than the initial stress in order to overcome stressing friction. In no case shall temporary stress exceed 80% of the guaranteed ultimate tensile strength of the strand. 2. Stressing Friction: Anticipated stressing friction shall be calculated by Contractor using as a basis for calculations the result of experience and field tests for similar strands of similar length. This is not to be considered the actual stressing friction, which must in all cases be measured in the field. It is the anticipated friction, which must be known to select the initial stress properly as specified below. 3. Initial Stress (anchoring stress) shall not be greater than 70% of the guaranteed ultimate tensile strength of the wire, nor shall it be greater than the maximum (jacking) allowable stress minus the anticipated stressing friction, whichever is the least. 4. Final Stress (design stress): Final stress shall be that remaining after all losses and is the stress, which shall be used in calculating the minimum working forces. This stress shall not exceed 60% of the ultimate tensile strength of the wire. Low relaxation tendons may be substituted as an alternate with a stress not to exceed 65% of the ultimate tensile strength of the wire. 3.03 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE WORK A Concrete work shall conform to Section 03300 except as modified herein. Inserts in concrete work shall be accurately installed and secured in place including pre-stressing items such as enclosures, spacer bars, and anchorages, as well as all inserts required for attaching electrical, mechanical, steel studs, and other items of equipment Use of power-driven studs shall conform to requirements shown on structural drawings. Embedded inserts shall not be attached to or touch pre-stressing strands. C. Slab edge forms shall be accurately drilled for connection of the anchoring hardware, and for strand and reinforcing steel projecting beyond the edge of the slab, and shall be securely anchored, and braced. Edge forms shall be at least 2 inches nominal thickness and the proper dimension to form slabs of the thickness shown on the plans. 05-12-06 CONCRETE POST-TENSIONING Summary Permit Set 03365 - 4 PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS NISHKIAN MENNINGER SECTION 03365 VAIL, COLORADO CONCRETE POST-TENSIONING Concrete placing and finishing: Top surfaces of floor slabs shall conform to Section 03300. Concrete shall be placed in such manner as to insure that alignment of post-tensioning strand and conventional reinforcement remains unchanged. Care shall be exercised to insure uniform compaction of concrete especially around end anchorages. Holes, other than those shown, are not permitted within 24 inches of pre-stressing bearing plates. 3.04 SLIPPAGE SHEATHING A. All pre-stressing steel tendons shall be enclosed in slippage sheathing consisting of flexible plastic tubing, which shall be impervious to the cement paste and shall permit slippage of the steel. All pre-stressing steel shag be coated throughout its length, from stressing end plate to within 12 inches to 18 inches from fixed end bearing plate. There shall be no voids or pockets for water or air to collect B. Slippage sheathing shall be inspected at the site for compliance with requirements. After placing, sheaths shag be inspected for bare spots, and at back of bearing plates and repaired as required. C. Mastic coating to protect wire against corrosion and to allow strand to slip within concrete shall be composed of asphaltic materials compounded with long fiber asbestos, flake graphite, rust inhibitors, and volatile solvents, mixed in proportions determined by successful experience. Altemate approved mastics may be used. 3.05 FABRICATION OF STRANDS A. Apply mastic to completely cover each strand. Strand shall then be covered by sheathing, which shall extend from tight contact with the stressing and bearing plates, to within 12" to 18" from fixed end bearing plates. Strand shall be coiled for delivery in 5-foot minimum strands and strands showing severe fabrication defects shag be removed and replaced, or the member will be rejected. B. Pre-stressing steel within every group of the same type of members shall be of the same heat where practicable. All steel shall be assigned a heat number and tagged accordingly. Pre-stressing steel shall be satisfactorily protected from excessive rust or other corrosion prior to placement, and shall be free from deleterious substances when tensioned. 3.06 PLACING PRESTRESSING STRANDS A. Bearing plates shall be connected to the edge forms or securely fastened to reinforcing to insure no displacement or rotation during concrete placement and shall be perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the strand. Fixed end bearing plates shall have 3 inches minimum clearance from the inside of the edge forms. B. Strands shall be supported at the exact vertical location indicated by means of steel wire chairs, strands or reinforced bolsters of correct height A sufficient number of supports, not less than 4 per span, shall be located on each strand to support the strand in parabolic curves between local points. Sequence of placing strand shag be established on shop drawings, so that any conflict between longitudinal and transverse strands will not prevent strands from following proper parabolic curve shown on shop drawings. C. Supports for strands shall insure strands remain in proper position during placing of concrete. Slab strands shall be tied at intersections where they contact strands in perpendicular directions by a standard "figure eight" cross be of 16-gage black annealed tiewire. In addition to indicated reinforcing steel, extra location steel shall be provided and tied to strands to prevent lateral movement during concreting operations. All strands shall be perfectly straight in plan. Offset of strands and adjustment of spacing shall be done only with approval of Structural Engineer. 05-12.06 CONCRETE POST-TENSIONING Summary Permit Set 03365 - 5 NISHKIAN MENNINGER PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03365 VAIL, COLORADO CONCRETE POST-TENSIONING Stressing Equipment: In placing strands, adequate provision shall be made for installation of stressing equipment by locating strands and projecting reinforcement as nearly as possible in vertical alignment. A minimum stressing equipment space of 3 ft 6 inches normal to the stressing edge of any member shall be kept clear of construction material, equipment, or other obstructions until stressing operations are complete. 3.07 POST-TENSIONING A. Perform under continuous inspection as specified. B. Losses: Losses in stress due to creep, slip at anchorage, elastic shortening, shrinkage of concrete, relaxation of steel and sequence of stressing shall be assumed to be not less than 27,000 psi unless substantiated by tests and calculations. C. Restriction: No tensioning will be permitted until it is demonstrated that the pre-stressing steel is reasonably free and un-bonded. Evidence that the steel is un-bonded will be considered satisfactory if inward movement of steel is observed at one end of the strand when a nominal pull is applied to the steel at the other end. An agreement not exceeding 7% between the observed and the expected elongation after pre-stressing will be considered satisfactory evidence. D. Final post-tensioning shall not start until tests on concrete cylinders manufactured and cured under same conditions as members to be pre-stressed indicate a compressive strength as required for anchorage bearing, but not less than 3,000 psi, nor in any case until 72 hours after completion of the pour. E. Jacks: Stands shall be stressed by motor-operated hydraulic jacks providing a uniform pressure and equipped with accurate reading calibrated hydraulic gages of at least 6 inches diameter and having a fine pointer to permit stress in pre-stressing steel to be computed at any time. A certified calibrated curve shall accompany each jack. If inconsistencies between the measured elongation and the jack gage reading occur, the jack gages shall immediately be recalibrated. F. Stressing procedure for each strand, in general, shall be as follows: 1. Stress to a gage reading equivalent to required initial force plus maximum force required to overcome stressing friction. 2. Insert grippers and gradually reduce load to transfer full force to anchorage. 3. Re-stress and record gage reading at which all load has been removed from grippers (only for problem tendons). This load shall be no less than gage reading equivalent to initial force (anchorage force) on strand. A variation of plus or minus 7% is acceptable for any one strand provided that initial force in any three adjacent strands is no less than the sum of the required force for these three strands. Cumulative negative tolerance, which would result in an overall reduction of initial force will not be permitted. 4. Elongation of strands shall be recorded on an approved form. They shall be within 7% of the required elongations shown on the approved shop drawings. 5. Coat and grout the post tensioning anchorage. 6. Waterproof the post-tensioning anchorage. G. Stressing Sequence: Stressing operations shall start at the middle of the slab and proceed toward both ends simultaneously, stressing alternate strands. At any time, the percentage of strands stressed in one direction 05-12-06 CONCRETE POST-TENSIONING Summary Permit Set 03365 - 6 PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS NISHKIAN MENNINGER SECTION 03365 VAIL, COLORADO CONCRETE POST-TENSIONING shall not exceed the percentage of the strands in the other direction by more than 50%. H. Removal of Strand Ends: Excess length of strands may be removed after all pre-stressing is completed for a specific pour and all strands have exhibited acceptable performance. Strands may be flame-cut or sheared. Grouting: Immediately after pre-stressing, exposed and anchorages including wires and stressing grippers, shall be coated with two heavy coats of approved rust preventive. Suitable masking shall be used to prevent the material from contact with concrete surfaces. All pockets for stressing terminals shall then be filled with a non-shrinking grout Whenever the grout pocket is to be left exposed, the grout shall be smoothed and rubbed to match adjoining surfaces. For pockets larger than 2 inches diameter, before placing grout, cover entire recess including steel with a heavy coat of'epocast 25-B' epoxy resin as per Furan Plastic, Inc., Los Angeles, California, and place grout while bonder is wet. 3.08 SAFETY PRECAUTION A Take precautions to prevent workers from standing in dangerous zones. Comply with requirements issued by State of Colorado. END OF SECTION 05-12-06 CONCRETE POST-TENSIONING Summary Permit Set 03365 - 7 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03480 VAIL, COLORADO ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES SECTION 03480 - ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing miscellaneous architectural precast concrete shapes, including but not limited to the following: 1. Cap/coping at chimneys. 2. Miscellaneous trim pieces, where indicated on drawings. B. Related Sections: Water repellents are specified in Section 07190. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data and Shop Drawings: Include product data and shop drawings for precast concrete items and installation details and instructions. Include elevation drawings for mold pattern showing Layout and dimensions of architectural features. B. Samples: Minimum 12-inch square sample showing color and finish prior to fabricating. Resubmit until approved by the Architect. C. Engineering calculations prepared by a licensed engineer registered in the State of Colorado. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator's Qualifications: Fabricator shall have a minimum of 3-years experience fabricating miscellaneous precast items of the type required for this Project. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle units to prevent chipping and other damage. B. Store units in a dean, dry location, off the ground and suitably protected. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MISCELLANEOUS PRECAST CONCRETE ITEMS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, white if required for selected color. B. Aggregate: ASTM C330 with a maximum size of 5/8-inch. C. Water. Clean, potable, free from injurious amounts of oils, alkalis, organic materials and other deleterious substances. D. Colorant As recommended by fabricator to produce color as selected by the Architect and as required to match approved mock-ups. E. Molds: Precast elements shall be cast in aluminum forms of rigid construction, accurate in detail with precise comers and arrises, and designed to provide dose control of dimensions and details indicated. Surface offorms shall have joints, comers, and radii filled, ground, filed, straightened or otherwise prepared to provide a finished concrete surface that is smooth and dense, free of honeycombing, air pockets, offsets, smkages, or other irregularities. F. Concrete Quality: Minimum compressive strength of 5,000-psi at 28-days. G. Finish: Smooth texture. 04-07-06 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES Progress CD Set 03480-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 03480 VAIL, COLORADO ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES 2.02 CASTING A. Casting shall be by methods and equipment in conformance with generally acceptable systems for this type of work and shall be accomplished at manufacturer's plant B. Handle concrete to prevent segregation of materials. Vibrate internally or externally to achieve proper compaction, finish and distribution. C. Embedded items shall be accurately placed and maintained in proper location during casting. D. Casting and dimensional tolerances shag be as follows: Overall dimension (height and width) plus or minus 1/8-inch. 2. Thickness plus or minus 118-inch. 2.03 CURING A. Cure precast concrete items by methods generally accepted for this type of work. Curing may be accelerated by steam curing provided the temperature does not exceed 150-deg. F. and surfaces of concrete are kept moist B. Do not remove items from molds until they have reached a compressive strength of 2,000-psi. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install products as indicated, securely anchored and plumb and level, as applicable. B. Install precast items with nominal 3/84nch wide joint widths unless otherwise indicated or recommended by installer. C. Any voids in precast concrete items resulting for cutting or fitting that will be exposed to view in the completed work shall be filled with a non-shrink grout in a color and texture to match adjacent precast concrete surfaces. Grout patching shall be imperceptible in the completed work and shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Architect If patching is not acceptable to the Architect, replace precast units with new units. END OF SECTION 0407-06 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES Progress CD Set 03480-2 NISHKIAN MENNINGER PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 04220 VAIL, COLORADO CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04220 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete masonry unit construction, complete with mortar, reinforcement and anchorage. 1. Cutting and fitting for work of other trades. B. Products Installed Not Furnished: Building in items supplied by other trades or suppliers. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI A41.2: Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Masonry. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements: Perform concrete unit masonry work in accordance with requirements of ANSI A41.2, except as otherwise specified. B. Testing: Conform with requirements specified; tests paid for by owner. 1. Provide as required, to indicate conformance with applicable codes. C. Inspections: Comer will provide special inspections where required by applicable codes. D. Fire Rated Materials: Provide materials and systems which have passed ASTM Ell 19 tests and are approved for fire ratings indicated on Drawings. E. Pre-Installation Conference: Convene conference one week prior to commencing concrete unit masonry unit work; require attendance of parties directly affecting masonry work. 1. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Provide for reinforcing; show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, ties and arrangements and assemblies. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers certification concrete masonry units and reinforcing steel conform to specified standards. 1.05 SITE CONDITIONS A. Temperature: Maintain materials to minimum 50 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. 1. Do not place masonry units when air temperature is below 40 degrees F. a. During colder weather, work may continue where equipment is used to maintain constant temperature above 40 degrees F, and masonry work completed and in progress is kept covered. 05-12-06 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Summary Permit Set 04220-1 NISHKIAN MENNINGER PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 04220 VAIL, COLORADO CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 2. Protect masonry construction from direct wind and sun exposure when temperatures exceed 99 degrees F and relative humidity is less than 50 percent. B. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work, maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete Masonry Units: Hollow load-bearing units conforming to ASTM C90, Grade N, Type I; obtain from one manufacturer. 1. Weight: Normal weight, 125 -135 pcf. 2. Compressive Strength: Comply with ASTM C90. 3. Size: Nominal 8"x16° face measurement with thickness as indicated on Drawings. 4. Special Shapes: Provide proper specially shaped units for bond beams, lintels, comers and jambs. a. Exposed Special Shapes: Design bond beams, lintels, comers and jambs and fillers to match and compliment block units; where required perform cutting with masonry saw. B. Mortar. Conform to ASTM C270, Type S; Minimum compressive strength of 1900 psi. 1. Masonry Cement(Premix Mortar. Acceptable only if manufacturer certifies product is made of cement and lime, with no limestone or pulverized material used in lieu of hydrated lime. C. Grout Conform to ASTM C476, with minimum compressive strength of 1900 psi. D. Mortar and Grout Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. 2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. 3. Aggregates: Standard masonry mortar and grout type; clean, dry and protected against dampness, freezing and foreign matter. a. Mortar Aggregates: Conform to ASTM C144, b. Grout Aggregates: Conform to ASTM C404. 4. Water. Clean, drinkable free of injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter or other harmful materials. J 05.12-06 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Summary Permit Set 04420 - 2 NISHKIAN MENNINGER PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 04220 VAIL, COLORADO CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY E. Reinforcement and Anchorages: Provide reinforcing and anchorages as indicated on Drawings. Deformed Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, for bars No. 4 and larger; grade 40 for No. 3 bars; unless otherwise indicated. 2. Plain Bars: ASTM A675, Grade 80, for No. 2 bars, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A92, free from mill scale and excess or loose rust deposits. F. Control Joints: Closed cell neoprene or PVC factory fabricated solid sections, resistant to oils and solvents, flexible at temperatures from 40 degree F after five hours exposure; ASTM D2240 minimum durometer 70. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Supply metal anchors to concrete and structural steel trades for placement; provide in sufficient quantity and direct placement. B. Ensure items built in by other trades are properly located and sized. C. Establish lines, levels and coursing, protect from disturbance. D. Clean surfaces to receive masonry free from dirt, debris, and laitance. 3.02 INSTALLATION A Do not wet concrete masonry units. Lay units in mortar with full bed and head joints, properly jointed with other work. Fully bond comers and intersections. Align cells of units to maintain clear, unobstructed space for reinforcing and grout, keep cells free of mortar and debris. B. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial-set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. C. Buttering comers of joints, and deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not acceptable. D. Perform job site cutting with proper power tools to provide straight and true, un-chipped edges. E. Provide structural anchorage or retention in accordance with ANSI A41.2. Isolate non-load-bearing concrete masonry from structure; provide restraint angles and seismic supports on unfinished side of walls. a. Where non-load-bearing concrete masonry is indicated to be finished on both sides, obtain directions from Architect regarding acceptable location of restraints and supports. 05-12-06 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Summary Permit Set 04220 - 3 NISHKIAN MENNINGER PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 04220 VAIL, COLORADO CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Ensure masonry courses are of uniform height, make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of uniform thickness. Lay concrete unit masonry as indicated on drawings. 2. Course one block unit and one mortar joint to equal 8". G. Remove excess mortar and projections, take care to prevent breaking block comers. H. Tolerances: Maximum allowable variation from masonry unit to adjacent masonry unit is 1/32' where masonry units are exposed in finished construction and where waterproofing is applied over masonry units. 2. Maximum allowable variation from plane of wall is 1/4' in 10 feet, and maximum 112" in 20 feet or more. 3. Maximum allowable variation from plumb is 1/4" per story, non-cumulative, and maximum 1/2" in two or more stories. 4. Maximum allowable variation of level coursing is 1/8" in 3 feet, 1/4' in 10 feet and 1/2" in 30 feet. 1. Mortar Joints: Compress joints with a round or curved metal tool. 1. Compress mortar joints with jointing tool with minimum diameter three times width of mortar joint, to provide a flush surface where resilient base or waterproofing is to be applied over masonry. J. Reinforcement and Anchorage: Fully reinforce comers and intersections. See drawings for lap splice length, horizontal and vertical reinforcing and reinforcing at openings. 1. Support and secure reinforcing bars, maintain within 1/2' of dimensioned position. 2. Retain vertical reinforcement in position at top and bottom of cells and at intervals not to exceed 192 bar diameters. K Lintels: Provide reinforced concrete masonry unit lintels over openings where steel lintels are not scheduled. See drawings for reinforcement around openings. Provide temporary shoring for openings wider than 36". 2. Use full length reinforcing bars. L. Grouting: All cells shall be filled solid with grout To prevent "blow-out" pour no grout until the mortar has set and cured. However grout the walls as soon as possible after the mortar has cured to reduce shrinkage and cracking of the vertical joints. All dean-out closures, reinforcing, bolts and embedded connection items are to be in position before grouting is started. 2. Handle grout from the mixer to the point of deposit in the grout space as rapidly as practical by pumping and placing methods which will prevent segregation of the mix and cause a minimum of grout splatter on reinforcing and masonry unit surfaces not immediately encased in grout lift. 05-12-06 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Summary Permit Set 04220 - 4 NISHKIAN MENNINGER PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 04220 VAIL, COLORADO CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 3. Place the first lift of grout to a uniform height within the pour section and mechanically vibrate thoroughly to fill all voids. The grouting team should be organized to enable the vibration to follow closely behind, and at the same place as the pouring operation. Maximum height of lift is 7-0". 4. After a waiting period sufficient to permit the grout to become plastic, but before it has taken any set, the succeeding lift should be poured and alternate cells vitiated 12" to 18" into the preceding lift. Do this in such a manner as to consolidate the preceding lift and dose any plastic shrinkage cracks or separations from cell walls. 5. When grouting is stopped for more than one hour, terminate grout approximately 2" below top of upper masonry unit to form positive key for subsequent grout placement. 6. Cleaning wall: Immediately after the wall has been fully grouted, hose off with water under pressure through a jet nozzle, all the scum and stains, which have percolated through the blocks and joints. M. Built-In Work: As work progresses, build in frames, lintels, nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates and other items supplied by other trades. Build in items plumb and true. 2. Do not build in organic materials, which will be subject to rot or deterioration. 3. Bed anchors of frames in mortar joints; fill frame voids solid with mortar, fill masonry cores with grout minimum 12" from framed openings. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds; coordinate with work of other specification sections to ensure correct size, shape and location. 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and smears upon completion of masonry work. B. Point or replace defective mortar, match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces using a non-acidic solution, which will not harm masonry or adjacent materials, consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Maintain protective boards at exposed external comers which may be damaged by construction activities; protect without damaging completed work. END OF SECTION 05-12-06 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Summary Perrnft Set 04220 - 5 PROJECT #02028 S HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 04410 FOUR SEASON VAIL, COLORADO EXTERIOR ROUGH STONE SECTION 04410 -EXTERIOR ROUGH STONE PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing exterior rough stone veneer. B. Related Sections: 1. Architectural precast concrete specialties are specified in Section 03480. 2. Wall membrane is specified in Section 07195. 3. Gypsum sheathing is specified in Section 09252. 4. Plywood sheathing is specified in Section 06101. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Hand selected and cleaned stone samples showing range of color, texture, and appearance to be used. B. Shop Drawings: Show arrangement and provisions for anchoring and fastening stone in place and support system including angles and other supports. Show location of inserts for stone anchors and supports to be built into other work. C. Mock-Up: After approval of samples, provide a minimum of 6-foot square sample of rough stone proposed 10 be used showing range of color, texture and workmanship to be expected in the completed work. Show full range of color variation of the stone and pattern, joint treatment, and color of joint mortar or sealant. Modify as directed until mock-up is approved by the Architect. 1. Locate mock-ups on the site in locations where directed by the Architect. 2. Retain during construction as a standard for judging completed work. Demolish and remove from the site when directed by the Architect. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instatier's Qualifications: Successfully installed rough stone similar in type and quantity to that required for this Project, for a period of not less than 5-years. 1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA A. General: The requirements for design of rough stone attachment and support system includes the requirement for cooperative and coordinated work with the Architect and the Arohiteds consultants The cgs are tions, support, and back-up structure required for fastening and support of rough conditions, and diagrammatic and intended to indicate the external dimensions, organization of units, profiles, The Contractor is responsible for compliance with the design criteria. B. Structural Loads: The design of stone anchorage and back-up system shall conform to the bads specified in the International Building Code (IBC). EXTERIOR ROUGH STONE 04-07-06 04410-1 Progress CD Set PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 04410 VAIL, COLORADO EXTERIOR ROUGH STONE C. Anchorage and Support: Work under this Section includes back-up structure required for the support of rough stone, including but not limited to, framing, angles, and bracing, and supports and anchors required for securing the stone veneer in place. Back-up structural support, anchors, and fastening system shall be designed by a Colorado registered structural engineer employed by the Contractor. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect stone during storage and construction against moisture, soiling, staining and physical damage. B. Protect mortar materials for moisture and other foreign materials. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Review installation procedures and coordination with other work affected by stonework. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ROUGH STONE A. Stone: Blend of 60% 'McGregor Lite 140% "Castle Rock" as available from The Gallegos Corporation. Contact: Frank Gutierrez, (970) 524-4322. Layup: Random Ashlar with horizontal orientation with 'protuders' in. Stone shall be hand selected for color, size and shape as required to attain a mock-up panel approved by the Owner and Architect. B. Alternate Stone :"Vogelman Blue & Brown Mid' available through Vogelman West Associates, Inc., Avon, CO 81620. Contact Kurt Vogelman (970) 949-4138. 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, white or grey as required for mortar color. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. C. Sand: ASTM C144. D. Water: Clean and potable. E. Colored Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with record of satisfactory performance in stone mortars. Color as selected by the Architect. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Stone Anchors: Stainless steel, 300-series alloy. B. Mortar Stop: Advanced Building Products, Inc. 'Mortar Break' Mortar Net USA, Ltd. "Mortar Net' or approved equal polymer core geomabix composed of nylon strands woven into a.8754nch thick mesh, resistant to acid and alkali, non-absorbent. C. Weep Holes: White polyethylene tubing with cotton wicking rope, 3184nch O.D. x 64nches lag. Extend wicking rope within wall cavity up 2-inches above penetration through stone veneer, typical. D. Through-Wall Flashing: AISI Type 3021304 stainless steel, minimum 22-gauge unless heavier gauges are kxkated or recommended by stone installer. 0407-06 EXTERIOR ROUGH STONE Progress CD Set 04410-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 04410 VAIL, COLORADO EXTERIOR ROUGH STONE 2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXING A. Mortar. Non-staining, cementAine mortar, complying with ASTM C270, Type S Proportion Specification, using specified materials. B. Pointing Mortar and Grout: Mix to match pointing mortar or grout in approved mock-up. Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1-to-10, by weight. 2.05 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate as indicated and detailed on final shop drawings. 1. Provide slots or holes cut or drilled for anchors, fasteners, and supports required to secure stonework in place to supporting construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Furnish installers of other work with drawings and templates showing location of inserts for stone anchors and supports. B. Clean stone and other substrates of deleterious materials to ensure bond of mortar and grout Do not use wet stone at time of installation. C. Clean hand selected stones of dirt stains and deleterious material. Do not use cleaning materials that would scar stone, change stone's color and texture, or leave behind residues and material that can affect the grouttmortar bond. D. Install anchorage devices as required to properly support stone work at 24-inches on center maximum or as otherwise indicated on the reviewed shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Interlocking Pattern and Fit: Select stones to form tight, random, interlocking joints. Cut or chip stones as required to fit Where cuffing is performed, use only stones that retain a natural appearance. Do not use stones with spalls, tool marks, or other unnatural defects exposed-to-view in the completed work. B. Size: Vary face stone size but use larger stones at the bottom of the installation and smaller stones at the top. Size variation shall match approved mock-up panel. C. Comers/Angles: Utilize natural or cut stone with roughly squared comers to form outside comers and angles lo installation. D. Mortar/Grout Prior to beginning installation, determine whether stones are required to be laid in a dry stab or in a wetted condition to maximize the bond between the stone and the mortar/grout material. Set stones in a Tuft bed of mortar/grout. E. Provide weep holes located above ledges and flashing, spaced 2-0" ma, unless otherwise indicated. Provide mortar stop material at weep holes and around openings. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Place diagonally on top of the flashing or ledge to ensure that the mortar droppings are broken up and deflected away from the weep holes. 0¢07.0 EXTERIOR ROUGH STONE Progress GD Set 04410-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 04410 VAIL, COLORADO EXTERIOR ROUGH STONE Through-Wan Flashing: 1. Provide concealed masonry flashings at or above shelf angles, lintels, ledges, and other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the cavity. 2. Place through-wall flashing on bed of mortar and cover with mortar. 3. Extend flashing from exterior face of stone veneer, through the cavity and turn up 84nches minimum. G. Expansion Joints: Do not span building expansion joints. Provide similar configured and straight cut joint in stonework at required expansion joints. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Cleaning: During work, remove mortar/grout and other stains from work before they permanently set Remove with tools and cleaning agents not damaging to stone. B. Pointing: Point damaged or defective mortar/grout joints. C. Protect stonework form damage, discoloration, and deterioration during construction and until time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 EXTERIOR ROUGH STONE Progress CD Set 04410-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 04415 VAIL, COLORADO SITE STONE WALLS SECTION 04415 • SITE STONE WALLS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A Work included: Work consists of the furnishing of all labor, material and equipment necessary for completion of the following work: 1. Load-bearing, stone veneer site walls, fire place and wall caps complete with reinforcement and anchorage. 2. Dry-laid stone walls 3. Mortar. 4. Grout. 5. Reinforcing. 6. Built-in of items supplied by other trades. 7. Cut and fit for other sections of work. B Related work specified elsewhere: Site Concrete - Section 03310. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Refer to Section 01450 for quality control and testing requirements. B Reference Standards: Comply with the following standards except where more stringent requirements are stated herein: 1. American National Standards Institute, ANSI/NBS 211 (A41.1), "Building Code Requirements for Masonry". 2. American Society for Testing Materials, ASTM, tests as enumerated elsewhere. 3. National Concrete Masonry Association, NCMA 'A Manual of Facts on Concrete Masonry'. 4. Portland Cement Association, PCA, "Concrete Masonry Handbook". 5. International Building Code, IBC - Masonry. 6. Colorado Masonry Institute, CMI, "Building Code Requirements for Masonry Construction," CMI 301. C Subcontractor Qualifications: Subcontractor shall be regularly engaged in subcontracting work of this type for five (5) years minimum. D Qualification of workmen: 1. For the cutting and placing of stone masonry, use only skilled Journeyman Masons who are thoroughly familiar with the design requirements. 2. In acceptance or rejection of installed stone masonry and joints, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the workmen. 3. Provide one skilled Journeyman Mason who shall be present at all times during execution of the work of 05-12-2006 SITE STONE WALLS Summary Permit Set 04415-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 04415 VAIL, COLORADO SITE STONE WALLS this Section and who shall personally direct the execution of this portion of the Work. E Codes and Standards: 1. Comply with all pertinent codes and regulations. 2. Where fire ratings are required, provide units of the minimum density required to comply with the IBC Standards and given the fire rating(s) for the width of units shown. F Mock-up Panel: 1. Construct 41ong by full wall height mock up panel of each type stone application specified herein. Include typical coursing, mortar color, joint tooling, stone cap and base. 2. Additional samples may be required by the Landscape Architect. All mock-up panels shall remain on site until work has been accepted by Owner. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Refer to Section 01450 - Quality Control for additional test submittals required. B Product Data: Include manufacturer's printed product information for each type of stone unit, accessory, and other manufactured products required. C. Samples: 1. Physical samples of each size, type, color, and texture of stone. 2. Mortar color (incorporate into mock-up panels). 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A Cold Weather Construction: 1. Preparation: a. Before beginning work, remove ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to the touch. b. Remove all frozen or damaged stone. C. Do not lay stone that are wet or frozen. 2. Procedure: Perform the following construction procedures as stone work is progressing. The following temperature ranges denote air temperature, including wind chill effect, at the time of installation. In heating mortar materials, maintain mixing temperature selected with 10 degrees F. Do not heat water above 160 degrees F. a. Air Temperature 40 degrees F. to 32 degrees F.: Heat mixing water to produce mortar 05-12-2006 SITE STONE WALLS Summary Permit Set 04415-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 04415 SITE STONE WALLS temperature between 55 degrees F. and maximum of 120 degrees F. b. Air Temperature 32 degrees F. to 25 degrees F.: Heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 65 degrees F. and maximum of 120 degrees F. C. Air Temperature 25 degrees F. to 20 degrees F. Use salamander or other sources of heat on both sides of walls under construction. Use windbreaks when wind is in excess of 15 mph. d. Air Temperature 20 degrees F. and Below: Heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 65 degrees F. and maximum of 120 degrees F. Provide enclosure and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature above 32 degrees F. Temperature of units when laid shall be not less than 20 degrees F. 3. Grouting: a. Temperature of stone to be grouted shall not be less than 32 degrees F. when grout is placed, b. Place grout in stone at a minimum temperature of 70 degrees F. and a maximum temperature of 120 degrees F. to produce in-place grout temperature of 70 degrees F. at end of work day. C. Maintain grouted stone above 32 degrees F. for 24 hours following placement of grout. 4. Admixtures: No mortar admixtures are permitted without the written acceptance of the Architect 5. Frozen work: The above paragraphs are designed to permit stone work to continue during periods of cold temperature. Any frozen stone work will be prima facie evidence that the above requirements have not been complied with. The contractor shall be required to remove and replace all frozen materials as directed by the Architect. B Cold Weather Protection after Installation: Mean Daily Air Temperature 40 degrees F. to 32 degrees F.: Protect stone from rain or snow for 24 hours by covering with a weather resistive membrane. 2. Mean Daily Air Temperature 32 degrees F. to 20 degrees F.: Cover stone completely with weather resistive insulation blankets for 24 hours; 48 hours for grouted stone. 3. Mean Daily Air Temperature 20 degrees F. and Below: Maintain stone temperature above 32 degrees F. for 24 hours by enclosure and supplementary heat, by electric heating blankets, infra- red heat lamps, or other methods proven to be satisfactory. C Hot Weather Protection During Installation: When air temperature exceeds 99 degrees F. in the shade, protect freshly laid stone from direct exposure to wind and sun. D Moisture Protection During Installation: Where exposed to weather, the top of stone walls shall be covered at the end of each day's work using a waterproof material weighted down to insure its remaining in place. Maintain such protection until final capping of the wall. 05-12-2006 SITE STONE WALLS Summary Permit Set 04415-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 04415 VAIL, COLORADO SITE STONE WALLS 1.05 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK FROM PHYSICAL DAMAGE: A Protection: Protect all projecting stone liable to damage after setting by suitable planking well supported. Jambs and sills of opening used for passage shall be securely boxed. B Replacement: Replace any stone work showing damage or disfiguration during the progress of work in its entirety as directed by the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. No patching or hiding of defects will be permitted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A Obtain each type of exposed mortar material from one manufacturer for the entire project. B Portland Cement: Conform to ASTM C150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold weather construction. C Hydrated Lime: Conform to ASTM C207, Type S. D Aggregates for Mortar: Conform to ASTM C144. E Water: Clean, potable, and free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies, or organic material. F Aggregates for Grout: Conform to ASTM C404. G Additives: None permitted, except as specified herein. Specifically, do not lower freezing point of mortar or grout by use of calcium chloride or other anti-freeze agents. 2.02 MIXES A Mortar: 1. Comply With ASTM C270, Property Specifications, for mortar types required. 2. Masonry cement not allowed without prior written acceptance by Architect. 3. Type: Type S - average compressive strength at 28 days -1800 psi. B Reinforced Masonry Grout: 1. Fine and Course Grout Comply With ASTM C476. Grout shall contain a minimum of six sacks of Portland Cement per cubic yard. Add sufficient water to provide proper consistency without segregation for pouring or troweling. Minimum 28-day compressive strength of 200 psi required. 2. Fine Grout: Proportion by volume. One part Portland Cement, with not more than on part hydrated lime or lime putty added, and two and one-fourth to three parts sand. 05-12-2006 SITE STONE WALLS Summary Perm ft Set 04415-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 04415 SITE STONE WALLS 3. Course Grout: Proportioned by volume. One part Portland Cement with not more than one-tenth part hydrated lime or lime putty added, and two to three parts sand, and not more than two parts gravel. 2.03 WALL TIES AND REINFORCING A Wire Reinforcing: 1. Welded Wire units, prefabricated lengths of not less than 10', with matching comer "L" and intersecting "T" units. 2. Conform to ASTM A82, with deformed continuous side and intermediate rods, and plain cross rods. 2. Widths approximately 2" less than nominal width of walls and partitions, as required to position side rods for full embedment in mortar with mortar coverage of not less than 518" on joint faces exposed to exterior and not less than 1/2" elsewhere. 4. Finish: Hot dip galvanized after fabrication ASTM A153, Class B-2 (1.5 oz. per sq. ft.) or 7 mil copper coating ASTM B227, Grade 30HS, except manufacturer's standard mill galvanized may be used for interior walls and partitions. 5. Provide rectangular ties for use with hollow masonry units; hooked type (90 degrees bend, 2" min. hook) for use with solid masonry units. B Reinforcing Bars: Deformed, ASTM A615, grade 40 [60). C Non-Metallic Expansion Joint Strips: Provide pre-molded, compressible, elastic fillers of foam neoprene. D Bond Breaker Strips: #15 asphalt roofing felt complying with ASTM D225, or #15 coal-tar roofing felt complying With ASTM D227. E Pre-Molded Control Joint Strips: Solid rubber strips with a Shore A durometer hardness of 60 to 80, designed to fit standard sash block and maintain lateral stability in stone wall, size, and configuration as indicated. 2.04 ACCESSORIES: A Control Joints: Dur-O-Wall Wide flange rapid control joint to fit width of wall or approved equal. 2.05 STONE VENEER: A Stone: To match treatment of hotel, granite and fieldstone in a blend of colors to be approved by the Architect and the Owner B Size range: Thickness to vary from 5"- 7" units from 4' to 14" high and 8" to 24" wide. C Pattern: To match hotel D Grout: Match treatment of hotel; joint size to vary from to E Locations: Site screen walls and retaining walls. 05-12-2006 SITE STONE WALLS Summary Permit Set 04415-5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO 2.06 STONE CAPS AND BASES SECTION 04415 SITE STONE WALLS A Stone: Buff Sandstone, to match architectural specifications, cut to profiles shown in drawings. Provide samples of each typical trim section for approval by Landscape Architect prior to ordering. B Locations: Site screen walls and bridge crossing. 2.07 DRY-LAID STONE WALLS A Stone: To match treatment of hotel, granite and fieldstone in a blend of colors to be approved by the Architect and the Owner B Size range: Thickness to vary from 12"-30" units from 4' to 14" high and 8" to 24" wide. C Locations: Site walls north of Scorpio Building 2.08 OTHER MATERIALS: A General: All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of stone, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Landscape Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS A Inspection: Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. B Discreoancies: In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. C Pre-Construction Meeting: 1. Prior to the start of the work of this Section, Masonry Contractor shall meet with the Landscape Architect and General Contractor to resolve any questions or discrepancies. Full agreement will be required prior to the start of this work. 3. Verify with irrigation, mechanical and electrical contractors location and size of all pipes, ducts, conduit, electrical boxes fixtures, etc. 3.02 COORDINATION A General: Carefully coordinate with all other trades to insure proper and adequate interface of the work of other trades with the work of this Section. 3.03 PREPARATION A Cleaning of Work: Remove all dirt, ice, loose rust and scale from walls, ties, and reinforcing prior to installation. J 05-12-2006 SITE STONE WALLS Summary Permit Set 04415-6 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 04415 VAIL, COLORADO SITE STONE WALLS Cleaning of Equipment: Clean all equipment for mixing, transportation, and placing mortar before starting work. 3.04 MEASUREMENT AND MIXING OF MORTAR AND GROUT A Measurement: Method of measuring materials shall be by either volume or weight and such that specified proportions can be controlled and accurately maintained. Measurement of sand by shovel is not allowable. Mixing: Mix cementitious materials and aggregate for at least three minutes for mortar and five minutes for grout in a mechanical batch mixer, With the maximum amount of water to produce a workable consistency. C Retempedng: Mortars that have stiffened because of evaporation of water from the mortar may be retempererd by adding water as frequently as needed to restore required consistency, except that mortar shall be used within 2-1/2 hours after initial mixing. 3.05 WALL TIES AND REINFORCING A Single Wythe Block Wall: Reinforce by use of trussed design (ladder design where vertical cells are reinforced) steel wire reinforcement placed continuously at 16" o.c. in bed joints. Install at 8" o.c. for 24" above lintels and below sill openings. Install at 8" on center for 24" above footings. Lap 6" at ends and make continuous around comers. Reinforcing Steel: Fabrication and placement shall follow recommendations of ACI 301, 315, and 318. C Refer to drawings for special reinforcing conditions. 3.06 ACCESSORY ITEMS A Control Joints: 3/8' except where indicated otherwise. Joints shall be installed completely through and full height of stone. 3.07 FORMS AND SHORES: A Construct forms as required to shape, lines and dimension indicated on the drawings substantially and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar or grout. Brace or tie to maintain position and shape. Do not remove until masonry has cured sufficiently to support its own weight and other applied loads. 3.08 INSTALLATION OF STONE UNITS A General: Before starting the installation, the plans and all details shall be carefully studied and a layout of the courses shall be made so that the bond will be carried from bottom to top of wall, matching coursing to elevations shown on the drawings. 2. Layout expansion and control joints as required. Review locations with the Architect before laying up units. 3. Do not use cracked units or chipped units, where chipping Will be exposed to view in the finished work. 05-12-2006 SITE STONE WALLS Summary Permit Set 04415-7 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 04415 VAIL, COLORADO SITE STONE WALLS 4. Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, lay all block in running bond. 5. Lay all stone plumb and true to lines, and to the tolerances indicated. Stone units shall be laid dry (not wetted). Provide deep raked mortar joints. Mortar beds shall be spread smooth. Completely fill all collar joints unless grouted or cavity wall. 6. In laying stone, avoid over-plumbing and pounding of the comers and jambs to fit stretcher units after being set in position. Where an adjustment must be made after the mortar has started to harden, remove mortar and replace with fresh mortar. 7. Begin laying of stone so that a minimum of 4" of stone is set below finish grade. 8. Where cutting of stone is necessary, make cuts with a motor-driven masonry saw. All joints shall be plumb or level. 9. Use solid units or bond beams for top course of all piers, walls, etc. 10. Adjust stone dimensions and install starter units as required to eliminate small cuts and to maintain bond. 11. Use solid units for all soldier courses in bearing walls and wherever cores of hollow units would be exposed to view. 12. Protect facing materials against staining, and the tops of walls shall be kept covered with non-staining waterproof coverings when the work therein is not in progress. B Tooling: 1. Block: Joints that will remain concealed may be struck flush. 2. Dry Laid Stone Walls: Deep rake stone walls joints, see detail. 3. Site walls: Flush joints to match residence. 4. Stone Caps: Joints struck flush. C Built-in Sleeves: Sleeves of proper size shall be provided by others, wherever directed, to permit passage of pipes through walls. Build in all wall sleeves, anchors, plates, lintels, and other steel members provided by others. All such built-in members shall be properly set by Masonry Contractor. D Pipe Chases: Provide chases in stone walls where indicated or directed by mechanical or electrical subcontractors for pipes and conduits. E Cutting and Patching: All cutting and patching of stone shall be done by this Contractor at his own expense wherever necessary for other trades. Such work shall be done only by experienced mechanics in a workmanlike manner and none may be done which will tend to injure the strength or appearance of any finished work. No cutting of finished stone for the purpose of building in members will be allowed. 3.09 BRACING: Adequately brace stone until cured and permanently supported. 3.10 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES: 05-12-2006 SITE STONE WALLS Summary Permit Set 04415-8 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 04415 VAIL, COLORADO SITE STONE WALLS A Maximum variation from plumb: 1. In lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises: 114" in 10' 2. For external comers, expansion joints and other conspicuous lines:114" in any story or 20' maximum B Maximum variation from level or grades for exposed lintels, sills, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines: 1. 114' in any bay of 20' C Maximum variation of linear building line from an established position in plan and related portions of columns, walls and partitions: 1. 112" in any bay of 20' maximum 3.11 POINTING AND CLEANING A Pointing: Cut out any defective joints and holes in exposed stone and re-point with mortar. Dry brush stone surface after mortar has set at end of each day's work and after final pointing. B Cleaning: 1. All block stone exposed to view shall be thoroughly cleaned and be free of stains, mortar, drippings and burrs and other discoloration and anomalies before any finish is applied to surface. 2. Upon completion of pointing and cleaning, leave the work area and surrounding surfaces clean and free of mortar spots, droppings, and broken stone. Clean all mortar stains from concrete slabs, surrounding surfaces. END OF SECTION 05-12-2006 SITE STONE WALLS Summary Permit Set 04415-9 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 04440 VAIL, COLORADO STONE COUNTER TOPS SECTION 04440 - STONE COUNTER TOPS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for fum'ishing and installing stone counter tops, splashes, and surrounds. B. Related Sections: 1. Stone file is specified in Section 09300. 2. Stone flooring and base are specified in Section 09600. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Furnish cutting and setting drawings showing sizes, dimensions, sections, profiles and provisions for joinfing and other details. Dimensions shall be based on field measurements where possible. B. Samples: 1. Stone: Minimum four 124nch x 12-Inch x full thickness of each type of stone required, sealed with proposed sealer. Where required, furnish range of samples showing the range of exposed color and texture to be expected in the completed work. 2. Grout: Grout samples for verification of selected colors. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain stone from quarry with consistent color range and texture throughout the work. B. Stone fabricator shall have minimum 5-years experience fabricating stone of the type required for this Project 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle material to prevent chipping, breakage, soiling or other damage. B. Protect edges of materials with wood or other rigid materials. C. Lift with wide belt type slings wherever possible; if required, use wood rollers and provide cushion at end of wood slides. D. Store stone on wood skids and pallets. Place and stack skids and units to distribute weight evenly and to prevent breakage or cracking. Protect stored stone from weather with waterproof, non-staining covers or enclosures allowing air to circulate around units. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Stone: As selected by the Interior Designer. Refer to Section 09001. B. Grout Latex-portiand cement grout, custom color to be selected by the Interior Designer. Refer to Section 09001. C. Provide anchors, dowels, cramps, and other devices required for anchorage of stone. D. Sealer: Penetrating sealer as recommended by stone supplier, to prevent staining from citric acid and alcohol. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Verify dimensions by field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication of stone. B. Coordinate fabrication schedule to avoid delay of work. 0407-06 STONE COUNTER TOPS Progress CD Set 04440-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 04440 VAIL, COLORADO STONE COUNTER TOPS C. Fabricate stone counter tops as indicated on reviewed shop drawings and in compliance with the recommendations of the Marble Institute of America (MIA). D. Provide holes cut or drilled for anchors, fasteners and supports as required to secure counter tops and splashes in place. E. Cut and back check as required for proper fit and clearance. F. Cut stone to size and dimensions indicated on reviewed shop drawings. Comply with fabrication tDierances of MIA. Dress joints straight and at 90-degree angle to face unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Do not use pieces with chips, cracks, voids, discoloration or other defects which might be visible or cause staining in finished work. B. Install stone with skilled installers; make necessary field cuts as required. C. Set stone in accordance with reviewed shop drawings. Provide anchors, supports, fasteners and other attach- ments necessary to secure stone in place. D. Shim and adjust as required for a level installation. E. Install stone with butted joints; grout lines shall be kept to a minimum. F. Install stone counter tops on neoprene setting blocks where recommended by fabricator or installer. 3.02 CLEANING A. Remove and replace stone pieces that are broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged. Provide new units where directed and install in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement B. Clean stone after installing; use procedures by stone fabricator. C. Provide protective covering where required. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 STONE COUNTER TOPS Progress CD Set 04440-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS.HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 04580 VAIL, COLORADO * MASONRY FIREPLACES SECTION 04580 - MASONRY FIREPLACES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for constructing masonry fireplaces. B. Related Sections: 1. Exterior rough stone for chimneys is specified in Section 04410. 2. Prefabricated manufactured fireplaces are specified in Section 10305. 3. Gas log righters are specified in Division 15. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit four samples of each type of exposed to view masonry unit. Include the full range of exposed color and texture expected in the completed work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Masonry fireplace construction shall be in accordance with IBC. B. Tolerances: 1. Variation from plumb of fines and surfaces of wags and chimneys shall not exceed 1/44nch in 10-feet, 3184nch in 20-feet, 1/24nch in 40-feet, and W4nch total. 2. Variation from plumb of external comers and similar vertical lines shall not exceed 1/4-inch in 20-feet, 1/2-inch in 40-feet, and 1/24nch total. 3. Variation from level of exposed lintels and similar horizontal lines shall not exceed 1/2-inch in 20-feet 4. Variations of cross-sectional dimensions and thickness of wags shall not exceed plus 112-inch or minus 1/4-inch. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A Do not erect masonry when ambient air temperature is warmer than 99-deg. F. in the shade and has a relative humidity of less than 40-percent, unless the Work is prevented from drying out for not less than 48-hours after installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04410. B. Reinforcing: ASTM A615, Grade 40 deformed bars. C. Firebrick: ASTM C27 fireciay refractory brick. Color and pattern as selected by the Architect or Interior Designer. 04-07-06 MASONRY FIREPLACES Progress CD Set 04580-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 04580 VAIL COLORADO MASONRY FIREPLACES D. Chimney / Flue / Flue Cap: Premanubetured insulated double-wall metal flue system, Simpson Dura-Vent or similar. E. Lintel: Galvanized steel angle, as specified in Section 05500. F. Damper. Minimum 12-gauge steel. G. Provide 1/2-inch mesh stainless steel spark arrestor, and anchorage straps. H. Provide masonry veneer anchors as required to anchor veneer. Anchors shall be corrugated metal ties not less than 22-gauge, 14nch wide and 74nches long, with one end crimped for attachment to substrate, hot- galvanized ASTM Al 53. 1. Masonry or applied veneer as selected by the Architect or Interior Designer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Construct masonry fireplaces and chimneys in accordance with IBC. B. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saw producing a sharp, unchipped edge. C. Instal exposed firebrick in pattern indicated or as directed by the Architect or Interior Designer. D. Reinforce masonry chimneys with not less than 4 steel reinforcing bars extending full height of chimney. Horizontally be at intervals not exceeding 184nches with minimum 1/4-inch diameter steel rods. Provide additional bars for chimneys exceeding 404nches in width as required by code. E. Anchor chimneys at each floor and ceiling line. Anchors shall consist of two 31164nch x 1=inch steel straps embedded at least 124nches into chimney and -bent around vertical reinforcing bars. Fasten to framing with two 1124nch bolts per strap. F. Areas of flues, throats, and dampers shall be as required by IBC. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 MASONRY FIREPLACES Progress CD Set 04580 - 2 NISHKIAN MENNINGER PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05120 VAIL, COLORADO STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural steel as indicated on Structural Drawings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A Section 05300: Metal Decking B. Section 05500: Metal Fabrications C. Section 07812: Fireproofing 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Codes and Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of the following; latest editions unless other specified. 1, Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, of the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). 2. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, of AISC. 3. Structural Welding Code - Steel, D1.1 of the American Welding Society (AWS). 4. Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A-325 or A490 Bolts, by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints. 5. Internal Building Code (ICB), 2003 Edition, including local amendments. 6. Safety regulations prescribed by State of Colorado. 1.04 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Testing Agency: An inspection and testing agency shall be retained by the Owner for testing and inspection, as required by drawings and specifications. Selected agency will follow requirements of ASTM E329, "Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel and Bituminous Materials as used in Construction.' 1. Materials and work shall be subject to inspection at fabricating plant, and building site. Material or workmanship not complying fully with drawings and specifications will not be accepted. Give Architect reasonable notice when ready for inspection. No additional compensation will be paid for any work required to prepare for testing and inspection. 2. Testing Agency shall inspect all shop and field welding. Welding and high strength bolting shall be performed under full-time inspection. Agency will fumish inspectors, and comply with regulations of the local Building Code and certify in writing, upon completion of the work, that welding and high strength bolting has been performed in accordance with drawings and specifications. 3. Testing Agency shall check bolt tightness on not less than 10 percent of bolts selected at random in each high strength bolt connection. Inspection procedure shall be as described in "Specifications for 05.12-06 STRUCTURAL STEEL Summary Permit Set 05120-1 PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS NISHKIAN MENNINGER SECTION 05120 VAIL, COLORADO STRUCTURAL STEEL High-Strength Bolts for Structural Joints" by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints. Testing Agency shall inspect all 100% full and partial penetration butt welds, which include, but are not limited to, column to column, column to plate, column to girder, and girder to girder connections by ultrasonic or other approved non-destructive tests. Multi-pass shop and field welds shall be continuously inspected. Materials Testing: 1. Steel shall be identified by heat or melt numbers and accompanied by mill analysis test reports. 2. Steel ordered from the mill shall be used without further local tests, provided an affidavit is given that materials conform to specifications requirements. In case of controversy, tensions and bend tests will be required, performed either locally or at the mill and in accordance with requirements for testing local stock. 3. Local stock structural steel may be used, provided one tension and one bend test is made for each 50 tons, or fractional part thereof, of such stock used in the work. Complete 4-sided surface inspection may be required. Each piece of high-strength local stock steel shall be tested and stamped. 4. Make arrangements to machine test required specimens under direction of Testing Agency; provide specimens of dimensions required by applicable ASTM Standard Specifications. C. Test and Inspection Costs: Cost of testing identified structural steel, except as specified hereunder, shall be paid by Owner. In the event that steel will be fabricated outside the State in which the project is being constructed, pay all transportation costs per diem living costs for inspection at fabricators' plants outside of the State. In the event that fabrication will take place in more than one shop location, pay all additional inspection costs resulting from fabrication. Contractor shall pay cost of testing and inspection of unidentified steel; cost of tests and inspections for all work and materials proved faulty; and all required retesting and inspection, and repairs. D. Ultrasonic Weld Testing: Ultrasonic testing shall be performed by a specifically trained, qualified technician, who shall operate equipment, examine welds and maintain a record of all welds examined, defects found and disposition of each defect. All defective welds shall be repaired and re-tested with ultrasonic equipment Initially, welds requiring ultrasonic testing shall be tested at rate of 100% in order to establish qualifications of each individual welder, minimum of 40 welds per welder. If rejectable defects occur in less than 5% of welds tested, 100% testing may be reduced to 25%. Percentage shall be calculated for each welder independently. When ultrasonic indications arising from weld root can be interpreted as either a weld defect or the backing strip, backing strip shall be removed at no additional cost to Owner, and if no root defect is visible the weld shall be re-tested. Ultrasonic instrumentation shall be calibrated to evaluate quality of welds in accordance with AWS D1.1, Section 6, Part C. 05-12-06 STRUCTURAL STEEL Summary Pemdt Set 05120 - 2 NISHKIAN MENNINGER PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05120 VAIL, COLORADO STRUCTURAL STEEL Cooperate with Testing Agency if other methods of inspections, for example, X-ray, gamma ray, magnetic particle, or dye penetrant, are deemed necessary by inspection agency for use on welds. Ultrasonic Material Testing: All column material within one foot (6 inches either side of a direct butt weld for girder flange connections) shall be ultrasonically tested for lamination in accordance with ASTM A578, Level II. Material in designated location shall be tested for laminations by ultrasonic means prior to fabrication, with written reports submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction. Rejectable defects discovered by ultrasonic means are defined as follows: Using suitable calibrated ultrasonic equipment, any recordable discontinuity causing complete loss of back reflection, and which cannot be encompassed with a 3-inch diameter circle, is unacceptable (Level Ii Standard of Acceptance). Should such flaws be detected subject to Architect's approval they may be repaired by welding. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication, assembly and erection details, welded connections with standard AWS welding symbols, sizes of members, fastenings, supports and anchors, patterns, clearances, holes, camber and necessary connections to work of other trades. Obtain approval before beginning fabrication or delivery. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. In general, material shall be of exact sizes, shapes, weight and kinds provided for on drawings and specifications. However, with written permission of Architect, members built up from plates may be substituted for rolled shapes, at no additional cost to Owner, provided physical properties of original member such as section modulus, moment of inertia, etc., are met, and provided welding inspection costs associated with substitute built- up member are furnished at no additional cost to Owner. B. Structural Steel, Plates, Shapes and Bars: New materials, conforming to ASTM standards as noted on drawings. Requirements for delivery shall conform to ASTM A6. C. High Strength Bolts and Washers: ASTM A325 or A490. D. Machine Bolts: ASTM A307 E. Anchor Bolts at Column Base Plates: ASTM A307 and A354 BD as shown. F. Arc-Welding Electrodes: Conforming to AWS D1.1 for filler metal requirement, and recommended by their manufacturers for position and other conditions of actual use. G. Steel Tubing: Cold formed, ASTM 500; Fy = 46 ksi. H. Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic, premixed, factory packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous; complying with CE CRD-C588. Grout shall attain a minimum compressive strength of 10,000 psi at 28 days. 05-12-06 STRUCTURAL STEEL Summary Permit Set 05120 - 3 NISHKIAN MENNINGER PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05120 VAIL, COLORADO STRUCTURAL STEEL Galvanizing: Hot dip process; ASTM A153, to average weight of 2.3 oz./sq. ft. and minimum weight of 2.0 oz. J. Shop Primer. Manufacturers or fabricators standard, fast curing, V.O.C. compliant, lead-free, "universal" primer, selected for good resistance to normal atmosphere corrosion and for compatibility with subsequent painting. K. Galvanizing Repair paint High zinc dust content paint for re-galvanizing paints in galvanized steel, complying with the SSPC-PAINT-20. 2.02 SHOP PAINTING A. General: Shop paint structural steel, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel, which is partially exposed on exposed portions and initial 2 inches of embedded areas only. Do not paint surfaces, which are to be welded or high-strength bolted with friction-type connections. 2. Do not paint surfaces, which are scheduled to receive sprayed-on fireproofing. 3. Apply 2 coats of paint to all structural steel except as noted. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows: 1. SP-1 "Solvent Cleaning" 2. SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning" C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance with manufacturers instructions and at a rate to provide dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use painting methods, which result in full coverage of joints, comers, edges and exposed surfaces. D. Field touch up shop-applied primer wherever damaged or bare, with same type shop primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Erect structural steel with proper equipment and qualified riggers. B. Actively cooperate with other trades and provide incidental welding, connections, etc., for securement of work of others to structural steel framing. C. Metal decking may be used as safety planking. Cooperate with metal decking contractor and hoist decking as required. Comply with all applicable safety rules and regulations. D. Erect temporary flooring, planking and scaffolding necessary in connection with erection of structural steel or support of erection machinery. Use of temporary floors shall be as required by municipal or state laws and governing safety regulations. 05-12-06 STRUCTURAL STEEL Summary Permit Set 05120 - 4 NISHKIAN MENNINGER PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05120 VAIL, COLORADO STRUCTURAL STEEL E. Replace any metal decking damaged by its use as a working platform at no additional cost to Owner. 3.02 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Erection tolerances for structural steel work shall be in accordance with latest AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 3.03 BOLTING A. High strength steel bolts shall be used where indicated. Fabrication and erection shall be in strict accordance with the latest edition of "Specifications for Assembly of Structural Joints Using High-Strength Steel Bolts", as approved by the Research Council on Riveted and bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. 3.04 WELDING A. Welding and welded joints shall be in accordance with AWS Standards. Work shall be performed by operators who have been qualified by test in accordance with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel", to perform type of work required for this project. B. Provide necessary templates and diagrams for setting of such anchor bolts in concrete forms. C. Be jointly responsible with others for proper locating and installing, and make good any deficiencies and errors. D. Setting of anchor bolts in hardened concrete necessitates drilled holes solidly grouted in place with epoxy grout. 3.05 SETTING AND GROUTING COLUMN BASE PLATES A. Set base plates to elevations indicated on drawings and place grout through grout holes provided in base plates where indicated. B. Provide forms at least one inch dear around edges of base plate, with top of form not less than one inch above bottom of base plate. C. Allow grout to rise above bottom of base plate, making sure that all voids under base plate are completely filled. D. The use of specified grout shall be in strict compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION 05-12-06 STRUCTURAL STEEL Summary Permit Set 05120 - 5 NISHKIAN MENNINGER PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05300 VAIL, COLORADO METAL DECKING SECTION 05300 - METAL DECKING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal decking and accessories complete, including all required flashings and cell closures, miscellaneous angle supports at columns and angle reinforcement at openings, and stud shear connectors. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03300: Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Section 05120: Structural Steel. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330. B. Shop Drawings and Erection Drawings: Show in detail all types, gages, locations and dimensions of openings, location and types of welds, number and spacing of stud shear connectors on each beam, and other pertinent data. Clearly mark or code units and erection drawings in such manner to permit ease of identification during erection and efficient sequence of erection. C. Mill Test Certificates: Submit to Architect for approval. D. Welding Data: Written procedures shah be submitted for each type and size of weld used, and shall be accompanied by independent laboratory test reports substantiating strength requirements for welds. 1.04 SHIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A Each shipment of metal decking shall be marked so as to positively identify each lot or heat for which mill tests have been performed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Metal Decking: Formed from sheet steel conforming to ASTM A653, Grade A, and having a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi. In no case shall unit design stress exceed minimum yield strength of steel divided by 1.65. Maximum working stress shall not exceed 20,000 psi. B. Galvanizing: Sheets shall have received before being formed a hot-dipped, zinc protective coating meeting or exceeding requirements of ASTM A924, Grade 60. Zinc coating shall show no flaking at points of bending. C. Stud Shear Connectors: Headed stud type, ASTM A108, cold finished carbon steel with dimensions complying with AISC specifications and as noted on plans. 05-12-06 METAL DECKING Summary Permit Set 05300 -1 PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS NISHKIAN MENNINGER SECTION 05300 VAIL, COLORADO METAL DECKING D. Flashing and Closures: Galvanized sheet steel as specified for decking, 12-gage minimum, unless noted otherwise. Angle Supports for Decking at Columns and at Openings: In compliance with applicable requirements of Section 05500 -Metal Fabrications. 2.02 FABRICATION Decking shall have at least a 2-inch wide bearing surface at each rib to ensure sufficient bearing and welding area on structural steel. Units shall be of sufficient length to extend over 3 or more spans, wherever possible. Units shall have welded or inter-locking edges to permit proper fastening to ensure transference of both lateral and vertical loads. Units shall be so formed that there is a gap between top surfaces of adjacent ribs of at least 2 inches, to provide sufficient space for working of concrete into open portion of deck. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Coordinate deck placement with erector of structural steel; provide same with necessary information as to load carrying ability of deck so that overloading and damage to decking does not occur. Deck shall be capable of withstanding normal light construction loads and traffic without being structurally damaged. Heavy loads and concentrated wheel loads from concrete carts, welding equipment, etc., shall be distributed by planking or other means as required. 3.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Metal decking units shall have simple span, non-composite working load capacity without shoring of concrete fill dead load plus 20 pounds per square foot and deflection shall not exceed L/I80 or 314 inch, whichever is smaller. If this deflection is exceeded, then shore up decking at mid-span. In general, manufacturer's shoring requirements shall be adhered to. B. Decking units shall have 150 psf simple span composite bad capacity to accommodate minimum of 3 inch, 120 pcf 3,000 psi concrete above the top of the deck ribs, without deflection greater than 0360. C. The load of any hanger shall not exceed 75 pounds. The total load from all hangers or a single hanger with adequate spreader plate on a deck unit shall not exceed 250 pounds. Do not place such loads within the middle half of deck spans. D. Comply with physical properties indicated. See drawings for sectional profiles, minimum section modulus and moment of inertia, depths, and minimum gages required. E. Composite Slab Construction: Decking designed for composite slab construction shall be formed with shear lugs to provide mechanical keys to transfer horizontal shear and to prevent vertical separation. Floor shall be provided with shear and hold-down lugs to achieve composite actions between units and concrete fill. Provide substantiating test data by an independent testing laboratory for Architect's approval. Ultimate design resisting shear shall be no less than 2,300 pounds per linear foot, and the allowable shear shall be based upon minimum safety factor of 2.0 on lest-verified ultimate load. 05-12-06 METAL DECKING Summary Permit Set 05300 - 2 PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS NISHKIAN MENNINGER SECTION 05300 VAIL, COLORADO METAL DECKING Composite Beam Construction: Furnish and install stud shear connectors as sized and where indicated on structural drawings. Shear value assigned to each connector shown is 9.5 kips. Provide equivalent shear capacity. In addition, where more than one shear connector is require per low flute for composite beam action, manufacturer's published reductions for grouping of studs must be followed, and number of shear connectors increased proportionately, at no additional cost to Owner. Only those decks full scale tested by an independent agency to establish system efficiently will be considered. G. Concrete fill over metal deck. Thickness of fill shown on plans is minimum required. Adjust thickness of fill and screeds as required to offset beam camber and deflection. Refer to Section 03300 for level tolerance. H. Vented Deck at Roof: 1. Provide vent slot up to 1-112% open area square feet. 3.03 ERECTION A. Install decking as per governing codes, drawings, requirements, and manufacturer's specifications and recommendations. B. Decking units shall be placed on supporting steel framework and adjusted to final position before being permanently fastened. Each unit shall be brought to 2-inch minimum bearing on supporting beams. C. If supporting beams are not in proper alignment or at proper level within steel tolerances permitted under Section 05120 - Structural Steel, the work shall be corrected before final placing of decking units. Proceeding with final work implies acceptance of conditions. D. Decking units shall be fastened to supporting steel as shown on Structural Drawings. Where two units abut, each unit shall be fastened to steel framing. All closures and flashings shall be tack-welded in place not more than two feet on center and shall be such as to completely prevent entry of concrete into cells, or leakage of concrete through floor. E. An overlap of male and female side joint laps of at least 5/8 inch shall be provided, and side joints shall be fastened with an approved gimping tool at not more than 18 inch centers continuously and starting at end of unit Should overlap be less than 5/8 inch, side lap shall be fastened by welds 314 inch long at 18 inches on centers, continuously and starting at end of unit F. Opening reinforcement shall be as detailed on drawings. Cutting of holes other than those detailed on drawings shall be done only as specifically approved by Architect Holes not shown on structural drawings shall be cut and reinforced in accordance with metal decking details, but shall be located and paid for by the trade requiring openings. In general, reinforcing is not required for holes less than 5 inches in diameter. See drawings for restrictions. G. Welding shall be done only by welders certified for welding in light gage metal; using materials and methods in strict accordance with recommendations of metal decking manufacturer. 05.12-06 METAL DECKING Summary Permit Set 05300 - 3 NISHKIAN MENNINGER PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05300 VAIL, COLORADO METAL DECKING 3.04 TESTS AND INSPECTION A. A testing agency selected by Architect will review mill test reports, weld procedures, qualification of welders and will inspect the welding during erection. Owner shall pay for costs of this service, excluding retests, qualification of welders and test of unidentified materials. B. Qualification of welders for stud shear connectors shall conform to AWS Structural Welding Code - Steel, D1.1-88. Such qualification procedures shall be performed prior to actual use on project. 3.05 CLEAN-UP A. After erection, remove metal cutting and construction debris from cells for entire length. Remove grease, oil and other foreign material. Leave deck and cells in proper condition for obtaining bond with concrete fill. B. Clean up base of all stud connectors as specified elsewhere herein. END OF SECTION 05-12-06 METAL DECKING Summary Permit Set 05300 - 4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05400 VAIL COLORADO COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 05400 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing the following: Exterior nonload-bearing steel stud wall framing assembly. B. Related Sections: Interior non-load bearing metal studs are specified in Section 09110. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. AISI Specification: Calculate structural characteristics of cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's'Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members' and the following: 1. Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures (CCFSS) Technical Bulletin, Vol. 2, No. 1, February 1993 'AISI Specification Provisions for Screw Connections'. B. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and erect cold-formed metal framing to withstand design loads within limits and under conditions required. 1. Design Loads: As required by IBC. 2. Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Lateral deflection range shall be between U600 and 1-1720. 3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subjected to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120-deg. F. 4. Design framing system to accommodate deflection of primary building structure and construction toler- ances, and to maintain clearances at openings. C. Design exterior wall framing to accommodate lateral deflection without regard to contribution of sheathing materials. D. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who assumes responsibility for engineering cold-formed metal framing by employing professional engineer to prepare design calculations, shop drawings, and other st uctural data and provide all services required to submit and satisfy the local governing agencies for plan check procedures and receiving all permits and approvals required for this portion of the work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacing, sizes, thickness, and types of cold-formed metal framing, fabrication, fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Stow reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment of other work. 1. For cold-formed metal framing specified to comply with specified design loading, include structural analysis data sealed and signed by a licensed professional engineer who was responsible for its preparation. Clearly indicate all loads imposed on the primary building structure. B. Welder Certificates: Signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with specified requirements. C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in Quality Assurance Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed Projects with Project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information. 04-07-06 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Progress CD Set 05400-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05400 VAIL COLORADO COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed cold-formed metal framing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency shall demonstrate to Architects satisfaction, base on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E699, that fi has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing specified without delaying the work. C. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D IA 'Structural Welding Code - Steer and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steer. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-resistance-rated assemblies are meted, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that tested as part of an assembly for fire resistance in accordance with ASTM E119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory' or by Warnock Hersey. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer licensed to practice in the State of Colorado, experienced in providing engineering services of the kind specified, that have resulted in the installation of cold- formed metal framing similar to this Project in material, design, and extent 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A Protect metal framing units from rusting and damage. B. Store off ground in a dry ventilated space or protect with suitable waterproof covering. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A American Studco, Inc., Angeles Metal Systems, California Metal Systems, Inc., Consolidated Fabricators Corp., Design Shapes in Steel, Dietrich Industries, Inc., Knorr Steel Framing Systems, Unimast, Inc., United Construction Supply, Western Metal Lath Co. or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A446, zinc coated according to ASTM A525, G60 coating designation. 2.02 WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs of web depths indicated, with Upped flanges. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As required for spedfied performance requirements. 2. Flange Width: As required for specified performance requirements. 3. Web: Punched. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, unpunched, of web depths indicated, with straight flanges. 1. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As required for specified performance requirements. 2. Flange Width: Manufacturer's standard deep flange. 0407-06 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Progress CD Set 05400 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05400 VAIL COLORADO COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 2.03 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members. B. Provide accessories, including but not dmited to the following: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid backing. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Gusset plates. 5. Deflection track with vertical slide dips. 6. Stud kickers and girts. 7. Reinforcement plates. 2.04 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A36, zinc coated by the hot-dip process according to ASTM Al 23. B. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a bad equal to 5 times the design load, as determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Powder-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times the design bad, as determined by testing in accordance with ASTM El 190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant coated, seff-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws. Low profile head beneath sheathing; manufacturer's standard head elsewhere. E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20, with dry film containing a minimum of 94-percent zinc dustby content B. Non-metallic, Non-shrink Grout: Pre-mixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C1107, with fluid consistency and a 30-minute working time. 2.06 FABRICATION A. General: Cold-fomned metal framing may be shop or field fabricated at Contractors option. Shop or field fabrication shall comply with the following requirements. B. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturers recommendations. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies in jig templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut 3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening. a. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 0407-06 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Progress CD Set 05400 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05400 VAIL COLORADO COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to cold-formed metal framing manufact- urer's instructions with screw penetrating joined members by not less than 3 exposed screw threads. 4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening in accor- dance with manufacturers recommendations. C. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or distortion. D. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/84nch in 10-feet and as follows: Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8-inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finish materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square to er- anoe of 1l8-inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements, including installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cold-formed metal framing. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Before sprayed-on fireproofing is applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members to receive sprayed-on fireproofing. B. After sprayed-on fireproofing has been applied, remove only as much fireproofing as required to complete installation without reducing thickness of fireproofing. C. Grout bearing surfaces uniform and level to ensure full contact of bearing flanges or track webs on supporting concrete or masonry constriction. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation or it may be field assembled. B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's recommendations. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing, no not torch cut 2. Fasten cold-bored metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and instal according to manufacturers instructions with screws penetrating joined members by not less than 3 exposed screw threads. C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. D. Provide temporary bracing and leave in place until framing is permanently stabilized. 04-07-06 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Progress CD Set 05400-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05400 VAIL, COLORADO COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. Fasten reinforcement plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. G. Erection Tolerances: Install coWformed metal framing to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from plumb, level, and true to line of 118-inch in 10-feet. 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/84nch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.04 LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Securely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks. Fasten both flanges to studs at bop and bottom track. Space studs as required to comply with specified performance requirements. C. Set studs plumb, except as required for diagonal bracing or for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces. D. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated on the Shop Drawings, to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. For curtain wall infill conditions, install deflection track or other means to accommodate vertical deflection and anchor to building structure. 2. Where studs bypass structure, connect studs with vertical slide dips to continuous angles or supplementary framing anchored to building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows not more than 48-inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Install additional row of horizontal bridging in wall stud beneath deflection track when wall studs are not fastened to an additional top track. 2. Bridging: Combination of flat, steel-sheet straps of width and thickness indicated on Shop Drawings and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, dip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girls to provide a complete and stable curtain wall framing system. 3.05 FABRICATED WALL PANEL INSTALLATION A. Install fabricated wan panels and securely anchor to supporting structure. B. Erection Tolerances: Bolt or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true to line joints. 1. Maximum variation in plane and true position between prefabricated assemblies shall not exceed 1/16- inch. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by the Owner will perform flail quality control testing. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to inspection and testing. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. 0407.06 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Progress CD Set 05400-5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05400 VAIL COLORADO COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. 3.07 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repair. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer to ensure that cold formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Progress CD Set 05400-6 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05500 VAIL, COLORADO METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing metal fabrications made from steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes, pipes and castings not a part of structural steel or specified in other Sections, including but not limited to the following items: 1. Pit cover plates. 2. Miscellaneous steel framing for partition supports. 3. Handrail brackets. 4. Painted steel guardrails, railings and handrails. 5. Elevator guide rail support brackets. 6. Steel pipe bollards. 7. Stair nosings. 8. Bollards. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. B. Rel Bar gratings. Rooftop snow fences. Custom interior and exterior metal framing brackets for heavy timber construction. Decorative metal chimney screens. Decorative metal bar window grates. Miscellaneous angles, plates, bars, rods and other items not specified in other Sections but shown or required to complete the work. ated Sections: 1. Prefabricated steel stair systems are specified in Section 05511. 2. Ladders are specified in Section 05515. 3. Prefinished railings are specified in Section 05521. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Include information on cast nosings, treads, steel floor plate, paint products, and grout. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Stow anchorage and accessory items. Furnish templates for anchors and bolts installed under other Sections. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing metal fabrications similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the work. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1, D1.2, and D1.3 as applicable. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved. 04-07-06 METAL FABRICATIONS Progress CD Set 05500-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05500 VAIL, COLORADO METAL FABRICATIONS 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule to avoid delay of work. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Mount handrails only on gypsum board assemblies reinforced to receive anchors, and where the location of concealed anchor plates has been marked for the installer. B. Painting: Items specified in this Section as having a shop applied prime coat will be field finished as specified in Section 09900. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 FERROUS METALS A. General: For fabrication of metal work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36. C. Steel Tubing: Cold formed, ASTM A500; or hot-rolled, ASTM A501. D. Structural Steel Sheet: Hot rolled, ASTM A570; or cold-rolled ASTM A611, Class 1. E. Galvanized Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A446, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A525, G90 coating designation. F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53; type and grade selected by fabricator, black finish unless galvanizing is indicated or specified; standard weight, schedule 40, unless otherwise indicated. G. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A48, Class 30. H. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A47, grade selected by fabricator. 2.02 FASTENERS A. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A, with hex nuts, ASTM A563, and flat washers. B. Machine Screws: ANSI B18.6.3. C. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1. D. Wood Screws: Flathead, carbon steel, ANSI 818.6.1. E. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ANSI B18.22.1. F. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ANSI B18.21.1. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal t0 6 times the bad imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to 4 times the bad imposed when installed in concrete, determined in accordance with ASTM E448. 2.03 GROUT A. Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Grout: Euclid Chemical Co. 'Euco N-S Grout", L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 'Crystex', Master Builders Technologies, Inc. 'Masterfiow 928 and 713" or approved equal. 0407-06 METAL FABRICATIONS Progress CD Set CM-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05500 VAIL, COLORADO METAL FABRICATIONS 2.04 PAINT A. Metal Primer. SSPC 20, Type 2. Interior and Exterior Exposure: Tnemec Series FD88 Azeron Primer or approved equal VOC compliant rust4nhibibve alkyd primer. 2. Steel Tubing Handrails, Railings, and Guardrails: Tnemec Series 69 Hi-Built Epoxoline II or approved equal polyamtdoamine epoxy. 3. Exposed to view items to be field painted shall be primed with a primer compatible with final finish coats specified in Section 09900. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel; Rust-Oleum Corp. 'Z'inc-Rich Cold Galvanizing Compound", Tnemec 90.93, ZRC Chemical Products Div. of NorWd Corp. "ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound" or approved equal. 2.05 MANUFACTURED ITEMS A. Abrasive Stair Nosings: Steel Pan Stairs: American Safety Tread Co., Inc. Type 9511, Wooster Products, Inc. "Spectra" Type WP3J or approved equal, color as selected by the Architect. Provide contrasting color at top and bottom treads. 2. Cast-in-Place Concrete Stairs: American Safety Tread Co., Inc. Type 3511, Wooster Products, Inc. "Spectra" Type WP3C or approved equal, color as selected by the Architect. Provide contrasting color at top and bottom treads. 2.06 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Workmanship: 1. Use materials of size and thickness indicated or required to produce strength and durability in finished product for use intended. 2. Work to dimensions indicated, 3. Form exposed work true to fine and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight, sharp edges. 4. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1132-inch, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Form bent-metal comers to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. 6. Weld comers and seams continuously, complying with AWS recommendations. At exposed connections, grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. Welds shall be imperceptible in the finished work. 7. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use Phillips flat- head countersunk screws or bolts for exposed fasteners, unless tamperproof security screws are indicated. 8. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware and similar items. B. Galvanizing: Provide zinc coating for items indicated or specified to be galvanized, as follows: 1. ASTM A153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. 2. ASTM A123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel products made of uncoated roped, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0.02994nch thick and heavier. 04.07.06 METAL FABRICATIONS Progress CD Set 05500- 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05500 VAIL, COLORADO METAL FABRICATIONS C. Fabricate joints exposed to the weather to exclude water or provide weep holes. D. Shop Painting: 1. Shop paint miscellaneous metal work, except members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces and edges to be field welded, and galvanized surfaces. 2. Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before applying shop coat. Clean off heavy rust and loose mill sale in accordance with SSPC SP-2, SP-3, or SP-7. 3. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SP-1. 4. Brush or spray on primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, at a rate of 2.0-mils thickness for each coat. 5. Apply one shop coat to fabricated metal items, except apply 2-coats to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish from the first 6. Primer on exposed to view items to be field painted shall be smooth and suitable for application of final finish coats specified in Section 09900. 7. Apply a heavy coat of bituminous paint, compounded for application in 30-mil coat, to metal surfaces in contact with concrete, masonry and dissimilar metals. Do not apply on exposed surfaces. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS A. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: 1. Provide miscellaneous framing and supports not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work. 2. Fabricate to sizes, shapes and profiles shown or required. 3. Fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. 4. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. 5. Furnish integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. 6. Finish: Shop primed. B. Painted Steel Tube Railings and Handrails: Fabricate to design, dimensions and details indicated. Maximum member size shall be 1-1124nch O.D. Railings and handrails shall comply with ADA requirements. 1. Interconnect railing and handrail members by butt welding or welding with internal connectors. 2. Provide coped joints at tee and cross sections. 3. Form simple and compound curves by bending tubing in pttgs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration. Maintain cylindrical cross-section of tube throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting or deforming exposed surfaces. 4. Provide wall returns at ends of wall mounted handrails. 5. Close exposed ends of tubing by welding 311641nch steel plate in place or by using prefabricated fittings. 6. Flanges, Fittings and Anchors: Provide end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings and anchors for interconnections of tubing and attachment of railings and handrails to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry. 0407-06 METAL FABRICATIONS Progress CD Set 05500 - 4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05500 VAIL, COLORADO METAL FABRICATIONS 7. Pipe Sleeves: Provide galvanized pipe sleeves not less than 6-inches long with an inside diameter not less than 1/24nch greater than the outside diameter of pipe or tube. a. Provide steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeve, width and length not less than 14nch greater than outside diameter of sleeve. b. Provide friction 9 removable covers designed to keep sleeves dean and hold top edge of sleeve 1 /24nch below finished surface of concrete. 8. Finish: Shop primed for field finishing as specified in Section 09900. C. Stair Railings and Handrails: Comply with specified requirements for steel tube railings and handrails. Connect railing posts to stair framing by welding. Maximum member size shall be 1-1/2-inch O.D. Railings and handrails shall comply with ADA requirements. Shop prime for field painting as specified in Section 09900. D. Bollards: Fabricate bollards from galvanized steel pipe of diameter and height indicated. Embed in concrete footings, fill with concrete and dose top end by welding a 1/44nch steel plate in place or provide a smooth concrete domed cap. Bollards will be field painted as specified in Section 09900. E. Bar Gratings: 1. Provide steel bar gratings using bars of type, material, sizes, spacing, and construction indicated. 2. Comply with applicable requirements of National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) 'Metal Bar Grating Manual'. 3. Type: Welded. 4. Traffic Surface: Striated. 5. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 6. Provide removable grating sections with end-bearing bars for each panel, 4-saddle dip anchors designed to fit over 2-bearing bars, and 4-stud bolts with washers and nuts. 7. Notch gratings for penetrations. Layout units to allow removal without disturbing items penetrating grating. 8. Provide banding for openings in grating separated by more than 4-bearing bars, of same material and size as bearing bars. 9. Weld stud bolts to receive saddle clip anchors to supporting steel members. F. Rooftop Snow Fences: Fabricate from miscellaneous steel plates and pipe. Provide welded end caps at exposed ends and weld snow fence pipe to stanchion supports. Finish with hot dip galvanized finish for field painting as specified in Section 09900. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate and furnish anchors, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchors, such as concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors. 0407A METAL FABRICATIONS Progress CD Set 05500-5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05500 VAIL, COLORADO METAL FABRICATIONS 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required. 2. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: a. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. b. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction. 3. Fit exposed connections together forming fight hairline joints. a. Weld connections not shop welded. b. Grind exposed joints smooth and imperceptible, and touch-up shop paint coat. C. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and intended for bolted or screwed field connections. 4. Field Welding: Comply with AWS for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 5. Install prefabricated items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Setting Loose Plates: 1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve surface bond. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates. 2. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices. 3. Tighten anchor bolts after the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed. 4. Cut-off protruding ends of wedges flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout. 5. Use metallic non-shrink grout in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use non-metallic non-shrink grout in exposed locations. 6. Pads grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure no voids remain. C. Gratings: 1. Weld non-removable units t0 supporting members or framework. 2. Secure removable units to supporting members or framework with galvanized machine screws, or manufacturer's standard saddle or dip units. D. Steel Tube Railings and Handrails: 1. Adjust railings prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. 2. Space posts as indicated. 3. Plumb posts in each direction. 04-07-06 METAL FABRICATIONS Progress CD Set 05500 - 6 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05500 VAIL, COLORADO METAL FABRICATIONS 4. Anchor posts in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After posts are inserted in sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with non-shrink, non-metallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. 5. Anchor posts to steel with steel oval flanges, angle type or floor type as required by conditions, welled to posts and bolted to steel supporting members. 6. Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with round steel flanges welded to rad ends and andaW into wall construction with lead expansion shields and bolts. Anchor rail ends to steel with steel oval or round flanges welded to rail ends and bolted to structural steel members. 8. Provide removable railing sections where indicated. Furnish slip-fit metal socket or sleeve for casting into concrete. Locate sleeves to match post spacing. 9. Secure handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings. a. Locate brackets as indicated. b. Secure wall brackets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Stair Nosings: Install with anchorage complying with manufacturer's recommendations. F. Bollards: Anchor bollards in concrete with preset pipe sleeves. After bollards have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between bollard and sleeve solid with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Touch-Up Painting: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0-mils. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and spot prime with specified primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 2.5-mils. END OF SECTION 0407-06 METAL FABRICATIONS Progress CD Set 05500_ 7 NISHKIAN MENNINGER PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05510 VAIL, COLORADO MISCELLANEOUS METALS SECTION 05510 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Structural steel framing members, pipe columns, tube columns, miscellaneous metals, etc., not included in other sections, and with required bracing, welds and fasteners. B. Bolts, nuts, washers, angles, channels, inserts, straps, connectors, plates hangers, fie-downs, etc. C. Shop coat painting. D. Welding of be plates. E. All fabricated connectors to be embedded in Architectural Precast Concrete. F. Metal stair framing. 1.02 WORK FUNISHED BUT INSTALLED BY OTHERS A. Section 03300: Anchorages Cast-in-Concrete 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 05120: Structural Steel B. Section 05400: Cold-Formed Metal framing 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel B. ASTM A53 - Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe C. ASTM A307 - Machine Bolts D. ASTM A500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes E. ASTM A501- Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing F. AWS D1.1. - Structural Welding Code. ' G. AISC - Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings t r H. FS TT-P-31- Paint, Oil, Iron Oxide, Ready Mix, Read and Brown i 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions. B. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing and locations of structural members, connections, attachments, fasteners, cambers. i C. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 05-12-06 Summary Permit Set MISCELLANEOUS METALS 05510-1 t i t i` NISHKIAN MENNINGER PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05510 VAIL, COLORADO MISCELLANEOUS METALS PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36 B. Structural Tubing: ASTM A501 C. Structural Pipe Column: ASTM A53, Grade B, or ASTM A501. D. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A325, ASTM A307 (See plans for location.) E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. F. Primer: FS TT-P-31, red, brown 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC Specification. B. Conform to Chapter 17, IBC current edition. C. Welding: Welder qualification requirements, welding procedures, etc., according to AWS D1.1. Employ only certified welders. All butt welds shall be full penetration welds unless otherwise noted. All welds on hand and guardrails are to be ground smooth. Tie plates shall be welded as shown on the drawings. D. Holes for bolts or rivets shall be punched or drilled 1/16" larger than nominal bolt Holes in column base plates may be 5/16" larger than anchor bolt diameter only if washer, field welded to the base plate, are provided under the nuts. E. Sheet shims or leveling nuts shall be used to level columns. 2.03 FINISH A. Clean, prepare and prime all steel work. Do not prime surfaces to be field welded or in contact with concrete. B. All exterior exposed items, including fasteners, to be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM designation A-12-, A-153 field touch-up where required by zinc metalizing only, minimum 1.25 oz./sq. ft galvanized coating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC Specification. B. Make provision for erection loads and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. 05-12-06 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Swnmary Permit Set 05510 - 2 NISHKIAN MENNINGER PROJECT #7083 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05510 VAIL, COLORADO MISCELLANEOUS METALS C. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop-primed, galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. Use a primer consistent with shop coat. Use primer recommended for galvanized surfaces. E. Bolting: Securely bolt or weld the work as erection progresses to provide for all dead load, lateral forces and erection stresses. END OF SECTION 05-12-06 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Summary Permit Set 05510 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 05511 PREFABRICATED STEEL STAIR SYSTEMS SECTION 05511- PREFABRICATED STEEL STAIR SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes the following: 1. Prefabricated metal stair systems. 2. Rails, anchors, supports and other accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Concrete for field-poured treads and landings is specified in Section 03300. 2. Miscellaneous framing fabrications are specified in Section 05500. 3. Feld-applied paint finish is specified in Section 09900. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with applicable code requirements and the following criteria. In case of conflict, the more stringent requirements shall govern. B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Stairs shall withstand the following structural bads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of materials, including anchors and connections. Apply each bad b produce the maximum stress in each component: 1. Treads and Platforms of Metal Stairs: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of 100-Ib/sf and concentrated load of 3004bf applied on an area of 4-square inches. Concentrated and uniform loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from loads specified in addition to stresses resulting from railing system loads. 3. Limit deflection of treads, platforms and framing members to L/240 or Yrinch, whichever is less. C. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Handrails and railings shall withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of materials, including handrails, railings, anchors and connections. 1. Top Rail of Guardrail: Capable of withstanding a concentrated bad of 2004bf applied in any direction and a uniform bad of 50-IM/R applied in any direction. Concentrated and uniform bads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Product Data: Manufacturer's product information and installation manual. B. Shop Drawings: Stair plans, elevations, details, methods of installation and anchoring. 1. Show members, sizes and thickness, anchorage locations and accessory items. 2. Furnish setting diagrams for anchorage installation as required. 04-07-06 PREFABRICATED STEEL STAIR SYSTEMS Progress CD Set 05511-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL COLORADO SECTION 05511 PREFABRICATED STEEL STAIR SYSTEMS 3. Shop drawings shall include calculations stamped by a structural engineer registered in the State of Colorado. C. Verification Samples: For each finished tread product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual product, finish, and patterns. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacture shall have a minimum of 10-years experience in the design, engineering and fabrication of steel stairs, and shall offer these tum-key services to complete the work of this Section. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions of International Building Code (IBC), ADAAG and ANSI A117.1 as applicable for stairs and handrails. C. Welting: Perform shop and field welding in accordance with applicable recommendations of the American Welding Society. Use only welders who have been certified by AWS D1.1 testing within one year of contract date. D. Tolerances: Coordinate fabrication and installation of stair and railing systems with adjacent building construction and verify critical dimensions to ensure accurate installation. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver stair and rail components in manufacturers pre-bundled protective wrapping, clearly labeled for stair type and location in building. B. Storage and Protection: Store stair and rail components above ground, protected from exposure to the elements and from physical damage caused by other construction activities. Rusted, bent, warped or otherwise damaged units will not be accepted. 1.06 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Field verify floor to floor and horizontal dimensions of spaces where stairs will be installed prior to fabrication of stairs under this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED ANUFACTURERS A. Sharon Companies Ltd. or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36: B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B. C. Steel Tubing: 1. Structural Use: ASTM A500, Grade B or C. 2. Non-Structural Use: ASTM A513, hot rolled or coiled rolled (mill option). 04-07 06 PREFABRICATED STEEL STAIR SYSTEMS 05511 Progress CD Set - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05511 VAIL, COLORADO PREFABRICATED STEEL STAIR SYSTEMS D. Steel Sheet: 1. Structural Use: ASTM A570 (hot rolled) or A366 (cold rolled). 2. Non-Structural Use: ASTM A569 (hot rolled) or A366 (cold rolled). E. Fasteners and Accessories: Provide necessary anchor bolts, dip angles, hanger rods and other hardware, accessories and incidental materials required for complete installation of stairs and rails. F. Welding Materials: Conform to AWS code and AWS filler metal specifications for material being welded. G. Primer. Acrylic Latex rust4nhibitive primer containing less than 1.0-lb/gal volatile organic compounds (VOC), certified to be compatible with finish coats specified in section 09900. H. Concrete Materials and Reinforcement: Comply with the applicable requirements of Section 03300. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, concrete shall have a minimum design strength of 4,000-psi in treads and 3,000-psi in landings. 2.03 FABRICATION A General: 1. Use same material and finish as parts being joined, except use stainless steel between dissimilar metals and non-corrosive fasteners at exterior connections or joints. 2. Provide fasteners of sufficient strength to support connected members and loads, and to develop full strength of parts fastened or connected. 3. Construct stairs and rails with all components necessary for support and anchorage, and to provide a complete installation. 2.04 STAIR AND RAIL SYSTEM A. Provide prefabricated, pre-engineered straight run stair and landing system, consisting of hot rolled steel sheet treads, risers and landings. Stringers shall be steel channel with side mounted prefabricated railings. 1. Stringers: Minimum thickness or gauge as determined by structural design calculations, structural grade steel channel. 2. Risers: Closed riser, minimum 14-gauge hot-rolled mild steel sheet, sloped maximum 1-1/2-inches and conforming to ADAAG nosing requirements. 3. Treads: Concrete pan system (field poured) tread pans shall be minimum 14-gauge or as determined by design calculations. Pan depth shall be 1-1/2-inches. Exposed welds from the bottom side of flight assemblies will not be allowed. Welds shall be from topside of tread pans as recommended by manufacturer. Refer to Section 03300 for concrete design requirements and field finish of treads. 4. Mid Landings: Minimum 11-gauge hot-rolled mild steel sheets, formed for a minimum 34nches concrete fill, with 12-gauge channel supports and bracing welded to perimeter frame at 124nches O.C. 5. Fasteners and Supports: Sized by the Manufacturer to meet the structural design criteria. If hanger rod connections are applicable to any of the landing connections, they shall be a minimum of 518- inch diameter steel rod, actual size based on stair load. 007.06 PREFABRICATED STEEL STAIR SYSTEMS Progress CD Set 05611-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05511 VAIL, COLORADO PREFABRICATED STEEL STAIR SYSTEMS B. Rail System: Manufacturer's standard welded steel tube railing system complying with the following: Raps: 1-1/2-4inch diameter by minimum 13-gauge round steel tube, continuous multi-strand type, equally spaced not more than 3-15116-inches dear between strands, and with a minimum extension per code at top and bottom risers. Wrap rail continuously past space between flights to form guardrail as indicated and required by code. Terminate rail ends with radiused returns. Provide not less than 1-1124nches clear between rail and wall. 2. Rail Posts: 1-1/24nches square by 11-gauge tubing. Rail posts shall fasten to side of plate stringers. 3. Fabrication: a. Use preformed or prefabricated bends. b. Butt weld tee and cross intersections in tubing; cope and weld intersections in pipe. Miter elbows. C. Mechanically fasten internal sleeves and fittings. d. Provide minimum 3116-inch welded steel plate closures or hemispherical closure fittings on all exposed rail ends. C. Wall Handrails: Match stair handrails. Provide manufacturer's standard pressed steel wall brackets with anchors suitable for supporting construction. D. Tread Construction: Comply with details indicated on the Drawings and the following. Provide manufacturer's standard tread of the following type. Field-Poured Concrete Treads: 1-1/2-inch pan type treads for field-poured concrete. E. Barrier Gates: Manufacturer's standard swing gate assembly with steel spring hinges and rubber bumper between barrier/gate assembly and rail post. 2.05 SHOP CLEANING AND FINISHING A. Rails and Stair Components: Remove oil, grease, dirt, mill scale, rust, corrosion products, oxides, paint or other foreign matter from surface of steel in accordance with SSPC-SP3, 'Power Tod Cleaning.' B. Shop Primer. Immediately after shop fabrication and cleaning, spray-apply primer to a minimum dry film thickness as recommended by primer manufacture, but not less than 2.0-mils. Apply one coat hi-solids red oxide anti corrosive primer meeting federal specifications TT-664, TT-P-636, and SSPC1364. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates and adjacent construction have been properly oonstructed. Verify structural framing, enclosures, weld plates, blocking, and size and location of pockets. B. If unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, notify Architect in writing. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Notify Architect of any detail, design or tolerance deviations as noted or drawn on stair shop drawing. 007-06 PREFABRICATED STEEL STAR SYSTEMS Progress CD Set 05511-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 05511 PREFABRICATED STEEL STAIR SYSTEMS 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install stairs, landings and handrails in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install square, plumb, straight, and true to line and level, with neatly fitted joints and intersections. 1. Welds in area of travel shall be ground smooth. 2. Do not cut or alter structural components without written authorization. 3. Field welding and joining shall conform to AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3 requirements. 4. Installation shall be secure and rigid. 5. Landing and flights property spaced and within manufacturer's tolerance. Set railing level and uniformly spaced. 6. Attach rail post to stringers and install wall railing per approved shop drawings. 7. Grind exposed welds smooth and touch up shop-primed areas with same primer as used by manufacturer. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touch-up field welds and abraded areas by application of same coating used for shop primer. B. Repair or replace damaged components. C. After stairs are installed, remove construction debris and rubbish from area. Clean surface of exposed rail and stairs with wet cloth or mop. Leave stair system ready for finish painting specified in Section 09900. END OF SECTION 0407-06 PREFABRICATED STEEL STAIR SYSTEMS Progress CD Set 05511-5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05515 VAIL. COLORADO LADDERS SECTION 05515 - LADDERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section desathes the requirements for providing the following types of ladders: 1. Prefabricated aluminum ladders at roof hatches. 2. Steel ladders at elevator pit B. Related Sections: 1. Metal fabrications are specified in Section 05500. 2. Roof hatches are specified in Section 07724. . 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections and details of components and connections. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ladders shag comply with OSHAIANSI A14.3 standards. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ALUMINUM LADDERS A. Rungs: Manufacturer's standard section, minimum 184nches long, formed from tubular or round aluminum extrusions, serrated on all sides. Rungs shall withstand a 1,000-pound load without failure. Rungs shag be connected to side rags with rivets. B. Side Rails: Minimum.125-tnch thick channels, 34nches wide. C. Mounting Brackets: Minimum .125-inch thick. D. Finish: Mill finish aluminum. E. Fasteners Sme and type standard with manufacturer, same metal as fastened metal, except use stainless steel for fastening aluminum components. 2.02 STEEL LADDERS A. Comply with the requirements of ANSI A14.3, except as otherwise indicated. B. Side Rails: 1/24nch x 2-1/2-inch continuous structural steel flat bar with eased edges, spaced 184nches apart C. Rungs: 3/4-inch solid structural steel bar, spaced 12-inches on center. D. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 04-07-06 LADDERS Progress CD Set 05515-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL. COLORADO SECTION 05515 LADDERS E. Support at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more than 5'-0" on center. F. Use welded or bolted steel brackets, designed for adequate support and anchorage, and to hold the ladder dear of the wall surface with a minimum of 7-inch clearance to centerline of rungs. G. Extend rails 42-inches above top rung, and return rails to wall or structure unless other secure handholds are provided. H. If adjacent structure does not extend above the top rung, goose-neck the extended rails back to the structure. 1. Provide non-slip surface on the top of each rung. J. Finish: Shop primed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners for securing to in-place construo- bon. B. Instal ladders accurately in location, alignment and elevation, and plumb. END OF SECTION J J 0407.06 LADDERS Progress CD Set 05515 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05521 VAIL, COLORADO PREFINISHED RAILINGS SECTION 05521- PREFINISHED RAILINGS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes prefinished aluminum railing systems. B. Related Sections: Painted steel railings and handrails are specified in Section 05500. 2. Exterior wood railings are specified in Section 06401. 1.02 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Engineer, fabricate, and install railing systems to withstand the following structural bads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials for railing systems, anchors, and connections. Apply each bad to produce the maximum stress in each of the respective components comprising handrails and railing systems. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the following bads applied as indicated: a. Concentrated load of 200-lbf applied at any point and in any direction. b. Uniform load of 504bf per linear ft. applied horizontally and concurrently with uniform bad of 1004bf per linear ft applied vertically downward. C. Concentrated load need not be assumed to act concurrently with uniform loads. 2. Handrails Not Searing as Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following loads: a. Concentrated bad of 200-lbf applied at any point and in any direction. b. Uniform load of 504bf per linear ft. applied in any direction. C. Concentrated and uniform bads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infll Area of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of 2004bf applied to one sq. fL at any point in the system including panels, intermediate rails, balusters, or other elements composing the infill area. a. Above bad need not be assumed to act concurrently with loads on top rails of railing systems in determining stress on guard. B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of handrails and railings to prevent budding, opening up of joints, overstressing of components, connections and other detrimental effects. Base design calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat bss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120-deg F. ambient; 180-deg F. material surfaces. 0407.06 PREFINISHED RAILINGS Progress CD Set 05521-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05521 VAIL COLORADO PREFINISHED RAILINGS 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of handrails and railings including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of work. 1. Where installed products are indicated to comply with required design loading, include structural computations, material properties, and other information needed for structural analysis that has been signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. B. Samples for verification purposes of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on components indicated below that are of the same thkkness and metal indicated for final unit of work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, thdWe sample sets showing full range of variations expected. 64nch4ong sections of each distinctly different linear railing member inducting top rails, posts, and balusters. 2. Fittings and brackets. 3. Welded connections. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Engineering Responsibility: Engineer railing systems by qualified professional engineer legally authorized to practice in the State of Colorado. 1.05 STORAGE A. Store railing systems in dean, dry location, away from uncured concrete and masonry, protected against damage of any kind. Cover with waterproof paper, tarpaulin, or polyethylene sheeting; allow for air circulation inside the covering. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Field Measurements: Check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 METALS A. General: Provide metal forms and types that comply with requirements of referenced standards and that are free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in the finished unit Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discoloration, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, with not less than the strength and durability properties of the alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form requited: 1. Extruded Bar and Tube: ASTM B221, alloy 6063T5lT52. 2. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B429, 6063-T51T52. 0407-06 PREFINISHED RAILINGS Progress CD Set 05521-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05521 VAIL, COLORADO PREFINISHED RAILINGS 3. Drawn Seamless Tube: ASTM B210, 6063-T832. 4. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B209, 6061-T6. 5. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM 13247, 6061-T6. 6. Castings: ASTM B26, A356-T6. 2.02 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. "Crystex", Master Builders "Mastelflow, 713", W.R. Meadows, Inc. "Sealtight 588", Sonnebom Building Products Div. "Sonogrout" or approved equal, premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout. 2.03 PAINT A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC•Paint 12 except containing no asbestos fibers. B. Zinc Chromate Primer. FS TT-P-645. 2.04 WELDING MATERIALS, FASTENERS, AND ANCHORS A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for strength and compatibility in fabricated items. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of the type, grade, and class required to produce connections that are suitable for anchoring railing to supporting construction, and capable of withstanding design loadings. Provide fasteners fabricated from type 304 stainless steel. C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: Use fasteners of same basic metal as the fastened metal. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined. 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnection of handrail and railing components and for their attachment to other work, except where otherwise indicated. D. Cast-In-Place and Post Installed Anchors in Concrete: Provide anchors fabricated from corrosb resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, bad imposed within a safety factor of 4. 2.05 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railing systems to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thidmess of hollow members, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than those required to support structural bads. B. Preassemble railing systems in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassernbiy and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross-section of pipe or tube throughout entire bend without budding, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces. 44-07-06 PREFINISHED RAILINGS Progress CD Set 05521-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05521 VAIL COLORADO PREFINISHED RAILINGS D. Welded Connections: Fabricate railing systems for connection of members by welding. For connections made during fabrication, weld comers and seams continuously to comply with the following: Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. E. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnection of railing members to other construction. F. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railing systems to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loadings imposed by railing systems. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. G. For railing posts set in concrete, provide preset sleeves of steel, not less than 64nches long and inside dimensions not less than 1/24nch greater than outside dimensions of post, with steel plate forming bottom dosure. H. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove buns from exposed cut edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32-inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent metal comers to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. J. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. K For ratting systems that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensation or other sources, provide weepholes or other means for evacuation of entrapped water in hollow sections of railing members. L Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. 2.06 FINISH A. Finish designations prefixed by 'AM conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Finish aluminum railings with three-coat themio-cured system, composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluompolymer (Kynar 500 or Hoar 5000) color topcoat containing not less than 709eroent pdyvinylidene resin by weight; corriplying with AAMA 605.2. Custom color to match color sample furnished by the Arehited PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions far installation of anchors, such as sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete as masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 04.07-06 PREFINISHED RAILINGS Progress CD Set 05521-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05521 VAIL, COLORADO PREFINISHED RAILINGS 3.02 INSTALLATION GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established fines and levels and free from rack. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrails and railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/4-inch in 12 feet 3. Align rails so that variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/44nch in 12-feet C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint or zinc chromate primer. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing handrails and railings to in-place construction. 3.03 ANCHORING POSTS A. Adjust railing systems prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated but not less than that required by design loadings. B. Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, Al annular space between post and sleeve solid with non-shrink, non-metallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's directions. C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members using manufacturer's standard fittings designed and engineered for this purpose. 3.04 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Non-Welded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and paddling to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed loddng screws using plastic cement filler colored to match railing finish. 3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A Clean prefinished railings by washing thoroughly with dean water and soap, following by rinsing with dean water. 3.06 PROTECTION A Protect finishes of railing systems from damage during constriction period by use of temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective covering at time of Substantial Completion. 0407.06 PREFINISHED RALINGS Progress CD Set 05521-5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 05521 VAIL COLORADO PREFINISHED RAILINGS B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so that no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units. END OF SECTION 04.07.06 PREFINISHED RAMMS Progress CD Set 05521-6 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06070 VAIL, COLORADO WOOD TREATMENT SECTION 06070 • WOOD TREATMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for the following types of fire-retardant treated wood: Faclory-applied pressure-impregnated fire-retardant treatment (FRT) on all lumber, furring, plywood and other milled lumber used in the Project Fire-retardant treatment is not required at heavy timber construction. Related Sections: Miscellaneous carpentry items are specified in Section 06101. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Wood Treatment Data: Treahnent manufacturers instructions for handling, storing, installing and finishing of treated material. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FACTORY-APPLIED FIRE-RETARDANT TREATMENT A. Provide fire-retardant treatment for all milled lumber, furring, and plywood used in the Project Pressure impregnate lumber and plywood with fire-retardant chemicals to comply with AWPA C20 and C27 respectively. Identify "fire-retardant-treated wood" with appropriate classification marking of UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to local Building Officials having jurisdiction. B. Treated wood shall bear the UL label or stamp attesting to the FRS rating and indicating compliance with AWPA Standard C20 and C27 for Type A use. C. Fire retardant treatment shall be classified as a Type A fire-retardant as defined in AWPA Standards C20 and C27. D. Fire retardant treated wood shall have a flame spread of less than 25 when tested in an extended 30-minute tunnel test in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 225 or UL 723. E. Lumber shall be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 19-percent after treatment Plywood shall be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 15-percent after treatment F. Fire-retardant chemicals used to treat wood shall be free of halogens, sulfates and ammonium phosphate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood in compliance with recommendations of chemical treatment manufacturer, including those for adhesives where required for installation. B. Apply fiekf-applied fire-retardant treatment materials in accordance with manufacturers instructions for UL certification. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 WOOD TREATMENT Progress CD Set 06070-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06101 VAIL, COLORADO MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY SECTION 06101 -MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing rough carpentry items, including the following: 1. Roof-top equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Wood grounds, nailers, and blocking. 3. Plywood sheathing and backing. B. Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1.02 PRODUCT H Wood treatment is specified in Section 06070. Finish carpentry items are specified in Section 06200. Roof board insulation is specified in Section 07220. Gypsum sheathing is specified in Section 09252. Exterior Architectural Woodwork is specified in Section 06401. ANDLING A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with wet or damp surfaces. B. Stack lumber, plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMBER A. Manufacture lumber to comply with PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC Board of Review. B. Factory-mark each piece of lumber identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. C. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as indicated by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. D. Moisture Content: 19-percent maximum. E. Species and Grade: Douglas Fr, No. 2 unless otherwise indicated. F. All lumber used in the Project shall be fire-retardant treated (FRT) as specified in Section 06070. 2.02 PLYWOOD A. Standards: Comply with requirements of PS 1 Voluntary Product Standard "Construction and Industrial Plywood" for veneer plywood and APA PRP-108 "Performance Standards and Policies for Structural-Use Panels" for performance-rated panels. B. Concealed Plywood: APA C-D Exterior, thickness indicated. 04.07.06 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY Progress CD Set 06101-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06101 VAIL, COLORADO MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY C. Miscellaneous Exposed (interior) Plywood: APA A -D Interior, thickness indicated. D. ElechicaVTelephone and Special Systems Backing Panels: C-D Plugged, Exposure 1, fire-retardant treated as specified in Section 06070,1/2-inch thick unless otherwise indicated. E. Al plywood used in the Project shall be fire-retardant treated (FRT) as specified in Section 06070. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A153 or stainless steel. B. Nails, Wire, Brads, Staples: FS FF-N-105. C. Bob: ASTM A307, Grade A; with hex nuts and flat washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that might impair quality of work, and units in sizes that would require an excessive number or poor arrangement of joints. B. Cut and fit miscellaneous carpentry accurately. Install members plumb and true to line and level. C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated and required. D. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required. 3.02 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, AND BLOCKING A. Provide where indicated and required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces. C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2-inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3.03 PLYWOOD A Saw cut plywood accurately for tight fit B. Instal with gain of outer plies at right angles to supports. C. Fasten securely at each support with self-tapping sheet metal screws driven flush with face of plywood, and terminate ends only over supports. D. Maintain tight joints but do not force panels into place. END OF SECTION 007-06 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY Progress CD Set 06101-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06200 VAIL, COLORADO FINISH CARPENTRY SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY (BACK OF HOUSE) PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing interior finish carpentry items, including the following: 1. Storage shelving assembles and storage units at back-of-house areas. 2. Wood wall bumpers (rub rails) and chair rail at back-of-house walls. B. Related Sections: 1. Interior architectural woodwork items are specified in Section 06402. 2. Custom cabinetwork, including back of house, is specified in Section 06410. 3. Field-applied finishes are specified in Section 09900. 4. Comer guards are specified in Section 10260. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Proposed manufacturer's product literature for all hardware items exposed to view in the finished work. B. Samples: Selected plastic laminate colors for verification purposes. C. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation, dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials and fabrication of finish carpentry work shall be in accordance with standards of WIC as applicable to types indicated and grades specified. B. In the event of question as to compliance with the referenced standard of any item of work, the Architect may require reinspection of questioned items as specified in WIC "Manual of Millwork". 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect finish carpentry materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. B. Do not deliver materials until painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations which could damage, sod or deteriorate work have been completed. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Conditioning: Do not install finish carpentry until required temperature and relative humidity conditions have been stabilized and will be maintained in installation areas. B. Shop-fabricated laminated finish carpentry items shall be left in a well ventilated warehouse for a minimum o(72- hours prior to delivery to the Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 for lumber and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 04-07-06 FINISH CARPENTRY Progress CD Set 06200-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06200 VAIL, COLORADO FINISH CARPENTRY B. Plywood Standards: Comply with PS 1 or APA PRP-108. C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory-marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece, or omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. 2.02 LAMINATED PLASTIC ADJUSTABLE SHELVING AND STORAGE ASSEMBLIES A. Fabricate shelving in accordance with WIC 'Manual of Millwork" Section 9, Custom Grade. Finish both faces and all four edges with plastic laminate conforming to NEMA Type GP50, matte finish, manufacturer and color as selected by the Architect. B. Fabricate shelves of 34-inch thick plywood or Medite Corporation'Medite II" or approved equal formaldehyde free medium density fiberboard unless thicker material is indicated. C. Adjustable Hardware: Knape & Vogt No. 87 standards and No. 187 brackets or approved equal. Space standards Y-0' apart and not more than 12-inches from the end of any shelf. 2.03 PAINTED WOOD ADJUSTABLE SHELVING AND STORAGE ASSEMBLIES A. Fabricate shelving in accordance with WIC "Manual of Millwork% Section 9, Custom Grade. B. Fabricate shelves of 314-inch thick edge banded plywood unless thicker material is indicated. C. Adjustable Hardware: Knape & Vogt No. 87 standards and No. 187 brackets or approved equal. Space standards 3'-0" apart and not more than 12-inches from the end of any shelf. 2.04 HORIZONTAL WALL GUARDS (RUB RAILS) AND CHAIR RAIL A. Species: Poplar or similar hardwood; WCLIB or WWPA. B. Grade: Select C. Texture: Surfaced (smooth) with eased edges. D. Size: Nominal 2-inches x 6-inches. E. Finish: Painted as specified in Section 09900. F. Heights: Upper rail centerline at 7-11' AFF; lower rail centerline at 9' AFF. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. Countersink nails and fill surface flush where face nailing is unavoidable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Condition wood materials to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours prior to installing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install finish carpentry items in accordance with WIC "Manual of Millwork", Custom Grade requirements. 04.07.96 FINISH CARPENTRY Progress CD Set 06200-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06200 VAIL, COLORADO FINISH CARPENTRY B. Discard units of material which are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, not adequately seasoned or too small to fabricate work with minimum of joints. C. Install finish carpentry plumb, level, true and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where required for alignment D. Shelves shall be level and shall rest on brackets free from rocking. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION A Repair damaged and defective finish carpentry work wherever possible to eliminate defects; where not possible to repair, replace. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean finish carpentry work on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. C. Protection: Protect and maintain protection to ensure work will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 04.07.06 FINISH CARPENTRY Progress CD Set 05100- 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06401 VAIL, COLORADO EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK SECTION 06401- EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing exterior architectural woodwork items including the following: 1. Exterior wood limbers (posts, beams, brackets, 'trusses", fascia, and outriggers). 2. Exterior wood railings. 3. Exterior wood jambs. 4. Exterior standing and running wood trim, rails, panels, and screens. 5. Fiber cement siding and soffits. 6. Fiber cement trim (alternate material). 7. Cellular PVC trim (alternate material). B. Related Sections: 1. Wood treatment is specified in Section 06070. 2. Finish carpentry items are specified in Section 06200. 3. Interior architectural woodwork is specified in Section 06402. 4. Sheathing paper is specified in Section 07262. 5. Backpriming and field-applied finishes are specified in Section 09900. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each type of product and process specified in this Section and incorporated into items of architectural woodwork and fiber cement siding during fabrication, finishing, and installation. B. Samples: 1. 12-inch long sample of each type of woodwork and siding material for approval of texture. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing architectual woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the work. B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of architectural woodwork by a firm that can demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type and quality to those required for this project. C. AWl Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of `Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards' published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI} unless otherwise indicated. Issue AWI Certify of Compliance certifying that items comply with AWI requirements for AWI grade indicated. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration. 04-07.06 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWOI K Progress CD Set 06401-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06401 VAIL, COLORADO EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Obtain and comply with woodwork manufacturer's and installer's coordinated advice for optnnum temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its storage. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed and at least one coat of finish applied without exposure to rain or dampness. 1.06 COORDI NATION A Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, reinforcements, and other related items to ensure that exterior woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI woodworking standard for each We of woodwork and AWI quality grade indicated. B. Blocking, Shins and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 19-percent moisture content. C. Screws: Material, type, size, and finish required, hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel. D. Nails: Material, type, size, and finish required for each use, hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel. E. Anchors: material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts. 2.02 FABRICATION GENERAL A. Wood Moisture Content Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content dumber in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges in accordance with AWI standards. 2.03 EXTERIOR WOOD TIMBERS (POSTS, BEAMS, BRACKETS, "TRUSSES', FASCIA, AND OUTRIGGERS) A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI 'Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards% Section 300 or 700, as applicable. B. Grade: Custom. C. Species: Douglas Fir No. 1, smooth surface, finish as specified in Section 09900. 2.04 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING WOOD TRIM RAILS, PANELS, AND SCREENS A Quality Standard: Comply with AWI'Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards', Section 300. B. Grade: Custom. C. Backout or groove backs of fiat trim members, kerf backs of other wide flat members, except for members with ends exposed it finished work. D. Species: Douglas Fir No. 1, smooth surface, finish as specified in Section 09900. 2.05 EXTERIOR WOOD JAMBS A. Quality Standard: AWI "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards', Section 900. B. Grade: Custom. 04-07-06 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Progress CD Set 06401-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06401 VAIL, COLORADO EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK C. Species: Douglas Fir No. 1, smooth surface, finish as specified in Section 09900. D. Jambs shall be rabbeted with no applied stops. 2.06 EXTERIOR CEMENT FIBER SIDING ("Chevron' patterned siding) A. Approved Manufacturer: James Hardie Building Products, or approved equal. B. Material: Fiber cement composed of portland cement, ground sand, celluk)se fiber, select additives and water. 1. Base layer. 'Hardipanel", 5116" thick. 2. Face layer' Harc ibim XLD", 7116" thick, 8' width. C. Length: Longest available to avoid end-to-end joints. D. Texture: Smooth. E. Finish: Field applied paint as specified in Section 09900 and indicated on drawings. F. Siding shall be non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM Ell 36 and shall have flame spread, fuel contributed, and smoke developed values of 0-0-5 respectively when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.07 EXTERIOR CEMENT FIBER SOFFITS A. Approved Manufacturer. James Hardie Building Products, or approved equal. B. Material: Fiber cement composed of portland cement, ground sand, cellulose fiber, select additives and water. 1. Base layer. 'Hardipanel', 5/16" thick. 2. Face layer" *Harditrim XLD", 7/16" thick, 8' width. E. Length: Longest available to avoid end-to-end joints. F. Texture: Smooth. G. Finish: Field applied paint specified in Section 09900 and indicated on drawings. H. Soffit material shall be non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E136 and shall have flame spread, fuel contributed, and smoke developed values of 0-0-5 respectively when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.08 EXTERIOR CEMENT FIBER TRIM (potential alternate for wood trim) A. Approved Manufacturer. James Hardie Building Products'H~Tdm XLD' or approved equal. B. Material: Fiber cement composed of portland cement, ground sand, cellulose fiber, select additives and water. C. Thickness: 1-inch. D. Width: Various; as indicated on drawings. E. Length: Longest available to avoid end-to-end joints. F. Texture: Smooth. G. Finish: Field applied paint as specified in Section 09900 and indicated on drawings. H. Trim material shall be non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM El 36 and shall have flame spread, fuel contributed, and smoke developed values of 0-0-5 respectively when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 04.07.06 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Progress CD Set 06401.3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06401 VAIL, COLORADO EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 2.09 EXTERIOR CELLULAR PVC TRIM (potential alternate for wood timber work and/or wood trim) A. Approved Manufacturers: Azek or approved equal. B. Material: Cellular polyvinyl chloride. C. Thickness: As indicated. D. Width: As indicated. E. Texture: Smooth or' wood grain' pending review of mockups. F. Adhesive: Water-based cellular PVC adhesive as recommended by trim manufacturer. 2.10 SHOP PRIMING A. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations. B. Backpdming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer compatible with finish coats to concealed surfaces of woodwork, including back. Apply two coats to items installed over concrete or masonry. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI'Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards' Section 1700 for same grade specified in Part 2 of this section for type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 118 inch in 8'-0' for plumb and level and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. E. Standing and Running Trim and Rails: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns and miter at comers. F. Fiber Cement Soffits: Instal over sheathing paper and plywood sheathing with concealed fasteners. Use longest length boards possible. Offset joints in adjacent courses. Miter joints at comers. G. Fiber Cement Siding: Install over sheathing paper and plywood sheathing with concealed fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H. Refer to Section 09900 for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not 04.07.0 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWOIK Progress CD Set 06401-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06401 VAIL, COLORADO EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensures woodwork is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWOIK Progress CD Set 06401-5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06402 VAIL, COLORADO INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for fumishing and installing interior architectural woodwork items including the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Interior ornamental work. 3. Wood veneer paneling. 4. Interior frames and jambs. 5. Wood stairs and railings. B. Related Sections: 1. Finish carpentry items are specified in Section 06200. 2. Exterior architectural woodwork is specified in Section 06401. 3. Flush wood doors are specified in Section 08212. 4. Stile and rail wood doors are specified in Section 08216. 5. Field-applied finishes are specified in Section 09900. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation, dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections. 1. Shop drawings shall bear the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) Certified Compliance Grade Stamp. B. Samples: Lumber with or for transparent finish, 50-square inches, for each species and cut; finished on one side and one edge. C. Product certificates signed by woodwork manufacturer certifying that products comply With specified require- ments. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the work. B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for interior architectural woodwork installation by a firm that can demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type and quality to those required for this Project C. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of 'Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards' published by Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI). D. In the event of question as to compliance with the referenced standard of any item of work, the Architect may require reinspection of questioned items as specified in AWI'Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards". 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration. 0407-06 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Progress CD Set 06402-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06402 VAIL, COLORADO INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet specified requirements. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until bung is enclosed, wet work is completed, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before manufacturing woodwork; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of work to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Fabricated woodwork shall be left in a well-ventilated warehouse for a minimum of 72-hours prior to delivery to the Project site. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for each type of woodwork and AWI quality grade specified. B. Furring, Blocking, Shims: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15-percent moisture content C. Screws: Material, type, size, and finish required for each use. D. Nails: Material, type, size, and finish required for each use. E. Anchors: Material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. 2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Wood Moisture Content Comply with requirements of referenced quality standards for moisture content of lumber in relation to relative humidity conditions existing at time of fabrication and in installation areas. B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to a radius as follows: 1. Comers and edges of sold wood members less than 14nch in nominal thickness: 1/164nch. 2. Edges of rats and similar members more than 1-inch in nominal thickness: 118-inch. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly and finishing before shipment to Project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as required for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. D. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible. Locate openings accurately and use templates for roughing4n diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges and cutouts. 2.03 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" Section 300. B. Grade: Premium. 007.06 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Progress CD Set 06402 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06402 VAIL, COLORADO INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK C. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. D. Lumber Species: As scheduled or as selected by the Interior Designer. Refer to Section 09001. E. Finish: Field-applied as specified in Section 09900. 2.04 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards", Section 300. B. Grade: Custom. C. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. D. Lumber Species: White pine, sugar one, or other closed-grain hardwood listed in referenced woodworking standard. MDF may be used at Contractor's option. E. Finish: Field-applied as specified in Section 09900. 2.05 ORNAMENTAL WORK FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A Quality Standard: Comply with AWI "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards", Section 700. B. Grade: Premium. C. Lumber Species: As scheduled or as selected by the Interior Designer. Refer to Section 09001. D. Finish: Field-applied as specified in Section 09900. 2.06 ORNAMENTAL WORK FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards", Section 700. B. Grade: Custom. C. Lumber Species: Any dosed-grain hardwood listed in referenced woodworking standard. MDF maybe used at Contractor's option. D. Finish: Field-applied as specified in Section 09900. 2.07 FLUSH WOOD PANELING AND WAINSCOTS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply With AWI 'Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards", Section 500. B. Grade: Premium. C. Veneer Species: As scheduled or as selected by the Interior Designer. Refer to Section 09001. D. Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Book match. E. Veneer Matching Within Panel Face: Balance match. F. Panel-Matching Method: Match panels within each separate area by sequence-matched, uniform-size sets. G. Vertical Panel-Matching Method: End match. H. Core: Willamette Industries "Duraflake FR" or approved equal fire-retardant particleboard having a flame spread and smoke developed values of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1. Finish: Prefinished as specified. 04-07-06 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Progress CD Set 06402-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06402 VAIL, COLORADO INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 2.08 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards", Section 900. B. Grade: Premium. C. Lumber Species: As scheduled or as selected by the Interior Designer. Refer to Section 09001. D. Construct frames with rabbetted jambs. E. Finish: Field-applied as specified in Section 09900. 2.09 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI'Architechual Woodwork Quality Standards', Section 900. B. Grade: Custom. C. Lumber Species: Any closed-grain hardwood listed in referenced woodworking standard. D. Construct frames with rabbetted jambs. E. Finish: Field-applied as specified in Section 09900. 2.10 WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards", Section 800. B. Grade: Premium. C. Wood Species: To be selected by the Interior Designer. Refer to Section 09001. 2.11 SHOP-FINISHING OF INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards", Section 1500. B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply With referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces and similar preparation of architectural woodwork. C. Transparent Finish for Open-Grain Woods: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish System: Catalyzed lacquer. 3. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 4. Effect: Closed grain (tilled finish). 5. Sheen: Dull stain 15- to 20-deg. D. Transparent Finish for Closed-Grain Woods: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish System: Catalyzed lacquer. 3. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 4. Effect: Closed grain. 5. Sheen: Dull satin 15- to 20-deg. 04-07A INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Progress CD Set 06402-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06402 VAIL, COLORADO INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including bads priming and removal of packing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install Interior Architectural Woodwork in accordance with AWI 'Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" Section 1700, for same grade specified for woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/84nch in 8'-0' for plumb and level. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns and miter at comers. F. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger dips and by blind nailing on backup strips, splined-connection strips, and similar associated trim and framing. Do not face nail unless otherwise indicated or if approved by the Architect. Install flush paneling With no more than 1/16-inch in 8'40' horizontal variation from a true plane. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually, where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, to ensure woodwork is without damage or deterioration at time of final acceptance. END OF SECTION 0447-06 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Progress CD Set 06402 - 5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06410 VAIL, COLORADO CUSTOM CABINETWORK SECTION 06410 - CUSTOM CABINETWORK PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for famishing and installing the following: 1. Custom plastic laminate faced cabinetwork at back-of-house areas. 2., Custom wood veneer cabinetwork at public areas. 3. Plastic laminate counter tops at back-of-house areas. B. Related Sections: 1. Stone counter tops are specified in Section 04440. 2. Finish carpentry work is specified in Section 06200. 3. Interior architectural woodwork is specified in Section 06402. 4. Field-applied finish on wood veneer cabinetwork is specified in Section 09900. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: 1. Specified plastic laminate colors for verification of initial selections. 2. Minimum three 12-inch x 12-inch square samples of specified wood veneers showing full range of grain and color characteristics to be expected in the finished work. 3. Minimum three 12-inch long wood samples showing full range of grain and color characteristics to be expected in the finished work. B. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation, dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections. Each set of shop drawings shall comply with Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI). 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials and fabrication of cabinetwork shall be in accordance with the standards of the AWI for the grades specified. B. In the event of question as to compliance with the referenced standard of any item of work, the Architect may require reinspeotion of questioned items as specified in AWI 'Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards'. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Cabinets shall be left in a ventilated warehouse for a minimum of 72-hours prior to delivery to the Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. laminated-Plastic Sheets: Comply with requirements of NEMA LD3. 1. Exposed Horizontal and Vertical Surfaces: General purpose type, NEMAType GP 50,.0504nch thick, matte finish for horizontal surfaces, NEMA Type FR 32, .0284nch thick matte finish for vertical surfaces. 2. Formed Surfaces:.0424nch thick, color to match horizontal surfaces, matte finish. 04.07.06 CUSTOM CABINETWORK Progress CD Set 06410-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06410 VAIL, COLORADO CUSTOM CABINETWORK 3. Semi-exposed Surfaces: Polyester high-density overlay, white color, .020-inch thick. 4. Balancing Sheet: Fabricator's standard. 5. Manufacturers and Colors: a. Public Areas: As selected by the Interior Designer. Refer to Section 09001. b. Bads-of-House Areas: To be selected by the Architect. B. Backing for Plastic Laminate: 1. Medium Density Fiber Board: 314-inch thick, 48-pcf density. Do not use at countertops with sinks. 2. Plywood: Premium Grade A or good Grade 1 hardwood veneer plywood, smooth, well sanded, thickness indicated. C. Subframe Lumber: No.1 grade Douglas Fir or plain sawn Yellow Poplar. D. Hardwood Veneer Plywood for Transparent Finish: WIC Premium Grade, species to be selected by the Interior Designer, book matched. Refer to Section 09001. E. Hardwood Trim for Transparent Finish: WIC Premium Grade, species to be selected by the Interior Designer, quarter sawn. Refer to Section 09001. F. Hardboard: 114-inch-thick tempered, smooth both sides. G. Adhesives: Contact, semirigid or rigid adhesives as recommended by laminated plastic manufacturer. H. Hardware: Furnish and install as required to provide a complete casework installation. 1. Hinges: 120-degree opening, concealed hinge, passing 100,000-cycle test Provide three hinges on doors over 48-inches high. 2. Door and Drawer Pulls: Builders Brass Works No. 9054, Quality No. 812, Stanley 4483 or approved equal, satin stainless steel. 3. Door Locks: National Lock C8123, Corbin 0737, Olympus 100DR or approved equal. Key as directed by the Owner. 4. Drawer Locks: National C8138, Corbin 0738, Olympus 200DW or approved equal. Key as directed by the Owner. 5. Drawer Guides: a. Box Drawers: Full extension, minimum 100-pound capacity; Accuride 3832 or 7432, Blum 430E, Grant 329, K&V 1429 or approved equal. b. File Drawers: Full extension, minimum I%pound capacity; Accuride 4034, Blum 426A, Grant 555, K&V 8500 or approved equal. 6. Drilled Hole Shelf Clips: K&V 346 or approved equal. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate products in accordance with the approved Shop Drawings and specified AWI Grade requirements. The architectural drawings indicate form and profile concept only. Fabrication and construction details shalt comply with AWI "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" unless otherwise specified. 04-07-06 CUSTOM CABINETWORK Progress CD Set 06410 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06410 VAIL, COLORADO CUSTOM CABINETWORK B. Fabricate laminated plastic casework in accordance with AWI 'Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards' Section 400B, Custom grade. 1. Exposed portions shall be covered with a high pressure plastic laminate. 2. Edge Banding: Laminated plastic or hardwood as indicated. 3. The following semi-exposed surfaces shall be covered with a high pressure plastic laminate: a. Interior surfaces of wall cases without doors or with glass doors. b. Adjustable shelves in cabinets without doors or with glass doors and when: indicated. 4. Semi-exposed surfaces of cabinet tops and bottoms, cabinet ends, fixed and adjustable shelves, cabinet back, cabinet doors, and drawers shall be finished with a polyester laminate; exposed edges of semi-exposed surfaces shall be finished with extruded PVC or self edged plastic laminate. 5. Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay. C. Fabricate wood casework in accordance with AWI *Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" Section 400A, Premium grade. Cabinets shall receive a transparent finish to match Architect's or Interior Designer's sample. The following semi-exposed surfaces shall be considered as exposed: Interior surfaces of wall cases without doors or with glass doors. b. Adjustable shelves in cabinets without doors or with glass doors and where indicated. 2. Other sen*exposed surfaces shall be finished with wood of similar species and grain as exposed sur- faces; particleboard or medium density fiberboard will not be permitted on any semi-exposed surfaces. D. Laminated Plastic Counter Tops: Fabricate in accordance with AWI'Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards' Section 4000, Premium grade. 1. Counter Top Edges: Self-edged with plastic laminate or hardwood trim as indicated. 2. Back Splash: Square butt joints or integral cove as indicated. 3. Top of Bads Splash: Square with self edge. 4. Back Splash Height: As indicated. E. Make cuts required to accommodate the work of other Sections in the shop where possible. Review other drawings and work to determine extent of items to be mounted in cabinetwork. Notify the Architect of discxep- andes. F. Shop-fabricate cabinets and counter tops in whole units or partial units practical for handing and transporting. Assemble partial units in place so that each complete unit becomes a unified whole visually and structurally. Fabricate fillers and scribe strips of same materials and finishes as adjacent units. G. Make cuts for hardware and equipment neat and true. Install hardware and fit securely. H. Adjust drawers, doors, and movable shelves to operate easily and smoothly without binding. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Install cabinetwork in accordance with AWI'Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards' Section 1700, Premium Grade requirements. B. Instal products plumb and level. 04-07-06 CUSTOM CABINETWORK Progress CD Set 06110-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06410 VAIL, COLORADO CUSTOM CABINETWORK C. Securely fasten cabinetwork to supporting substrate as indicated. D. Anchor lops to base units and other supports as indicated. Seal space between backsplash and wall with sanitary sealant specified in Section 07920. Instal with no more than 1 t84nch in 9-0' sag, bow, or other variation from straight tine. E. Fit tight and scribe to walls, ceilings, and other surfaces so no open joints occur. F. Remove and replace materials damaged beyond repair or stained beyond cleaning. 3.02 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged and defective cabinetwork where possible to eliminate defects; where not possible to property, repair, replace. B. Clean, lubricate and make final adjustments to hardware for proper operation. C. Clean cabinetwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch-up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. D. Protect cabinetwork to ensure work will be without damage at time of Substantial Completion. Cover completed cabinetwork with 4-mil polyethylene film protective enclosure, applied in a manner to permit easy removal. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 CUSTOM CABINETWORK Progress CD Set 06410-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06411 VAIL, COLORADO DECORATIVE HARDWARE SELECTIONS SECTION 06411- DECORATIVE HARDWARE SELECTIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the decorative hardware as selected by the Interior Designer. In cases of conflict the decorative hardware selections and designations fisted in the adjoining schedule supersede those listed in other individual spec liication sections. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 DECORATIVE HARDWARESELECTIONS Progress CD Set 06411-1 BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D I O Four Seasons Vail Decorative Hardware Manufacturer's List DECORATIVE HARDWARE MANUFACTURER'S LIST Contact: T: F: E: Architectural Architectural Traditions Contact: Traditions 9280 E. Old Vail Rd. T: 520.574.7374 Tucson, AZ 85747 United States F: E: Ives Ives Contact: Dennis Murphy 50 Horgan Ave T: (650) 369.5710 Redwood City, CA 94061 F: (650) 369.5710 E: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 1 of 1 Brayton + Hughes ve DESIGN STUDIO DECORATIVE HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS Four Seasons Vail Hardware Specifications Project No.: 200458 ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS DH-1 Tie Rack Mfr.: Architectural Traditions Typical Guestroom Item: Tie Rack Manufacturer: Architectural Traditions or Approved Equal Style: #CP230 Finish: Bronze, Silicone Dark Notes: DH-1 Door Hardware Mfr.: DH-3 Wall Hooks Mfr.: Ives Typical Guestroom Item: Wall Hooks Manufacturer: Ives Style: #581 Finish: US10B Oil Rubbed Bronze Notes: Clothes Brush & Shoe Horn Hooks Issued: April 7, 2006 Page I of 1 CP40 Bronze Oil-Rubbed 3' CP210 Iron Wrought CP230 Bronze Oil-Rubt-, 1 / 4' CPJ30 CP8914 Iron Rust ter Pew ' 1-114' 1-112' I CP220 bon Wrought 1- 112 Bronze Oil-Rubbed f . 1-3/8'X1-3/8' CP220 r Silkor? Dark CP200 Silicon Medium - r• f17--' CPS796 Iron Rust Antique 5-3/8' CP60 Copper Pannt. 1' p} ~ Hooks and Brackets 580 Ceiling Hook • Ideal for use In closet, attached to underside of shelves. or in sWMP lockers- . • f+Aade from cast brass or cast ahrrrknum. • Brass Rnishes: B3. B4.85.81% B10B, B14, B15. B15A, B26. B26D. • Akuninum Rnistres: A3, M, AS, A10. A14. AM 581 Wardrobe Hook • Compact hook is perfect where space is Umited, such as behind dome where low profge Is rrmeded. • glade from cast brass, cast Am*nun or epoxy-coated a 14. • Brass Rnishex 83 (MM), B4, 85, B1 Qili.P 815 (8-619). B15A (8-620). 819, 826 • Ak"um R nisIm A3, M. AS, A10. AX A92. • EpowCoated Akuninum Finishes: Whta A-W, Black A-BLK, Aknond A-A. 582 Double Wardmbe Hook • Compaet doubts hook is pwW where space is kbniled. such as b~eh" dome wh~amyllow pp idle Is needed. • h1la a Im ~ brass, Wl Am*wm or epOx d akerrknen. • Brass Fmbhmc 83 04ft B4. B5, B1% B10B "3), 814. 815 (8-61W B15A MB M. B19. B26 (6425), 8260. • Akm*mn Finishes: A3. A4, A5. AIIA A14, AM • Epoow-Coated Akw* m Rnislrex VAO AM Mack A-K)K Ak►tond A-A Dimensleam Base, Brass: 7/8' H x 1-15/16' W Base, Ahuninum V H x 1-7Ar W Projection: 2-1/4' .~~j ~Mzltl - Dheeeslmrs: Base: 1-1/4* H x 1-1/4' W Projection, Brass: 1-11/16' Projection, Akunim 1-5/6' Dimesslow Base, Brass: t-1/8' H x 1-i/4' W Base, Akxnknun: t-1/16' H x 13/16 W Projection, Draw 1* Projection. Mnk uw 1-3/32 w Iii PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06460 VAIL. COLORADO WOOD ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS SECTION 06460 - WOOD ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing custom exterior wood storefronts, including door frames, doors, adjacent storefront framing, and trim at public areas and/or where indicated. B. Related Sections: 1. Door hardware is specified in Section 08710. 2. Glass for doors and sidelights is specified in Section 08800. 3. Field-finishing of doors, sidelights and windows is specified in Section 09900. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate location and size of each door, elevation of each door and adjacent sidelights; construction details including stiles, rails, panels, and moldings; and location and extent of hardware cutouts. B. Certificate of Compliance: Manufacturer's certificate showing compliance with specified requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard: AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grade of door and sidefght construction, finish, and other requirements. a. Furnish AWl Certified Compliance Certificate indicating that doors meet requirements of grades specified. b. Furnish AWI Certified Compliance Certificate for Installation. B. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with ANSI 297.1 and tilting requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. C. Field Testing for Water Infiltration: No water ingress when tested in accordance with ASTM E547 at pressure diftential of 8 psf. Field testing to be performed on representative section of storefront as selected by Architect and Owner 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A Protect doors and sidelights during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. B. Identify each door with opening numbers corresponding with shop drawing designations for doors, frames and hardware, using temporary, removable, or concealed markings. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or instal doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of construction period to 04.07.06 WOOD ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Progress CD Set 06460 ' 1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06460 VAIL, COLORADO WOOD ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS comply with the following requirements applicable to Project's geographical location. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURER A. Zelluck or approved equal. 2.02 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS AND SIDELIGHTS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI'Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards", Section 1400. B. Doors and Sidelights- 1 . Grade: AWI Premium. 2. Lumber Species: Vertical Grain Mahogany (or similar hardwood) for semi- transparent finish. 3. Stile, Rail and Mullion Dimensions: a. Widths: As indicated. b. Thickness: 2-114-inches unless otherwise indicated. 4. Glass Panels: a. Molding Profile: As indicated. b. Glass: 14nch dear insulating glass with Low E Coating as specified in Section 08600. 2.03 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM AND RAILS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI, "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards' Section 300. B. Grade: Premium. C. Badkout or groove backs of flat trim members, kerf backs of other wide flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. D. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. E. Lumber Species. Vertical Grain Mahogany (or similar hardwood) for semi-transparent finish. 2.04 FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI'Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards' Section 900. B. Grade: Premium. C. Lumber Species: Vertical Grain Mahogany (or similar hardwood) for semi-transparent finish. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. 04-07-06 WOOD ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Progress CD Set 06460 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06460 VAR COLORADO WOOD ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: Edges of solid wood (lumber) members less than 1-inch in nominal thickness: 1/16-inch. 2. Edges of rails and similar members 1-inch or more in nominal thickness: 118-inch. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. D. Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing4n diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and seal edges With a 'water-resistant coating suitable for exterior applications. E. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors and sidelights in sizes indicated for either job-site fifbng or factory fit doors to suite frame-opening sizes indicated, at Contractors option. Factory-fill doors shall comply with the following uniform clearances and bevels: Fitling Clearances: Provide 1/8-inch at jambs and heads, 1116-inch per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and 1/2-inch from bottom of door to top of floor finish. Where threshold is indicated, provide 3184rich dearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Bevel doors 1/84nch in 24ndm (3-112 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. F. Preparation for door hardware: Factory prepare, reinforce, and machine each door to receive specified door hardware. Comply with final hardware submittal, door frame shop drawings and hardware templates General Contractor to coordinate with door and hardware subcontractors and vendors to ensure manufacturers' recommendations, guidelines, instructions, and templates regarding hardware installation are implemented correctly. Shop preparation or field preparation will not be accepted as substitution for these requirements. G. Glazed Openings: Factory-preglaze doors for applications indicated. Comply with requirements of Section 08800. Trim glazed openings with solid wood moldings of profile indicated, removable one side. H. Transom and Sidelight Panels: Fabricate panels to match adjoining doors in materials, finish and quality of construction. Exterior Doors: Factory-treat exterior doors after fabrication with water repellent to comply with NWWDA I.S.4. Flash top of out-swinging doors with sheet metal flashing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging doors. Verily that frames comply with spedfied requirements and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wood entrances and storefronts in accordance with AWI 'Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards', Premium Grade requirements. B. Instal storefronts plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shins. 0407-06 WOOD ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Progress CD Set 06460 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06460 VAIL COLORADO WOOD ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Install to a tolerance of 118 inch in 8W for plumb and level and With no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work. D. Anchor anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. E. Standing and Running Trnn and Rails: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using fulNength pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns and miter at comers. F. Install stile and rail wood doors and sidelights in compliance with manufacturer's instructions, applicable requirements, of referenced quality standard and as specified. G. Job-Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as specified; do not trim s6'les and rails in excess of Omits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. Fitting Clearances: Provide 118-inch at jambs and heads, 1/1 64nch per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and 1/8-inch from bottom of door to top of finish floor covering. Where thresholds occur, provide 1/44nch clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Bevel doors 1/8-inch in 24nches at lock and hinge edges. H. Factory-Fitted Doors: Algn in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION A Operation: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that doors and sidelights are without damage at . time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 04.07-06 WOOD ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Progress CD Set 06460 - 4 PROJECT #02028.65 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 06608 VAIL, COLORADO PLASTIC PANELING SECTION 06608 - PLASTIC PANELING (FRP) PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for famishing and installing interior fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) coated wall panels at selected back-of-house areas (where indicated). B. Related Sections: 1. Joint sealants are specified in Section 07920. 1.02 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide factory wrapping, packaging, and other means necessary to prevent damage or deterioration during shipment, handling, and storage. B. Maintain protective coverings in place and in good repair unfit removal is necessary. C. Store products inside enclosed storage facilities or closed building, supported above grade and slabs-on-grade. D. Maintain storage spaces and products in dry condition within temperature extremes recommended by manufacturer. E. Follow special instructions of manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL PANELS A. Approved Manufacturers: Allied Resinous Products, Inc.'Permacean", Kemlite'Fire-X Glasbord", Sequentia 'StructOglas" or approved equal. B. Typical Field Size: 48-inches wide x height indicated, 0.094nch thick. C. Color: As selected by the Architect D. Adhesive: Waterproof adhesive as recommended by panel manufacturer for installation conditions. E. Moldings: PVC, color to match panels. Provide inside comers, outside corners, edging, division strips, and base molding. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install panels in accordance with panel manufacturer's instructions using moldings and adhesive. B. Before installing panels in moldings, fill grooves in moldings with silicone sanitary sealant specified in Section 07920. 3.02 COMPLETION A. When complete, panels shalt be securely adhered to substrates and moldings shall be plumb and level. B. Exposed surfaces shall be clean and free from scratches, dents, tool marks, stains, discoloration, fingerprints, and other defects and damage. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 PLASTIC PANELING Progress CD Set 06608-1011 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07112 VAIL, COLORADO BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING SECTION 07112 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing cold-applied asphalt dampproofing on site planter and retaining walls not enclosing habitable spaces. B. Related Sections: 1. Waterproofing on below grade vertical walls is specified in Section 07170. 2. Waterproofing under mortar-set file floors is specified in Section 07132. 3. Waterproofing under thin-set file floors is specified in Section 07142. 4. Waterproofing under exterior paving over habitable spaces and below stab or mat on grade is specified in Section 07144. 5. Waterstop sealant is specified in Section 07920. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions, requirements for substrate preparation, temperature and humidity, and other items required. B. Applicator's qualification letter. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator shall have a minimum of 3-years experience in the installation of dampproofing systems of the type specified, and approved by the manufacturer of the dampproofing materials. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in the original packaging with each package or container labeled with the manufacturers name, type and name of product, batch number, date of manufacturer, and instructions for use. B. Store materials in the original packages or containers until ready for use. C. Follow special handling and storage requirements of the manufacturer. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Substrate: Proceed with dampproofing work only after substrate construction and penetrating items have been completed. B. Weather. Proceed with dampproofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will perrnit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Chemrex, Inc. "Hydrocide 700B Semimastic', Karnak Corporation "Karnak 220AF Fibrater Dampproofing', Henry Co. "Henry #789". W.R. Meadows, Inc. "Type 2 - Brush-on or Spray Grade" or approved equal 0407-06 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING Progress CD Set 07112-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07112 VAIL, COLORADO BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 2.02 DAMPPROOFING MATERIALS A. Cold-Applied Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing: ASTM D1227, Type IV. 1. Asphalt Emulsion: Manufacturer's standard asphalt and water emulsion recommended for below-grade exterior applications to either damp or dry substrates, compounded to penetrate substrate and build to moisture-resistant coating. B. Dampproofing shall be fibrated with non-asbestos fibers and shall be brush or spray on grade. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of projections and substances detrimental to work; comply with recommendations of materials manufacturer. B. Install cant strips and similar accessories as recommended. C. Fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers as recommended. D. Prime substrate as recommended. E. Protection of Other Work: Do not allow liquid and mastic compounds to enter and clog drains and conductors. Prevent spillage and migration onto other surfaces of work; mask or otherwise protect adjoining work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Where recommended by dampproofing manufacturer, install 2 x 2 cant strip of bituminous grout or other approved material at base of vertical dampproofing where it meets horizontal surface. B. Extend vertical dampproof ng down walls from finished grade fine to top of footing, extend over top of footing and turn down minimum of 64nches over outside face of footing. Dampproofing shall not be exposed to view in the completed work. C. Apply one coat of dampproofing materials by brushing or spraying at rate recommended by dampproofing manufacturer depending upon substrate texture. END OF SECTION J 04.07.06 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING Progress CD Set 07112 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07132 VAIL, COLORADO ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING SECTION 07132 - ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing elastomeric sheet waterproofing under mortar-set file shower floors and floors where indicated. B. Related Sections: 1. Waterproofing on foundation walls below grade is specified in Section 07170. 2. Waterproofing under thin-set floor file is specified in Section 07142. 3. Waterproofing under exterior paving over habitable spaces and below slab or mat on grade is specified in Section 07144. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Quarftbons: Minimum 3-years experience in the installation of waterproofing of the type specified, and approved by the manufacturer of the waterproofing materials. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Substrate: Proceed with waterproofing work only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed. B. Coordinate finishing and curing of concrete surfaces to receive waterproofing with work of Division 3. C. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation to prevent accumulations of hazardous fumes during application of sol- vent-based components in enclosed spaces, and maintain ventilation until coatings have cured. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING MATERIALS A. Sheet Membrane: The Noble Company "Choraloy 240" heavy-duty non-plasticized CPE synthetic erastomeric, Pasco "Baseline" flexible PVC sheeting with polyester fibers or approved equal. B. Seam Cement CPE solvent welding liquid, Xylene, or as recommended by sheet membrane manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Clean substrate of projections and substances detrimental to work; comply with recommendations of prime materials manufacturer. B. Concrete surfaces shall be smooth, dean, free from dirt and grease. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions using the fully-adhered. method of installation. B. Precut membrane allowing for overlap at seams and upturn at walls. C. Form seams by either lapping membrane 3-inches at ends and sides, or by butting membrane sheets together and covering with a 6-Inch wide cap. Lap joints in the direction of watershed. Clean lap and splice areas as recommended by membrane manufacturer prior to applying welding agent. D. Extend membrane up walls a minimum of 6-inches above curbidam or waterline unless otherwise indicated or 04-07-06 ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING Progress CD Set (17132-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07132 VAIL, COLORADO ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING required by code. E. Secure membrane to walls with nails or staples 1/2-inch from top edge or use tape or adhesive. Where wood studs are used and no bads-up is provided, secure to studs With fasteners with washers. Extended membrane into floor drain damping rings. 3.03 WATER TESTING A. Upon completion of work, test for leaks by plugging the drain or damming areas and filling with 34nches of water. Allow water to stand for 24-hours and inspect for leakage. Make necessary adjustments to stop leakage and retest until watertight 3.04 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic on completed membrane prior tD application of surfacing material. END OF SECTION 04.07.06 ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING Progress CD Set 07132 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07136 VAIL, COLORADO MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING SECTION 07136 - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for fumishing and installing modified bituminous sheet membrane waterproofing at planter walls above grade and where indicated B. Related Sections: Waterproofing under interior mortar set fife floodng is specified in Section 07132. 2. Waterproofing under interior thin-set file flooring is specified in Section 07142- 3. Waterproofing under exterior paving over habitable spaces and below slab or mat on grade is specified in Section 07144. 4. Waterproofing on below grade vertical walls is specified in Section 07170. 5. Waterstop sealant is specified in Section 07920. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's recommended installation details, installation, and maintenance procedures. B. Applicator's Qualification Letter. Fumish a letter from the manufacturer certifying that the applicator is qualified to install modified bituminous sheet membrane waterproofing and has a minimum of 5 installations of similar scope. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Regularly engaged in the manufacturer of modified bituminous sheet membrane waterproofing for at least 5-years; capable of fumishing a list of five satisfactory installations of the material which have been in service for at least 5-years. B. Applicator's Qualifications: Minimum of 5 installations of similar size and complexity to this Project. C. Each component of modified bituminous sheet membrane waterproofing system shall comply with applicable Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) regulations. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in unopened containers, dearly marked with manufacturer's name and address and date of manufacture. B. Store materials away from sparks or flames, protected from rain and physical damage, and within temperature range recommended by manufacturer. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Prior to application, manufacturer's representative, Contractor, Architect, and applicator shall make site inspection to review related conditions affecting perbiTnanoe requirements of the specified system. B. Environmental Conditions: 1. The temperature of the air and surfaces to receive waterproofing shall be within the range recommended by the manufacturer. 2. The concrete surface has cured for a minimum of 7-days and is dry at application. 3. Provide adequate ventilation during application of material in enclosed areas. 04-07-06 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING Progress CD Set 07136-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07136 VAIL, COLORADO MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING C. Take precautions and provide protection as required when using products which produce offensive odors and physically irritating pollutants. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Furnish a written warranty that the installed systems will be free of defects related to workmanship or material deficiency for a 5-year period from the date of Substantial Completion. The following problems shall be specifically covered under the warranty: Cohesive or adhesive fakre of the system. 2. Deficiencies resulting in failure of the system, including leakage. 3. Abrasion or tear failure of the system resulting from normal use. B. Warranty includes removal of overburden required to remedy defects. C. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Membrane: Grace Construction Products "Bituthene 4000' or approved equal, oold-applied, self-adhering, preformed membrane, 0.060-inch thick with a 0.0044nch-thick polyethylene film coated on one side with a layer of adhesive-consistency rubberized asphalt. 1. Tensile Strength, Film: 5,000-psi in accordance with ASTM D882. 2. Tensile Strength, Membrane: 325-psi in accordance with ASTM D412. 3. Resistance to Hydrostatic Head: 231-feet of water in accordance with ASTM D5385. 4. Permeance: 0.05-grains/sq. ftmr.fin. Hg in accordance with ASTM E96, Method B. 5. Water Absorption: 0.1-percent (weightl72-hours) in accordance with ASTM D570. 6. Pliability, 180-deg. bend over 1-inch mandrel: -45-deg. F. in accordance with ASTM D1970. B. Surface Conditioner. Styrene Butadine Rubber water based; 'Bituthene' Surface Conditioner. C. Mastic: Rubberized asphalt4msed mastiff "Bituthene' Mastic. D. Liquid Membrane: Two-component, elastomedc, cold-applied trowel grade urethane material; "Bituthene" Liquid Membrane. E. Protection Board: As recommended by waterproofing membrane manufacturer for installation conditions. Provide materials recommended by manufacturer for detailing comers, joints, drains, and protrusions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Concrete surfaces to receive modified bituminous sheet membrane waterproofing shall be free of dirt and debris, void, spalled areas, loose aggregate, and sharp protrusions, with no coarse aggregate visible. Immediately prior to application, broom clean and blow off all dust. B. Pipes, vents, drains, and other penetrations of surface shall be covered to prevent entry of waterproofing material. 04-07-06 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING Progress CD Set 07136-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07136 VAIL, COLORADO MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING C. Concrete shall have cured for a minimum of 28-days using acceptable curing methods. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A Follow recommendations of modified bituminous sheet membrane waterproofing materials manufacturer. B. Provide a fillet of liquid membrane at internal comers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Reinforce external comers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Expansion joints shall be sealed and covered in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Mask off adjoining surfaces not to receive waterproofing. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Spray-apply diluted surface conditioner uniformly to substrate at a rate of 500- to 600-sq. ft. per gallon and allow to dry for a minimum of 30-minutes or until substrate returns to original color prior to application of waterproofing membrane. If conditioned areas are not covered on the same day, recondition if significant dust or dirt accumulate. C. Vertical Surfaces: 1. Comers: Prepare inside comers by installing a 314-inch fillet of liquid membrane and extend 64nches in each direction from the comer. Outside comers shall be free of sharp edges. Prepare outside comers by installing a 12-inch wide strip of waterproofing material centered on the comer. At installer's option, outside comers may be formed by using the alternating lap method with each layer of membrane continuing around the comer a minimum of 6-inches. Install membrane over treated inside and outside comers. Membrane: a. Apply membrane vertically in lengths of 7-feet or less. On higher walls, apply two or more lengths of membrane With upper length overlapping lower length by a minimum of 2-1/2- inches. Roll membrane with a handroller immediately after application. b. Extend membrane over the edge of the slab or over the top of the foundation or parapet wall. C. Terminate membrane in a reglet or by using a metal or hardwood tool and heavy pressure. d. At the base of the foundation wall, provide liquid membrane material 64nches up the wall and 6-inches onto the top of the footing and extend membrane over the liquid membrane. Where the bottom of interior slabs are a minimum of 64nc:hes above the top of the looting, membrane may be terminated at the base of the foundation wall. e. Seal laps within 12-inches of comers With a troweling of mastic. f. Apply a troweling of mastic or liquid membrane to vertical and horizontal membrane termina- tions. g. Seal daily terminations of membrane with a thin troweled bead of mastic. Edges: Seal vertical and horizontal terminations With mastic or liquid membrane material. 0407.06 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING Progress CD Set 07136-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07136. VAIL, COLORADO MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING 4. Seams: Overlap edge and end laps a minimum of 2-1124nches. Patch misarigned or inadequately lapped seams with membrane material extending 64nches beyond the defect and seal edges of patches with a trowel application of mastic or liquid membrane. 5. Other Details: In accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 6. Protection: Install protection board in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING Progress CD Set 07136-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07139 VAIL, COLORADO ROOFING UNDERLAYMENT SECTION 07139 - ROOFING UNDERLAYMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing roofing underpayment under asphalt shingles, copper shingles, slate shingles and simulated slate shingles. B. Related Sections: 1. Asphalt shingles are specified in Section 07311. 2. Copper shingles are specified in Section 07314. 3. Slate shingles are specified in Section 07326. 4. Simulated slate shingles are specified in Section 07327. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Product Data: Include manufacturer's product data and installation instructions and details. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A Apply underpayment in fair weather at temperatures of 40-deg. F. and above. B. Apply roof covering material promptly at temperatures of 40-deg. F. and above. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURER A Grace Construction Products "Ice & Water Shield" or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A Membrane: Composite of self-adhesive butyl rubber integrally bonded to polyethylene sheeting, confomrng to the following physical properties: 1. Thickness: 40-mils, ASTM D3767, Method A 2. Tensile Strength: 2500, ASTM D412, (Die C) modified. 3. Elongation: 250-percent, ASTM D412 (Die C) modified. 4. Low Temperature Fle&fity: Unaffected at-20-deg. F., ASTM D1970. 5. Adhesion to Plywood: 34bsAn. width, ASTM D903. 6. Pemleance: 0.05 perms, ASTM E96. 04-07-06 ROOFING UNDERLAYbENT Progress CD Set 07139-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07139 VAIL. COLORADO ROOFING UNDERLAYMENT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01. PREPARATION A Remove dust, dirt, loose fasteners and other protrusions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A Cut the membrane into 10- to 15-foot lengths and re-roll. B. Peel back 1- to 2-feet of release paper, align on the lower edge of the roof and place the first 1- to 2-feet. Pull the release paper under the membrane and continue to peel it from the membrane. C. Press and roll the membrane in place to assure full adherence to the deck. Mechanically fasten membrane to roof sheathing with smooth shank fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Lap ends at least 64nches and sides at least 3-112-inches. E. Cover fasteners with a ship of membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. On roof slopes greater than 5 in 12, back-nail B-foot lengths and cover nails by overlapping with the next sheet. G. For valley and ridge applications, cut the membrane into 4 to 6-foot lengths. Peel back the release paper, center the sheet over the valley or ridge, drape and press into place working from the center of the valley or ridge outward in each direction. 1. For valleys, apply membrane starting at the low point and work upwards. Lap ends at least 64inches and sides at least 3-1124nches. Apply membrane in valleys prior to application at eaves. END OF SECTION 0407.06 ROOFING UNDERLAYMENT Progress CD Set 07139 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07142 VAIL, COLORADO ELASTOMERIC LIQUID WATERPROOFING SECTION 07142 - ELASTOMERIC LIQUID WATERPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing elastDmedc liquid membrane waterproofing under thin-set floor the in 'wet areas' above grade (includes bathrooms and kitchens in hotel guestrooms, Residence Club units, and condominium units). B. Related Sections: 1. Waterproofing of below grade foundation walls is specified in Section 07170. 2. Waterproofing under mortar-set file is specified in Section 07132. 3. Waterproofing under exterior paving over habitable spaces and below slab or mat on grade is specified in Section 07144. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 3-years experience in the installation of waterproofing systems of the type specified, and approved by the manufacturer of the waterproofing materials. B. Waterproofing membrane shall meet or exceed extra heavy-duty rating when tested in accordance With ASTM C627. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Substrate: Proceed With waterproofing work only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed. B. Coordinate finishing and curing of concrete surfaces to receive waterproofing with work of Division 3. Concrete surfaces shall have a steel trowel finish and shall be covered and wet cured for a minimum of 7-days. C. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation to prevent accumulations of hazardous fumes during application of sol- vent-based components in enclosed spaces, and maintain ventilation until coatings have cured. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Laticrete International'Laticrete 9235, Mer-Kota Products, Inc.'Mer--Krets B.F.P. Waterproof Membrane' or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Membrane: Cold-applied liquid rubber latex with fabric reinforcement. B. Reinforcing: Rot-proof fabric, designed by membrane manufacturer for use in reinforcing membrane. C. Undedayment: As recommended by membrane waterproofing manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of projections and substances detrimental to work, comply with recommendations of prime materials manufacturer. B. Rough or uneven surfaces shall be made smooth or leveled with undedayment material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 04-07.06 ELASTOMERIC LQUID WATERPROOFING Progress CD Set 07142-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07142 VAIL, COLORADO ELASTOMERIC LIQUID WATERPROOFING C. Concrete surfaces shall be smooth, dean, free from dirt, grease, concrete sealers or curing compounds. D. Dry, dusty slabs shall be dampened and swept off. E. Do not allow waterproofing materials to enter and dog drains and conductors. Prevent spillage and migration onto other surfaces of work, by masking. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturers instructions. B. Precut reinforcing fabric allowing 2-inches for overlap at ends and sides. Extend fabric 6-inches through door openings. C. Reinforce Joints: Spread a layer of waterproofing liquid at joints and cracks. Imbed a 64nch wide strip of reinforcing fabric into the liquid. Spread a layer of waterproofing liquid over the fabric to seal it. D. Coves: Spread a layer of waterproofing liquid in coves, imbed fabric and allow 4-inches of the fabric to flashed up to walls. Spread a coat of liquid over the fabric to seal it Flash the fabric and waterproofing liquid into drains and around projections. E. Cracks: Clean and fill cracks greater than 1/164nch with a scratch coat of latex portland cement mortar and allow to cure. Spread a layer of waterproofing liquid on crack, imbed a 64nch strip of reinforcing fabric into the liquid, and spread a coat of liquid over the fabric to seal it. F. Using a paint roller or brush, apply a liberal coat of liquid membrane to the floor and/or wall, slightly wider than the fabric width. Include joints and coves previously reinforced. While the surface is still wet, embed fabric and smooth out wrinkles. G. Apply a liberal coat of liquid membrane to completely cover the fabric. Lap fabric 24nches at seams. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic on completed membrane prior to application of surfacing material. END OF SECTION 007-06 ELASTOMERIC LQUID WATERPROOFING Progress CD Set 07142-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07144 VAIL, COLORADO HOT-RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING SECTION 07144 - HOT-RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing hot rubberized-asphalt waterproof membrane at exterior horizontal surfaces over occupied spaces, at balconies over occupied spaces, at parking garage ramp, in planters over occupied space, and where otherwise indicated on drawings. and-eveF B. Related Sections: 1. Waterproofing under mortar-set file showers and floors is specified in Section 07132. 2. Waterproofing on below grade foundation walls is specified in Section 07170. 3. Waterproofing under thin-set file floors is specified in Section 07142. 4. Waterstop sealant is specified in Section 07920. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each waterproofing material. Include data substantiating compliance with specified requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Primary waterproofing materials shall be products of a single manufacturer. Secondary materials shall be as recommended by primary materials manufacturer. B. Applicators shall have a minimum of 5-years experience in the installation of waterproofing systems of the type specified, and be licensed or approved by the manufacturer of the waterproofing materials. C. Pre-Installation Conference: Just prior to the commencement of the fluid-applied waterproofing, meet at the Project site with the representative of the membrane manufacturer, the waterproofing installer, Contractor, and other parties affected by the installation of the membrane. Review methods and procedures including, but not limited to, substrate conditions, drains, penetrations, waterproofing requirements, construction scheduling and availability of materials, inspection, testing, and certification procedures. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials in the original packages or containers until ready for use. B. Follow special handling or storage requirements of the manufacturer. 1.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Maintain a quality control program to verify compliance with this Specification. Keep a daily log to record actions in the field. B. Notify the manufacturer's representative 2-days prior to coating application in order to allow the representative to make an application inspection to verify that proper application methods are used. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Substrate: Proceed with the work of this Section only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed. B. Weather. Proceed with work of this Section only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 0407-06 HOT-RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING Progress CD Set 07144-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07144 VAIL, COLORADO HOT-RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING C. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation to prevent accumulation of hazardous fumes during application. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Furnish manufacturer's standard warranty, signed by the Contractor and the installer, agreeing to repair or replace defective materials and workmanship, defined to include leakage of water, abnormal aging or deterioration of materials, and other failures of membrane waterproofing to perform as required This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period. 15 years from date of substantial completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. American Hydrotech, Inc. 'MM6125 Fabric Reinforced (FR) System" . 4-rempreof , Y B. Alternates: Permaquik Inc. "Permaquik 6100", Carlisle Inc. "CCW-500R Relnforced". 2.02 MATERIALS A. Membrane: Single-component, rubberized-asphalt membrane system formulated for minimum 215-mil thick-coat application, complying with the following requirements: 1. Solids Content: 100-percent. 2. Low-Temperature Fle)dlAlity: No cracking, delamination, or adhesion loss when 1184nch thick membrane applied to aluminum substrate is subjected to 90-degree bend over 1144nch mandrel in one-second time period at -15-deg. F. 3. Water Resistance: No delamination, blistering, emulsion, or deterioration after 24-hours at 77-deg. F.; ASTM D2939. 4. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.03-perms maximum for 1/8-inch thick membrane at 100-deg. F.; ASTM D96, Procedure E. 5. Water Absorption: Maximum 0.18-percent weight gain for 1/8-inch thick membrane after 72-hours total immersion. 6. Penetration: Maximum 110 at 77-deg. F., maximum 200 at 122-deg. F.; ASTM D1191. 7. Flow. None at 120-deg. F., maximum 3.0-mm at 140-deg. F.; ASTM D1191. 8. Softening Point: 120-deg. F. minimum; ASTM D36. 9. Minimum Ambient Application Temperature: 0-deg. F. 10. Pouring (Application) Temperature: 400-deg. F. 11. Flash Point: 500-deg. F. minimum; ASTM D92 (Cleveland Open Cup). 12. Service Temperature Range: 0-deg. F. to 120-deg. F. B. Primer. As recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. C. Reinforcing Fabric: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. D. Protection Board: "Hydroflex 30" or as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. E. Prefabricated Drainage Board: "Hydrodrain 300" or as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 04-07-06 HOT-RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING Progress CD Set 07144 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07144 VAIL, COLORADO HOT-RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS Surfaces shall be dean and free of any oil, dirt, grease, laitance, curing compounds, and other contaminants that may interfere with adhesion of the waterproofing. Surfaces shall be left broom clean. B. Concrete: Concrete surfaces shall be finished with a wood float finish, and left free of loose particles, ridges, projections, voids and droppings that would interfere with the application of waterproofing. Allow concrete to cure as recommended by waterproof membrane manufacturer. C. Mask off adjoining surfaces not to receive waterproofing to prevent spillage of materials outside membrane area. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Prior to membrane application, apply primer at coverage rate recommended by membrane manufacturer. Allow to dry before applying membrane. B. Heat membrane calves in double jacketed o1-bath kettle equipped with a mechanically-operated agitator and two thermometers for the membrane and oil. Do not exceed temperatures recommended by membrane manufacturer. C. Construction Joints and Cracks: Atjoints over 1/164nch but less than 1/4-inch in width, apply 125-mils (1/8-inch) of membrane and center a 64nch wide strip of reinforcing fabric over the joint or crack and imbed into warm membrane avoiding air pockets. Apply a second coat of liquid membrane 125-mils (1/8-inch) thick over the reinforcement to encapsulate it D. Expansion Joints: Treat expansion joints up to 1/24nch wide with a designed total movement of less than 50-percent and cracks exceeding 1/44nch wide in accordance with membrane manufacturer's instructions. At expansion joints from 1/2-inch to 24nches in width with a designed total movement of less than 50- percent, bop reinforcing fabric into joint to a depth equal to the joint width and waterproof in accordance with membrane manufacturer's instructions. E. Flashing: Waterproof changes in planes, curbs, penetrations, and drams in accordance with membrane manufacturer's instructions. Apply membrane evenly at a rate of approximately 404mils and embed reinforcing fabric. Apply a second layer of membrane at a rate of approximately 125-mils. Minimum membrane thickness shall be 165-mils at any point 0407-06 HOT RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING Progress CD Set 07144 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07144 VAIL, COLORADO HOT-RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING 3.03 PERFORMANCE TESTING A. Before membrane has attained its final set, verify applied thickness by use of a mil thickness gauge. Apply additional membrane material where required to result in specified thickness. B. In-Place Testing: Before completed membranes are covered by protection course test for leaks surrounding drains and lashings with 34nch depth of water maintained for48-hours. Repair leaks revealed by examination of substrate and repeat test until no leakage is observed. C. Visual Inspection: Where membrane cannot be water flood tested, visually inspect for voids, damage, or rupture. Repair as required. 3.04 PROTECTION A. As soon as possible after completion of water testing or visual inspection, cover membrane with protection board. B. Cover protection board with prefabricated drainage board applied in accordance with manufacturer's instrucions. END OF SECTION 04-07.06 HOT-RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING Progress CD Set 07144-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 07170 - BENTONITE WATERPROOFING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION SECTION 07170 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and instaing bentonite waterproofing below mat slab foundation, below and around elevator pits, and on foundation support system (to waterproof belo*grade retaining walls). B. Related Sections: 1. Elastomeric sheet waterproofing is specified in Section 07132. 2. Modified bituminous sheet membrane waterproofing is specified in Section 07136. 3. Elastomedc liquid waterproofing is specified in Section 07142. 4. Hot-rubberized asphalt membrane waterproofing is specified in Section 07144. 5. Waterstop sealant is specified in Section 07920. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive and technical data, with complete general and specific installation recommendations and instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details and interface with other work, including other waterproofing materials. C. Certification: Manufacturer's Certificates of Compliance indicating that materials delivered and used in the work are in compliance with specified requirements and were installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instal by applicator specializing in installation of specified products with a minimum of 3-years experience and approved by manufacturer. B. Convene a pre-installation job4te conference a rnininwm of 3-weeks prior to commencing the work of this Section. Examine drawings and specifications, verify all conditions, review installation procedures, and coordinate scheduling with interfacing portions of the work. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivver materials as factory packaged, sealed, and labeled, and handle and protect as necessary to prevent damage and deterioration during shipment, handing, and storage. B. Maintain waterproofing manrials in a dry condition during delivery, storage, handling, installation and concealment. C. Follow special instructions by manufacturer. 007-06 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING Progress CD Set 07170-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 07170 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Do not proceed with installation when work areas are flooded or excessively wet or when rain is anticipated before waterproofing materials can be placed, covered, and protected. B. Substrates over which waterproofing Will be installed shah have dried in fair weather not less than 72-hours in advance of installation. C. Where work of this Section will encounter groundwater, provide waterproofing manufacturer With sufficient groundwater samples taken from the Project at logged locations for manufacturer's laboratory analysis. Manufacturer shag provide written report confirming laboratory testing with regard to suitability of waterproofing system for installation in Project conditions. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Waterproofing materials shag be free from defects in materials and workmanship and installation shag be warranted to be waterproof for a period of 5-years from date of Acceptance of Work This warranty shag be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURER A. Tremco'Vulkem Paraseal LG' at blind side and below slab applications and "Vulkem Paraseal" at positive side applications, Cetco Building Materials Group "Vortex DS" or approved equal. 2.02 BENTONITE MATERIALS A. Bentonite Sheet Membrane: Three component waterproofing membrane consisting of hlJh- density polyethylene (HDPE), self-sealing layer of sodium montmorillonite (bentoniite) modified to delay expansion, and protective layer of spun polypropylene. Membrane shall be designed for bgndside installation over lagging system, meeting or exceeding the following physical properties: 1. Puncture Resistance; 169-pounds, ASTM E154. 2. Tensile Strength: 4,000-psi, ASTM D41Z 3. Water Vapor Pemneance: 0.03-peens, ASTM E96. 4. Percent Elongation: 700-percent, ASTM D638, Type 4 Dumbell. 5. Resistance to Hydrostatic Head:150•feet, ASTM D571. 6. Warranted Crack-Bridging CapabtTdr 1/8-inch. B. Bentonite Caulk: 'Paramastic' bentonite expandable cauk non hydrated expandable caulk containing not less than 55-percent high sweifng, Wyoming bentonite. Bentonite cauk shag be resistant to rain damage, and may be installed at temperatures of -15-deg. F. to 110-deg. F. and shall retain 200-percent residual swell. C. Granular Bentonite: 'Paragranular' granular bentonite shall swell to occupy a minimum volume of 17-mg when 2- grams are dispersed into delonized water. Granular bentonite shall be dust free, and packaged in waterproof bags. 04.07-06 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING Progress CD Set 07170 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07170 VAIL, COLORADO BENTONITE WATERPROOFING D. Termination Bar:'Paraterm" molded termination bar for use at reglets, parapet Walls and grade terminations. E. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil polyethylene. F. Waterstop and Penetration Sealing Tape: Sealing tape with bentonite on both sides of polyethylene plastic strip. G. Expandable Waterstop: As specified in Section 07920. H. Permanent Seam Tape: Self adhesive polyethylene. backed tape for use on all seams. 1. Fluid Applied Flashing Mastic: Vulkem 4501351 or approved equal, UV resistant and compatible with sheet membrane system. J. Fasteners: Provide case-hardened steel nails, powder shot steel pins, or steel staples as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for securing waterproofing to excavation support system. K Composite Drainage Panel at Vertical Walls: Tremco "TREMDrain 2000", Cetco Building Materials Group "Aquadrain 13X". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A Verify that surfaces are free of standing water, debris, loose materials, and voids or interruptions which would affect installation. B. Prior to commencing installation, an authorized manufacturer's representative shall inspect jobsite conditions and report findings to Architect C. Provide representative soil samples to waterproofing system manufacturer to determine ff any contaminants are present 3.02 PREPARATION A Parge voids and pits larger than 114-inch diameter, cracks, and joints to flush condition using either cement grout or bentonite caulk. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, recommendations, and specific project application instructions. 1. Coves: Form 24nch coves with granular bentonite at horizontal-to-vertical junctures. Form 141ch coves with sealant, elaslumeric flashing or expandable mastic at vertical inside comers and under ledges. 2. Place membrane in manner that assures minimum handling. Fit closely to and seal around inlets, outlets and other penetrations. Press membrane tight to comer surfaces and sewely fasten. 3. Terminate membrane system with termination bar finished off with bead of sealant or terminate to elastomeric flashing using reinforced waterproofing tape. 0407-06 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING Progress CD Set 07170 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07170 VAIL, COLORADO BENTONITE WATERPROOFING B Excavation Support System (shoring) - Blind Side Installation: 1. Ensure that vertical surfaces to receive waterproofing conform to manufacturers requirements. 2. Install waterproofing membrane starter-strip to vertical surfaces of earth retaining system with bentonite-side facing applicator prior to placement of concrete footings or foundation mat slab. 3. Prepare vertical inside comers that occur along the earth retaining system by fastening a minimum 12- inch wide strip of membrane pressed tight into comer with bentonite-side facing applicator. Fasten along vertical edges 24-inches on center. 4. Instal membrane sheets oriented vertically with bentonite-side facing applicator. Overlap membrane sheets 34iches minimum for poured4n-plaoe walls and 4-inches minimum for shotcxeteigunite walls. Securely fasten membrane through both sheets at overlap areas with nalls every 244nches on center and staples every 3-indies on center. 5. Verify which penetrations must be accessed after concrete placement for completion of waterproofing detail treatment and ensure that sufficient access to membrane is provided within a formed boxout. Verify which penetrations will not be accessed after concrete placement for completion of waterproofing detail treatment and ensure that final detailing procedures are completed prior to erection of concrete formwork or shotcretinglguni8ng. Waterproof penetrations in accordance with manufacturer's procedures. 6. Protect membrane system from excessive rain. 7. Inspect and repair damages to membrane system immediately prior to installation of concrete formwork or shotcretinglguniting. Ensure that concrete directly contacts membrane. 8. Complete waterproofing details and terminations at grade with other work. C. Backfilled Vertical Walls - Positive Side Installation: 1. Install membrane sheets in vertical or horizontal Iffts with HDPE--side facing applicator to prepared surfaces conforming to manufacturer's Instructions. a. Vertical Installation: Securely fasten membrane 12-inches on center along top edge with sheet extending out onto footing surfaces Unches minimum, overlapping below-slab membrane 64nches. Install subsequent membrane sheets to overlap previous sheets 1.1124nch minimum. Securely fasten 18-inches on center to bps of footing surfaces andhorizontal shelves. Apply seam tape to seam overlaps. b. Horizontal Installation: Start membrane at lowest portion of wall. Securely fasten membrane 2447dres on center along top edge with sheet extending out onto footing surfaces 6-inches minimum, overlapping under slab membrane 6-inches. Install subsequent membrane sheets to overlap previous sheets minimum 1.112-Inches In shingle fashion with staggered end laps. Securely fasten membrane 24-kches on center through both sheets at overlaps. Securely fasten 1s4nches on center to tops of footing surfaces and horizontal shelves. Apply seam tape to seam overlaps. 2. Waterproof penetrations In accordance with manuhcturer's Instructions. 3. More coarse backfill material is used and where recommended by bentonite sheet manufacturer, install protection board over waterproofing before backfilling. 04-07-06 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING Progress CD Set 07170 - 4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 07170 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING D. Below Stab Installation: 1. Bentonite-side Up: a. Install membrane sheets bentonite-side up with edges overlapped 3-inches minimum over stable, smoothed and compacted subgrade or mud slab, position membrane to stagger end laps 12-inches; securely fasten seams with staples every 8-inches on center. b. Extend membrane upward 6-inches minimum within the formwork at bottom edges of mat slabs and wrapped footings to provide for proper tie-in to vertical membrane; install membrane in double layer continuous along bottom edges of slabs and wrapped footings extending 6-inches from edge to both directions. C. Install membrane to wrap footings where indicated, carry membrane across top surfaces of unwrapped footings or mud slab to interior vertical faces of walls and columns and terminate as manufacturer recommends. d. Waterproof penetrations in accord with manufacturers recommendations. e. Verify membrane is protected from damage caused by rebar and support chairs. f. Protect exposed bentonite from moisture with temporary plastic sheets; remove plastic sheets before final covering. g. Inspect and repair damaged material immediately before concrete placement. 2 Bentonite-side Down: a. Install polyethylene base sheets with edges lapped 5-inches over stable, smoothed and compacted subgrade or mud slab; trim base sheet away from penetrations and terminations. b. Install membrane bentonite-side down over polyethylene base sheets with edges lapped 3-inches minimum, position membrane sheets to stagger end laps 12- inches; tape seams with reinforced seam tape closely following membrane placement and Immediately secure by roll-pressing with hand-held metal seam roller. C. Extend membrane upward 6-inches minimum within the formwork at bottom edges of mat slabs and wrapped footings; install a second layer of membrane, with the bentonite-side up, under the field membrane and extending upward within the fommwork at bottom edges of mat slabs and wrapped footings to provide for proper tie-in to vertical membrane, membrane double layer continuous along bottom edges of slabs and wrapped footings shall extend 64nches from edge in both directions. d. Install membrane to wrap footings where indicated; carry membrane across top surfaces of unwrapped footings or mud slab to interior vertical faces of walls and columns and terminate as manufacturer recommends. e. Waterproof penetrations In accord with manufacturer's recommendations. Verify membrane is protected from damage caused by rebar and support chairs. 04-07-06 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING Progress CD Set 07170 - 5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 07170 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING g- Inspect and repair damaged material immediately before concrete placement END OF SECTION 04-07-06 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING Progress CD Set 07170 - 6 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 07180 WATER REPELLENT TRAFFIC COATING SECTION 07180 -WATER REPELLENT TRAFFIC COATING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing fluid-applied water-repellent traffic coating to parking level decks. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications, surface preparation and application instructions, recommendations for water repellents for each surface specified, and protection and cleaning instructions. Include data substantiating that materials are recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated and comply with specified requirements. B. Samples: 16 inch square samples of each substrate to receive water-repellent, with water-repellent applied to half of each sample. C. Certification by water repellent manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controAing use of volatile organic compounds (VOC). 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A: Installation shall be by an applicator with not less than 3-years experience in application of water-repellents of types specified. B. The water-repellent shall not darken, stain, or discolor substrate surfaces. The product shall not change the reflectivity of the surface by having a sheen or a gloss when dry. C. Materials shall comply with applicable statutory health and environmental requirements, including VOC limits. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of water repellent under any of the following conditions: 1. Ambient temperature is less than 40-deg. F. 2. Substrate surfaces have cured for less than one month. 3. Rain or temperatures below 40-deg. F. are predicted for a period of 24-hours. 4. Earlier than 24-hours after surfaces became wet 5. Surface temperature is less than 40-deg. F. 6. Windy condition such that water repellent may be blown to vegetation or substrates not intended to be coated. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Warrant that surfaces treated with water-repellent will be free of defects in materials and workmanship and that surfaces will remain water-repellent for a period of 2-years from the date of Substantial Completion. B. Where the terms of the manufacturer's warranty require, furnish a full-time jobsite inspector to supervise application of water- repellent coatings. C. Locate and recoat defective work during warranty period at no cost to the Owner. D. This warranty shalt be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 0407.06 WATER REPELLENT TRAFFIC COATING Progress CD Set 07180-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07180 VAIL, COLORADO WATER REPELLENT TRAFFIC COATING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Approved Manufacturer. Hydrozo'Enviroseal 40' or approved equal. B. Water Repellent Coating: Clear, penetrating, water-based silane sealer designed to protect concrete surfaces exposed to weather elements and chloride ions. Water repellent shall penetrate and chemically react within the pores of cementiflous surfaces to form a long-lasting water repellent surface. C. Application Equipment: Low-pressure airless sprayer and hoses as recommended by water-repellent coating manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Prior to execution of work, meet with the water-repellent manufacturer's technical representative and the Architect and inspect the surfaces to be treated and conditions under which the water-repellent coatings will be applied. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Test Application: Prepare a 244nch square application in an unobtrusive location in a manner acceptable to Architect. B. Clean and prepare substrates in accordance with water-repellent coating manufacturer's instructions. Test for moisture content in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to ensure that surface is sufficiently dry. C. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over. D. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass where required. E. Cover plant materials with drop cloths. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Apply a heavy saturation spray coating of water-repellent to surfaces exposed to the elements using low pressure spray equipment. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, using airless spraying procedure. B. Apply one coat of water-repellent at application rates recommended by manufacturer for applicable substrates to provide effective treatment. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean spillage and over-spray from adjoining surfaces. Comply with manufacturers recommendations for cleaning. END OF SECTION "U-06 WATER REPELLENT TRAFFIC COATING Progress CD Set 07180-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07190 VAIL, COLORADO WATER REPELLENT COATINGS SECTION 07190 - WATER REPELLENT COATINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing fluid-applied water-repellent coating on exterior architectural precast concrete and stone veneer surfaces. B. Related Sections: 1. Architectural precast concrete specialties are specified in Section 03480. 2. Exterior rough stone veneer is specified in Section 04410. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications, surface preparation and application instructions, recommendations for water repellents for each surface specified, and protection and cleaning instructions. Include data substantiating that materials are recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated and comply with specified requirements. B. Samples: 16-inch square samples of each substrate to receive water-repellent, with water-repellent applied to half of each sample. C. Certification by water repellent manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC). D. Field Sample: 1. Install at a pre-selected area of the building an area for field sample as directed by the Architect. a. Provide mock-up of at least 25-square feet to include surface preparation, sealant joint, and juncture details and allow for evaluation of repellent performance and finish. b. Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Manufacturer's representative or designated representative shall review technical aspects including surface preparation, application and performance. 3. Field sample shall be the standard for judging workmanship on remainder of the Project. 4. Maintain field sample during construction for workmanship comparison. 5. Do not alter, move, or destroy field sample until directed by the Architect 6. Obtain Architect's written approval of field sample before start of material application, including approval of aesthetics, color, texture, and appearance. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer shall have a minimum 15-years experience in manufacturing water repellent coatings. B. Installation shall be by an applicator with not less than 5-years experience in application of water-repellents of types specified on Projects of similar size and scope and be acceptable to the manufacturer. C. The water-repellent shall not darken, stain, or discolor substrate surfaces. The product shall not change the reflectivity of the surface by having a sheen or a gloss when dry. D. Materials shall comply with applicable statutory health and environmental requirements, including VOC limits. 0407-06 WATER REPELLENT COATINGS Progress CD Set 07190-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07190 VAIL, COLORADO WATER REPELLENT COATINGS 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid delays. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Store in unopened containers in a cool, dry area. Keep material from freezing in the container, do not store below 35-deg. F. or above 100-deg. F. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of water repellent under any of the following conditions: 1. Ambient temperature is less than 40-deg. F. 2. Substrate surfaces have cured for less than one month. 3. Rain or temperatures below 40-deg. F. are predicted for a period of 12-hours. 4. Earlier than 24-hours after surfaces became wet. 5. Surface temperature is less than 40-deg. F. 6. Windy conditions such that water repellent may be blown to vegetation or substrates not intended to be coated. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Water-Repellent Coating over Rough Stone and Precast Concrete Surfaces: Degussa Building Systems'Aqua- Trete BSM 20', Enviroseal 20 or approved equal 20-percent silane solution. 1. Water repellent material shall have the following minimum performance: a. Flash Point: >200-deg. F., ASTM D3278. b. VOC Content: <300 g/L, EPA Method 24. C. Water Repellency Test (21 day submersion): 75-percent reduction in weight gain, ASTM C642. d. Water Absorption (48-hours): 0.53-percent, ASTM C642. e. Resistance to Chloride Ion Penetration, AASHTO T259 and T260: 1) Criteria of 1.5 at %4nch: <0.27-Ib/cy. 2) Criteria of 0.75 at 14nch: 0.00-ib/cy. f. Water Weight Gain: 86-percent reduction. g. Absorbed Chloride: 92-percent reduction. B. Water-Repellent Coating over Porous Stone Surfaces: Degussa Building Systems -Hydrozo Enviroseal Double 7 for Brick", "Aqua-Trete ConoentraW or approved equal water-based dear slanetsiloxane. 0407-06 WATER REPELLENT COATINGS Progress CD Set 07190-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 07190 WATER REPELLENT COATINGS 1. Water repellent material shall have the following minimum performance: a. Solids and Active Ingredients: 12-percent by weight b. VOC Content: <250 gn. C. Penetration: 1/16- to 3/8anch average depth depending upon substrate. d. Flash Point: >212-deg. F., ASTM D3278. e. Leakage on Brick Wall: >94.8-percent reduction, ASTM E514. f. Moisture Vapor Transmission Rate at 75-deg. F.: 1) 49.84sq.8./20ours. 2) 86-percent of untreated substrate. g. Accelerated Weathering, 1,500-hours: No change. C. Application Equipment: Low-pressure airless sprayer and hoses as recommended by water-repellent coating manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Prior to execution of work, meet with the water-repellent manufacturer's technical representative and the Owner's Representative and inspect the surfaces to be treated and conditions under which the water-repellent coatings will be applied. B. The manufacturer's representative shall be present during the preparation and testing phase of the application and periodically during installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surfaces shall be dean, structurally sound, and fully cured. Remove dust, dirt, paint, bitumens, efflorescence, oil, pollution deposits and curing, forming and parting compounds. Use abrasive blast as required to achieve the required surface condition. B. Complete caulking, pointing, and restoration work before applying water repellent Allow to cure. C. Treat and remove alkali and efflorescence with proper neutralizing compound recommended by manufacftmer. D. Protect plant life and surfaces to remain uncoated during application. Use drop cloths or masking as required. E. Using cardboard template, temporarily cover windows during application of water repellent. F. Mix concentrated products with water in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations based on substrates to be treated and the performance level required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Apply by low-pressure, non-atomizing spray. B. Flood vertical surfaces to saturation by applying from the bottom up with a controlled 8- to 12-inch material rundown to ensure maximum penetration into the substrate. C. For horizontal surfaces, apply to saturation. If required, follow by squeegee or broom to eliminate ponding. 0407.06 WATER REPELLENT CQATINCr4 Progress CD Set 07190 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL. COLORADO 3.04 CLEANING SECTION 07190 WATER REPELLENT COATINGS A. Clean spillage and overspray from adjoining surfaces. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning. B. Wipe windows with dampened cloth or sponge immediately fbiowing application. C. Remove temporary coverings and protection from adjacent work areas. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 WATER REPELLENT COATINGS Progress CD Set 07190-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS 11 RESORTS SECTION 07195 VAIL, COLORADO WALL MEMBRANE SECTION 07195 -WALL MEMBRANE PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section provides for a flexible rubberized asphalt, sell-sealing air and vapor barrier under exterior rough stone veneer. B. Related Sections: 1. Exterior rough stone veneer is specified in Section 04410. 2. Plywood wall sheathing is specified in Section 06101. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data and Shop Drawings: Include product information, details and installation procedures. B. Test Reports: Indicating compliance with the performance requirements of this Section. C. Samples of wall membrane. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for storage and handling of each product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Grace Construction Products "Perm-A-Barrier" or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Description:.9 mm (36 mils) of self-adhesive rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to. I mm (4 mils) of cross- laminated, high-density polyethylene film to provide a min. 1 mm (40 mill) thick membrane. Membrane shall be interleaved with disposable silicone-coated release paper until installed. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96, Method B - 0.05 perms maximum 2. Water Absorption: ASTM D570 - Max. 0.1 % by weight 3. Puncture Resistance: ASTM E154 - 40-lbs. 4. Tear Resistance: a. Initiation, ASTM D1004 - min. 7.04bs. M.D. b. Propagation, ASTM D1938 - min. 4.0-lbs. M.D. 5. Lap Adhesion at -4°C (25°F): ASTM D1876 - 5.04bs.An. of width 0407-06 WALL ME BME Progress CD Set 07195-1 P E C [R S PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 07195 WALL MEMBRANE 6. Low Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D1970 - Unaffected to -43°C (-45°F) 7. Tensile Strength: ASTM D412, Die C Modified - Min. 400-psi 8. Elongation, Ultimate Failure of Rubberized Asphalt ASTM D412 - Die C - Min. 200% C. Air and Vapor Barrier Accessories: 1. Surface Conditioner. Grace Construction Products 'Perm-A-Barrier Surface Conditioner" or approved equal. a. Description: Water-based latex liquid for substrate preparation. 1) Flash Point No flash to boiling point 2) Solvent Type: Water 3) VOC Content Not to exceed 125 gA 4) Application Temperature: -4°C (25°F) and above 5) FreezelThaw Stability: 5 cycles min. 6) Freezing point (as packaged): -10°C (14°F) 2. Termination Mastic: Grace Construction Products'Bituthene Mastic or approved equal. a. Description: Rubberized asphalt-based mastic with 200 gA max. VOC Content 3. Primer: Grace Construction Products'Perm-A-Barrier WB' or approved equal. a. Description: Water-based latex primer 1) Specially designed for glass mat surfaced exterior gypsum boards 2) VOC Content Not to exceed 10 gA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation, tolerances and other specific conditions affecting performance of air and vapor barrier. 3.02 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION A. Substrate to be smooth and free of voids, spalled areas, loose aggregate and sharp protrusions that would hinder the adhesion or regularity of the air & vapor barrier membrane. B. Remove all deleterious materials from surfaces to be covered. 04-07-06 WALL MEMBRANE Progress CD Set 07195 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO 3.03 INSTALLATION A. B. SECTION 07195 WALL MEMBRANE General: Instal air and vapor barrier to dry surfaces at air and surface temperatures of -4°C (25°F) and above in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, at locations indicated on Construction Documents. Air and Vapor Barrier Membrane: Precut pieces of air & vapor barrier into easily-handled lengths. C. 2. Remove silicone-coated release paper and position membrane carefully before placing length horizontally against the surface. 3. Begin installation at the base of the wall placing top edge of membrane immediately below any masonry reinforcement or ties protruding from substrate. 4. When property positioned, place against surface by pressing firmly into place. Roll membrane with extension-handled countertop roller immediately after placement 5. Overlap horizontally-adjacent pieces 2-inches and roll seams. 6. Subsequent sheets of membrane applied above shall be positioned immediately below masonry reinforcement or ties. Bottom edge shall be slit to fit around reinforcing wires or ties, and membrane shall overlap the membrane sheet below by 2-inches. Roll firmly into place. 7. Seal around masonry reinforcing or ties and all penetrations with termination mastic. 8. Continue the membrane into all openings in the wall, such as doors, windows, etc., and terminate at points that will prevent visibility from interior. 9. Coordinate the installation of air & vapor barrier with roof installer to ensure continuity of membrane with rooftop air and vapor membrane. 10. At end of each working day seal top edge of air and vapor barrier to substrate with termination mastic. 11. Do not allow the rubberized asphalt surface of the air and vapor barrier membrane to come in contact with polysulfide sealants, creosote, uncured coal tar products or EPDM. 12. Do not expose air and vapor barrier membrane to sunlight for more than thirty days prior to enclosure. 13. Inspect installation prior to enclosing and repair punctures, damaged areas and inadequately lapped seams with a patch of the membrane sized to extend 64nches in all directions from the perimeter of the affected area. Accessories: 1. When required by dirty or dusty site conditions or by surfaces having irregular or rough texture or if it becomes difficult to adhere the air & vapor barrier to the substrate, apply surface conditioner by spray, brush, or roller at the rate recommended by manufacturer, prior to membrane installation. Allow surface conditioner to dry completely before membrane application. 2. Apply a bead or trowel coat of mastic along membrane edges, seams, cuts, and penetrations. 04-07.06 WALL MEMBRANE Progress CD Set 07195 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07195 VAIL, COLORADO WALL MEMBRANE 3. Apply primer by brush or heavy nap, natural-material roller at rate recommended by manufacturer prior to membrane installation. Allow primer to dry completely before membrane application. END OF SECTION 007-06 WALL MEMBRANE Progress CD Set 07195 - 4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07210 VAIL, COLORADO BUILDING INSULATION SECTION 07210 • BUILDING INSULATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing the following types of thermal insulation: 1. Batt/blanket insulation. 2. Rigid board insulation at steam rooms, saunas, and as indicated. 3. Associated vapor barriers. B. Related Sections: 1. Roof board insulation under built-up roofing and at sloped roof areas under roofing file is specified in Section 07220. 2. Firestopping insulation is specified in Section 07840. 3. Acoustical insulation is specified in Section 09840. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Thermal Conductivity: Where insulation is identified by "R" value, provide thickness required to achieve Indicated value. B. Fire Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance and flammability ratings specified. 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation from physical damage and from becoming wet or soiled. Comply with manufachuei's recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 BATT AND BLANKET INSULATION A. Unfaced Minerai/Glass Fiber Blanket(Batt Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by combining mineral-glass fibers with themnosetting resins to comply with ASTM C665, Type I. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Ma)dmum flame spread and smoke developed values of 25 and 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Approved Manufacturers: CertainTeed'Unfaced Building Insulation', Johns Manville 'Thermal-SHIELD Unfaced Insulation', Owens Coming "Unfaced Thermal Batt Insulation" or approved equal. 3. Thickness: As required for R-19 in walls and R-30 in roofs and below terrace slabs. 2.02 BOARD INSULATION A. Unlaced Glass Fiber Board Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by combining glass fibers with thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C612, Class 1A or 1 B (3.0-pcf). 1. Approved Manufacturers: Johns Manville "Insul-SHIELD US 300', Owens Coming "Type 703' or approved equal. 2. Thickness: As indicated. 4 } 04-07A Progress CD Set BUILDING WS"TION 07210-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07210 VAIL, COLORADO BUILDING INSULATION B. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Extruded polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C578, Type V. Approved Manufacturers: Dow 'Styrofoam Brand High Load', Owens Corning 'Foamular 1000" or approved equal. 2. Compressive Strength, ASTM D1621:100-psi. 3. Flexural Strength, ASTM C203:100-psi. 4. Water Absorption, ASTM C272: 0.1-percent by volume. 5. Water Vapor Permeance, ASTM E96:0.8-perms. 6. Dimensional Stability, ASTM D2126: 3.5-percent linear change. 7. Thickness: As indicated. 8. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke development values of 5 and 165 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Mechanical Anchors: Miracle Adhesive Corp. "Stuck-Up", Stic-Klip Mfg. Co. "Sbc-Klip' or approved equal. Provide protective covers or an approved unpointed clip for areas under T-W above the floor. B. Polyethylene Vapor Barrier: ASTM D4397,6-mil thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13-perms. Tape and seal all joints and around ! behind all penetrations and obstructions to make a continuous air-tight barrier. C. Pencil Rods at Steam Room: Mild steel rods, 114-inch diameter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation conditions. 2. Do not install insulation until building is sufficiently enclosed or protected against absorption of moisture by the insulation, and do not install insulation unless supporting framing and construction is in a thoroughly dry condition. 3. Install snugly between framing members with ends snugly fitted between units and against adjacent construction. 4. Carefully cut and fit insulation around pipes, conduit, and other obstructions and penetrations. 5. Where door and window frames occur in framing, cut additional strips of insulation and hand-pack as required to fib voids in and around such frames. B. Thermal Batt(Blanket Insulation: Install to completely fill typical and odd spaces in framing where required, other than providing air space as specified. 2. Cover installed insulation with vapor barrier. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage systems. Extend to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filed with loose- fiber insulation. 007-06 BUILDING INSULATION Progress CD Set 07210-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07210 VAIL, COLORADO BUILDING INSULATION 3. Seal vertical joints in vapor barriers over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 164nches on center. 4. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. C. Horizontal Batl/Blanket Insulation: Install insulation over insulation fasteners as indicated. Where required, install insulation fasteners prior to application of sprayed-on fireproofing. 2. Space fasteners and secure in a full bed of adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Lay out insulation for minimum of joints, and with no single pieces less than 24-inches wide nor less than 484nches long, unless otherwise approved. 4. Offset intermediate end joints in adjacent panels not less than 48-inches. 5. Do not install insulation until clip adhesive is set. 6. Install insulation fully bearing against substrates, with tightly fitted joints. Install fastener caps firmly against insulation face without compressing the material. Bend dip prongs flat against caps. D. Steam Room Insulation: 1. Attach a minimum of 4 equally spaced tie wires to each metal stud prior to application of vapor barrier and insulation. 2. Extend vapor barrier over areas to be insulated and secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system. Seal vertical joints over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs and seal overlapping joints with adhesive; locate joints over solid surfaces. Seal penetrations caused by wire ties, conduits, pipes, and similar penetrating items with tape to create an air-tight seal. Repair punctures and tears before concealment by other work. 3. Install unfaced glass fiberboards over vapor barrier and wire ties and secure in place with vertical pencil rods secured over insulation and tied with wire. Install insulation fully bearing against vapor barrier with tightly fitted joints. 4. Tape joints between insulation units with non-deteriorating, water-resistant tape to prevent draftproofing through insulation. 3.02 PROTECTION A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor barriers from harmful exposures and from physical damage. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 BULDING INSULATION Progress CD Set 07210 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07220 VAIL, COLORADO ROOF BOARD INSULATION SECTION 07220 - ROOF BOARD INSULATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section descnbes the requirements for furnishing and installing roof insulation. B. Related Sections: 1. Wood nafiers and plywood sheathing are specified in Section 06101. 2. Asphalt shingles are specified in Section 07311. 3. Modified bitumen roof membrane is specified in Section 07550. 4. Gypsum sheathing is specified in Section 09252. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show layout and identification of tapered roof insulation pieces. B. Certification from roof membrane manufacturer that insulation proposed for use is acceptable for application of roofing. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Labels and Approvals: Roof insulation shall be listed by UL for use with UL class A roof covering systems, and bear the UL label or be delivered with a UL certification of compliance. B. Roof insulation under built-up roofing shall be approved by the manufacturer of the roofing materials specified in Section 07550. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF INSULATION AT MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING A. Polyisocyanurate Board Roof Insulation: Rigid, non-composite, isocyanurate core bonded to facings, complying with FS HH-1-1972. 1. Approved Manufacturers: Apache Products Company'Pyrox', Atlas Roofing Corporation'ACFoarn IP, Cebtex'Hy-Therm AP", GAF 'Isotherm, Johns Manville'UNraGard", Rmax, Inc. 'Multi-Max FA" or approved equal. 2. Thickness: As indicated for a minimum R-value of 30. B. Tapered Perlite Board Roof Insulation: Rigid perfite boards, factory cut, cleaned and vacuumed, complying with ASTM C728. 1. Approved Manufacturers: GAF'Permalite Tapered Roof Insulation', Johns Manville'fapemd Fesco' or approved equal. 2. Slope. 114-inch per horizontal foot. 3. Fill Insulation: Polyisocyanurate boards as specified. C. Cant Strips and Tapered Edge Pieces: Rigid tapered perlite complying with ASTM C728. 1. Approved Manufacturers: GAF 'GAFCANT' and "GAFEDGE", Johns Manville 'FesCant Plus Cant Strips" and'Fesco Tapered Edge Strips' or approved equal. 0407-06 ROOF BOARD MLATION Progress CD Set 07220-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07220 VAIL, COLORADO ROOF BOARD INSULATION 2.02 ROOF INSULATION AT ASPHALT SHINGLES A. Material: Closed-cell HCFC Free `Green' polyisocyanurate insulation board bonded to 7/164nch thick APAITECO rated OSB on the top side and with a glass fiber reinforced felt facer on the bottom, complying with ASTM C1289, Type V.. 1. Approved Manufacturer. Atlas Roofing Corporation'ACFoam Nail Base" or approved equal. 2. Compressive Strength: 20-psi. 2. Thickness: As required for LTTR-25. 2.03 INSULATION FASTENERS A. Mechanical Fasteners: As recommended by roof insulation manufacturer for securing roof insulation to metal decking and/or gypsum roof sheathing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Test concrete substrate for excessive moisture by pouring one pint of hot bitumen at 400-deg. F. or EVT on deck, at start of each day's work, and at start of each roof area or plane. Do not proceed with roofing work if test sample foams or can be easily stripped after cooling. 3.02 INSTALLATION A Insulation, General: Install roof insulation in conformance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Do not apply more insulation in one day than can be covered with roof membrane. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Secure insulation using fasteners designed and sized for attaching roof insulation to metal decking. Fasten insulation over entire area of roofing at spacing required by Factory Mutual for Windstorm Resistance Classification 1-60. C. Tapered Cover Board Installation: Install tapered perlite insulation over rigid polyisocyanurate boards with joints staggered a minimum of 124nches. Install second layer in a full mopping of steep asphalt applied at a rate of 254bs. per 100-sq. ft. D. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush with ring of drain. E. Nailers: Install fire-retardant treated wood nailers around the perimeter and openings in the roof deck. Nailers shall be the same thickness as roof insulation. 3.03 CLEANUP A Remove debris resulting from work under this Section from roof surfaces and Project site, B. Leave surfaces in a condition acceptable to roof membrane installer. END OF SECTION 04.07-06 ROOF BOARD INSULATION Progress CD Set 07220-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07262 VAIL. COLORADO SHEATHING PAPER SECTION 07262 - SHEATHING PAPER PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing sheathing paper (air barrier). B. Related Sections: 1. Fiber cement siding and soffits are specified in Section 06401. 2. Metal lath and accessories are specified in Section 09207. 3. Portland-cement plaster is specified in Section 09220. 4. Gypsum sheathing is specified in Section 09252. 5. Plywood sheathing is specified in Section 06101. 6. Door and window flashings (flexible flashings) are specified in Section 07657. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with IBC. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Surfaces to receive sheathing paper shall be free from projecting nails, wires, or other conditions that might damage paper. B. Surfaces to be covered shall be dry, and shall have dried in fair weather not less than 3-days following wetting by snow or rain. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Air Barrier. DuPont "Tyvek CommercialWrar or approved equal, manufactured from 100-percent flash spunbonded, high density polyethylene fibers bonded by heat and pressure without binders or fillers into a sheet structure. B. Fastenings: 1. Nails: large head or with plastic washers. 2. Staples: Wide staples with minimum 1-Inch crown. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Types: Single-layer installation over gypsum sheathing or plywood sheathing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Openings and Penetrations: Flash with membrane flashing as specified in Section 07657. C. Beginning at a comer, leave approximately 6- to 12-inches of sheathing paper extended beyond the corner edge to overlap later. D. Install vertically with edges plumb and with bottom edge along the foundation line. 0407-06 SHEATHING PAPER Progress CD Set 07462-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07262 VAIL, COLORADO SHEATHING PAPER E. Seal to foundation with joint sealant Secure every 12- to 18-inches. G. Overlap ends and edges a minimum of 6-inches. H. Tape horizontal and vertical laps with pressure-sensitive tape. Seal all fastener punctures with tape, sealant, or other approved method. J. Repair any tears, breaks, holes and other damage by taping or patching. K. When complete, sheathing paper shag be flat, continuous, without excessive warps and bulges, and free from holes, cuts, tears, and other damage and defects. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 SHEATHING PAPER Progress CD Set 07262-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07264 AW, VAIL, COLORADO UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER V SECTION 07264. UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing vapor barrier and sand under concrete slabs-on-grade (that are not indicated to receive below-slab waterproofing). B. Related Sections: 1. Earthwork subgrades are specified in Section 02300. 2. Cast-in-place concrete slabs are specified in Section 03310. 1.02 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect products against damage during field handling and installation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Vapor Barrier Sheeting: Stego Industries "Stego Wrap", Reef Industries "Gdffolyn T-85", Fortifiber Corp. "Moistop Ultra" or approved equal. 1. Minimum Permeance: 0.04-perms, ASTM E96. 2. Water Vapor Barrier: Meets or exceeds Class B, ASTM E1745. 3. Thickness: Not less than 15-mils, complying with ACI 302. B. Sealing Material: High density polyethylene tape with pressure sensitive adhesive, minimum 4-inches wide. C. Pipe Boots: Construct from vapor barrier sheeting material and pressure sensitive tape in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D RAM' ~ - Glean yaFd 6and, &PH; frA_FA ARA-A-661ve dirt, debris, or-gai* Fna#eF, aI;d_ fiAes smalla-1: th_nA No. 200 sieve size: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Below-grade and grading work and items penetrating moisture barrier shall be complete prior to start of installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Vapor Barrier Sheeting: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E1643. 2. Un-roll with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the pour. 3. Lap vapor barrier over footings and seal to foundation walls. 4. Over-lap joints 6-inches and seal with pressure sensitive tape. 5. Seal penetrations, including pipes, with pipe boot. 05-12-06 Summary Permit Set UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER 07264-1 i p P PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07264 VAIL, COLORADO UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER Penetrations through vapor barrier sheeting except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities are not permitted. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier sheeting, overlapping damaged area 6- inches and taping all four sides with pressure sensitive tape. END OF SECTION 05-12-06 UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER Summary Permit Set 07264-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07311 VAIL, COLORADO ASPHALT SHINGLES SECTION 07311- ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing asphalt roofing shingles. B. Related Sections: 1. Sheet metal flashing and trim is specified in Section 07620. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's material description and installation instructions. B. Samples: Full range of samples for color and texture selection. After selection, full size shingles for color/style- /texture verification. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Minimum 3-years experience installing roofing shingles. B. Shingles shall be classified by UL as Class A and meet UL standards for wind resistance, and shall be labeled to show conformance. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in sealed packages with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. B. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions and under cover to prevent damage and contamination. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Weather Conditions: Proceed with shingle work only when weather conditions are in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Furnish shingle manufacturer's standard warranty on installed work, agreeing to repair or replace defective shingles. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Asphalt Shingles: CertainTeed "Grand Manor Shangle' or approved equal dimensional fiberglass shingle weighing approximately 430-pounds per square. 1. Color: 'Gatehouse Slate", 'Brownstone', or 'Colonial Slate'. Final color selection t0 be determined based on review of on-site mock-ups. B. Underiayment: As specified in Section 07139. C. Mineral Surface Roll Roofing: Mineral-surfaced No. 90 asphalt roll roofing, ASTM D249, surfaced on weather side with mineral granules to match roofing shingles, bearing UL Class C label. D. Asphalt Plastic Cement Fibrated asphalt cement, ASTM D2822, for trowel application. IL E. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard pre-cut units to match shingles or job-fabricated units cutfrom shingles, at Contractor's option. 0407-06 ASPHALT SHINGLES Progress M Set 07311-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07311 VAIL, COLORADO ASPHALT SHINGLES Nails: Copper, sharp pointed, conventional roofing nails with barbed shanks, minimum 3/84nch diameter head, sufficient to penetrate 3/4-inch into roofing undedayment. G. Metal Trim and Flashing: Material: Copper. ASTM B370, temper H00 or 060;16-ozJsq. ft. 2. Metal Drip Edge: Brake-formed sheet with minimum 4-inch roof deck flange and 1-1/2-inch fascia flange with a 3/84nch drip at lower edge. Modify profile as required to match existing. 3. Open Valley Flashing: Preformed, Inverted 1V` profile atcenter, extending a minimum 94nches in each direction from valley oentedine. 4. Vent Pipe Flashing: Lead conforming to ASTM B749, Type L51121, minimum 1/16-" thick. Provide lead sized to slip over and tum down into pipe, soldered to skirt at slope of roof extending at least 4- inches from pipe onto roof. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of shingles. Do not commence the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Flashings shall be installed prior to the installation of shingles. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Underlayment Install as specified in Section 07139. B. Flashings: 1. Metal Open Valleys: Comply with ARMA and NRCA recommendations. Install over waterproof membrane underlayment Install aluminum valley flashing shingle lapped at least 9-inches and sealed with plastic cement. 2. Other Fiashings: Install aluminum flashing and trim as indicated and in accordance with NRCA'Steel Roofing Manual' and ARMA'Residential Asphalt Roofing ManuaP. C. Shingles: 1. Install starter strip of specified mineral surface roll roofing or inverted shingles with tabs removed; fasten in pattern, weather exposure and number of fasteners as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Use horizontal and vertical chalk lines to ensure straight coursing. 3. Comply with installation details and recommendations of shingle manufacturer and NRCA Steep Roofing Manual. 3.03 CLEANING A. Replace damaged shingles. B. Remove excess shingles and debris from the Project site. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 ASPHALT SHINGLES Progress CD Set 07311-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07314 VAIL, COLORADO COPPER SHINGLES SECTION 07314 - COPPER SHINGLES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for fumishing and installing copper shingles. B. Related Sections: 1. Sheet metal flashing and trim is specified in Section 07620. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's material description and installation instructions. B. Samples: Full range of samples for color and texture selection. After selection, full size shingles for color/style- /texture verification. C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of all typical conditions. D. Mods-up: After approval of samples, construct a minimum 100-square foot roof area showing all copper shingle roofing materials and installation techniques to be used. Include field areas terminating in a valley. Make modifications as directed by the Architect until mock-up is approved by the Architect. Approved mock-up shall serve as a standard of quality for judging the acceptability of completed copper shingle work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Minimum 3-years experience installing copper shingles. B. Shingles shall be classified by UL as Class A and meet UL standards for wind resistance, and shall be labeled to show conformance. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in sealed packages with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. B. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions and under cover to prevent damage and contamination. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Weather Conditions: Proceed with shingle work only when weather conditions are in compliance with manufacturers recommendations. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Fumish shingle manufacturer's standard warranty on installed work, agreeing to repair or replace defective shingles. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Copper Shingles: 1. Material: CDA 110 copper with a minimum purity of 99.9-percent copper and approximately 0.04- percent oxygen present as a cuprous oxicde, complying with ASTM B152 and ASTM B370. 2. Thickness: Minimum 0.18-inch commercial tolerance) 3. Density: 0.376-lb./cu. in. 04-07-06 COPPER SHINGLES Progress CD Set 07314-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07314 VAIL, COLORADO COPPER SHINGLES 4. Temper: % Hard H03. 5. Tensile Strength: 48,000-psi- 6. Profile: Fish scale matching Tegola Canadese Copper Shingles "Prestige Traditionar. 7. Finish: Natural. B. Accessories: Provide required accessories including starter strips, gable ends, end wall, side wall, continuous valley, hip and ridge caps, roof vent flashing and other accessories manufactured from 99.96-percent pure upper. C. Undedayment: As specified in Section 07139. D. Fasteners: Silicone bronze nails, ring barb shank, minimum head size 3/16-inch diameter, length appropriate for deck type and construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of shingles. Do not commence the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Flashings shall be installed prior to the installation of shingles. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install copper flashings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, SMACNA standards, and as required to match approved mock-up. B. Install starter strip along the eave edge and nail at 64nches on center. Overlap ends of adjoining strips a minimum of 1-inch. C. Install roofing undedayment as specified in Section 07139. D. Install valley flashings and nail at 10-inch centers. Where more than one piece is required, overlap the upper piece over the lower piece by 3- to 6-inches and seal with mastic. Form valley and ridge intersections in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for a watertight installation. E. Install gable end overlapping the starter strip. F. Install shingles in such a manner that horizontal lines are true and level and vertical lines are plumb. Attach shingles with specified fasteners, spaced in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. G. Do not allow shingles or trim to come into contact with dissimilar materials. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect installed shingles and trim from damage caused by construction activities. B. Replace damaged shingles. C. Clean grease, finger marks or stains from the shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Remove excess shingles and debris from the Project site. END OF SECTION 04-07.06 COPPER SHINGLES Progress CD Set 07314 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 07326 SLATE SHINGLES SECTION 07326 - SLATE SHINGLES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing slate shingles. B. Related Sections: 1. Plywood sheathing is specified in Section 06100. 2. Roofing underlayment is specified in Section 07139. 3. Asphalt shingles are specified in Section 07311. 4. Copper shingles are specified in Section 07314. 5. Simulated slate shingles are specified in Section 07327. 6. Sheet metal flashing and trim is specified in Section 07620. 7. Joint sealants are specified in Section 07920. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Three fuzed slate shingles for verification purposes, showing shape and range of color. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's information on shingles and installation instructions. C. Additional shingles for replacement and maintenance after completion of work, at the rate of approximately 2-percent D. Two copies of recommended maintenance products and procedures. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Qualifications: Minimum 3-years experience installing slate shingles of the type specified, and a minimum of 5-installations of a magnitude similar to or larger than the work of this Section. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver shingles on manufacturers pallets. B. Deliver installation materials in manufacturers unopened containers and rolls with labels intact and legible. C. Store materials in accordance with manufacbmers directions and under cover to prevent damage and contami- nation. D. Handle shingles to avoid chipping and breakage. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Moisture Conditions: Roof deck shall be dry when shingles are applied. 04-07.06 SLATE SHINGLES Progress CD Set 07326-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 07326 SLATE SHINGLES 1.06 WARRANTY A. Furnish 20-year warranty for slate shingles. Replace slate shingles that crack or break. Remove and replace other work, as required, which has been connected to or superimposed on the material to be replaced. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Slate Shingles: Eurocal Slate, color to be selected by the Architect Each file shall have two nail holes; file thicker than 314-inch or longer than 20-inches hall have 4 holes. B. Installation Materials: 1. Plywood Sheathing: 1/24nch thick preservative treated plywood as specified in Section 0610 00. 2. Nails: Copper slating nails, diamond point, smooth shaft, sufficient length to penetrate the roof sheathing except where roof sheathing is exposed, of the following gauges: a. 3d for slates up to 184nches long. b. 4d for slates longer than 184nches. C. 6d for hip and ridge locations. 3. Plastic Cement Waterproof type, color as recommended by installer to match slate. 4. Flashing: 16-ounce copper or as recommended by slate shingle installer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of slate shingles. B. Prior to commencing work, protect surfaces adjoining those to receive shingles. C. Grounds shall be installed prior to the installation of shingles. D. Surfaces on which shingles will be installed shall be firm, dry, dean, and free of oily or waxy films and foreign matter. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Slate shingles shall be installed in accordance with National Roofing Contractor's Association 'NRCA Steep Roofing Manual" and as indicated and specified. B. Install slate shingles over undedayment specified in Section 07139. C. Install slate so that through joints do not occur from the roof surface to the underthyment The joints in each course shall be well separated from those below. Locate joints not less than 34nc h% from any underlying joint D. Install slate with a 3-inch headlap unless otherwise indicated or recommended by slate Me manufacturer. E. Install slate with an exposure as recommended in NRCA Steep Roofing Manual, Slate Roofing, III. Application of Slate, Paragraph B., Table III. 04-07-06 SLATE SHINGLES Progress CD Set 07326 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL. COLORADO SECTION 07326 SLATE SHINGLES Ridges: Instal slate at roof ridges using either the saddle ridge method or combing ridge method, at instaWs option. Instal ridge slate files with nails and plastic cement, and fill joints in butted edges of slate with plastic cement G. Hips: Install slate at roof hips using either the saddle hip, mitered hip, or Boston hip method. Instal hip slate tiles with nails and plastic cement, and fill joints in tutted edges of slate with plastic cement H. Valleys: Form valleys using the dosed valley method using sheets of copper flashing installed under the slate in accordance with NRCA Steep Roofing Manual. Eaves and Gables: Instal first course of slate over a starter course of proper thUness to enable the second course to be properly aligned. J. Flashing details shall be in accordance with NRCA Steep Roofing Manual recommendations and illustrations. 3.03 CLEANING A. Replace slate shingles damaged prior to time of final acceptance. END OF SECTION 0407-06 SLATE SHINGLES Progress CD Set 07326 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 07327 SIMULATED SLATE SHINGLES SECTION 07327 - SIMULATED SLATE SHINGLES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing simulated slate shingles. B. Related Sections: 1. Plywood sheathing is specified in Section 06100. 2. Roofing underlayment is specified in Section 07139. 3. Asphalt shingles are specified in Section 07311. 4. Copper shingles are specified in Section 07314. 5. Slate shingles are specified in Section 07326. 6. Sheet metal flashing and trim is specified in Section 07620. 7. Joint sealants are specified in Section 07920. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Three full-sized simulated slate shingles for verification purposes, showing shape and range of color. B. Product Data: Manufacturers information on shingles and installation instructions. C. Additional shingles for replacement and maintenance after completion of work, at the rate of approximately 2-percent D. Two copies of recommended maintenance products and procedures. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Qualifications: Minimum 3-years experience installing simulated slate shingles of the type specified, and a minimum of 5-installations of a magnitude sinift to or larger than the work of this Section. B. Simulated slate shales shall have a Class A Frye Rating in accordance with ASTM E108. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver shingles on manufacturers pallets. B. Deriver installation materials in manufacturers unopened containers and rolls with labels intact and legible. C. Store materials in accordance with manufacturers directions and under cover to prevent damage and contami- nation. D. Handle shingles to avoid chipping and breakage. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Moisture Conditions: Roof deck shall be dry when shingles are applied. 0407-06 SIMULATED SLATE SHNGLES Progress CD Set 07327-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO 1.06 WARRANTY SECTION 07327 SIMULATED SLATE SHINGLES A. Furnish 50-year warranty for simulated slate shingles. Replace simulated slate shingles that crack or break. Remove and replace other work, as required, which has been connected to or superimposed on the material to be replaced. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contracthr under the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Simulated Slate Shingles: Tamco 'Lamarite Slate" or approved equal, shingle design, width and color to be selected by the Architect. 1. Shingles shall be manufactured with a cornposite material molded with textures and contours of natural slate. B. Installation Materials: 1. Plywood Sheathing: 112-inch thick preservative treated plywood as specified in Section 0610 00. 2. Nails: Corrosion-resistant, 3/8-inch head x 1-1/24nch long nails as recommended by simulated slate roofing manufacturer. 3. Plastic Cement: Waterproof type, color as recommended by installer to match slate. 4. Flashing: 16-ounce copper or as recommended by simulated slate shingle installer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of simulated slate shingles. B. Prior to commencing work, protect surfaces adjoining those to receive shingles. C. Grounds shall be installed prior to the installation of shingles. D. Surfaces on which shingles will be installed shall be firm, dry, dean, and free of oily or waxy films and foreign matter. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Simulated slate shingles shall be installed in accordance with National Roofing Contractor's Association "NRCA Steep Roofing Manual' and as indicated and specified. B. Install simulated slate shingles over underlayment specified in Section 07139. C. Install simulated slate shingles so that through joints do not occur from the roof surface to the undedayrnent The joints in each course shah be well separated from those below. Date joints not less than 34ndm from any underlying joint. D. Install simulated slate with a 3-inch headlap unless otherwise indicated or recommended by simulated slate manufacturer. E. Install with an exposure as selected by the Architect. F. Ridges: Install simulated slate pieces at roof ridges. Instal ridge tiles with nails and plastic cement, and fill joints in butted edges of slate with plastic cement 04-07.06 SIMULATED SLATE SHINGLES Progress CD Set 07327 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07327 VAIL, COLORADO SIMULATED SLATE SHINGLES G. Hips: Instal simulated slate pieces at roof hips. Install hip slate tiles with nails and plastic cement, and fill joints in butted edges of slate with plastic cement H. Valleys: Form valleys using the dosed valley method using sheets of copper flashing installed under the simulated slate in accordance with NRCA Steep Roofing Manual. 1. Eaves and Gables: Install first course of simulated slate over a starter course of proper thickness to enable the second course to be properly aligned. J. Flashing details shall be in accordance with NRCA Steep Roofing Manual recommendations and illustrations. 3.03 CLEANING A Replace simulated slate shingles damaged prior to time of final acceptance. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 SIMULATED SLATE SHINGLES Progress CD Set 07327 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 07550 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING SECTION 07550 - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing a torch-applied modified bituminous membrane roofing. B. Related Sections: 1. Miscellaneous carpentry is specified in Section 06101. 2. Roof board insulation is specified in Section 07220. 3. Asphalt shingles are specified in Section 07311. 4. Sheet metal flashing and trim is specified in Section 07620. 5. Roof snow melt system is specified in Section 10990. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Fumish for each type of product specified. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. B. Samples: Fumish 12-inch square samples of each color modified bituminous, mineral-surface cap sheets to be exposed as finished roof surface. C. Installer Certification: Fumish writen certification from manufacturer of modified bituminous sheet roofing system certifying that installer is approved by manufacturer to install specified roofing system. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Products: Provide primary roofing products, including each type of sheet, all manufactured in the United States, supplied by a single manufacturer which has been successfully producing the specified types of primary products for not less than 10-years. Provide secondary or accessory products acceptable to the manufacturer of the primary roofing products. B. Agency Approvals: The proposed roof system shag conform to the following requirements. No other testing agency approvals will be accepted. 1. Underwriters Laboratories Class B acceptance of the proposed roofing system without additional requirements for gravel or coatings. 2. Factory Mutual Approval Standard 4470 listing for the proposed membrane system. The roof membrane configuration shall be approved by FM for Class 1-SH (severe hag) exposure. The roof configuration (including fastening of base sheet, insulation, etc.) shag be approved by FM for minimum 1-90 wind uplift construction. 04-07.06 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING Progress CD Set 07550-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 07550 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING C. Project Acceptance: Submit a completed manufacturer's application for roof guarantee form along with shop drawings of the roofs showing all dimensions, penetrations, and details. The form shall contain all the technical information applicable to the project including deck types, roof slopes, base sheet and/or insulation assemblies (with method of attachment, and fastener type), and manufacturer's membrane assembly proposed for installation. The form shall also contain accurate and complete information requested including proper names, addresses, zip codes and telephone numbers. The project must receive approval, through this process, prior to shipment of materials to the project site. D. Scope of Work: The work to be performed under this specification shall include but is not limited to the following: Attend necessary job meetings and furnish competent and full time supervision, experienced roof mechanics, all materials, tools, and equipment necessary to complete, in an acceptable manner, the roof installation in accordance with this specification. Comply with the latest written application instructions of the manufacturer of the primary roofing products. In addition, application practice shall comply with requirements and recommendations contained in the latest edition of the Handbook of Accepted Roofing Knowledge (HARK) as published by the National Roofing Contractor's Association, amended to include the acceptance of a phased roof system installation. E. Local Regulations: Conform to regulations of public agencies, including any specific requirements of the city and/or state of jurisdiction. F. Manufacturer Requirements: The primary roofing materials manufacturer shall provide direct trained company personnel to attend necessary job meetings, perform periodic inspections as necessary, and conduct a final inspection upon successful completion of the project. G. Recommended Maintenance: In addition to the guarantee, furnish to the Owner the manufacturer's printed recommendations for proper maintenance of the specified roof system including inspection frequencies, penetration addition policies, temporary repairs, and leak call procedures. H. Preapplication Roofing Conference: Approximately 2-weeks before scheduled commencement of modified bituminous roofing installation and associated work, meet at Project site with installer, installer of each component of associated work, installers of deck or substrate construction to receive roofing work, Architect, Owner, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and others directly concerned with performance of the work. 1. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to roofing work, including but not necessarily limited to the following: a. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates, inspect and discuss condition of substrate, roof drains, curbs, penetrations, and other preparatory work performed by others. b. Review roofing system requirements. C. Review required submittals. d. Review and finalize construction schedule related to roofing work and verify availability of materials, installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities required to avoid delays. e. Review required inspection, testkug, certifying, and material usage accounting procedures. f. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with un%vor- able conditions, including possibility of temporary roofing. 2. Record discussions of conference, Including decisions reached, and furnish copy of record to each party attending. I substantial disagreements exist at conclusion of conference, detemuuie how disagreements will be resolved and set date for reconvening conference. 04-07.06 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING Progress CD Set 07550 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 07550 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials in the manufacturers original sealed and labeled containers and in quantities required to allow continuity of application. B. Storage: Store materials out of direct exposure to the elements. Store roll goods on a dean, flat and surface. All material stored on the roof ovemight shall be stored on pallets. Rolls of roofing must be on ends. Store materials on the roof in a manner so as to preclude overloading of deck and building. Store materials such as solvents, adhesives and asphalt cutback products away from open flames, sparks or excessive heal Cover all using a breathable cover such as a canvas. Polyethylene or other non-breathable plastic coverings are not acceptable. C. Handling: Handle all materials in such a manner as to preclude damage and contamination with moisture or foreign matter. Handle rolled goods to prevent damage to edges or ends. D. Damaged Material: Any materials that are found to be damaged or stored in any manner other than stated above will be automatically rejected, removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Requirements Prior to Commencement of Work: Notification: Give a minimum of 5 days notice to the Owner and manufacturer prior to commencing any work and notify both parties on a daily basis of any change in work schedule. 2. Safety: Familiarize every member of the application crew with all fire and safety regulations recommended by OSHA, NRCA and other industry or local governmental groups. B. Environmental Requirements: Precipitation: Do not apply roofing materials during precipitation or in the event there is a probability of precipitation during application. Take adequate precautions to ensure that materials, applied roofing, and building interiors are protected from possible moisture damage or contamination. C. Protection Requirements: 1. Membrane Protection: Provide protection against staining and mechanical damage for newly applied roofing and adjacent surfaces throughout this project 2. Torch Safety: Designate one person on each crew to perform a daily fire watch. The designated crew member shall watch for fires or smoldering materials on all areas of roof construction Continue the fire watch for one hour after roofing material application has been suspended for the day. 3. Limited Access: Prevent access by the public to materials, tools and equipment during the course of the project. 4. Debris Removal: Remove all debris daily from the project site. and take to a legal dumping area authorized to receive such materials. 5. Site Condition: Complete, to the owners satisfaction, all job site dean-up including building interior, exterior and landscaping where affected by the construction. 0407-06 MODIFIED BrFUMINWS MEMBRANE ROOFING Progress CD Set 07550 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 07550 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 1.06 WARRANTY A. Roof Membrane Warranty: Upon successful completion of the project, and after all post installation procedures have been completed, fumish the Owner with the manufacturer's 20-year labor and materials membrane warranty. The warranty shall be a term type, without deductibles or limitations on coverage amount, and shag be issued at no additional cost to the Owner. This warranty shag not exude random areas of ponckq from coverage. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Siplast'Paradiene 20 TG/30 FR TG' as specified, Soprema'Sopralene Flam 180/180 FR GR' or approved equal. 2.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS A. Roofing Membrane Assembly: A roof membrane assembly consisting of 2-plies of a prefabricated, reinforced, homogeneous Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) block copolymer modified asphalt membrane, secured to a prepared substrate. Both reinforcement mats shall be impregnated and coated each side with a high quality SBS modified bitumen blend. The roof system shall pass 500 cycles of ASTM D5849 Resistance to Cyclic Joint Displacement (fatigue) at 14-deg. F. Passing results shall show no signs of membrane cracking or interply delamination after 500 cycles. The roof system shall pass 200 cycles of ASTM D5849 after heat aging. The assembly shag possess waterproofing capability, such that a phased roof application, with only the modified bitumen base ply in place, can be achieved for prolonged periods of time without detriment In the watertight integrity of the entire roof system. Siplast 'Paradiene 20/30 FR Roof System' or approved equal. 1. Modified Bitumen Base Ply: Siplast'Paradiene 20', Soprema 'Sopralene Flam 180' or approved equal. a. Thickness (avg.): 91-mils b. Weight (min. per 100-sq. ft. of coverage) - 60 lb. C. Filler content in elastomeric blend - less than 35-percent by weight d. Low temperature flexibility @ -13-deg. F. - PASS (ASTM D 5147) e. Breaking load (avg.) @ 73-deg. F. - 30 Ibfflnch (ASTM D 5147) f. Breaking Load (avg.) @ 0-deg. F. - 70 Ibf/iinch (ASTM D 5147) g. Ultimate Elongation (avg.) @ 73-deg. F. - 50-percent (ASTM D 5147) h. Dimensional Stability (max.) - 0.5-percent (ASTM D 5147) i. Compound Stability (mm.) - 248-deg. F. j. Approvals - UL Class listed, FM Approved (products shall bear seals of approval) k. Reinforcement - fiberglass mat or other meeting the performance criteria 04-07-06 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING Progress CD Set 07550 - 4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07550 VAIL, COLORADO MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 2. Modified Bitumen Finish Ply: Siplast "Paradiene 30 FR", Soprema "Sopralene Flam 180 FR GR" or approved equal. a. Thickness (avg.): 130-mils. b. Thickness at selvage (avg.): 98-mils. C. Weight (min. per 100-sq. R of coverage) - 90 lb. d. Filler content in elastomedc blend - less than 35-percent by weight e. Low temperature flexibility @ -13-deg. F. - PASS (ASTM D 5147) f. Breaking Load (avg.) @ 73-deg. F. - 30 Ibfrnch (ASTM D 5147) g. Breaking Load (avg.) @ 0-deg. F. - 70 Ibffinch (ASTM D 5147) h. Ultimate Elongation (avg.) @ 73-deg. F. _ 55-percent (ASTM D 5147) i. Dimensional Stability (max.) - 0.5-percent (ASTM D 5147) j. Compound Stability (min.) - 248-deg. F. (ASTM D 5147) k. Granule Embedment (max. avg. loss) -1.5-grams per sample 1. Approvals - UL Class listed, FM Approved (products shall bear seals of approval) M. Reinforcement - fiberglass mat or other meeting the performance criteria n. Surfacing - ceramic granules B. Flashing Membrane Assembly: Siplast "Veral" Flashing System, aluminum finish, Soprema "Sopralene Flam 250 FR" or approved equal. Flashing membrane assembly shall consist of a prefabricated, fiberglass scrim- mat reinforced, Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) block copolymer modified asphalt membrane with a continuous, channel-embossed metal-foil surfacing. A low softening point asphalt shall be incorporated into the membrane between the metal foil surfacing and the SBS modified bitumen asphalt membrane, at the channels, in~order to preclude foil delamination during daily thermal cycling. 1. Metal-Clad Modified Bitumen Flashing Sheet a. Thickness (avg.): 138-mils (ASTM D 5147) b. Weight (min. per 100-sq. ft of coverage) - 90 lb. C. Low temperature flexibility @ Neg. F. - PASS (ASTM D 5147) d. Breaking Load (avg.) @ 73-deg. F. - 85 Ibf/inch (ASTM D 5147) e. Breaking Load (avg.) @ 0-deg. F. -180 Ibfhnch (ASTM D 5147) f. Ultimate Elongation (avg.) @ 73-deg. F. - 45-percent (ASTM D 5147) g. Dimensional Stability (max.) - 0.5-percent (ASTM D 5147) h. Compound Stability (min.) - 230-deg. F. 0407-06 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING Progress CD Set 07550 - 5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07550 VAIL, COLORADO MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING Thermal Shock Resistance (maximum) - 0.2-percent (UEAtc standard) Approvals - UL Approved, FM Approved (products shall bear seals of approval k. Reinforcement - fiberglass scrim mat Surfacing - continuous aluminum metal foil 2.04 ROOFING ACCESSORIES A. Bituminous Cutback Materials Primer. Siplast PA-1125 Asphalt Primer or approved equal high flash, quick drying, asphalt solvent blend which meets or exceeds ASTM D 41-85 requirements. 2. Mastics: Siplast PA-1021 Plastic Cement or approved equal asphalt cutback mastic, reinforced with non-asbestos fibers, used as a base for setting metal flanges and conforming to ASTM D 4586-86 Type II requirements. B. Caulking/Sealants: A single component, high performance, elastomeric sealant conforming to ASTM D 232 or ASTM C 920 requirements. C. Ceramic Granules: Siplast No. 11 Granules or approved equal No. 11 Grade Specification Ceramic granules of color scheme matching the granule surfacing of the finish ply. D. Metallic Powder. A finely graded metal dust as supplied or approved by the membrane manufacturer, used for covering of bitumen overruns over the foil surfaced membrane. E. Walktread: A prefabricated, puncture resistant polyester core reinforced, polymer modified bitumen sheet material topped with a ceramic-coated granule wearing surface. 1. Thickness: 0.217-inch 2. Weight 1.8-Ibs/sq. ft. 3. Width:30-inches PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. General: Sweep or vacuum all surfaces, removing all loose aggregate and foreign substances prior to commencement of roofing. 3.02 ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Membrane Application: Apply roofing in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's instructions and the following requirements. Application of roofing membrane components shall immediately follow application of base sheet and/or insulation as a continuous operation. B. Aesthetic Considerations: An aesthetically pleasing overall appearance of the finished roof application is a standard requirement for this project Make necessary preparations, utilize recommended application techniques, apply the specified materials (i.e. granules, metallic powder, etc.), and exercise care in ensuring that the finished application is acceptable to the Owner. 04-07-06 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING Progress CD Set 07550 - 6 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07550 VAIL, COLORADO MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING C. Priming: Prime metal flanges (all jacks, edge metal, lead drain flashings, etc.) and concrete and masonry surfaces with a uniform coating of ASTM D 41 asphalt primer. D. Bitumen Consistency: Cutting or alterations of bitumen, primer, and sealants will not be permitted. E. Roofing Application: Apply all layers of roofing free of wrinkles, creases or fishmouths. Exert sufficient pressure on the roll during application to ensure prevention of air pockets. Stagger the lap seams between the base ply layer and the finish ply layer. Stagger the courses to ensure this. 1. Apply all layers of roofing parallel to the slope of the deck. 2. Fully bond the base ply to the prepared substrate, utilizing minimum 3-inch side and end laps. Apply each sheet directly behind the applicator. Cut dog ear angles on underlying end laps at the finish edge and the overlapping selvage edges. Using a dean trowel, apply top pressure to top seal T-laps immediately following sheet application. Stagger end laps a minimum of 3-feet 3. Fully bond the finish ply to the base ply, utilizing minimum 3-inch side and end laps. Apply each sheet directly behind the applicator. Stagger end laps of the finish ply a minimum 3-feet Cut dog ear angles on underlying end laps at the finish edge and the overlapping selvage edges. Using a dean trowel, apply top pressure to top seal T4aps immediately following sheet application. Stagger side laps of the finish ply a minimum 12-inches from side laps in the underlying base ply. Stagger end laps of the finish apply a minimum 3-feet from end laps in the underlying base ply. 4. Maximum sheet lengths and special fastening of the specified roof membrane system may be required at various slope increments where the roof deck slope exceeds %inch per foot The manufacturer shall provide acceptable sheet lengths and the required fastening schedule for all roofing sheet applications to applicable roof slopes. F. Granule Embedment: Broadcast mineral granules over all bitumen overruns on the finish ply surface, while the bitumen is still hot, to ensure a monolithic surface color. G. Flashing Application - Masonry Surfaces: Flash masonry parapet walls and curbs using the reinforcing sheet and the metal foil flashing membrane. After the base ply has been applied to the top of the cant, fully adhere the reinforcing sheet, utilizing minimum 34nch side laps and extend a minimum of 3-inches onto the base ply surface and 3-inches up the parapet wall above the cant. After the final roofing ply has been applied to the top of the cant, prepare the surface area that is to receive flashing coverage by torch heating granular surfaces or by application of asphalt primer, allowing primer to dry thoroughly. Torch apply the metal bV faced flashing into place using three foot widths (cut off the end of roll) always lapping the factory selvage edge. Stagger the laps of the metal foil flashing layer from lap seams in the reinforcing layer. Extend the flashing sheet a minimum of 4-inches beyond the toe of the cant onto the prepared surface of the finished roof and up the wall to the desired flashing height Exert pressure on the flashing sheet during application to ensure complete contact with the wall/roof surfaces, preventing air pockets; this can be accomplished by using a damp sponge or shop rag. Check and seal all loose laps and edges. Nail the top edge of the flashing on 9-inch centers. (See manufacturer's schematic for visual interpretation). 04-07-06 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING Progress CD Set 07550-7 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL. COLORADO SECTION 07550 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING H. Flashing Application - Wood Surfaces: Flash wood or plywood parapet wails and curbs using the reinforcing sheet and the metal fog flashing membrane. The reinforcing sheet shall have minimum 3-inch side laps and extend a minimum of 3-inches onto the base ply surface and to the top of the parapet wall, curb, eta. Nah the reinforcing sheet through the field of the sheet to the vertical wood surface on 12-Inch centers from the top of the cant to top of wall, curb, etc. Fully adhere the remainder of the flashing reinforcing sheet that extends over the cant and roof level. After the final roofing ply has been applied 10 the top of the cant, prepare the surface area that is to receive flashing coverage by torch heating granular surfaces or by application of asphalt primer; allowing primer to dry thoroughly. Torch apply the metal fail-faced flashing into place using three foot widths (cut off the end of roll) always lapping the factory selvage edge. Extend the flashing sheet a minimum of 4-incises beyond the toe of the cant onto the prepared surface of the finished roof and up the wall to the desired flashing height Exert pressure on the flashing sheet during application to ensure complete contact with the wall/roof surfaces, preventing air pockets; this can be accomplished by using a damp sponge or shop rag. Check and seal all loose laps and edges. Nail the top edge of the flashing on 9-inch centers. (See manufacturer's schematic for visual interpretation). L Use of Metallic Powder: Broadcast metallic powder over all bitumen overruns on the metal foil membrane surface while the bitumen is still hot to ensure a monolithic surface color. J. Water Cut-Off: At end of day's work, or when precipitation is imminent, construct a water cut-off at all open edges. Cut-offs can be built using asphalt or plastic cement and roofing felts, constructed to withstand protracted periods of service. Cut-offs must be completely removed prior to the resumption of roofing. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND INSPECTIONS A. Site Condition: Leave all areas around job site free of debris, roofing materials, equipment and related items after completion of job. B. Notification Of Completion: Notify the manufacturer by means of manufacturer's printed Notification of Completion form of job completion in order to schedule a final inspection date. C. Final Inspection - Post-Installatiori Meeting: Hold a meeting at the completion of the project, attended by all parties that were present at the pre-job conference. A punch list of items required for completion shah be compiled by the Contractor and the manufacturer's representative. Complete, sign, and mail the punch fist form to the manufacturer's headquarters. 3.04 WATER TESTING A. Upon completion of work, test for leaks by plugging the roof drains or damming areas and filling with 34nches of water. Allow water to stand for 24-hours and inspect for leakage. Make necessary adjustments to stop leakage and retest until watertight . , END OF SECTION 04-07-06 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING Progress CD Set 07550 - B PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07620 VAIL, COLORADO SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing sheet metal flashings, gutters, and trim. B. Related Sections: 1. Asphalt shingles and flashing installed with asphalt shingles are specified in Section 07311. 2. Modified bituminous membrane roofing is specified in Section 07550. 3. Modified bituminous sheet flashing is specified in Section 07656. 4. Door and window flashings (flexible flashings) are specified in Section 07657. 5. Roof snow melt system is specified in Section 10990. 1.02 SUBMITTAL A. Shop Drawings: Show layout, profiles, method of joining, and anchor details. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 METALS A. Copper. ASTM B370, temper H00 or 060;16-oz/sq. ft. 2.02 REGLETS A. Approved Manufacturers: Fry Reglet Corporation, W.P. Hickman Co., Keystone Flashing Company or approved equal. B. General: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces and compatible with flashing indicated. C. Surface Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge. D. Counterfiashing Wind-Restraint Clip: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of the counterflashing lower edge. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Solder. ASTM B32, Grade Sn50, used with rosin flux B. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing and sheet metal or other non-corrosive metal recommended by sheet manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. C. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing to asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. D. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; non-hardening, non-skinning, nondrying, non-migrating sealant. 0407.06 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Progress CD Set 07620-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07620 VAIL, COLORADO SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM E. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part non-corrosive metal seam cementing compound, recommended by metal manufacturer for exteriorfinterior non-moving joints including riveted joints. F. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal dips, straps, anchoring devices and similar accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed, non-corrosive, size and gauge required for performance. G. Roofing Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based. 2.04 FABRICATION A. General Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate to comply with recommendations of SMACNA'Ard t chiral Sheet Metal ManuaP that apply to design, dimensions, and metal. B. Comply with details indicated. Fabricate to fit substrates and to provide waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. C. Form exposed sheet metal without excessive oil canning, budding, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded bads to form hems. D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. E. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10-feet with no joints within 244nches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 14nch deep, filed with mastic sealant concealed within joints. F. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. G. Separate metal from non-compatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. H. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to view. 1. Fabricate deals and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible, non-corrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. J. Gutters: Fabricate from copper sheet metal to profiles indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Except as otherwise indicated or specified, comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, and with SMACNA'Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.' 2. Anchor units securely in place, allowing for thermal expansion. 3. Conceal fasteners where possible. 4. Set units true to line and level as indicated. 5. Install work with laps, joints and seams which will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. 6. Where indicated, instal sheet metal flashing and trim over modified bituminous sheet flashing specified in Section 07656. 04-07-06 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Progress CD Set 0762D-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07620 VAIL, COLORADO SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM B. Install exposed sheet metal work free of excessive oil canning, budding, and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded bads for form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistance performance. C. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1124nches, except where pre-tinned surface would be exposed to view in the finished work. - D. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable joints to accommodate elastomedc sealant Comply with SMACNA standards. E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-k)ck seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. F. Install reglets to receive counterflashing. G. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation with installation of assemblies to be protected by counterflashing. Instal in reglets or receivers. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap4n installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded seams, or blind rivets and sealant Lap joints a minimum of 2-inches and bed with sealant H. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate equipment support flashing installation with roofing and equipment installation. Weld or seal flashing to equipment support member. 1. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate roof-penetration flashing installation with roofing and installation of items penetrating roof. 1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing. 2. Seal and damp flashing to pipes penetrating roof, other than lead flashing on vent piping. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. B. Protection: Protect flashing and sheet metal work during construction to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration other than normal weathering at time of final completion. END OF SECTION 0407-06 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Progress CD Set 07620-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07656 VAIL, COLORADO MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET FLASHING SECTION 07656 - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET FLASHING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing sellLadhering bituminous membrane under sheet metal ledges, metal copings and under sheet metal flashing and trim where indicated. B. Related Sections: 1. Roofing undedayment is specified in Section 07139. 2. Sheet metal flashing and trim is spedfied in Section 07620. 3. Window and door flashing is specified in Section 07657. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Fumish manufacturer's standard product data sheets and installation recommendations and instructions. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A Apply flexible lashings in fair weather at temperatures of 40-deg. F. and above. B. Provide adequate ventilation of enclosed spaces where primer is used. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Grace Construction Products'Vycor Ultra', Henry Company "Blueskin PE200HT" or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A Membrane: Composite of polyethylene film and self-adhesive rubberized asphalt, oonfomning to the folowng physical Prop: 1. Thickness: 30-mils minimum. 2. Tensile Strength: 25GO minimum when tested in accordance with ASTM D412. 3. Elongation: 250-percent minimum when tested in accordance with ASTM D412 (Die C) modified. 4. Pliability, 180-deg. F. bend (1-inch mandrel at -25-deg. F): Unaffected when tested in accordance with ASTM D146. B. Primer. As recommended by membrane manufacturer for priming substrates to receive flebble flashing. C. Sealing Compound: OSI Sealants Incorporated 'OSI Quad Pro Series Sealant" or approved equal 0407-06 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET FLASHING Pmgrm CD Set 07656 -1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07656 VAIL, COLORADO MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET FLASHING PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Remove dust, dirt, loose fasteners and other protrusions. B. Prime masonry and concrete surfaces with primer at the rate of 250- to 350-sq. fL per gallon. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Cut the membrane into 10- to 15-foot lengths and re-roll. B. Peel-back 1- to 2 -feet of release paper, align on the lower edge and place the first 1- to 2-feet. Pull the release paper larder the membrane and continue to peel it from the membrane. C. Press and roll the membrane in place to assure full adherence to the substrate. D. Lap ends at least 64inches and sides at least 3-1124nches. E. Installed membrane shall be covered with subsequently applied covering material. END OF SECTION 0"7-06 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET FLASHING Progress CD Set 07656 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07657 VAIL, COLORADO WINDOW AND DOOR FLASHING SECTION 07657 - WINDOW AND DOOR FLASHING (FLEXIBLE FLASHING) PART 1- GENERAL l 1.01 DESCRIPTION i A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing selfadhering modified bituminous ' t membrane flashing around doors, windows, transoms and other exterior wad openings. B. Related Sections: 1. Sheathing paper is specified in Section 07262. t 2. Modified bituminous sheet flashing is specified in Section 07656. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Fumish manufacturer's standard product data sheets and installation recommendations and instructions. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply flexible window and door flashings in fair weather at temperatures of 40-deg. F. and above. 's B. Provide adequate ventilation of enclosed spaces where primer is used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 4 201 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS t A. Grace Construction Products "Vycor V40 Self-Adhered Flashing" or approved equal. 202 MATERIALS A. Membrane: 32-mils of self-adhesive rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to 8-mils of cross-laminated, high- density polyethylene film to provide a minimum 4Gf d thick membrane. Membrane shall be interleaved with disposable silicone-coated release paper until installed. G B. Surface Conditioner: Grace Construction Products TermA-Barrier WB Primer" or approved equal water-based latex liquid for substrate preparation as recommended by membrane manufacturer. C. Termination Mastic Rubberized asphalt-based mastic. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Remove dust, dirt, loose fasteners and other protrusions. B. Prime masonry, concrete and gypsum sheathing surfaces with primer at the rate of 250- t0 350-sq. It. per gallon. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Precut pieces to easily handled lengths for each location. 04-07-06 WINDOW AND DOOR FLASHING Progress CD Set 07657 -1 of 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07657 VAIL, COLORADO WINDOW AND DOOR FLASHING B. Remove silicone-coated release paper and position flashing before placing it against the surface. C. When positioned, place against surface by pressing firmly into place by hand roller. Fully adhere to substrate to prevent water from migrating under flashing. D. Overlap adjacent pieces 34nches and roll aft seams with steel hand roller. Instal so laps shed water. E. Mechanically attach at vertical terminations. E. Trim bottom edge %rinch back from exposed face of the wall. Flashing shall not be permanently exposed to sunlight F. Apply a bead or trowel coat of mastic Wong flashing top edge, seams, cuts, and penetrations. G. Do not allow the rubberized asphalt surface of the flashing membrane to come in contact with polysulfde sealants, creosote, uncured coal tar products of EPDM. H. Do no expose flashing membrane to sunlight for more than 30-days prior to enclosure. END OF SECTION 04.07-06 WINDOW AND DOOR FLASHING Progress CD Set 07657 - 2 of 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS $ RESORTS SECTION 07724 VAIL COLORADO ROOF HATCHES SECTION 07724 - ROOF HATCHES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing the following: Roof hatches. 2. Safety posts. B. Related Sections: 1. Ladders are specified in Section 05515. 2. Wood nailers are specified in Section 06101. 3. Modified bituminous membrane roofing is specified in Section 07550. 4. Flashing and sheet metal work is specified in Section 07620. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data, rough4n diagrams, details, and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details, including plans, elevations, sections, and attachment methods. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manuar for fabrication, including flanges and cap-flashing. Comply with NRCA "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" details for installation of units. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Warrant roof hatches to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 5-years. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A Babcock-Davis Hatchways, Inc., Bilco Co., Bristorde Skylights, Dur-Red Products, Milcor, Inc., O'Keeffee's, Inc., Wasco Products, Inc. or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Hatch Size: As indicated (24" x 3(' minimum size). B. Cover. 11-gauge aluminum with a 34nch beaded flange, neatly welded. Insulation shall be glass fiber 14nch thick, fully covered and protected by an 18-gauge aluminum liner. C. Curb: 124nches high, 11-gauge aluminum, formed with a 3-1/24nch flange with holes provided for securing to the roof deck. Equip with an integral metal capflashing of the same gauge and material as the curb, full welded at the comers for weatherfightness. Insulation on the exterior of the curb shall be rigid fiberboard 1-inch thick. D. Fabrication: Roof hatch shall be completely assembled with heavy pintle hinges, compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes, positive snap latch with turn handles and padlock hasps inside and outside, and thermoplastic rubber gasket Equip cover with an automatic hold-open arm complete with red vinyl grip handle to permit easy release and one-hand control of the cover to its closed and latched position. 04.07.06 ROOF HATCHES Progress CD Set 07724-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07724 VAIL COLORADO ROOF HATCHES E. Hardware: Zinc plated and chromate sealed. Finish: Mill finish aluminum. G. Safety Post Bilco "Model 2 LadderUP Safety Posr or approved equal. Install on fixed ladders below hatch covers. Device shall be manufactured of high strength steel with telescoping tubular section that locks automatically when fully extended. Upward and downward movement shall be controlled by a stainless steel spring balancing mechanism. Finish shall be hot dip galvanized. Unit shall be completely assembled with fasteners for securing to the ladder rungs in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturers instructions and recommendations. 2. Coordinate with installation of roof deck and roofing and flashing, as required to ensure that each element of the work performs properly, and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. 3. Anchor units securely to supporting substrates, adequate to withstand lateral and thermal stresses and inward and outward loading pressures. 4. Install accessories according to construction details of NRCA "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual". B. Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units are to be installed in contact with incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or provide other permanent separation. C. Flange Seals: Set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing cement to form a seal. D. Operational Units: Test operate units with operable components. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. Adjust for proper operation. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings. END OF SECTION 04.07-06 ROOF HATCHES Progress CD Set 07724 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 07728 SNOW GUARDS SECTION 07728 - SNOW GUARDS (SNOW BRACKETS) PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing snow guards (brackets). B. Related Sections: 1. Roofing underlayment is specified in Section 07139. 2. Asphalt shingles are specified in Section 07311. 3. Flashing and sheet metal are specified in Section 07620. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Snow guard system shall consist of snow guard brackets, accessories, and fasteners. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Locations: As recommended by manufacturer for roof geometry and slopes. B. Horizontal spacing: As recommended by manufacturer for roof geometry and slopes. B. Vertical spacing: As recommended by manufacturer for roof geometry and slopes. C. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer for roof geometry and slopes. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's specifications, layout drawings, detail drawings and installation instructions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Experienced in the installation of specified snow guards for not less than 5-years in the area of the project 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Inspect material upon delivery and order replacements for any missing or defective items. Keep material dry, covered and off the ground until installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. TRA Roof Accessory Systems `TRA Mage Snow Brackets" or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Brackets: Copper, designed for use with asphalt shingle roofing. 1. Bid Alternate: Provide alternate bid for aluminum with factory-applied powder coat finish. 04-07-06 SNOW GUARDS Progress CD Set 07728 -1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07728 VAIL. COLORADO SNOW GUARDS B. Fasteners: Non-ferrous, type recommended by bracket manufacturer. 2.03 FINISH A. All materials shall be mill finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Substrate: Inspect roof system to be properly attached and installed to withstand additional loading incurred. Notify Architect of any deficiencies before installing snow guards. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for installation. END OF SECTION 0407-06 SNOW GUARDS Progress CD Set 07728 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07812 VAIL, COLORADO CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING SECTION 07812 - CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and applying cementitious sprayed-on fireproofing. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: 1. Furnish manufacturer's certificate stating materials provided comply with specified standards. 2. Furnish applicator's certificate stating that material has been applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and meets fire-resistance ratings, thickness requirements, and application requirements of regulatory agency having jurisdiction. B. Test Reports: Furnish certified test reports from a listed laboratory that fireproofing materials can be applied to substrate materials required and conform to specified fire-resistance and fire-resistive characteristics requirements, including thickness and dry density requirements of the fireproofing in accordance with ASTM E605. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials and application procedures shall be tested and listed by UL and be acceptable to governing agencies for assemblies to be fireproofed. B. Applicator: Approved by the manufacturer of the fireproofing materials. C. Fireproofing shall provide fire-resistive rating as required by IBC as scheduled on the Drawings. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver fireproofing material in manufacturer's original, unopened packaging, identified with manufacturer's name, brand, and UL label. B. Store under cover, above ground and in a manner to keep dry until ready to use. Discard material that has been exposed to moisture prior to mixing for use. C. Remove from storage and discard fireproofing material that has not been used prior to its expiration date. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Scheduling: 1. Ensure that dips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items required to penetrate fireproofing are placed before installing fireproofing systems. 2. Schedule installation of ducts, piping equipment, conduit, and other suspended items after the installation of fireproofing materials. 3. Schedule application of fireproofing system to underside of metal roof deck assemblies after roofing work is completed. Upon commencement of fireproofing application, roof traffic will be prohibited until the fireproofing material is cured and fully dried. B. Environmental Requirements: Temperature of substrate and ambient air shall be a minimum of 40-deg. F. before, during, and after application of fireproofing. If required for job progress, provide enclosures with heat to maintain required temperatures. 0407.06 CEWNTMOUS MEPROOFNG Progress CD Set 07812-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07812 VAIL, COLORADO CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING 2. Ventilate areas to receive fireproofing; introduce fresh air and exhaust air continuously during and after application. Provide forced air circulation in poorly ventilated areas to achieve a total air exchange rate of 4 times per hour until the material is substantially dry. C. Protection: 1. Provide temporary enclosures, as necessary, to prevent spray from contaminating air. 2. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by over spray, fallout, and dusting off of sprayed fireproofing. 3. Where concrete, masonry, or other surfaces subject to over-spray are to remain exposed to view in the completed work, provide protective masks, drop cloths, or other satisfactory coverings to prohibit contact with sprayed fireproofing materials. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 FIREPROOFING MATERIALS A. Type: Cementifious composition; Grace Construction Products 'Monokote" Type MK-6 or approved equal. Fireproofing shall contain no amounts of mineral wool or regulated fibers including asbestos. B. Physical Properties: Bond Strength: 200-psf in accordance with ASTM E736. 2. Compressive Strength: Fireproofing shall not deform more than 10-percent when subjected to 1000-psf compressive force in accordance with ASTM E761. 3. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion in accordance with ASTM E937. 4. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, delamination or the like in accordance with ASTM E759. 5. Bond Impact: No cracking, spalling, delamination or the like in accordance with ASTM E760. 6. Arc Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.005-grams per sq. ft. in accordance with ASTM E859. 7. Dry Density: Values for average and individual densities required for fire-resistive ratings specified, in accordance with ASTM E605, but not less than 15-pcf. 8. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 0 and 0 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 9. Compatibility: Material shall have a maximum total heat release of 20 MJ per sq. meter 600-seconds after insertion into a radiant heat flux of 75 KW per sq. meter when tested in accordance with ASTM E1354. 10. Resistance to Mold: The fireproofing material shall be formulated at time of manufacture with a mold inhibitor. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS FIREPROOFING MATERIALS A. Provide materials compatible with sprayed-on fireproofing products and substrates, approved for use by fireproofing manufacturer and approved by UL B. Primers: Approved by fireproofing manufacturer for substrate and exposure conditions. C. Adhesives: As recommended by fireproofing manufacturer. 04-07-06 CENIENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING Progress CD Set 07812 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07812 VAIL, COLORADO CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces to receive fireproofing and verify the following: 1. That surfaces to receive fireproofing are free of loose mill scale, dirt, paint/primers, grease, oil, and other matter that would impair bond of fireproofing materials. 2. That shop-primed or existing painted surfaces designated to receive fireproofing are compatible with fireproofing bond requirements and materials. If surfaces are painted or primed, verify that bonding requirements established in the UL "Fire Resistance Directory' latest edition for sprayed fireproofing material are met 3. Objects that will penetrate fireproofing have been attached. 4. Substrates are not obstructed by construction that could inhibit application of fireproofing. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of loose mill scale, dirt, grease, oil, rolling compounds, incompatible paints/primers, and other substances that would affect the bond of fireproofing. Sandblast surfaces if normal cleaning methods fail to remove adhering substances. B. Prime substrates where recommended by fireproofing manufacturer. C. Cover other work which might be damaged by fall-out or overspray. Provide temporary enclosure to confine spraying operations and ensure adequate ambient conditions. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply fireproofing materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations as required to achieve thickness and densities required by UL Fire Resistance Directory or as required by authority having jurisdiction. B. Coat substrates with adhesive where recommended by manufacturer. C. Extend fireproofing full thickness over entire area of each substrate. D. Apply materials by sprayed-on method. E. Angles, channels, rods and miscellaneous shapes shall be fireproofed as a beam. F. Splice plates and bolts shall be fireproofed to the thickness required for the column or beam to which they are attached. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Laboratory or its agent, retained and paid for by the Owner, will perform laboratory tests and inspections as specified in IBC. B. Tests and inspections will be performed on minimum number of locations as specified in IBC. Tests shall Include material thickness and density in accordance with requirements of IBC. C. Correct unacceptable work and pay for further testing required to provide acceptable installations. D. Patch areas from which fireproofing materials have been taken for test and inspection purposes to restore required fire-resistive ratings, at no additional increase in Contract Sum. 0407-06 CEMENTMOUS F112EPROOFWG Progress CD Set 07812-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07812 VAIL, COLORADO CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING 3.05 CLEANING, REPAIR, AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: Remove over-spray and fall-out of materials from adjacent surfaces and dean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling, and unless otherwise indicated or specified, leave exposed surfaces in a scraped dean condition. B. Protect fireproofing from damage resulting from construction operations and other causes. C. Repair or replace work that has not been adequately protected. Patching and repairing of sprayed fireproofing, due to damage by other work, shall be performed under this Section at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING Progress CD Set 07812-4 PROJECT #002028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07822 VAIL, COLORADO FIRE RESISTIVE DUCT WRAP SECTION 07822 - FIRE RESISTIVE DUCT WRAP PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work of this section includes labor, material, and equipment to provide 2-hour fire resistive rated grease or air duct enclosure as a shaft alternative and a method for providing zero inch clearances around commercial kitchen grease duct exhaust systems to combustible materials. B. Related Sections: 1. Cementitious fireproofing is specified in Section 07812. 2. Firestopping is specified in Section 07840. 3. Gypsum wallboard is specified in Section 09250. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. A lightweight non-asbestos, high temperature, inorganic, ceramic fiber blanket totally encapsulated in foil/scrim having a service temperature range up to 23000F. Fire resistive duct wrap is directly applied to commercial grease hood duct systems and air duct systems to allow a zero inch clearance to combustRle construction and to provide a two hour fire-resistive duct enclosure. Fire resistive duct wrap is applied in a continuous wrap from the point the duct enters a concealed space to its exit from a building. B. Performance Requirements 1. Two-hour rated fire resistive enclosure assembly, ASTM E119: Large Scale Wall Panel Test and Total Engulfment Test. 2. Zero inch clearance to combustible, maximum allowable surface temperature on unexposed side, UL 1978. 3. Class I interior finish materials, ASTM E84. 4. Through-penetration protection systems for grease and air ducts, ASTM E814 and UL 1479. 5. Non-Combustibility, ASTM E136. 6. ISO-69441985, Fire Resistance Tests - Ventilation Ducts. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit test reports substantiating performance requirements and code compliance along with manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A Deliver materials in original sealed containers or unopened packages, and dearly labeled with manufacturer's name, product identification, and lot numbers. B. Store materials out of weather and in an enclosed shelter. 04-07-06 FIRE RESISTIVE DUCT WRAP Progress CD Set 07822 -1 PROJECT #002028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURER SECTION 07822 FIRE RESISTIVE DUCT WRAP A. Premier Refractories and Chemicals, Inc.'Pyroscat FP Duct Wrap" or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Fire Resistive Duct Wrap: 1.5" thick, 24" or 48" wide x 300" long rolls, foil encapsulated with logo identification. B. Tapes: As recommended by duct wrap manufacturer. C. Banding Material: 1. Carbon steel banding for 1 hour ratings; 112" to 314" wide x 0.015' thick minimum. 2. 304 Carbon Steel banding for 2 hour ratings; 1/7 to 314" wide x 0.015" thick minimum. D. Insulation Pins/Washers: 1. Pins: 10 gage, 4" to 5" long, copper coated steel; washers: 1.5" x 1.5" or 1.5' diameter galvanized steel speed dip. E. Through-Penetration Fire Stop Materials: As specified in Section 07840. F. Grease Duct Access Door 1. Steel angle opening frame. 2. Access Cover, minimum 16-gauge. 3. Insulation Pins. 4. Speed Clips, minimum 1.5" x 1.5" or 1.5" diameter galvanized steel. G. Hardware: 1. Threaded rods: 4' to 5" long, 114" diameter galvanized steel with 114' wing nuts and 114' metal washers. 2. Four inch long steel hollow tubing to fit threaded rods. 3. 114' wing nuts. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Remove dirt and dust, and dean surfaces or openings and items penetrating rated floors and rated wags. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install fire resistive duct wrap system in accordance with manufacturers instructions and referenced standards. 04-07-06 FIRE RESISTIVE DUCT WRAP Progress CD Set 07822 - 2 PROJECT #002028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07822 VAIL, COLORADO FIRE RESISTIVE DUCT WRAP B. Install fire resistive duct wrap in direct contact with the duct it encloses. Protect every portion of dud with no less than 2 layers for grease duct applications and 1 layer for 1 hour arc duct enclosures and 2 layers for 2 hour air duct enclosures. 1. Overlap both perimeter and longitudinal joints minimum of 3" per layer of material. 2. Air Duct Enclosure Optional Wrap: a. Follow same traditional wrap method with exception of utilizing a 3' perimeter overlap in conjunction with longitudinal butt joint wrap plus duct wrap collar over exterior layer joints. Filament tape is used as temporary hold on both layers until banding hardware is in place. b. Band exterior layer spaced minimum of 10.5" on center. For duct widths greater than 24 weld insulation pins to bottom horizontal and outer vertical duct runs. Impale duct wrap over pins and secure with galvanized steel speed dips until banding is applied. C. Locate grease duct access doors at horizontal deanouts as required by local odes. Protect with 3 layers of duct wrap, each layer overlapping previous by 1' on all sides and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Protect floor and wall penetrations with an approved through-penetration system having and F and T hourly rating not less than that of assembly penetrated and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as follows: Grease Ducts - 2 Hour Enclosure: a. Option A: 2 layers duct wrap per manufacturer's installation instructions, maintaining 3' transverse and longitudinal overlaps continuous through the penetration. b. Option B: Tightly butt duct wrap to the floor or wall on both sides of the assembly. Fill remaining annular space (3" maximum) between the wrapped duct (Option A) or bare steel duct (Option B) and periphery of the opening with 4-1/4" thickness of scrap duct wrap, or 4-1/4" 3 pcf mineral wool bait, firmly packed into opening. Apply 1/4" mininwm 2000+Silicone over packing material, within the annulus, flush with top surface of floor or both surfaces of wall. 2. Air Duds: 2 Hour Enclosure a. Option A 2 layers duct wrap per manufacturer's installation instructions, maintaining 3' transverse and longitudinal overlaps or optional 3' perimeter overlap with longitudinal butt joints plus dud wrap collar over exterior layer joints. b. Option B: Tightly butt dud wrap to the floor or wall on both sides of the assembly. Fill remaining annular space between the wrapped dud (Option A) or bare steel dud (Option B) and periphery of the opening with 4-1/4' thickness of scrap dud wrap, or 4-114", 3 pcf mineral wool haft firmly packed into opening. Apply 1/4' minimum fire stopping sealant over packing material within the annulus, flush with top surface of floor or both surfaces of wall. Apply a second layer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 REPAIR PROCEDURE A. Repair damaged duct wrap in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove damaged section. Apply a new section of same dimension. Place and fit ensuring same overlap that existed previously. Place banding around new duct wrap material and tension to sufficiently hold in place. 04-07-06 FIRE RESISTIVE DUCT WRAP Progress CD Set 07822 - 3 PROJECT #002028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07822 VAIL, COLORADO FIRE RESISTIVE DUCT WRAP C. If damage has penetrated to interior layer, remove affected sections and reinstall as specified. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 FIRE RESISTIVE DUCT WRAP Progress CD Set 07822 - 4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07840 VAIL, COLORADO FIRESTOPPING SECTION 07840 - FIRESTOPPING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing firestopping. B. Related Sections: Cementitious fireproofing is specified in Section 07812. 2. Fire resistive duct wrap is specified in Section 07822. 1.02 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide firestopping systems capable of closing or filling through-penetrations created by the burning or melting of combustible pipes, cable jacketing, or pipe insulation materials, or by the deflection of sheet metal due to thermal expansion. B. For firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions. C. For firestopping exposed to view, provide products when flame-spread values of less than 25 and smoke- developed values of less than 450, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive, technical data and illustrations. Include manufacturer's Material Data Safety Sheets and installation instructions. B. Certification: 1. Manufacturer's certification that products comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC's) and are nontoxic to building occupants. 2. Manufacturer's certification that firestopping materials comply with ASTM E814 and UL 147. C. UL Design Numbers: Furnish UL Design No. from the "Fire Resistance Directory -Volume II" for each required penetration type and configuration. Indicate which materials will be used in firestopping the penetration. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Firestopping materials and systems shall be fisted and labeled in accordance with requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Building Materials Directory. B. Fuestopping materials shall conform to Intemalional Building Code (IBC) for fire resistance standards and requirements for penetrations in walls, partitions, and floor/ceiling and floor/roof assemblies. C. Firestopping materials shall comply with ASTM E814 and UL 1479. D. Firestopping sealants shall comply with ASTM C719 and ASTM C920. E. Form materials to remain in place in the completed work and sealant used for firestopping work shall be UL listed and labeled. F. Firestopping materials shall be rated as required when tested in accordance with ASTM E119. G. Firestopping materials shall be asbestos free and shall not incorporate nor require the use of hazardous solvents. H. Firestopping materials shall not shrink upon drying as evidenced by cracking or pulling back from contact surface. 0407.06 FIRESTOPPING Progress CD Set 07840-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07840 VAIL, COLORADO FIRESTOPPING Installer shall have a minimum of 3-years experience installing UL listed firestop systems in similar type construction. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Follow manufacturers instructions for temperature, ventilation, and other conditions for mixing and installing foam seals. B. Observe and follow manufacturer's precautions when using materials considered toxic and hazardous. C. Maintain current copy of UL "Fire Resistance Directory" on Project site. D. Installation of firestopping shall precede finishing of gypsum board. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in the manufacturer's unopened containers and packages with manufacturers name, labels, product identification, lot numbers, and mixing and installation instructions, as applicable. B. Store materials in unopened containers and packages, and under conditions recommended by manufacturer. C. Store and handle firestopping materials in accordance with manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping in accordance with manufacturers' instructions by natural means or forced air circulation. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Perform work of this and other Sections in proper sequence to prevent damage to the firestopping materials and to ensure that their installation will occur prior to enclosing or concealing work. B. Do not cover firestopping materials until they have been properly inspected and accepted by the authority having jurisdiction. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the penetrating items. B. Accessories: Provide components of each firestopping system required to install fill materials. Use only components specified byfirestopping manufacturer and which are approved by UL for the designated fire-resis- tance-rated system. C. Manufacturers or systems not listed in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" but who can furnish certification of UL approval may be used in the work. 2.02 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS A. General: Listed manufacturers of through-penetration firestopping are intended as guidelines only, manufacturer and material type shall be as required by the UL Design No. for each penetration to receive firestopping. B. Approved Manufacturers: Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc., International Protective Coatings Corp., Spedfied Technologies, Inc., The RectorSeal Corporation, Tremco, Inc., 3M Fire Protection Products or approved equal. 04-07-06 FIRESTOPPING Progress CD Set 07840-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07840 VAIL, COLORADO FIRESTOPPING C. Provide mortar, sealants and caulk, putty, wrap strips, pillows, bags, and other types required for UL Design No. for each penetration to receive firestopping. 2.03 MINERAL FIBER FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS A. Material: Semi-rigid mineral fiber insulation, minimum 4-0density; USG Interiors'Thermafiber Safing', Schuller International'Insul-Shield', Thermal Ceramics Inc.'Cerablanket F.S' or approved equal. B. Support Clips: Manufacturer's standard impaling dips or custom designed to suit installation conditions, fabri- cated from galvanized sheet steel. 2.04 FIRESTOPPING AT ELECTRICAL BOXES AND UTILITY OUTLETS A. Utility penetrations in walls, ceilings, or floors requiring protected openings shall be firestopped and sealed with an approved material securely installed, capable of maintaining its integrity when subjected to test temperatures specified in ASTM E814. B. Steel electrical outlet boxes on opposite sides of walls requiring protected openings shall be separated by a horizontal distance of 24-inches. C. Steel electrical outlet boxes which occur in combination with outlet boxes of any size such that the aggregate area of unprotected outlet boxes exceeds 100-square inches in any 100-square feet of wall area shall be protected by an approved material or detail to decrease the aggregate area of unprotected utility boxes to less than 100-square inches in any 100-square feet of wall. D. Steel electrical outlet boxes which exceed 16-square inches in area shall be protected by 3M "Moldable Putty Pads", Specified Technologies, Inc. "SpecSeal Series SSP Putty Pads" or approved equal. E. Utility and electrical outlets or boxes shall be securely fastened to the stud or framing of the wall or ceiling assembly. The opening in the gypsum board shall be cut so that the clearance between the box and the gypsum board does not exceed 1184nch. In smoke partitions, fill the 1/8-inch gap with an approved fire-rated sealant 2.05 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing prior to application, comply with manufacturer's instructions.. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect openings and voids to be sealed to determine if conditions are satisfactory for the proper installation of fireslopping. Do not commence work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping to comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer. Remove foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping. Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by manufacturer using manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. 0407-06 FIRESTOPPNG Progress CD Set 07840-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07840 VAIL, COLORADO FIRESTOPPING C. Masking: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed upon completion of the work. Remove tape as soon as possible. 3.03 EXTENT OF FIRESTOPPING WORK A. General: Provide solid continuous firestopping wherever the penetration or addition of a construction element through or adjacent to a fire-rated floor, wall or partition, or roof creates a diiscontinuily of such a rated separation. Application limited in size and configuration to tested systems. Do not install insulation types specified in other Sections in lieu of specified firestopping materials. B. Penetrations: 1. Penetrations include conduit, cable, wire, pipe, dud, and other elements that pass through one or both outer surfaces of a fire-rated floor, roof, wall, or partition. 2. Fill penetrations as indicated in applicable UL Design No. 3. Verify that annular space around sprinkler pipes through fire-rated walls and floors is provided as required by NFPA 13. C. Fire Rated Partitions: 1. Fire-rated or smoke-rated partitions shall be firestopped with a frrestop sealant as fisted in UL 'Fire Resistance Directory' and as specified. Apply minimum 3184nch bead at intersection of finish material and adjacent surface, both sides and along entire perimeter. 2. Intersections at fire-rated or smoke-rated partitions and steel deck type floor-ceiling or roof-ceiling assemblies shall be firestopped as required. D. Provide firestopping to fill miscellaneous voids or openings at fire-rated construction as specified. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Do not install firestopping until building is sufficiently enclosed or protected against adverse weather conditions and supporting framing and surrounding construction is in a dry condition. B. Prepare and install firestopping in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Mineral Fiber. 1. Provide in thickness for compressing into voids for a tight friction fit when installed. 2. Provide in width sufficient to fill the depth of the void space using single width pieces. 3. Install with ends tight against terminal end construction, and with intermediate joints well compressed together and tight 4. For vertical void spaces, provide support dips near each end, spaced not over 24-inches on center. D. Foam: 1. Provide form materials to retain foam when placed. 2. Prime contact surfaces as recommended by foam manufacturer. 3. Inject foam into void spaces so foam develops full and complete contact with adjoining surfaces, and the space is free from air pockets. 4. Cure foam 24-hours, remove form materials not required to remain, and inspect 5. Provide additional foam or sealant to fill insufficient depth and remaining voids. 007.06 FtRESTOPPING Progress CD Set 07840-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07840 VAIL, COLORADO FIRESTOPPING E. Sealants: 1. Prepare penetrations in vertical and horizontal surfaces as required to receive finish products. 2. Install damming materials as required. 3. Apply caulk or putty in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. F. Finish surfaces of exposed to view firestopping to a uniform and level condition. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Identify firestop systems after installation. Identify the firestop system that has been installed and include the appropriate UL Design Number. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove spilled and excess materials without damaging adjacent surfaces. B. Leave finished work in neat, dean condition with no evidence of spin-overs or damage to adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 Progress CD Set RRESTOPPING 07840-5 i i PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07920 VAIL, COLORADO JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing joint sealants (including waterstop sealant). B. Related Sections: 1. Firestopping sealants are specified in Section 07840. 2. Joint sealants related to flashing and sheet metal work are specified in Section 07620. 3. Acoustical sealants are specified in Section 09820. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturers technical data for each product required, inducting instructions for joint preparation and sealant application. Include certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants, primers, and cleaners comply with local regulations controlling the use of volatile organic compounds (VOC). B. Samples: Manufacturers bead samples of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. C. Test Reports: 1. Certified test results of elastomeric sealants showing compliance with specified requirements. Include results of aged performances including hardness, stain-resistance, adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, low temperature flexibility, modulus of elasticity at 100-percent strain, affects of heat and aging, and affects of accelerated weathering. 2. Pre-construction field test results indicating which products and joint preparation methods demonstrated acceptable adhesion to joint substrates. D. Certificates: Manufacturers certification that joint sealants comply with specified requirements and are suitable for uses indicated. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installers Qualifications: Completion of at least 3 installations within the last 3-years similar in type and size to this Project B. Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each product required unless otherwise approved. C. Pre-construction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test adhesion to joint substrates. 1. Install joint sealants in 5-foot joint lengths. Allow to cure before testing. Test adhesion by pulling sealant out of joint 2. Perform field tests for each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate. 3. Arrange for tests to take place with joint sealant manufacturer's technical representative present 4. Report whether or not sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. 5. Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrate during testing. 0407-06 JOINT SEALANTS Progress CD Set 07920-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07920 VAIL, COLORADO JOINT SEALANTS 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A Deliver materials in the unopened, original containers or unopened packages with manufacturer's name, libels, product identification, color, expiration period, curing time and mixing instructions for multi-component materials. B. Store materials in the original, unopened containers or packages, and under conditions recommended by manufacturers. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Environmental Conditions: Do not instal sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer, or to wet joint substrates. B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not install sealants when joint widths are less than permitted by sealant manufacturer. C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 1.06 WARRANTY A Furnish a written warranty against leaks or other defects of materials and workmanship for a period of 10-years. Defects include but are not limited to changes in the structural, physical or chemical properties of the sealant materials that impair function or require abnormal maintenance, changes in surface finish, color or texture, falure in adhesion, weather resistance or durability, failure to prevent entry of water, or failure to comply with specified requirements. B. This warranty shall not cover formation of cracks or defects in substrate materials adjacent to the seal, joint movement in excess of movement rating of sealant, or physical damage caused by others. C. Repair or replace defective materials and workmanship during warranty period without expense to Owner, includ- ing removal and replacement of other items as required. D. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Provide color of exposed joint sealants as selected by Architect. Custom colors may be used. In general, exposed sealants shall match the color of adjacent materials. B. Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. 2.02 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Exterior Building Sealant: Either one-part silicone complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G, A, and 0 or multi-component polyurethane complying with ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, A, and 0. Dow Coming Corp. '79(r, General Electric Co.'Sllpruf, Tremco, Inc.'Spectrum 2' or 'Dymeric 511' or approved equal. Sealant shah resist ultra-violet heat, ozone and moisture exposure and shat withstand substrate surface temperatures as high as 2504eg. F. B. Exterior Building Sealant at Fiber Cement Siding: OSI Sealants Incorporated 'OSI Quad Pro Series Sealant', Tremco 'Vulkem 116'. C. Sanitary Sealant: One-part mildew-resistant siicone; ASTM C920 Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A and 0; formulated with fungicide for sealing interior joints with nonporous substrates around ceramic tile, showers, sinks and plumbing fixtures; Dow Coming Corp. '786 Mildew Resistant% General Electric Co. 'Sanitary 1700', Sonnebom Building Product Div.'Sonolastic Omniplus' or approved equal. 04.07.06 JOINT SEALANTS Progress CD Set 07920- 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07920 VAIL, COLORADO JOINT SEALANTS D. Horizontal Joint Sealant Two-part pourable urethane; ASTM C920, Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A and 0; Bostick Construction Products Div. 'Chem-Calk 550', Mameco International, Inc. 'Vulkem 245, W.R. Meadows, Inc. "Pourthane", Pecora Corp. 'NR 200 Urexpan", Harry S.Peterson Company'Isofelx 880 G.B.", Sonnebom "Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant% Tremco, Inc.'THC-900/901' or approved equal. Horizontal joint sealant shall have a minimum Shore A hardness of 30. 2.03 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Interior Building Sealant: Acryfic-emulsion; one-part, non-sag, mildew-resistant, complying with ASTM C834, formulated to be paintable; Pecora Corp. 'AC-2(r, Sonnebom "Sonolac", Tremco Inc. "Tremco Acrylic Latex 834' or approved equal. 2.04 JOINT FILLERS FOR CONCRETE PAVING A. Joint Filler. Preformed cork strips complying with ASTM D1752 for Type II or preformed sponge rubber strips complying with ASTM D1752 for Type I. 2.05 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings which are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved by sealant manufacturer. B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, non-waxing, non-extruding strips of plastic foam, of size, shape and density to control sealant depth. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer. As recommended by joint sealant manufacturer for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Non-staining, chemical cleaner of type acceptable to manufacturer of sealant and sealant backing materials which are not harmful to substrates and adjacent nonporous materials. C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, non-absorbent type compatible with joint sealants and to surfaces adjacent to joints. D. Waterstop Sealant DeNeefs'SwellSeal' gun grade or approved equal. Provide neoprene adhesive for securing waterstop sealant in place. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants. 1. Remove foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, and surface dirt. 2. Clean porous surfaces, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or add washing to produce a dean, sound substrate. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints. 3. Remove lallance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean non-porous surfaces by chemical cleaners or other means that are not harmful to substrates or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 04-07.06 JOINT SEALANTS Progress CD Set 07920-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 07920 VAIL, COLORADO JOINT SEALANTS C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturers' printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as ap- plicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated. C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: 1. Instal joint-fillers to provide sealant support for optimum performance cross-sectional shapes and depths. a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint-fillers. b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear joint-fillers. C. Remove absorbent joint-fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. 2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint-fillers, compression seals or back of joints where required to prevent third-side adhesion of sealant to back of joint. D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques to contact and full wet joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration and providing uniform, optimum performance cross-sectional shapes and depths. E. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Tod sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. F. Install waterstop sealant at juncture between below grade foundation walls and slabs on grade where indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage. B. Cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealers and reseal joints with matching new materials. C. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with clewing materials approved by sealant manufacturer. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 JOINT SEALANTS Progress CD Set 07920-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08001 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR SCHEDULE SECTION 08001- DOOR SCHEDULE PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes the door schedule. Refer•to floor plans for door locations and drawing sheets AO.6xfor door type illustrations. END OF SECTION 0407-06 DOOR SCHEDULE Progress CD Set 06001-1 HILL GLAZIER A r c h i t e c t s Door Exterior! Door Door HDVVR Closer HDVVR FIN. OPENING SIZE DOOR FRAME No. Location Interior Rating Type She - T see egen eig t is a ms al ms LEVEL1 LEVEL 2 S 30 S S S -V T-0" 1-3/4" HM P •q •3 4 3 3-U 0 3 a-W T-O" 1-3 HM 3- 3- 3 3• 34 3 1-3/4" HM p 0 4 3 3.0 0 3 0 a-W p PRa-6P 71.013 1-3/4" HM HM P Head Detail ` Jamb Detail ` SUACAARY PERMT SET 05/12/2006 SECTION 08001- DOOR SCHEDULE Sill Armor(A)1 Mop(M) / Detail Kick(K) Plate Remarks Poar Seasons Resorts HGA Project Number 02028 Vail, Colorado V:lOZP2810oor5chedde10202aDoor schedule •Stmmary PemdUis Page 1 of 19 Door HGA Project Number 02028 VA020284DoorSahedule%02020 Door Schedule • Swemary PemYtals Exterior/ Door Door HDWR Closer HDWRFIN. HILL GLAZIER A r c h i t e c t s OPENING SIZE DOOR FRAME Head Jamb Sill i Armor(A)/Mop(M)/ K ck(K) Plate SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05/12/2006 SECTION 08001- DOOR SCHEDULE Remarks Four Seasons Resorts Vail, Colorado Page 2 of 19 HILL GLAZIER A r c h i t e c t s FRAME Head Jamb Sill Armor(A) I Mop(M)1 HM P uetan" SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05/12/2006 SECTION 08001- DOOR SCHEDULE 2 SERV. ELEV. LOBBY INT 20 Bi B09 S 30 PR4'-U' 7'4' 13/4" HM P F' G D r__ M-IMT- - MT 131 B01 30 T-U- HM MA HOLD- - 0 pi -pur 3 S S -1-O T- B 0 S 10 3 S 3 5 3 30 3 Four Seasons Resorts HGA Project Number 002026 Vail, Colorado d o ehember Door 5ahedWe-Summary PemdLrls Page 3 of 19 Door Exterior! Door Door HDWR Door No. Location Interior Rating Type 3 SMOKING ROOM INT B2 B03 3 3 2 M- DRYERS INT Tfg"- LAUNDRY OFFICE IN r 3 36 MR - VAUET- INT 3 B3 B16 3 MT- WOMEN INr 2 -S- MT- N GH CLEAN N -ST6- I ER T I T 323 STORAGE 3 S 32 G SS 32 JANITOR INT --BT- -19W 330 BANQ 0 334 SCULLERY 331 S 7ASTR7T89UE- INI B3 B10 339 3 43 - -S"- 343B [ COLD REPARATION INT 3 345 OFFICE INT B2 B13 T47- HALLWAY -7T- 2 20 B3 3 3 ibb FOYER --PTT- -PS5- 11 UL; IUILLI P4 -7fl- 351 VLSI IBULE (MEN) --FT- -177 - U699 MEE I ING ROOM #2 1 INT --M- --PT- = - 37M BOARD Room INT --PT- I Hit 318B BOARD ROOM --7= P35 - S7MF - FREFUNU I ION -79T- Pi P38 MUT BANUUE I ROOM IN[ Pi P39 BANQUE] ROOM -7717 1PREFUNCI ION INI P3 Exterior! Door Door HDWR Closer HDWR FIN. HGA Project Number 02028 V.'10202MDoorSchedulel02028 Door Schedule- Summary PemoRuds HILL GLAZIER A r c h i t e c t s DOOR FRAME Thick a Ims a Ines Pad Jamb Sill Armor(A) / Mop Kick(K) Plate SUMMARY PERMIT SET 051(2/2006 SECTION 08001- DOOR SCHEDULE Remarks Four Seasons Resorts Vail, Colorado Page 4 of 19 Door ExteriorI Door Door HDVVR No. Location Interior Rating Type Set - ~11:511.) HKEFUNCTION MT -P33 - - - - 21= BALLRUOM TNT PT 747 - 70T TOILET INI Vil 388B 11011-1=1 INT P4 P11- :31:19 1JANI I OK INT I Pi -FTT- v JOILI=I P4 P11 IOILF-I P4 P11 I IOILEI P4 11 1 391b IQILI=l IN] --PT P11 391F WILLI INI P4 P11 M49 MS 1 ORAUL --TNT- HILL GLAZIER A r c h i t e c t s DOOR FRAME ead Jamb Sil uetao uetao' uetali SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05/12/2006 SECTION 08001- DOOR SCHEDULE C -301A G 30 S S --f-37Tr- ST 3 U?jM- CORRIDOR INT -SW -7T- -9~ --7RY-bF- --Mo- RW- MAGNETIC HOLD-OPEN 2 S 3 HGA Project Number 02028 V'.W20201DoorSChedule102028 Door Schedule•Summary Pemdtals S 10 3U- 19 f 30 0 0 10 0 Four Seasons Resorts Vail, Colorado Page 5 of 19 HILL GLAZIER A r c h i t e c t s i I Door Exterior/ Door Door HDWR Closer HDWRFIN. OPENING SIZE DOOR FRAME No. Location Interior Rating Type --Set- 'Type see egen Height is a Finish mis LEVEL 4 10 S 10 S 10 10 M s 10 SUMMARY PERMCP SET 05/12/2006 SECTION 08001- DOOR SCHEDULE Head Jamb Sill Armor(A)/Mop(M)1 Detail" Detail" Detail t<Ck(K)Plate Remarks 20 131 3 S 3 d"- --FAI S 30 ~-6` T-011 HM p HM P °MECHANICAL MEZZANINE HM 3 3 M70- VESTIBULE INT go '-BT- -To'r INT 3 Four Seasons Resorts HGA Project Number 02026 Va>7, Colorado V9020281DourSchedde=020 Door schedule- Summary Pemdttls Page 6 of 19 HILL GLAZIER A r c h i t e c t s Door No. Location Exterior/ Door Door HDWR Closer HDVVR FIN. OPENING SIZE DOOR FRAME Head Interior Rating Type Wit- yTpe see egen eig is a ms a Finish Detail' LEVEL 5 S 30 S S 0 SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05/12/2006 SECTION 08001- DOOR SCHEDULE Jamb Sill Armor(A) l Mop(M) l Detail' Detail " Kick(K) Plate Remarks S I B5 MFR 4- U1 H44 10 1 3'-U' T-0" _V~VD_ ST I MAGNETIC HOLD-OPEN 1 H-J 3 Four Seasons Resorts HGA Project Number 02028 Val, Colorado VA020281DwSchedWe102D28 DoorSchedule•Sw ary PemILAs Pagel of 19 HILL GLAZIER A r c h i t e c t s SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05/12/2006 SECTION 08001- DOOR SCHEDULE Door Exterior/ Door Door HDNR Closer HDWRFIN. OPENING SIZE DOOR FRAME Head Jamb Sill Armor(A)/Mop(M)/ No. Location Interior Rating Type Set -Type see egen Width -Height is a _ mis a Finish Detail' Detail' Detail Klck(K) Plate Remarks 1-3/4" VVL) $f.____ iSERV. ELEV. LOBBY 20 10 1 0 3 -0 F-- S S S S S S S 0 10 30 Ta- 10 10 0 3 fr- Tr- 10 30 10 0 30 3 30 30 S 30 10 10 Four Seasons Resorts HGA Project Number 02028 Val, Colorado V:a202MDoorSohedde1D2028 DoorSahedNe• SUmmmy Pem,itAs Page 8 of 19 LEVEL6 HILL GLAZIER SUMMARY PERMIT SET A r c h i t e c t s 05/12/2006 SECTION 08001- DOOR SCHEDULE Door No. Location Exterior! Door Door HDVVR Interior Rating Type Se poser HDWR FIN. OPENING SIZE DOOR FRAME Head Jamb Sill Armor(A) I Mop(M) / y~pe see egen e g is a Es at Fi-n-isfi- Detail ` Detail' Detail " I(ick(K) Plate Remarks 1 -3 " WD ST ---f O- S f O- 4 S 30 3 -3 S 0 3- 3 S S G•6 ELECTRICAL C G G 0 G• 0 G 622 MAIDS ROOM IN[ G NICAL MEZZANINE INT 3'-9' 7'-W -60 C 1- ST ST - 1 3• a - 2 3• 1- LEVEL 7 5 0 S 30 S 3 10 S 10 Z S S 30 0 -702 SERV. ELEV. LOBBY INT 20 G -0 -3 S 2 G 3- S S S-7M- TRASH INT --T--3T4- 0 G- G- 02 I=LEUMCAL ---2U- P02 I VESTIBULE G- SO G -rUU21 HGA Project Number 02028 VA02028{noorSchedule%02028 Door Schedule•Sununary PernniUds 1-3/4-, CARD READER 30 d'~ 3- --T-T4`- - -777- HM 3 •3 Rs -3 S Four. Seasons Resorts Vail, Colorado Page 9 of 19 HILL GLAZIER A r c h i t e c t s Door No I nrnfinn Exterior/ Door Door HDWR Closer HDWR FIN. Interior Rating Type Set -Type see Feg-e-nil) S G 2 MAID'S ROOM INT 2 G ELECTRICAL 2 G- 0 G7 0 0 2 G ELECTRICAL 113-717 S 00 20 G1 S-701A STAIR "N' NT - - 90 PO 7RT 90 G1 2 G 01 02 STAIR V' --nwwr-- 0 -90r STAIR D G S --TO- G -PUT- S-0 S S 0 G S-712 STAIR S 10 S 0 S 0 30 D 10 S 10 10 10 10 S S 3 S 10 S D T15- 8 FRAME Head Jamb Sill a Ines Detail Detail' Detail Armor(A) I Mop(M) I Mck(K) Plate SUMMARY PERAW SET 05/12/2006 SECTION 08001- DOOR SCHEDULE LEVEL 9 901 MEMWICAL 0ROOM INT 2 0 - - - - G -3/A' S 2 912 TRASH BI 1 (303 3. Four Seasons Resorts HGA Project Number 02028 Vail, Colorado V.W202SIOoor SohedWeI02028 Door Schedule-Summary PemlWs Page 10 of 19 HILL GLAZIER A r c h i t e c t s SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05/12/2006 SECTION 08001- DOOR SCHEDULE Door Exterior/ Door Door HDWR Closer HDWR FIN. OPENING SIZE DOOR FRAME Head Jamb Sill Armor(A) I Mop(M) l No. Location Interior Rating Type Se -Type see egen eig t is at _mis a Finish DetailDetail* Detail" Kick(K) Plate Remarks G9 G 3 ~0 1_~ S P"I 0 -61 1 7'. WD ST ' ELEV. LOBBY 1 3 2 5 ES 2 SERV. ELEV. LOBBY INF 20 P01 3.6 3 1 2 5 0 3- G- ELECTRICAL INI E31 04 STAIR 0 G1 P02 S 10 3.0 71 0" 1-3/4!' WD ST HM P -INT 90 S G S S 10 1-3/4" WD ST S-902A STAIR "B" S 90 3 S & S STAIR"P" IN] 9 LEVEL 10 02 G 0 S 3 G CORRIDOR INT WD MAGNETIC G 6 3 HOLD-OPEN SERV. ELEV. LOBBY S 10 3-6' T-9' 1-3/4" VVID - S - E-1002A TRASH INT -U- 3 ELEVATOR S S 20 2 G1 P02 S 10 3'-U' T-Y' 1-314" WID ST s -PJD s - G S S D ----ST HM S 9 G S 10 _3 --VM.._... - - 5 -vvu s 5 -0 90 S 30 S GUESTROOMS HGA Project Number 02028 V.1020901DcorSahedule102028 Door Sehedule-Summary PermltAs Four Seasons Resorts Vail, Colorado Page 11 of 19 HILL GLAZIER A r c b i t e c t s SUMMARY PERAHT SET 05/12/2006 SECTION 08001- DOOR SCHEDULE Door Exterior! Door Door HDWR Goser HDWR FIN. OPENING SIZE DOOR FRAME Head Jamb Sill Armor(A)/Mop(M)I i No. Location SHOWER Interior Rating Type Set - yT pe see egend Width Height is at Finish at ims Detail' Detail' Detail Kick(K) Plate Remarks G5 1 20 --`L - - G SHOWER 20 2• G - 6 ICON C 0 WD ST WD ST G ST BEDROOM --INT I G02 1 110 3'-0" 1 T- 1-3/4" WD ST WD S i 00 GO 2- 0 WD ST WD T S G 0 2 10 -7-11a, -0 WD ST WD ST G8 G02 _WD ST WD ST ( i i MEDIA CEN I ER IN] PR 2.0 WD ST W~ ST G913 DEN INI G 1 10 1 PR 21-611 WD ST WD ST G 2 1-3/4" 2.6 WD ST WD ST SLIDER CO 5 0 U-U, --MF7-- MFR MFR UM- PTICZRY SLIDER T 1 MFR 10. K Iu1FR MFR-- MFR .1 3 13 c0 0 2 CO NYDOOR 10 1 MFR MFR MFR EMPLOYEE HOUSING RESIDENCE CLUB Four Seasons Resorts HGA Project Number 02028 Vail, Colorado V:f02MB1DOOr5tludule102028 Door SchedWe-Summary Pemdtxt Page 12 of 19 HILL GLAZIER A r c h i t e c t s SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05/12/2006 SECTION 08001- DOOR SCHEDULE Door Exterior! Door Door HDWR Closer HDWR FIN. OPENING SIZE DOOR FRAME Head Jamb Sill Armor(A)lMop(M)! No. Location Interior Rating Type et- -Type see gend t eg t is a mis at Finish Detail' Detail" DetailIOck(K) Plate Remarks OS S C 2 0 00 G 6 E] I SID SID I ROOM e z o I - I J ~ I ~ SID I 1 E------~ f I I G 3 3- CONDO #2 Four Seasons Resorts HGA Project Number 02028 Vag, Colorado VpV20201DoorSehedulei02020 Door Schedule -Summary Penn tvh Page 13 of 19 CONDO #1 HILL GLAZIER A r c h i t e c t s SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05/12/2006 SECTION 08001 - DOOR SCHEDULE Door Exterior! Door Door HDWR Goser HDWR FIN. OPENING SIZE DOOR FRAME Head Jamb Sill Armor(A) I Mop(M) I No. Location Interior Rating Type Set -Type see egen t eig t -Tfiicli Mat'l ims Mat'l ms Detail Detail` Detail Kick(K)Plate Remarks 0 C2-127A 0 OS G2 G03 C2.2 OS FE G2 02 i i CONDO #3 GL_ . D...__ ......_....5~ ...57 10 --PR 2 JD SID I SID I.-g, 0 10 --To- 26-- 76- 0 fa- CONDO #4 CONDO #5 Tour Seasons Resorts HGA Project Number 02028 Vail, Colorado V=02MDoorSchedulet02020 Door SehedWe• Summary Perm As Page 14 of 19 HILL GLAZIER A r c h i t e c t s SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05112/2006 SECTION 08001- DOOR SCHEDULE Door Exterior/ Door Door HDWR Closer HDVVR FIN. OPENING SIZE DOOR FRAME Head Jamb Sill Armor(A) l Mop(M) / No. Location Interior Rating Type -Set T Fse-e7eg-enicl) Width eig t is at mis Mat'l Ims Detail' Detail' Detail Kick(K) Plate Remarks CONDO #6 CONDO #T C 0 0 10 715- 10 0 2 20 CONDO #8 CONDO #9 UU-111z ;N71 10 FN S-U~ 1 F I I Four Seasons Resorts HGA Project Number 02026 Va21, Colorado V10202MDoorSchedule%02020 Door Schedule -SUmpary PermRris Page 15 0119 Door Exterior/ Door Door HDWR Closer HDWR FIN. No. Location Interior Rating Type Set - G 00 C9- 09 0 CLOSET UTILITY 0ROOM -TINTT*- VEMMIE 3 CLOSE[ INT 3 C S BATHROOM 14 BEDROOM C9-120 CLO= -2 CLOSET 0 23 S CLOSET C9-124 IWATER C8. 26 1BATHROOM 2 SHOWER 29 BATHROOM 32 3 109-131 CONDO #10 ( I HILL GLAZIER A r c h i t e c t s DOOR Thick a Ines ut. - 13/4" WD ST MFR MFR- 3 S r. - VL - 3 1314" WD ST GIL 13/4" ST 13/4" WD 81 - GL - 774"- - WD ST M" WD ST- r, - SUADIARY PERMIT SET 05/12/2006 SECTION 08001- DOOR SCHEDULE d Jamb Sill Armor(A)/Mop(M)! uetair uetail uetaa Sit) SID S1DI --SID SIIJ CONDO #11 CONDOM G 1'-U' ~ I 1 WD I ST WD rsu I ° 6 SS Four Seasons Resorts HGA Project Number 02028 Vail, Colorado VV2028%DoorSchedWe{02028 Door Schedule-Su u ary PermlLds Page 16 of 19 Door Exterior! Door Door No. Location Interior Rating Type Set- U4A CLOSE] NT 2- CO 12• BATHROOM INI 2• SHOWER INT RqT- C 2- 09 COS Mo= 0 INT C - C 27P VEMIMIE (MASTER BEDROOM) INI - C12-CLOSET INT C 2-BATHROOM INT - g SHOWER INT - WATER CLOSET INT --120 FAMILY ROOM C12-120B C 2-121A I LIVING 00 C 2- [LIVING 00 C 2- 23 CLOSET 2- 2- 2 COS 0 C - 5 E5 UTILITY ROOM -7717- 2• 2 BEDROOM C12-136 IWATER CLOSET -INT- -MFR- BATHROOM INT OWER _NFR- T2-P5 C SH4 114 HILL GLAZIER A r c h i t e c t s DOOR FRAME is Ma-fl Finish M-55- Finish WD ST MFR --Mrq- 13 S C-1 - 13/4" WD ST 1314" WD TTff~ WD 34 S G 4 S 13/4" WD ST 3 S 13/4" uL WD ST 3 S 4 - s M` WD WD ST 1314" vvU 51 _ S 13/4" VVD 13/4" VVD G Jamb ue[an ueiaii ° SI SID SID S S SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05112/2006 SECTION 08001- DOOR SCHEDULE Four Seasons Resorts HGA Project Number 02028 Vail, Colorado V:NYORBIeoor ScMdde10202e OoaSchedWe-Summary Pctmitrls Page 17 of 19 Door Exterior/ Door Door HDWR Closer HDWRFIN. No. Location Interior Rating Type Set C14-116 so - 17 C 4• 19 S WASTER C 22 CLOSET 4- C - 23 G OS C - BATHROOM NT UP-f= SHOWER T WATER C - CLOSET 0 9 CLOSE C14-130 1BATHROOM C - SHOWER MFR C - CLOSET BEDROOM RIN T C - 34 BATHROOM CONDO #15 CONDO #16 HGA Project Number 02020 V7020281Door Schedolel02025 Door SchedWe- Summary Pemdtzls HILL GLAZIER A r c h i t e c t s DOOR FRAME Thick at mis at mis 13/4" WD S1 - - GL _ T 3T4" - WD s -NF 3 S 4 34 S 3 5 3 f4i S S S 5 V. I SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05/12/2006 SECTION 08001-DOOR SCHEDULE Jamb Sill Armor(A) / Mop(M)1 uetao - uela5 uetail SID S Four Seasons Resorts Vad, Colorado Page 18 of 19 HILL GLAZIER A r c h i t e c t s SUMMARY PERAHT SET 05/12/2006 SECTION 08001- DOOR SCHEDULE Door Exterior/ Door Door HONK Closer HDNRFIN. OPENING SIZE DOOR FRAME Head Jamb Sill Armor(A)/Mop(M)I No. Location Interior Rating Type met- -Type see egen Height c a Finish a mils Detail' Detail' Detail' Kick(K) Plate Remarks Hardware Finish Legend 10 Oil-rubbed Bronze 20 Polished Chrome 30 Satin Chrome 40 Satin Nickel 50 Black 60 Satin Stainless 70 Polished Stainless 80 Satin Brass- Non Ferrous Notes Head and Jamb details interior doors- Unless otherwise noted, refer to drawing sheet A9.1.01 for typical conditions. Refer to interior design drawings for applied millwork or other specific conditions. Exterior doors - Unless otherwise noted, refer to architectural floor plans and wall sections for detail references. Sill and Threshold details Interior doors - Unless otherwise noted, refer to drawing sheet A9.2.01 for typical conditions. Refer to interior design drawings for specific floorflnlsh or threshold conditions. Exterior doors - Unless otherwise noted, refer to architectural floor plans and wall sections for detail references. SIZES ARE DENOTING ACTUAL DOOR LEAF DIMENSIONS, AND ARE NOT DENOTING FRAME DIMENSIONS, f( HGA Project Number 02028 VAD2021nDoorScheckde=02eDoor Schedule -Summary PemdGls Four Seasons Resorts Vag, Colorado Page 19 of 19 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08110 VAIL, COLORADO STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing steel doors and frames. B. Related Sections: 1. Flush wood doors are specified in Section 08212. 2. Stile and rail wood doors are specified in Section 08216. 3. Door hardware is specified in Section 08710. 4. Glass and glazing is specified in Section 08800. 5. Field-appfled finishes are specified in Section 09900. 6. Door and window flashings (fle)ible flashings) are specified in Section 07657. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Furnish for each type of door and frame, including details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include details of each frame type, elevations of door types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel doors and frames shall comply with ANSI 250.8 "Recommended Specifications Standard Steel Doors and Frames" and the specified requirements. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies whose fire resistance characteristics have been determined in accordance with ANSI/UL 10B and are labeled and listed by UL, Factory Mutual, Warnock Hersey, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated W provide protection during transit and job storage. B. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. M1aior damage may be repaired provided finish items are equal to new work and acceptable to Architect otherwise remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 44nch high wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/44ic:h space between stacked doors to promote arc circula- tion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Ceco Corp., Curries Company, Forderer, Steelcraft Manufacturing Co., Stiles or approved equal. ASN, 2.02 MATERIALS qw~l A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM 04-07-06 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Progress CD Set 09110-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08110 VAIL, COLORADO STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A569. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A366, commercial quality or ASTM A620, drawing quality. C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel complying with ASTM A526, commercial quality, or ASTM A642, drawing quality, hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A525, A60 or G60 coating designation, mill phosphatized. D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18-gauge, galvanized where used with galvanized frames. E. Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanize in accordance with ASTM A153, Class C or D as applicable. F. Shop Applied Primer: Rust inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints. 2.03 DOORS A. Provide metal doors of ANSI A250.8 grades and models specified. Interior Flush Doors: Grade II, heavy duty, Model 3 or 4, minimum 18-gauge cold-rolled sheet steel faces. 2. Exterior Flush Doors: Grade III, extra heavy duty, Model 4, minimum 16-gauge galvanized steel faces. B. Internal Construction: Vertical steel stiffeners with mineral fiber sound deadener between stiffeners, in accordance with ANSI A250.8 requirements. C. Clearance: Not more than Minch at jambs and heads, except not more than 114-inch between non-fire-rated pairs of doors. Not more than 3144nch at bottom. Fire Doors: Provide clearances according to NFPA 80. 0. Edges: 1. General: Beveled latch stile for single doors, and meeting stile for pair doors; square elsewhere. 2. Stile Edges: No seams are allowed on vertical stile edges. 3. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforced with 16-gauge steel channels; both edges flush and made watertight for exterior doors, top edge flush for interior doors. E. Glazing: Provide minimum 20-gauge steel non-reprovable glazing stops on the outside of exterior doors and on the secure side of interior doors. Glazing beads on the inside of glass and louver panels shall be removable. Locate glazing beads on the Interior face or secure side of locked rooms. 2.04 FRAMES A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, mullions and interior glazed panels and other openings, of types and styles indicated. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. B. One-Piece Welded Frames: 16-gauge for interior openings, 114-gauge for exterior openings. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded comers. C. Glazing Beads: Provide frame glazing beads in interior glazed openings and other locations where fixed glass is indicated. Prepare frames for the type of glazing beads required to receive the glass and gaskets indicated. Miter or butt join beads at comers. Glazing heads may be either screw-on or snap-on type. D. Anchors: Provide a jamb anchor for each 2-6' of door height or fraction thereof. 0407..06 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Progress CD Set 08110-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08110 VAIL, COLORADO STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 2. Fabricate from minimum 16-gauge sheet steel. 3. Vary anchor types to provide positive fastening to adjacent construction. 4. Secure a metal dip angle at bottom of each jamb member for anchoring to floor, with a minimum of two fasteners. 5. Items to be built into exterior walls shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM Al 53, Class B. E. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped or smoke gasketed frames, drill stops to receive 3-silencers on strike jambs of single-swing frames and 2-silencers in heads of double-swing frames. F. Plaster Guards: Provide 26-gauge steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel doors and frames to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply with A250.8 requirements. B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non-flush units, from cold-rolled steel. C. Tolerances: Comply with SDI-117, "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames". D. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings from either cold- rolled or hot-rolled steel. E. Fabricate exterior doors and frames from galvanized sheet steel in accordance with SDI-112. Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 16-gauge inverted steel channels with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. F. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. G. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware in accordance with final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable require- ments of ANSI A250.6 for door frame preparation for hardware. H. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Dulling and tapping of surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site. 1. Locate hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or in accordance with Door Hardware Institute (DHQ "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware on Standard Steel Doors and Frames". J. Shop Painting: Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. 1. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before application of paint 2. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive paint finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION j A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordancewith the manufacturers instructions, the requirements of ANSIISDI, and reviewed Shop Drawings. 04-07-06 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Progress CD Set 08110-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08110 VAIL, COLORADO STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of ANSI A250.8 and SDI-122 unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set Afthr wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. In masonry construction, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors. Grout frames solid. 2. In stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws. Fill frames with acoustical insulation material. 3. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within specified clearances. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install with clearances specified in NFPA 80. 2. Smoke-Control Doors: Comply with NFPA 105. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Immediately after installation, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. 1. Remove rust before touch-up is applied. 2. Touch-up shall not be obvious. B. Repair damaged galvanizing with a galvanizing repair paint. C. When complete, exposed surfaces and edges shall be dean, straight, and free from dents, scratches, and other damage and defects. D. Doors and finish hardware shall operate smoothly, quietly, and free from bind. END OF SECTION 04-07.06 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES progress CD Set 08110-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08212 VAIL, COLORADO FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 08212 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing flush wood doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Pressed metal door frames are specified in Section 08110. 2. Stile and rail wood doors are specified in Section 08216. 3. Finish hardware is specified in Section 08710. 4. Glass for vision panels is specified in Section 08800. 5. Field finishing of doors and accessories is specified in Section 09900. 6. Door and window flashings (flexible flashings) are specified in Section 07657. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive and technical data and illustrations for each type of door including details of core and edge construction, and trim for openings. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements for factory finishing and other data C. Samples: Submit 124nch square or larger samples as specified or required to represent required characteristics. Resubmit samples until approved. 1. Doors for Transparent Finish: Door faces with solid wood edging representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer. Samples shall be representative of the complete range of wood veneer colors to be expected in the work and be prefinished with proposed finish system to be used. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Flush wood door construction shall comply with AWI'Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards' Section 1300 for Premium grade doors. B. Fire-Rated Doors: Provide wood doors that comply with NFPA 80 and are labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Flush wood doors and steel frames specified in Section 08110 shall comply with positive pressure test requirements of IBC and shall be labeled accordingly by the door and frame manufacturer in a manner approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Fire-rated doors, including 20-minute doors, shag be "Category K doors as defined by ITS (Warnock Hersey) or equivalent. D. Allowable Tolerances: As specified in AN 'Architectural Woodwork (Quality Standards" Section 1300-G-20. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors individually protected with polyvinyl or plastic wrap, identified with manufacturer's name, and name and type of door. Identify each door with same symbol used on door schedule. Leave protection on door during constriction. B. Store doors covered and flat, supported above a level surface in a dry, well ventilated building. C. Do not subject doors to extremely high or low temperatures or humidity. 0¢07.06 FLUSH WOOD DOORS Progress CD Set OW2-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08212 VAIL, COLORADO FLUSH WOOD DOORS D. Handle with clean gloves; do not drag doors across one another or other surfaces. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during the remainder ofoonshudion period in compliance with the requirements specified in AWI'Ardritectural Woodwork Quality Standards'. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warrant each solid core interior door against defects in materials and workmanship for the life of the original installation, including costs of re-hanging. Defects include, but are not limited to the followwing: 1. Cores shall not telegraph through door faces. Stile, rail, and core show-through shall be considered a defect when the face of the door varies from a true plane in excess of 0.0104nch in a 34nch span. 2. Doors shall not have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than that permitted in AWI 'Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards' Section 1300-T-1. B. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc., Eggers, VTI, Marshfield Door Systems or approved equal. 2.02 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Type: Flush veneered, five-ply construction. Doors with seven-ply construction will not be acceptable. B. Cross Banding: Manufacturer's standard, minimum 1116-inch thick. Fire-retardant treated where required by testing agency. C. Door Thickness: 1-314-inches, unless otherwise indicated. D. Fabricate wood doors in sizes indicated for either job-site fitting or factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, at the Contractor's option. Factory fit doors shall comply with the following uniform clearances and bevels: 1. Comply with dearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements of NFPA 80 for fire-resistance-rated doors. E. For doors that are pre-machined, factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame shop drawings, DHI Al 15-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory machining. F. Warp Tolerance: As specified in AWI'Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards' Section 1300-T-1. In addition, warp tolerance shall apply to pairs of doors and to doors in relation to the frame or jamb in which hung. G. Factory Finishing: 1. Transparent Finish Doors: Prefinish to match Architect approved samples as follows: a. AWI Grade: Premium. 04.07-06 FLUSH WOOD DOORS Progress CD Set 06212-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08212 VAIL, COLORADO FLUSH WOOD DOORS b. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish with performance requirements comparable to catalyzed lacquer or alkyd urea conversion varnish. C. Staining: Match Architect approved sample. d. Effect: Filled finish. e. Sheen: Semigloss. 2.03 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS A. Veneer: 1. Transparent Finish Doors: AWI Premium Grade, plain sliced, species to be selected by the Architect or Interior Designer. a. Veneer Matching: Book and balance matching. b. Pairs and Sets: Provide pair matching and set matching for pairs of doors and for doors hung in adjacent sets. 2. Painted Doors: AWI Custom Grade Birch or other close grain hardwood. B. Adhesive: NWWDA IS-1.6, Type II adhesive bond or better for cores, Type 1 adhesive bond for faces and cross bands. Adhesive shall be low VOC emitting adhesive complying with FS MMM-A-125C and be water and mold resistant. Adhesive shall be certified in accordance with ASTM C557 and shall comply with local VOC regulations. C. Cores: 1. 20-Minute Fire-Rated Doors and Non-rated Doors: Solid particleboard conforming to ANSI A208.1. 2. Fire-Rated Doors Greater than 20-Minute Rated: Incombustible mineral approved by labeling authority. Provide top, bottom, and intermediate blocking for surface-mounted hardware. D. Edge Construction: 0407.06 Progress CD Set 1. 20-Minute Fire-Rated Doors and Non-rated Doors: a. Stiles and Rails: Minimum 1-318-inch wide by full core thickness gkied to core. Provide wider hinge stile where recommended by door manufacturer for door size and type ofhinges to be used. Exposed edges of stiles shall be smooth, straight cut, free from knots, pitch pockets, and other defects for a minimum distance of 1/4-inch from the outside edge along the entire stile. b. Species: 1) Shies: Same species as face for doors to receive transparent finish with no fwtger joints permitted on lock stiles. Close grain hardwood for doors to receive opaque finish. 2) Rails: Hardwood or softwood at manufacturer's option. C. Edge Banding: Minimum 1/24nch wide by full core thickness. Edge bands if used may reduce the width of stiles and cads. Species for doors to receive transparent finish shall be same as face with no finger joints permitted on lock stile. Species for doors to receive opaque finish shall be dose grain hardwood. 2. Fire-Rated Doors Greater than 20-Minute Rated: a. Top Rail. Door manufacturer's standard special laminated material. RUSH WOOD DOORS 06242-3 k a PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 08212 FLUSH WOOD DOORS b. Sties and Rails: Hardwood, fire-retardant treated where required by label. Where not required to be fire-retardant treated, provide same species for sties as face veneer for doors to receive transparent finish. Sizes required by testing agency. E. Edge Clearances: 1. Jambs and Heads: 1184nch. 2. Meeting Stiles of Pairs of Doors: lWinch. 3. Bottom of Door to Top of Finish Floor. 314-inch at concrete, 518-inch at resilient flooring, 318-inch at carpet, tole, thresholds, and other finish flooring. 2.04 DOOR LOUVERS A. Type: Prefabricated 20-gauge steel units. B. Opening Sizes: As scheduled. C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel finish, of color selected by Architect 2.05 LIGHT FRAMES A. Non-Rated Doors: Same wood species as door faces, profile as indicated. B. Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated. Include concealed metal glazing dips where required for opening size and fire ratings scheduled. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine door frames and verify that frames are of the correct type and have been installed as required for proper hanging of corresponding doors. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install wood doors in accordance with the manufacturer's printed Instructions, as indicated and in accordance with AWI'Architecturai Woodwork Quality Standards'. B. Preparation for door hardware: Factory prepare, reinforce, and machine each door to receive specified door hardware. Comply with final hardware submittal, door flame shop drawings and hardware templates General Contractor to coordinate with door and hardware subcontractors and vendors to ensure manufacturers' recommendations, guidelines, instructions, and templates regarding hardware Installation are Impitimented correctly. Shop preparation or field preparation will not be accepted as substitution for these requirements. C. Fire-Rated Doors: Install in fire-rated frames in accordance with requirements of NFPA Standard No. 80. D. Job-Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as specified; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Seal cut surfaces after fitting. 1. Fitting Clearances: a. Jambs and Heads: 118-inch. 04-07.06 FLUSH WOOD DOORS Progress CD Set 06212-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08212 VAIL, COLORADO FLUSH WOOD DOORS b. Meeting Stiles of Pairs of Doors: 1/44nch. C. Bottom of Door to Top of Finish Floor: Not more than 3/44nch at concrete, 5/84nch at resilient flooring, 3/84nch at carpet, tile, thresholds, and other finish flooring. 2. Bevel non-rated doors 1/84nch in 2-inches at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8-inch in 2-iriches at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. E. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. F. Cutouts, Recesses, and Exposed Rail Edges: Unless factory provided, paint with two coats of clear sealer, each coat well dried, before hardware is set in place. G. Meeting stiles of pairs of doors shall be in alignment along the entire height, and offset between adjacent leaves shall not exceed Winch. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION A. When complete, doors shall be flat within allowable tolerance, shall be plumb in all positions of swing, and shall operate smoothly, quietly, and free from binding. Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Exposed surfaces shall be uniform in appearance, dean and free from scratches, tool marks, dents, discoloration, stains, and other damage and defects. C. Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. D. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that doors will be without damage or deterioration at completion of Project END OF SECTION 0407-06 RUSH WOOD DOORS Progress M Set 08212-5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08216 VAIL, COLORADO STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS SECTION 08216 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing the following types of stile and rail wood door. Interior stile and rail wood doors with wood panels (fire rated where indicated). 2. Interior stile and rail wood doors with glass panels (fire rated where indicated).. 3. Interior stile and rail wood doors with louver panels. B. Related Sections: 1. Interior wood door frames are specified in Section 06402. 2. Flush wood doors are specified in Section 08212. 3. Door hardware is specified in Section 08710. 4. Glass for stile and rail wood doors is specified in Section 08800. 5. Field-finishing of stile and rail wood doors is specified in Section 09900. 6. Door and window flashings (flexible flashings) are specified in Section 07657. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Door manufacturer's technical data for each type of door, including details of construction, materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location and size of each door, elevation of each door; construction details not covered in product data including stiles, rails, panels, and moldings; location and extent of hardware cutouts; and factory finishing requirements. C. Samples: Comer section, V-0' square, showing edges, faces, joinery and material qualifies of typical stile, rail, molding and panel for each exposed material, door type and finish required. 1. Doors for Transparent Finish: Door faces representing typical range of color and grain for each veneer and lumber species. D. Certificate of Compliance: Manufacturer's certificate showing compliance with specified requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard: 1. AWI Quality Standard: 'Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards' Section 1400 for grade of door, core, construction, finish, and other requirements. B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Provide wood doors that comply with NFPA 80; are identical in materials and construction to units tested in door and frame assemblies in accordance with ASTM El 52; and are labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Fire-rated stile-and-rail wood doors and steel frames specified in Section 08110 shall amply with positive pressure test requirements of IBC and shall be labeled accordingly by the door and frame manufacturer in a manner approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Fire-rated doors, including 20-minute doors, shall be 'Category A' doors as defined by ITS (Warnock Hersey) or equivalent 04-07-06 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS Progress CD Set 06216-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS 1£ RESORTS SECTION 08216 VAIL, COLORADO STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS D. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with ANSI 297.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category 11 materials. E. Product Certification: Require door manufacturer to certify that doors comply with specified requirements including those of referenced door standard. Mark, label or otherwise identify stile and rail wood doors as complying with NWWDA I.S. 6. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. B. Identity each door with opening numbers corresponding with shop drawing designations for doors, frames and hardware, using temporary, removable, or concealed markings. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of construction period. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warrant interior stile and rail wood doors against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 5-years, including cost of removing and rehanging. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS A. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with AWI "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards'. B. Interior Doors: 1. Doors for Transparent Finish: AWI Premium Grade, plain sawn/sliced, species as selected by the Interior Designer. 2. Doors for Opaque Finish: AWI Custom Grade, Idaho White, Lodgepole, Ponderosa or Sugar Pine, plain sawn/sliced. 3. Stile, Rail and Mullion Dimensions: Width and thickness as indicated. 4. Raised Wood Panels: a. Molding Profile: As indicated. b. Panel Thickness: 1-1124nches unless otherwise indicated. C. Panel Design: As indicated. 5. Glass Panels: a. Molding Profile: As indicated. b. Glass: 1144nch dear tempered float glass, fire glass, or specialty glass as specified in Section 08800 or as indicated on the Interior Design drawings 6. Louver Panels: a. Molding Profile: As indicated. b. Louvers: 3/16-inch thick slats at a 454eg. angle unless otherwise indicated. 0407.06 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS Progress CD Set 08216 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08216 VAIL, COLORADO STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS C. Warp Tolerance: As specified in AWI'Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards' Section 1400-T-3. In addition, warp tolerance shall apply to pairs of doors and to doors in relation to the frame or jamb in which hung. 2.03 FIRE-RATED STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS A. General: Provide 20-minute fire-rated raised panel wood doors where scheduled. B. Doors shall match the appearance of non-rated doors. C. Glass Panels: Non-wired rated glass as specified in Section 08800. D. Stile face, bottom rail face, lock rail face, and cross rail face, if applicable, shall be the minimum required by Warnock Hersey, UL or other label approved by governing authority. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for either job-site fitting or factory fit doors to suite frame- opening sizes indicated, at Contractors option. Factory-fit doors shalt comply with the following uniform clearances and bevels: 1. Fitting Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Provide 1/8-inch at jambs and heads, 1116-inch per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and 1/2-inch from bottom of door to top of floor finish. Where threshold is indicated, provide 318-inch clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Fitting Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: Comply with NFPA 80. 3. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8-inch in 2-inches (3-112 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. 4. Bevel fire-rated doors 118-inch in 2-inches (3-1/2 degrees) on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling authority. B. Preparation for door hardware: Factory prepare, reinforce, and machine each door to receive specified door hardware. Comply with final hardware submittal, door frame shop drawings and hardware templates General Contractor to coordinate with door and hardware subcontractors and vendors to ensure manufacturers' recommendations, guidelines, instructions, and templates regarding hardware installation are implemented correctly. Shop preparation or field preparation will not be accepted as substitution for these requirements. C. Glazed Openings: Factory-preglaze doors for applications indicated. Comply with requirements of Section 08800. Trim glazed openings with solid wood moldings of profile indicated, removable one side. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine installed doorframes prior to hanging doors. Verify that frames comply with specified requirements and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install stile and rail wood doors in compliance with manufacturers Instructions, applicable requirements of refer- enced quality standard and as specified. B. Job-Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as specified; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Seal cut surfaces after fitting. 1. Fitting Clearances for Non-Rated Doors: Provide 118-inch at jambs and heads, 1/1 64nch per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and %-Inch from bottom of door to top of finish floor covering. Where thresholds occur, provide Yrinch clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. 007-06 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS Progress CD Set 06216- 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08216 VAIL, COLORADO STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 1J 2. Bevel doors 118-inch in 2-inches at iodc and hinge edges. C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Fire-Rated Doors: Install in fire-rated door frames in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80. E. Meeting stiles of pairs of doors shall be in alignment along the entire height and offset between adjacent leaves shall not exceed 1/84nch. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION A. Operation: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that doors are without damage at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION J 0407-06 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS Progress CD Set 08216-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08264 VAIL, COLORADO WOOD TERRACE DOORS SECTION 08264 - WOOD TERRACE DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes the following: Aluminum-clad out and in-swinging wood terrace doors and frame, complete with glazing, weatherstripping, anchors, trim, attachments and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Exterior wood trim that is not included as part of the wood terrace doors is spedfied in Section 06401. 2. Interior wood trim that is not included as part of the wood terrace doors is specified in Section 06402. 3. Door and window flashings (fleAble flashings) are specified in Section 07657. 4. Joint sealing between wood terrace doors and adjacent materials is specified in Section 07920. 5. Stile and rail wood doors are specified in Section 08216. 6. Aluminum-dad wood sliding glass doors are specified in Section 08312. 7. Aluminum-dad wood windows are specified in Section 08550. 8. Door hardware is specified in Section 08710. 9. Glazing requirements for wood terrace doors, including those specified to be factory glazed, are specified in Section 08800. 10. Feld finishing of inside of wood terrace doors is specified in Section 09900. 1.02 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Standards: Performance requirements for operating force, structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration for wood terrace doors are those specified in NWWDA I.S. 8'Wood Swinging Patio Doors.' 1. Provide wood swinging patio doors bearing the NWWDA Hallmark Program label certifying compliance with requirements of NWWDA I.S. 8 for the performance grade indicated. B. Testing: Manufacturer's stock units of each grade of required wood terrace door shall have been tested by a recognized testing agency, according to ASTM E330 for structural performance, ASTM E283 for air infiltration, and ASTM E547 for water penetration. Test samples shag comply with requirements in NWWDA I.S. 3 for test sample sizes and methods. C. Performance Requirements: Each wood terrace door unit shall comply with the following performance requirements: 1. Air Infiltration: Not more than 0.3-drn per sq. ft. of overall frame area at an inward test pressure of 6.24-bf per sq. ft. 2. Water Penetration: No water penetration as defined in the test method at an inward test pressure of 6.04bf per sq. ft. 3. Structural Performance: No glass breakage, damage to hardware, or permanent deformation that would impair unit operation or cause residual deflection greater than 0.4-percent of the span at a positive (inward) and negative (outward) test pressure of 60-lbf per sq. ft. 4. Acoustical performance: STC 36 minimum (=-45 preferred)-. 0¢07.06 WOOD TERRACE DOORS Progress CD Set 08264-1 PROJECT #/02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08264 VAIL, COLORADO WOOD TERRACE DOORS 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Include the following: 1. Standard constriction details and fabrication methods. 2. Profiles and dimensions of individual components. 3. Data on hardware, accessories, and finishes. 4. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning exterior surfaces. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Layout and installation details, including anchors. 2. Typical door unit elevations at 314-inch scale. 3. Full-size details of typical and composite members. 4. Hardware. 5. Glazing details. 6. Accessories. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Safety Glass Standard: Provide the type of products indicated that comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. 1. Provide safety glass permanently marked with the certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of the Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and 'Sealant Manual" except where more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Single Source Responsibility: Provide wood terrace doors produced by a single fabricator who is capable of indicating prior successful production of units similar to those required. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Wood Terrace Door Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the door manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Structural failures, including excessive deflection, excessive leakage, or air infiltration. 2. Faulty operation of door panels or hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. B. Warranty Period: 3-years from date of Substantial Completion. This warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A Uniform Sistema 5000/S. Contact: Bob Knox, (970) 845-9463. 04.07.06 WOOD TERRACE DOORS Progress CD Set OWN- 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS _ SECTION 08264 VAIL, COLORADO WOOD TERRACE DOORS B. Alternate manufacturers: 1. Pella 'Designee Series with SmartSash 111. 2. Pella 'Architect' Series or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements of NWWDA I.S. 2. B. Wood: Clear Ponderosa Pine or other suitable fine-grain lumber that has been kiln dried to a moisture content of 6- to 12-percent at time of fabrication and is free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets and surface checks larger than 1/324nch wide by 24nches long. 1. Lumber shall be water-repellent preservative treated after machining in accordance with NWWDA I.S. 4. 2. Exposed interior wood surfaces to be painted shall be dear Douglas Fir. 3. Exposed interior wood surfaces to receive transparent finish shall be as scheduled or as directed by the Architect or Interior Designer. C. Aluminum Cladding: Manufacturer's standard aluminum formed sheet or extruded cladding mechanically bonded to exterior wood door panel and frame members. 1. Trim Members: Provide either aluminum-dad wood, hollow aluminum extrusions, or roll-formed aluminum trim members. 2. Finish: Factory-applied, baked-on enamel finish, custom color to match color sample furnished by the Architect. D. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Fabricate anchors, dips and window accessories of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or hot-dip zinc-mated steel or iron complying with the requirements of ASTM 8633 for SC 3 (severe) service condition; provide strength sufficient In, withstand specified design pressure. E. Fasteners: Comply with NWWDA I.S.2 for fabrication and with manufacturer's recommendations and standard industry practices for type and size of installation fasteners. Use zinc-coated or nonferrous nails and screws for door fabrication and installation. 2. Use brass screws for hardware and accessory installation. F. Hardware: As specified in Section 08710 G. Glass: Clear tempered insulating glass with Low E coating as specified in Section 08800. 1. Glazing Seal: Provide the manufacturer's standard extruded vinyl, butyl glazing gasket, or silicone sealant providing weather weathertight seal. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Provide the manufacturer's standard fabrication of units. Comply with indicated standards. Include a complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of door units. B. Comply with requirements of referenced standards for moisture content of lumber at time of fabrication and for relative humidity conditions in the installation areas. C. Fabricate doors to produce units that are re-glazable without dismantling sash framing. Provide openings and mortises precut, where possible, to receive hardware and other items. D. Each door unit includes operable panels, frame, stops, sill (including undersill or nosing), exterior losing and moldings, integral mullions and muntins, hardware, and accessories. 04-07-06 WOOD TERRACE DOORS Progress CD Set 08264-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08264 VAIL, COLORADO WOOD TERRACE DOORS E. Provide weatherstripping at perimeter of each operating panel. Provide glazing stops, nailed or snap-on type, coordinated with glass selection and glazing system indicated. G. Pre-glazed Door Units: Except for light sizes in excess of 100 united inches, pre-glaze door units at the shop before delivery, unless pre-glazing is not available from the fabricator. H. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to the project site, to the maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect openings before beginning installation. Verify that the opening is correct and the sill plate is level. Do not proceed with installation of window units until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Coordinate door installation with wall flashing and other built-in components. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of door units, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Set units plumb, level, true to line, without warp or rack of frames or panels. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. C. Set sill members in a bed of compound or with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated, to provide weathertight construction. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating panels and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and weatherstripping, and to provide smooth operation and a weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean interior and exterior surfaces promptly after installation. Take care to avoid damage to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant, dirt, and other substances. B. Clean glass of pre-glazed door units promptly after installation. Wash and polish glass on both faces before Substantial Completion. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels from glass surfaces. C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged during the constriction period. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect door units from damage or deterioration until time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 0407-06 WOOD TERRACE DOORS Progress CD Set 08264 - 4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08310 VAIL, COLORADO ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08310 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing access doors at all required locations. 1. Access doors shall not be located in public areas unless locations are approved in advance by the Architect 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of access door assembly, including setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices. Include complete schedule including types, general locations, sizes, wall and ceiling construction details, finishes, latching or locking provisions and other data pertinent to installation. B. Location Drawing: Access doors may not be indicated on the Drawings. Show proposed location of every required access door. Access doors shall be located within walls and ceilings for access including but not limited to the following: automatic valves, automatic dampers, air terminal units, and fire/smoke dampers. Show location of adjacent materials, trim pieces, and hardware required to complete the work. Do not begin installation until location is approved. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics of specified test method, and are labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Test Method for Vertical Installations: ASTM El 52. 2. Test Method for Horizontal Installations: ASTM El 19. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices required to be built into other work. Coordinate delivery to avoid delay. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store access doors in manufacturer's standard protective packaging. B. Do not remove protective packaging until ready for installation. C. Follow manufacturer's instructions for storage and handling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. J.L. Industries, Karp Associates, Milcor, Nystrom or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A Non-Fire-Rated Access Doors with Exposed Trim: 1. Door Design: Flush panel. 2. Material: Commercial grade cold-rolled steel with 16-gauge frame and 14-gauge door. 3. Finish: Phosphate dipped with baked-on rust-inhibitive gray primer. 0407-06 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES Progress CD Set 08310-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08310 VAIL, COLORADO ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 4. Exposed Trim: 14nch flange overlapping surfaces surrounding door frame. 5. Hinge: Concealed pin hinge mechanism and continuous piano hinge. 6. Latch/Lock: Flush screwdriver operated stainless steel cam latch. B. Non-Fire-Rated Access Doors with Exposed Trim in Toilet Rooms and other Wet Areas: 1. Door Design: Flush panel. 2. Material: Stainless steel, 16-gauge frame and 14-gauge door. 3. Finish: Satin polish finish. 4. Exposed Trim: Flange integral with tame, 1-inch wide, overlapping surrounding finished surface. 5. Hinge: Concealed pin hinge mechanism and continuous piano hinge. 6. Latch/Lock: Flush screwdriver operated stainless steel cam latch. C. Fire-Rated Access Doors with Exposed Trim: 1. Door Design: Flush panel. 2. Material: Commercial grade cold-rolled steel with 16-gauge frame and 20-gauge door. 3. Finish: Phosphate dipped with baked-on rust inhibiting primer. 4. Insulation: 2-inch thick fire-rated insulation sandwiched between two pieces of 20-gauge steel. 5. Exposed Trim: Flange integral with frame, 1-inch wide, overlapping surrounding finished surface. 6. Hinge: Concealed pin hinge. 7. Continuous Closer: Automatic spring closer to automatically dose and latch door. 8. LatchlLoc k: Ball bearing cylinder lock operated by a recessed flush key lock. Panels shall have interior latch release mechanism allowing the door to be unlocked from the inside. D. Fire-Rated Access Doors with Exposed Trim at Toilet Rooms and Other Wet Areas: 1. Door Design: Flush panel. 2. Material: Stainless steel, 16-gauge frame and 20-gauge door. 3. Finish: Satin polish finish. 4. Insulation: 24nch thick fire-rated insulation sandwiched between two pieces of 20-gauge steel. 5. Exposed Trim: Flange integral with frame, Yrinch wide, overlapping surrounding finished surface. 6. Hinge: Concealed pin hinge. 7. Continuous Closer. Automatic spring closer to automatically dose and latch door. 8. Latch/Lock: Ball bearing cylinder lock operated by a recessed flush key W. Panels shall have interior latch release mechanism allowing the door to be unlocked from the inside. E. Access Doors for Drywall Ceilings: 1. Approved Manufacturer. Karp Associates, Inc. Type RDW or approved equal. 0407-06 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES Progress CD Set 08310 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08310 VAIL, COLORADO ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 2. Door Design: Recessed to receive drywall panel. 3. Frame: 13-gauge steel. 4. Door 16-gauge steel, recessed 14nch. 5. Trim: Galvanized steel drywall bead. 6. Hinge: Concealed pivoting rod type. 7. Lock: Flush, screwdriver operated with stainless steel cam and stud. 8. Finish: Shop-primed with rust-inhibitive electrostatic powder coat enamel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install access doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Coordinate installation with work of other Sections. C. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb and level in relation to adjacent finish. D. Frames, doors and trim pieces shall not vary from straightness or snug contact fit by more than 1116-inch. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN A Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace panels and frames that are warped, bowed, dented, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION D4-07-06 ACCESS DOORS AND MAWS Process CD Set 06M0-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08312 VAIL COLORADO WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS SECTION 08312 • WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes aluminum-dad wood sliding glass doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Exterior wood trim that is not included as part of the wood sliding glass units is specified in Section 06401. 2. Interior wood trim that is not included as part of the wood sliding glass units is specified in Section 06402. 3. Door and window flashings (fle)ible flashings) are specified in Section 07657. 4. Joint sealing between wood sliding glass units and adjacent materials is specified in Section 07920. 5. Aluminum-dad wood terrace doors are specified in Section 08264. 6. Aluminum-dad wood Windows are specified in Section 08550. 7. Glazing requirements for wood sliding glass doors, including those specified to be factory glazed, are specified in the Section 08800. 8. Field finishing of inside of wood sliding glass doors is specified in Section 09900. 1.02 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Standards: Performance requirements for operating force, structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration for wood sliding glass doors are those specified in NWWDA I.S. 3'Wood Sliding Patio Doors.' Provide wood sliding glass doors bearing the NWWDA Hallmark Program label certifying compliance with requirements of NWWDA I.S. 3 for the performance grade indicated. Testing: Manufacturer's stock units of each grade of required wood sliding glass door shall have been tested by a recognized testing agency, according to ASTM E330 for structural performance, ASTM E283 for air infiltration, and ASTM E547 for water penetration. Test samples shall comply With requirements in NWWDA I.S. 3 for test sample sizes and methods. C. Performance Requirements (Grade 60 Sliding Glass Doors): Each wood siding glass door unit shall comply with the following performance requirements: 1. Operating Force: Not more than 304b of force to begin motion, nor more than 154b of force to sustain motion. 2. Air Infiltration: Not more than 0.3-dm per sq. fL of overall frame area at an inward test pressure of 6.244bf per sq. ft. 3. Water Penetration: No water penetration as defined in the test method at an inward test pressure of 6.0-lbf per sq. ft. 4. Structural Performance: No glass breakage, damage to hardware, or permanent deformation that would impair unit operation or cause residual deflection greater than 0.4-percent of the span at a positive (Inward) and negative (outward) test pressure of 604bf per sq. fL 5. Acoustical performance: STC 36 minimum. D. Forced-Entry Resistance: Comply with requirements for Grade 10 level of resistance to forced entry when tested according to the requirements of ASTM F842. 0407-06 WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS Progress CD Set 08312-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08312 VAIL COLORADO WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS 1J 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Furnish for each type of wood sliding glass door specified. Include the following: 1. Manufacturer's standard construction details. 2. Profiles and dimensions of individual components. 3. Data on finishes, hardware, and accessories. 4. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces. B. Shop Drawings: Fumish for each type of wood sliding glass door unit required. Include information not fully detailed in the manufacturer's standard product data and the following: 1. Layout and installation details, inducting anchors. 2. Typical unit elevations. 3. Glazing details. 4. Full-size details of typical composite members. 5. Hardware and accessories. C. Samples for Verification Purposes: The Architect reserves the right to require additional samples that show fabrication techniques and workmanship and design of hardware and accessories. D. Product certificates signed by the wood sliding glass door manufacturer certifying that door units comply with specified performance requirements. E. Product test reports based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing agency showing evidence of compliance of the wood sliding glass door units with requirements indicated based on comprehensive testing within the last 5-years. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully installed wood sliding glass doors similar in design and extent to those required for this Project B. Safety Glass Standard: Where safety glass is indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide the type of products indicated that comply with ANSI 297.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR for Category 11 materials. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with the certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of the Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA)'Giazing ManuaP and 'Sealant ManuaP except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or referenced standards. D. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide wood sliding glass doors produced by a single fabricator who is capable of indicating prior successful production of units similar to those required. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Wood Siding Glass Door Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace wood sliding glass door units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 04Va WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS Progress CD Set 08312 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08312 VAIL, COLORADO WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS Structural failures, including excessive deflection, excessive leakage, air infiltration, or failure of weatherstripping. 2. Faulty operation of movable panels or hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Warranty period shall be manufacturer's standard. 5. This warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies that the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Uniform Sistema 50001S. Contact: Bob Knox, (970) 845-9463. B. Alternate manufacturers: Pella "Designer" Series with SmartSash III. 2. Pella 'Architect* Series or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements of NWWDA I.S. 3. B. Wood: Clear Ponderosa Pule or another suitable fine-grained lumber, kiln-dried to a moisture content of 6• to 12- percent at time of fabrication, free from blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/84nch deep by 2-inches wide. 1. Lumber shall be water-repellent preservative treated after machining according to NWWDA I.S. 4. 2. Exposed interior wood shall be clear Douglas Fir. 3. Exposed interior wood to receive transparent finish shall be as scheduled or as directed by the Architect or Interior Designer. C. Aluminum Cladding: Provide manufacturer's standard aluminum cladding mechanically bonded to wood frames and door panels with a factory-applied baked-on enamel finish, custom color to match color sample furnished by the Architect D. Track: Extruded aluminum track with stainless steel cap. E. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Fabricate anchors, dips, and sliding glass door accessories of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or hot-dip zinc coated steel complying with ASTM A123; provide strength sufficient to withstand design pressure indicated. F. Compression Weatherstripping: Provide the manufacturer's standard compressible weatherstripping of molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D2287, or molded expanded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C509, Grade 4, designed for permanent resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, concealed when door is dosed. G. Sliding Weatherstripping: Provide woven-pile weatherstripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon pile, with resin-impregnated backing fabric, and an aluminum backing strip; comply With AAMA 701.2. 1. Provide weatherstripping with integral center-line barrier fin of semirigid plastic polypropylene sheet. H. Glass: Clear tempered insulating glass With Low E coating as specified in Section 08800. 04.07..06 WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS Progress CD Set 08312-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08312 VAIL COLORADO WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS 2.03 HARDWARE A. Each sliding door shall have interior locking system, handle set, weatherstripping, and ball bearing rollers. Provide secondary locking device on sliding glass doors on ground floor units. B. Threshold at accessible rooms and areas shall comply with ADA requirements. 2.04 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate wood sliding glass door units to comply with indicated standards. Include a complete system to assemble components and anchor units. 1. Provide units that are reglazable without dismantling panel framing. B. Assembly: Assemble components into complete weathertight units with flush, rigid, and hairline joints. Mill, cope, butt, and miter joints; secure by mechanical devices or other means to ensure permanently watertight joints. Provide at least two krorrosiion-resistant, prelubricated or self-lubricating rollers for each slicing panel, of sufficient capacity to ensure easy, quiet, and smooth operation. C. Weatherstripping: Provide operable panels with a double row of sliding weatherstripping in horizontal rails and single- or double-row weatherstripping in meeting or jamb stiles, as required to meet specified performance requirements. Provide compression-type weatherstripping at the perimeter of each movable panel where sliding-type weatherstripping is not appropriate. D. Preglazed Fabrication: Glaze wood sliding glass door units in the factory where practical and possible for the applications indicated. Comply with requirements of the Section 08800 and NWWDA I.S. 3. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect openings before beginning installation. Verify that the rough or masonry opening is correct and that the sill plate is level. Do not install door units until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Masonry surfaces shall be visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. 2. Frame walls shall be dry, dean, sound and well-nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in the opening and within 3 inches of the opening. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installing door units, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Set sill members and other frame members in bed of compound or with joint fillers or gaskets, as indicated, tD provide weatherfight construction. Coordinate installation with wall flashing and other components. 1. Refer to Section 07920 for compounds, fillers, and gaskets to be installed concurrently with wood sliding glass door units. 2. Install door threshold/track at accessible openings to comply with ADA access requirements. C. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames and panels. Provide proper support, and ancror frames and fixed panels securely in place. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating panels, screens, and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and weatherstripping for smooth operation and a weathertight closure. 3.04 CLEANING 00706 WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS Progress CD Set 08312-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08312 VAIL, COLORADO WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS A. Clean surfaces promptly after installing wood sliding glass doors. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealing compounds, dirt, and other substances. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. Clean glass of preglazed units promptly after installing wood sliding glass door units. Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4-days prior to the date scheduled for final inspection. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any other way during the construction period, including by natural causes, accidents, or vandalism. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Institute and maintain protective measures and other precautions required through remainder of construction period to ensure that, except for normal weathering, wood sliding glass door units Will be without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 0407-06 WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS Progress CD Set 06312- 5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08331 VAIL, COLORADO COILING COUNTER DOORS SECTION 08331- COILING COUNTER DOORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing the following types of coiling counter doors: 1. Non-fire-rated coiling counter doors, push-up operated. 2. Fire-rated coiling counter doors, motorized. B. Related Sections: 1. Access doors and frames are specified in Section 08310. 2. Overhead coiling doorsare specified in Section 08333. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive and technical data and illustrations. Include information describing fire- release system, including electrical rough-in instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts, elevations, relationship to adjacent work, and anchorage detags. C. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Complete data for maintenance and operation. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Regularly providing assemblies of the type required for not less than 5-years, capable of maintain- ing, repairing, and servicing the Project location within reasonable time when service is called for by Owner, and shag retain responsibility for installation of doors. B. Fire DoorAssemblies: Furnish fire door assemblies which complywith NFPA No. 80 and have been tested, rated and labeled in accordance with ASTM E152. Furnish each door with a metal UL label indicating rating in hours of exposure to fire and letter designation of location for which assembly is approved. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Non-Foie-Rated Coiling Counter Doors: The Cookson Company Type CD10-1 Cornell Iron Works, Inc. Model PFI-1F, Overhead Door Model CN4, Pacific Rolling Door Model PFC-20 or approved equal. B. Fire-Rated Coiling Counter Doors: The Cookson Company Type FD10-1 M, Cornell Iron Works, ha. Model MFL- 1 F or approved equal. 2.02 NOWFIRE-RATED COILING COUNTER DOORS A. Curtain: 1. Slats: Interlocking flat-faced slats, minimum 24-gauge galvanized steel, finished with baked-on enamel primer. Provide endlocks to maintain alignment. 2. Bottom Bar. Tubular shape, finished to match slats, with finger lifts. B. Guides: Extruded aluminum with wool pile strip. C. Counterbalance Assembly: Steel barrel housing helical torsion type springs and supporting curtain with maximum deflection of 0.034nch per foot of opening. Where counterbalance mechanism is concealed in a soffit or finished ceiling, provide access door as specified in Section 08310 for service. z f i "Wa COIUNG COUNTER DOORS Progress CD Set 08331-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL. COLORADO SECTION 08331 COILING COUNTER DOORS D. Brackets: Reinforced steel plate to support counterbalance assembly, form end closures, and provide mounting surface for securing ends of hood. E. Hood: 24-gauge galvanized steel. Provide intermediate supports required to prevent excessive sag. Provide where counterbalance assembly is not concealed in a soffit or finished ceiling. F. Operation: Push-up with finger lifts on bottom bar. G. Locking: Master-keyed cylinder lock operable from coil side or as directed by Architect. H. Finish: Galvanized steel curtain and hood finished with baked enamel primer, other exposed surfaces finished with rust4nhibiting paint. 2.03 FIRE-RATED COILING COUNTER DOORS A. General: Doors shall be fire-rated as indicated on the door schedule and shall lorry a UL label. B. Curtain: Slats: Interlocking flat-faced slats, minimum 24-gauge galvanized steel. Provide endlocks to maintain alignment Bottom Bar. Tubular shape, finished to match slats, with finger lifts. C. Guides: Box sections fabricated of galvanized steel. D. Counterbalance Assembly: Steel barrel housing helical torsion type springs and supporting curtain with maximum deflection of 0.034nch per foot of opening. Where counterbalance mechanism is concealed in a soffit or finished ceiling, provide access door as specified in Section 08310 for service. E. Brackets: Reinforced steel plate to support counterbalance assembly, form end closures, and provide mounting surface'for securing ends of hood. F. Hood: 24-gauge galvanized steel. Provide intermediate supports required to prevent excessive sag. Provide where counterbalance assembly is not concealed in a soffit or finished ceiling. G. On 20-minute doors installed in corridor walls, provide manufacturer's standard UL-listed smoke seals at head, jambs, and bottom bar. H. Operation: Doors shall have an automatic dosing device and governor to control the downward speed ofthedoor which shag become operational upon the fusing of a 160 degree fusible link. The door shah have an average dosing speed of not less than 6 hiches per second and not more than 24 Inches per second in accordance with NFPA Bulletin 80. Once the door has dosed, it shag be able to be reset by one person on one side of the door. 2. The door shag be operated at a speed of'/ foot per second by a totally enclosed electric motor with gear reducer. The motor operator shag include a geared limit switch and emergency push-up operation. The motor operator shall be 115 volt, single phase. The motor starter shag be housed in a NEMA 1 housing and include a 24 volt control transformer, 24 volt relays and complete temunal strip to facilitate field wiring. The motor operator shag be activated by a 3 button push button station to a NEMA 1 enclosure. Motor operators shall be UL listed. Door shag include Cookson 'Featheredge" or approved equal door safety edge system with the following features: The edge shall be installed on the bottom bar and shall automatically reverse the door if the device detects an obstruction in the downward travel of the door. 0407-06 COIUNG COUNTER DOORS Progress CD Set 08331-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 06331 COILING COUNTER DOORS b. The edge shall consist of a rubber boot attached below the bottom bar with an electrical switch secured to the back of the bottom bar. The edge shall operate with air wave technology and shall not rely on pneumatic pressure or electrical strip contacts to operate. The edge shall create an air wave that shat be detected and reverse the direction of the door. C. The operation of the edge shall not be subject to interferences by temperature, barometric pressure, water infiltration, or cuts in the rubber boot. 4. Doors shall be controlled by a Cookson 'Test-A-Fire Releasing Device or approved equal. The test panel shall allow the testing of the fire door without resetting the release mechanism. The control panel shall be UL approved for use with fire doors and motor operators. Upon activation of the alarm system, the motor operator shall automatically dose the door. It there is an obstruction in the opening, the door shall automatically open and dose again. The safety edge shall continue to cycle the door up and down until the obstruction is removed and door can fully dose or the door has cycled 3 times, in which case the door shall stop on the obstruction. If, at any time, the obstruction is removed, with the continuation of the alarm signal, the door will continue to a fully dosed position. To reset the door, push the up control station. The door shall return to the fully opened position. b. If power to the motor operator is interrupted, while the alarm is in an activated state, the releasing device shall be activated. If power is resumed before the 10 second timer cycle has elapsed, the motor operator shall automatically dose the door and the releasing device shall automatically reset itself. If the power is not resumed, the door shall be released and dosed by mechanical means. If the releasing device mechanically doses the fire door, the door will have to be reset by an authorized technician. C. Releasing device shall have an integral 4 amp hour battery that is capable of powering the release device and 4 auxiliary devices (smoke detectors, sounder strobes, etc.) for up to 72 hours. During a power outage, the releasing device shall automatically reset itself and charge the battery. If the power outage is longer than 72 hours, the fire door will be dosed mechanically. 1. Locking: Master-keyed cylinder lock operable from coil side or as directed by Architect. J. Finish: Galvanized steel curtain and hood finished with thermosetting polyester enamel. Other exposed surfaces shall be finished with rust-inhibiting primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that openings are prepared with headers level, jambs plumb, without projections, and are correctly dimensioned to receive coiling counter doors. B. Begin installation only when conditions are satisfactory. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Instal in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the reviewed shop drawings. B. Check moving parts for proper lubrication where required and make adjustments for smooth, easy operation. C. Exposed surfaces shall be dean and free from scratdhes, dents, tool marks, stains, discoloration, and other defects and damage. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 COILING COUNTER DOORS Progress CD Set 08331-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS $ RESORTS SECTION 08333 VAIL. COLORADO OVERHEAD COILING DOORS SECTION 08333 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing the following types of overhead coring doors: 1. Exterior rolling service doors, motor operated. 2. Interior rolling fire doors, motor operated. B. Related Sections: 1. Access doors are specified in Section 08310. 2. Coiling counter doors are specified in Section 08331. 3. Feld painting of curtains and hood is specified in Section 09900. 4. Electrical connections for powered operators and accessories are specified in Division 16. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive and technical data and illustrations. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts, elevations, relationship to adjacent work, and anchorage details. Include calculations prepared, signed and stamped by a structural engineer licensed in the State of Colorado. C. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Complete data for maintenance and operation. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer. Regularly providing assemblies of the type required for not less than 5-years, capable of maintain- ing, repairing, and servicing the Project location within reasonable time when service is called for by the State, and shall retain responsibility for installation of doors. B. Wind Loading: Design and reinforce exterior overhead service doors to withstand a 20-psf wind loading pressure. C. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Provide doors with fire resistance rating required to comply with governing regulations, inspected, tested, listed and labeled by UL, complying with IBC for class of opening. Provide UL label permanently fastened to each fire door assembly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Exterior Rolling Service Doors: The Cookson Co., Cornell Iron Works, Inc., Overhead Door, Pacific Rolling Door or approved equal. B. Interior Rolling Fire Doors: The Cookson Co., Comell Iron Works, Inc., Overhead Door, Pacific Rolling Door or approved equal. 2.02 EXTERIOR ROLLING SERVICE DOORS A. Door Curtain: Fabricate curtain of roll-formed flat faced galvanized steel or stainless steel sections, as indicated. 1. End Locks: Malleable iron castings galvanized after fabrication, secured to curtain slats with gal- vanized rivets. Provide end locks on each curtain slat for alignment and resistance against lateral movement 04-07-06 OVERHEAD COUNG DOORS Progress CD Set 08333-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 08333 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 2. Bottom Bar. Extruded aluminum, designed to interlock with bottom slat allowing insulating to extend full depth of bottom bar. 3. Provide perforated stainless steel slats where indicated, perforation pattern as shown to provide required make-up air flow. B. Curtain Jamb Guides: Three steel angles with 318-inch bolts. Provide angles with legs of sufficient length to provide required clearances. Provide stainless steel guide angles at doors with stainless steel slats. C. Counterbalance: Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable steel hefical torsion spring, mounted around a steel shaft and mounted in a spring barrel and connected to door curtain with required barrel rings. Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate with bell mouth guide groove for curtain. Where counterbalance mechanism is concealed in a soffit or finished ceiling, provide access door as specified in Section 08310 for service. D. Hood: 24-gauge galvanized steel. Provide intermediate supports required to prevent excessive sag. E. Finish: Galvanized steel curtain and hood shall have bonderizing, prime coat and thermosetting baked enamel finish. Other exposed surfaces shall be finished with one coat of rust4nhibitive primer. F. Operation: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended by door manufacturer. Include electric motor and factory prewired motor control stations, control devices, conduit and wrong from controls to motor and central stations, and accessories required for operation. Provide safety strip along door bottom to automatically open the door if an obstruction is encountered and then automatically close. Provide hand-operated disconnect or a mechanism for automatically engaging a sprocket-and-chain operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation. G. Locking: Equip doors for padlocking from coil side unless otherwise directed by the Architect. H. Weatherstripping: Provide vinyl strips on guides to seal against inside and outside of slats. Equip hood with air baffle to dose space between top of hood and curtain. Weather-stripping is not required on interior doors. 1. Sensor Edge: Provide each motorized door with an automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather-stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor immediately stops and reverse downward travel. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable. J. Ganged Operation: Where doors are located with less than typical jamb clearance, provide units with ganged operation and special fabrication as required to accommodate installation as shown. 2.03 INTERIOR ROLLING FIRE DOORS A. General: Doors shall be classified as indicated on the door schedule and shall carry a UL label. B. Door Curtain: Fabricate curtain of flat-face interlocking 22-gauge galvanized steel slats. 1. End Locks: Malleable iron castings galvanized after fabrication, secured to curtain slats with gal- vanized rivets. Provide end locks on alternate curtain slats for alignment and resistance against lateral movement. 2. Bottom Bar. 2 galvanized steel back-to-back angles, each not less than 1-112-inch x 1-1/24nch x 1/84nch. C. Curtain Jamb Guides: Three steel angles with 3/8-inch bolts. Provide angles with legs of sufficient length to provide required clearances. 04-07.06 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS Progress CD Set 06333 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 08333 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS D. Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable steel helical torsion spring, mounted around a steel shaft and mounted in a spring barrel and connected to door curtain with required barrel rings. Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate with bell mouth guide groove for curtain. Where counterbalance mechanism is concealed in a soffit or finished ceiling, provide access door and frame as specified in Section 08310 for service. E. Hood: 24-gauge galvanized steel. Provide intermediate supports required to prevent excessive sag. F. Supports: Provide tube steel supports and anchorage as indicated. G. Finish: Galvanized steel curtain and hood shall have bonderizing, prime coat, and finish coat of thermosetting tan polyester enamel. Other exposed surfaces shalt be finished with one coat of rust-inhibitive primer. Curtain and hood will be field painted as specified in Section 09900. H. Doors shall be provided with battery back-up so that doors do not close on any momentary voltage dip or during the 10-second start time of the emergency generator. 1. Operation: Fire doors shall have motor operator which shall become operational upon the activation of a fire alarm or smoke detection system or interruption of power to the motor operator. The door shall have a closing speed of not less than 6-inches per second and not more than 244nches per second as outlined in N FPA Bulletin 80. Once the door has closed, it can be reset by resuming power to the motor operator, clearing the alarm system and pushing the up control station. Mechanical resetting shall never be required. The door shall be operated at a speed of 213-foot per second by an open drip-proof electric motor with gear reducer in oil bath. The motor operator shall include a geared limit switch. The motor starter shall be housed in a NEMA 1 housing and include a 24-volt control transformer, a sold state control circuit board, and complete terminal strip to facilitate field wiring. The motor operator shah be activated by a 3 button push-button station in a NEMA 1 enclosure. The motor shall be size as required by the door, voltage as indicated or as selected by the State's Representative. The motor operator shall be mounted to the door bracket Motor operators and controls shall be I.I.L. listed for use with fire doors. The fire door shall include the safety edge system with the following features. a. The safety edge system shall be installed on the bottom bar of the door and shall automatically reverse the door if the device detects an obstruction in the downward travel of the door. b. The safety edge system shall consist of a rubber boot attached below the bottom bar with an electrical switch secured to the back of the bottom bar. The safety edge system shall operate with air wave technology and shall not rely on pneumatic pressure or electrical strip contacts to operate properly. The safety edge system shall create an air wave that shall be deteotted and reverse the direction of the rolling door. C. The operation of the safety edge system shall not be subject to interferences by temperature, barometric pressure, water infiltration, or cuts in the rubber boot. d. The safety edge system shall be connected to the motor operator with a coil cord. 04-07-06 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS Progress CD Set 08333-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL. COLORADO SECTION 08333 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS Fire doors shall be motor controlled. The motor operator shall allow for the testing of fire doors without mechanically resetting the release mechanism. The motor and controls shall be U.L. approved for use with Are doors. The control panel shall be wired directly into the building's fire alarm or smoke detector system. Upon activation of the alarm system, the motor operator shall power dose the door. If there is an obstruction in the opening, the door shall automatically open and close again. The safety edge system shall continue to cycle the door up and down until the obstruction is removed and the door can fully dose or the door has cycled 3 times, in which case the door shall stop on the obstruction. If at any time the obstruction is removed, with the continuation of the alarm signal, the door will continue to a fully dosed position. To reset the door, push the up control station. The door shall return to the fully open position. If power to the motor operator is interrupted, the automatic dosing device shall close the door. The motor operator shall not be mechanically disconnected from the door. To reset the fire door, resume power to the motor operator, dear the alarm system and push the up control station. The fire door shall never need to be mechanically reset and testing can be performed by any individual by activating the alarm system or by interrupting power to the motor operator. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install door and operating equipment with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified. B. Upon completion, lubricate, test and adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist or distortion, and fitting weathertight. C. Test fire door closing sequence when activated by the building's fire alarm system. Re-set door after successful test D. Exposed surfaces shall be clean and free from scratches, dents, tool marks, stains, discoloration, and other defects and damage. E. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to door operation, servicing, and preventative maintenance. END OF SECTION J 04-07-06 OVERHEAD C04UNG DOORS Progress CD Set 08333-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL. COLORADO SECTION 08358 ELECTRIC SLIDING DOORS SECTION 08358 - ELECTRIC SLIDING DOORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing electrically operated sliding doors (at loading dock). 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data, rough-in diagrams and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show special components and installations not fully dimensioned or detailed on manufacturer's data sheets. Show construction details, clearance requirements, metal gauges, finish, electrical requirements, and attachment details to adjacent construction. C. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Complete data for maintenance and operating instructions. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer shall furnish maintenance and call-back service following installation and for duration of one-year warranty period. Service shall consist of examination of equipment, adjustments, supplies and parts necessary to keep doors in proper operation, except adjustments, parts or repairs made necessary by abuse, misuse, or other causes beyond manufacturer's control. Service shall be by manufacturers trained employees during regular working hours. B. Doors shall be designed to withstand external or internal horizontal wind bads of 20 pounds per square foot. The maximum allowable deflection shall not exceed 1/120 of the span. Fiber stresses in main members shall be limited to 27,000 pounds per square inch. Steel frames shall be designed in accordance with the AISC'Steel Construction Manuar. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Inserts and Anchors: Provide anchoring devices required for securing sliding doors to tube steel framing. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Electric Power Door, Door Engineering and Manufacturing Co. Byron Epp, Inc. or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Tubing: ASTM A513. B. Structural Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36. C. Castings: ASTM A48. D. Steel Sheets: Steel sheets of commercial quality, oomplyfng with ASTM A366 cold-rolled steel sheet orA569 hot rolled steel sheet. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Door framing shall be structural steel with 14-gauge flat sheet steel on both exterior faces. AN frames and framing members shall be 11-gauge steel tubing true to dimension and square in all directions. B. Door leaves shall be of welded construction; joints shall develop the full strength of the framing members and welds shall be ground smooth and flush. 0407-06 ELECTRIC SLIDING DOORS Prog m CD Set 06358-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL. COLORADO SECTION 08358 . ELECTRIC SLIDING DOORS C. Door leaves shall not be bowed, warped, or out of line by more than 1/8-inch in 20-feet D. Door finish shall be manufacturer's standard, factory-applied grey epoxy ester primer. E. Provide heavy-duty-type hardware, including bolts and fittings. Guide Rollers: Provide a minimum of two guide rollers of sufficient size to transmit loads from the door panel to the steel door guides. Door Guides: Inverted channel shape fabricated from steel plate. F. Electro-Mechanical Operator. Each door shall be operated by an overhead mounted electro-mechanical drive unit Operator shall consist of an electric motor, gear reducer, and rotating drive arm. The door shall be operated with connecting rods attached to the rotating drive arm on the operator and to control amens attached to the jamb door section and to the door lintel. The connecting rods shall be positive drive, keeping the door under firm control at all times. The connecting rods shall be fitted with spherical bearings and control arms shall be equipped with oh impregnated bronze bearings on polished shafts. Operator unit shall not require more than 15 Inches of vertical space above the dear opening of the door. Operator shall open or dose the door by smoothly starting the door in motion, accelerating to mid-opening, and slowing to an adjustable smooth stop. The operator mechanism shall be instantly reversible and capable of functioning without chatter and/or vibration. Provide an emergency override system so that door can be operated in case of power failure. Door panels shall be free to operate manually after emergency override system is activated. The system shall automatically reset itself after returning to normal operation without readjusting any limit switches. 1. Electric Motors: High-starting torque type, of sufficient horsepower and torque output to move door in either direction from any position and produce a door travel speed of not less than 2/3 nor more than 1-foot per second, without exceeding the rated capacity. Equip motors with magnetic brake. Motors shall conform to NEMA standards and shall be suitable for operation on 480-volt, 3-phase. 2. Pushbuttons: Three-button-type, with buttons marked 'Open", 'CloW, and "Stop'. The "Open" and 'Stop' buttons shall be momentary contact type. When the door is in motion and the 'Stop' button is pressed, the door shall stop instantly and remain in the stop position; for the stop position, the door may be operated in either direction by pushing the 'Open' or "Close" button. Pushbuttons shall be NEMA rated for the required Project environment. Locate control station where indicated or where directed by the Architect Coordinate function and operation with facility control center operations requirements. Provide 24-VAC tow voltage control wiring in conduit Conduit is specified in Division 16. 3. Control Panel: Each door shall be furnished with a NEMA 12 control panel enclosure housing a reversing across-the4ine type magnetic motor starter having thermal-overload protection. The control panel shall contain relays, fuses, terminal strips and other electronic components as required to provide the specified operating sequences. Components shall be pre-wired to the terminal strip and neatly labeled. Power circuits in excess of 200-Volts shah be provided with control transformers to reduce voltage on the control circuit to 120-Volts. 4. Limit Switches: NEMA rated rotary type. 5. Provide photo electric sensors and key-operated override switch for each door. G. Reversing Device: Pneumatic type edges located full length of the door on the leading edges. Reversing edges shall automatically reverse the doors should they come in contact with an obstruction during dosing. H. Electrical: Furnish controls, including but not limited to, control panel, pushbuttons, coil cord, and other components. Wire, conduit, junction boxes, electrical dsconnects, field wiring, and mounting of electrical controls is specified in Division 16. Provide and coordinate all work as required for interface with low voltage work. Low voltage control Wring is included in the work of this Section. 0407-06 ELECTRIC SLIDING DOORS Piogm CD Set 08M-2 PROJECT 802028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08358 VAIL, COLORADO ELECTRIC SLIDING DOORS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that openings are prepared with headers level, jambs plumb, without projections, and correctly dimen- sioned to receive electric sliding doors. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors and operating equipment with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports in accordance with reviewed shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions, and as specified. B. Upon completion of the installation, doors shall be free from warp, twist or distortion and shall be lubricated and properly adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. C. Upon completion, test doors for proper operation. D. Exposed surfaces shall be clean and free from scratches, dents, tool marks, stains, discoloration, and otter defects and damage. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 ELECTRIC SLIDING DOORS Progress CD Set 08358-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08550 VAIL, COLORADO WOOD WINDOWS SECTION 08550 - WOOD WINDOWS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes the following aluminum-dad wood window types: 1. Casement Units. 2. Non-operative (Fixed) Window Units. B. Related Sections: 1. Exterior wood trim that is not included as part of the wood window units is specified in Section 06401. 2. Interior wood trim that is not included as part of the wood window units is specified in Section 06402- 3. Door and window flashings (fle)ible flashings) are specified in Section 07657. 4. Joint sealing between wood windows and adjacent materials is specified in Section 07920. 5. Aluminum-dad wood hinged terrace doors are specified in Section 08264. 6. Aluminum-clad wood sliding glass doors are specified in Section 08312. 7. Glazing requirements for wood windows, including those specified to be factory glazed, are specified in Section 08800. 8. Field finishing of interior wood surfaces is specified in Section 09900. 1.02 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Standards: Performance requirements for structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration for wood windows are those specified in NWWDA I.S. 2 "Industry Standard for Wood Window Units." 1. Provide wood window units bearing the NWWDA "Hanmark Program" label certifying compliance with requirements of NWWDA I.S. 2 for the performance grade indicated. B. Testing: Manufacturer's stock units of each grade of required wood window shall have been tested by a recognized testing laboratory or agency in accordance with ASTM E283 for air infiltration, ASTM E547 for water penetration, and ASTM E330 for structural performance. Test samples shall comply with requirements in NWWDA I.S. 2 for test sample sizes and methods. C. Performance Requirements - Grade 60 Windows: Each required window unit shall comply with the following performance requirements- 1 . Air Infiltration: Not more than 0.04-dim per sq. ft of overall frame area at an inward test pressure of 1.57 lb per sq. ft. 2. Water Penetration: No water penetration as defined in the test method at an inward test pressure of 6.24 lb per sq. ft. 3. Structural Performance: No damage to the unit that would impair operation of the unit, or residual deflection greater than 0.4 percent of the span at a positive and negative test pressure of 60 p.s.f. 4. Acoustical performance: STC 36 minimum. D. Guestroom and sleeping room rescue and escape windows shall comply with net openable area and dimensions required by IBC. 007-M WOOD WINDOWS Progress CD Set orm-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08550 VAIL, COLORADO WOOD WINDOWS 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include for each type of wood window required, including: 1. Standard construction details and fabrication methods. 2. Profiles and dimensions of individual components. 3. Data on hardware, accessories, and finishes. 4. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning exterior surfaces. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following for each type of window: Installation details, including anchors. 2. Typical window unit elevations at 314-inch scale. 3. Full-size details of typical and composite members. 4. Hardware. 5. Glazing details. 6. Accessories. C. Samples for Verification Purposes: The Architect reserves the right to require additional samples that show fabrication techniques and workmanship and design of hardware and accessories. D. Certification: Provide certification by a recognized independent testing laboratory or agency certifying that each required type and grade of window complies with performance requirements indicated. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Wood Window Standard: Comply with NWWDA I.S. 2 for standards of performance and fabrication workmanship for wood windows. B. Safety Glass Standard: Provide the type of products indicated that comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. 1. Provide safety glass permanently marked with the certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of the Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) "Glazing ManuaP and 'Sealant ManuaP except where more stringent requirements are indicated. D. Single Source Responsibility: Provide windows produced by a single fabricator who is capable of indicating prior successful production of units similar to those required. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check actual window openings by accurate field measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Wood Window Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the window manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to: 007.,06 WOOD WINDOWS Progress CD Set 08550-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08550 VAIL, COLORADO WOOD WINDOWS 1. Structural failures, including excessive deflection, excessive leakage, or air infiltration. 2. Faulty operation of Window sash or hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. B. Warranty Period: 3-years from Date of Substantial Completion. C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Urfbrm Sistema 50001S. Contact: Bob Knox, (970) 845-9463. B. Alternate manufacturers: 1. Pella'Desi ner' Series With SmartSash Ill. 2. Pella'Architecr Series or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements of NWWDA I.S. 2. B. Wood: Clear Ponderosa Pine or other suitable fine-grain lumber that has been kiln dried to a moisture content of 6- to 12-percent at time of fabrication and is free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets and surface checks larger than 1/324nch wide by 2-inches long. 1. Lumber shall be water-repellent preservative treated after machining in accordance with NWWDA I.S. 4. 2. Exposed interior wood to be painted shall be dear Douglas Fir. 3. Exposed interior wood to receive transparent finish shall be as scheduled or as directed by the Architect or Interior Designer. C. Aluminum Cladding: Manufacturer's standard aluminum formed sheet or extruded cladding mechanic* bonded to exterior wood sash and frame members. 1. Trim members: Provide either aluminum-dad wood, hollow aluminum extrusions, or roll-timed aluminum trim members. 2. Finish: Factory-applied, baked-on enamel finish, custom color to match color sample furnished by the Architect D. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Fabricate anchors, dips and window accessories of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or hot-dip zinctcoated steel or iron complying with the requirements of ASTM 8633 for SC 3 (severe) service condition; provide strength sufficient to withstand specified design pressure. E. Fasteners: Comply with NWWDA I.S.2 for fabrication and with manufachireh's recommendations and standard industry practices for type and size of installation fasteners. 1. Use **.coated or nonferrous nails and screws for window fabrication and installation. 2. Use brass screws for hardware and accessory installation. F. Glass: Clear insulating glass with Low E coating as specified in Section 08810. 0407-06 WOOD WINDOWS Progress CD Set 08550- 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08550 VAIL, COLORADO WOOD WINDOWS 2.03 CASEMENT WINDOWS A. Window Grade: Comply with the requirements of NWWDA Performance Grade 60. B. Hardware: Provide casement window units with the following equipment and operating hardware: 1. Operating Device: Roto-gear split arm type operator with hardened steel worm and gear arm, stainless steel case, crank handle and knob. Operator arms and sash bracket are stainless steel. Stainless steel finish as selected by the Architect 2. Hinges: Sliding nylon shoe type hinges, concealed from the exterior. Hinges shall be stainless steel. Hinge track shall be stainless steel, fastened with stainless steel screws. a. Gear operating arm and hinge support arm shall permit quick removal of sash from the frame. b. Provide operable sash that allows cleaning from the inside. 3. Lock: Lift type care action lock, high pressure zinc die-cast, finish shall be as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standards. C. Weatherstripping: Provide manufacturer's standard compressible weatherstripping located as follows: 1. Closed cell foam weatherstripping with seamless elastomeric TPE skin, applied on all four sides of the frame. 2. PVC bulb type weatherstripping with either a PVC, CPVC, or ABS rigid base, applied on all four sides of the sash. 3. PVC bulb type weatherstripping, applied on all four sides on the interior wood stops. 2.04 FIXED WINDOWS A. Window Grade: Comply with the requirements of NWWDA Performance Grade 60. 2.05 FABRICATION A. General: Provide the manufacturer's standard fabrication of units. Comply with indicated standards. Include a complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units. 1. Comply with requirements of referenced standards for moisture content of lumber attune of fabrication and for relative humidity conditions in the installation areas. B. Fabricate windows to produce units that are re-glazab le without dismantling sash framing. Provide openkV and mortises precut, where possible, to receive hardware and other items. C. Each window unit includes sash, frame, stops, sill (including undersill or nosing), exterior casing and moldings, hardware, and accessories. D. Provide weatherstripping at perimeter of each operating sash. E. Provide glazing stops, nailed or snap-on type, coordinated with glass selection and glazing system indicated. F. Windows at public areas shall be true divided lite as indicated. G. Pre-glazed Window Units: Except for light sizes in excess of 100 united inches, pre-glaze window units at the shop before delivery, unless pre-glazing is not available from the fabriicathr. 84.07.06 WOOD WINDOWS Progress CD set `r - 4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08550 VAIL, COLORADO WOOD WINDOWS H. Groove Glazing: Pre-glazed units without removable stops or other provision permitting convenient field disassembly to facilitate replacement of broken glass will not be accepted. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to the project site, to the maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. J. Provide window frame assembly for use around exterior louver panels. Frame shall match questroom windows for aesthetic consistency. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect openings before beginning installation. Verify that the opening is correct and the sill plate is level. Do not proceed with installation of window units until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Frame walls shall be dry, dean, sound and well-nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in the opening and within 3-nches of the comer. B. Coordinate window installation with wall flashings and other built-in components. 3.02 INSTALLATION A Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of window units, hardware, operators, accessories, and other window components. B. Set units plumb, level, true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. Provide proper support and andwr securely in place. C. Set sill members in a bed of compound or with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated, to provide weatherkfit construction. 3.03 ADJUSTING A Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and weatherstripping, and to provide smooth operation and a weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Conduct on-site tests for air and water infiltration with the window manufacturer's representative present Tests not meeting specified requirements and units having similar deficiencies shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner. Testing shall be performed by an accredited testing laboratory selected and paid for by the Owner. Air Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with the requirements of ASTM E783. Allowable infiltration shall not exceed 1.5 times the amount specified. 2. Water Penetration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with the requirements of ASTM E1105. No water leakage is permitted. 3.05 CLEANING A Clean interior and exterior surfaces promptly after installation. Take care to avoid damage to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealants, dirt, and other substances. B. Clean glass of pre-glazed window units promptly after installation. Wash and polish glass on both faces before Substantial Completion. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels from glass surfaces. C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged during the construction period. 0407M WOOD WINDOWS Progress CD Set 06550- 5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08550 VAIL, COLORADO WOOD WINDOWS 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect window units from damage or deterioration until time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 WOOD WINDOWS 08550 6 Progress CD Set PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE PART1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Door hardware for wood doors, steel doors, aluminum framed entrance doors, all glass entrance doors, and miscellaneous hardware items. B. Guest Card Entry System, including card locks at doors indicated, card readers at elevator cabs and other indicated locations, and encoding equipment per Four Seasons Standards and as shown on Drawings. C. Provide hardware not described herein but otherwise required for proper completion of the project, conforming to size, function, quality, and finish of other specified hardware. 1.02 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities B. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA): 1. BHMA A156.1 Butts and Hinges 2. BHMA A156.2 Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches 3. BHMA A156.3 Exit Devices 4. BHMA A156.4 Door Controls - Closers 5. BHMA A156.5 Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products 6. BHMA A156.6 Architectural Door Trim 7. BHMA A156.7 Template Hinge Dimensions 8. BHMA A156.8 Door Controls - Overhead Stops and Holders 9. BHMA A156.9 Cabinet Hardware 10. BHMA A156.10 Power Operated Pedestrian Doors 11. BHMA A156.11 Cabinet Locks 12. BHMA A156.12 Interconnected Locks and Latches 13. BHMA A156.13 Mortise Locks and Latches 14. BHMA A156.14 Sliding and Folding Door Hardware 15. BHMA A156.15 Closer Holder Release Devices 16. BHMA A156.16 Auxiliary Hardware 17. BHMA A156.17 Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots 18. BHMA A156.18 Materials & Finishes 19. BHMA A156.19 Power Assist & Low Energy Power Operated Doors 20. BHMA A156.20 Strap & Tee Hinges and Hasps 21. BHMA A156.21 Thresholds 22. BHMA A156.22 Door Gasketing Systems 23. BHMA A156.23 Electromagnetic Locks 24. BHMA A156.24 Delayed Egress Locks 25. BHMA A156.25 Electrified Locking Devices 26. BHMA A156.26 Continuous Hinges 27. BHMA A156.27 Power and Manual Operated Revolving Pedestrian Doors 28. BHMA A156.28 Master Keying Systems 29. BHMA A156.29 Exit Locks and Alarms 30. BHMA A156.30 High Security Locks 31. BHMA A156.31 Electrified Strikes and Frame Mounted Activators C. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI): 1. DHI A115 Steel Door Preparation Standards 2. DHI Al 15W Wood Door Preparation Standards 05-12.06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 -1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL. COLORADO SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 3. DHI A115.IG Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware 4. DHI Keying Systems and Nomenclature 5. DHI Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule D. International Building Code (IBC) E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Fire Windows 2. NFPA 252 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. UL 10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests Of Door Assemblies 2. UL 305 Panic Hardware 3. UL 437 Drill and Pick Resistant Key Cylinders 4. UL 1034 Burglary-Resistant Electric Locking Mechanisms 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Products other than those designated herein must be approved as substitutions prior to submittal of Door Hardware Schedule. B. Submit Door Hardware Schedule in vertical format conforming to DHI "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." Horizontal format schedules will be rejected without review. Organize Schedule into headings, grouping doors to receive same hardware items, indicating quantity and complete designations of every item required for each door opening. The schedule shall include: 1. Cover sheet indicating name and location of Project; name of Architect; name of Contractor; name, address and phone of hardware supplier, name of hardware consultant preparing the schedule; date of submittal or revised submittal. 2. A list of abbreviations used in schedule. 3. An index of door openings, listed in numerical order, with hardware heading identification cross- referenced to Architects set identification. 4. Hardware headings shall be listed in numerical order corresponding, as closely as possible, with numerical order of Architects set numbers. 5. Each hardware heading shall have each door listed in numerical order according to door numbers in the Architects door schedule, and denoting: location, configuration (single, pair, etc.), type (elevation, etc.), door and frame size(s), door and frame material(s), handing, fire rating, and key set identification. 6. Type, style, function, size, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. 7. Manufacturer of each item. 8. Fastenings and other pertinent information. 9. Description and Sequence of Operation of each electrified door hardware function, including location, and interface with fire alarm, access control, and security systems as applicable. Include description of component functions that occur when authorized person wants to enter, authorized person wants to exit; unauthorized person wants to enter; and unauthorized person wants to exit. C. Submit manufacturer's technical product data / catalog cut sheets, dearly marked for each hardware item, including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. D. Wiring Diagrams: No later than 14 days after receipt of approved hardware schedule submittal, submit wiring diagrams for all electrified openings. Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems; differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following: 1. Elevation of each door detailing interface between electrified door hardware and fire alarm, access control, and security systems as applicable. 2. Point-to-point wiring diagram. 05-12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE E. Samples: For exposed door hardware of each type indicated below, in specified finish, new condition, complete packaging. Tag with full description for coordination with the Door Hardware Schedule. Submit samples before, or concurrent with, submission of the final Door Hardware Schedule. 1. One lockset of each type. 2. One surface door closer of each type. 3. One door stop of each type. 4. One exit device of each type. 5. One set of door seals (gasket / weatherstrip) of each type 6. One door bottom / sweep of each type. F. Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may be incorporated into completion of the Project, within limitations of keying requirements. G. Keying Schedule: Detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Format shall conform to DHI "Keying Systems and Nomenclature." H. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide complete operating and maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides. 1. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. J. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. B. Manufacturers, Hardware Supplier, and Installer shall have no less than five years experience in the provision of Door Hardware for projects similar in size, complexity and type to this Project. C. Hardware and keying schedule submittals shall be prepared by, or under supervision of, a Hardware Consultant who is a member of the Door and Hardware Institute, holding the credentials of Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), or being able to demonstrate equivalent training and experience. In either case, Hardware Consultant shall have no less than five years experience in the scheduling of Door Hardware for projects similar in size, complexity and type to this Project; and shall be available at no additional cost during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with all applicable requirements of the most current versions of NFPA 80, UL 10C, and IBC; listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with all applicable accessibility guidelines as set forth in Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) - Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG). C. Latching and locking doors that are hand-activated and that are in a path of travel shall be operable with a single effort by lever-type hardware, panic bars, push-pull activating bars, or other hardware designed to provide passage without requiring the ability to grasp the opening hardware. 1. AN hand-activated hardware shall be mounted between 30 inches and 44 inches above finished floor. D. Latches, locks, and exit devices shall require no more than 15 Ibf to release latch; from egress side shall rat require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. 05-12-08 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE E. At sliding doors, when fully open, operating hardware shall be exposed and usable from both sides. F. Door closing devices shall comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: 1. Interior Hinged Doors: 5 Ibf applied perpendicular to door at latch. 2. Exterior Hinged Doors: 8.5 Ibf applied perpendicular to door at latch. 3. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 Ibf applied parallel to door at latch. 4. Fire Rated Doors: Minimum force allowable by the appropriate administrative authority, not to exceed 15 Ibf applied perpendicular to door at latch. G. Where door closers are provided, adjust sweep speed so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. H. Thresholds shah be maximum 112 inch in height above floor and landing on both sides of openings. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. I. Electrified door hardware shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Each article of hardware shall be delivered individually packaged in the manufacturer's standard commercial carton or container, and shall be properly marked or labeled to be readily identifiable with the approved hardware schedule. B. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions, fasteners, and special tools shall be included in each package. C. Hardware shall be stored in a dry, secure locked area, complete with shelving for unpacking and sorting of the door hardware. D. Deliver all master keys by restricted, receipted delivery directly from the manufacturer to the Owner. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Provide hardware templates to the parties involved for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. When required by door or frame fabricator, furnish physical samples of each mortised and recessed hardware item required. C. Fumish as required any hardware items or accessories requiring factory or shop installation. D. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed pivots and closers with floor construction. E. Electrical System Rough-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies, fire alarm system and detection devices, access control system, and security system as applicable. F. Pre-Installation Conference: Arrange a conference at the job site to coordinate door, frame, hardware and electronic security hardware installation; to be attended by the Architect, Owner, Contractor and representative personnel of firms involved in the provision and installation of said items. G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site with Owner or designated representative. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: 05-12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 - 4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. 2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. 3. Requirements for key control system. 1.08 WARRANTY A. In addition to, and not precluding, other warranty requirements in the Contract Documents, the following hardware items shall carry extended minimum warranties as indicated: 1. Hinges: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Exit Devices: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Door Closers: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. B. At substantial completion, Contractor shall provide an on-hand inventory of spare / replacement parts, identical to the hardware items in the approved hardware schedule, and furnished in the quantities as follows: 1. Complete lockset of each type and function, 2 each. 2. Complete surface closers, 2 each. 3. Door stops of each type, 2 each. 4. Exit device of each type,1 each. 5. Door Seal (gasket 1 weatherstrip) of each type, 1 set 6. Door bottom / sweep of each type, 2 each. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements herein, provide products by one of the following manufacturers for each type of hardware: 1. Butt Hinges: Bommer Industries(BOM), Hager Companies(HAG), Stanley(STA). 2. Pivot Hinges: Ives(IVE), Rixson(RIX), Rockwood(ROC). 3. Cylinders and Keying: Yale(YAL) 5000 Series patent protected restricted keyway. 4. Locksets and Latchsets: Corbin-Russwin(COR), Yale Lock Co.(YAL). 5. Electronic Guest Room Locks and Accessories: Timelox(TIM). 6. Decorative Guest Room Locks and Latches: Architectural Traditions(ART). 7. Exit Devices: Corbin-Russwin(COR), Yale Lock Co.(YAL). 8. Electric Strikes: Folger Adam(FOL), Hanchett Entry Systems(HES), Security Door Controls(SDC), Von Duprin(VON). 9. Power Supplies for Electrified Hardware: Altronix(ALT), DynaLock(DYN), Security Door Controls(SDC), Von Duprin(VON). 10. Flush Bolts and Door Coordinators: Door Controls International(I)CI), Ives(IVE), Rockwood(ROC), Trimco(TRI). 11. Surface Door Closers: LCN(LCN) 4000 Series, Norton(NOR) 7500 Series, Sargent(SAR) 281 Series. 12. Overhead Concealed Door Closers: Dorrna(DOR), LCN(LCN), Norton(NOR). 13. Floor Closers: Rixson(RIX). 14. Overhead Holders And Stops: Glynn-Johnson(GLY), Rixson(RIX), Rockwood(ROC). 15. Electromagnetic Holder / Releases: Architectural Builders Hardware(ABH), DynaLock(DYN), Rixson(RIX). 16. Architectural Door Trim: Anemostat(ANE), Emtek(EMT), Ives(IVE), Rockwood(ROC), Rocky Mountain Hardware(RMH), Trimco(TRI). 05-12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 - 5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE 17. Auxiliary Hardware: Ives(IVE), Rockwood(ROC), Trimco(TRI). 18. Door Bottoms, Metal Thresholds, Weatherstripping and Gaskets: National Guard Products(NGP), Pemko(PEM), Reese Enterpdses(RSE). 19. Folding and Sliding Door Hardware: Hafele(HAF), Hager Companies(HAG), Henderson(HEN), Stanley(STA). 2.02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Requirements for grade, materials, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated herein. Furnish items in types, sizes or Weight, in accordance with manufacturer's standards, appropriate for the conditions of installation and service, unless otherwise indicated. B. Products named or identified by make or model number, or other designation and described herein are base products. Base products establish the standards of type, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, warranty, cost, and other characteristics required by the Project. Requirements for design, function, finish, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware at specific openings are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. C. Door hardware units shall be produced of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA Al 56.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. 2.03 FASTENERS A. Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. B. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware items on exterior doors which are exposed when door is closed. Sex bolts, through bolts, or machine screws and grommet nuts, where used on reverse-bevel exterior doors shall employ one-way screws or other approved tamper proof screws. C. Combination machine screws and expansion shields shall be used for attaching hardware to concrete or masonry. Plastic sleeve and rawl plug anchors are not acceptable. D. Fasteners exposed to the weather in the finished Work shall be of brass, bronze, or stainless steel. 2.04 BUTT HINGES A. Butt hinges shall meet BHMA A1561 requirements. B. Hinge dimensions shall conform to BHMA A156.7. C. Base Metal shall be steel plated for fire-rated doors; bronze or stainless steel for exterior outswinging doors; bronze or plated steel elsewhere as scheduled. D. Provide hinges With antifriction bearings for doors with closers. E. Unless otherwise indicated, size hinges as follows: 1. 1-3/8 inch thick doors to 36 inches width: 3-1/2 inch height; standard weight. 2. 1-314 inch thick doors to 36 inches Width: 4-1/2 inch height; standard weight 3. 1-3/4 inch thick doors over 36 inches width: 5 inch height; heavy weight. F. Provide in minimum Width sufficient to clear trim when door swings 180 degrees, whether or not shown on Drawings to swing 180 degrees. 05-12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 - 6 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE G. Number of hinges per leaf shall be as follows: 1. Doors to 60 inches in height: 2 hinges. 2. Doors over 60 to 90 inches in height: 3 hinges. 3. Doors over 90 to 120 inches in height: 4 hinges. 4. For doors over 120 inches in height: 4 hinges plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches, or fraction thereof, door height greater than 120 inches. H. Screws: Flat head wood screws not less than 1-112 inches long for hinges for wood doors; flat head machine screws elsewhere. I. Hinges for reverse bevel doors with locks shall have pins that are made non-removable when the door is in the closed position by means of a set screw in the hinge pin barrel. J. Electrified Hinges shall be by same manufacturer as hinges used on Project; or hinges equal in all characteristics to hinges used on Project provided by one of the following: Architectural Control Systems(ACS), Marray Enterprises(MRY), Security Door Controls(SDC). 1. Coordinate number and size of wires for electrified hardware served. 2. Provide junction box/ mortar shield for each electrified hinge. 2.05 PIVOT HINGES A. Pivot hinges shall meet BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements. B. Pivots shall be constructed of steel, cast or forged bronze, or stainless steel as indicated by BHMA finish specified. C. Electrified Pivots shall be by same manufacturer as pivots used on Project. 1. Alternatively, subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by authorities having jurisdiction, provide pivots by same manufacturer as other pivots on Project electrically modified by one of the following: Architectural Control Systems(ACS), Marray Enterprises(MRY). 2. Coordinate number and size of wires for electrified hardware served. 2.06 CYLINDERS, KEYING AND KEY STORAGE A. Lock cylinders shall meet BHMA A156.5 requirements. B. Masterkeying system shall meet BHMA A156.28 requirements. C. All cylinders shall be interchangeable core type. D. Cylinders shall be High-Security, type, listed and labeled as complying with drill an pick-resistant testing requirements of UL 437. E. A new great grand master keying system shall be provided. F. Locks shall be keyed according to approved Keying Schedule. G. Locks shall be furnished with a temporary keying system for interim use during construction. H. Provide change keys in individual envelopes for each cylinder delivered. Envelopes shall be marked with respective door identification numbers. 1. Key set symbol, and inscription "Do Not Duplicate" shall be stamped on all keys. J. Keys shall be supplied as follows: 1. Locks: 3 change keys each lock. 2. Master keyed sets: 2 keys each set. 05-12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Suffmfy Permit Set 08710 - 7 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE 3. Grand master keys: 5 total. 4. Great Grand master keys: 5 total. 5. Interchangeable Core control keys: 2 total. 6. Construction keys: 10 total. 7. Blank keys: 100 total. K. Subject to compliance With requirements, provide emergency entrance key vault(s); Knox Company 3200 Series, or equal. 1. Recessed mount with hinged door, With tamper switch; 1/4 inch plate steel housing; 1/2 inch thick steel door with gasket seal. 2. Exterior Dimensions: 7 inches (H) x 7 inches (W) x 3-1/4 inches (D). 3. Finish Color - Black, Dark Bronze or Aluminum as selected by Architect. 4. Provide recessed mounting kit and all other required mounting accessories. 5. Where indicated provide security key override switches for electrically activated openings. 6. Coordinate and provide keying and type per fire/ police department, and other jurisdictional agency requirements. 2.07 LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS A. Mortise Locks and Latches shall meet BHMA A156.13 Grade 1 requirements. B. Auxiliary Locks shall meet BHMA Al 56.5 requirements. C. Electrified Locks shall also meet BHMA A156.25 requirements. D. Provide locking or latching functions as indicated in Hardware Sets. E. Operating trim shall be lever type as indicated in Hardware Sets. F. Lock trim shall be rose or escutcheon type as indicated in Hardware Sets; heavy wrought or cant brass, bronze, or stainless steel; through-bolted through door. G. Lock functions which include thumb turn trim shall be provided with thumb turns compliant with accessibility code requirements. H. Lock Throw: Comply with requirements for length of latch bolts to comply with labeled fire door requirements. 1. Lock backset shall be 2-3/4 inches unless otherwise indicated. J. Provide curved-lip strike With dust box for each latch or lock bolt, with lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated. K. Electromechanical locksets utilized at fire rated openings shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and shall maintain door(s) in positive latched position when power is off. 2.08 SELF-CONTAINED ELECTRONIC GUEST ROOM LOCKS A. Self-Contained Electronic Locks shall be mortise type, and meet BHMA A156.13 Grade 1 requirements. B. Self-Contained Electronic Locks: Internal, battery-powered, self-contained electronic locks; consisting of complete lockset, and motor/ solenoid driven lock mechanism. C. Operating trim shall be lever type as indicated in Hardware Sets. D. Lock Throw. Comply with requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire door requirements, and as follows: 05-12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 - 8 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE Minimum 5/8 inch latchbolt throw with 1 inch throw deadbolt. E. Provide curved-lip strike with dust box for each latch or lock bolt, With lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated. F. Locks utilized at fire rated openings shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and shall maintain door in positive latched position when door is closed. G. Provide low-battery detection and warning when maid card is passed; batteries and circuit board on inside of door. H. Lock shall be capable of maintaining a minimum record of the last 500 entries into the room. 1. System shall have a developed Property Management System Interface and Point of Sale Interface that is compatible with the operator's systems. J. Provide all necessary Microsoft Windows based software, lock batteries, a hand-held data transfer- interrogator unit, a portable external lock power supply, initial supply of guest cards and staff level cards, six card encoding units, and accessories for a complete system as required. K. Provide elevator cab card readers and system interface as required for access to restricted floors. L. Provide on-site training and support 8 days prior, and 2 days post opening of property. 2.09 EXIT DEVICES A. Exit devices and exit device accessories shall meet BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 requirements. B. Electromechanical exit devices shall also meet BHMA A156.25 requirements. C. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. D. Fire Exit Devices: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. E. Touch bars shall be fabricated of stainless steel, brass or bronze depending on finish indicated. All visible parts of exit devices shall be finished compatible with indicated device finish - black strikes, end caps, or other exposed parts are not acceptable. F. Outside Trim: Design, material and finish to match locksets, unless otherwise indicated. G. Adjustable strikes shall be provided for rim type and vertical rod devices. H. Electromechanical exit devices utilized at fire rated openings shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and shall maintain door(s) in positive latched position when power is off. 2.10 ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Electric strikes shall meet BHMA A156.31 Grade 1 requirements, and be listed and labeled under UL 1034 Burglary Resistant Electric Locking Equipment. B. Electric strikes for fire rated openings shall be listed and labeled for such use by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Fail Secure (fail locked) strikes shall be used at all fire rated openings. 05-12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 - 9 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO 2.11 FLUSH BOLTS SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE A. Manual flush bolts shall meet BHMA A156.16 requirements. B. Bottom bolt shall have 12 inch long operating rod. Top bolt operating rod shall be determined by door height, assuring the operator is located less than 72 inches above the floor. C. Automatic flush bolts shall meet BHMA A156.3 D. Provide dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. Dust proof strikes shall meet BHMA Al 56.16. 2.12 DOOR COORDINATORS A. Door coordinators shall meet BHMA A156.3 requirements. B. Door coordinators shall be flat bar type; stop mounted with all necessary filler bars and mounting brackets to accommodate required hardware. C. Provide carry bar at each pair of doors equipped with an overlapping astragal, except when automatic or self- latching bolts are used. 2.13 SURFACE DOOR CLOSERS A. Door closing devices shall meet BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 requirements. B. Surface closers shall be fully adjustable with sweep speed, latch speed and back check position valves. C. Surface closers on exterior doors without building overhang protection shall be primed with rust inhibitive primer before finish application. D. Provide closers size adjusted in accordance with BHMA A156.4, Table All, unless modified by manufacturer's recommendations, and otherwise as required to insure closing and latching of doors. E. Arm selection shall follow the requirements of the manufacturer's recommendations with brackets, drop plates and miscellaneous accessories provided as necessary. F. Provide closers with arms designed to permit openings of doors as far as job conditions will permit; unless otherwise indicated closers with arms restricting opening of door will not be acceptable. 2.14 OVERHEAD CONCEALED DOOR CLOSERS A. Overhead Concealed Door Closers shall meet BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 requirements. B. Closers shall be fully adjustable with sweep speed, latch speed and back check position valves. C. Provide closers size adjusted in accordance with BHMA A156.4, Table All, unless modified by manufacturer's recommendations, and otherwise as required to insure closing and latching of doors. 2.15 FLOOR CLOSERS A. Floor Closers shall meet BHMA All 56.4, Grade 1 requirements. B. Closers shall be fully adjustable with sweep speed, latch speed and back check position valves. C. Floor closers shall have cement boxes. D. Pivots used on doors with floor closers shall be of the same manufacturer as the floor closers. 05-12.06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710-10 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS 8 RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE E. Provide recessed floor plates to accommodate insert of floor finish material for floor closers, unless thresholds are indicated. Provide extended closer spindle to accommodate thickness of floor finish. 2.16 OVERHEAD HOLDERS AND STOPS A. Overhead holders and stops shall meet BHMA A156.8 requirements. B. Overhead door holders and stops shall be adjustable from 90 to 110 degrees dead stop or hold open position, as applicable. C. Overhead door stops shall have shock absorbers providing 5 to 7 degrees compression before dead stop. D. Overhead stops shall not be provided with hold open function when used at fire rated doors. 2.17 ELECTROMAGNETIC HOLDER / RELEASES A. Electromagnetic holders shall meet BHMA Al 56.15 requirements. B. Size and configuration shall provide degree of swing and hold open position as indicated on the drawings. 2.18 ARCHITECTURAL DOOR TRIM A. Architectural door trim shall meet BHMA Al 56.6 requirements. B. Door Protection Plates: Kick, mop, and armor plates shall be 0.050 inch thick brass, bronze, or stainless steel depending on finish indicated. Plates shall have beveled edges, and shall be provided with countersunk mounting holes and No. 6 oval head screw fasteners. Width of kick and armor plates shall be 2 inches less than door width for single doors and 1 inch less for pairs of doors. Width of mop plates shall be 1 inch less than door width. Unless otherwise indicated, height shall be 10 inches for kick and mop plates, and 34 inches for armor plates. C. Door Edging and Astragals: Fabricated from 18 gauge cold-rolled steel or 304 stainless steel as indicated; factory prepared for all mortise hardware; countersunk screw mounting. D. Push and pull plates shall be 0.050 inch thick brass, bronze, or stainless steel depending on finish indicated. Plates shall have beveled edges, and shall be furnished with countersunk mounting holes and No. 6 oval head screw fasteners. Pull plates shall also be furnished with flat-head through bolts for pull grip. E. Push and pull bars and grip handles shall be brass, bronze, or stainless steel depending on finish indicated. 2.19 AUXILIARY HARDWARE A. Auxiliary hardware shall meet BHMA A156.16 requirements. B. Door Stops: Stops shall be of heavy duty construction, provided in finish indicated. Wall bumpers shag have no visible fasteners. Floor stops shall be of height required by floor conditions. Unless otherwise indicated, provide stops at all doors as follows: 1. At exterior, outswinging doors provide heavy duty floor stop Trimco 1214 x 1268K, or equal, unless stop function is indicated in door closer. At all other doors provide floor stop Trimco 1211 for Guest Room and Public doors, wall bumper Tdmco 1270CV for Back of House doors, or equal. Where it is not possible to properly place a floor or wag type stop, provide heavy duty concealed overhead type stop, or when door closer is indicated, provide heavy-duty dead stop function in closer. C. Silencers: Brown rubber, non-marring configured for metal or wood frames as scheduled. Provide 3 per single door and 2 per pair of doors. Silencers shag be tamper resistant once installed in door frame. 05-12-08 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710-11 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE 2.20 DOOR BOTTOMS A. Door bottoms shall be of aluminum or extruded bronze of the type and finish indicated and shall provide proper clearance and an effective seal with specified thresholds. B. Door bottom shall have a rubber, vinyl or neoprene seal as indicated. C. The door bottom shall exclude light when the door is in the closed position and shall inhibit the flow of air through the unit. 2.21 METAL THRESHOLDS A. Thresholds shall meet BHMA A156.21 requirements. B. Thresholds shall be heavy-gauge aluminum or bronze of the configuration and finish indicated, and shall provide an effective seal with door bottom. C. Where required, thresholds shall be prepared to accommodate floor closers, pivots, and projecting bolts of latching hardware. D. Thresholds at floor closers shall have mitered returns and removable access portion for floor closer maintenance. 2.22 METAL HOUSED TYPE WEATHERSTRIP A. Metal Housed Type Weatherstrip shall meet BHMA A156.22 requirements. B. Metal Housed Type Weatherstrip shall be aluminum or bronze of the type and finish indicated, comprised of metal retainers with vinyl, neoprene, silicone rubber, polyurethane or vinyl brush inserts as indicated. C. Seals shall remain functional through all weather and temperature conditions. 2.23 GASKETING A. Shall be a compression type product for use with wood or steel doors; labeled for use on fire-rated doors where required. 2.24 FOLDING AND SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE A. Folding and Sliding Door Hardware shall meet BHMA A156.14 requirements. B. Provide complete sets of type indicated, consisting of overhead track, hangers, supports, track stoppers, floor guides, and other required accessories. 2.25 FINISHES A. Provide hardware in finishes as indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine rough-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. 05-12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710-12 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in accordance with DHI All 15 and/ or DHI A115-W; and DHI All 15.IG. B. Hardware for fire doors shall be installed conforming with NFPA 80, and all other applicable building codes and regulations. C. Install each door hardware item according to manufacturers written instructions, utilizing proper fasteners provided by manufacturer. D. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in other Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. E. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 3.03 DOOR CLOSING DEVICES A. Surface closers on doors opening to or from halls and corridors shall be mounted on the room side of the door. B. Surface closers on exterior doors shall be mounted on the interior side of building utilizing regular arm, parallel arm, or top jamb mounting as required. C. Door closing devices shall be installed in accordance with the templates and printed instructions supplied by the manufacturer of the devices. D. Door closing devices with adjustable spring power shall be adjusted for proper door operation, and compliance will all applicable codes and regulations. E. The cutting of weatherstripping to accommodate closer installation will not be acceptable. 3.04 PUSH, PULL AND PROTECTIVE PLATES A. All plates shall be installed using countersunk No. 6 oval head screw fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. B. Pull plate grip handles shall be through bolted through the door. When push plate is indicated on opposite door side, through bolts shall be countersunk with push plate mounted to conceal through bolts. 3.05 THRESHOLDS A. Thresholds shall be secured with a minimum of 3 fasteners per single door width and 6 fasteners per double door width with a maximum spacing of 12 inches. Thresholds over 6 inches in width shall be secured with a double row of fasteners. B. Exterior thresholds shall be installed in a bed of sealant with combination expansion anchors and stainless steel machine screws, except that bronze or anodized bronze thresholds shall be installed with expansion anchors with brass screws. C. Minimum screw size shall be No. 10, length dependent on job conditions, with a minimum of 1 inch thread engagement into the floor or anchoring device used. 05-12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710-13 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE 1J D. Provide thresholds at doors where indicated in Hardware Sets. Refer to Door Schedule and Drawing details for type and configuration required. Additionally, provide fire door thresholds where combustible flooring passes under doors with rating greater than 20 minutes. 3.06 HARDWARE LOCATIONS A. Unless otherwise indicated install hardware as follows: 1. Bottom Hinge or Pivot 10 inches from door bottom to bottom of hinge. 2. Top Hinge or Pivot: 5 inches from door top to top of hinge. 3. Center Hinge(s) or Pivot(s): Spaced equidistantly between top and bottom hinges/ pivots. 4. Lockset / Latchset/ Exit Device Operating Trim: 38 inches from finished floor to center of lever/ trim. 5. Deadlock: 32 inches from finished floor to center key cylinder / thumb turn. 6. Push Plate: 44 inches from finished floor to center of plate. 7. Pull Plate: 42 inches from finished floor to center of pull. 8. Push-Pull Bars: 42 inches from finished floor to center of bar. 9. Exit Device: 38 inches from finished floor to center of push bar. 10. Wall Bumper: Centered at point on wall where lever, or other operating trim, first makes contact with wall. 11. Floor Stop: Adjacent to wall; not to exceed 4 inches from face of wall; located 3 inches from latch edge of door, in any case never more than 50 percent of door width from latch edge of door. 3.07 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to adjust door closing devices, compensating for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment, and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. C. Follow-up Adjustment: Approximately 6 months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer shall perform the following: 1. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of door hardware. 2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel on recommended maintenance procedures. 3. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of door hardware units. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: 1. Engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 2. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant shall inspect door hardware and prepare written report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted, and prepare a specific list of any deficiencies, a copy of which shall be provided to Architect. 3. Contractor shall correct all deficiencies noted in above report. 4. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant shall re-inspect door hardware and prepare a report certifying correction of deficiencies and compliance with requirements. 3.09 COMPLETION A. When complete all hardware shall be properly secured in place and all exposed surfaces shall be dean and free from scratches, paint, and other defects and damages. J 05-12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 -14 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE B. Contractor shall demonstrate that all keys properly operate the locks as identified in the approved Keying Schedule. 3.10 DOOR HARDWARE SETS A. The following is a general listing of hardware requirements. Provide hardware items required by established standards and practices to meet state and local codes, whether or not specifically indicated in the following sets. B. Silencers and gasketing, where listed in Hardware Sets, may be omitted at openings where door frames are provided With integral seals if integral seals satisfy all applicable Codes and Regulations. C. Refer to Door Schedule and/ or Drawings for door opening information, hardware set assignment, and related requirements. D. Door protection items - mop plates, kick plates, armor plates, and edge guards are not indicated in Hardware Sets. Refer to Door Schedule and/ or Drawings for required locations. Remainder of page intentionally left blank - 05-12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 -15 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE Back of House Doors HW B01 Hinges AB700 HAG 1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset PB5405LN YAL 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification 1 Set Gasketing S88 PEM HW B02 Hinges AB700 HAG 1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset PB5405LN YAL 2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Set Auto Flush Bolt x DP Strike 842/942 x 82 DCI 1 Ea. Coordinator 600 Series DCI 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Astragal (at HM Door) Overlapping Type By Door Mfr. - 1 Ea. Astragal (at WD Door) FMA ANE 1 Ea. Meeting Sfile Gasket S77 PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 PEM HW B03 Hinges AB700 HAG 1 Ea. Passage Latchset PB5401 LN YAL 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Set Gasketing S88 PEM HW B04 Hinges AB700 HAG 1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset PB5405LN YAL 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 3 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI HW B05 Hinges AB700 HAG 1 Ea. Fire Exit Device 717OF-LBR YAL 1 Ea. Fire Exit Device 717OF-LBR-PB626F YAL 1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specification YAL 2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification 1 Set Split Astragal 29324GNB PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 PEM 05-12.06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710-16 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE HW B06 Hinges AB700 HAG 1 Ea. Fire Exit Device 710OF-PB626F YAL 1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specification YAL 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Set Gasketing S88 PEM HW B07 Hinges AB700 HAG 1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset PB5405LN YAL 2 Ea. Flush Bolt x DP Strike 78017/790F x 82 DCI 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Astragal (at HM Door) Overlapping Type By Door Mfr. - 1 Ea. Astragal (at WD Door) FMA ANE 2 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI HW B08 Hinges AB700 HAG 1 Ea. Classroom Lockset PB5408LN YAL 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification 1 Set Gasketing S88 PEM HW B09 Hinges AB700 HAG 1 Ea. Passage Latchset PB5401LN YAL 2 Ea. Closer 75001PR7500 Series NOR 1 Set Auto Flush Bolt x DP Strike 842/942 x 82 DCI 1 Ea. Coordinator 600 Series DCI 2 Ea. Electromagnetic Holder 2000 Series ABH 1 Set Split Astragal 29324CNB PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 PEM HW B10 Hinges AB700 HAG 1 Ea. Classroom Lockset PB5408LN YAL 2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Set Auto Flush Bolt x DP Strike 842/942 x 82 DCI 1 Ea. Coordinator 600 Series DCI 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Astragal (at HM Door) Overlapping Type By Door Mfr. - 1 Ea. Astragal (at WD Door) FMA ANE 1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket S77 PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 PEM 05-12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710-17 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE HW B11 Hinges AB700 HAG 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Push Plate 1001-3 TRI 1 Ea. Pull Plate 1018-3 TRI 3 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI HW B12 Hinges AB700 HAG 1 Ea. Privacy Lockset PB5402LN YAL 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 3 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI HW B13 Hinges AB700 HAG 1 Ea. Office Lockset PB5404LN YAL 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification 3 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI HW B14 Hinges AB850 HAG 1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset PB5405LN YAL 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Threshold To Suit Sill Condition PEM 1 Ea. Door Sweep 345ANB PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 PEM HW B15 Hinges AB700 HAG 2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification 2 Ea. Push Plate 1001-3 TRI 2 Ea. Pull Plate 1018-3 TRI 2 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI HW B16 Hinges AB700 HAG 1 Ea. Classroom Lockset PB5408LN YAL 1 Ea. Dutch Door Bolt 3920-4 TRI 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification 4 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI 05-12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Pernit Set 08710 -18 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE HW B17 Hinges AB700 HAG 1 Ea. Classroom Lockset PB5408LN YAL 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification 3 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI HW B18 Hinges AB700 HAG 1 Ea. Guest Card Entry Lock 2300 Series TIM 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Set Gasketing S88 PEM HW B19 Hinges AB700 HAG 1 Ea. Guest Card Entry Lock 2300 Series TIM 2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Set Auto Flush Bolt x DP Strike 8421942 x 82 DCI 1 Ea. Coordinator 600 Series DCI 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Astragal (at HM Door) Overlapping Type By Door Mfr. - 1 Ea. Astragal (at WD Door) FMA ANE 1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket S77 PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 PEM HW B20 Hinges AB700 HAG 1 Ea. Classroom Lockset PB5408LN YAL 1 Ea. Auto Flush Bolt (Top Inactive Leaf) 840/940 DCI 1 Ea. Roller Latch (Top Inactive Leaf) 1559B TRI 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Astragal (at HM Door) Overlapping Type By Door Mfr. 1 Ea. Astragal (at WD Door) FMA ANE 2 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI HW B21 Hinges AB700 HAG 1 Ea. Passage Latchset PB5401LN YAL 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Auto Door Bottom 434ARL PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Double Row for Sound PEM 05-12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710-19 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE HW B22 1 Ea. Padlock 434 YAL HW B23 Hinges AB850 HAG 1 Ea. Exit Device 7120 YAL 1 Ea. Exit Device 7120-PB626F YAL 1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specification YAL 2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification 1 Set Split Astragal 29324CNB PEM 1 Ea. Threshold To Suit Sill Condition PEM 2 Ea. Door Sweep 345ANB PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 PEM HW B24 Hinges AB700 HAG 1 Ea. Classroom Lockset PB5408LN YAL 2 Ea. Closer 75001PR7500 Series NOR 1 Set Auto Flush Bolt x DP Strike 842/942 x 82 DCI 1 Ea. Coordinator 600 Series DCI 2 Ea. Electromagnetic Holder 2000 Series ABH 1 Ea. Astragal (at HM Door) Overlapping Type By Door Mfr. - 1 Ea. Astragal (at WD Door) FMA ANE 1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket S77 PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 PEM HW B25 Hinges AB850 HAG 1 Ea. Guest Card Entry Lock 2300 Series TIM 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Threshold To Suit Sill Condition PEM 1 Ea. Door Sweep 345ANB PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 PEM 05-12-06 Summary Permit Set DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 20 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS 8 RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE HW B26 Hinges AB700 HAG 1 Ea. Classroom Lockset PB5408LN YAL 2 Ea. Closer w/ Hold-Open 7500H Series NOR 1 Set Auto Flush Bolt x DP Strike 842/942 x 82 DCI 1 Ea. Coordinator 600 Series DCI 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Astragal (at HM Door) Overlapping Type By Door Mfr. - 1 Ea. Astragal (at WD Door) FMA ANE 1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket S77 PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 PEM HW B27 Hinges AB700 HAG 1 Ea. Passage Latchset PB5401LN TIM 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. Electromagnetic Holder 2000 Series ABH 1 Set Gasketing S88 PEM HW B28 Hinges AB850 HAG 1 Ea. Guest Card Entry Lock 2300 Series TIM 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Door Viewer 976U TRI 1 Ea. Door Guard 4016 x 4016ED TRI 1 Ea. Threshold To Suit Sill Condition PEM 1 Ea. Door Sweep 345ANB PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 PEM HW B29 1 Set Bi-pass Door Hardware 9674 Series HAG 2 Ea. Flush Pull 242 TRI HW B30 1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset PB5405LN YAL Note: Balance of hardware by gate manufacturer. 05-12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 - 21 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE HW B31 Hinges AB850 HAG 1 Ea. Classroom Lockset 5408LN PB YAL 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea: Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Threshold To Suit SIR Condition PEM 1 Ea. Door Sweep 345ANB PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 PEM Guestroom Doors HW G01 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Guest Card Entry Lock 2300 Series R-80 Lever x Metal Cap TIM 1 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series x Track Stop DOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Door Viewer 976U TRI 1 Ea. Door Guard 4016 x 4016ED TRI 1 Ea. Auto Door Bottom 434APK PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM Note: Stone threshold. Provide 2 viewers at accessible rooms -1 at standard height and 1 at accessible height. Provide "Stand Open' lock function at shared entry doors. HW G02 Hinges 1279 HAG 1 Ea. Passage Latchset Pioneer x L50 Lever ART 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 3 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI HW G03 Hinges 1279 HAG 2 Ea. Roller Latch (Top of Each Leaf) 15598 TRI 2 Ea. Pull CP230 ART 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 2 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI HW G04 1 Set Sliding Door Hardware Hawa Junior 80 HAF 4 Ea. Door Pull - BTB Mount CP230 ART 05-12.08 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 - 22 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE HW G05 1 Set Sliding Door Hardware Hawa Junior 40 HAF 2 Ea. Door Pull - BTB Mount Victorian CRL HW G06 1 Set Sliding Door Hardware Hawa Junior 80 HAF 2 Ea. Door Pull - BTB Mount CP230 ART HW G07 Hinges 1279 HAG 1 Ea. Dummy Trim (One Side) Pioneer x L50 Lever ART 1 Ea. Thumbturn Deadlock BC180 SCH 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Auto Door Bottom 434ARL PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM HW G08 Hinges BB1279 HAG AMIN. 1 Ea. Passage Latchset Pioneer x L50 Lever ART 1 Ea. Thumbtum Deadlock BC180 SCH 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Auto Door Bottom 434ARL PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM HW G09 Hinges 1279 HAG 1 Ea. Passage Latchset Pioneer x L50 Lever ART 1 Ea. Auto Flush Bolt (Top Inactive Leaf) 940 DCI 1 Ea. Roller Latch (Top Inactive Leaf) 1559B TRI 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 2 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI HW G10 Hinges 1279 HAG 1 Ea. Privacy Lockset Pioneer x L50 Lever ART 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 3 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI 05.12-08 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 - 23 "r PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE HW G11 Hinges 1279 2 Ea. Roller Latch (Top of Each Leaf) 1559B 2 Ea. Dummy Trim (Both Sides) Pioneer x L50 Lever 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification 2 Ea. Silencer 1229 HW G12 Hinges 1279 1 Ea. Passage Latchset Pioneer x L50 Lever 1 Ea. Mortise Deadlock 315 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification 1 Ea. Auto Door Bottom 434ARL 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames HW G13 Hinges 1279 1 Ea. Passage Latchset Pioneer x L50 Lever 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification 1 Ea. Auto Door Bottom 434ARL 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames Public Area Doors Note: Hardware Sets for Public Area doors which include closers list both surface and concealed types. See Door Schedule for type required at each door. HW P01 1 Ea. 1 Ea. 1 Ea. 1 Ea. 3 Ea. 1 Set Hinges Passage Latchset Closer OH Concealed Closer Door Stop Silencer Gasketing BB1279 ML201OMSG 7500/PR7500 Series ITS-96 Series Per Specification 1229 S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames HAG TRI ART TRI HAG ART YAL PEM PEM HAG ART PEM PEM HAG COR NOR DOR TRI PEM 05-12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 - 24 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE HW P02 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset ML2057MSG COR 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 3 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI 1 Set Gasketing S88 MetaV S52 Wood Frames PEM HW P03 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Passage Latchset ML201OMSG COR 2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 2 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 1 Set Auto Flush Bolt x DP Strike 8421942 x 82 DCI 1 Ea. Coordinator 3092 TRI 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Astragal Overlapping Type By Door Mfr. - 1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket S77 PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM HW P04 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Fire Exit Device ED5860B-M55 COR 1 Ea. Electrified Fire Exit Device ED5860B-M959-M55-M94 COR 1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specification YAL 2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 2 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification 1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket S77 PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM 1 Ea. Power Supply/ Controller 781 N COR 1 Ea. Wall Mount Card Reader Wallox TIM Note: Access Controlled Opening - Free egress at all times. Power supply requires 120VAC. HW P05 Hinges BB1279 HAG 2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 2 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification 2 Ea. Push Plate 86081 EMT 2 Ea. Pull 86088 EMT 2 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI 0542-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Perm ft Set 08710 - 25 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE HW P06 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Guest Card Entry Lock 2300 Series R-80 Lever x Metal Cap TIM 2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 2 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 1 Set Auto Flush Bolt x DP Strike 842/942 x 82 DCI 1 Ea. Coordinator 3092 TRI 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Astragal Overlapping Type By Door Mfr. 1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket S77 PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM HW P07 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset ML2057MSG COR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 3 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI HW P08 2 Ea. Floor Closer /Pivot Set SCPH27 Series RIX 1 Ea. Intermediate Pivot M19 RIX 1 Ea. Electrified Intermediate Pivot E-M19 RIX 1 Ea. Exit Device ED5860 COR 1 Ea. Electrified Exit Device ED5860-F957-M94 COR 1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specification YAL 2 Ea. Door Pull 86089 EMT 1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket 369DP PEM 1 Ea. Bronze Threshold - Oxidized; Oil Rubbed To Suit Sin! Floor Closer Condition PEM 2 Ea. Door Sweep - Oxidized; Oil Rubbed 315BN PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM 1 Ea. Power Supply/ Controller 781 N CDR 1 Ea. Wall Mount Card Reader Wallox TIM Note: Access Controlled Opening - Free egress at all times. Power supply requires 120VAC. HW P09 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Classroom Lockset ML2055MSG COR 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metall S52 Wood Frames PEM 05-12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 - 26 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE HW P10 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Push Plate 86081 EMT 1 Ea. Pull 86088 EMT 3 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI HW P11 Hinges BB1279 1 Ea. Spring Hinge 1250 1 Ea. Indicator Deadlock D871 K 1 Ea. Small Wall Bumper 1275RP 2 Ea. Pull - BTB Mount 86088 3 Ea. Silencer 1229 HW P12 1 Ea. Pivot Set 195 x 180 1 Ea. Intermediate Pivot M19 1 Ea. OHC Closer 2030 Series x Track Stop 1 Ea. Push/Pull Set - BTB Mount RM3140-16 Note: Alum/ Glass Door - Perimeter and door bottom seals by door manufacturer. HW P13 Hinges 1 Ea. Privacy Lockset 1 Ea. Occupancy Indicator 1 Ea. Closer 1 Ea. OH Concealed Closer 1 Ea. Door Stop 1 Set Gasketing BB1279 ML203OMSG 5004 7500/PR7500 Series ITS-96 Series Per Specification S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames HAG HAG FAIL TRI EMT TRI RIX RIX LCN ROC HAG COR TRI NOR DOR PEM HW P14 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Office Lockset ML2051 MSG COR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 3 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI 05.12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 - 27 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE HW P15 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Guest Card Entry Lock 2300 Series R-80 Lever x Metal Cap TIM 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM HW P16 Hinges BB1191 HAG 1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset ML2057MSG COR 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Bronze Threshold - Oxidized; Oil Rubbed To Suit Sill Condition PEM 1 Ea. Door Sweep - Oxidized; Oil Rubbed 315BN PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM HW P17 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Classroom Lockset ML2055MSG COR 1 Ea. Auto Flush Bolt (Top Inactive Leaf) 840/940 DCI 1 Ea. Roller Latch (Top Inactive Leaf) 1559B TRI 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Astragal Overlapping Type By Door Mfr. - 2 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI HW P18 2 Ea. Floor Closer /Pivot Set PH5100 Series RIX 2 Ea. Intermediate Pivot M19 RIX 1 Ea. 2 Point Lock MS1837 x 4001 ADR 1 Ea. Dust Proof Strike 80 DCI 1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Lock Per Specifications YAL 1 Ea. Thumb Turn 4066 ADR 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 2 Ea. Push/Pull Set - BTB Mount 86088 EMT 1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket 369DP PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM 05-12-08 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 - 28 PROJECT #02028 AWN FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE HW P19 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Office Lockset ML2051 MSG COR 1 Ea. Closer 75001PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM HW P20 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Passage Latchset ML201OMSG COR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 3 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI HW P21 Sliding Door Hardware Hawa Junior 80 HAF 2 Ea. Pull - BTB Mount 86088 EMT HW P22 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Privacy Lockset ML203OMSG COR 1 Ea. Occupancy Indicator 5004 TRI 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 3 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI HW P23 Hinges BB1191 HAG 1 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series x Track Stop DOR 2 Ea. Pull - BTB Mount RM4110-11 ROC HW P24 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Passage Latchset ML201OMSG COR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Auto Door Bottom 434ARL PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM 05.12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permft Set 08710 - 29 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE HW P25 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Classroom Lockset ML2055MSG COR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 3 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI HW P26 Sliding Door Hardware Hawa Junior 80 HAF 4 Ea. Pull - BTB Mount 86088 EMT HW P27 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Passage Latchset ML201OMSG COR 2 Ea. Pocket Closer 7700STP Series NOR 1 Set Auto Flush Bolt x DP Strike 842/942 x 82 DCI 1 Ea. Coordinator 3092 TRI 2 Ea. Electromagnetic Holder 2000 Series ABH 1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket S77 PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM HW P28 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Passage Latchset ML201OMSG COR 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification 1 Ea. Auto Door Bottom 434ARL PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM HW P29 Hinges BB1279 HAG 2 Ea. Roller Latch (Top of Each Leaf) 1559B TRI 2 Ea. Pull 86088 EMT 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 2 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI 05-12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 - 30 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE HW P30 Hinges BB1191 HAG 1 Ea. Classroom Lockset ML2055MSG COR 1 Ea. Closer 75001PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Bronze Threshold - Oxidized; Oil Rubbed To Suit Sill Condition PEM 1 Ea. Door Sweep - Oxidized; Oil Rubbed 315BN PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM HW P31 2 Ea. Sliding Door Track 9110 HAG 8 Ea. Sliding Door Hanger 9105 HAG 8 Ea. Track Stop 9113 HAG 8 Ea. Bottom Guide 9121 HAG 2 Ea. Bottom Guide Channel 9122 HAG 1 Ea. Sliding Door Lock MS1850SN-050 x 4001-031 ADR 2 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Lock Per Specifications SCH 2 Ea. Flush Bolt x DP Strike 780F179OF x 82 DCI 4 Ea. Flush Pull 1060 TRI 4 Ea. Door Edge Pull 1063 TRI HW P32 2 Ea. Sliding Door Track 9110 HAG 8 Ea. Sliding Door Hanger 9105 HAG 8 Ea. Track Stop 9113 HAG 8 Ea. Bottom Guide 9121 HAG 2 Ea. Bottom Guide Channel 9122 HAG 4 Ea. Flush Pull 1060 TRI 4 Ea. Door Edge Pull 1063 TRI HW P33 Hinges BB1191 HAG 1 Ea. Exit Device ED5657-F9M57 COR 1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specification YAL 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 2 Ea. Door Pull 86089 EMT 1 Ea. Bronze Threshold - Oxidized; Oil Rubbed To Suit Sill Condition PEM 1 Ea. Door Sweep - Oxidized; Oil Rubbed 315BN PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM 05-12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Swvnary Permit Set 08710 - 31 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO HW P34 SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Push Plate 86081 EMT 3 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI HW P35 2 Ea. Floor Closer /Pivot Set SCPH27 Series RIX 2 Ea. Intermediate Pivot M19 RIX 1 Ea. Exit Device ED5860 COR 1 Ea. Exit Device ED5860-F957 COR 1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specification YAL 2 Ea. Door Pull 86089 EMT 1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket 369DP PEM 1 Ea. Bronze Threshold - Oxidized; Oil Rubbed To Suit SiIV Floor Closer Condition PEM 2 Ea. Door Sweep - Oxidized; Oil Rubbed 315BN PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM HW P36 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Classroom Lockset ML2055MSG COR 2 Ea. OH Concealed Smoke Closer - Hold Open 7290MPS Series 24VDC NOR 1 Ea. Auto Flush Bolt x Fire Bolt 840/940 x BFB DCI 1 Ea. Coordinator 3092 TRI 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 2 Ea. Auto Door Bottom 434ARL PEM 1 Ea. Astragal Overlapping Type By Door Mfr. - 1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket S77 Double Row for Sound PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Double Row for Sound PEM HW P37 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Classroom Lockset ML2055MSG COR 2 Ea. OH Concealed Closer - Hold Open 7900H Series NOR 1 Ea. Auto Flush Bolt x Fire Bolt 840/940 x BFB DCI 1 Ea. Coordinator 3092 TRI 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 2 Ea. Auto Door Bottom 434ARL PEM 1 Ea. Astragal Overlapping Type By Door Mfr. - 1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket S77 Double Row for Sound PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Double Row for Sound PEM 05-12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 - 32 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE HW P38 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Fire Exit Device ED5860B-M55 COR 1 Ea. Fire Exit Device ED5860B-M959-M55 COR 1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specification YAL 2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 2 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 2 Ea. Auto Door Bottom 434ARL PEM 1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket S77 Double Row for Sound PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM HW P39 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Exit Device ED5860 COR 1 Ea. Exit Device ED5860-F957 COR 1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specification YAL 2 Ea. OH Concealed Closer - Hold Open 7900H Series NOR 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 2 Ea. Door Pull 86089 EMT 2 Ea. Auto Door Bottom 434ARL PEM 1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket 369DP PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM HW P40 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Exit Device ED5600L-M9M55 COR 1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specification YAL 1 Ea. Closer- Hold Open 7500STH Series NOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Auto Door Bottom 434ARL PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM HW P41 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Deadbolt Lock 314-1/4 YAL 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Push Plate 86081 EMT 1 Ea. Pull 86088 EMT 3 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI 05.12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 - 33 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE HW P42 Hinges BB1191 HAG 1 Ea. Exit Device ED5200 COR 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Bronze Threshold - Oxidized; Oil Rubbed To Suit Sill Condition PEM 1 Ea. Door Sweep - Oxidized; Oil Rubbed 315BN PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM HW P43 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset ML2057MSG COR 2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 2 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 1 Set Auto Flush Bolt x DP Strike 842/942 x 82 DCI 1 Ea. Coordinator 3092 TRI 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Astragal Overlapping Type By Door Mfr. - 1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket S77 PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM HW P44 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Passage Latchset ML201 OMSG COR 1 Ea. Pocket Closer 7700STP Series NOR 1 Ea. Electromagnetic Holder 2000 Series ABH 3 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM HW P45 2 Ea. Floor Closer /Pivot Set SCPH27 Series RIX 2 Ea. Intermediate Pivot M19 RIX 2 Ea. Push/Pull Set - BTB Mount 86089 EMT 1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket 369DP PEM 1 Ea. Bronze Threshold - Oxidized; Oil Rubbed To Suit Sill/ Floor Closer Condition PEM 2 Ea. Door Sweep - Oxidized; Oil Rubbed 315BN PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM 05-12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 - 34 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE HW P46 2 Ea. Floor Closer /Pivot Set SCPH27 Series RIX .2 Ea. Intermediate Pivot M19 RIX 2 Ea. Push/Pull Set - BTB Mount 86089 EMT 1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket 369DP PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM HW P47 Hinges BB1191 HAG 1 Ea. Guest Card Entry Lock 2300 Series R-80 Lever x Metal Cap TIM 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification 1 Ea. Bronze Threshold - Oxidized; Oil Rubbed To Suit Sill Condition PEM 1 Ea. Door Sweep - Oxidized; Oil Rubbed 315BN PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM HW P48 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset ML2057MSG COR 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 3 Ea. Silencer 1229 TRI 1 Ea. Electric Strike 70-32 x PC 24VDC SDC 1 Ea. Power Supply 602RF SDC 1 Ea. Remote Release Switch 15-2 SDC HW P49 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Fire Exit Device ED5860B-M55 COR 1 Ea. Fire Exit Device ED5860B-M959-M55 COR 1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specification YAL 2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 2 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket S77 PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM 05.12-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 - 35 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08710 VAIL, COLORADO DOOR HARDWARE HW P50 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset ML2057MSG COR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Auto Door Bottom 434ARL PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM HW P51 Hinges BB1279 HAG 1 Ea. Classroom Lockset ML2055MSG COR 2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 2 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 1 Set Auto Flush Bolt x DP Strike 8421942 x 82 DCI 1 Ea. Coordinator 3092 TRI 2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Astragal Overlapping Type By Door Mfr. - 1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket S77 PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM HW P52 Hinges BB1191 HAG 1 Ea. Privacy Lockset ML203OMSG COR 1 Ea. Occupancy Indicator 5004 TRI 1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 Series NOR 1 Ea. OH Concealed Closer ITS-96 Series DOR 1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification - 1 Ea. Bronze Threshold - Oxidized; Oil Rubbed To Suit Sill Condition PEM 1 Ea. Door Sweep - Oxidized; Oil Rubbed 315BN PEM 1 Set Gasketing S88 Metal/ S52 Wood Frames PEM END OF SECTION 1j 0542-06 DOOR HARDWARE Summary Permit Set 08710 - 36 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL. COLORADO SECTION 08735 ELEVATOR DOOR SMOKE CONTAINMENT SEALS SECTION 08735 - ELEVATOR DOOR SMOKE CONTAINMENT SEALS (SMOKE CONTROL CURTAINS) PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for elevator holstway door smoke gasket system at interior elevator hoistway openings. B. Related Sections: 1. Electric traction elevators are specified in Section 14200. 2. Smoke detectors are specified in Division 16. Smoke detector shall be equipped with an auxiliary contact and emergency power supply. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A Smoke containment system shall be connected to a smoke detector located in the ceiling. When smoke is detected, the film material shall automatically unroll and shall be magnetically attracted to elevator door frame creating an air tight seal at the hoistway door. B. Film shall be a reinforced transparent polyimide that does not bum or melt. Film shall be attached to a flexible magnet by means of an elastomeric sealant that allows the magnet to expand under differential air pressure. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data and installation instructions. Including wiring diagrams showing location of required junction boxes and wiring connections to smoke detector and rewind switch. B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, reflected ceiling plans and section details. Indicate adjacent construction. Reference architectural drawings and details. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Elevator door smoke containment seals shall be ICBO listed and approved. B. Installer: Factory-trained and approved by manufacturer. C. Manufacturer. Minimum 7-years experience in manufacturing smoke containment systems of the type specified. 1.05 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS A Maintenance and Testing: Perform minimum semi-annual maintenance and testing on each smoke containment system as required by the ICBO evaluation reports and local authority having jurisdiction. Retain pemranent record of test PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURER A Smoke Guard Corporation Model #400 or equal (no known equal). 2.02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A Performance Requirements: 1. Air Leakage: Shall not exceed 3-cfm/sq. ft. of door opening at 0.1-in. water pressure differential at ambient temperature and 400-deg. F. 04.07.06 ELEVATOR DOOR SMOKE CONTAINMENT SEALS Progress CD Set 08735-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS -SECTION 08735 VAIL, COLORADO ELEVATOR DOOR SMOKE CONTAINMENT SEALS B. Curtain: 1. Film: Minimum 1-mil thick transparent polyimide film reinforced with minimum 100 denier Nomex yam at.25-in. each way. 2. Magnetic Strips: Flexible multi-pole strips attached to longitudinal edges of film with low modulus silicone adhesive. C. Housing: 20-gauge powder coated, cold rolled steel container with dust cover and door with concealed hinges. D. Auxiliary Rails for Non-Ferrous Hoistway Frames or Frames with a Flat Face of 2-inches or Less: 1. Material: i6-gauge ASTM A240, Type 430 ferritic stainless steel. 2. Size: 2-inch wide x depth as indicated or recommended by manufacturer for installation conditions. E. Rewind Motor. NFPA 70, 90v DC. F. Release Mechanism: Comply with UL Standard No. W. G. Screen Rewind Switch: Include switch to rewind curtain into housing. H. Label each smoke containment system with the following information: 1. Manufacturer's name. 2. Ma)dmum leakage rating at specified pressure and temperature conditions. 3. Label of quality control agency. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 TESTING A. Engage rewind motor and inspect for proper operation. B. Inspect fall of curtain and adjust cable tension as required. C. After proper operation is achieved, tighten set screws and drive pulleys. D. Clamp magnetic strips in place and seal area between top of the film and the container with silicone sealant 3.03 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate required testing and maintenance procedures to the Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION J 04-07{6 ELEVATOR DOOR SMOKE CONTAINMENT SEALS Progress CD Set 08735- 2 7PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08800 VAIL, COLORADO GLAZING G. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q1 for units under 25-square feet, Quality q2 for units over 25-square feet, silver coated and electrolytically copper plated, with edges protected with dear vinyl tape or other protective coaling applied before installation. Provide stainless steel channel or angle frames with maximum 1/24nch exposed legs, with No. 4 finish, where indicated. Mirrors shall be in single piece units for each location unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Comply with recommendations of sealant and glass manufacturer's for selection of glazing sealants with performance characteristics suitable for applications indicated and conditions at time of installation. Compatibility. Select sealants with proven compatibility with other materials with which they will come into contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. Suitability. Comply with recommendations of sealant and glass manufacturers for selection of glazing sealants which have performance characteristics suitable for applications indicated and conditions at time of installation. Colors: Color of exposed sealant as selected by Architect from manufacturers standards. B. Silicone Glazing Sealant One-part elastomeric silicone sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A and 0 as applicable; Dow Coming 999, General Electric "SCS 1200", Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 'Rhodorsil 36", Tremco "Proglaze" or approved equal. 2.04 GLAZING TAPES A. Bads-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100- percent, non-staining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces, with or without spacer rod as recommended by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated, packaged in rolls with a release paper backing, complying with AAMA 800. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed-cell, polyvinyl chloride foam tape, factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces, packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive, and complying with AAMA 800 for product 810.5. 2.05 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets: Molded or extruded neoprene, EPDM, or silicone gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal; complying with ASTM C864, D.S. Brown Co., Maloney, Tremco or approved equal. B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded dosed cell, integral-skinned neoprene, EPDM, or silicone of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal; complying with ASTM C509, Type II, black; D.S. Brown Co., Maloney, Tremoo or approved equal. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. Compatibility: Provide materials with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement 04.07.06 GLAZWG Progress CD Set 08800-3 7PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08800 VAIL, COLORADO GLAZING Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, non-staining, non-extruding, non-outgassing, strips of closed-cell plastic foam of density, site, and shape to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to produce optimum sealant performance. G. Mirror Mastic: Palmer "Mirro-Mastic' or approved equal for securing glass mirrors. 2.07 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect work for compliance with manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at comers; presence and functioning of weep system on framing having weeps; existence of minimum required face or edge clearances; and for effective sealing of joinery. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are to be used. 3.03 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with printed recommendations of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials manufacturers. B. Coordinate with framing system manufacturers for proper glazing channel dimensions to provide for necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thickness, with acceptable tolerances. C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation. Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to comers. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass with flares or bevels along one horizontal edge that would occur in vicinity of setting blocks so that these are located at top of opening. Remove and dispose of glass units with edge damage or other imperfections of a kind that would weaken glass when installed and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for sealant adhesion. E. Instal setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, ocated to comply with referenced glazing standard. Set Mocks in thin course of sealant F. Provide spacers inside and out, of size and spacing to preserve required face clearances for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height), except where gaskets or glazing tapes with continuous spacer rods are used. Provide 1l8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness sightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. G. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing standard except where otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer. H. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics. 1. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement 007-06 GLAZING Progress CD Set 08W-4 7PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08800 VAIL, COLORADO GLAZING Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at comers and install gaskets in manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent comers from pulling away; seal comer joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.04 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that when compressed by glass their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightfine of stops. B. Install tapes continuously but not in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at comers of opening with adjoining lengths butted, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each lite is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass liter in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at comers and work toward center of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomedc sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.05 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Fabdmte compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. Secure compression gaskets in place with joints located at comers to compress gaskets producing a weatherf+ght seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. C. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.06 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers between glass rites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding Into glass channel weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tod exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. Install pressurized gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel to eliminate diet and moisture pockets. 3.07 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect glass from breakage. Do not apply markers to surfaces of glass. Remove nonpermanent labels and dean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contactwith contaminating substances. Remove immediately by methods recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits or staining. Remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. 04-07-06 GLA M Progress CD Set 08800-5 7PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08800 VAIL, COLORADO GLAZING D. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged during construction, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. E. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4-days prior to date scheduled for inspection for Substantial Completion. Use methods recommended by glass manufacturers. END OF SECTION 04-07.06 GLAZING Progress CD Set 08W-6 7PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08800 VAIL, COLORADO GLAZING SECTION 08800 - GLAZING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for interior and exterior glass and glazing. B. Related Sections: 1. Wood entrances and storefronts are specified in Section 06460. 2. Steel doors and frames are specified in Section 08110. 3. Flush wood doors are specified in Section 08212. 4. Stile and rail wood doors are specified in Section 08216. 5. Wood terrace doors are specified in Section 08264. 6. Wood sliding glass doors are specified in Section 08312. 7. Wood windows are specified in Section 08550. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal due to other causes than breakage which results in intrusion of dirt or moisture, intemal condensation or fogging, deterioration of protected intemal glass coating resulting from seal failure, and any other visual evidence of seal failure or performance. 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide glass and glazing that has been produced, fabricated and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading and impact loading (where applicable), without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glass and glazing materials and other defects in the work. B. Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from an ambient temperature range of 120-deg. F. and from a consequent temperature range within glass and glass framing members of 180-deg. F. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturers technical data for each glazing material and fabricated glass product required, including installation and maintenance instructions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of the following manufacturer and associations exceptwhere more stringent requirements are specified: 1. Glass Association of North America (GANA) 'Glazing Manual" and *Sealant Manual'. 2. Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (SIGMA): TM-3000 Vertical Glazing Guidelines' and TB-3001 'Sloped Glazing Gu'idelines'. B. Safety Glass: Where safety glass is indicated or required, provide products complying with ANSI Z87.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials. C. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked with appropriate Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) certification label. 04-07-06 GLAZING Progress CD Set 08800-1 7PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 08800 VAIL, COLORADO GLAZING D. Glazier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that required for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials during delivery, storage, and handling; comply with manufacturer's directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage to glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun and from other causes. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing material manufacturer or when glazing channel substrates are wet B. Install glazing sealants at ambient and substrate temperatures above 40-deg. F. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Insulating Glass: Furnish written warranty signed by glass manufacturer, agreeing to fumish replacements for those insulating glass units developing manufacturing defects as defined, within 10-years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Mirror Glass: Furnish written warranty agreeing to furnish replacement mirrors for those units developing silver spoilage within 5-years from date of Substantial Completion. C. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Sizes: Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings indicated, with edge clearances and tolerances complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer. Thickness as indicated, specified, or recommended by glass manufacturer. B. Manufacture heat-treated glass by horizontal (roller hearth) process with roll wave distortion parallel with bottom edge of glass as installed. 2.02 GLASS TYPES A. Clear Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality 83,114-inch thick. B. Clear Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, kind FT;1144nch thick. C. Clear Insulating Glass with Low E Coating: Two Gtes of 3/164ndt thick dear float glass separated by a 5/8-inch thick hermetically sealed air space with Low E coating on No. 2 or 3 surface as standard with glass manufacturer; nominal 14nch unit thickness. Provide fully tempered ltes where indicated or required by code. D. Obscure Insulating Glass with Low E Coating: Exterior I to of 3116-inch thick dear float glass and interior lite of 3/164nch obscure float glass with Low E coating, separated by a 5/8-inch thick hermetically sealed air space, nominal 1-inch unit thickness. Provide fully tempered lutes where indicated or required by code. Obscure file shall be approved by the Architect. E. Wire Glass: ASTM C1036, Type II, Class 1, Quality q8; complying with ANSI Z97.1;1Wnch thick; Form 1, Mesh ml (diamond). F. Clear (Non-Wire) Fire-Rated Glass (Fire Glass): Technical Glass Products'FireLite Plus' or approved equal dear wireless fire and safety rated glazing material, 5116-inch thick, fire-rating equivalent to doors in which installed. Each piece of glass shall be permanently labeled with UL logo and fire rating. 040706 GLAZING Progress CD Set 08800 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09001 VAIL, COLORADO INTERIOR FINISH SELECTIONS SECTION 09001- INTERIOR FINISH SELECTIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the interior finishes as selected by the Interior Designer. In cases of conflict, the finish selections and designations listed in the adjoining schedule supersede those listed in other individual specification sections. END OF SECTION C 05-12-06 INTERIOR FINISH SELECTIONS Summary Permit Set 09001-1 BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D I O INTERIOR FINISHES CARPET Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS CPT-1 Carpet at guestroom Mfr.: Executive Suites Product: One-Bedroom Suites Description: Typical Guestroom Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: Refer to FF&E specs for item spec & location of different carpets. CPT-2 Carpet at Corridor Mfr.: Typical Guestroom Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: Refer to FF&E specs for item spec and location of different carpets. CPT-3 Open Mfr.: Administration Office CPT-4 Carpet @ Young Adult Mfr.: To Be Determined Kid's / Young Adult Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: Page 1 of 58 © Revision: May 12, 2006 Brayton + Hughes Four Seasons Vail BH DESIGN S T U D I O Interior Finishe J Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES CARPET ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS CPT-5 Public Locker Mfr.: To Be Determined Fitness Center Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-6 Men's/Women's Spa Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Locker Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-7 Spa Treatment Mfr.: Rooms Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-10 Carpet at Restaurant Mfr.: To Be Determined Restaurant Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 2 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 J BfH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D 10 INTERIOR FINISHES CARPET Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS CPT- 11 Open Mfr.: Restaurant CPT-12 Open Mfr.: Restaurant CPT- 13 Level 3 Circulation Mfr.: To Be Determined Level 3 Circulation Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-14 Open Mfr.: Level 3 Circulation CPT-15 Meeting Prefunction Mfr.: To Be Determined Meeting Prefunction Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT- 16 Meeting Room Carpet Mfr.: To Be Determined Meeting / Banquet Rooms Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: Issueo: April ZW6 Page 3 of 58 © Revision: May 12, 2006 Four Seasons Vail Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D I O Interior Finishe a Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES CARPET ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS CPT-17 Board Room Mfr.: To Be Determined Board Room Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-18 Banquet Carpet Mfr.: To Be Determined Meeting / Banquet Rooms CPT-19 Banquet Prefunction Mfr.: To Be Determined Banquet Prefunction Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-20 Ballroom Pre- Mfr.: To Be Determined Ballroom Prefunction Function Carpet Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT 21 Open Mfr.: Ballroom Prefunction J Issued: April 7, 2006 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 Page 4 of 58 J BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D I O Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES CARPET ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS CPT-22 Ballroom Carpet Mfr.: To Be Determined Ballroom Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-23 Open Mfr.: Ballroom CPT-24 Entry Carpet Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobbies Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-25 Lobby Corridor Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobbies Carpet Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: issueo: April 7, 2006 Page 5 of 58 & Revision: May 22, 2006 V BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D I O INTERIOR FINISHES CARPET Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes, Project No.: 200458 ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS CPT-26 Lobby Staircase Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobby Staircase Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-27 Open Mfr.: Lobbies CPT-28 Carpet @ Reception Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobbies Desk Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-29 Open Mfr.: Lobbies CPT-30 Open Mfr.: Lobbies CPT-31 RC Lobby Carpet Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobbies Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT•32 Open Mfr.: Lobbies CPT 33 Open Mfr.: Level 3 Circulation J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 6 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 J Brayton + Hughes Four Seasons Vail BH D E S I G N S T U D I D Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES CARPET ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS CPT-34 Bar Carpet Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobby Lounge Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-35 Open Mfr.: Lobby Lounge CPT-36 Lobby Lounge Carpet Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobby Lounge Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-37 Open Mfr.: Lobby Lounge CPT-38 Library Carpet Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobby Lounge Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes- CPT 39 Open Mfr.: Lobby Lounge Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 7 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 Brayton + Hughes Four Seasons Vail BH D E S I G N S T U D 1 0 Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES CARPET ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS CPT-40 Corridor Carpet @ Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobbies Retail Area Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-41 2nd Floor Circulation Mfr.: To Be Determined Level 2 Circularion Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-42 Residence Club Mfr.: To Be Determined Residence Club/Condo Corridor Product: Corridors Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-43 Back of House Mfr.: To Be Determined Administration Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 8 of 58 Q Revision: May 12, 2006 J BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D I O INTERIOR FINISHES CARPET Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS CPT-44 Logo Shop Mfr.: To Be Determined Logo Shop Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 9 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 Four Seasons Vail a Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D I O Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES GLASS ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS GL-1 Glass Shelves Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Executive Suites Product: One-Bedroom Suites Description: Presidential Suites Residence Club Suites Size: Per plans, elevations and details Two-Bedroom Suites Color: Typical Guestroom Finish: 3/8" Thk. Clear, Tempered Notes: Ease and Bevel Edges GL-2 Frosted Glass Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Administration Office Product: Spa Description: 1/2'thick Frosted Glass, Tempered Size: per BHD plans, elevations, and details. Color: Finish: Notes: GL-3 Art Glass Wall Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Spa Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: GL-4 Art Glass @ Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Spa Reception Desk Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 10 of 58 © Revision: May 12, 2006 J Q Brayton + Hughes Four Seasons Vail BH D E S I G N S T U D 1 0 Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES GLASS ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS GL-5 Glass Panel @ Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Spa Thermal Room Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: GL-6 Tempered 1/2" Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Public Product: Description: Tempered Glass. Size: 1/2" Thick Color: Finish: Notes: GL-7 Tempered 3/8' Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Public Product: Description: Tempered glass. Size: 3/8' Thick Color: Finish: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 11 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 Brayton + Hughes Four Seasons Vail BH D E S I G N S T U D 1 0 Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES METAL ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS MT-1 Metal Finish Mfr.: To Be Determined Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: MT-2 Bronze Mfr.: To Be Determined Restaurant Product: Description: Size: Color: Bronze Finish: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 12 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 J Brayton + Hughes Four Seasons Vail (9DESIGN STUDIO Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES MIRROR ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS MI-1 Mirror Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Executive Suites Product: One-Bedroom Suites Description: Typical Guestroom Size: Per Plans, elevations and details. 11,V Thk. Notes: MI.2 Mirror @ Bar Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Bar Product: Description: Size: Per BHD plans, elevations, and details. Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 13 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 Brayton + Hughes Four Seasons Vai Interior Finishe 8 D E S I G N S T U D I O Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PAINT ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PT-1 Paint Mfr.: Sherwin Williams Executive Suites Description: Paint @ Model Room Walls as indicated Guest Model Room Scheme A on B+H Drawings. Guest Model Room Scheme B Color: SW6128 Blonde One-Bedroom Suites Typical Guestroom Finish: Eggshell Manufacturer to submit a minimum of three (3) 8 1/2" x 11' paint-up samples of actual colr to be used to B+H for review and approval prior to production. Refer to Architect's specifications for wall preperation requirements. Must be contract quality. All finishes and installation requirements to be coordinated with contractor prior to production. An additional on-site mock-up of product on actual walls may be required for approval by B+H prior to final production, PT-3 Paint Mfr.: BENJAMIN MOORE Executive Suites Description: Paint @ Model Room Ceiling as One-Bedroom Suites indicated on B+H Drawings. Typical Guestroom Color: 267 Finish: Flat Manufacturer to submit a minimum of three (3) 8 1/2' x 11' paint-up samples of actual colr to be used to B+H for review and approval prior to production. Refer to Architect's specifications for wall preperation requirements. Must be contract quality. All finishes and installation requirements to be coordinated with contractor prior to production. An additional on-site mock-up of product on actual walls may be required for approval by B+H prior to final production, J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 14 of 58 Al Revision: May 12, 2006 J Brayton + Hughes Four Seasons Vail BH DESIGN STUDIO Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PAINT ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PT-4 Paint Mfr.: BENJAMIN MOORE Executive Suites Description: Paint @ Model Corridor Ceiling as One-Bedroom Suites indicated on B+H Drawings. Typical Guestroom Color: OC-92 Mannequin Cream Finish: Flat Manufacturer to submit a minimum of three (3) 8 1/2' x 11' paint-up samples of actual colr to be used to B+H for review and approval prior to production. Refer to Architect's specifications for wall preperation requirements. Must be contract quality. All finishes and installation requirements to be coordinated with contractor prior to production. An additional on-site mock-up of product on actual walls may be required for approval by B+H prior to final production, PT-5 Paint Mfr.: BENJAMIN MOORE Executive Suites Description: Paint @ Model Bath Ceiling as indicated One-Bedroom Suites on B+H Drawings. Typical Guestroom Color: 267 Finish: Eggahell Manufacturer to submit a minimum of three (3) 8 1/2' x 11" paint-up samples of actual colr to be used to B+H for review and approval prior to production. Refer to Architect's specifications for wall preperation requirements. Must be contract quality. All finishes and installation requirements to be coordinated with contractor prior to production. An additional on-site mock-up of product on actual walls may be required for approval by B+H prior to final reduction, PT-6 Open Mfr.: ! Administration Office Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 15 of 58 Q Revision: May 12, 2006 BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D10 Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PAINT ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PT-8 Fitness Ceiling Mfr.: To Be Determined Fitness Center Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-9 Young Adult Ceiling Mfr.: To Be Determined Kid's / Young Adult Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-10 Kid's Ceiling Mfr.: To Be Determined Kid's / Young Adult Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-11 Public Whirl Pool Mfr.: To Be Determined Fitness Center Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: J issued: April 7, 2006 Page 16 of 58 Al Revision: May 12, 2006 J Brayton + Hughes Four Seasons Vail ()DESIGN S T U D I O Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PAINT ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PT-12 Public locker Mfr.: To Be Determined Fitness Center Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-13 Spa Retail Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-14 Spa Reception Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-15 Spa Men's & Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Women's Locker Product: Ceiling Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 17 of 58 Ql Revision: May 12, 2006 Brayton + Hughes Four Seasons Vail 8 D E S I G N S T U D I O Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PAINT ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PT-16 Slumber Room Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-17 Treatment Room Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Ceiling Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-18 Treatment Room Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Corridor Ceiling Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-19 Co-Ed Lounge Wall, Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Corridor Wall Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 18 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 J Brayton + Hughes ()D E S I GIN S T U D 1 0 INTERIOR FINISHES PAINT Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PT-20 Wet Area Wall (Match Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa TI.10) Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-21 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Residence Club Suites Product: Two-Bedroom Suites Description: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-22 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Residence Club Suites Product: Two-Bedroom Suites Description: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-23 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Residence Club Suites Product: Two-Bedroom Suites Description: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-24 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Residence Club Suites Product: Two-Bedroom Suites Description: Color: Finish: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 19 of 58 © Revision: May 12, 2006 Four Seasons Vail BH Brayton + Hughes DESIGN STU DIO Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PAINT ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PT-25 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Condos Product: Presidential Suites Description: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-26 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Condos Product: Presidential Suites Description: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-27 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Condos Product: Presidential Suites Description: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-28 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Condos Product: Presidential Suites Description: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-29 Paint Mfr.: Condos Presidential Suites J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 20 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 J BH Brayton D E S I G N + Hughes S T U D I O Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PAINT ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PT-30 Paint - Ceiling Mfr.: To Be Determined Ballroom Product: Meeting & Banquet Rooms Description: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-31 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Level 3 Circulation Product: Description: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-32 Paint - Ceiling Mfr.: To Be Determined Level 3 Circulation Product: Description: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-33 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobby & Level 5 Circulation Product: Residence Club Lobby Description: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-34 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobby & Level 5 Circulation Product: Residence Club Lobby Description: Color: Finish: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 21 of 58 JC Al Revision: May 12, 2006 Brayton + Hughes Four Seasons Vail 8 Interior Finishes D E S I G N S T U D I O Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PAINT ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PT-35 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobby & Level 5 Circulation Product: Description: Color: Finish: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 22 of 58 Q Revision: May 12, 2006 J BN Brayton D E S I G N + Hughes S T U D 1 0 Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PLASTER ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PLAS-1 Plaster Mfr.: Ardlime Limestone Executive Suites Product: 1286 One-Bedroom Suites Description: Skim Coat plaster Typical Guestroom Color: Finish: Notes: PLAS-2 Spa Ceiling Wet Area Mfr.: Tobias Stucco Spa Product: Description: Color: Custom Finish: Umbria Notes: PLAS-3 Co-Ed Lounge Mfr.: Tobias Stucco Spa Product: Description: Color: Custom Finish: Umbria Notes: PLAS-4 Thermal Ceiling Mfr.: Tobias Stucco Spa Product: Description: Color: Custom Finish: Umbria Notes: PLAS-5 Spa Recieption Mfr.: Tobias Stucco Spa Product: Description: Color: Custom Finish: Umbria Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 23 of 58 JC Q Revision: May 12, 2006 Four Seasons Vail BH Brayton + Hughes Interior Finishes D E S I G N S T U D 10 Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PLASTER ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PLAS-6 Spa Reception Mfr.: Tobias Stucco Spa Accent Wall/Niche Product: Description: Color: Custom Finish: Umbria Notes: PLAS-7 Plaster @ Resturant . Mfr.: Tobias Stucco Restaurant Product: Description: Color: Custom Finish: Umbria Notes: PLAS-8 Plaster @ Banquet Mfr.: Tobias Stucco Banquet Rooms Product: Description: Color: Custom Finish: Umbria Notes: PLAS-9 Plaster Mfr.: Tobias Stucco Lobby & Level 5 Circulation Product: Description: Color: Custom Finish: Umbria Notes: PLAS-10 Plaster Mfr.: Tobias Stucco Lobby & Level 5 Circulation Product: Description: Color: Custom Finish: Umbria Notes: J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 24 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 1J BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D I O Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PLASTER ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PLAS•11 Plaster Mfr.: Tobias Stucco Lobby& Level 5 Circulation Product: Description: Color: Custom Finish: Umbria Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 25 of 58 AFN V© Revision: May 12, 2006 Four Seasons Vail BH Brayton + Hughes Interior Finishes D E S I G N S T U D I D Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PLASTICS ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PL•1 Prep Room @ Salon Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 26 of 58 Al Revision: May 12, 2006 J BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D 10 INTERIOR FINISHES RESILIENT FLOORING Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS RF-1 Kid's Floor Mfr.: To Be Determined Kid's / Young Adult Product: Description: Size: Color: Gauge: Notes: RF-2 Fitness Mfr.: To Be Determined Fitness Center Product: Description: Size: Color: Gauge: Notes: RF-3 Base @ Kid's Mfr.: To Be Determined Kid's / Young Adult Product: Description: Size: Color: Gauge: Notes: RF-4 Base @ Fitness Mfr.: To Be Determined Fitness Center Product: Description: Size: Color: Gauge: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 27 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D I O Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES SPECIAL FINISH ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS SP-15 Stencil @ Plaster Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobby Lounge Product: Description: Color: Finish: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 28 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 J Four Seasons Vail BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D I O Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES CARPET ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS CPT-1 Carpet at guestroom Mfr.: Executive Suites Product: One-Bedroom Suites Description: Typical Guestroom Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: Refer to FF&E specs for item spec & location of different carpets. CPT-2 Carpet at Corridor Mfr.: Typical Guestroom Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: Refer to FF&E specs for item spec and location of different carpets. CPT-3 Open Mfr.: Administration Office CPT-4 Carpet @ Young Adult Mfr.: To Be Determined Kid's / Young Adult Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 1 of 58 Al Revision: May 12, 2006 BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D I O Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES CARPET ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS CPT-5 Public Locker Mfr.: To Be Determined Fitness Center Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-6 Men's/Women's Spa Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Locker Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-7 Spa Treatment Mfr.: Rooms Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-10 Carpet at Restaurant Mfr.: To Be Determined Restaurant Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 2 of 58 Al Revision: May 12, 2006 J BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D I O Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES CARPET ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS CPT-11 Open Mfr.: Restaurant CPT-12 Open Mfr.: Restaurant CPT-13 Level 3 Circulation Mfr.: To Be Determined Level 3 Circulation Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-14 Open Mfr.: Level 3 Circulation CPT-15 Meeting Prefunction Mfr.: To Be Determined Meeting Prefunction Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-16 Meeting Room Carpet Mfr.: To Be Determined Meeting / Banquet Rooms Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 3 of 58 Q Revision: May 12, 2006 Four Seasons Vail a Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D I O Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES CARPET ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS CPT-17 Board Room Mfr.: To Be Determined Board Room Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-18 Banquet Carpet Mfr.: To Be Determined Meeting / Banquet Rooms CPT-19 Banquet Prefunction Mfr.: To Be Determined Banquet Prefunction Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-20 Ballroom Pre- Mfr.: To Be Determined Ballroom Prefunction Function Carpet Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-21 Open Mfr.: Ballroom Prefunction J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 4 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 J Ark Brayton + Hughes Four Seasons Vail BH D E S I G N S T U D 1 0 Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES CARPET ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS CPT-22 Ballroom Carpet Mfr.: To Be Determined Ballroom Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-23 Open Mfr.: Ballroom CPT-24 Entry Carpet Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobbies Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-25 Lobby Corridor Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobbies Carpet Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 5 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 BH Brayton + Hughes D ES I G N S T U D 10 INTERIOR FINISHES CARPET Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS CPT-26 Lobby Staircase Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobby Staircase Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-27 Open Mfr.: Lobbies CPT-28 Carpet Q Reception Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobbies Desk Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-29 Open Mfr.: Lobbies CPT-30 Open Mfr.: Lobbies CPT-31 RC Lobby Carpet Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobbies Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-32 Open Mfr.: Lobbies CPT-33 Open Mfr.: Level 3 Circulation J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 6 of 58 & Revision: May 12, 2006 J (E)DESIGN Brayton + Hughes S T U D I O INTERIOR FINISHES CARPET Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS CPT-34 Bar Carpet Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobby Lounge Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-35 Open Mfr.: Lobby Lounge CPT-36 Lobby Lounge Carpet Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobby Lounge Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-37 Open Mfr.: Lobby Lounge CPT-38 Library Carpet Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobby Lounge Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-39 Open Mfr.: Lobby Lounge Apk, Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 7 of 58 Ql Revision: May 12, 2006 Four Seasons Vail BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D 1 0 Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES CARPET ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS CPT-40 Corridor Carpet @ Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobbies Retail Area Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-41 2nd Floor Circulation Mfr.: To Be Determined Level 2 Circularion Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-42 Residence Club Mfr.: To Be Determined Residence Club/Condo Corridor Product: Corridors Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: CPT-43 Back of House Mfr.: To Be Determined Administration Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 8 of 58 Q Revision: May 12, 2006 J Brayton + Hughes Four Seasons Vail BH D E S I G N S T U D I O Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES CARPET ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS CPT-44 Logo Shop Mfr.: To Be Determined Logo Shop Product: Description: Style: Size: Color: Content: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 9 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 Brayton + Hughes Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes a DESIGN S T U D I O Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES GLASS ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS GL-1 Glass Shelves Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Executive Suites Product: One-Bedroom Suites Description: Presidential Suites Residence Club Suites Size: Per plans, elevations and details Two-Bedroom Suites Color: Typical Guestroom Finish: 3/8' Thk. Clear, Tempered Notes: Ease and Bevel Edges GL-2 Frosted Glass Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Administration Office Product: Spa Description: 1/2'thick Frosted Glass, Tempered Size: per BHD plans, elevations, and details. Color: Finish: Notes: GL-3 Art Glass Wall Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Spa Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: GL-4 Art Glass @ Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Spa Reception Desk Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 10 of 58 Al Revision: May 12, 2006 J BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D 10 INTERIOR FINISHES GLASS Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS GL-5 Glass Panel @ Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Spa Thermal Room Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: GL-6 Tempered 1/2' Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Public Product: Description: Tempered Glass. Size: 1/2" Thick Color: Finish: Notes: GL-7 Tempered 3/8" Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Public Product: Description: Tempered glass. Size: 3/8" Thick Color: Finish: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 11 of 58 A Revision: May 12, 2006 Brayton + Hughes Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes a DESIGN S T U D I O Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES METAL ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS MT-1 Metal Finish Mfr.: To Be Determined Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: MT-2 Bronze Mfr.: To Be Determined Restaurant Product: Description: Size: Color: Bronze Finish: Notes: J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 12 of 58 01 Revision: May 12, 2006 J Brayton + Hughes Four Seasons Vail BH D E S I G N S T U D 1 0 Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES MIRROR ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS MI-1 Mirror Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Executive Suites Product: One-Bedroom Suites Description: Typical Guestroom Size: Per Plans, elevations and details. 1/4" Thk. Notes: MI-2 Mirror @ Bar Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Bar Product: Description: Size: Per BHD plans, elevations, and details. Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 13 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 Brayton + Hughes Four Seasons Vain D E S I G N S T U D I O Interior Finishe9vdf B Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PAINT ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PT-1 Paint Mfr.: Sherwin Williams Executive Suites Description: Paint @ Model Room Walls as indicated Guest Model Room Scheme A on B+H Drawings. Guest Model Room Scheme B Color: SW6128 Blonde One-Bedroom Suites Finish: Eggshell Typical Guestroom Manufacturer to submit a minimum of three (3) 8 1/2" x 11' paint-up samples of actual colr to be used to B+H for review and approval prior to production. Refer to Architect's specifications for wall preperation requirements. Must be contract quality. All finishes and installation requirements to be coordinated with contractor prior to production. An additional on-site mock-up of product on actual walls may be required for approval by B+H prior to final production, PT-3 Paint Mfr.: BENJAMIN MOORE Executive Suites , Description: Paint @ Model Room Ceiling as One-Bedroom Suites indicated on B+H Drawings. Typical Guestroom Color: 267 Finish: Flat Manufacturer to submit a minimum of three (3) 8 1/2" x 11' paint-up samples of actual colr to be used to B+H for review and approval prior to production. Refer to Architect's specifications for wall preperation requirements. Must be contract quality. All finishes and installation requirements to be coordinated with contractor prior to production. An additional on-site mock-up of product on actual walls may be required for approval by B+H prior to final production, J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 14 of 58 Q Revision: May 12, 2006 J BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D I O Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PAINT ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PT-4 Paint Mfr.: BENJAMIN MOORE Executive Suites Description: Paint @ Model Corridor Ceiling as One-Bedroom Suites indicated on B+H Drawings. Typical Guestroom Color: OC-92 Mannequin Cream Finish: Flat Manufacturer to submit a minimum of three (3) 8 1/2' x 11" paint-up samples of actual colr to be used to B+H for review and approval prior to production. Refer to Architect's specifications for wall preperation requirements. Must be contract quality. All finishes and installation requirements to be coordinated with contractor prior to production. An additional on-site mock-up of product on actual walls may be required for approval by B+H prior to final production, PT-5 Paint Mfr.: BENJAMIN MOORE Executive Suites Description: Paint @ Model Bath Ceiling as indicated One-Bedroom Suites on B+H Drawings. Typical Guestroom Color: 267 Finish: Eggahell Manufacturer to submit a minimum of three (3) 8 1/2" x 11" paint-up samples of actual colr to be used to B+H for review and approval prior to production. Refer to Architect's specifications for wall preperation requirements. Must be contract quality. All finishes and installation requirements to be coordinated with contractor prior to production. An additional on-site mock-up of product on actual walls may be required for approval by B+H prior to final production, PT-6 Open Mfr.: Administration Office Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 15 of 58 A Revision: May 12, 2006 Four Seasons Vail Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D 10 Interior Finis he a Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PAINT ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PT-8 Fitness Ceiling Mfr.: To Be Determined Fitness Center Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-9 Young Adult Ceiling Mfr.: To Be Determined Kid's / Young Adult Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-10 Kid's Ceiling Mfr.: To Be Determined Kid's / Young Adult Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-11 Public Whirl Pool Mfr.: To Be Determined Fitness Center Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 16 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 J BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D 1 0 Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PAINT ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PT-12 Public locker Mfr.: To Be Determined Fitness Center Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-13 Spa Retail Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-14 Spa Reception Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-15 Spa Men's & Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Women's Locker Product: Ceiling Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: issued: April 7, 2006 Page 17 of 58 0 Revislom May 12, 2006 BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U DI O Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PAINT ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PT-16 Slumber Room Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-17 Treatment Room Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Ceiling Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-18 Treatment Room Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Corridor Ceiling Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-19 Co-Ed Lounge Wall, Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Corridor Wall Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 18 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 J BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D I O Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PAINT A7J ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PT-20 Wet Area Wall (Match Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa TI-10) Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-21 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Residence Club Suites Product: Two-Bedroom Suites Description: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-22 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Residence Club Suites Product: Two-Bedroom Suites Description: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-23 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Residence Club Suites Product: Two-Bedroom Suites Description: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-24 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Residence Club Suites Product: Two-Bedroom Suites Description: Color: Finish: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 19 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 BIH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D I O INTERIOR FINISHES PAINT Four Seasons Val Interior Finishe Project No.: 200458 ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PT-25 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Condos Product: Presidential Suites Description: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-26 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Condos Product: Presidential Suites Description: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-27 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Condos Product: Presidential Suites Description: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-28 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Condos Product: Presidential Suites Description: Color: Finish: Notes: PT 29 Paint Mfr.: Condos Presidential Suites J issues: April 7, 2006 Page 20 of 58 Q Revision: May 12, 2006 J Brayton + Hughes Four Seasons Vail SH D E S I G N S T U D I D Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PAINT ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PT-30 Paint - Ceiling Mfr.: To Be Determined Ballroom Product: Meeting & Banquet Rooms Description: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-31 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Level 3 Circulation Product: Description: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-32 Paint - Ceiling Mfr.: To Be Determined Level 3 Circulation Product: Description: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-33 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobby & Level 5 Circulation Product: Residence Club Lobby Description: Color: Finish: Notes: PT-34 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobby & Level 5 Circulation Product: Residence Club Lobby Description: Color: Finish: Notes: NiYCY~ hprn i, zwo Page 21 of 58 ~1 Revision: May 12, 2006 BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D1 O Four Seasons Vail . Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PAINT ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PT-35 Paint Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobby & Level 5 Circulation Product: Description: Color: Finish: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 22 of 58 © Revision: May 12, 2006 J Four Seasons Vail 'dowk a Brayton + Hughes kiil) D E S I G N S T U D 1 0 Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PLASTER ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PLAS-1 Plaster Mfr.: Ardlime Limestone Executive Suites Product:1286 One-Bedroom Suites Description: Skim Coat plaster Typical Guestroom Color: Finish: Notes: PLAS-2 Spa Ceiling Wet Area Mfr.: Tobias Stucco Spa Product: Description: Color: Custom Finish: Umbria Notes: PLAS-3 Co-Ed Lounge Mfr.: Tobias Stucco Spa Product: Description: Color: Custom Finish: Umbria Notes: PLAS-4 Thermal Ceiling Mfr.: Tobias Stucco Spa Product: Description: Color: Custom Finish: Umbria Notes: PLAS-5 Spa Recieption Mfr.: Tobias Stucco Spa Product: Description: Color: Custom Finish: Umbria Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 23 of 58 Q Revision: May 12, 2006 Brayton + Hughes Four Seasons Vail a DESIGN S T U D I O Interior Finishes. Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PLASTER ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PLAS-6 Spa Reception Mfr.: Tobias Stucco Spa Accent Wall/Niche Product: Description: Color: Custom Finish: Umbria Notes: PLAS-7 Plaster @ Resturant Mfr.: Tobias Stucco Restaurant Product: Description: Color: Custom Finish: Umbria Notes: PLAS-8 Plaster @ Banquet Mfr.: Tobias Stucco Banquet Rooms Product: Description: Color: Custom Finish: Umbria Notes: PLAS-9 Plaster Mfr.: Tobias Stucco Lobby & Level 5 Circulation Product: Description: Color: Custom Finish: Umbria Notes: PLAS-10 Plaster Mfr.: Tobias Stucco Lobby & Level 5 Circulation Product: Description: Color: Custom Finish: Umbria Notes: J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 24 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 Brayton + Hughes Four Seasons Vail C a D E S I G N S T U D I O Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PLASTER ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PLAS-11 Plaster Mfr.: Tobias Stucco Lobby & Level 5 Circulation Product: Description: Color: Custom Finish: Umbria Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 25 of 58 Q Revision: May 12, 2006 BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D10 Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES PLASTICS ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS PL- 1 Prep Room @ Salon Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 26 of 58 A Revision: May 12, 2006 1J ® Brayton BFt DESIGN + Hughes STUDIO Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES RESILIENT FLOORING ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS RF-1 Kid's Floor Mfr.: To Be Determined Kid's / Young Adult Product: Description: Size: Color: Gauge: Notes: RF-2 Fitness Mfr.: To Be Determined Fitness Center Product: Description: Size: Color: Gauge: Notes: RF-3 Base @ Kid's Mfr.: To Be Determined Kid's / Young Adult Product: Description: Size: Color: Gauge: Notes: RF-4 Base @ Fitness Mfr.: To Be Determined Fitness Center Product: Description: Size: Color: Gauge: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 27 of 58 Al Revision: May 12, 2006 BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D I O Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES SPECIAL FINISH ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS SP-15 Stencil @ Plaster Mfr.: To Be Determined Lobby Lounge Product: Description: Color: Finish: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 28 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 J BIH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U DI O Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES STONE c ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS ST-1 Stone at Bathroom Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Executive Suites Product:237A One-Bedroom Suites Description: Limestone Typical Guestroom Size:12"x24" Finish:Honed Grout: Notes:This item was submitted by Beaver Construction as a substitute. Submitted sample was approved for use. ST-1.1 Delete Mfr.: Delete this Specification ST-2 Stone at Bathroom Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Executive Suites Product:237A One-Bedroom Suites Description: Limestone Typical Guestroom Size:6"x12" Finish:Honed Grout: Notes:This item was submitted by Beaver Construction as a substitute. Submitted sample was approved for use. ST-3 Stone at Bathroom Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Executive Suites Product:237A One-Bedroom Suites Description: Limestone Typical Guestroom S ize:3"x6" Finish:Honed Grout: Notes:This item was submitted by Beaver Construction as a substitute. Submitted sample was approved for use. Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 29 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 Four Seasons Vail BH Brayton + Hughes Interior Finishes DESIGN S T U D I O Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES STONE ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS ST-4 Stone Accent at Mfr.: DAL TILE Executive Suites Bathroom Product:Light Emperador One-Bedroom Suites Typical Guestroom Description: Marble Size: 2"x6': Finish:Honed Grout: Notes. ST-4.1 Delete Mfr.: Delete this Specification ST-4.2 Delete Mfr.: Delete this specification ST-5 Stone at Bathroom Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Executive Suites Product:237A One-Bedroom Suites Typical Guestroom Description: Limestone Size:6'x6' Finish:Honed Grout: Notes:This item was submitted by Beaver Construction as a substitute. Submitted sample was approved for use. ST-6 Stone at CounterTops Mfr.: DAL TILE Executive Suites Product: Light Emperador Slab One-Bedroom Suites Description: Marble Two-Bedroom Suites Typical Guestroom Size:Per BHD plans, elevations and details Finish: Polished Grout: Notes:Stone slab for lavatory counter & splash,mini- bar counter ands lash J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 30 of 58 Al Revision: May 12, 2006 J Four Seasons Vail ® BH Brayton t Hughes DESIGN STUDIO Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES STONE ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS ST-7 Stone at Fireplace Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Executive Suites Product: Mission Springs One-Bedroom Suites Description: Stone at fireplace surround Presidential Suites Residence Club Suites Size: Typical Guestroom Finish: Grout: Notes: 2 to 2-1/2" thick stone. Arch to provide selection. To match exterior stone. ST-9 Stone at Thresholds Mfr.: DAL TILE Executive Suites Product: St.Laurent One-Bedroom Suites Description: Marble Presidential Suites Residence Club Suites Size:Per BHD plans, elevations and details Two-Bedroom Suites Finish:Honed Typical Guestroom Grout: Notes:Stone Threshold at closet and entry door ST-10 Stone at Shower and Mfr.: TBD Executive Suites Water Closet room Product: To match ST-1 One-Bedroom Suites Description: Limestone Typical Guestroom Size:3"x6" Finish:Honed Grout: Notes: ST-11 Delete Mfr.: Delete This Specification ST-12 Co-Ed Floor Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Product: Description: Size: Finish: Grout: Notes: IST-13 Delete Mfr.: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 31 of 58 © Revision: May 12, 2006 Four Seasons Vail BH Brayton + Hughes DESIGN STU DIO Interior Finishes. Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES STONE ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS ST-14 Delete Mfr.: ST. 15 Delete Mfr.: ST-16 Delete Mfr.: ST-17 Stone @ Pool Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Product: Description: Size: Finish: Grout: Notes: ST-18 Stone Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Condos Option C Product: Avalon Antiqued Residence Club Lobby Description: Limstone Two-Bedroom Suites Size: 12' x 24' Finish: Grout: Notes: ST-19 Stone Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Condos Option C Product: Avalon Antiqued Residence Club Suites Description: Limestone Two-Bedroom Suites Size: 6' x 12" Finish: Grout: Notes: ST-20 Stone Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Condos - Option C Product: Avalon Antiqued Residence Club Suites Description: Limestone Two-Bedroom Suites Size: 6" x 6' Finish: Grout: Notes- J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 32 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 J Q(9 Brayton + Hughes DESIGN S T U D I O Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES STONE ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS ST-21 Stone Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Condos- Option C Product: Avalon Antiqued Residence Club Suites Description: Limestone Two-Bedroom Suites Size: 2' x 6' Finish: Grout: Notes: ST-22 Stone Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Condos - Option C Product: Avalon Antiqued Residence Club Lobby Description: Limestone Two-Bedroom Suites Size: 6' X 6' Finish: Grout: Notes: ST-23 Stone Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Condos - Option C Product: Avalon Antique Residence Club Suites Description: Limestone Two-Bedroom Suites Size: I' x 6' Finish: Grout: Notes: ST-24 Stone • CounterTop Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Product: Rasotica Residence Club Suites Description: Two-Bedroom Suites Size: Per BHD plans, elevations and details Finish: Polished Grout: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 33 of 58 Al APON Revision: May 12, 2006 Four Seasons Vail Brayton t Hughes BH D E S I G N S T U D I O Interior Finishes.] Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES STONE ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS ST-25 Stone - Counter Top Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Condos - Option A Product: Bianco Antico Two-Bedroom Suites Description: Granite Size: Per BHD plans, elevations, and details Finish: Polished Grout: Notes: ST-26 Stone Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Residence Club Suites Product: Delicatos White Two-Bedroom Suites Description: Granite Size: Per BHD plans, elevations, and details Finish: Polished Grout: Notes: ST-27 Stone - Counter Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Residence Club Suites Product: Delicatos White Two-Bedroom Suites Description: Granite Size:Per BHD plans, elevations, and details Finish: Polished Grout: Notes: ST-28 Open Mfr.: ST-29 Stone Mfr.: WALKER ZANGER Condos - Option A Product: Dore Royale Presidential Suites Residence Club Suites Description: Limestone Size: 12"x 24' Finish: Grout: Notes: J Issued: Apri17, 2006 Page 34 of 58 Al Revision: May 12, 2006 1J Brayton + Hughes A B D E S I G N S T U D I O Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES STONE ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS ST-30 Stone Mfr.: WALKER ZANGER Condos - Option A Product: Dore Royal Two-Bedroom Suites Description: Limestone Size: 6'x 12' Finish: Grout: Notes: ST-31 Stone Mfr.: WALKER ZANGER Condos - Option A Product: Dore Royale Two-Bedroom Suites Description: Limestone Size: X x 6" Finish: G rout: Notes: ST-32 Stone Mfr.: WALKER ZANGER Condos - Option A Product: Dore Royal Two-Bedroom Suites Description: Limestone Size: 2' x 6' Finish: Grout: Notes: ST-33 Stone Mfr.: WALKER ZANGER Condos - Option A Product: Dore Royale Two-Bedroom Suites Description: Limestone Size: 6"x 6' Finish: Grout: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 35 of 58 Q Revision: May 12, 2006 Four Seasons Vail BH Brayton + Hughes DESIGN STUDIO Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES STONE ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS ST-34 Stone Mfr.: WALKER ZANGER Condos - Option A Product: Dore Royale Two-Bedroom Suites Description: Limestone Size: 1'x 6' Finish: Grout: Notes: ST-35 Stone - Counter Mfr.: ELLE MARMI Condos - Option A Product: Estremoz Two-Bedroom Suites Description: Limestone Size: Per BHD plans, elevations, and details Finish: Polished Grout: Notes: ST-36 Stone - Counter Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Condos - Option B Product: Gold n Silver Condos - Option C Executive Suites Description: Granite One-Bedroom Suites Size: Per BHD plans, elevations and details. Presidential Suites Finish: Polished Grout: Notes: ST-37 Stone - Counter Mfr.: WALKER ZANGER Condos - Option A Product: Rain Forest Description: Marble Size: Per BHD plans, elevations, and details. Finish: Polished Grout: Notes: J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 36 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 J BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D I O INTERIOR FINISHES STONE Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS ST-38 Stone Mfr.: Marbres du Boulonnais Condos • Option B Product: Corton Fleuri Description: Limestone Size: 12"x 24' Finish: Honed Grout: Notes: ST-39 Stone Mfr.: Marbres du Boulonnais Condos • Option B Product: Corton Fleuri Description: Limestone Size: 6" x 12" Finish: Honed Grout: Notes: ST-40 Stone Mfr.: Marbres du Boulonnais Condos . Option B Product: Corton Fleuri Description: Limestone Size: 3' x 6' Finish: Honed Grout: Notes: ST-41 Stone Mfr.: Marbres du Boulonnais Condos . Option B Product: Corton Fleuri Description: Limestone Size: 2"x 6' Finish: Honed Grout: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 37 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 Four Seasons Vail e Brayton + Hughes Interior Finishes,] D E S I G N S T U D I O Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES STONE ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS ST-42 Stone Mfr.: Marbres du Boulonnais Condos - Optin B Product: Corson Fleuri Description: Limestone Size:6' x 6' Finish: Honed Grout: Notes: ST-43 Stone Mfr.: Marbres du Boulonnais Condos - Option B Product: Corton Fleuri Description: Limestone Size: 1" x 6" Finish: Honed Grout: Notes: ST-44 Stone - Counter Mfr.: ELLE MARMI Condos - Option B Product: Monaco Light Description: Limestone Size: Per BHD plans, elevations, and drawings. Finish: Polished Grout: Notes: ST-45 Stone - Counter Mfr.: DAL TILE Condos - Option B Product: Zin Brushed Description: Limestone Size: per BHD plans, elevations, and details Finish: Grout: Notes: J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 38 of 58 Al Revision: May 12, 2006 J Four Seasons Vail C a Brayton + Hughes Interior Finishes DESIGN S T U D I O Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES STONE ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS ST-46 Stone Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Condos - Option B Product: Corton Bressandes Description: Limestone Size: 18'x 18" Finish: Grout: Notes: ST-47 Stone Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Condos - Option B Product: Corton Bressandes Description: Limestone Size: 12"x 24" Finish: Grout: Notes: ST-48 Stone Mfr.: ELLE MARMI Condos - Option B Product: Serepeggiante Description: Size: 3' x 6' Finish: Grout: Notes: ST-49 Stone - Counter Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Condos - Option C Product: Giallo Reale Description: Graite Size: Per BHD plans, elevations, and details Finish: Polished Grout: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 39 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 Four Seasons Vail BH Brayton + Hughes Interior Finishes D E S I G N STUD 1 0 Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES STONE ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS ST-50 Stone Mfr.: DAL TILE Condos - Option C Product: Mountain Gold Description: Slate Size: 18' x 18' Finish: Natural Grout: Notes: ST-51 Stone Mfr.: DAL TILE Condos - Option C Product: Mountain Gold Description: Slate Size: 12' x 24' Finish: Natural Grout: Notes: ST-52 Stone - Counter Mfr.: WALKER ZANGER Condos - Option C Product: Espirito Santos Description: Granite Size: Per BHD plans, elevations, and elevations Finish: Polished Grout: Notes: ST-53 Stone - Counter Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Condos - Option C Product: Tropical Brown Description: Granite Size: per BHD plans, elevations, and details. Finish: Polished Grout: Notes: J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 40 of 58 & Revision: May 12, 2006 J Four Seasons Vail BiH Brayton + Hughes DESIGN STUDIO Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES STONE ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS ST-54 Stone Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Executive Suites Product: Gold n Silver One-Bedroom Suites Description: Granite Size: Per BHD plans, elevations, and details. Finish: Polished Grout: Notes: ST-55 Open Mfr.: ST-56 Stone - Counter Mfr.: DAL TILE Lobby & Level 5 Circulation Product: Emperador Dark Description: Marble Size: Per BHD plans, elevations, details. Finish: Polished Grout: Notes: ST-57 Stone Mfr.: To Be Determined Restaurant Product: To match Hill Glazire Exterior Stone Description: To match Hill Glazire Exterior Stone Size: To match Hill Glazire Exterior Stone Finish: To match Hill Glazire Exterior Stone Grout: Notes: ST-58 Stone - Counter Mfr.: To Be Determined Restaurant Product: Description: Size: Per BHD plans, elevations, and details. Finish: Polished Grout: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 41 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 Four Seasons Vail $H Brayton + Hughes Interior Finishes DESIGN S T U D I O Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES STONE ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS ST-59 Stone Mfr.: To Be Determined Public Areas Product: Description: Size: Finish: Grout: Notes: ST-60 Open Mfr.: ST-61 Stone Mfr.: DAL TILE Public Restrooms Product: Emporador Dark Description: Marble Size: 18'x 18" Finish: Grout: Notes: ST-62 Stone Mfr.: ELLE MARMI Public Restrooms Product: Serepeggiate Description: Size: 6' x 12' Finish: Polished Grout: Notes: ST-63 Stone - Counter Mfr.: ELLE MARMI Public Restrooms Product: Serepeggiate Description: Size: Per BHD plans, elevations, and details Finish: Polished Grout: Notes: J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 42 of 58 Ol Revision: May 12, 2006 J Four Seasons Vail ® a Brayton + Hughes Interior Finishes DESIGN S T U D I O Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES STONE ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS ST-64 Stone Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Lobby & Level 5 Circulation Product: Corton Meil Residence Club Lobby Description: Limestone Size: 12" x 24" Finish: Grout: Notes: ST-65 Stone Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Lobby & Level 5 Circulation Product: Corton Miel Residence Club Lobby Description: Limestone Size: 24"x 24" Finish: Grout: Notes: ST-66 Stone Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Lobby & Level 5 Circulation Product: Corton Miel Residence Club Lobby Description: Liemstone Size: 6"x 24" Finish: Grout: Notes: ST-67 Stone Mfr.: ASN Natural Stone, Inc Spa Product: Inca Blue Description: Size: Per BHD plan, elevations, and details Finish: Polished Grout: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 43 of 58 AMOK 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 Four Seasons Vail BH Brayton + Hughes DESIGN STU DIO Interior Finisher Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES STONE ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS ST-68 Threshold @ Spa Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Product: Description: Size: Finish: Grout: Notes: J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 44 of 58 Al Revision: May 12, 2006 . I J Four Seasons Vail ® a Brayton + Hughes DESIGN STUDIO Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES TILE ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS TI-1 Floor Tile Mfr.: Caesar Spa Product: Qualtiy Quartz Description: Size: 12" x 24' Color: Simtra Finish: Grout: Notes: TI-2 Tile Mfr.: Caesar Fitness Center Product: Quality Quartz Description: Size: 8x 12' Color: Sintra Finish: Grout: Notes: TI-3 Tile Mfr.: Caesar Spa Product: Quality Quartz Description: Size: Compsition "C", Sheet of 1'x 3' Tiles Color: Sintra Finish: Grout: Notes: TI-4 Wall Tile Mfr.: Caesar Spa Product: Quality Quartz Description: Size: Brick 2, Sheet of 3' x 3' tiles Color: Sintra Finish: Grout: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 45 of 58 Al Revision: May 12, 2006 BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D I D Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES TILE ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS TI-5 Trim Tile Mfr.: Caesar Spa Product: Quality Quartz Description: Rounded L Molding Size: 6 1/2"x 12" x 1" Color: Sintra Finish: Grout: Notes: TI-6 Accent Tile Mfr.: SPEC CERAMICS Spa Product: Vitrum Luxa Description: Glass Tile Size: 2" x 6' Color: L656 Finish: n/a Grout: Notes: TI-7 Open Mfr.: Spa TI-8 Open Mfr.: Spa TI-9 Open Mfr.: Spa TI-10 Open Mfr.: Spa TI-11 Open Mfr.: Spa TI-12 Open Mfr.: Spa TI-13 Open Mfr.: Spa J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 46 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 J Four Seasons Vail BH Brayton + Hughes Interior Finishes DESIGN S T U D I O Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES TILE ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS TI-14 Tile @ Suites Mfr.: SPEC CERAMICS Presidential Suites Product: Mirage Slate Two-Bedroom Suites Description: Ceramic Tile Size: 12"x 24" Color: SL02 Beige Finish: Grout: Notes: TI-15 Tile @ Condos Mfr.: SPEC CERAMICS Condos Product: Mirage Slate Description: Ceramic Tile Size: Color: SL02 Beige Finish: Grout: Notes: TI-16 Tile @ Condos Mfr.: Waterworks Condos Product: Arc Description: Ceramic Tile Size: Color: Vivuna Finish: Crackle Glaze Grout: Notes: TI-17 Tile @ Restaurant Mfr.: To Be Determined Restaurant Product: Description: Size: Color: Finish: (Honed, Polished) Grout: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 47 of 58 © Revision: May 12, 2006 BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D I O Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES UPHOLSTERED WALLS ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS UPH-1 Leather Upholstery Mfr.: Edelman Leather Lobby & Level 5 Circulation Description: Name: Royal Suede Color: Whiskey RS38 Style: Width: Per elevation Content: European Aniline Dyed Silky Suede, water & Stain Resistant Notes: UPH-2 Leather Upholstery Mfr.: Edelman Leather Bar Description: Name: Old Rattlesnake Color: Mud OLD-S 1 Style: Width: Per elevation Content: European Full Grain Vegetable Tanned Aniline Dyed Cowhide, Hand Finished Notes: UPH-3 Leather Upholstery Mfr.: Edelman Leather Library Description: Name: Old Shrunken Buffalo Color: Mud OLD-61 Style: Width: Per elevation Content: European Full Grain Aniline Dyed Shrunken Cowhide, Hand Finished. Notes: J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 48 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 J BH Brayton D E S I G N + Hughes S T U D I O Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES UPHOLSTERED WALLS ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS UPH-4 Upholstery Mfr.: To Be Determined Restaurant Product: Description: Style: Width: Per elevation Color: Content: Notes: UPH-5 Upholstery Mfr.: To Be Determined Ballroom Product: Description: Style: Width: Per elevation Color: Content: Notes: UPH-6 Upholstery Mfr.: To Be Determined Banquet Room Product: Description: Style: Width: Per elevation Color: Content: Notes: UPH-7 Upholstery Mfr.: To Be Determined Meeting Rooms Product: Description: Style: Width: Per elevation Color: Content: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 49 of 58 Q Revision: May 12, 2006 BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D 1 0 INTERIOR FINISHES UPHOLSTERED WALLS Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes, Project No.: 200458 ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS UPH-8 Upholstery Mfr.: To Be Determined Elevator Cab Product: Description: Style: Width: Per elevation Color: Content: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 50 of 58 Ql Revision: May 12, 2006 J Four Seasons Vail Brayton + Hughes ® BH DESIGN STUDIO Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES VINYL COMPOSITION TILE ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS VCT•1 Janitor's Closet Mfr.: To Be Determined Administration Office Product: Description: Size: Color: Gauge: Notes: VCT•2 Back Of House Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Mfr.: Product: Description: Size: Color: Gauge: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 51 of 58 Ai Revision: May 12, 2006 Brayton + Hughes Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes 8 DESIGN S T U D I O Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES WALLCOVERING ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS WC-1 Wallcovering at entry Mfr.: Executive Suites & closet door Product: One-Bedroom Suites Description: Typical Guestroom Style: Width: Color: Content: Notes: Refer to FF&E spec for item specs & location of different wallcoverin s WC-2 Wallcovering at Mfr.: Executive Suites bathroom Product: One-Bedroom Suites Description: Typical Guestroom Style: Width: Color: Content: Notes: Refer to FF&E spec for item specs & location of different wallcoverin s WC-3 Wallcovering at Mfr.: Guestroom Corridors Corridor Product: Description: Style: Width: Color: Content: Notes: Refer to FF&E spec for item specs & location of different wallcoverings J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 52 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 BH Brayton DESIGN + Hughes STUDIO Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES WOOD ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS WD-1 Wood trims Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Ballroom Ballroom Prefunction Material Name: (Veneer, Veneer & Solids, Paint Bar Grade Wood) Business Center Executive Suites Species: Alder Guest Model Room Corridor Cut: Kid's / Young Adult Size: Per BHD plans, elevations and details Level 3 Circulation Thickness: Lobby & Level 5 Circulation Lobby & Level 5 Circulation Finish: Meeting & Banquet Prefunction Flitch: Meeting & Banquet Rooms Notes: Finish and stain to match architect's sample. One-Bedroom Suites PUBLIC AREA MIGHT HAVE SLIGHTLY LIGHTER OR Residence Club Suites DARKER STAIN. Restaurant Retail Logo Shop Two-Bedroom Suites Typical Guestroom WD-2 Wood Floors Mfr.: Junckers Executive Suites Material Name: One-Bedroom Suites Species: Merbau Typical Guestroom Cut: Size: 2.1/2" wide planks Thickness: 9/16" Finish: Matt Sealer Flitch: Notes: Install w/ Moisture/ Accoustical Pad Issued: April J, 2006 Page 53 of 58 © Revision: May 12, 2006 ANON, Four Seasons Vail BH Brayton + Hughes Interior Finishet D E S I G N S T U D I O J Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES WOOD ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS WD-2.1 Wood Thresholds Mfr.: Typical Guestroom Material Name: Species: Merbau Cut: Size: Align with jamb width. Verify sizes. Thickness: 3/4" thick Finish: Matt Sealer Flitch: Notes: Install w/ Moisture/ Accoustical Pad. Wood threshold is the same as the wood floor in color and species. Refer to floor finish plan for locations. WD-3 Open Mfr.: Administration Office WD-4 Wood Trim Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Spa Material Name: (Veneer, Veneer & Solids, Paint Grade Wood) Species: Walnut Size: Thickness: Finish: To match BHD Dark Walnut Notes: WD-5 Wood Floor @ Spa Mfr.: Arrigoni Woods Spa Material Name: Mocca Species: European Oak Size: Thickness: Finish: Medium Sanded, Oil Based Poly Notes: Sika Glue Down System J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 54 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 J Four Seasons Vail BH Brayton + Hughes Interior Finishes DESIGN S T U D I O Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES WOOD ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS WD-6 Sauna Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Material Name: (Veneer, Veneer & Solids, Paint Grade Wood) Species: (Veneer, Solids) Cut: (Plain Sliced, Figured) Size: Thickness: Finish: Flitch: Notes: WD-7 Retail Wall Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Material Name: (Veneer, Veneer & Solids, Paint Grade Wood) Species: (Veneer, Solids) Cut: (Plain Sliced, Figured) Size: Thickness: Finish: Flitch: Notes: WD-8 Wood Trim Mfr.: To Be Determined Spa Material Name: (Veneer, Veneer & Solids, Paint Grade Wood) Species: (Veneer, Solids) Cut: (Plain Sliced, Figured) Size: Thickness: Finish: Flitch: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 55 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 Brayton + Hughes Four Seasons Vail e DESIGN STUDIO Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES WOOD ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS WD-4 Millwork Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Spa Material Name: (Veneer, Veneer & Solids, Paint Grade Wood) Species: (Veneer, Solids) Cut: (Plain Sliced, Figured) Size: Thickness: Finish: Flitch: Notes: WD-10 Painted Wood Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Kid's / Young Adult Material Name: Paint Grade Wood Species: (Veneer, Solids) Cut: (Plain Sliced, Figured) Size: Thickness: Finish: Flitch: Notes: WD-11 Open Mfr.: WD-12 Walnut Floor Mfr.: Arrigoni Woods Condos - Option A Material Name: Presidential Suites Residence Club Suites Species: Walnut Two-Bedroom Suites Size: 6 1/4' Thickness: 5/8' Finish: Custom Dark Walnut Stain, Oil Based Poly Notes: Sika Glue Down System J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 56 of 58 Al Revision: May 12, 2006 J BH Brayton + Hughes D ES I G N S T U D 10 INTERIOR FINISHES WOOD Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS WD-13 Wood Floor Mfr.: Arrigoni Woods Condos - Option B Material Name: Species: Ash Size: 5", 6 1/4", 7 1/2" widths Thickness: 13/16" Finish: Custom Medium Honey Stain, Oil Based Poly Notes: Sika Glue Down System WD-14 Wood Floor Mfr.: Arrigoni Woods Condos - Option C Material Name: Species: Ash Size: 5", 6 1/4", 7 1/2" widths Thickness: 13/16' Finish: Custom Medium Hickory Stain, Oil Based Poly Notes: Sika Glue Down System WD-15 Wood Mfr.: To Be Determined Ballroom Material Name: Meeting & Banquet Rooms Species: Size: Thickness: Finish: Notes: WD-16 Spring Floor Mfr.: To Be Determined Fitness Center/ Level 2 Material Name: Circularion Species: Cut: Size: Thickness: Finish: Flitch: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 57 of 58 Al Revlslon: May 12, 2006 BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U Di 0 Four Seasons Vail Interior Finishes Project No.: 200458 INTERIOR FINISHES WOOD ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS WD- 17 Stair Handrail Mfr.: BY CONTRACTOR Lobby & Level 5 Circulation Material Name: Solids Species: To be determined Size: Per BHD plans, elevations, and details Thickness: Finish: To match WD-1 Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 58 of 58 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 J PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09002 VAIL, COLORADO ARCHITECTURAL FINISH SCHEDULE SECTION 09002 - ARCHITECTURAL FINISH SCHEDULE PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes the architectural finish schedule. Refer to plans for room numbers and Section 09001 for interior finish selections by the Interior Designer. END OF SECTION 04.07-06 ARCHITECTURAL FINISH SCHEDULE Progress CD Set 09002-1 ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOTICHAIR RAIL WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS AT-RG ACOUSTIC TILE Wl RECESSED GRID (2'X2') ES EXPOSED STRUCTURE S I LH CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER I LIQUID HARDENER AT-EG ACOUSTIC TILE W( EXPOSED GRID (2'X4') FG STAINED CONCRETE SF SPECIALTY FINISH AT-V ACOUSTIC TILE- VINYL FACES (2'X4) EPX EPOXY FLOORING RF RESILIENT FLOORING AT-C ACOUSTIC TILE W/ EXPOSED GRID IN COMPUTER AND IDF ROOMS FRP FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS (PLASTIC PANELING) SID SEE INTERIOR DESIGN AT-W ACOUSTIC TILE-WOOD FACED GB GYPSUM BOARD SGP SEMI-GLOSS PAINT AT-CG ACOUSTIC TILE -VINYL FACED; CONCEALED GRID (1'X1') GL GLASS SKD SEE KITCHEN DRAWINGS AT-M ACOUSTIC TILE- METAL TILE WI ACOUSTIC PAD LA LIQUID ~,aonrncR ST STONE C OR CPT CARPET MDF MEDIUM DENSITY FIBERBOARD TC TEXTURED COATING CMU CONCRETE MAONRY UNIT (STRUCTURE) MFR MANUFACTURER UP UPHOLSTERY CONC CONCRETE (STRUCTURE) PT OR P PAINT (EGGSHELL, TYP. SEMI-GLOSS AT WET AREAS, DOORS, WINDOWS, AND FRAMES VCT VINYL COMPOSITION TILE CT - CERAMIC TILE QT QUARRY TILE WC WALL COVERING ELF ELASTOMERIC LIQUID FLOORING RB RESILIENT BASE WD WOOD EP EGGSHELL PAINT RCB RESILIENT COVE BASE WRTC WATER REPELLANT TRAFFIC COATING VWC VINYL WALL COVERING e~u~cu eruenni e i eue~ _ne H I L L G L A Z I E R A R C H I T E C T S 09002 - Architectural Finish Schedule ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOTICHAIR WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS 101 PARKING GARAGE CONC WRTC CONCICMU ES 102 PARKING GARAGE CONC WRTC CONC/CMU ES NOT USED - - NOT USED - 105A CONDO STORAGE #1 CONC S / LH - - CONC/CMUIGB PT ES PT 105B CONDO STORAGE #2 CONC S / LH - - - CONC/CMUIGB PT ES PT 105C CONDO STORAGE #3 CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMUIGB PT ES PT 105D CONDO STORAGE #4 CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 105E CONDO STORAGE #5 CONC S / LH - - CONCICMU/GB PT ES PT 105F CONDO STORAGE #6 CONC S I LH - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 105G CONDO STORAGE #7 CONC S I LH - - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 105H CONDO STORAGE #6 CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 105J CONDO STORAGE #9 CONC S / LH - - CONCICMU/GB PT ES PT 105K CONDO STORAGE #10 CONC S I LH - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 105L CONDO STORAGE #11 CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMUIGB PT ES PT 105M CONDO STORAGE #12 CONC S / LH - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 105N CONDO STORAGE #13 CONC S / LH CONCICMU/GB PT ES PT 105P CONDO STORAGE #14 CONC S / LH - CONCICMU/GB PT ES PT 105Q CONDO STORAGE #15 CONC S / LH - CONC/CMU/G13 PT ES PT SUMMARY PERMIT SET 0511212006 V:1020261Finish Schedule102028 Finish Schedule - Summary Permit.xls Architectural Finish Schedule 09002-1 HILL G L A Z I E R A R C H I T E C T S 09002 -Architectural Finish Schedule ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOTICHAIR RAIL WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS 105R CONDO STORAGE #16 CONC S 1 LH CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 106A RESID. CLUB STOR. #1 CONC S / LH CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 1068 RESID. CLUB STOR. #2 CONC S / LH CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 106C RESID. CLUB STOR. #3 CONC S / LH - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 106D RESID. CLUB STOR. #4 CONC S / LH - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 106E GENERAL STORAGE CONC S / LH - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 106F GENERAL STORAGE CONC S / LH - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 106G RESID. CLUB STOR. #5 CONC S I LH - - - CONCICMU/GB PT ES PT 106H RESID. CLUB STOR. #6 CONC S 1 LH - - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 106J RESID. CLUB STOR. #7 CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 106K RESID. CLUB STOR. #8 CONC S / LH - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 106L RESID. CLUB STOR. #9 CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 106M RESID. CLUB STOR. #10 CONC S 1 LH - - - - CONCICMU/GB PT ES PT 106N RESID. CLUB STOR. #11 CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 106P RESID. CLUB STOR. #12 CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 106Q RESID. CLUB STOR. #13 CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMUIGB PT ES PT 106R RESID. CLUB STOR. #14 CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMUIGB PT ES PT 106S RESID. CLUB STOR. #15 CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMUIGB PT ES PT NOT USED 108 POOL EQUIPMENT CONC S / LH - CONC/CMU PT ES PT 109 EMERGENCY GENERATOR CONC S / LH - CONCICMU PT ES PT 110 CHILLER ROOM CONC S / LH - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 111 BOILER ROOM CONC S 1 LH - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 112 TELEPHONE DEMARCATION CONC S / LH - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT E-101 ELEVATOR LOBBY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-101A ELEV. RP & RS MACH. RM CONC S I LH CONC/CMU PT ES PT NOT USED - E-111 ELEVATOR LOBBY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-111A ELEV. HP1 & HP2 MACH. RM CONC S / LH - CONC/CMU PT ES PT E-112 ELEV. HS1 & HS2 MACH. RM CONC S I LH - CONC/CMU PT ES PT E-113 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT RCB - CONC/CMU PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS; PROTEGTIVE WAINSCOT E-1 13A ELEV. MACHINE ROOM CONC S / LH - CONCICMU PT ES PT S-103 STAIR "C" CONC S / LH - CONC/CMU PT ES PT S-106 STAIR "F" CONC S / LH CONCICMU PT ES PT S-113 STAIR "N" CONC S / LH CONC PT ES PT S-115 STAIR "Q" CONC S / LH CONC/CMU PT ES PT NOT USED - - S-117 STAIR "S" CONC S I LH CONCICMU PT ES PT FINISH SCHEDULE - LEVEL-02 ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOTICHAIR WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH FI MATERIAL NISH REMARKS 201 PARKING GARAGE CONC WRTC CONC/CMU ES 202 PARKING GARAGE CONC WRTC CONCICMU ES 203 ELECTRICAL ROOM CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMU PT ES PT SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05112/2006 Architectural Finish Schedule V:1020281Finish ScheduleX02028 Finish Schedule - Summary Permitxls 09002 - 2 HILL G L A Z I E R A R C H I T E C T S 09002 -Architectural Finish Schedule ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOT/CHAIR RAIL WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS 204 VESTIBULE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. GB PT SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 205A RESID. CLUB STOR. #16 CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 205B RESID. CLUB STOR. #17 CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 205C RESID. CLUB STOR. #18 CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 205D RESID. CLUB STOR. #19 CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 206A EMPLOYEE STORAGE #1 CONC S / LH - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 206B EMPLOYEE STORAGE #2 CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 206C EMPLOYEE STORAGE #3 CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 206D EMPLOYEE STORAGE #4 CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 206E EMPLOYEE STORAGE #5 CONC S I LH - - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 206E EMPLOYEE STORAGE #6 CONC S / LH - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 206G EMPLOYEE STORAGE #7 CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 206H EMPLOYEE STORAGE #8 CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 206J EMPLOYEE STORAGE #9 CONC S I LH - - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 206K EMPLOYEE STORAGE #10 CONC S / LH - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 206L EMPLOYEE STORAGE #11 CONC S / LH - - - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 207 WATER METER CONC ELF ELF - - - CONC/CMU PT ES PT 208 STORAGE CONC S / LH - - - CONC/CMU PT ES PT NOT USED 210 IDF VCT RCB - - - CMU/GB PT ES PT ANTI-STATIC VCT 211 AUDIONISUAL VCT RCB - - - CMU/GB PT ES PT ANTI-STATIC VCT 212 ELECTRICAL ROOM CONC S / LH - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 213 HALLWAY CONC S / LH - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 214 ELECTRICAL ROOM CONC S / LH - CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT NOT USED - NOT USED - 217 IDF VCT RCB CMU/GB PT ES PT ANTI-STATIC VCT 218 ELECTRICAL ROOM CONC S / LH CONC/CMU/GB PT ES PT 219 MECHANICAL ROOM CONC ELF ELF CONC/CMU PT ES PT 220 GALLERY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 227 VESTIBULE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 222 ENTRY YOUNG ADULTS S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 223 YOUNG ADULTS S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 224 GAMES S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 225 KID'S CENTER S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 226 OFFICE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 227 PANTRY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 228 TOILET ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 229 ENTRY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 230 CARDIO S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 231 STORAGE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 232 FITNESS S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 233 STORAGE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 234 OFFICE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 235 AN S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN NOT USED - NOT USED - NOT USED - NOT USED - SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05/12/2006 Archftectural Finish Schedule V:X02028\Finish Schedule102028 Finish Schedule - Summary Permit.xis ' 09002 - 3 H I L L G L A Z I E R A R C H I T E C T S 09002 - Architectural Finish Schedule ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOT/CHAIR RAIL WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS NOT USED - NOT USED - NOT USED - NOT USED - 241 SPA RECEPTION S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 241A SPA RETAIL S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 241 B SPA RETAIL S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 242 SPA ADMINISTRATION S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 242A COATCLOSET S.LD. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.LD. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 243 HALLWAY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 244 BEAUTY SALON S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 245 HAIRWASH / PREP S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 246 PEDICURE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 247 MEN'S LOUNGE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 248 STORAGE VCT RCB GB PT ES PT 249 ENTRY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 250A MEN'S LOCKER ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 250B MEN'S LOCKER ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 250C MEN'S LOCKER ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 251 CHANGING ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 252A TOILET ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 252B TOILET ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.R. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 252C ACCESSIBLE TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 253 JANITOR VCT RCB CT GB PT ES PT 4'-0" HIGH CT WAINSCOT MOP SINK 254 GROOMING S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 255 WHIRLPOOL S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 256 LOUNGE AREA S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 257 MECHANICAL ROOM CONC ELF ELF CONC/CMU PT ES PT 258 SHOWER ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 258A ACCESSIBLE SHOWER S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 258B CHANGING S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 258C SHOWER ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.A. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 258D CHANGING S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 256E SHOWER ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 258F CHANGING S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 258G SHOWER ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 259 STEAM ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 260 SAUNA S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 261 HALLWAY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 262 MEN'S SLUMBER ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 263 ENTRY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 264A CHANGING ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.LD. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 264B CHANGING ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 265 MECHANICAL ROOM CONC ELF ELF - CONC/CMU PT ES PT 266A WOMEN'S LOCKER ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 266B WOMEN'S LOCKER ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 266C WOMEN'S LOCKER ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 266Q WOMEN'S LOCKER ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 267 WOMEN'S LOUNGE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05/12/2006 Architectural Finish Schedule V:1020281Finish Schedulel02028 Finish Schedule - Summary Permit.xls 09002 - 4 HILL G L A Z I E R A R C 1-11 T E C T S 09002 - Architectural Finish Schedule ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOTICHAIR RAIL WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS 268 GROOMING S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 268A ACCESSIBLE TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 268B TOILET ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE. INTERIOR DESIGN 268C TOILET ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 268D TOILET ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 269 JANITOR VCT RCB CT GB PT ES PT 4'4' HIGH CT WAINSCOT MOP SINK 270 WHIRLPOOL S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 270A LOUNGE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 271 SHOWER ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 271A ACCESSIBLE SHOWER S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 271B CHANGING S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 271C SHOWER S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 271D CHANGING S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.Q. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 271E SHOWER S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 271F CHANGING S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 271G SHOWER S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 272 SAUNA S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 273 VESTIBULE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 273A SHOWER S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 274 STEAM ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 275 GALLERY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 275A VESTIBULE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I:D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 2758 VESTIBULE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.LD. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.LD. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 276 CO-ED LOUNGE /WAITING S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 277 SPA STAFF LOUNGE VCT - RCB - GB PT AT-V 277A SPA STAFF GROOMING CT - CT - - GB PT GB PT 2778 SPA STAFF SHOWER CT - CT - CT - CT GB PT 277C SPA STAFF TOILET ROOM CT - CT - - GB PT GB PT 277D SPA WORK STATION VCT - RCB - - GB PT AT-V 277E LINEN/HOLDING/FOLDING VCT - RCB - GB PT AT-V 278 VESTIBULE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 279 HALLWAY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 279A HALLWAY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 2798 HALLWAY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 280 WOMEN'S SLUMBER ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 281 MASSAGE ROOM #1 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 281A CHANGING S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 2818 SHOWER S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 282 MASSAGE ROOM #2 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 283 MASSAGE ROOM #3 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 284 COUPLE'S MASSAGE #1 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 285 COUPLE'S MASSAGE #2 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 285A CHANGING S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 2858 SHOWER S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 286 PREP S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 287 MASSAGE ROOM #4 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 288 MASSAGE ROOM #5 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 289 WET MASSAGE SUITE #1 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 289A LAVATORY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05/12/2006 Architectural Finish Schedule V:1020281Finish Schedule102028 Finish Schedule - Summary, Permit.xls 09002 - 5 HILL G L A Z I E R A R C H I T E C T S 09002 - Architectural Finish Schedule ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOT/CHAIR RAIL WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS 289B TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.Q. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 289C SHOWER S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.Q. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 290 WET MASSAGE SUITE #2 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 290A LAVATORY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 2906 TOILET ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 290C SHOWER ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 291 TOILET ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 292 MASSAGE ROOM #6 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 293 EXIT PASSAGEWAY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 294 MASSAGE ROOM #7 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 294A CHANGING S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 2948 SHOWER S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 295 FACIAL #1 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 296 FACIAL #2 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 297 EXIT PASSAGEWAY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 298A WOMEN'S TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 298B MEN'S TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 299 POOL BARIGRILLE EPX EPX CT GB PT AT-V PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; 7'-0" H. CT WAINSCOT E-202 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT RCB CMU/GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS; PROTECTIVE WAINSCOT E-203 ELEV. RS3 MACHINE RM. CONC ELF ELF GB PT ES PT E-211 ELEVATOR LOBBY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. "S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-212 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT RCB - - - CMU/GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS; E-213 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT RCB - - - CMU/GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS; E-214 ELEV. HS3 MACHINE RM. CONC ELF ELF - - - GB PT ES PT M-201 MECHANICAL MEZZ. ROOM CONC ELF ELF - - - CONC/CMU PT ES PT 5-203 STAIR "C" CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMU PT ES PT S-206 STAIR "F" CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMU PT ES PT S-213 STAIR "N" CONC S / LH - - - - CONC PT ES PT S-215 STAIR "Q" CONC S / LH - - - - CONC/CMU PT ES PT NOT USED - S-217 STAIR "S" CONC S / LH CMU/GB PT ES PT S-218 STAIR "T" CONC S / LH CONCICMU PT ES PT FINISH SCHEDULE - LEVEL-03 ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOT/CHAIR WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS NOT USED - NOT USED - NOT USED - 304 STORAGE CT CT - - GB PT GB PT 305 STORAGE VCT RCB GB PT ES PT 306 ROOM AMENITIES VCT - RCB - - GB PT ES PT 307 HOUSEKEEPING VCT - RCB - - GB PT AT-EG 308 HOUSEKEEPING OFFICE VCT - RCB - - GB PT ES PT 309 JANITOR VCT - RCB - CT - GB PT ES PT 4'-0" HIGH CT WAINSCOT MOP SINK SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05/12/2006 Architectural Finish Schedule V:1020281Finish Schedulet02028 Finish Schedule - Summary Permit.xis 09002 - 6 HILL G L A Z I E R A R C H I T E C T S 09002 - Architectural Finish Schedule ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOTICHAIR RAIL WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS 310A EMPLOYEE DINING KITCHEN EPX EPX CT GB PT AT-V PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; 7'4" H. CT WAINSCOT 310B EMPLOYEE DINING ROOM VCT RCB VWC AT-V PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING 310C HOUSEKEEPING STORAGE 31 OD EMPLOYEELAUNDRY 310E HALLWAY 311 SMOKE ROOM VCT - RCB - - GB PT AT-V 312 LAUNDRY VCT - RCB - - GB PT AT-EG 313 CHEMICAL / JANITOR VCT - RCB - CT - GB PT ES PT 4'-0" HIGH CT WAINSCOT MOP SINK NOT USED 315 DRYERS VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT 316 LAUNDRY OFFICE VCT - RCB - - - GB PT AT-EG 316A LOST & FOUND VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT 317 VALET VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT 318 CHILLER VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT 319 MEN'S TOILET ROOM CT - CT - - - GB PT GB PT 320 WOMEN'S TOILET ROOM CT - CT - - - GB PT GB PT 321 NIGHT CLEANER VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT 4'-0" HIGH C.T. WAINSCOT 322 WINE STORAGE VCT / EPX - RCB / EPX - GT - GB PT AT-V - PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; ' " 323 SODA / BEER STORAGE VCT - RCB GT - GB PT AT-V - PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; 720" H. CT VVAINSGQT 324 DRY STORAGE VCT - RCB - GT - GB PT AT-V - PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; ' " H. G- T 1A.AINSGOT 325 GLASS / FLATWARE STOR. VCT - RCB - GT - GB PT AT-V - PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; ' " 14 CTINAMSGOT 326 ROOM SERVICE EPX - EPX - CT - GB PT AT-V - PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; 7'-0" H. CT WAINSCOT 327 ROOM SERVICE ISSUE EPX - EPX - CT - GB PT AT-V - PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; 7'-0" H. CT WAINSCOT 328 ICE EPX - EPX CT - GB PT AT-V - PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; 7'-0" H. CT WAINSCOT 329 JANITOR VCT - RCB - CT - GB PT ES PT 4'-0" HIGH CT WAINSCOT MOP SINK 330 BANQUETSTORAGE VCT - RCB - - GB PT ES PT 331 BEVERAGES EPX - EPX - CT - GB PT AT-V PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; 7'-0" H. CT WAINSCOT 333 WARE WASH EPX - EPX - CT - GB PT AT-V PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; 7!4'H. CT WAINSCOT 334 SCULLERY EPX - EPX - CT - GB PT AT-V PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; 7'-0" H. CT WAINSCOT • 335 PASTRY COOLER EPX - EPX - BY MFR. BY MFR. BY MFR. BY MFR. PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING 336 PASTRY PREPARATION EPX - EPX CT - GB PT AT-V - PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; 7'-0" H. CT WAINSCOT 337 PASTRY ISSUE EPX - EPX CT - GB PT AT-V - PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; 7'•0" H. CT WAINSCOT 338 HOT ISSUE EPX - EPX CT - GB PT AT-V - PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; 7'-0" H. CT WAINSCOT 339 SERVICE BAR EPX - EPX CT - GB PT AT-V - PA114T STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; 7'-0" H. CT WAINSCOT 340 LIQUOR STORAGE EPX - EPX CT - GB PT AT-V - PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; 7'-0" H. CT WAINSCOT 341 BANQUET COOKING EPX - EPX CT GB PT AT-V - PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; 7'-0" H. CT WAINSCOT 342 COOLER EPX - EPX - BY MFR. BY MFR. BY MFR. BY MFR. PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING 343 COLD PREPARATION EPX - EPX CT - GB PT AT-V - PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; 7'-0" H. CT WAINSCOT 344 BEVERAGES EPX - EPX CT - GB PT AT-V - PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; 7'-0" H. CT WAINSCOT 345 OFFICE EPX - EPX CT - GB PT AT-V - PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; 7'-0" H. CT WAINSCOT 346 OFFICE EPX - EPX CT - GB PT AT-V - PAI14T STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; 7'•0" H. CT WAINSCOT 347 HALLWAY EPX - EPX CT - GB PT AT-V - PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; 7'-0" H. CT WAINSCOT 348 STAGING EPX EPX CT - GB PT AT-V - PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; T-0" H. CT WAINSCOT 349 RESTAURANT MANAGER EPX EPX CT - GB PT AT-V - PAINT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING; 7'-0" H. CT WAINSCOT 350 RESTAURANT S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 351 PRIVATE DINING S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 352 SERVICE STATION S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 353 INDUCTION TABLE EPX EPX S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 353A VESTIBULE EPX EPX CT GB PT AT-V SEE INTERIOR DESIGN SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05/1212006 Architectural Finish Schedule V:t020287inish ScheduleX02028 Finish Schedule - Summary Permit.xls 09002 - 7 H I L L G L A Z I E R A R C H I T E C T 5 09002 - Architectural Finish Schedule ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOT/CHAIR RAIL WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS 354 SERVICE STATION S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 355 FOYER S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.Q. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 355A COAT CHECK S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 356 GALLERY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEEINTERIOR DESIGN 357 PUBLIC TELEPHONES S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 358 VESTIBULE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 359 VESTIBULE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 360 WOMEN S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 360A ACCESSIBLE TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 360B TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 360C TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 360D TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 361 VESTIBULE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 362 MEN S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 362A ACCESSIBLE TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 362B TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 363 JANITOR VCT RCB CT GB PT ES PT 4'-0" HIGH CT WAINSCOT MOP SINK 364 VESTIBULE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 365 RAMP S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 366 VESTIBULE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 367 PREFUNCTION S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 368 MEETING ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 369 POCKET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 370 FUNCTION STORAGE VCT RCB GB PT ES PT 371 LINEN VCT RCB GB PT ES PT 372 COAT CHECK S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 373 VESTIBULE VCT RCB GB AT-V 374 POCKET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. GB PT ES PT 375 VESTIBULE VCT RCB GB AT-V 376 GALLERY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 377 GALLERY. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 378 BOARD ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 379 PREFUNCTION S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 380 BANQUET ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 381 PREFUNCTION S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 382 BALLROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 383 POCKET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. GB PT ES PT 384 BEVERAGES 385 VESTIBULE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 386 PUBLIC TELEPHONES S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 367 VESTIBULE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 388 MEN S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 388A ACCESSIBLE TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 388B TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 389 JANITOR VCT RCB CT GB PT ES PT 4'-0". HIGH CT WAINSCOT MOP SINK 390 VESTIBULE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 391 WOMEN S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 391A ACCESSIBLE TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 3916 TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05/12(2006 Architectural Finish Schedule V:1020281Finish Schedule102028 Finish Schedule - Summary Permit.xls 09002 - 8 H I L L G L A Z I E R A R C H I T E C T S 09002 -Architectural Finish Schedule ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOTICHAIR RAIL WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL ' FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS 391C TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 391D TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 391E TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 391F TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 391G TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 392 ELECTRICAL ROOM CONC S / LH GB PT ES PT 393 BANQUETSTORAGE VCT RCB - - - GB PT ES PT 394 AN STORAGE VCT RCB - - - GB PT ES PT 395 A/V STORAGE VCT RCB - GB PT ES PT C-301A CORRIDOR VCT RCB - - - GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS C-301 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-302 HALLWAY VCT - RCB GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS; PROTEGTIVE WAINSCOT C-303 HALLWAY VCT - RCB GB PT' AT-V RUBBING RAILS; C-304 HALLWAY VCT - RCB GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS; PROTECTIVE WAINSCOT C-305 HALLWAY VCT - RCB GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS; oon ,F= VVAniN_&GgT C-306 HALLWAY VCT - RCB GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS; PROTECTIVE WAINSCOT C-311 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-312 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-313 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-301 ELEVATOR LOBBY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-302 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT RCB GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS; E-303A LINEN VCT RCB GB PT ES PT E-303B SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT RCB GB PT ACT RUBBING RAILS; NOT USED E-311 ELEVATOR LOBBY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-312 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT - RCB - GB PT ACT RUBBING RAILS; E-313 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT - RCB - GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS; PROTECTIVE WANSCOT E-314 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT - RCB - - GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS; PROTECTIVE VVAINSGOT G-301 ELECTRICAL VCT RCB GB PT ES PT G-311 MAID'S ROOM VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT G-312 STAFF TOILET CT - - - - CT GB PT G-313 ICE S.I.D. - - - SEE INTERIOR DESIGN FOR MILLWORK G-314 ELECTRICAL ROOM CONC S / LH - - GB PT ES PT 5-301 STAIR "A" CONC S / LH - - - CONC/GB PT ES PT 5-303 STAIR "C" CONC S/LH - - - GB PT ES PT 5-304 STAIR "D" CONC S / LH - GB PT ES PT S-306 STAIR "F" CONC S / LH CONC/GB PT ES PT S-307 STAIR "G" CONC S / LH - GB PT ES PT S-309 STAIR "J" CONC S / LH CONC/GB PT ES PT 5-313 STAIR "N" CONC S / LH CONC/GB PT ES PT S-315 STAIR "Q" CONC S / LH CONC/GB PT ES PT S-318 STAIR "T" CONC S / LH GB PT ES PT S-319 STAIR "U" CONC S / LH GB PT ES PT S-320 STAIR "V' GRAND STAIRS S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN FINISH SCHEDULE - LEVEL-04 ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOT/CHAIR WALL CEILING SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05/1212008 Architectural Finish Schedule V:1020281Finish Schedule102028 Finish Schedule - Summary Permit.xls 09002.9 H I L L G L A Z I E R A R C H I T E C T S 09002 - Architectural Finish Schedule ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOT/CHAIR RAIL WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS I NUMBER I ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS I 401 ENGINEERING VCT - RCB GB PT ES PT 402 LEAD ENGINEER VCT - RCB GB PT ES PT 403 DIRECTOR OF ENGINEERING VCT - RCB GB PT ES PT 404 UPHOLSERY SHOP VCT - RCB GB PT ES PT 405 PAINT SHOP VCT - RCB GB PT ES PT 406 SECURE STORAGE VCT - RCB GB PT ES PT 407 CARPENTRY SHOP VCT - RCB GB PT ES PT 406 UNIFORM ISSUE VCT - RCB - GB PT ES PT 409 ENTRY VCT - RCB - GB PT GB PT 410 JANITOR VCT - RCB - CT GB PT ES PT 4'-0" HIGH CT WAINSCOT MOP SINK 411 VESTIBULE VCT - RCB - GB PT GB PT 412 WOMEN'S STAFF TOILET CT - CT - GB PT 413 SHOWER CT - CT - GB PT 413A SHOWER CT - CT - GB PT 413B SHOWER CT CT - GB PT 413C SHOWER CT CT - GB PT 413D SHOWER CT CT - GB PT 414 WOMEN'S LOCKER ROOM VCT RCB - GB PT GB PT 415 ENTRY VCT RCB - GB PT GB PT 416 LAVATORY CT - CT GB PT 417 MEN'S STAFF TOILET CT - CT GB PT 418 SHOWER CT - CT - GB PT 418A SHOWER CT - CT - GB PT 418B SHOWER CT - CT - GB PT 418C SHOWER CT - CT GB PT 418D SHOWER CT - - CT - GB PT 419A MEN'S LOCKER ROOM VCT - RCB - - - GB PT GB PT 419B MEN'S LOCKER ROOM VCT - RCB - - - GB PT GB PT 420 FIRE COMMAND 1 SECURITY VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT 421 OFFICE VCT RCB GB PT ES PT 422 STORAGE VCT RCB GB PT ES PT 423 TRAINING ROOM C - RB - - - VWC AT-RG 424 CLOSET VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT 425 HUMAN RESOURCE RECEPT. C - RB - - - VWC AT RG - NOT USED 427 OFFICE C - RB - - VWC AT-RG 428 OFFICE C - RB - VWC AT-RG - 429 HUMAN RESOURCE DIR. C - RB VWC AT-RG - 430 OF VCT - RCB GB PT ES PT ANTI-STATIC VCT 431 TELEPHONE / UPS VCT - RCB GB PT ES PT ANTI-STATIC VCT 432 GARAGE ENTRY CONC WRTC CONC ES C-401 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-402 EXIT PASSAGEWAY VCT RCB GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS C-402A EXIT PASSAGEWAY VCT RCB GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS 6.411 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-412 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05/1212006 Architectural Finish Schedule V:1020281Finish Schedule102028 Finish Schedule - Summary Permitxls 09002-10 HILL G L A Z I E R A R C H I T E C T S 09001-Architectural Finish Schedule ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOTICHAIR RAIL WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS C-413 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-414 EXIT PASSAGEWAY VCT RCB GB ES PT E-401 ELEVATOR LOBBY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-402A SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT RCB GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS E-402B SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT RCB GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS E-403 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT RCB GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS E-411 ELEVATOR LOBBY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-412 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT - RCB - GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS E-412A LINEN VCT - RCB - GB PT ES PT E-414 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT - RCB - GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS G-401 MAID'S ROOM VCT - RCB - GB PT ES PT 4'-0" CT WAINSCOT jjjM6P SINK G-402 ELECTRICAL VCT - RCB - GB PT ES PT ANTI-STATIC VCT G-411 MAID'S ROOM VCT - RCB - - GB PT ES PT 4'-0" CT WAINSCOT MOP SINK G-412 STAFF TOILET CT - - - CT GB PT G-413 IDF VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT ANTI-STATIC VCT G•414 ICE S.I.D. - - - SEE INTERIOR DESIGN FOR MILLWORK G-415 IDF VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT ANTI-STATIC VCT G-416 STORAGE VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT G•417 STORAGE VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT M-401 MECHANICAL MEZZANINE CONC ELF ELF - GB PT ES PT M-402A ECOLOGY CONC ELF ELF - GB PT ES PT M-402B MECHANICAL MEZZANINE CONC ELF ELF - - GB PT ES PT ACOUSTIC FLOOR SYSTEM M-403 VESTIBULE VCT RCB - - GB PT ES. PT ANTI-STATIC VCT M-404 AN CONTROL VCT RCB - - GB PT ES PT ANTI-STATIC VCT S-401 STAIR "A" CONC S 1 LH - - - CONC/GB PT ES PT S-403 STAIR "C" CONC S / LH - - - GB PT ES PT S-404A STAIR "D" CONC S 1 LH - - - CONCIGB PT ES PT S-404B STAIR "D" CONC S / LH - - - GB PT ES PT S-407A STAIR "G" CONC S 1 LH - - - GB PT ES PT S-407B STAIR "G" CONC S 1 LH - - - GB PT ES PT S-409 STAIR "J" CONC S I LH - - - CONCIGB PT ES PT S-413 STAIR "N" CONC S I LH - CONC/GB PT ES PT S-419 STAIR "U" CONC S 1 LH - GB PT ES PT 5.420 STAIR "V GRAND STAIRS S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN FINISH SCHEDULE - LEVEL-05 ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOTICHAIR WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS 501 ENTRY FOYER S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 502 SITTING NICHE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 503 SITTING NICHE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 504 GALLERY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 505 GALLERY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 506 GALLERY S.I.D. S.I.D. - S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 507 LOBBY LOUNGE S.I.D. SA- 7 1 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05/1212006 Architectural Finish Schedule V:\020281Finish Schedule\02028 Finish Schedule - Summary Permit.xls 09002-11 H I L L G L A Z I E R A R C H I T E C T S 09002 -Architectural Finish Schedule ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOTICHAIR RAIL WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS 508 LIBRARY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 509 LOBBY BAR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 510 PANTRY EPX EPX CT GB PT AT-V 7'-0" HIGH CT WAINSCOT 511 RESIDENTIAL LOBBY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 512 RESIDENTIAL CONCIERGE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 513 SKI I GOLF BAG STORAGE VCT RCB GB PT ES PT 514 VESTIBULE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 515 RESIDENTIAL MAIL ROOM S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 516 RAMP VCT RCB GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS; 517 RECEIVING C RB - GB PT AT-EG PT 518 PURCHASING C RCB - GB PT AT-EG PT 519 HOLDING ROOM EPX EPX CT - CMUIGB PT ES PT 4'4" HIGH CT WAINSCOT 520 RECYCLING ROOM EPX EPX CT - CMUIGB PT ES PT 4'-0" HIGH CT WAINSCOT 521 COMPACTOR CONC SILH - CMU PT ES PT 522 LOADING DOCK CONC S 1 LH - CMUIGB PT ES PT 523 GALLERY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 524 VESTIBULE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 525 WOMEN S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 525A TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 525B TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 526 JANITOR VCT RCB CT GB PT ES PT 4'4'.HIGH CT WAINSCOT MOP SINK 527 VESTIBULE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 528 MEN S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 528A TOILET S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 529 HOTEL RECEPTION S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 530 FRONT DESK S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 531 CONCIERGE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 532 SAFE DEPOSIT BOX VIEW G S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 533 SAFE DEPOSIT BOX S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 534 VALETIFIRE COMMAND VCT - RCB GB PT ES PT 535 NO USED - 536 HALLWAY VCT - RCB - GB PT ES PT EXTERIOR GRADE FINISHES 537 LUGGAGE HOLDING VCT - RCB - GB PT ES PT 538 VESTIBULE C RB - GB VWC GB PT 539 CONCIERGE OFFICE C RB - GB VWC AT-RG - 540 FRONT OFFICE ADMIN. C RB - GB VWC AT-RG - 540A VESTIBULE C RB - GB VWC AT-RG - 541 FRONT OFFICE MANAGER C RB - GB VWC AT-RG - 542 RESERVATION C RB GB VWC AT-RG - 543 TELEPHONE OPERATOR C RB GB VWC AT-RG - 544 BUSINESS CENTER S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 545 GALLERY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 546 RETAIL .I. T.I. T.I. T.I. T.I. T.I. T.I. T.I. T.I. T.I. T.I. TENANT IMPROVEMENT 546A LOGO SHOP S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. 546B RETAIL STORAGE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. 547 VESTIBULE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-501 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-511 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05/12/2006 Architectural Finish Schedule V:1020281Finish ScheduleX02028 Finish Schedule - Summary Permit.xis 09002-12 HILL G L A Z I E R A R C H t T E C T 5 09002 - Architectural Finish Schedule ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOTICHAIR RAIL WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS C-512 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D, S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-513 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C•514 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-501 ELEVATOR LOBBY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-502 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT RCB GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS; PROTECTIVE WAINSGO-T E-503A SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT RCB GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS; E-503B SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT RCB GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS; E-511 ELEVATOR LOBBY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E•512 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT RCB - GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS; PROTECTIVE WADISGGT E-513 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY S.L.D S.L.D S.L.D S.L.D - - GB PT GB PT EXTERIOR GRADE FINISHES G-501 MAID'S ROOM VCT RCB - - - GB PT ES PT 4'-0" CT WAINSCOT MOP SINK G-502 ELECTRICAL ROOM CONC S / LH - - - GB PT ES PT G-511 MAID'S ROOM VCT RCB - - - GB PT ES PT 4'-0" CT WAINSCOT MOP SINK G•512 MAID'S TOILET CT CT - CT - CT GB PT G-513 ELECTRICAL ROOM CONC S ! LH - - - GB PT ES PT G-514 MAID'S STORAGE VCT - - GB PT ES PT G-515 ICE S.I.D jg E rg - - SEE INTERIOR DESIGN FOR MILLWORK G-516 ELECTRICAL ROOM O NC S ! LH - - - GB PT ES PT G-517 MAID'S STORAGE CT - RCB - GB PT ES PT G-518 STORAGE CT RCB - GB PT ES PT G-519 MAID'S ROOM g CT RCB - GB PT ES PT 4'•0'.' CT WAINSCOT MOP SINK S-501 STAIR "A" ONC S I LH - CONC/CMUIGB PT ES PT S-502 STAIR "B" ONC S / LH - GB PT ES PT S-503 STAIR "C" CONC S / LH CONCIGB PT ES PT S-504A STAIR "D" CONC S/LH GB PT ES PT S-5048 STAIR "D" CONC S / LH - GB PT ES PT S-507 STAIR "G" CONC S I LH GB PT ES PT S-509 STAIR "J" CONC S I LH CONC/GB PT ES PT S•513 STAIR "N" CONC S I LH CONC/GB PT ES PT S-519 STAIR "U" CONC S / LH GB PT ES PT S-520 STAIR "V" GRAND STAIRS S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN FINISH SCHEDULE - LEVEL-06 ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOTICHAIR WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS 611 STORAGE VCT RCB GB PT ES PT 612 HALLWAY VCT - RCB GB PT ES PT 613 HALLWAY VCT - RCB GB PT ES PT 614 RECEPTION C - RB GB VWC AT-RG SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 615 HALLWAY C - RB - GB VWC AT-RG 615A CLOSET C - RB - GB VWC ES PT 616 GENERAL MANAGER C - RB - - GB VWC AT-RG SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 617 MAIUCOPYIBEVERAGES VCT - RB - - GB VWC AT-RG 618 WOMEN CT CT - CT - GB PT GB PT 4'-0" HIGH CT WAINSCOT 619 MEN CT CT - CT GB PT GB PT 4'-0" HIGH CT WAINSCOT 620 RESID. CLUB! RM DIV. MGR C RB - GB VWC AT-RG SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05/12/2006 Architectural Finish Schedule V:1020281Finish Schedule102028 Finish Schedule - Summary Permit.xis 09002-13 1 H ILLGLAZIER A R C H I T E C T S 09002 -Architectural Finish Schedule ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOTICHAIR RAIL WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH FINISH MATERIAL REMARKS 621 DIRECTOR OF SALES C - RB GB VWC AT-RG - 622 DIR. OF CATERICONFISERV. C - RB GB VWC AT-RG - 623 ADMINISTRATION C - RB GB VWC AT-RG - 624 DIRECTOR OF FOODIBEV. C - RB GB VWC AT-RG - 625 BOARD ROOM C. - RB GB VWC AT-RG - SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-601 PASSAGEWAY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-602 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-611 PASSAGEWAY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-612 PASSAGEWAY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-613 PASSAGEWAY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-614 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-615 CORRIDOR VCT RCB GB PT ES PT E-601 ELEVATOR LOBBY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-602 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT RCB GB PT ES PT E-611 ELEVATOR LOBBY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-612 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT - RCB - GB PT ES PT G-601 VESTIBULE : VCT - RCB - - GB PT ES PT G-602 MAID'S ROOM VCT - RCB - - GB PT ES PT 4'-0" HIGH CT WAINSCOT MOP SINK G-603 STAFF TOILET CT - CT - CT - CT GB PT FULL HEIGHT CT G-604 IDF VCT - RCB - GB PT ES PT ANTI-STATIC VCT G-611 VESTIBULE VCT - RCB - GB PT ES PT G-612 MAID'S ROOM VCT - RCB - GB PT ES PT 4'-0" HIGH CT WAINSCOT MOP SINK G-613 STAFF TOILET CT - CT - CT CT GB PT FULL HEIGHT CT G-614 VESTIBULE VCT - RCB - GB PT ES PT G-615 ICE VCT / C - RCB / RB - GB VWC ES PT SEE INTERIOR DESIGN FOR MILLWORK 6-616 IDF VCT - RCB - GB PT ES PT ANTI-STATIC VCT G-617 ELECTRICAL ROOM CONC S / LH GB PT ES PT G-618 ICE VCT! C - RCB I RB - - - GB VWC ES PT SEE INTERIOR DESIGN FOR MILLWORK G-619 IDF VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT ANTI-STATIC VCT G-620 VESTIBULE VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT G-621 STORAGE VCT RCB - - - GB PT ES PT G-622 MAID'S ROOM VCT - RCB - - GB PT ES PT 4'-D" HIGH CT WAINSCOT MOP SINK M-601 MECHANICAL MEZZANINE CONC ELF ELF - - GB PT ES PT ACOUSTIC FLOOR SYSTEM M-611 MECHANICAL MEZZANINE CONC ELF ELF GB PT ES PT ACOUSTIC FLOOR SYSTEM M-612 MECHANICAL MEZZANINE CONC ELF ELF - - - GB PT ES PT S-601 STAIR "A" CONC S J LH - - C0NCIG13 PT ES PT S-602 STAIR "B" CONC S I LH - - GB PT ES PT S-603 STAIR "C" CONC S I LH - - CONCIGB PT ES PT S-604 STAIR "D" CONC S I LH - GB PT ES PT 3-605 STAIR "E" GONG S / LH C0NC/G13 PT ES PT S-607 STAIR "G" CONC S / LH GB PT ES PT S-608 STAIR "H" CONC S I LH - CONC/GB PT ES PT S-609 STAIR "J" CONC S / LH - CONCIGB PT ES PT S-612 STAIR "M" CONC S / LH GB PT ES PT S-613 STAIR "N" CONC S / LH - CONCIGB PT ES PT FINISH SCHEDULE - LEVEL-07 SUMMARY PERMIT SET 0511212006 VA020281Finish Schedule102028 Finish Schedule - Summary Permit.xis Architectural Finish Schedule 09002-14 H I L L GLAZIER A R C H I T E C T 5 09002 -Architectural Finish Schedule ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOT/CHAIR RAIL WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOTICHAIR WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS 701 STORAGE CONC ELF ELF - - - GB PT ES PT ACOUSTIC FLOOR SYSTEM 711 STAFF CASH C RB - - - GB VWC AT-RG 711A STORAGE CONC ELF ELF - - - GB PT ES PT ACOUSTIC FLOOR SYSTEM 712 HEAD CASHIER C - RB - - - GB VWC AT-RG 713 ACCOUNTING ADMINISTR. C - RB - - - GB VWC AT-RG 714 DIRECTOR OF FINANCE C - RB - GB VWC AT-RG 714A STORAGE VCT - RCB - GB VWC ES PT 715 PAYROLL C - RB - GB VWC AT-RG 716 CREDIT MANAGER C - RB - GB VWC AT-RG 717 COMPUTER MGR & ASSIST. VCT RCB GB VWC AT-RG ANTI-STATIC VCT 718 COMPUTER ROOM VCT RCB GB VWC AT-RG ANTI-STATIC VCT 718A STORAGE VCT RCB GB VWC ES PT ANTI-STATIC VCT 7101 RC-213 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 7104 RC-26 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 7105 RC-4C1 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 7106 RC-4B1 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 7107 CONDO #1 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 7111 CONDO #2 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 7112 CONDO #3 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-701 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-711 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-712 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-713 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-714 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-716 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 0-717 PASSAGEWAY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-701 ELEVATOR LOBBY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-702 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT RCB GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS . E-711 ELEVATOR LOBBY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-712 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT - RCB - GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS E-712A TRASH VCT - RCB - GB PT ES PT G-701 MAID'S ROOM VCT - RCB - - GB PT ES PT 4'-0" HIGH CT WAINSCOT MOP SINK G-702 STAFF TOILET CT - CT - CT - CT GB PT FULL HEIGHT CT G-703 ELECTRICAL ROOM VCT - RCB - - GB PT ES PT G-704 VESTIBULE VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT G-705 TRASH VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT G-706 STORAGE VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT G-711 MAID'S ROOM VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT 4'-0" HIGH CT WAINSCOT MOP SINK G-712 STORAGE VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT G-713 ELECTRICAL ROOM VCT - RCB - - GB PT ES PT G-714 ICE VCT J C - RCB / RB - GB VWC ES PT G-715 ICE VCT/C - RCB/RB - GB VWC ES PT G-716 ELECTRICAL ROOM VCT RCB - GB PT ES PT G-717 MAID'S ROOM VCT RCB - GB PT ES PT 4'-0" HIGH CT WAINSCOT MOP SINK S-701 STAIR "A" CONC S / LH CONCIGB PT ES PT S-702 STAIR "B" CONC S t LH GB PT ES PT SUMMARY PERMIT SET 0511212006 Architectural Finish Schedule V:1020281Finish ScheduleX02028 Finish Schedule - Summary Permit.xls 09002-15 HILL G L A Z I E R A R C H I T E C T S 09002 - Architectural Finish Schedule ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOTICHAIR RAIL WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS S-704 STAIR "D" CONC S 1 LH - - GB PT ES PT S-705 STAIR "E" CONC S 1 LH - - - GB PT ES PT S-707 STAIR "G" CONC S / LH - - - GB PT ES PT S-708 STAIR "H" CONC S / LH - - - CONCIGB PT ES PT S-712 STAIR "M" CONC S / LH - - - GB PT ES PT FINISH SCHEDULE - LEVEL-08 ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOT/CHAIR WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS 8101 RC-2B S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 8104 RC-2B S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 8105 RC-4C2 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 8106 RC-4B2 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I,D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 8107 CONDO #4 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 8111 CONDO #5 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 8112 CONDO #6 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 8307 CONDO #7 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-801 PASSAGEWAY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. 2-HR PASSAGEWAY; SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-811 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D, S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 6-812 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-813 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-814 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-801 ELEVATOR LOBBY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-802 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT RCB GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS E-811 ELEVATOR LOBBY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-812 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS E-812A TRASH VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT 6.801 MAID'S ROOM VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT 4'-0" HIGH CT WAINSCOT MOP SINK 6-802 OF VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT G-803 LINEN VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT G-804 VESTIBULE VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT G-805 TRASH VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT G-806 STORAGE VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT G-807A VESTIBULE VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT G-807B STORAGE VCT - RCB - - - GB PT ES PT G-811 MAID'S ROOM VCT - RCB GB PT ES PT 4'-0" HIGH CT WAINSCOT MOP SINK G-812 IDF VCT - RCB - GB PT ES PT G-813 STORAGE VCT - ROB - GB PT ES PT G-814 ICE VCT I C - RCB / RB - GS VWC ES PT G•814A STORAGE VCT - RCB - GB PT ES PT G-815 ICE VCT / C - RCB / RB - GB VWC ES PT G-816 OF VCT - RCB - GB PT ES PT G-617 MAID'S STORAGE VCT - RCB GB PT ES PT S-801 STAIR "A" CONC S / LH CONCIGB PT ES PT S-802 STAIR"B" CONC S/LH GB PT ES PT S-805 STAIR "E" CONC S / LH GB PT ES PT SUMMARY PERMIT SET 0511212006 Architectural Finish Schedule VA020281Finish Schedule102028 Finish Schedule - Summary Permit.xis 09002-16 HILL G L A Z I E R A R C H I T E C T S 09002 -Architectural Finish Schedule ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOTICHAIR RAIL WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS S-807A STAIR "G" CONC S / LH - - GB PT ES PT S-807B STAIR "G" CONC S / LH - - GB PT ES PT S-808 STAIR "H" CONC S / LH - - CONGGB PT ES PT S-812 STAIR "M" CONC S / LH - - GB PT ES PT S-814 STAIR "P" CONC S / LH GB PT ES PT FINISH SCHEDULE - LEVEL-09 ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOTICHAIR WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS 901 MECHANICAL ROOM CONC ELF ELF GB PT ES PT 911 MECHANICAL ROOM CONC ELF ELF GB PT ES PT ACOUSTIC FLOOR SYSTEM 912 TRASH VCT RCB GB PT ES PT 9001 CONDO #8 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 9002 CONDO #9 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 9011 CONDO #10 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 9012 CONDO #11 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 9013 CONDO #12 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-911 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-912 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.Q. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-901 ELEVATOR LOBBY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-902 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT RCB GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS E-902A TRASH VCT RCB GB PT ES PT E-911 ELEVATOR LOBBY S.I.D. S.I.D.. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-912 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT RCB GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS G-911 ELECTRICAL CONC S / LH - GB PT ES PT S-901 STAIR "A" CONC S I LH - CONCIGB PT ES PT S-902 STAIR "B" CONC S 1 LH - GB PT ES PT S-907 STAIR "G" CONC S I LH - GB PT ES PT S-914 STAIR "P" CONC S / LH - GB PT ES PT FINISH SCHEDULE - LEVEL-10 ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOTICHAIR WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS 1001 CONDO #13 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 1002 CONDO #14 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 1011 CONDO #15 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 1012 CONDO #16 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN C-1011 CORRIDOR S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-1001 ELEVATOR LOBBY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN E-1002 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT RCB GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS E-1 002A TRASH VCT RCB GB PT ES PT E-1011 ELEVATOR LOBBY S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05112/2006 Architectural Finish Schedule VA020281Finish Schedule102028 Finish Schedule - Summary Permit.xls 09002-17 H I L, L. G L A Z I E R A R C H I T E C T S 09002 - Architectural Finish Schedule ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOT/CHAIR RAIL WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS E-1012 SERV. ELEVATOR LOBBY VCT RCB - - - GB PT ES PT RUBBING RAILS G-1011 VESTIBULE VCT RCB - - - GB PT ES PT G-1012 TRASH VCT RCB - - - GB PT ES PT G-1013 IDF VCT RCB - - - GB PT ES PT ANTI-STATIC VCT S-1001 STAIR "A" CONC S / LH - - - GB PT ES PT S-1002 STAIR "B" CONC S 1 LH - - - GB PT ES PT S-1003 STAIR "G" CONC S 1 LH - GB PT ES PT S-1014 STAIR "P" CONC S 1 LH - GB PT ES PT FINISH SCHEDULE - GUESTROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOT/CHAIR WALL CEILING ROOM TYPE ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS K1 TYPICAL KING 1 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN K1A TYPICAL KING 1A S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN K1D TYPICAL KING 1D S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN K1 E TYPICAL KING 1E S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN K1 F TYPICAL KING IF S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN K2 TYPICAL KING 2 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN K2A TYPICAL KING 2A S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN K3 TYPICAL KING 3 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN K4 TYPICAL KING 4 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEEIINTERIOR DESIGN K1-RS ROLL-IN SHOWER - KING S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN K1A-HI HEARING IMPAIRED - KING S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN QQ1 TYPICAL QUEEN-QUEEN 1 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN QQ1A TYPICAL QQ1A S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN QQ1B TYPICAL QQIB S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN QQ1-C TYPICAL QQ1 CONNECTING S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN QQ1-HC ACCESS. TUB - QQ S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN QQ1-RS ROLL-IN SHOWER - QQ S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN ES-1 EXECUTIVE SUITE 1 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN ES-1A EXECUTIVE SUITE 1A S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN ES-16 EXECUTIVE SUITE 113 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN ES-2 EXECUTIVE SUITE 2 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN ES-2A EXECUTIVE SUITE 2A S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN ES-3 EXECUTIVE SUITE 3 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN ES-HC ACCESSIBLE EXEC. SUITE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 1K-1 ONE BEDROOM SUITE 1 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 1K-2 ONE BEDROOM SUITE 2 S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 1K-HC ACCESSIBLE 1-13R SUITE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 2KQQ TWO BEDROOM K/QQ S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN 2KK-HC ACCESSIBLE 2-13R SUITE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN PR-HC ACCESSIBLE PRES. SUITE S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. S.I.D. SEE INTERIOR DESIGN FINISH SCHEDULE - EMPLOYEE HOUSING SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05112/2006 Architectural Finish Schedule V:102028XFinish Schedule102028 Finish Schedule - Summary Permlt.xls 09002-18 H I L L G L A Z I E R A R C H I T E C T 5 09002 -Architectural Finish Schedule ROOM FLOOR BASE WAINSCOTICHAIR RAIL WALL CEILING NUMBER ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS FLOOR BASE WAINSCOT/CHAIR WALL CEILING ROOM TYPE ROOM NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS ENTRY C RB GB VWC GB PT KITCHEN/CLOSET CICT RCB/CT GB VWC GB PT BATHROOM CT CT GB GB PT SUMMARY PERMIT SET 05/12/2006 Architectural Finish Schedule VA020281Finish Schedulel02028 Finish Schedule'- Summary Permit.xls 09002-19 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09110 VAIL, COLORADO NON-LOAD BEARING WALL FRAMING SYSTEMS SECTION 09110 - NON-LOAD BEARING WALL FRAMING SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing light-gauge non-bad bearing wall framing systems, including metal studs, wall furring, and backing plates. B. Related Sections: 1. Cold-formed metal framing is specified in Section 05400. 2. Ceiling suspension systems are specified in Section 09120. 3. Acoustical ceiling suspension systems are specified in Section 09130. 4. Shaflwall systems are specified in Section 09264. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of metal support system, including provisions for fixture and equipment anchorage. B. Shop Drawings: Show provision for fixture and equipment anchorage to stud systems different from typical systems or details indicated. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tolerances: Provide metal studs and furring installations that are plumb, true, straight, and rigid. B. Welder's Qualifications: AWS D1.1 and 1.3 as applicable. C. Structural Performance: Engineer and install non-load bearing wall framing systems to withstand design loads within limits and under conditions required. Where stud thickness and spacing is not indicated, provide studs complying with the following deflection criteria: 1. Maximum lateral load of 1/120 of the wall height for gypsum board partitions and 1#240 of wall height for plaster partitions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. American Studco, Inc., Angeles Metal Systems, California Metal Systems, Inc., Design Shapes in Steel, Knorr Steel Framing Systems, Sc afCO Corporation, United Construction Supply, Westem'Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Metal Studs: 1. Material: Mill-certified galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A653, G40 coating, minimum yield strength 33,000-psi. 2. Construction: Formed C-channel section conforming to ASTM C645. 3. Stud Thickness: As indicated or as required for specified deflection criteria, based on stud depth scheduled and partition height indicated. 4. Stud Spacing: As indicated or as required for specified deflection criteria, based on stud depth scheduled and partition height indicated. 0407-06 Progress CD Set NON-LOAD BEARING WALL FRAMING SYSTEMS 09110-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 09110 NON-LOAD BEARING WALL FRAMING SYSTEMS B. Runner Tracks: 1. Material: Mill-certified galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A653, G40 coating, minimum yield strength 33,000-psi. 2. Construction: Formed channel section conforming to ATM C645. 3. Size: Minimum 1-inch flange width; web depth matching studs. 4. Thickness: Same as studs. C. Metal Channels: Mill-certified galvanized steel conforming to ASTM C653, G40 coating, minimum yield sb*ength 33,000-psi. 1. Framing, Furring, and Stiffening: Size. Inches Pounds per 1,000 Lineal Feet 314 Cold rolled 300 1-112 cold rolled 475 2 cold rolled 590 2. Furring Channels: Minimum 26-gauge galvanized steel with knurled faces; hat-shaped or Z-section as required. D. Tie Wire: No. 16-gauge, galvanized, single-strand annealed steel or No.18-gauge, galvanized, double-strand annealed steel. E. Screws: ASTM C1002, Type S, pan head sheet metal screws, minimum 1/24nch length. F. Runner Track Fasteners: Tempered-steel pins with corrosive resistant plating or coating, 91644nch diameter, minimum 1-1/8-inch penetration, ICBO allowable shear value of 225-pounds. G. Backing Plates: As indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of metal support systems. Do not commence the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Coordinate installation of metal support systems with the installers of other related work. Review areas of potential interference and conflicts, and coordinate layout and support provisions for interfacing work. 3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Instal non-bad-bearing steel framing members in accordance with ASTM C754, and as specified. B. Cutting: 1. General: Cut framing components squarely or on angle as required to fit tightly with proper bearing against abutting members. 2. Cutting Studs: If stud web is cut more than 50-percent, or stud flanges are cut, restore stud to original strength by wire-tying, or welding on steel reinforcement C. When studs extend to the underside of structural slabs, secure at top with a slip connection or use a deflection top track to accommodate slab deflection. 04-07M NON-LOAD BEARING WALL FRAMING SYSTEMS Progress CD Sat 09110-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS b RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 09110 NON-LOAD BEARING WALL FRAMING SYSTEMS 3.03 NON-LOAD-BEARING VERTICAL METAL FRAMING A. Runner Tracks: Align at floor and ceiling with partition layouts. Secure to structure with specified fasteners located 24nches from each end and spaced not to exceed 244nches on center. 1. Coordinate installation of continuous isolation strips or acoustical sealant at acoustical partitions with installation of top and bottom runner tracks. B. Installation of Metal Studs: 1. Install studs and screw-fasten framing connections using a minimum of 2 screws for each connection. 2. At partition comers and intersections, provide a minimum of 3 studs. 3. Splice studs where required, by nesting with a minimum lap of 84nches; fasten laps with 2 screws through each flange. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, frame door openings with double 20-gauge vertical studs securely attached to each jamb of door frame. a. At head, install runner track; cut flanges at ends, bend web 90-degrees and screw attach to jamb studs. b. Install jack studs over door opening, spaced same as full-height studs. C. Attach jamb studs to metal door frames with metal clips, each with 2 screws into jamb stud. 5. Frame openings other than door openings in the same manner as for doors, and install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 6. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints with a separate stud; do not bridge the joint with framing components. 7. Install continuous horizontal stiffeners in partitions where indicated or where recommended by stud manufacturer for partition height, stud gauge, stud spacing, number of layers of gypsum board used, and anticipated stud deflection. 8. Stiffen openings with horizontal channels. Provide one channel continuous across head of openings extending to third stud beyond on each side. Provide one channel at each frame anchor extending tD third stud beyond. Wire-tie or weld horizontal channels to each stud. C. Chase-Wall Framing: 1. Align two parallel rows of floor and ceiling runners according to partition layout 2. Position steel studs vertically in runners with flanges in same direction, with studs on opposite sides of chase directly across from each other. Anchor to runners in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, 3. Cross brace chase studs with 124nch gypsum wallboard gussets or minimum 2-1/24nch steel studs. Attach web-to-web with screws. If chase wall studs are not opposite, brace with horizontal runners and braces. D. Wall Furring, Direct Attachment Attach hat-shaped metal furring channels either vertically or horizontally. For furring positioned horizontally, attach a furring member not more than 44n6hes from both the floor and ceiling. Secure with fasteners placed on alternate channel flanges, spaced on 244nch centers. 3.04 BACKING PLATES A. Install as indicated and specified for support of watt-hung cabinets, toilet partitions and accessories, and other items to be mounted on vertical surfaces. 04..07-06 NON-LOAD BEARING WALL FRAMING SYSTEMS Progress CD W 09110-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL. COLORADO 3.05 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. B. C. D. E. Variation from Plumb: Maximum 1/8-inch in 10-feet Variation from Level: Maximum 1184nch in 10-feet Variation from True Plane: Maximum 1184nch in 10-feet Variation from True Position: Maximum 1/4-inch. Variation of Member from Plane: Maximum 1/84nch. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 Progress CD Sat SECTION 09110 NON-LOAD BEARING WALL FRAMING SYSTEMS N014-LOAD BEARING WALL FRAMING SYSTEMS 09110-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09120 VAIL, COLORADO CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS SECTION 09120 - CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing ceiling suspension systems, including suspended system for gypsum wallboard ceilings. B. Related Sections: 1. Suspension system for acoustical ceilings is specified in Section 09130. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of suspension system, including provisions for fixture and equipment anchorage. 1. Include ICBO test reports showing proposed hanger and bracing wire fasteners are capable of supporting specified loads. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ceiling-support system shall limit deflection of finished ceilings to less than L/360. B. Ceiling systems shall be designed and constructed in accordance with IBC. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in the original unopened packages, containers, or bundles with manufacturer's label intact and legible. B. Remove products delivered in broken, damaged, rusted, or unlabeled condition from Project site immediately. C. Protect products from rusting and other sources of damage. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Metal Channels: ASTM C645, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A525, G60 coating designation. 1. Framing, Furring, and Stiffening: Size. Inches Pounds per 1.000 lineal Feet 3/4 cold roiled 300 1-1/2 cold rolled 475 2 cold rolled 590 2. Furring Channels: Minimum 26-gauge galvanized steel with knurled faces; hat-shaped or Z-section as required. B. Hanger Wire: Galvanized, soft, mild annealed steel; 8-gauge, unless otherwise indicated. C. Diagonal Bracing Wire: Galvanized, soft, mild annealed steel; 12-gauge, unless otherwise indicated. D. Tie Wire: No. 16-gauge, galvanized, single-strand annealed steel or No. 18-gauge, galvanized, double-strand annealed steel. 04.07-06 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS Progress CD Set 09120-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09120 VAIL, COLORADO CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS E. Screws: General: ASTM C646, corrosion resistant, for attachment to metal framing 25-gauge and lighter; ASTM C954 for attachment to metal framing 20-gauge and heavier. 2. Thread and head designs and lengths as recommended by manufacturer for uses and materials involved. F. Hanger and Bracing Wire Fasteners: Hanger Wires: Connection device capable of carving not less than 100-pounds. Bracing Wires: Connection device capable of carrying not less than 200-pounds or the actual design load, whichever is greater, with a safety factor of 2 without yielding. G. Furring Channel Clips: Fabricated from galvanized wire, for attaching furring channels to cold-rolled channels. H. Uplift Stiffeners: 25-gauge channel studs, 1-1/2-inches, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SUSPENDED CEILING SUSPENSION FRAMING A. General: Suspended ceiling suspension framing system shall be constructed in accordance with IBC. Specified member sizes and spacing are intended as guidelines only. Any combination of hanger and runner sizes and spacing complying with IBC may be used. B. Space 8-gauge hanger wires 48-inches on center along carrying channels and within 64nches of ends of carrying channels. C. Install 1-1/2-inch cold rolled carrying channels 36-inches on center and within 6=Inches of walls. At splices, interlock flanges, overlap ends 12-inches, and wire-tie with double loops of No. 16-gauge wire. D. Install 314-inch cold rolled channels at right angles to carrying channels, spaced 244nches on center and within 6-inches of walls. Provide one-inch clearance between furring channels and abutting walls and partitions. Attach to carrying channels by saddle-tying around carrying channels wjth one strand of No. 16 or two strands of No. 18- gauge tie wire. At splices, nest furring channels with a minimum 84ch overlap and wire-tie each end with double loops of No. 16-gauge wire. E. Install 4-way 45-degree diagonal bracing wires at 1Z4r x 12'-0' within 6-inches of walls. Diagonal bracingwires shall be located at the intersection of main runner and cross-furring member. Provide connection between diagonal wires and main runner so as to prevent slipping for a 200-pound approximate seismic load. F. Install hanger and bracing wire anchors so the direction of the wire aligns as closely as possible with the direction of the forces acting on the wire. G. Separate ceiling hanging and bracing wires at least 64ndm from unbraced ducts, pipes, and conduit. H. Fasten hanger wires with not less than 3 tight turns; fasten bracing wires with not less than 4 tight turns. Make all tight turns within a distance of 1-1/2-inches. 1. Install uplift stiffener for each 144-square feet of ceiling, consisting of a- vertical metal stud occurring at the junction of the carrier and furring channel. Wire tie to carrier or screw to channel and secure to overhead structure. J. At control joints provide discontinuous lapin main runners occurring over joints. Do not bridge joints with cross furring where joints run perpendicular to furring. Where joints run parallel to furring, provide furring to support each side of joint 044)7-06 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS Progress CD Set 09120-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09120 VAIL, COLORADO CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS K Provide recesses and openings where indicated for lighting fixtures, registers, access panels, and other items to be installed in ceilings; provide additional furring channels where required by opening. L. Recessed or drop-in light fixtures shall be supported directly by main runners or by supplemental framing supported by main runners. M. Surface mounted fixtures shall be attached to a main runner with a positive damping device made of material with a minimum of 14-gauge. Rotational spring catches are not acceptable. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS Progirm CD Set 09520.3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONSHOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09130 VAIL, COLORADO ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS SECTION 09130 - ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for the materials and installation of acoustical suspension systems for acoustical panels. B. Work under this Section includes fumishing and installing safety hanger wires for mechanical and electrical equipment to extent specified. Connecting safety wires to such equipment is not included. C. Related Sections: 1. Suspension system for gypsum board ceilings is specified in Section 09120. 2. Acoustical ceiling panels are specified in Section 09511. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate ceiling-system layouts and general and atypical conditions and details. 2. Include details of bracing, special features and joints, perimeters, relationship to adjacent construction, and anchorage and connections to structures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive and technical data and illustrations, marked to identify product materials, types, and variations. 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 . A. Installer's Qualifications: Regularly providing installation of assemblies of the types required for not less than 5-years prior to work under this Contract. B. Suspension systems shall be designed, fabricated, and installed to meet requirements ofASTM C635 and ASTM C636. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EXPOSED NON-FIRE RATED GRID SYSTEM AND CONCEALED GRID SYSTEM FOR WOOD VENEER PANELS (NOTED ON FINISH SCHEDULE AS 'AT-EG, 'AT-V', 'AT-C, AND 'AT-W-) A. Approved Manufacturers: USG Interiors, Inc. "Donn DX System" or approved equal. B. Main Runners: 15/164nch flange, 1-1/2-inch high web, bulb section, 0.020-inch thick, double web. C. Cross Runners: 15/16-inch tlang% 1-1/2-inch high web, bulb section, 0.0154nch thick, double web. D. Wall Angle, Reveals, and Miscellaneous Trim: Roll-formed from electn>galvan¢ed steel strip to profiles indicated. E. Finish: Factory-applied white low gloss enamel. F. Structural Classification: Heavy duty. 2.02 EXPOSED NARROW FACE GRID SYSTEM (NOTED ON FINISH SCHEDULE AT "AT-RG") A. Approved Manufacturers: USG Interiors, Inc. "Donn Centricitee System DXT' or approved equal. B. Main and Cross Runners: 9/16-inch flange, 1-1/2-inch high web. 04.07.06 ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS Progress CD Set 09130-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONSHOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09130 VAIL, COLORADO ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS C. Wall Angle, Reveals, and Miscellaneous Trim: Roll-formed from electro-galvanized steel strip to profiles 1J indicated. D. Finish: Factory-applied white low gloss enamel. E. Structural Classification: Heavy duty. 2.03 CONCEALED GRID SYSTEM (NOTED ON FINISH SCHEDULE AT "AT CG'S A. Approved Manufacturers: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. "Concealed Z" or approved equal. B. Main and Cross Runners: 314-inch flange, 1-1/2-inch high web. C. Wall Angle, Reveals, and Miscellaneous Trim: Roll-formed from electro-galvanized steel strip to profiles indicated. D. Finish: Galvanized steel, unpainted. 2.04 SUSPENSION MATERIALS AND FASTENINGS A. Wire: 1. General: ASTM A641, galvanized steel, regular coating, soft temper, factory pre-straightened units. 2. Hanger and Safety Wires: 12-gauge. B. Wire Connections to Overhead Structures: 1. Hanger Wires: Connection device capable of carrying not less than 100-pounds. 2. Bracing Wires: Connection device capable of carrying not less than 200-pounds or the actual design bad, whichever is greater, with a safety factor of 2 without yielding. C. Fastenings for Accessories: 1. Bolts or screws of adequate size, in types appropriate for conditions and materials involved, made of corrosion-resistant materials or coated as approved. 2. Concealed only, unless otherwise indicated or approved. D. Uplift Stiffeners:1/24nch EMT conduit, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Installations shall be in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and reviewed shop drawings. B. Anchor hanger and bracing wire anchors so that the direction of the wire aligns as closely as possible with the direction of the forces acting on the wire. C. Provide 12-gauge hanger wires at the ends of all main and cross runners within 84nches from the support or within 1/4 of the length of the end tee, whichever is least, for the perimeter of the ceiling area. D. Provide trapeze or other supplementary support members at obstructions to main hanger spacing. Provide additional hangers, struts or braces as required at all ceding breaks, soffits or discontinuous areas. Hanger wires more than 1 in 6 out of plumb shall have counter-sloping wires. E. Ceiling grid members shad be attached to not more than 2 adjacent wads. Ceiling grid members shad be at least 1/2-inch free of other walls. 0407-06 ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS Progress CD Set 09130-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONSHOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09130 VAIL, COLORADO ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS At the perimeter of the ceiling area where main or cross runners are not connected to the adjacent wall, provide interconnection between the runners at the free end to prevent lateral spreading. G. Provide sets of four 12-gauge splayed bracing wires oriented 90 degrees from each other at the following spaces. 1. Place sets of bracing wires at a spacing not more than 12-feet by 12-feet on center. 2. Provide tracing wires at locations not more than 112 the specified spacing from each perimeter wall and at the edge of vertical ceiling offsets. 3. The slope of these wires shall not exceed 45-degrees from the plane of the ceiling and shag be taut without causing the ceiling to lift. Splices in bracing wires are not permitted. H. Fasten hanger wines with not less than 3 fight turns; fasten bracing wires with 4 tight turns. Make tight turns within a distance of 1-112-inches. Support of Light Fixtures and Air Terminals: Ceiling suspension systems that support light fixtures, air-ventilation grilles or partitions shall have a classification of heavy-duty. 2. Recessed or drop-in light fixtures and grilles shall be supported directly from the fixture housing to the structure above with a minimum of two 12-gauge wires located at diagonally opposite comers. Fixture support wires may be slightly loose to allow the fixture to seat in the grid system. 3. Fixture shall not be supported from main runners or cross runners if the weight of the fixtures causes the total dead load to exceed the deflection capability of the ceiling suspension system. J. Installation Tolerances: 1. Bottom surface plane of each assembly shall be within plus or minus 118-Inch of ceiling-height level required. 2. Bottom surface plane of each assembly shall be level and true to plane within 118-inch in 12-feet. 3.02 PERIMETER TRIM A. Provide in longest lengths available and combinations of lengths to minimize number of joints required. B. Do not use pieces shorter than 484nches. C. Miter joints at comers. D. Instal to neatly close with adjoining vertical surfaces. 3.03 COMPLETION A Adjust hangers as required. Addition of kinks or bends in hanger are not acceptable; take up in ties only. B. When complete, grid members of each assembly shall be mutually paratiellsquare, accurately aligned, with joints neatly formed and closely fitted and aligned flush; each assembly shat be securely anchored and braced to structure to prevent movement. C. Exposed surfaces of grids shall be dean and free from scratches, dents, tool marks, stains, discoloration, fingerprints, and other defects and damage. END OF SECTION 0407-06 ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS Progress CD Set 09130-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL. COLORADO SECTION 09207 METAL LATH AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 09207 - METAL LATH AND ACCESSORIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for famishing and installing metal lath and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Sheathing paper is specified in Section 07262. 2. Portland cement plaster is specified in Section 09220. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with the applicable requirements of IBC. B. Industry Association Recommendations: Conform to recommendations of ANSIMILSFA A42.3, except where those recommendations conflict with specified requirements. 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products and materials in original unopened packages, containers, or bundles with manufacturers label intact and legible. B. Remove items delivered in broken, damaged, rusted, or unlabeled condition from Project site immediately. C. Protect metal lath and accessories from moisture and other sources of damage. D. Store metallic materials and accessories indoors, off the floor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LATH A. Metal Lath: Steel, coated with rust-inhibifive paint after cutting, or cut from zinc-coated steel sheets. 1. Flat Diamond Mesh: 3.4-pounds per square yard. Use over open framing. 2. Self-Furring Diamond Mesh: 3.4-pounds per square yard self-furring diamond mesh with evenly spaced indentations to hold lath approximately Y*4nch away from solid surfaces. Use over sold backing. 3. 318-Inch Rib Lath: 3.4-pounds per square yard, fabricated in herringbone mesh pattem with 318-inch deep ribs. Use at suspended soffits. 2.02 FASTENERS A. Screws: 1. General: ASTM C646, corrosion resistant, for attachment to metal framing 25-gauge and lighter; ASTM C954 for attachment to metal framing 20-gauge and heavier. 2. Thread and head designs and lengths as recommended by manufacturer for uses and materials involved. 0407.06 METAL LATH AND ACCESSORIES Progress CD Set 09207-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 09207 METAL LATH AND ACCESSORIES 2.03 METAL ACCESSORIES A. General: Minimum 26-gauge galvanized steel or zinc alloy, perforated or expanded flanges as manufactured by USG, Western Metal Lath, Keene or approved equal. 1. Comer Beads: Small-nose type. 2. Casing Beads: No. 66 square edge. 3. Comer Reinforcement: Comerite, minimum 1.75-pounds per square yard expanded metal lath with minimum 24nch legs. 4. Strip Reinforcement For reinforcing joints of dissimilar materials and diagonal reinforcement at opening comers, minimum 1.75-pounds per square yard expanded metal lath. 5. Sill Screed: Manufacturer's standard with weep holes. 6. Control Joints: Keene No. 40 unless special shapes are detailed. 7. Extruded Aluminum Accessories: Fry Reglet or approved equal, reveals, vents, and trim where indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF METAL LATH A. Exterior Surfaces: Comply with IBC, ANSIIMLSFA A42.3 and as specified. 1. General: Install metal lath over sheathing and building paper as indicated. 2. Attach to metal framing or solid backing with approved fasteners spaced 6-inches apart Use wire ties or screws at metal framing and powder drivers wide-shouldered forced entry fasteners at solid backing. 3. Where solid backing is not provided, apply with long dimension of sheets perpendicular to supports. 4. Lap sides not less than 112-inch and ends not less than 14nch. Lap wire fabric not less than one mesh at sides and ends or 14nch, whichever is greater. Lap nb lath at sides by nesting outside ribs. 5. Where solid backing is not provided, securely be ends of lapped sheets not occurring over supports with minimum 18-gauge tie wire. 6. Metal lath shall be continuous in comers. 7. Insert lath as far as possible into reentrant space of metal frames, and notch to pass around jamb anchors. 8. Where no external corner reinforcement is used, lath shall be furred out and carried around comers at least one support on frame construction. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF METAL ACCESSORIES A. General: 1. Fasten in place as required to prevent dislodging or misalignment by subsequent operations. 2. Fasten at both ends and at a maximum of 12-inches on center along sides. 3. Bring grounding edge of accessories to true lines, plumb, level, and straight 4. Install accessories to provide required depth of plaster and to bring plaster surface to required plane. 5. Connect lengths of accessories as recommended by the manufacturer to assure a continuous line. 040746 METAL LATH AND ACCESSORIES Progress CD Set 09207-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09207 VAIL, COLORADO METAL LATH AND ACCESSORIES 6. Install continuous comer reinforcement for full length of external comers. 7. Instal casing beads to provide a minimum 1/84nch clearance between structural units and temunation pants of surfaces to receive plaster finish. B. Beads: 1. Use single length of metal beads wherever length of run does not exceed longest standard stxk length available; miter or cope comers. 2. Set beads level, plumb, and true to line. Shim as required and align joints with concealed splices or tie plates. 3. Provide casing beads at the following locations: a. Where plaster abuts dissimilar construction. b. At perimeter of openings where edges of plaster will not be concealed by other work. END OF SECTION 0407-06 METAL LATH AND ACCESSORIES Progress CD Set 09207- 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL COLORADO SECTION 09220 • PORTLAND-CEMENT PLASTER PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION SECTION 09220 PORTLAND-CEMENT PLASTER A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing the following type(s) of portland-cement plaster. 1. Two-coat application with synthetic finish coat over metal lath. B. Relal 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.02 SUBMITTALS ed Sections: Flashing and sheet metal is specified in Section 07620. Joint sealants are specified in Section 07920. Metal lath and accessories are specified in Section 09207. Synthetic plaster finish coat is specified in Section 09890. A. Product Data: Manufacturer's written recommendations, proportion mixes, and installation instructions for each product, including data showing compliance with specified requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Code Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of IBC. B. Allowable Tolerances of Finished Surface: Maximum deviation from true plane shall not exceed %-inch as measured from the fine of a 5-16ot straightedge placed at any location on the surface. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver manufactured materials in original unopened packages or containers with manufacturer's label intact and legible. B. Keep cement and lime dry, stored off the ground, under cover, and away from damp surfaces. C. Remove wet and deteriorated materials from Project site. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Provide sufficient heat and ventilation at enclosed areas where plastering is being performed to allow cement plaster loo properly cure. 2. Take precautionary measures necessary to ensure that excessive temperature changes do not occur. 3. Cold Weather Requirements: Do not apply cement plaster unless minimum ambient temperature of 50-degrees F. has been and continues to be maintained for a minimum of 48-hours prior tD appicaton and until plaster is cured. 4. Hot Weather Requirements: Protect cement plaster from uneven and excessive evaporation during hot, dry weather. 04.07-06 PORTLANDCENENT PLASTER Progress CD Set 09M-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09220 VAIL, COLORADO PORTLAND-CEMENT PLASTER B. Protection: 1. Cover building openings in areas adjacent to plastering work with plastic film. 2. Protect finished surfaces installed prior to plastering by covering with a suitable non-staining material. Cover metal frames with plastic film. 3. Maintain protection in place until completion of plastering work. 1.06 MOCKUP A. Plaster Mods-Up: Prior to plastering work, fabricate panels for each type of finish and application required to demonstrate aesthetic effects of application and qualities of materials and application. 1. Locate mock-ups on site where directed by the Architect 2. Erect a 8-foot x 8-foot mock-up using materials and methods to be incorporated in the work. 3. Demonstrate range of aesthetic effects, including synthetic plaster finish coat color and texture, and workmanship to be expected in the completed work. 4. Mock-up shall incorporate a window, flashings, and joint sealants to be used in the completed work. 5. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard for judging completed plaster work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BASE COAT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement ASTM C150, Type I or Type II. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C206, Type S, certified not less than 99-percent hydrated. C. Aggregates: ASTM C897. 1. Gradation, Base (Scratch and Brown) Coats: Percent Retained by U.S. Standard Weight (+2%) Sieve Minimum Maximum No. 8 (2.36 mm) 0 10 No. 16 (1.18mm) 10 40 No. 30 (600 um) 30 65 No. 50 (300 um) 70 90 No. 100 (150 um) 95 100 D. Fiber Reinforcing: 1/2-inch alkaline-resistant dropped-glass fibers or alkaline-resistant polypropylene fibers. Detergent admixtures or day to aid in pumping plaster will not be permitted. E. Water. Clean, potable, and free from substances harmful to plaster. 2.02 FINISH COAT MATERIALS A Synthetic plaster finish coat specified in Section 09890. 04-07-06 PORTLANDCEMENT PLASTER Progress CD Set 09220-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09220 VAIL, COLORADO PORTLAND-CEMENT PLASTER 2.03 CEMENT PLASTER A. Mixing: 1. General: a. Accurately proportion materials for each plaster batch with measuring devices of known volume. b. Size batches for complete use within maximum of one-hour after mbdng. C. Retemper plaster stiffened from evaporation, but do not use or rtemper partially hydrated cement plaster. d. Do not use caked or lumping materials. e. Mix factory-prepared plaster in accordance with the manufacturers' written instructions. f. Withhold 10-percent of mixing water until mixing is almost complete, then add as needed to produce necessary consistency. 2. Mechanical Mixing: a. Clean mixer of set or hardened materials before loading for new batch. b. Maintain mixer in continuous operation while adding materials. C. Conform to mixing sequence and time recommended by manufacturer of plaster materials. 3. Hand Mixing: Do not hand-mix. B. Mix Proportions by Volume: As specified in IBC. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces to be plastered are free of dust, loose particles, oil, and other foreign matter which would affect bond of plaster coats. B. Examine construction, grounds, and accessories to ensure that finished plaster surfaces will be true to fine, level, and plumb, without requiring additional thickness of plaster. C. Do not commence installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 APPLICATION A Number of Coats: 1. Provide two-coat application with synthetic finish coat over metal lath in accordance with ASTM C926. B. Two-Coat Application with Synthetic Finish Coat 1. Apply plaster by hand or machine spray. If machine applied, use only experienced machine applicabr foreman and nozzleman. Slump for machine applied plaster shall be between 2-112- to flinches at mixer and 2- to 3-112-inches at nozzle. 2. Interrupt plaster coats only at junctions of plaster planes, at openings, or at control joints. 04-07-06 Progress CD Set k f PORTLANDCEMEW PLASTER 09220-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL. COLORADO SECTION 09220 PORTLAND-CEMENT PLASTER 3. Apply scratch coat with sufficient material and pressure to form full keys through and to embed metal base. When firm, score in one direction. 4. Apply brown coat with rough undulations that will, after application of finish coat, produce the required rough effect matching approved mock-up. 5 Apply finish coat as specified in Section 09890. 6. Nominal Plaster Thickness Measured from Face of Lath, in accordance with ASTM C929, Table 4: a. Vertical Surfaces: 1) Scratch Coat: 3/8-inch, minimum. 2) Brown Coat 3/8-inch. 3) Finish Coat As specified in Section 09890. b. Horizontal Surfaces: 1) Scratch Coat: '/,-inch. 2) Brown Coat %-inch. 3) Finish Coat As specified in Section 09890. C. Curing: 1. Maintain moist conditions by fine fog spraying. 2. Cure scratch coat for a minimum of 48-hours, and maintain a minimum of 48-hours between application of scratch coat and brown coat 3. Cure brown coat for a minimum of 48-hours, and maintain a minimum of 7-days between the application of the brown coat and finish coat 3.03 COMPLETION A. Patching: 1. Upon completion of application, point up plaster around trim and other locations where plaster meets dissimilar materials. 2. Cut out and patch defective or damaged plaster. 3. Match patching of defective or damaged plaster to existing work in form and texture. B. Cleaning: 1. Remove piaster and protective materials from control and expansion joints, perimeter beads, and adjacent surfaces. 2. Remove stains that would adversely affect subsequent finishes on plaster. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 PORTLANDCEMENT PLASTER Progress CD Set 09220-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09250 VAIL, COLORADO GYPSUM BOARD SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing gypsum (ward and associated accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Thermal insulation is specified in Section 07210. 2. Metal stud framing is specified in Section 09110. 3. Ceiling suspension system is specified in Section 09120. 4. Shaft wall assemblies are specified in Section 09264. 5. Acoustical insulation and sealant is specified in Section 09820. 6. Painting is specified in Section 09900. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of gypsum wallboard and accessory required. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Gypsum wallboard, including accessories and fasteners, shall be the products of the same manufacturer. B. Gypsum wallboard work shall comply with ASTM C840, and IBC unless otherwise indicated or specified. C. Installation and finishing of gypsum wallboard shall comply with GA-216. D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where gypsum wallboard systems with fire-resistance ratings are indicated, provide materials and installations identical with those of applicable assemblies tested in accordance with ASTM Ell 19 by fire testing laboratories acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire-resistance-rated assemblies identical to those indicated by reference to GA File No's. in GA-600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or to design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in listing of other testing and agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Gypsum wallboard surfaces shall have no measurable variation in any 2-foot direction and a maximum variation of 1/8-inch in 10-feet when a straightedge is laid on the surface in any direction. Specified tolerances apply to both plumbness of walls and levelness of ceilings. 2. Shim work as required to comply with specified tolerances. 3. Do not exceed 1/16-inch offset between planes of abutting sheets at edges or ends. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: I 1. Deliver materials to the Project site in original package containers or bundles with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. 2. Deliver fire-rated materials bearing the testing agency's label and classification identification. 05-12-06 GYPSUM BOARD Summary Permit Set 09250-1 fi 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09250 VAIL, COLORADO GYPSUM BOARD B. Storage: 1. Store materials indoors in a dry area, under cover, and stacked flat off the floor. 2. Stack wallboard so that long lengths are not over short lengths. C. Handle wallboard to avoid damaging face and edges of sheets. D. Protect metal corner beads and trim from being bent or damaged. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Establish and maintain environmental conditions for application and finishing gypsum board to complywith ASTM C840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. B. Minimum Room Temperatures: For non-adhesive attachmentof gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40-deg. F. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50-deg. F. for 48- hours prior to application and continuously thereafter until drying is complete. C. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent materials from drying too rapidly. D. Provide for continuous ventilation during installation, using as close to 100-percent outside air as possible. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Georgia-Pacific Corp., Gold Bond Building Products, Div., National Gypsum, United States Gypsum or approved equal. 2.02 GYPSUM BOARD A. Fire-Rated Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C36, Type X, 5/8-inch thick, with tapered and wrapped long edges. B. Regular Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C36, Regular Type, 5/8-inch thick with tapered and wrapped long edges. C. Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C630, Type X, 5/8-inch thick, with tapered and wrapped long edges. Provide for exposed and concealed locations at walls of toilet rooms, janitor rooms, kitchens, and other wet spaces; do not use on ceilings. 2.03 WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES A. Screws: ASTM C954 or ASTM C1002. 1. Use Type S screws for gypsum board attachment to light steel framing. 2. Use Type S-12 screws for gypsum board attachment to 20-gauge and heavier steel framing. 3. Use Type W screws for gypsum board attachment tO wood framing. 4. Use Type G screws for gypsum board attachment to gypsum board. B. Metal Trim: 1. Comer Bead: Fine-mesh expanded-steel wing type, zinc coated in conformance with ASTM A643, G40 coating designation. 2. Control Joint: Steel, perforated-flange wing type, with single bead, zinc coated in conformance with ASTM A643, G40 coating designation. 05.12-06 GYPSUM BOARD Summary Permit Set 09250 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09250 VAIL, COLORADO GYPSUM BOARD 3. Edge Trim: Fine-mesh expanded-steel flange, zinc coated in conformance with ASTM A643, G40 coating designation. C. Joint-Treatment Materials: ASTM C475. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape. 2. Joint Compound: Ready mixed, all-purpose; one grade for bedding tapes and filling depressions, one for second and third coats. 3. Water-Resistant Joint Compound: Use special joint compound to treat joints and cut edges of mois- ture-resistant gypsum wallboard. D. Acoustical Sheet Sealant Pad: Harry A. Lowry & Associates, 3M or approved equal. E. Resilient Channels: U.S. Gypsum RC-1 or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of gypsum wallboard and accessories. Check framing for accurate spacing, alignment, plumbness, and levelness. Verify that both new and existing framing members will result in gypsum wallboard surfaces complying with specified tolerances. 2. Verify spacing of installed framing does not exceed maximum allowable for thickness of wallboard to be used. 3. Verify door frames are set for thickness of wallboard to be used. 4. Repair protrusions of framing, twisted framing members, or unaligned members before installation of wallboard commences. B. Do not commence the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Resilient Framing: 1. Partitions: Apply resilient channels at right angles to framing. Position bottom channel with attachment flange either up or down; position other channels with attachment flanges down. Attach with 1-1144ich screws. Locate resilient channels 2-inches from floor, within 6-inches of ceiling, and not more than 24- inches on center. 2. Ceilings: Apply resilient channels at right angles to framing. Attach with 1-114-inch screws driven through channel attachment flange. For fire-rated, double-layer assembly, apply channels over base layer and attach with 1-718-inch screws driven through channel flange and base layer into joist Fasten channels to joists at each intersection. B. Apply materials in conformance with ASTM C840, the manufacturer's instructions, and as indicated. C. When gypsum board is to be applied to both walls and ceilings, apply to ceilings first. D. For partitions, apply sheets with long dimension perpendicular to framing members with abutting ends over supports. Where ceiling heights exceed 8'-1" and where required by fire resistive ratings, apply sheets with long dimension parallel to framing members. For ceilings, apply sheets with long dimension either perpendicular or parallel to framing members to result in fewest joints. E. Use sheets of maximum lengths to minimize end joints. F. Neatly fit and stagger end joints. 05-12-06 GYPSUM BOARD Summary Permit Set 09250 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09250 VAIL, COLORADO GYPSUM BOARD G. Locate joints on different studs at opposite sides of partition. H. Cut and fit neatly around outlets and switches. Back-to-back wall penetrations shall be at least two stud spaces apart for acoustic insulation. 1. Double-Layer Application: 1. Apply base layer with long dimension parallel to and centered on framing; apply face layer perpen- dicular to framing. Apply face layer parallel to framing where required by fire-resistive ratings. 2. Stagger sheets of each layer so joints of each layer are 16-inches apart. J. Apply gypsum wallboard to curved framing by dampening paper face or scoring approximately one-inch on center. Moisten face and back paper and allow water to soak into core where bending radii require. K Isolation of Wallboard from Other Construction: 1. Provide perimeter relief where wallboard abuts structural decks, ceilings, vertical structural elements, or window sections. 2. Finish wallboard edge with metal casing bead. 3. Seal space between casing bead and structure with continuous sealant bead. 4. Seal around electrical boxes and conduit and pipe penetrations. 5. Seal at base of wallboard sheets. L. Acoustic Control Requirements for Sound Walls: 1. Leave a 1I8- to 114-inch space between gypsum wallboard and adjacent construction to provide a space for acoustical sealant. 2. Seal airtight with acoustical sealant material specified in Section 09820. 3. Seal penetrations through walls, or cuts in one face of walls, with a full bead of sealant at perimeter; this includes provisions for electrical outlet and switch boxes, pipes, ducts, and similar items. 4. Seal electrical boxes at the back with specified sheet sealant pad. Where wires enter the boxes, seal the openings airtight around the wires and knockout openings. M. Installation of Fasteners: 1. Do not locate fasteners less than 3!8-inch from edges or ends of sheets. Do not locate fasteners less than one-inch from edges or ends in horizontal applications. 2. Fire-Rated Partitions: Install fasteners in accordance with IBC. 3. Non-Fire-Rated Partitions: Install fasteners in accordance with IBC. 4. Fire-Rated Ceilings: Install fasteners in accordance with IBC and Gypsum Association "Fire- Resistance Design Manual". 5. Non-Fire-Rated Ceilings: Install fasteners spaced not more than 12-inches on center for screws. 6. Install screws using powered screw guns with adjustable screw-depth control head. Drive shank perpendicular to wallboard surface. Do not hammer screws. 7. Set fastener heads slightly below surface of wallboard, but do not break or strip paper face around fastener. 05-12-06 GYPSUM BOARD Summary Permit Set 09250 - 4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09250 VAIL, COLORADO GYPSUM BOARD Stagger fasteners opposite each other on adjacent ends and edges. Omit fasteners at edges where metal edge trim will be installed. N. Installation of Accessories: Install comer trim at vertical and horizontal external comers and angles, and edge trim at junctions of wallboard and other materials and at exposed edges. Attach with staples or screws as recommended by accessory manufacturer. Control Joints: Ceilings: Maximum area for ceilings with perimeter relief shall be 2,500-sq. ft.; maximum area for ceilings without perimeter relief shall be 900-sq. ft. Do not exceed 50-feet between control joints in ceilings with perimeter relief; 30-feet between control joints in ceilings without perimeter relief. Walls and Partitions: Maximum spacing between control joints shall not exceed 30-feet 3.03 TAPING AND FINISHING A. Finish Levels: Unless otherwise scheduled, required finish levels for various areas shall be as follows: 1. Level 0: In areas of temporary construction, no taping or accessories are required. 2. Level 1: In plenum areas above ceilings, attics, electrical closets, and other areas not normally exposed to the public, joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound. Surfaces shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. 3. Level 2: Where water-resistant gypsum backing board is used as a substrate for file, joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in water-resistant joint compound and one separate coat of water- resistant joint compound applied over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges not affecting the installation of tile are acceptable. 4. Level 3: Where wallboard is to receive a texture finish before final painting or where heavy grade wall coverings are to be applied, joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and one separate coat of joint compound applied over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. 5. Level 4: Unless otherwise specified in another finish level, joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two separate coats of joint compound applied over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. This Level of finish to be used throughout public areas, guest units (hotel, residence dub, and condominium), and back-of-house areas where painted gypsum board is the final finish (unless otherwise noted). 6. Level 5: On surfaces to receive eggshell, semigloss, or gloss paints, and surfaces subject to severe or critical natural or artificial side lighting, joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two separate coats of joint compound applied over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. A thin skim coat of joint compound or material manufactured especially for this purpose, shall be applied to the entire surface. The surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. This Level of finish to be used only where specifically identified on the architectural or interior design drawings or finish schedules. Mix joint finishing compounds in accordance with manufacturer's directions. C. Joints: Center tape over joint and embed in uniform layer of joint compound of sufficient width and depth to provide firm and complete bond. Apply skim coat while embedding tape. 05-12.06 GYPSUM BOARD Summary Permit Set 09250-5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09250 VAIL, COLORADO GYPSUM BOARD a. Treat angles with reinforcing tape folded to conform to adjacent surfaces and straight, true angles. 2. Apply finishing compound over taped joints. Apply number of coats specified for each finish level. a. Spread first coat evenly and feather out beyond joint center approximately 3-1/2-inches. b. After first coat is dry, sand or smooth to eliminate any high spots or excessive compound and cover with second coat with edges feathered out approximately 6-inches from center of joint. After second coat is dry, lightly sand with fine sandpaper or wipe with a damp sponge to leave a smooth even surface. When sanding, exercise caution not to raise nap of the gypsum board paper. D. Give dimples at fastener heads and marred spots on surface of wallboard one coat of joint compound and two coats of finishing compound, applied in same manner specified for joints. E. Cut edges and openings around pipes and fixtures shall be caulked flush with sanitary sealant as specified in Section 07920. Install metal corner accessories at external corners. Mechanically fasten comer bead flanges with staples or screws and conceal flanges of metal accessories with one coat of compound with embedded flat tape and two additional coats of compound. 2. Extend compound 8- to 10-inches each side of accessories. G. In the completed installation, wallboard shall have plumb and straight surfaces with no waves or buckles. Joints, fastener heads, and trim flanges shall be invisible after finishing. Surfaces shall be uniformly smooth and ready for painting or other decoration. 3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A Maintain temperature and humidity conditions as required to protect the installation. B. Protect completed wallboard from damage or deterioration until final acceptance of the work. END OF SECTION 05-12-06 GYPSUM BOARD Summary Permit Set 09250 - 6 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09252 VAIL, COLORADO GYPSUM SHEATHING SECTION 09252 - GYPSUM SHEATHING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for fumishing and installing exterior gypsum wall and roof sheathing. B. Related Sections: 1. Roofing underlayment is specified in Section 07139. 2. Wall membrane is specified in Section 07195. 3. Sheathing paper is specified in Section 07262. 4. Modified bituminous sheet flashing is specified in Section 07656. 5. Window and door flashing is specified in Section 07657. 6. Gypsum board is specified in Section 09250. 1.02 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with wet or damp surfaces. B. Stack gypsum sheathing and provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM SHEATHING A. Gypsum Wall Sheathing: Georgia Pacific'Dens-Glass Exterior Guard Gold' or approved equal (no known equaQ glass mat faced silicone-treated gypsum core panel, S winch thick, complying with ASTM C1177. 1. Gypsum wall sheathing shall be resistant to mold and mildew when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 2. Where indicated for fire-rated walls, provide Georgia Pacific "Dens-Glass Gold Firestop X" or approved equal glass mat faced silicone-treated gypsum core panel, 518-inch thick. B. Gypsum Roof Sheathing: Georgia Pacific'Dens-Deck Roof Board' or approved equal (no known equal) glass mat faced silicone-treated gypsum core panel, Yz-inch thick. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Provide screws with hot-dip zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A153 or stainless steel. Type and length as recommended by gypsum sheathing manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cut and fit gypsum sheathing acm rately. Install members plumb and true to line and level. B. Securely attach to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated and required. C. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. 04.07-06 GYPSUM SWATHMG PRgnm CD Set 09252-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 09252 GYPSUM SHEATHING 3.02 GYPSUM WALL SHEATHING A. General: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, applicable instructions in GA-253 and ASTM C1280. B. Fasten with gold side out. C. Use maximum lengths possible to minimize number of joints. D. - Fasten to exterior face of stud framing for exterior wags. E. Use self-tapping sheet metal screws. F. Keep perimeter fasteners 3184nch from edges and ends of board units. G. Fit boards tightly against each other and around openings. 3.03 GYPSUM ROOF SHEATHING A. General: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using fasteners in accordance with FM requirements. B. Locate edge joints on and parallel to metal deck ribs. Stagger end joints of adjacent boards. C. Seal fasteners, joints, and around penetrations with silicone or sloonized acrylic latex sealant to make installation air tight Embed 2-inch wide 10 x 10 glass mesh tape recommended by gypsum sheathing manufacturer at joints. END OF SECTION 0407-06 GYPSUM SHEATHING Progress CD Set 09252 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 09264 SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES SECTION 09264 - SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing shaft wall assemblies. B. Related Sections: Firestopping is specified in Section 07840. 2. Gypsum board is specified in Section 09250. 3. Acoustical insulation and sealant is specified in Section 09820. 1.02 SYSTEM PERFORMANCES A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where shaft wall systems with fire- resistance ratings are indicated, provide materials and installations which are identical to design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in listing of other testing and inspecting agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Structural Performance Characteristics: Provide shaft wall assemblies designed and tested by manufacturer to withstand the following lateral design loading, applied transiently and cyclically, for maximum heights of partitions required, within the specified deflection limits. 1. Lateral Loading: 5-psf. 2. Deflection Limit 11120 of partition height. C. Sound Attenuation Performance: For gypsum board shaft wall assemblies occurring in guest rooms, provide materials and construction identical to those assemblies whose STC ratings were determined to have a minimum STC rating of 39 in accordance with ASTM E90 and classified in accordance with ASTM E413 by a qualified testing agency. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each component of shaft wall system, including certified test data required to show compliance with specified requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Gypsum Board Terminology Standard: GA-505 by Gypsum Association. B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain shaft wall products from a single manufacturer, or from manufacturer's recommended by the prime manufacturer of shaft wall system. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufac- turer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and in manner to keep them dry, protected from the weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion and damage from construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging. C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends or surfaces. Protect metal trim from being bent or damaged. 04.07-06 SHAF( WALL ASSEMBLIES Progress CD Set 09264-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09264 - VAIL, COLORADO SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of referenced application standard and recommendations of shaft wan manufacturer. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for drying of joint treatment material. Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Genstar Building Materials Co., Georgia Pacific Corporation, Gold Bond Building Products Div., United States Gypsum Co. or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Generate Provide manufacturer's standard materials except as otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations. B. Metal Framing: Manufacturers standard shapes, of profile, size and base metal thickness to comply with AISI "Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" for structural performance characteristics specified. Fabricate from steel sheet complying with ASTM A446, Grade A or B, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A525, G60 coating designation. C. Gypsum Shaft Wall Board: Manufacturers standard gypsum backing board or coreboard designed for shaftwall constriction, complying with ASTM C442, Type X, with moisture-resistant paper facings; maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end butt joints; thickness indicated. D. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C36, Type X, tapered edges, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints, thickness indicated or required for indicated fire-resistance ratings. E. Trim: Manufacturer's standard trim accessories, formed of galvanized steel, with either knurled and perforated or expanded flanges for nailing or stapling, and beaded for concealment of flanges in joint compound. Provide comer beads, edge trim, and control joints as required. F. Gypsum Wallboard Joint Treatment Materials: ASTM C475. Provide paper reinforcing tape and vinyl-type powder joint compound, one grade for bedding tapes and filling depressions, and one for topping and sanding. G. Miscellaneous Materials: Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for laminating gypsum boards. Gypsum Board Fasteners: Comply with GA-216. Runner Fasteners: Tempered steel pins with corrosive resistant plating or coating, 9164-inch diameter, minimum 1-1/84nch penetration. 2.03 BASIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General Requirements: Provide a complete system, complying with specified requirements. Modify and supplement manufacturers standard system to comply with performance requirements. Provide the depth, profile, gauge, and anchorage system of metal support members recommended by manufacturer for heights and structural performance characteristics indicated and specified. B. Cavity Shaft Wall Systems: Provide assemblies consisting of gypsum shaft wall boards inserted between U-shaped metal floor and ceiling tracks, specially-shaped studs engaged in tracks and fitted between shaft wall boards, and gypsum boards on finished side or sides applied to studs in number of layers, thickness, and arrangement indicated. 04-07.06 SHAFT WALL ASSEMK ES Progress CD Set 09284-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION SECTION 09264 SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES A General: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and with applicable requirements of ASTM C754, C840, and GA 216 as applicable. B. Anchor and fasten materials and components to comply with indicated and specified fire-ratings and perh7nance requirements, and to comply with governing regulations. C. Do not bridge building expansion joints with drywall shaft system, frame both sides of joints. D. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing to support fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings and similar work that cannot be adequately supported directly on shaft-wall system. E. Isolate shaft systems from transfer of structural loading, both horizontally and vertically. Provide sffp or cushioned type joints to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. F. Seal perimeter of each section of work where it abuts other work. Instal a bead of acoustical sealant to prevent dislocation by air pressure differential. Seal joints and penetrations in compliance with manufachirers instructions. Install top and bottom track in a bead of acoustical sealant. Comply with additional requirements specified in Section 09820 to make shafts air-tight. Shaft wags occurring in guestrooms shall be fully sealed with acoustical sealant so that noise from the shaft will not be transmitted into the room. At bath rooms and similar wet areas where sealant will be exposed, provide a secondary bead of sanitary sealant as specified in Sedan 07920. Completed shaft walls shag have specified acoustical attenuation performance ratings. G. Trim and Accessories: Install trim accessories where room side of system is to be finished in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Apply trim wherever edge of gypsum wallboard would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed, including terminations, openings, external comers, expansion and control joints and similaredges. H. Gypsum Wallboard Finishing: Apply treatment at joints, flanges of trim and accessories, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and as required to prepare work for decoration where scheduled. Pre-fig open joints and rounded or beveled edges, using type of compound recommended by manufacturer. Comply with requirements specified in Section 09250. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Protect and maintain conditions to ensure shaft wall system work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 0407-06 SHAFr WALL ASSEMBLES Progress CD Set 09264- 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09300 VAIL, COLORADO TILE SECTION 09300 - TILE PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing the following: 1. Ceramic wall tile. 2. Stone wall tile. 3. Ceramic floor tile. 4. Stone floor tile. 5. Stone thresholds. B. Related Sections: 1. Waterproofing under mortar-set floor file and shower pans are specified in Section 07132. 2. Waterproofing under thin-set floor file is specified in Section 07142. 3. Joint sealants are specified in Section 07920. 4. Portland-cement plaster base coat is specified in Section 09220. 5. Tile backer board is specified in Section 09390. 6. Shower doors and enclosures are specified in Section 10822. 7. Public steam rooms are specified in Section 13054. 8. Sound control matting is specified in Section 13080. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's product data for each specified product. B. Shop Drawings: Show file patterns and locations and widths of expansion, contraction, and isolation joints in file substrates and finished file surfaces. 1. Show layout of radiant heat tubing in each typical room to receive radiant underfloor heating system. C. Samples for Verification: Furnish samples of the following items. Where products involve color and texture variations, furnish sets showing full range of variations expected. 1. Each type and composition of Ole for each color and texture required, at least 12-inches square, mounted on plywood or hardboard backing and grouted. 2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required. 3. Stone thresholds in 64nch lengths. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of file from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance without delaying progress of the work. 04-07-06 TAE Progress CD Set 09300-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09300 VAIL, COLORADO TILE B. Single-Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality from one manufacturer for each cemenfitious and admixture component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. C. Installer's Qualifications: A minimum of 3-years experience installing file of the types specified, and a minimum of 5 installations of a magnitude similar to or larger than the work of this Section. D. Floor file shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.6 determined in accordance with ASTM C1028. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed Ole packages. B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, foreign matter, and other causes. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced stan- dards and manufacturers printed recommendations. B. Maintain temperatures at 50-deg. F. or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7-days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturers instructions. C. Coordinate placement of infkoor radiant heating tubing with placement of mortar bed. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Ceramic Tile: Furnish additional file for replacement and maintenance, at the rate of five boxes of each type of standard file and base and ten boxes of any specially made or special colored tiles used in guestroom bathrooms. Identify each carton as to contents. B. Stone Tile: Furnish additional file for replacement and maintenance, at the rate of ten boxes of each type of stone file and base used in guestroom bathrooms. Identify each carton as to contents. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE MATERIALS A. Ceramic Tile: As selected by the Interior Designer. Refer to Section 09001. B. Stone Tile: As selected by the Interior Designer. Refer to Section 09001. C. Trim Units: Provide trim units to match adjoining flat tie. 1. Size: Coordinate with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tie. 2. Shapes: a. Base for Thin-Set Tile: Straight b. Base for Mortar-Set Tile: Coved. C. Wainscot Cap for Thin-Set Tile: Surface bullnose. d. Wainscot cap for Mortar-Set Tile: Bullnose. e. External Comers for Thin-Set Tile: Surface bullnose. f. External Comers for Mortar-Set Tile: Bullnose. g. Internal Comers: Field-butted square comers. J 04-07-06 TILE Progress CD Set 09300-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09300 VAIL, COLORADO TILE AWN 2.02 STONE THRESHOLDS A. General: Provide stone that is uniform in color and finish, fabricated to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between file surfaces and adjoining finished floor surfaces. B. Thresholds: Material as selected by the Interior Designer. Refer to Section 09001. 2.03 SETTING MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. B. Sand: ASTM C144. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C206 or C207, Type S. D. Water. Clean, clear, potable. E. Reinforcing: 1. Floors: Galvanized welded wire fabric, 2-inches x 2-inches - W0.3 x W0.3 (16 ASW gage or 0.0625- inch diameter). F. Mortar. 1. Cement Mortar. Job mixed, portland cement, sand, water, and hydrated lime at Contractor's option, proportions specified in ANSI A108.1. 2. Dry-Set Mortar: ANSI A118.1. 3. Latex Portand-Cement Mortar. ANSI A118.4. 4. Epoxy Mortar. ANSI A118.3. G. Bond Coat: Portland cement paste on a plastic setting bed, or dry-set or latex-portland cement mortar on a cured setting bed, except where any one type is specified in referenced TCA installation method. H. Cleavage Membrane: 15-pound roofing felt. 2.04 GROUTING MATERIALS A. Commercial Portland Cement Grout ANSI Al 18.6, color as selected. B. Dry-Set Grout ANSI A118.6, color as selected. C. Latex Portland Cement Grout ANSI A118.7, color as selected. D. Chemical-Resistant Epoxy Grout ANSI A118.3, color as selected. E. Grout Schedule: 1. Wall Tile: Commercial portland cement, dry-set, or latex-portland cement 2. Floor Tile: Commercial pordand cement, dry-set, latex-porlland cement or epoxy. 3. Shower and Public Toilet Room Floors: Epoxy. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sealer. Sealer, brick-like file cleaner or water-repellent coating listed on the "Tested Materials List" of the Ceramic Tile Institute, CTI TM-68 for sealing portland-cement grout installations. 04.07.06 TLE Progress CD Set 09300- 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09300 VAIL, COLORADO TILE B. Curing Cover: 40-pound kraft membrane. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine substrates and areas where file will be installed, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. Verify that substrates for setting file are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films and curing compounds. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind file has been completed before installing file. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the range selected, verify that file has been blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that file units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with referenced parts of ANSI 108 series of file installation standards. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: Comply with TCA *Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation' installation methods referenced. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and comers without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of file without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of file abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit file closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars or covers overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise indicated, lay file in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out file work and center file fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tie cutting. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. F. Lay out file wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw cut joints after installation of tiles. 1. Locate joints in file surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants as specified in Section 07920. 3.04 TILE INSTALLATION METHODS A. Interior Floors: 1. Mortar-Set over Concrete Slab: Install over mortar bed in accordance with ANSI Al 08.1 using TCA Method F112-03. 2. Mortar-Set Over Waterproofing: Mortar set over waterproofing in accordance with ANSI A108.1 using TCA Method F121-03. 3. Thin Set Over Waterproofing: Install in accordance with ANSI A108.5 using TCA Method F122-03. 04-07-06 TILE Progress CD Set 09300-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09300 VAIL, COLORADO TILE 4. Thin-Set Over Resilient Undelayment: Install in accordance with ANSI A108.5 using TCA Method RF912- 03, modified with specified resilient undedayment. Installation of file backer board over resilient underlayment is specified in Section 13080. B. Interior Walls: 1. Thin-Set over Tile Backer Board: Install in accordance with ANSI Al 08.5 using TCA Method W244-03. 2. Thin-set Over Cement Plaster Base Coat: Install in accordance with ANSI Al 08.5 using TCA Method W202-03, modified to include file backer board and plaster base coat in lieu of masonry or concrete backing. Cement plaster base coat is specified in Section 09220. C. Shower Receptors and Walls: Instal in accordance with ANSI A108.5 using TCA Method B415-03. D. Bathtub Walls: Install in accordance with ANSI Al 08.5 using TCA Method B412-03. E. Steam Showers: Install in accordance with ANSI A108.1 and A108.5 using TCA Method SR614-03, modified as indicated. F. Expansion Joints: Comply with TCA Method EJ171-03. Proposed joint locations shall be approved by the Architect. 1. Interior. Provide expansion joints at 24- to 36-feet on center in both directions, over cold joints and saw-cut control joints, and where tie abuts restraining surfaces. Joint sparing for file exposed ID direct sunlight or moisture shall be 12-to 16-feet on center. Joint width for paver file shall be minimum 1/"ch wide; ceramic mosaic file and glazed wall file shall be minimum 1184nch. 2. Exterior: Provide expansion joints at 12- to 16-feet on center in both directions, over cold joints and saw-cut control joints, and where file abuts restraining surfaces. Joint width shall be minimum 16 inch wide for joints spaced 12-feet on center and 1/24nch wide for joints spaced 16-feet on center. 3. Sealant Materials: As specified in Section 07920. 3.06 CLEANING A. Upon completion of placement and grouting, dean file surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from file as soon as possible. 2. Do not use add or add deaners to dean tile. B. Leave finished installation dean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work. 3.07 CURING A. Damp cure tile Installations, including portland cement grouts, for a minimum of 72-hours. 1. Cover with clean non-staining kraft paper. 2. Do not use polyethylene sheets directly over file on horizontal surfaces. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensures tie is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. When recommended by file manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed file walls and floors. Protect installed file work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. 04-07-06 TLE Progress CD Set 09300-5 PROJECT 02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09300 VAIL, COLORADO TILE Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7-days after grouting is completed. B. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from file surfaces. C. Apply sealer to portland cement grout installations in accordance with sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Apply to small test area and obtain Architects approval before proceeding with application over large areas. END OF SECTION 04.07-06 TILE Progress CD Set 09300-6 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09390 VAIL, COLORADO INTERIOR TILE BACKER BOARD SECTION 09390 - INTERIOR TILE BACKER BOARD PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes the following types of interior We backer boards for bled areas: 1. Cementitious backer board. B. Related Sections: 1. Metal stud framing is specified in Section 09110. 2. Tile is specified in Section 09300. 3. Acoustical insulation and sealant is specified in Section 09820. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data for each type of component and system specified, including performance ratings, details of construction, materials, and installation instructions. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deriver materials in their original unopened packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials under cover and in manner to keep them dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion and damage from construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack hle banker boards to prevent sagging; stack flat, on continuous surface, and without skids. C. Handle file backer boards to prevent damage to edges, ends or surfaces. Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from site. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold Weather Protection: In cold weather, maintain continuous, uniform, building temperatures of not less than 45-deg F. or more than 100-deg. F. for a minimum period of 48-hours prior to, during, and following tie backer board installation. B. Conditioning: Store file backer board in spaces where it is to be installed for 48-hours prior to installation. Do not install board when it is wet. C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to remove excess moisture. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURER A. United States Gypsum Company'Durock Interior Tile Backer Board or approved equal. 2.02 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD A. Material: Aggregated portiand cement board with vinyl-coated, woven glass-fiber mesh embedded in back and front surfaces. 1. Thickness: 1/24nch minimum. f a 2. Size: 3-feet wide; 4, 5, or 6 feet long. 3. Faces: Smooth on one side, textured on other side. 04-07.06 INTERIOR TILE BACKER BOARD Progress CD Set 09390-1 z PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09390 VAIL, COLORADO INTERIOR TILE BACKER BOARD 4. Edges: Formed smooth edges; square cut ends. 5. Weight 3-pounds per square foot. 6. Flexural Strength: 750-psi minimum per ASTM C 947. 7. Compressive Strength: 2300-psi minimum with 14nch diameter disk per ASTM D2394. 8. Nail Pull Resistance: 125-lbs. minimum per ASTM C473. 9. Flame Spread, Smoke Developed: 5, 0 respectively, in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Joint Reinforcement DUROCK glass-fiber tape, vinyl coated, open-weave tape; 2-inches wide; pressure-sensitive. C. Fasteners: Self-drilling screws with corrosion resistant finish. 1. At Tile Backer Board: DUROCK screws with flat wafer head capable of being driven flush to surface of file backer board; 11- 114-inch long. 2. When file backer board is installed over gypsum board base layer, screws shall be 1-5/84nches long. D. Water Barrier. Vapor permeable membrane, 15 lb. asphalt felt or TYVEK building paper by E.I. du Pont de Nemours & Company. E. Setting Materials: 1. Dry-set Mortar: ANSI A118.1. 2. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. ANSI A118.4. F. Joint Compound: Latex portland-cement mortar complying with ANSI A118.4. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and framing for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until piping, waterproofing, and other in-wall work has been installed and accepted by Architect and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except when more stringent requirements apply. B. Before installation, cut file backer boards to required sizes, make necessary cut-outs for penetrations, and grind or drill to provide relief at bolts and screw heads which project beyond face of substrate. 3.03 PARTITIONS A. Framing: Install over framing type indicated. Install blocking to support tub and other plumbing fixtures, and to receive soap dishes, grab bars, towel racks and other accessories and hardware. B. At shower receptors, fur out studs, if necessary, so inside face of receptor is flush with exposed face of file backer board. C. Water Barrier. Instal over framing at showers, tubs, and other wet areas and where indicated. Lap joints to shed water towards face of partition. Bottom edge shall overhang lip of tub, shower pan, or shower receptor. 0407-06 INTERIOR TILE BACKER BOARD Progress CD Set 09390-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS 11 RESORTS SECTION 09390 VAIL. COLORADO INTERIOR TILE BACKER BOARD D. Apply file backer boards to framing with long dimension parallel to or across framing. Fit ends and edges closet' but not forced together. Center end or edge joints on framing and stagger joints in adjacent rows. E. At shower pan or shower receptor, place temporary 1/44nch spacer strips around lip of fixture. Instal board abutting top of spacer. Remove spacer before installing tile. Joint sealants are specified in another section. Fasten file backer board to framing. Locate screws at least 3Whch from edge of board and 11 inches o.a unless otherwise recommended by tile backer board manufacturer. 3.04 JOINT TREATMENT A. Apply joint reinforcing over joints and comers. Embed with thin-set mortar used to set tile. END OF SECTION 0407-06 INTERIOR TILE BACKER BOARD Progress CD Set 09390-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09511 VAIL, COLORADO ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS SECTION 09511- ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for the materials and installation of acoustical ceiling panels. B. Related Sections: 1. Acoustical suspension systems are specified in Section 09130. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive and technical data and illustrations. B. Material Samples: Duplicate sets of full-size panels for each type and size of acoustical unit required. 1.03 EXTRA MATERIALS A. In addition to acoustical panels for completing installations required, furnish additional units, in typical field sizes, for each type of unit used in the work. B. Furnish quantities equal to not less than 5 boxes of each type of unit or greater to result in full carton lots for each type. C. Supply extra units from production lots or color runs the same as for units used in the work, and supply in cartons as factory packaged and labeled. Also identify cartons with Project name and type of ceiling panel. D. Deliver materials to project premises just prior to substantial completion, and store at location as directed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PUBLIC AREA ACOUSTICAL PANELS A As selected by the Interior Designer. 2.02 EXPOSED GRID SYSTEM (NOTED ON FINISH SCHEDULE AS "AT-EG-) A. Approved Manufacturers: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. "Fine Fissured" Item No. 1811 or approved equal. B. Typical Field Size: 24-inches x 48-Inches x Y44nch thick. C. Edges: Square. D. NRC:0.70. E. CAC: 40. F. Flame Spread Classification, ASTM E84: 0-25, Class A. G. Light Reflectance: 0.85. H. Finish and Color: Factory-applied, washable, vinyl-latex paint in manufacturer's standard off-white color. 2.03 RECESSED GRID SYSTEM (NOTED ON FINISH SCHEDULE AS "AT RG") A. Approved Manufacturers: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. "Ultima" Item No. 1911 or approved equal. B. Typical Field Size: 24-inches x 244nches x Y44nch thick. C. Edges: Tegular reveal. 0407-06 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS Progress CD Set 09511-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09511 VAIL, COLORADO ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS D. NRC:0.70. E. CAC: 35. F. Flame Spread Classification, ASTM E84: 0-25, Class A G. Light Reflectance: 0.90. H. Finish and Color. Factory-applied, washable, vinyl4atex paint in manufacturer's standard off-white color. 2.04 KITCHEN AREAS (NOTED ON FINISH SCHEDULE AS'AT V')) A. Approved Manufacturers: Armstrong World Industries, Inc.'Ceramaguard' Item No. 605 or approved equal. B. Typical Field Size: 244nches x 48-in6hes x 5/8-inch thick. C. Edges: Square. D. NRC:0.55. E. CAC: 40. F. Flame Spread Classification, ASTM E84: 0-25. G. Light Reflectance: 0.88. H. Finish and Color. Factory-applied, scxubbable vinyl plastic paint 2.05 COMPUTER ROOM AND SPECIAL SYSTEMS ROOMS (NOTED ON FINISH SCHEDULE AS -AT-C-)) A. Approved Manufacturers: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. "Clean Room VL' Item No. 870 or approved equal. B. Typical Field Size: 244nches x 484nches x 5/8-inch thick. C. Edges: Square. D. NRC:0.05. E. CAC: 35. F. Flame Spread Classification, ASTM E84: 0-25, Class A G. Light-Reflectance: 0.79. H. Finish and Color: Factory-applied vinyl faced membrane. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 AMBIENT CONDITIONS A. Building shall have been entirely enclosed and heated not less than 10-days before start of suspended-ceiling work. B. Before installation, acoustical units shall have been stored within the spaces where they are to be used for not less than 3-days, and with cartons opened and stripped sufficiently to permit units to stabilize to ambient conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical panels in suspended grid system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 04-07.06 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS Progress CD Set 09511-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09511 VAIL, COLORADO ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS 3.03 COMPLETION A. Acoustical panels shall rest uniformly on their supporting members and shall be flat and free from twist and warp. B. Exposed surfaces of acoustical units shall be dean and free from scratches, dents, tool marks, stains, dis- coloration, fingerprints, and other defects and damage. END OF SECTION 0407.06 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS Progress CD Set 09511-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09600 VAIL, COLORADO STONE FLOORING SECTION 09600 - STONE FLOORING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for famishing and installing the following: 1. Interior stone flooring. 2. Stone stair treads, risers, and base. 3. Exterior stone flooring (snow melted where indicated). B. Related Sections: 1. Stone countertops are specified in Section 04440. 2. Joint sealants are specified in Section 07920. 3. Stone Ole flooring is specified in Section 09300. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Fumish manufacturer's technical data for each type of stone, stonework accessory, and other manufactured product required. B. Shop Drawings: Fumish cutting and setting drawings indicating sizes, dimensions, sections and profiles of stone units, and other details showing relationships with, attachment to, and reception of, related work. C. Samples: Fumish two 124nch x 12-inch samples for each color, grade, finish, type and variety of stone required. Show the full range of appearance characteristics to be expected in the completed work. D. Grout Samples: Manufacturer's standard grout color samples for initial selection. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type and variety of stone from a single source of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5-years successful completion of stone flooring similar in material, design and extent to that required for this Project 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project in undamaged condition. B. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, contaminants, corrosion, breakage, chipping or other causes. 1. Store on wood skids or pallets, covered with non-staining, waterproof membrane. Place and stack skids and stones to distribute weight evenly. 2. Store cementitious material off the ground, under cover and in dry k)cation. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install stone when air temperature or temperature of materials is below 50-deg. F. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 STONE MATERIALS 04-07-06 STONE FLOORING Progress CD Set 09600-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09600 VAIL, COLORADO STONE FLOORING A. To be selected by the Interior Designer. 2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement ASTM C150, Type I. Provide gray or white cement as required to produce mortar color required. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. C. Aggregate: ASTM C144. 1. For or joints narrower than 114-inch use aggregate graded with 100-percent passing No. 8 sieve and 95-percent passing No. 16 sieve. 2. For pointing mortar use aggregate graded with 100-percent passing No. 16 sieve. D. Colored Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with record of satisfactory performance in stone mortars. Color as selected by the Interior Designer. E. Thin Set Mortar: Latex portland cement complying with ANSI A118.4. Water. Clean, non-alkaline and potable. 2.03 GROUT MATERIALS A. Color. As selected by the Interior Designer from manufacturer's complete range of colors. B. Sand-Portland Cement Grout ANSI Al 08.10. C. Commercial Portland Cement Grout ANSI A118.6. D. Latex Portland Cement Grout ANSI A118.6. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Cleavage Membrane: Polyethylene film 4-mil nominal thickness. B. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized welded wire fabric, 2-inches x 2-inches - WO.3 x WO.3 (16 ASW gage or 0.06254nch diameter); comply with ASTM A185 and ASTM A82 except for minimum wire size. C. Cleaner. Stone cleaner of proper formulation for kinds of stones, finishes and applications indicated, as recommended by stone producer and sealer, I sealed. Do not use acid-type cleaning agents or other cleaning compounds containing caustic or harsh filers. D. Sealer for Floors: Colorless, slip and stain resistant sealer which will not affect color or physical properties of stone surface, as recommended by sealer and stone producer for application indicated. E. ResFwt Underiayment Enkasonic 0.44nch thick matting, nylon and carbon black spinaretie extruded. Provide where stone floors are installed on tkrors occurring over public areas and guestrooms below. 2.05 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not add admixtures, including coloring pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, wafter repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or calcium chloride. B. Mixing: Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious materials, water and aggregates in a mechanical batch mixer, comply with referenced ASTM or ANSI standards for mixing time and water content C. Setting Mortar and Grout Comply with mixing requirements of ANSI Standards referenced for materials and installation methods. 0407-06 STONE FLOORING Progress CD Set 09600 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09600 VAIL, COLORADO STONE FLOORING D. Pointing Mortar. Mix to match pointing mortar in approved mock-up. Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1-to-10, by weight PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean stone surfaces which have become dirty or stained prior to setting to remove soil, stains and foreign materials. Clean by scrubbing with fiber brushes followed by drenching with dean water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh finer or abrasive. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install stone flooring by skilled installers. Use power saws to cut stones. Dress joints straight at 90-degree angle to face unless otherwise indicated. Edges shall have a honed finish. B. Set stones to Comply with specified requirements. Unless otherwise indicated, install with uniform 1/164tch wide joints, with faces and edges aligned according to established relationships and specified tolerances. C. Tolerances: Set stone flooring to comply with the following tolerances: 1. Variation From Level: Do not exceed 1/2-inch in 20-feet maximum nor 3/4Anch in 40-feet or more. 2. Offset in Face of Adjacent Pieces: Do not exceed 1/16-inch. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF STONE FLOORING A. Extend flooring into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures, to form a complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and comers without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. B. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of stones without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of stones abutting trim, finish or built-in items for straight aligned joints. C. Lay stone in pattern indicated with uniform joints. Joints shall be uniformly spaced to specified thickness and grouted. Use spacers as required to maintain required joint width. 3.04 INSTALLATION METHODS A. Stone Flooring Set in Portland Cement Mortar Bed: Install stone flooring on plastic mortar bed to comply with requirements of ANSI A108.1 for setting bed, and with TCA Installation methods related to types of subiloor construction, and grout types specified: Interior Slab on Grade: TCA F112-03. 2. Interior Structural Concrete Floor: TCA Method F111-03. 3. Interior Floors over Occupied Areas Below: TCA Method 17111-03, modified to include resilient undedayment specified in Section 13080. 4. Exterior paving over enclosed / occupied space below. Mortar set over waterproofing. TCA Method F101-03. Waterproofing specified in section 07144. Paving snowmelted as indicated. B. Install stone base to comply with ANSI A108.5 using TCA Method W243-03. C. Grout stone flooring using sand-portland cement or commercial portland cement grout, color to match approved mock-up. Remove grout spillage from face of stone as work progresses. D. Do not permit traffic on stone flooring during setting and for at least 24-hours after final grouting of joints. 3.05 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND SEALING 04-07-06 STONE FLOORING Progress CD Set 09600-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09600 VAIL, COLORADO STONE FLOORING A. Remove and replace stone flooring that is broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged; that has defective joints; and that does not match approved mock-up. B. Replace in a manner showing no evidence of replacement as approved by the Architect. C. Clean stone flooring after setting, pointing, grouting and curing; use procedures recommended by stone producer. D. Apply sealer to cleaned stone flooring in accordance with sealer manufacturer's instructions. E. Protect stone flooring during construction with Kraft paper or other heavy covering of type that will not stain nor discolor stone. Prior to final completion, remove protective covering and clean sealed surfaces using procedures and materials recommended by sealer manufacturer. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 STONE FLOORING Progress CD Set 09600-4 PROJECT #02028 -FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09611 VAIL, COLORADO CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER / LIQUID HARDENER SECTION 09611- CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER I LIQUID HARDENER PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for providing concrete floor sealer / hardener to interior concrete floor surfaces not scheduled to receive a subsequently applied flooring material, including but not limited to slab-on- grade mechanical/electrical rooms, electrical rooms above grade, stair treads and landings, and elevator equipment rooms. B. Related Sections: I . Elastomeric liquid flooring in mechanical rooms above grade is specified in Section 09671. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturers product data and application and installation instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. ChemRex, Inc./ Sonnebom 'Kure-N-Harden" or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Concrete Floor Sealer / Hardener: Water-soluble inorganic silicate-based compound for hardening, searing, and dustproofing concrete slabs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Remove dust and dirt with a fine bristle broom or hose off with water and let stand until completely dry. Surface shall be free from contaminates that will inhibit penetration into the concrete pores. Existing curing, scaling, or coating agents shall be chemically or mechanically removed. If acid is used, the surface shall be flushed and neutralized before application. 3.02 APPLICATION A. New Concrete: 1. Spray apply undiluted material on the concrete surface with a low-pressure sprayer following final finishing operation and after all surface water has evaporated and the concrete surface is hard. Apply as soon as the surface can bear foot traffic to ensure proper penetration. 2. Keep the surface wet for 304minutes by spraying or by brooming excess material from low spots to saturate dry spots. Keep sealer / hardener from drying out on the surface for 30-minutes. 3. As soon as the sealer / hardener begins to penetrate into the surface, lightly sprinkle the surface with water to aid penetration. 4. As surface begins to dry a second time, flush surface with water and squeegee the surface to remove excess material. 5. Dry buff with a non-aggressive pad the following day. 04-07-06 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER / LIQUID HARDENER Progress CD Set 09611-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09611 VAIL, COLORADO CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER/ LIQUID HARDENER B. Existing Concrete: Saturate the surface with undiluted material by sprayer, squeegee, or brooming. If dry spots appear, move excess material onto them of re-spray immediately so that entire surface is wetfor a minimum of 30-minutes. 2. If after 30- to 40-minutes the majority of material has been absorbed into the surface, broom or squeegee any excess material from the low spots so it may be absorbed into the surface or completely remove from the surface. 3. Flush with dean water. C. Allow floors to completely dry before allowing any traffic. Do not permit heavy traffic for a minimum of 24-hours. END OF SECTION CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER I LIQUID HARDENER 04-07-06 09611 Progress CD Set - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS 8 RESORTS SECTION 09641 VAIL. COLORADO CUSHIONED WOOD FLOORING SECTION 09641- CUSHIONED WOOD FLOORING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing cushioned wood flooring system (at aerobics area of Spa fitness room), including wood strip flooring, sleepers, plywood underfayment where required, resilient cushions, base and other accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Wood strip flooring is specified in Section 09648. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Product Data: Manufacturer's detailed technical product data and installation instructions for each type of wood flooring. Include instructions for handling, storage, installation, finishing, protection and maintenance. B. Samples: Sets of range samples for each type of wood flooring. Include finish where factory-finished flooring is specified. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Specialized wood flooring firm with not less than 3-years successful experience in installation of cushioned wood flooring. B. Source Quality Control: Obtain flooring of each type from single manufacturer or source, to ensure match of quality, color, pattern and texture. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Moisture Content: At time of delivery, limit average moisture content of wood flooring to 12-percent, with 14-percent maximum for any piece. B. Protect wood flooring from excessive moisture in shipment, storage, and handling. Deliver in unopened cartons or bundles and store in a dry place, with adequate air circulation. Do not deliver material to building until 'wet work" such as concrete and plaster have been completed and cured to a condition of equilibrium. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Conditioning: Do not proceed with installation of wool flooring until spaces have been enclosed and are at approximate humidity condition planned for occupancy. Condition wood for 7-days minimum or as required for acclimation, prior to start of installation by placing in spaces to receive flooring and maintaining ambient temperature between %-deg. F. and 75 ft F. before, during, and after installation. Open packages of wood flooring which are sealed to permit natural a*strnent of moisture content PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURER A. Homer Flooring Co. 'Thrust-A-Cushion' System or approved equal. 04-07-06 CUSHIONED WOOD FLOORING Progress CD Set 09641-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09641 VAIL COLORADO CUSHIONED WOOD FLOORING 2.02 MATERIALS A. Flooring: Maple, 25/324nch thick x 2-114-inch wide, Second and Better, continuous tongue and groove and end matched MFMA, Northern Hard Maple, grade marked and stamped. B. Vapor Barrier: 6-mil polyethylene. C. Sleepers: 24nch x 34nch Fr, Hemlock or Pine, kiln-dried and preservative treated. D. Resilient Pads: 3/8-inch x 2-194nch x 34nch, compressible to 1116-inch under a load of 40-psi without displacement Resilient pads shall be attached to sleepers at 124nches on center. E. Plywood Undedayment: 1124nch thick Exterior CDX F. Wail Base: 34nch x 44nch heavy duty molded vented vinyl with premoided outside comers or as indicated. G. Fasteners: 2-inch barbed cleat or 15-gauge epoxy coated staples. H. Floor Sealer. Penetrating type, pliable, wood-hardening finish/sealer, Penetrating Seal #21 by Hillyard Chemical Co., or Penetrating Triple XXX Seat-O-San by Huntington Laboratories, Inc., or equivalent sealer as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Polyurethane Finish: Moisture curing type polyurethane finish, specially compounded for multiple-coat applica- tion on wood floors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Wherever direct application of wood flooring to concrete substrate is indicated, test for dryness before proceed- ing with installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with flooring manufacturer's instructions for each type of flooring system. B. Cover concrete with vapor barrier lapping joints a minimum of 44nches. Seal joints, penetrations, and tears with We. C. Instal sleepers across short dimension of room or at right angles to the main playing floor with ends butted, leaving a 1/44rlch space and joints staggered. Provide 2-kich expansion voids at the perimeter and at al vertical obstnrctions. Space sleepers 12-inches on center. Attach 1/24nch thick plywood to sleepers using 24nch cleated nails with a 1144nch spacing between adjacent sheets. D. Install finish flooring parallel with main playing court by power nailing or stapling approximately 124nches on center. 1. Space joints between flooring strips to allow for intem>ediate expansion as required. 2. Provide 24nch expansion voids at the perimeter and at all vertical obstructions. E. Sanding: Machine sand with course, mectium and fine paper to a smooth, even and uniform surface. Remove sanding dust from entire surface by tack or vacuum. 04.07-06 CUSHIONED WOOD FLOORING Progress CD Set 09641-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09641 VAIL COLORADO CUSHIONED WOOD FLOORING F. Finishing: Inspect floor to ensure that surface is acceptable for finishing, completely free from sanding dust 2. Apply one coat of sealer and two coats of finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Buff and dean floor between each coat 4. Paint game lines as indicated after seal coat and before first finish coat Game tine paint shall be compatible with finish. G. Base: Install base in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with mitered inside comers and premoided outside comers. Anchor to walls with base c anent. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect completed wood flooring during remainder of construction period with heavy Kraft paper or other suitable covering, so that flooring and finish will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 0407-06 CUSHIONED WOOD FLOORING Progress CD Set 09641-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09648 VAIL COLORADO WOOD STRIP FLOORING SECTION 09648 - WOOD STRIP FLOORING PARTS - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing wood strip flooring. B. Related Sections: 1. Wood sleepers and underlayment are specified in Section 06101. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's detailed technical product data and installation instructions for each type of wood flooring. Include instructions for handling, storage, installation, finishing, protection and maintenance. B. Samples: Sets of range samples for each type of wood flooring. Include finish where factory-finished flooring is specified. Include minimum 64nch long sample of each type of accessory item, including feature strips, reducer strips, baseboard, and trim molding. C. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of wood flooring, including plans, elevations, sections, details of anchorage and attachment to other work, and conditions requiring feature strips, reducer strips, baseboard, trim, molding, nosings, or other accessories. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Specialized wood flooring firm with not less than 3-years successful experience in installation of types specified. B. General Standard: Comply with recommendations of "Hardwood Flooring Installation Manual" by National Oak Flooring Manufacturers' Association (NOFMA). C. Source Quality Control: Obtain flooring of each type from single manufacturer or source, to ensure match of quality, color, pattern and texture. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect wood flooring from excessive moisture in shipment, storage, and handling. Deliver in unopened cartons or bundles and store in a dry place, with adequate air c inlation. Do not deliver material to budding until 'wet work' such as concrete and plaster have been completed and cured to a condition of equilflxwm. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Moisture Content At tune of delivery, limit average moisture content of wood flooring to 6- to 4ercent, with 121xwoent maximum for any piece and not more than 5-percent outside of given average range. B. Conch ioning: Do not proceed with installation of wood flooring until spaces have been enclosed and are at approximate humidity condition planned for occupancy. Condition wood for 5-days prior to start of Installation by placing in spaces to receive flooring and maintaining ambient temperature between F. and 70 ft F. before, during, and after installation. Open packages of wood flooring which are sealed to permit natural adjustment of moisture content C. Coordinate and adjust slab recesses as required for thickness of wood flooring to be used. Slab recesses are 04.07.06 WOOD STRIP FLOORING Progress CD Set 09645 - 1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09648 VAIL COLORADO WOOD STRIP FLOORING based on indicated and specified thickness of flooring and shall be adjusted as required. D. Provide for continuous ventilation during installation using as close to 100-percent outside air as possible. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD STRIP/PLANK FLOORING A. Type W Flooring (at Public Areas): Solid wood flooring. 1. Species, Grade, and Cut a. Species: As selected by the Interior Designer. Refer to Section 09001. b. Grade: As selected by the Interior Designer. Refer to Section 09001. c. Cut: As selected by the Interior Designer. Refer to Section 09001. 2. Matching: As selected by the Interior Designer. Refer to Section 09001. 3. Thickness: As selected by the Interior Designer. Refer to Section 09001. 4. Face Width: As selected by the Interior Designer. Refer to Section 09001. 5. Lengths: Provide standard random length strips, oomplying with applicable grading rules. 6. Seasoning: Manufacture wood strip flooring from kiln-dried lumber. B. Type 'B' Flooring (at guestrooms): Prefinished wood strip flooring as selected by the Interior Designer. Refer to Section 09001. 2.02 FINISHING MATERIALS FOR TYPE'A' FLOORING A. Stain: Penetrating-type, non-fading wood stain, pigmented if required to match approved sample. B. Wood Filler. Type compatible with stain or finish, pigmented if required to match approved sample. C. Floor Sealer: Penetrating-type, pliable, water-based, compatible with stain and finish. D. Finish: Water-based polyurethane complying with environmental and flammability restrictions, compounded for multpte-coat application on wood floors. 2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D226, No. 15, asphalt-satuirated fe1L B. Polyethylene Film: 6-mil thick. C. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer, but not less than recommended by NOFMA in 'Installation Manual". D. Cork Expansion Strip: Composition cork expansion strip. E. Wood Trim: Provide wood base board molding and base shoe molding of same species and grade as wood 04.07.06 WOOD STRIP FLOORING Progress CD Set 09649 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09648 AWN VAIL. COLORADO WOOD STRIP FLOORING V flooring. Except as otherwise indicated, provide wood stripping, saddles and thresholds, adjacent to wood flooring, of same species, grade, and cut as wood flooring. F. Nailing Surface: Exterior plywood, 3/4-inch thick unless otherwise indicated. G. Adhesive: As recommended by Type B prefinished flooring manufacturer for bonding wood flooring th sound control matting specified in Section 13080. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A Examine substrates on which wood flooring will be installed and conditions under which work will be performed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been comected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF TYPE `A' FLOORING A General: Comply with flooring manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Instal wood flooring as recommended by NOFMA in "Hardwood Flooring Installation Matedar. B. Pattern: Comply with pattern or direction of pattern for laying wood flooring as indicated on Interior Design drawings. C. Expansion Space: Provide expansion space at walls and other obstructions and terminations of flooring, not less than 3/8-inch. Unless fully concealed by him, fill expansion space with flush cork expansion strip. Nail shoe molding or other firm to baseboard rather than flooring. Location or expansion space shall be approved by the Architect D. Solid Wood Strip Flooring Installation: 1. Cover concrete slab with polyethylene film lapped 2- to 44nches along the edges and ends. 2. Install wood sleepers over polyethylene film, spaced as recommended by wood flooring manufacturer. 3. Cover wood nailers with plywood nailing surface. 4. Cover plywood nailing surface with felt undedayment tapped 2- to 44hches along edges and ends. 5. Blind-nail flooring to plywood nailing surface in accordance with NOFMA reconrrnendations. Allow a /.-inch expansion space along walls and other obstructions. Install with even distribution of long and short pieces to avoid clusters of short boards. E. Sanding and Finishing: 1. Machine sand installed unfinished flooring to remove offsets and non-level conditions, ridges, cups, and sanding machine marks that would be visually noticeable after finishing. Use 3 grades of sandpaper, ending with 00 grade. Vacuum and immediately apply finish. Do not permit traffic on floor after sanding and until fuhish is completed. Cover sanded floor with building paper to provide access for application of first finish coats. 2. Apply stain as required to match approved sample. 3. Apply wood filler by brush, followed by wiping across grain to work into pores and cracks. 007-06 WOOD STRIP FLOORING Progress CD Set 09648 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09648 VAIL COLORADO WOOD STRIP FLOORING 4. Apply urethane finish, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply as marry coats as required to build a dry film thickness of I -D-mils. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF TYPE V FLOORING A Pattern: Comply with pattern or direction of pattern for laying wood flooring as indicated on the Interim Design drawings. B. Adhesively bond wood flooring using adhesive recommended by flooring manufacturer. Verify that adhesive is compatible with substrate. 3.04 PROTECTION A Protect completed wood flooring during remainder of construction period with heavy kraft paper or other suitable covering to prevent damage or deterioration. Do not use plastic sheet or film that could cause condensation. B. Do not cover site-finished floors with kraft paper, rugs, or other material until finish reaches full cure. END OF SECTION 1j 0407 06 WOOD STRIP FLOORING 09648-4 Pm mss CD Set PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09652 VAIL, COLORADO RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 09652 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes the following: 1. Resl lent wall base. 2. Resilient flooring accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Resilient file flooring is specified in Section 09656. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for each type of product specified. B. Samples: Samples for verification purposes in manufacturer's standard sizes, but not less than 12-inches long, of each different color and pattern of product specified. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux 0.45-watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E648. 2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E662. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50- and 90-deg. F. C. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48-hours in advance of installation. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70-deg. F. in spaces to receive products specified in this Section for at least 48-hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48-hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55-deg. F. B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as that of the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic during installation of products specified in this Section. D. Provide for continuous ventilation during installation using as dose to 100-percent outside air as possible. 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence installing products specified in this Section with other construction to minimize possibility of damage and soling during remainder of construction period. 04-07-06 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES Progress CD W 09652-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09652 VAIL, COLORADO RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels clearly describing contents. Fumish not less than 100-linear feet for each different type and color of resilient wall base installed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Rubber Wall Base: Azrock, Burke, Flexco, Johnsonite, Mercer, Musson, Roppe, VPI or approved equal complying with FS SS-W-40, Type I. Style: Cove with top-set toe for use with resilient flooring, straight with no toe for use with carpet 2. Height 44inches. 3. Lengths: Coils in lengths standard with manufacturer but not less than 100-feet 4. Exterior Comers: Pre-molded or formed on job at installer's option. 5. Interior Comers: Pre-molded or formed on job at installer's option. 6. Ends: Pre-molded. 7. Color. To be selected by the Architect or Interior Designer. 2.02 RESILIENT RUBBER ACCESSORIES A. Provide carpet edge for glue down applications, carpet nosing, reducer strip for resilient flooring, file/carpet transition strips, and cover strips for resilient flooring to exposed concrete transitions. Omit only where an otherwise specified door threshold Is Included. B. As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standards. C. Color. As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standards. 2.03 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient flooring product and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications for preparing substrates indicated to receive products indicated. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products specified in this Section using methods indicated according to manufacturers installation directions. B. Apply resilient wag base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. Install wag base in lengths as long as practicable. Tightly adhere wag base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 1. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wag tease with manufacturers recommended adhesive filler material. 0407.06 RESIUENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES Progress CD Set 09652 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09652 VAtL, COLORADO RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 2. Install inside and exterior comers before installing straight pieces. 3. If preformed inside comers are not used, form on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where comer is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce snug fit to substrate. 4. If preformed outside comers are not used, form on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by shaving back of base at point where bending will occur. Remove a strip perpendicular to length of base and only deep enough to produce a snug fit without bends whitening or removal of more than half the thickness of wall base. C. Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials of type indicated and bond to substrates with adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that otherwise would be exposed. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation: Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by manufacturers of resilient product involved. Damp-mop resilient accessories to remove black marks and soil. B. Clean products specified in this Section not more than 4-days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project Clean products using method recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 RESUENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES Progress CD Set 09652-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09656 VAIL, COLORADO RESILIENT TILE FLOORING SECTION 09656 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes resilient floor tile. B. Related Sections: Resilient base and accessories are specified in Section 09652. 2. Water vapor emission control systems are specified in Section 09699. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for each type of product specified. Include certification by file manufacturer that products supplied for Me installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC's). B. Samples: For verification purposes in full-size files of each different color and pattern of resilient floor file specified, showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics. C. Maintenance data for resilient floor tile. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Floor Tile: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of file from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the work. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient I= file with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45-watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E648. 2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E662. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver tiles and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. . B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 5D-deg. F. and 90-deg. F. C. Store tiles on flat surfaces. Move files and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48-hours in advance of installation. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70-deg. F. in spaces to receive tiles for at least 48-hours prior to ration, during installation, and for not less than 48-hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55-deg. F. or in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Do not install tiles until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic during file installation. D. Provide for continuous ventilation during installation using as dose to 100-percent outside air as possible. 0407-06 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Progress CD Set 09656-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09656 VAIL, COLORADO RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Do not install ties over concrete slabs until the slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive as specified in Section 09699. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deriver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels dearly describing contents. 1 Furnish not less than three boxes of each different type and color of resilient file flooring installed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 RESILIENT TILE A. Bads-of=House Areas: 1. Wearing Surface: Smooth. 2. Thickness: 1/8-inch. 3. Size: 124nch x 12-inch. 4. Color and Pattern: To be selected by the Architect. B. Computer Rooms: Armstrong "Exceton SDT' or approved equal static control file flooring. 1. Wearing Surface: Smooth. 2. Thickness: 1/84nch. 3. Size: 124nch x 12-inch. 4. Color and Pattern: To be selected b y the Architect C. Public Areas: As specified in Section 09001 and as selected by the Interior Designer. 2.02 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Concrete Slab Primer. Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. B. Trowelable Undedayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by file manufacturer for applications hxficated. C. Adhesives (Cements): Water-resistant type recommended by file manufacturer to suit resilient floor tile products and substrate conditions indicated. D. Refer to Section 09652 for transition and reducer strips to adjacent flooring materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine areas where installation of tiles will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for the installation and comply with tile manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials whose presence would interfere with bonding of adhesive. Verify that concrete subfloors comply with 0407-06 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Progress CD Set 09656-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09656 VAIL, COLORADO RESILIENT TILE FLOORING requirements specified in Section 09699. 2. Finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Division 3 for slabs receiving resilient flooring. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits of any kind. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive tile. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per ble manufacturer's directions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush. D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by tiles immediately before file installation. Following cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. E. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with Die manufacturer's installation directions and other requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of file installation included in Project. B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so ties at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths at perimeter that equal less than one-half of a tile. Install files square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated. C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction unless otherwise indicated or directed by the Architect or Interior Designer. D. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. E. Extend files into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. G. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates without producing open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections in completed file installation. H. Use full spread of adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with file manufacturer's directions including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. Hand roll tiles where required by file manufacturer. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing file installation: 0407-06 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Progress CD Set 09656 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09656 VAIL, COLORADO RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by file manufacturers. 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by resilient floor file manufacturer. 4. Damp-mop tile to remove black marks and soil. B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage . from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended by file manufacturer. 1. Cover tiles with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion 2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over tiles. Place plywood or hardboard panels over tiles and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. C. Clean tiles not more than 4-days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended b establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project Clean tiles using method recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION J 04-07-06 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Progress CD Set 09656 - 4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 09671 • ELASTOMERIC LIQUID FLOORING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION SECTION 09671 ELASTOMERIC LIQUID FLOORING A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing fluid-applied elastomeric flooring in mechanical equipment rooms over habitable spaces and where scheduled. B. Related Sections: 1. Water vapor emission control systems are specified in Section 09699. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: 124nch square samples of elastomeric flooring in selected color showing applied thickness, texture and color. Prepare samples on plywood, hardboard, or particleboard. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria: Elastomerc flooring shall be UL rated Class A, in conformance with ASTM E108. B. Manufacturer. Minimum 5 years prior production and installation of specified type of elastomerc flooring. C. Installer: Elastomeric flooring materials shall be installed by an applicator approved and trained by the materials manufacturer. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A Deliver and store materials in manufacturer's unopened containers and padding, identified with manufacturer's name, and name and type of material. Containers shall contain UL label. B. Follow additional instructions of the manufacturer. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A Proceed with work only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed. B. Weather Conditions: Proceed with installation when weather conditions are in compliance with manufacturer's recommended limitations. C. Pre-Installation Conference: Meet at Project site prior to commencement of work and review requirements for work and conditions which could interfere with successful performance. Where required for warranty, require manufacturer's technical representative to participate in conference.. D. Provide for continuous ventilation during installation using as dose to 100-percent outside air as possible. 1.06 WARRANTY A Fumish manufacturers warranty signed by the applicator and authorized representative of manufacturer, warranting elastomeric flooring materials for 3-years against failures and subsequent leakage resulting from normal exposure, excluding failures due to unusual weather, failure of substrate, or abuse. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ELASTOMERIC FLOORING A. Approved Manufacturers: Crossfiell Products Corp.'Dex-O-Tex M-E Floor" or approved equal. 04-07-06 ELASTOMERIC LIQUID FLOORING Progress CD Set 09671-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09671 VAIL, COLORADO ELASTOMERIC LIQUID FLOORING B. Material: Multi-layered trowel applied waterproof flooring surfacing composed of a primer bonds oat, waterproof membrane, traffic surfacing, and finish coats, conforming to the following standards: 1. Traffic surface binder and all rubber emulsions shall be compounded with an aqueous synthetic rubber liquid containing no hydrocarbon solvents. 2. Aggregate for traffic surface coating shall be suitable graded mineral aggregate passing a #20 mesh sieve and retained on a #80 mesh sieve. 3. Fabric used as a reinforcement for waterproof base and floor shall be 7-112-oz. woven polypropylene fabric. 4. Final finish dressing shall be a single component, water-phase acrylic latex emulsion material, pigmented and of a consistency suitable for roller application. C. Color. As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. D. Physical Properties: 1. Weight 1.65-lbs. per sq. ft. 2. Freeze-Thaw, ASTM C67: No breakage or weight loss. 3. Tensile Strength, ASTM D1117: a. Elongation Dry: 29.0-percent b. Breakload Dry: 70-lbs. per inch. C. Elongation Wet: 31.0-percent d. Breakload Wet: 67-lbs. per inch. 4. Waterproofness, CTI test method: 50-lbs per inch water pressure with no transmission. 5. Strip Adhesion: 1 9.2-lbs. per inch. 6. Indentation Characteristics, MIL-D-3134: a. Steady Load: <5-percent b. Impacted Load: No cracking or delamination. 7. Flammability, ASTM E84: Flame spread 50. 8. Chemical Resistance, ASTM D2299: a. Industrial Detergent: No change in texture or color. b. Salt (20%): No change in texture or color. Q Ammonia Solution (5%): No change in texture or color. d. Murratic Acid (10%): No change in texture or color. e. Chlorine (10%): No change in texture or color. f. Kerosene: No change in texture or color. g. Turpentine: Slight temporary softening of surface. h. Paint Thinner. Slight temporary softening of surface. 007.06 ELASTOMERIC LIQUID FLOORING Progress CD Set 09671-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09671 VAIL, COLORADO ELASTOMERIC LIQUID FLOORING 9. Volatile Organic Content (VOC): None. E. Thickness: Nominal 3/16-inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for preparation of substrates to receive etastomeric flooring. B. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to work. C. Verify that concrete slabs have a finish approved by elastomeric flooring manufacturer. D. Verity that concrete surfaces have been cured by water curing method. Curing compounds or chemical curing agents shall not be used; coordinate with Division 3. E. Prepare and seal cracks in accordance with elastomeric flooring manufacturer's recommendations. F. Test substrate for moisture and pH content. Comply with additional requirements specified in Section 09699. G. Mask off adjoining surfaces not to receive elastomeric flooring, and close off drains to prevent spillage and migration of liquid outside membrane area. H. Apply base coat of membrane around pipes, penetrations, and at vertical junctions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A General: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions, including surface preparation, treatment, flashing, reinforcement, and surfacing. B. Begin installation of elastomeric flooring only in presence of manufacturer's technical representative where terms of warranty require. C. Apply synthetic rubber waterproof membrane solution at all vertical junctures. Embed polypropylene fabric into membrane liquid. D. Apply synthetic rubber waterproof membrane solution with polypropylene fabric reinforcement to entire area to be coated. Overlap all seams a minimum of 2-inches. E. Trowel apply elasticized resin emulsion and aggregate composition traffic surfacing over all surfaces previously covered with waterproof membrane. Sand surface to remove trowel marks or small surface imperfections. F. Roller apply two coats of final finish dressing to a uniform finish. G. Finished floor surfacing shad be uniform in color and texture. H. Continue floor surfacing up walls to a height of flinches unless otherwise indicated. 3.03 PERFORMANCE TESTING A Before elastomeric flooring has attained its final set, verify applied thickness by use of a mil thickness gauge. Apply additional membrane material where required to result in specified thickness. B. After installation, visually inspect for voids, damage or rupture. Repair as required. 3.04 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Remove spilled and splattered materials immediately as work progresses. B. Do not allow pedestrian traffic on completed membranes for a period of 24-hours after application is completed. 0407.06 ELASTOMERIC LIQUID FLOORING Progress CD Set 09971-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 09671 ELASTOMERIC LIQUID FLOORING C. Protect installation as required to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at time of final acceptance and after completion of other construction work. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 ELASTOMERIC LIQUID FLOORING Progress CD Set 09671-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09676 VAIL, COLORADO EPOXY FLOORING SECTION 09676 - EPOXY FLOORING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing epoxy flooring, consisting of two-component epoxy primer, three-component mortar consisting of epoxy resin, acing agent and finely graded quartz sifica aggregate, three-component epoxy undercoat, colored quartz silica aggregate broadcast, and a two-component clear epoxy sealer. B. Related Sections: 1. Elastomeric liquid flooring is specified in Section 09671. 1.02 SUBMITTALS " A. Product Data Furnish manufacturers technical data, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each resinous flooring material required. Include certification indicating compliance of materials with requaements. B. Samples: 12-inch-square samples showing approximate applied thickness, texture, color and special conditions. C. Mock-Up Sample: After approval of 124nch square sample, prepare a mock-up of resinous flooring in a room or area selected by the Architect Make modifications as directed by the Architect until ratio of epoxy matrbr, quartz si ica aggregate and epoxy sealer produces the required slip resistance, texture and color. Approved mock-up shall serve as a standard for judging the acceptability of resinous flooring installed in the Project D. Maintenance Instructions: Furnish manufacturers printed instructions for maintenance of special flooring, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining. Include precautions against materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Materials: Provide resinous floor-covering materials produced by a single manufacturer capable of showing prior successful production and installation of specified materials for not less than 10-years. B. Applicator. Resinous floor-covering materials shall be installed by an applicator approved by the materials manufacturer, with a minimum of 5 Projects of similar size and complexity. C. Pre-Installation Conference: Arrange a meeting not less than 30-days prior to starting work. Attending shall be Contractor, Architect, and manufacturerlmstaller. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Proceed with work only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed. B. Proceed with installation when conditions will permit work to proceed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Do not permit smoking, open flame, or spark producing equipment in areas of application. D. Provide for continuous ventilation during installation, using as dose to 100-percent outside air as possible. 04-07-06 EPOXY FLOORING Progress CD Set 09676-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09676 VAIL, COLORADO EPOXY FLOORING E. Concrete substrate shall be cured far a minimum of 30-days. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURER A. Stonehard, Inc. °Stonshieid HRI" or approved equal. 2.02 RESINOUS FLOORING A. Material: Nominal 31164rich thick system comprised of a penetrating two-component epoxy Primer, three- component mortar consisting of epoxy resin, curing agent and finely graded silica aggregate, three-component epoxy undercoat, brightly colored quartz silica aggregate broadcast, and a two-component dear epoxy sealer. 1. Physical Properties: Provide flooring system in which physical properties of topping including aggregate, when tested in accordance with standards or procedures specified, are as follows: Compressive Strength, ASTM C579:10,000-psi Tensile Strength, ASTM 6307: 2,000-psi Flexural Strength, ASTM C580: 4,300-psi Hardness, ASTM D2240, Shore D Durometer. 85-90 Bond Strength, ASTM D4541: >400-psi Impact Resistance, ASTM D4226: >160-in.lbs. Abrasion Resistance, ASTM D4060, Taber Abrader CS-17 Wheel: 0.06-gm. Max. weight loss Coefficient of Friction, ASTM D2047:0.7-0.8 Flexural Modulus of Elasticity, ASTM C580: 2.0x106 psi. Flammability, ASTM D635: Self-extinguishing; extent of burning 0.254nches max. Thermal Coefficient of Linear Expansion, ASTM C531:1.8x10-5 infun deg. C. Water Absorption, ASTM 0413: 0.1-percent Heat Resistance Limitation:140iieg. F. for continuous exposure; 200-deg. F. for intermittent spills B. Color and surface texture shall be as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards and shall match approved mock-up sample. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions fox preparation of substrates to receive resinous flooring. B. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to work by sandblasting, acid-etching or mechanical grinding. Remove resulting residue. C. Prepare cracks and joints as recommended by the resinous flooring manufacturer. D. Test soubstrate for excessive moisture content, in manner recommended by manufacturer. E Mask off adjoining surfaces not to receive resinous flooring, and close off floor drains to prevent spillage and migration of materials outside application area. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of resinous floor covering. 04-07 06 EPOXY FLOORING 09676 Progress CD Set 2 c PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09676 VAIL, COLORADO EPOXY FLOORING B. Primer: Mix and apply primer over property prepared substrate in accordance with manufacturer's installation procedures and coverage rates. Coordinate timing of primer application with application of troweled mortar to ensure optimum adhesion between resinous flooring materials and substrate. C. Troweled Mortar: Mix mortar material according to manufacturer's recommended procedures. Uniformly spread mortar over substrate using manufacturer's designed screed box adjusted to manufacturer's recommended height Hand trowel-apply mixed material over freshly primed substrate using steel finishing trowels or power trowel material. D. Undercoat Remove any surface irregularities by lightly abrading and vacuuming the floor surface. Mix and apply undercoat with strict adherence to manufacturer's installation procedures and coverage rates. E. Broadcast Immediately broadcast quartz silica aggregate into the undercoat using manufacturer's specialty designed spraycaster. Comply with manufacturer's installation procedures and coverage rates and as required to match approved mock-up samples. F. Sealer: Remove excess un-bonded granules by lightly brushing and vacuuming the floor surface. Ma and apply sealer with strict adherence to manufacturer's installation procedures. G. Provide 64nch high integral coved base where scheduled. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner obtains the right to invoke the following material testing procedure at any time, and any number of times during flooring application. B. The Owner will engage service of an independent testing laboratory to sample materials being used on the Project. Samples of material will be taken, identified and sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. C. Testing laboratory will perform tests for any of characteristics specified, using applicable testing procedures. D. If test results show materials being used do not comply with specified requirements, the Owner or Architect may direct Contractor to stop work, remove non-complying materials; pay for testing; reapply flooring materials to properly prepared surfaces which had previously been coated with unacceptable materials. 3.04 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Remove soled and splattered materials immediately as work progresses. B. Protect installation as required to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at time of final acceptance and after completion of other construction work. C. Prohibit traffic on resinous floor covering for 4&hours after installation. END OF SECTION 0407-06 EPOXY FLOORING Progress CD Set 09676 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09699 VAIL, COLORADO WATER VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 09699 - WATER VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work of this Section includes retaining and paying for an independent Testing Laboratory to perform moisture vapor emission testing on new concrete slabs to receive resilient flooring and elastomeric liquid flooring. B. Related Sections: 1. Resilient We flooring is specified in Section 09656. 2. Elastomeric liquid flooring is specified in Section 09671. 1.02 SYSTEM DECRIPTION A. Proprietary three-component, low viscosity synthetic polymer baffler direcfly applied to prepared concrete surfaces for permanent inner matrix suppression of moisture mold alkalinity. Formulated chemistry shall form a chemical and mechanical linkage/ barrier to concrete substrates, resistant to extreme thermal expansion, unlimited moisture vapor (30-pounds) and alkalinity (pH 14) levels. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Furnish product data on treatment materials proposed for use, test reports, and application instructions. B. Test Diagram: Prepare a moisture report of each test area. Include name of company performing the test; types of testing instruments used; floor plan of building with each test location identified; starting date, time, and beginning weight; estimate of building temperature; stopping date, time, and ending weight; and computed pounds of emission, including equations. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Manufacturer's trained personnel or factory-trained authorized installer. Installer shall have a minimum of 5-years experience in the installation of concrete vapor emission control systems. B. Manufacturer: Minimum 5-years experience producing moisture vapor control emission products. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply water vapor control system treatment materials within a temperature range of 65-deg. F. and 100-deg. F. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranty failure of finish flooring system due to concrete water vapor errnission to the Installed system for a period of 10-years from date of Substantial Completion. Include replacement of finish flooring material, and re- application of adhesive and vapor emission control system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Advanced Moisture Control, Inc., Floor Seal Technology, Inc., Koester or. approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Concrete Moisture Mold Alkalinity Barrier Properties: 1. Moisture Vapor: Unlimited 30-lbs., no upper limits 2. Alkalinity: Unlimited (14pH) control, no damage to barrier 0407-06 WATER VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL SYSTBIAS Progress CD Set 09699-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09699 VAIL, COLORADO WATER VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS 3. Concrete Adhesion: Inner matrix chemical & mechanical bond 4. ASTM F1869 Post-Installation Testing Results: 2.0 (±0.50) 5. ASTM D1308 Acid & Alkali Testing: Pass, no effect on material 6. ASTM D4541 Adhesion Strength: 500 PSI (100% cohesive failure) 7. ASTM C1028 Coefficient of Friction: Dry 0.50 8. Viscosity: 1,700 cps (Self-levering) 9. Tensile Strength: 6,000- to 8,000-psi 10. Compressive Yield: 12,000-psi 11. Ultimate Flexural: 10,000-psi 12. Fire Resistance: a. Smoke Development None (0) b. Flame Spread: Nil (5) C. Fuel Contribution: None (0) B. Testing Equipment: Manufacturers standard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Testing: 1. Perform pre-installation testing of the concrete slab by a calcium chloride test prior to the application of specified water vapor emission control system treatment. Testing shall be performed by a qualified testing personnel and Testing Laboratory. 2. Perform three tests for the first 1,000-sq. ft. of flooring and one additional test for each additional 1,000-sq. ft. of flooring. Conduct around the perimeters of the room, at columns and where moisture may be evident a. Moisture: Perform ASTM F1869 anhydrous caldum chloride testing on dean concrete slabs; free of curing, sealing, adhesive residue, Waller and surface contaminates in a area 20- inches by 204ndies 24-hours before test kits are installed. b. Alkalinity: Perform ASTM F710 alkalinity testing during retrieval of moisture tests, directly inside dome area by placing several drops of manufacture provided solution to concrete surface. Wait 60-seconds and apply digital LCD pH meter. Record results tD the nearest hundredth on final test report. C. Temperature, Humidity and Surface Thermometer. Document temperature, humidity and surface temperature at installation and retrieval of moisture kits on final testing report. Note dew point temperature for control barrier installations. 3. Tests shall determine the change in weight of moisture-absorbing anhydrous calcium chloride and the results shall represent the amount of moisture transmitting out of the concrete slab area. The value shall be expressed in pounds and shall be equivalent to the weight of the water that is emitted from a 1,000-sq. ft. concrete slab area in a 24-hour period of time. 04-07.06 WATER VAPOR EMISSION COJTROL SYSTEMS Progress CD Set 09699-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09699 VAIL, COLORADO WATER VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS B. If calcium chloride testing reveals water vapor emission levels greater than 3-pound per 1,000-sq. ftfor resilient or elastomeric liquid flooring, apply sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Concrete surfaces to be tested shag be clew and free of residue, debris, and sealing compounds. B. Clean and prepare substrate surfaces to receive floor sealer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 APPLICATION OF VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM A. Apply boor sealer by squeegee, spray, and/or roller method to saturate the concrete surface. Apply materials in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Coverage rates shall be in accordance with manufacturers recommendations based on concrete density and Porosity. C. Allow materials to penetrate and cure, and re-test for vapor emission levels. D. Unless more restrictive emission levels are required by finish flooring manufacturers, do not apply resilient or elastomedc liquid flooring until the vapor emission has been reduced to 34bs./1,000-sq. ftJ24-hrs. or less. END OF SECTION 0407-06 Progress CD Set WATER VAPOR EMISSION C04TROL SYSTEMS 09699-3 F PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09820 VAIL, COLORADO ACOUSTICAL INSULATION AND SEALANTS SECTION 09820 - ACOUSTICAL INSULATION AND SEALANTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for fumishing and installing acoustics insulation and acoustical sealants. B. Related Sections: 1. Thermal insulation is specified in Section 07210. 2. Roof board insulation is specified in Section 07220. 3. Firestopping insulation is specified in Section 07840. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance and flammability ratings specified. B. Acoustic Performance: Acoustic Insulation shall be tested in accordance to ASTM C423 (Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method) with Type A(#4) mounting, and shall achieve the following acoustic performance: Octave Band Center Frequencies (Hz) 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC 0.20 0.60 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.95 0.85 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation from physical damage and from becoming wet or soiled. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION A. Unfaced Mineral/Glass Fiber BlanketBatt Acoustical Insulation: Acoustical insulation produced by combining mineral/glass fibers with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C665, Type I. 1. Surface Buming Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 25 and 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Approved Manufacturers: Johns Manville'Sound Control Batts', Owens Coming'Sound Attenuation Batts" or approved equal. 3. Thickness: 34nches unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Non-drying, non-hardening, non-skinning, non-staining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound; Pecora Corp. 'BA-98", Tremco Inc. "Tremco Acoustical Sealant or approved equal. 0¢.07-06 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION AND SEALANTS Progress CD Set 09820-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 09820 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION AND SEALANTS B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed Joints: Non-oxidizing, skinnable, paintable, gunnable sealant recommended for sealing interior exposed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound; Pecora Corp. "AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant', USG "Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant" or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation conditions. B. Do not install insulation until building is sufficiently enclosed or protected against absorption of moisture by the insulation, and do not install insulation unless supporting framing and construction is in a thoroughly dry condition. C. Install snugly between framing members with ends snugly fitted between units and against adjacent oonsbuction. D. Carefully cut and fit insulation around pipes, conduit, and other obstructions and penetrations. E. Where door and window frames occur in framing, cut additional strips of insulation and hand-pack as required to fill voids in and around such frames. F. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated. Install sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 PROTECTION A. General: Protect installed insulation from harmful exposures and from physical damage. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION AND SEALANTS Progress CD Set 09820- 2 PROJECT #02028 C FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09840 VAIL, COLORADO ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS SECTION 09840 - ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing the following: Acoustical wall panels at ballroom and meeting rooms. 2. Acoustical wall panels at phone room/niches. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Fumish product data for each type of acoustical wall panel. B. Samples for Verification Purposes: 244nch square panels with selected fabric and finished edges. Include representative samples of installation devices and accessories. C. Layout Drawings: Elevations of walls to receive acoustical panels showing layout and joint pattern dimensions and details of attachment. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical wall panels with surface-burning characteristics as specified, determined by testing assembled materials composed of facings and backings identical to those required for this Section, in accordance with ASTM E84, by a testing organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A Protect acoustical wall panels from excessive moisture in shipment, storage, and handling. Deliver in unopened bundles and store in a dry place with adequate air circulation. Do not deliver material to building until 'wet work' such as concrete and plaster have been completed and cured to a condition of equilibrium. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not begin installation until spaces to receive acoustical wall panels have been enclosed and maintained at approximately the same humidity and temperature conditions as planned for occupancy. Maintain temperature and humidity as recommended by panel manufacturer. B. Field Measurements: Check actual wall surfaces by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay in work. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 2-percent of the amount installed. Package with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS, GENERAL A. Fabricate panels to sizes and configurations indicated; attach facing materials to cores to produce installed panels with visible surfaces fully covered and free from wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive or other foreign matter. 0407.06 ACOUSMAL WALL PANELS Progress CD Set 09840-1 PROJECT #02028 SECTION 09840 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 1. Fabricate back-mounted panels in factory to exact sizes required to fit wall surfaces based on field measurements. B. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Overall height and width of panels: Plus or minus 1/164nch. C. Sound Absorption Performance: Provide acoustical wall panels with minimum noise reduction coefficients (NRC) specified, determined in accordance with ASTM C423. 2.02 BACK-MOUNTED ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS A. Bads-Mounted, Edge-Reinforced Wall Panels: 1. Approved Manufacturers: Capaul Corporation 'Solutions 600", Conwed'Respond ACT', StretchWall Products, Inc.'AFG700 PaneP or approved equal. 2. Construction: Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of facing material laminated to front, edges and back border of molded glass fiber board core, with edges chemically hardened to reinforce panel perimeter against warpage and damage. a. Core Density: 4- to 71pcf. 3. Thiidkness/NRC: Nominal overall panel thickness of 1-inch, with NRC of 0.80 for Type A (#4) mounting. 4. Facing Material: To be selected by the Architect or Interior Designer. 5. Panel Size: As indicated. 6. Edge and Comer Detail: Square unless otherwise indicated. B. Back-Mounting Accessories: Metal panel dip and base support bracket system consisting of 2-part panel dips, with one part of each dip mechanically attached to back of panel and the other part to wall substrate, designed to support panels laterally; and base support brackets designed to support full weight of panels; both designed to allow panel removal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install panels with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other panels, scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and penetrations. B. Comply with panel manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Tolerances: 1. Variation from Plumb and Level: Plus or minus 1/16-inch. 2. Variation of Joints from Hairline: Not more than 11164nch. 3.02 COMPLETION A. Clean soiled or discolored surfaces after Installation. B. Remove and replace damaged or improperly installed acoustical panels and replace with new as directed by the Architect 3.03 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that panels are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. J ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 0407-06 09840-2 Progress CD Set PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09840 VAIL, COLORADO ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS B. Replace panels that cannot be cleaned and repaired, as acceptable to the Architect. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS Progress CD Set 09640-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09890 VAIL, COLORADO SYNTHETIC PLASTER FINISH COAT SECTION 09890. SYNTHETIC PLASTER FINISH COAT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing exterior synthetic plaster finish coat over portland-cement plaster. B. Related Sections: 1. Portland-cement plaster is specified in Section 09220. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Sample for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard color charts and small scale samples indicating color and textures available. B. Samples for Verification Purposes: 24-inch x 24-inch square samples for each finish, color, and texture; prepare using same tools and technique to be used for installation. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Applicator: Approved by the manufacturer of the synthetic plaster finish coat material. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A Deriver products in original unopened packaging with legible identification. B. Store products in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight, protected from the elements and from damage. Store at a temperature of not less than 40-deg. F. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Application shall be in ambient temperatures above 38-deg. F. 2. Maintain a minimum ambient temperature of 38-deg. F. for at least 244hours after installation. 3. Schedule work to avoid application in direct sunlight B. Protection: 1. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces from damage during application of the synthetic piaster finish coat system. 2. Protect finished work from water penetration behind the system when stopping for the day or when completing an area. 04-07-06 SYNTHETIC PLASTER FINISH COAT Progress CD Set 09890-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SYNTHETIC PLASTER FINISH COAT SYSTEM SECTION 09890 SYNTHETIC PLASTER FINISH COAT A. Approved Manufacturer. STO Industries "Sto Powerflex Fine", "Freeform" or approved equal ready-mixed elastomeric textured wall coaling, smooth finish matching approved sample, custom color as selected by the AmhtecL B. Physical Properties: 1. Elongation: 200-percent at 28-days, ASTM D412. 2. Flexibility. Pass %inch mandrel bend @ -30, 26, 32, 86-deg. F., ASTM D522. 3. Surface Burning: Flame spread 15, smoke developed 5, ASTM E84. 4. Water Vapor Permeability: 21.7 perms, ASTM D1653 at 28-days. 5. Water Absorption: 0.375-ozlsq. ftJhr., DIN 52-617 at 1 week. 6. Wind Driven Rain: No water penetration, Fed TT-C-5556, 24-hour driving rain. 7. Dirt Pick-up Resistance: 89-percent reflectance retained. 8. Adhesion: 95-psi to concrete, ASTM C297 modified, at 28-days. 9. Tensile Strength: 60-psi, ASTM D412 at 28,days. B. Primer: As recommended by finish coat manufacturer for priming portland-cement plaster substrate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Cement plaster substrate shall be dean, dry, structurally sound and property cured. B. Surfaces shall be free of dirt, ol, grease, mildew, fungus, efflorescence, and other contaminants. C. Remove surface contaminants by wire brushing, sandblasting, waterblasting, or other means approved by synthetic plaster finish coat manufacturer. 3.02 MIXING A. Mix synthetic plaster finish coat with a dean, rust-free high speed mixer to a uniform consistency. A small amount of dean water may be added to aid workability. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do rat apply separate batches side-by-side. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply primer with roller, brush, or suitable spray equipment to properly prepared cement plaster in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Tint primer to final color. 04.07-06 SYNTHETIC PLASTER FINISH COAT Progress CD Set 09890 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 09890 SYNTHETIC PLASTER FINISH COAT B. Synthetic Plaster Finish Coat 1. Apply finish in continuous application, working to a wet edge to eliminate cold joints. 2. Trowel apply finish to the primed substrate using a stainless steel trowel tD a ftuckness slighry thicker than the largest aggregate size. 3. Scrape the material down to a uniform thickness no greater than the largest aggregate size. 4. Achieve final texture by floating in a figure eight motion with appropriate trowel. C. Protect completed finish coat from exposure to rain and freezing until completely dry. 3.04 TOUCH-UP A. Touch-up areas where synthetic plaster finish coat has been damaged. Touch-up shall not be obvious. 3.05 COMPLETION A Exposed surfaces shall be clean and free from scratches, dents, toot marks, stains, discoloration and other defects and damage. 3.06 CLEANUP A. Remove extra materials from jobsite. B. Clean adIacent materials and surfaces and the work area of foreign materials resulting from the work. END OF SECTION 04.07.06 Progress CD Set SYNTHETIC PLASTER FINISH COAT 09890 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOURSEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09900 VAIL, COLORADO PAINTING SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatments specified in other Sections. 2. Work includes painting exposed pipes and ducts, rooftop equipment, hangers, exposed steel and iron, and primed metal surfaces of Mechanical and Electrical equipment, and general sheet metal work, except as otherwise indicated or specified. 3. Work includes painting hardware specified as primed (USP or 600). 4. Work includes sanding shop-primed surfaces and applying specified primer and finish coats. 5. 'Paint means coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. B. Surfaces Not to Be Painted: 1. Pre-finished items, including but not limited to acoustic materials, and finished mechanical and electrical equipment, including light fixtures, switchgear and distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and inaccessible areas, furred areas, pipe spaces, and duct shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces such as anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials. 4. Moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts. C. Following categories of work are included under other Sections: Shop priming ferrous metal items including structural steel, metal fabrications, hollow metal work and similar items. The work of this Section includes sanding and applying specified primer on all shop- primed surfaces exposed to view in the completed work. Shop priming of fabricated components such as architectural woodwork, wood casework and shop-f- abricated or factory-built mechanical and electrical equipment or accessories. Piping identification is specified in Division 15. D. Do not paint over code-required labels, equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Certification: Furnish certification by the paint manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling the use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). B. Samples: Furnish samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 04-07-06 PAWMG Progress CD Set 09900-1 PROJECT #02028 FOURSEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09900 VAIL, COLORADO PAINTING Furnish samples on the following substrates for review of color and texture only: a. Painted Wood: Two 12-inch square samples of each color and material on hardboard. Stained or Natural Wood: Two flinch x 84nch samples of natural and stained wood finish on actual wood samples. C. Product Data Specified paint systems are those of Dunn Edwards. If other paint manufacturers are proposed and accepted by the Architect furnish product comparison charts showing that proposed paint systems are equal to the specified materials in number of coats, type of paint, and sheen. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicators Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent B. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use within recommended limits. C. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of coatings system for various substrates. Upon request, furnish information or characteristics of finish materials to be used. D. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Comply with applicable rules and regulations of governing agencies for air quality control. Regulatory changes may affect the formulation, availability, or use of specified coatings. Confirm availability of coatings to be used prior to start of painting. E. Field Samples: On interior and exterior wall surfaces provide full-coat finish samples on at least 100-sq. ft. of surface, as directed, until required sheen, color and texture is obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work. Approved samples will be used as a standard for the Project. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name, batch number, color, and directions. B. Store materials in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers in a dean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. C. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Ensure that workers and work areas are adequately protected from fire hazards and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application of paints. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply water-base paints when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50-deg. F. and 90-deg. F., unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45-deg. F. and 90-deg. F., unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Do not apply paint in rain, fog or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85-percent, or to damp or wet surfaces, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. D. Provide adequate ventilation during interior painting using as dose to 100-percent outside air as possible. 0407-06 PAWM Progress CD Set 09900-2 PROJECT #02028 FOURSEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09900 VAIL, COLORADO PAINTING 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. In addition to materials for completion of the work, furnish 5-gallons of additional materials for each type and color of opaque paint used in public, guestroom and back of house areas. B. Furnish extra materials from same production lots or color runs used in the work. Furnish in containers factory sealed and labeled. Identify each container with Project name and type of material. C. Deriver materials and an inventory fist just prior to Substantial Completion and store where directed by Owner. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, Dunn Edwards, Frazee, ICI, Sherwin Williams, Cabot, or approved equal. B. Dunn Edwards products are specified as a standard of quality against which the equivalency of other products will be determined by the Architect 2.02 MATERIALS A Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application. B. Material Quality: Provide best quality grade of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a standard, best-grade product will not be acceptable. 2.03 COLORS AND SHEENS A Paint colors and sheens not scheduled shall match color chips furnished by the Architect and/or Interior Designer. At least 15-percent of required colors may be deep tone colors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Examine substrates and conditions under which painting is to be applied. Surfaces receiving paint shall be thoroughly dry before paint is applied. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime as required. Notify Architect prior to applying barrier coats. 2. Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. 3. Start of painting will be construed as the applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Protection: Protect work of other Sections against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect, 1. Provide 'Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly-painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. 2. Remove or protect hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, righting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finish-painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Following completion of painting, reinstall removed items. 04-07-06 PAINTING Progress CD Set 09900-3 PROJECT #02028 FOURSEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09900 VAIL, COLORADO PAINTING 3. At completion of work of other Sections, touch-up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION A Concrete and Masonry: Prepare surfaces to be painted by removing surface contaminates. a. Remove efflorescence with stiff bristle brush, wire brushing, wiping, sandblasting or add washing and rinsing. Allow to dry. b. Remove chalk, dust, dirt, asphalt, tar or excessive mortar by scraping or wire brushing. C. Remove rust, grease or oil by solvent cleaning or sandblasting. d. Treat concrete surfaces which are highly glazed or where traces of form release agents are present with a preparation of one-part concentrated mudatic add, 4-parts water and one-part detergent or as recommended by parting compound manufacturer. Remove acid with water. Allow to dry. e. Remove stains on concrete resulting from weathering or corroded metals, with a solution of 2-oz. sodium methasilicate in one-gallon water. Wet stained areas with water before application of solution. Allow to dry. f. Prepare concrete floors to be painted by cleaning free of grease, oil, dirt, wax or other foreign matter using TSP or other suitable cleaning agents. New concrete shall be at least 60-days old prior to application. Treat concrete with dilute muriatic acid followed by thorough rinsing with water to control efflorescence and to increase surface porosity. B. Plaster: Clean surfaces free from grit, loose plaster and surface irregularities. Determine alkalinity and moisture content by performing appropriate tests. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's literature or where pH exceeds 10. C. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. 1. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recom- mended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dry. 2. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, under- sides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and panelling. 3. When transparent finish is required, badkpdme with spar varnish. 4. Backpdme paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wetwall construction occurs on backside. 5. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer imme- diately upon delivery. D. Ferrous Metal: Clean ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop-coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC). Blast surfaces dean as recommended by the paint system manufacturer and according to requirements of SSPC specification SSPC-SP 10. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled dean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. 007.06 PAINTING Progress CD Set 09900-4 PROJECT #02028 FOURSEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09900 VAIL, COLORADO PAINTING 3. Sand shop-applied prime coats to a smooth surface, ready to receive specified primer and finish coats. E. Galvanized Metals: Clean with non-petroleum-based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. F. Gypsum Wallboard: Clean surfaces of dust, dirt, grease, oil and other foreign matter and dust dean. 3.04 MATERIALS PREPARATION A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. B. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a dean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. C. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and strain material before using. D. Use thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a fighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficcientdifferences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.05 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime coats. 2. The number of coats required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply bilowing coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between appka- tions where required to produce a smooth even surface. 3. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or. other conditions show through final coat, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners shall receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture. 5. Paint surfaces behind permanently-fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat before final installation of equipment 6. Paint visible surfaces of ducts where visible through registers or grilles with a flat, non-specular black paint 7. Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish doors on top, bottom and side edges same as faces. Where openings into rooms have different finishes, finish door edges as directed by the Architect. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first-coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation. 1. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied. 04.07-06 PAKMG Progress CD Set 09900-5 PROJECT #02028 FOURSEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09900 VAIL, COLORADO PAINTING 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manu- facturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in stairways and loading dock areas. Finish to match adjoining wall or ceiling surfaces. 1. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, piping, hangers, and supports; heat exchangers; tanks; ductwork; insulation; supports; motors and mechanical equipment; air grilles and diffusers; and accessory items. 2. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to conduit and fittings, panels, and switchgear. F. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas to assure a finish coat with no bum-through or other defects. G. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness and other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. H. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean-Up: During progress of work, remove discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at end of each work day. B. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping; do not scratch or damage finished surfaces. 3.07 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metal, Aaylic Semigloss: First Coat: 43-4 Bloc-Rust Second Coat: 42-1 Compo Third Coat: W 901 Permasheen B. Galvanized and Zinc Alloy Metal, Acrylic Semigloss: Pretreatment: GE123 Galva-Etch First Coat: QD43.7 Galv-Alum Second Coat: 42-1 Compo Third Coat W 901 Permasheen C. Wood / Fiber Cement, Acrylic Low Sheen: First Coat W 708 E-Z Prime Second and Third Coats: W 411 Suprema D. Wood, Alkyd Opaque Stain: First and Second Coats: W704. Acd-Flat E. Wood, Semi-Transparent Stain: First and Second Coats: Okon WeatherPro WPT3 007-06 PAINTING Progress CD Set 09900-6 PROJECT #02028 FOURSEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 09900 VAIL, COLORADO PAINTING F. Concrete, Acclic Flat: First Coat: Second and Third Coats: G. Concrete Block, 100% Ac First Coat: Second and Third Coats: 3.08 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE W 709 Eff-Stop W 701 Permasheen rylic Emulsion Flat: W 305 Blocfit W 701 Evershield A. Concrete, Acrylic Flat: First Coal: W 101 Vinytastic Second and Third Coats: W 401 Decovel B. Concrete Block, Acrylic Flat First Coat W 305 Bloclil Second and Third Coats: W 401 Decovel C. Wood, Non-Blocking Acrylic Semigloss: First Coat E22-1 Super U-365 Second and Third Coats: W901 Permasheen D. Wood, Clear Satin Finish: First Coat: V 106A Synseal Second and Third Coats: V 199 Synsatin II E. Wood, Stain and Satin Varnish: First Coat V 108 Stainseal Second Coat V 106A Synseal Third and Fourth Coats: V 199 Synsatin II F. Gypsum Wallboard, Latex Eggshell: First Coat W 101 Vinylastic Second and Third Coats: W 440 Decosheen G. Gypsum Wallboard, Latex Semigloss: First Coat: W 101 Vinylastic Second and Third Coats: W 450 Decogio H. Ferrous Metal, Non-Blocking Acrylic Semigloss: First Coat 43-4 BlocrRust Second Coat E22-1 Super U-365 Third Coat W901 Permasheen END OF SECTION 04-07-06 Progress CD Set PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10100 VAIL, COLORADO VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS SECTION 10100 - VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing the following types of visual display boards: 1. Porcelain enamel marker boards. 2. Taakboards. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each material and component part, including data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Include sections of typical trim members and dimensioned elevations. Show anchors, grounds, reinforcement, accessories, layout and installation details. C. Samples: Full range of color samples for each type of marker board, trim and accessory. Furnish 124nch square samples of sheet materials and 12-inch lengths of trim members for color verification after selections have been made. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer. Unless otherwise acceptable to Architect, furnish marker boards and tack and clip strips by one manufacturer for the entire Project PART 2 - PRODUCTS PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PORCELAIN ENAMEL WHITE BOARDS A. Approved Manufacturers: Polyvision "Traditional Plus Series 500", Ailiancewall Corp., Carolina Chalkboard Co., Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc., Greensteel, Inc. or approved equal. B. Construction: Balanced, high-pressure-laminated porcelain enamel chalkboards of 3-ply construction consisting of face sheet, core material, and backing. 1. Face Sheet: 24-gauge enameling grade steel, exposed face coated with primer, ground coat, and low gloss white color cover, concealed face coated with primer and ground coat Cover coat shall be manufacturer's special writing surface with gkuss finish intended for use with liquid felt-tipped markers. 2. Core: 3/84nch thick particleboard or 1144wich thick tempered hardboard. 3. Backing Sheet: 0.015-inch thick aluminum sheet. C. Metal Trim: Manufacturer's standard snap-on extruded aluminum trim, with no visible screws or exposed joints. Miter comers to a neat, hairline closure. Provide continuous sold extrusion-type marker tray with ribbed section, smoothly curved exposed ends and solid aluminum end closures. Finish trim with dear anodized finish. Furnish each markerboard with 12 assorted color markers and felt eraser. 2.02 TACKBOARDS A. Approved Manufacturers: Polyvision "Traditional Plus Series 500', Carolina Chalkboard Co., Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc., Greensteel, Inc. or approved equal. B. Construction: Single-layer, 1/4-inch thick, seamless, compressed fine-grain bulletin board quality natural cork sheet, face sanded, color to be selected by the Architect 0407-06 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS Progress CD Set 10100-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10100 VAIL, COLORADO VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS C. Metal Trim: Manufacturers standard snap-on extruded aluminum trim, with no visible screws or exposed joints. Miter comers to a neat, hairline closure. Finish trim with dear anodized finish. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Porcelain Enamel Markerboards: Laminate facing sheet and backing sheet to core material under pressure with flexible, waterproof adhesive. B. Provide factory-assembled units unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect Unless otherwise noted, each markerboard shall be furnished with full length map rail and dip ship. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Deliver factory-built units completely assembled in one piece without joints. B. Install units as indicated and in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Maintain perimeter lines straight, plumb, and level. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories required for installation. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Verify that accessories required for each unit have been properly installed. B. Clean units in accordance with manufacturers instructions. END OF SECTION 04.07-06 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS Progress CD Set 10100-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10160 VAIL, COLORADO TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION 10160 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing plastic laminate floor anchored manufactured toilet compartments and plastic laminate wall hung urinal screens at back-of-house areas. B. Related Sections: Toilet accessories are specified in Section 10800. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data for materials, fabrication, and installation, include catalog arts of anchors, hardware, fastenings, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Furnish for fabrication and erection of assemblies not fully described by product drawings, templates, and installation instructions. C. Samples: Full range of color samples for each type of unit required. Furnish 6-inch square samples of each color and finish on same substrate to be used in the work, for color verification after selections have been made. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of Shop Drawings and fabrication where possible. Allow for adjustments within specified tolerances wherever taking field measurements before fabrication might delay the work. B. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchors to be built into other work; coordinate delivery to avoid delay. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Accurate Partition Corp., All American Metal Corp., Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., Global Steel Products Corp., Knickerbocker Partition Corp., Sanymetal Products Co., Weis-Robart Partitions, Inc. or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discoloration, telegraphing of core material, and other imperfections are not acceptable. B. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD-3, minimum 0.0504nch thick, colors to be selected by the Architect or Interior Designer. C. Core Material for Plastic Laminate: Manufacturer's standard particleboard or plywood, in thickness to provide nominal dimension of 1-inch for all components. D. Pilaster Shoes and Caps: ASTM All 67, Type 30ZGN stainless steel, not less than 3-inches high, 20-gauge, finished to match hardware. E. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design for attaching panels to walls and pilasters, either chromium- -plated non-ferrous cast alloy or anodized aluminum. F. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories of chromium-plated non-ferrous cast alloy. 0407-06 TOILET COAPARTNEWS Progress CD Set 10160-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10160 NTS VAI COLORADO TOILET COMPARTMENTS G. Anchors and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, chromium-plated steel, or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft resistant type heads and nuts. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized, cadmium-plated, or other rust-resistant protective-coated steel. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system. Furnish units with cutouts, drilled holes, and internal reinforcement to receive partillon-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. B. Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24 nc h wide inswinging doors for regular stalls- and 34-inch wide dear opening outswinging doors at stalls equipped for use by the handicapped. C. Plastic Laminate Compartments and Screens: Pressure-laminate one-piece face sheets to core material with no splices or joints, and with edges straight and sealed. Seal exposed core material at cut-outs to protect against moisture. D. Floor-Supported Compartments: Provide galvanized steel anchorage devices, complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters, to permit structural connection at floor. Furnish shoe at each pilaster to conceal anchorage. E. Wall-Hung Urinal Screens: Provide panel units in sizes indicated, of same construction and finish as partition system panels. F. Hardware: 1. Hinges: Cutout inset type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90-deg. Provide gravity type, spring-action cam type, or concealed torsion rod type. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit, designed for emergency access, with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper. 4. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence. 2. Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb, and level. 3. Provide clearances of not more than 1124nch between pilasters and panels, and not more than 1-inch between panels and walls. 4. Secure panels to walls with not loss than two stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. 5. Locate wall brackets so that holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or file joints. 6. Secure panels to pilasters with not less than two stirrup brackets located to align with stirrup brackets at wall. B. Floor-Supported Compartments: Set pilaster units with anchors having not less than 2-inch penetration into structural floor, unless otherwise recommended by partitian manufacturer. 04-07 TOILET COMPARTMENTS -06 10160 Progress CD Set -2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10160 VAIL, COLORADO TOILET COMPARTMENTS 2. Level, plumb, and tighten Installation. 3. Hang doors and adjust so that tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in dosed position. C. Urinal Screens: Attach with concealed anchoring devices, as recommended by manufacturer. Set units to provide support and to resist lateral impact 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Hardware Adjustment: 1. Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. 2. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30-degrees from closed position when unlatched. 3. Set hinges on out swinging doors and entrance swing doors to return to fully dosed position. B. Clean exposed surfaces of partitions using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer. Protect as required to prevent damage until final acceptance. END OF SECTION 0407-06 TOILET COMPARTMENTS Progress CD Set 10160-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10210 VAIL, COLORADO WALL LOUVERS SECTION 10210 - WALL LOUVERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing extruded aluminum drainable blade louvers. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Furnish shop drawings of louver units and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details showing profiles, angles, spacing of louver blades, unit dimensions related to wall openings and construction, free areas for each size, and profiles of frames at jambs, heads, and sills. B. Samples: 64nch square samples of each required finish. Prepare samples on metal of same gauge and alloy to be used in work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) recommendations for fabrication, construction details and installation procedures, except as otherwise indicated. B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of D1.2 "Structural Welding Code -Aluminum' and D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel'. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify size, location and placement of louver units prior to fabrication, and show on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Airotite Type K6774 or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM 8221, Alloy 6063-T5 or T52. C. Fastenings: Same material as items fastened or 300 series stainless steel. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with joined materials. Use Phipps flathead machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. D. Anchors and Inserts: Non-ferrous metal or hot-dp galvanized for exterior installations and as required for corrosion resistance. Use steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-"lace anchors. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic. 203 FABRICATION A. Provide louvers and accessories of design, materials, sizes, depth, arrangement, and metal thickness indicated or as required. B. Assemble louvers in shop to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as required for shipping and handling limitations. Mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance. 007-06 WALLLOUVERS Progress CD Set 10210-1 PROJECT #02028 10210 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION ERS VAIL, COLORADO WALL LOUVERS D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made forfabricatron and installation tolerances of louvers, adjoining construction, and perimeter sealant joints. E. Include supports, anchors, and accessories required for complete assembly. F. Provide sill extensions and loose sills made of same material as louvers where required for drainage to exterior and to prevent water penetrating to interior. G. Join frame members to one another and to stationary louver blades by welding, except where otherwise indicated or where field bolted connections between frame members are required. Maintain equal blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill. H. Louver Summary: Extrusion Thickness:.081-inch. 2. Blade Centers: 3-1/2-inches. 3. Blade Angle: 45-degrees. 4. Louver Depth: 4-inches. 5. Free Area: 46-percent for a 4- x 4-foot louver. 6. Size and Configuration: As indicated. 2.04 LOUVER SCREENS A. Provide removable screens for exterior louvers. B. Fabricate screen frames of same metal and finish as louvers. C. Provide rewireable frames consisting of formed or extruded metal with a driven spline or insert for securing screen mesh. D. Insed Screens: 18 x 14 aluminum mesh, 0.0123-inch diameter, 5056 clad, having a free area of 60-percent E. Locate screens on inside face of louvers, unless otherwise indicated. Secure to louver frames with machine screws, spaced at each comer and at 12-inch centers. 2.05 FINISHES A. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: High-performance coating; inhibitive thermo-cured primer, 0.2-mti minimum dry film thickness, and thermo-cured fluorocarbon coating containing 'Kynar 500' resin, 1.0-mil minimum dry film thickness, custom color to match color sample furnished by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers plumb, level and in proper alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchors wherever possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. D. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering and grinding operations required for fitting and jointing. Restore finishes with no evidence of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. WALL LOUVERS 0407-06 10210-2 Progress CD Set PROJECT#02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10210 VAIL, COLORADO WALL LOUVERS E. Protect galvanized and non-ferrous metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by application of a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces which will be in contact with concrete, masonry or dissimilar metals. Install concealed gaskets, flashing, joint fillers, and insulation, and install as work progresses to make installations weather-fight. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION A. Protect louvers and vents from damage during construction, including use of temporary protective coverings where required. B. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and constriction so that no evidence remains of corrective work. If restoration results are unsuccessful as judged by the Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. 3.03 CLEANING A. Periodically dean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering t0 remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning. B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Rinse surfaces thoroughly and dry. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 WALL LOUVERS Progress CD Set 10210-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10260 VAIL, COLORADO WALL AND CORNER GUARDS SECTION 10260 - WALL AND CORNER GUARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing the following wall protection systems: Prefabricated-type resilient plastic comer guards at back-of-house service corridors and storage areas. 2. Stainless steel comer guards at kitchen areas. B. Related Sections: Wood bumper guards at back-of-house areas are specified in Section 06200. 2. Metal kickplates, mop plates, and armor plates are specified in Section 08710. (No changes, will be in Section 08710) 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's literature, including manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, extent, and installation details of wall and comer guards. Show methods of attachment to adjoining construction. C. Samples: Furnish 12-inch long samples of each type of wall and comer guard required. Include examples of joinery, corners, and field splices. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing wall and comer guards similar to those required for this Project B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an installer who has previously installed wall and corner guards similar in material, design, and extent to the systems specified for this Project. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers with labels indicating brand names, colors and patterns, and quality designations legible and intact B. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers inside a well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Environmental Conditions: Do not install wall and comer guards until the space is enclosed and weatherproof and until the ambient temperature within the building is maintained at not less than 70-deg. F. for not less than 72-hours prior to beginning of the installation. 1.05 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Instructions: Furnish manufacturer's instructions for maintenance of installed work. Include precautions against cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to finishes and performance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SURFACE-MOUNTED RESILIENT PLASTIC CORNER GUARDS A. Approved Manufacturers: Construction Specialties, Inc. Model SM-20, Balco, Inc. Type CGS-3 or approved equal. 05-12-06 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS Summary Permit Set 10260-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 10260 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS B. Cover: Rigid, impact-resistant plastic, minimum 0.078-inch thick, with 114-inch cover radius. C. Retainer: Continuous one-piece, extruded aluminum retainer, minimum 0.062-inch thick. D. Accessories: Prefabricated, injection-molded top cap and aluminum base with concealed splices, cushions, mounting hardware, and other accessories as required. E. Corner Guard Height: 48-inches. 2.02 STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARDS A. Approved Manufacturers: American Floor Products Co., Inc. "Lunar Style L-1", Pawling Corporation "CG50", Wilkinson Company, Inc. "WCG-1/8C" or approved equal. B. Wing Size: 3-112-inch x 3-112-inch. C. Mounting Method: Double-faced self-adhesive foam tape or epoxy adhesive. D. Corner Radius: 1/8-inch. E. Comer Guard Height: 48-inches. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions in which wall and corner guards will be installed. B. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before beginning installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install wall and corner guards plumb, level, and true to line without distortions. 1. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished work. 3.04 CLEANING A. Immediately upon completion of installation, clean wall and corner guards in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. C. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from installation upon completion of work and leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition. END OF SECTION J 05.12-06 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS Summary Perm! Set 10260 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10305 VAIL, COLORADO MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES SECTION 10305 - MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for fumishing and installing manufactured fireplaces and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Masonry fireplaces are specified in Section 04580. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Manufactured fireplace units shall be UL listed and ICBO approved and shall conform to local Building Code requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturers specifications and installation instructions. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's printed instructions for operation and use of fireplace and components. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Prefabricated Gas Appliance Fireplace: Town & Country Fireplaces, models TC36 and TC42, series B, or as otherwise scheduled. 1. Characteristics: Glass front, self contained, box size indicated, to accommodate zero clearances around unit, manufacturer's recommended clearance around flue, outside ek combustion kit, no visible manufacturer's name or logo. 2. Firebox Lining: Ceramic refractory bottom, back, and sides. Herringbone brick pattern (T&C's `Traditional Herdngbonel. Final selection as approved by Owner, Architect, and Interior Designer. 3. Damper: Positive lock/swing-away damper system. 4. Gas Log Set: True flame gas-fired, molded ceramic cast oak logs with loose embers and cinders (T&C's'The Chalef log set). Final selection as approved by Owner, Architect, and Interior Designer. 5. Gas Burner Operation: Electronic ignition. Pilot tight ignition not acceptable. B. Chimney and Flue: Double wall insulating sections consisting of stainless steel inner flue and galvanized outer flue, Class B rated, snap together design. Provide fittings for complete installation, hx*Iding termination cap and firestop spacers. Termination caps to be painted (custom color as selected by Architect) where exposed on exteior of building. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Manufactured fireplace and accessories shall be installed as indicated and in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions and specifications and in compliance with requirements of local goveming agencies, Including IBC. B. Maintain 3-inch minimum clearance between flue and combustible materials unless otherwise approved. 04.07.06 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES Progress CD Set 10305-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10305 VAIL, COLORADO MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES 3.02 TESTING After installation, fireplace shall be tested for satisfactory operation as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 0407-06 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES Profess CD Set 10305 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 10350 FLAGPOLES SECTION 10350 - FLAGPOLES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 - DESCRIPTION A. Provide flagpoles, bases and support equipment for complete system. B. Related Sections: 1. Cast-in-place concrete is specified in Section 03300. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate general layout, construction, dimensions, halyard system, foundation and base accessories. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and descriptive literature and installation instructions. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria: Flagpole. bases, anchorage devices designed to resist 90 M.P.H. Wind velocity minimum, unflagged. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Spiral wrap each flagpole with heavy craft paper, wood strip, and sleet band or polyethlene wrap and pack into tube prior to shipment. B. Deliver flagpole in original wrappings. C. Store flagpole, in original wrappings, in area protected from weather, moisture and damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. American Flagpole, Baartol Co., Inc., Texas Flagpole Co., BabcDa-Davis Assoc., Inc. or approved equal. 2.02 FLAGPOLE A. Quardies: 1. Provide flagpole as complete unit, furnished by single, acceptable manufacturer, including accessories, bases, and anchor devices. 2. Cone tapered, aluminum tubing, seamless, uniform, strait line. tapered section above cylindrical butt section. Taper.1 inch per each 5.5-feet of run. Provide internal splicing, self-aligning sleeve of same material as flagpole for snug-fitting, precision field joints. B. Material: Seamless, extruded aluminum pipe, alloy: 6063-T-6,114 by 3.16 inch wall thickness. DWa FLAGPOLES Progress CD Set 10350-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10350 VAIL COLORADO FLAGPOLES C. Dimensions: 1. Exposed Height Two at 45-feet and one at 55-feet 2. Setting Depth: T-6'. D. Finish: Dark bronze anodized aluminum. 2.03 MOUNTING A. Ground Set Foundation Assembly. 1. Base: Cast aluminum flash collar, finish to match flagpole. 2. Foundation Sleeve: 16-gauge, corrugated, galvanized steel tube with foundation sleeve plate. 3. Centering Wedges: Four internal wedges, welded to support plate and foundation sleeve for centering of flagpole. 4. Ground Spike: % inch steel spike, extending 12-inches below footing, welded to foundation sleeve plate. 5. Foundation Support Plate: 3/16-inch thick steel welded to ground spike at base of concrete foundation. 2.04 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES A. Internal Halyard System: Provide manufacturer's standard internal halyard system including: 1. Special concealed revolving truck assembly with hood to match flagpole finished without ball. 2. Direct drive reel winch with removable crank handle, friction brake, locking device, and cable follower. Winch must permit flag to be raised, lowered and flown on pole without entanglement or slippage of cable. 3. Pivoting flush access door with cylinder lock and winch mounting table. 4. 118-inch stainless steel braided halyard cable. 5. Swivel snaps with vinyl covers, nylon retaining loop and rubber-covered halyard counterweights. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Inspect foundations for proper depth and size of sleeve. B. Paint portions of flagpole below grade with heavy coat of bituminous paiht 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Inspect flagpole, base assemblies and fittings plumb and secure in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. 04-07-06 FLAGPOLES Progress CD Set 10350 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10350 VAIL, COLORADO FLAGPOLES Provide positive lighting ground for flagpole installation. C. Test and adjust for smooth operation of halyard system. 3.03 CLEAN UP A. Remove trash and debris resulting from specified operations. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 FLAGPOLES Progress CD Set 10350 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 10430 - EXTERIOR SIGNAGE PART 1- GENERAL SECTION 10430 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for fumishing and installing the following exterior signs: 1. Accessib y entrance signs. 2. Parking stall accessibility symbols and signs. 3. Unauthorized vehicle signs. 4. Exterior building address and name letters and numbers. B. Related Sections: 1. Interior signs are specified in Section 10440. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's construction details relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes for each type of sign required. B. Shop Drawings: Fumish shop drawings for fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, reinforcement, accessories, layout, and installation details. 1. Fumish message list for each sign required, including large scale details of wording and layout of lettering. 2. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, fumish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors. 3. Fumish full-size spacing templates for individually mounted dimensional letters and numbers. C. Samples: Fumish samples of each exposed material, including letters and other graphics, showing finish, color, and qualities of fabrication and design. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Acrylic Sheet Transparent, dear, semi-matte or non-glare, thickness specified. B. Aluminum Sheet Alloy and temper recommended by the aluminum producer or finisher for the type of use and finish indicated and specified. C. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by the aluminum producer or finisher for the type of use and finish indicated and specified. D. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not corrosive to the sign material and mounting surface. E. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Plastic Sheet Use colored coatings, including inks and paints for copy and badk- ground colors that are recommended by acrylic manufacturer for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are non-fading for the application intended. 04-07-06 WERIOR SIGNAGE Progress CD Set 10430-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10430 VAIL, COLORADO EXTERIOR SIGNAGE 1J 2.02 SIGN SUMMARY A. Entrance Signs: Building entrances that are accessible to and useable by physically handicapped persons shall be identified with at least one standard accessibility symbol sign and with additional directional signs as required, to be visible to persons along approaching pedestrian ways. B. Parking Stag Accessibility Symbols and Signs: 1. Each parking space reserved for the handicapped shall have a surface identification outlining a profile view of a wheelchair with occupant in white on blue background, 36-inches high x 364ndm wide. 2. Provide a refiectorized sign permanently posted immediately adjacent to and visible from each parking stall or space reserved for the handicapped, consisting of a profile view of a wheelchair with occupant in white on blue background. Size shall be minimum 70-square inches, mounted not more than 80- inches from the bottom of the sign to the parking space grade. C. Unauthorized Vehicle Sign: 1. Post the following sign in a conspicuous place at each entrance to the off-street parking area, not less than 17-inches x 22-inches in size with lettering not less than 1-inch in height, which dearly states: "Unauthorized vehicles parked in designated accessible spaces not displaying distinguishing placards or license plates issued for persons with disabilities may be towed away at Owner's expense. Towed vehicles may be reclaimed at or by telephoning 2. Post a sign to match existing signs in a place at each entrance to the off street parking area. D. Building Address and Name Letters: 1. Cut letters and numbers from solid aluminum. Product precisely cut characters with square cut, smooth edges. 2. Finish: To be selected by the Architect. 3. Location: As indicated or as directed by the Architect PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Locate where indicated and as required by applicable codes and secure with specified fasteners. B. Install level, plumb and at height indicated or required, with surfaces free from distortion or other appearance defects. C. Where signs are adhesively applied, adhesive shag be spread over fug contact area. D. Dimernsional Letters and Numbers: Mount letters and numbers using standard fastening methods recommended by manufacturer. Provide template to establish letter spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. 1. Mount letters with backs in contact with mounting surface or projected from the mounting surface as indicated. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At completion of installation, dean soiled surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until final acceptance. END OF SECTION 04.07.06 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE Progress CD Set 10430-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10440 Adpok VAIL, COLORADO INTERIOR SIGNAGE SECTION 10440 - INTERIOR SIGNAGE (BACK OF HOUSE AREAS) PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing the following back of house interior signs: 1. Toilet room entry signage. 2. Room identification signage. 3. Stairwell signage. 4. Emergency exit at elevator signage. 5. Area of rescue assistance signage. 6. Directional signage. 7. Pool equipment and chemical room signage. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's construction details relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes for each type of sign required. B. Shop Drawings: Fumish shop drawings for fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, reinforcement, accessories, layout, and installation details. 1. Furnish message list for each sign required, including large scale details of wording and layout of lettering. 2. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, fumish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors. C. Samples: Fumish samples of each exposed material, including letters and other graphics, showing finish, color, and qualities of fabrication and design. D. Location schedule for each sign. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A ASI, Best, The Southwell Company, Nelson-Harkins or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Signs shall be sign manufacturer's standard one piece photopolymer sign face with tactile Braille and letters or acrylic sign face with applied tactile lettering and Braille, at manufachuer's option, and shall be interior rated. B. Sign materials and fabrication shall comply with applicable IBC and ADA signage requirements. C. Sign Finish: Eggshell, matte, or non-glare as selected by the Architect. D. Copy: 518-inch minimum, 2-inch maximum as recommended by sign manufacturer for required copy, raised minimum 1/32-inch. E. Letters: San Serif, style as indicated or as selected by the Architect 0407-06 INTERIOR SIG"E Progress CD Set 10440-1 r PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10440 VAIL, COLORADO INTERIOR SIGNAGE F. Braille: Grade 2, integral with sign. G. Mounting: Vinyl foam tape unless mechanical fasteners are indicated. 2.03 SIGN SUMMARY A. Toilet Room Entry Signage: 1. Provide dear matte acrylic plastic with symbols and colors as selected by the Architect a. Comply with ADA Article 4.30. 2. Center symbols on door and signs on wall at a height of 604nches above finished floor. B. Room Identification Signs: 1. Provide one sign adjacent to latch side of doors or on the nearest adjacent wall where indicated. Signs shall identify room name as directed by the Architect. 2. Provide signs with raised upper case letters with Grade 2 Braille. Comply with ADA Article 4.30. 3. Mount signs 60-inches above finish floor to centerline of sign. C. Emergency Eiat at Elevator Signs: 1. Sign Type: Panel with subsurface copy. 2. Design: Pictorial sign of a standardized design indicating that in case of fire, the elevator will not operate and that exit stairways should be used. 3. Provide one sign at each elevator lobby per floor. Mount sign directly above and centered on elevator call button plate. 4. Comply with IBC. D. Stairwell Signs: 1. Stairway identification signs shall be located at each floor level in enclosed stairways, identifying the stairway, whether there is roof access, floor level, and the upper and lower terminus of the stairway. 2. Information shall be in Arabic and Braille. 3. Mount signs 60-inches above floor landing immediately adjacent to the door on the strike side unless otherwise approved by governing authorities. E. Area of Rescue Assistance Signage: 1. Each area of rescue assistance shall be identified by a sign which states 'Area of Rescue Assistance' displaying the intemational symbol of accessibility. The sign shall be illuminated. Illumination levels shall be as required by ADA Appendix A40.30.8. 2. Provide a sign adjoining the two-way communication system with instructions on the use of the area under emergency conditions. 3. Signs shall comply with ADA Article 4.3.11.5, and the general'signage requirements of ADA Article 4.30. 4. Signs shall comply with IBC Standard (formerly UBC Standard 10-2) and ADA. F. Directional Signage: 1. Provide directional signage where indicated to dearly indicate the direction to areas of rescue 04 -07 os KFEwoR srcw►GE 10440 Progress CD Set -2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10440 VAIL, COLORADO INTERIOR SIGNAGE assistance as required by ADA Article 4.3.11.5. 2. Signs shall oomply with the general signage requirements of ADA Article 4.30. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Locate where indicated and as required by applicable codes and secure with specified fasteners. B. Install level, plumb and at height indicated or required, with surfaces free from distortion or other appearance defects. C. Where signs are adhesively applied, adhesive shag be spread over full contact area. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At completion of installation, dean soiled surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until final acceptance. END OF SECTION 0407-06 INTERIOR SWMGE Progress CD Set 10M-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10505 AWN _V_AIL, COLORADO METAL LOCKERS SECTION 10505 - METAL LOCKERS PART 1- GENERAL i 1.01 DESCRIPTION ` A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing double-tier wardrobe lockers and locker room benches in employee areas. i f B. Related Sections: k 1. Wood lockers are specified in Section 10510. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for metal lockers. B. Shop Drawings: Show details, method of installation, fillers, trim, base, and accessories. Include locker numbering sequence information. C. Samples: Submit color samples on squares of same metal to -be used for fabrication of lockers. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Uniformity: Provide each type of metal locker as produced by a single manufacturer, including mounting accessories, fittings, and fastenings. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A Do not deliver metal lockers until building is enclosed and ready for locker installation. Protect from damage during delivery, handling, storage, and installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A Interior Steel Equipment Co., List Industries, Inc., Lyon Metal Products, Medart, Inc., Penco Products, Inc., Republic Storage Systems or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A Sheet Steel: Mild cold-rolled and leveled steel, free from buckle, scale, and surface imperfections. B. Fasteners: Cadmium, Sink, or nickel plated steel; sbtless exposed bolt heads; self-locking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts. C. Equipment Hooks and hang rods of cadmium-plated steel or cast aluminum. 2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Construction: Fabricate lockers square, rigid, and without warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Weld frame members together to form rigid, one-piece structure. Weld, bolt, or rivet other joints and connections as standard with manufacturer. Grind exposed welds flush. Do not expose bolts or rivet heads on fronts of locker doors or frames. g 0407-06 NATAL LOCKERS Progress CD Set 10505-1 PROJECT #02028 SECTION 10505 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL COLORADO METAL LOCKERS B. Frames: Fabricate of 16-gauge channels or 12-gauge angles, minimum, with continuous stop(strhl<e formed on vertical members. C. Finishing: Chernically pretreat metal with degreasing and phosphatizing process. Apply baked-on enamel finish to exposed and concealed surfaces, except plates and non-ferrous metal. 1. Color: Provide locker units in color(s) selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. Unless otherwise indicated, concealed parts may be manufacturer's standard neutral color. 2.04 WARDROBE LOCKERS A. Body: Fabricate back and sides of minimum 24-gauge steel, with double-flanged connections extending full height. Form top and bottom of not less than 24-gauge steel, with flanged edges. Form exposed ends of norHwessed lockers of minimum 16-gauge steel. B. Door: One-piece, minimum 1"auge sheet steel, flanged at edges, constructed to prevent springing when opened or closed. Fabricate to swing 180-deg. unless otherwise indicated. Reinforcing: Provide extra bracing or reinforcing on inside of doors over 15-inches wide. 2. Ventilation: Provide minimum 3 stamped louver openings in top and bottom of door face. 3. Hinges: Heavy-duty, not less than 0.050-inch thick steel, fuWoop, 5-knuckle, tight pin, 24nches high. Weld to inside of frame and secure to door with 2 fadory4nstalled concealed fasteners, tamperproof when door is closed. a. Provide at least 3 hinges for each door 424nches high and over, at least 2 hinges for each door less than 424nches high. C. Projecting Handle and Latch: Positive automatic, pre-locking, pry-resistant latch and pull with rubber silencers; chromium-plated, heavy-duty, vandal-proof lift-up handle, containing strike and eye for padlock; and with not less than 2-pount latching action. D. Locker Sizes: 124nches wide x 1 &inches deep x 72-inches high, two lockers per tier. 2.05 LOCKER ACCESSORIES A. Equipment: Furnish each locker with one double-prong ceiling hook and not less than 2 single-prong wall hooks. B. Number Plates: Manufachxers standard etched, embossed, or stamped, non-ferrous metal number plates with numerals not less than Moinches high. Number lockers in sequence as directed by Architect. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least 2 fasteners of same finish as numberplate. C. Legs: Provide nominal 64nch legs by extending vertical frame members or by attaching gusset type legs made of riot less than 16-gauge steel sheet, with provision for fastening to floor. D. Continuous Metal Base: Minimum 20-gauge cold-rolled steel fabricated in lengths as long as practicable to enclose base of lockers without additional fastening devices. Flange bottoms inward 3144nch for stiffening. Factory-finish metal base to match lockers. METAL LOCKERS 04-07-06 10505 - 2 Progress CD Set PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10505 VAL COLORADO METALLOCKERS E. Continuous Sloping Tops: Minimum 20-gauge sheet steel, approAmately 25-deg. pitch, in lengths as long as practicable but not less than 4 lockers. Provide closures at ends. Finish to match lockers, unless otherwise indicated. Trim: Provide trim at jambs and head of recessed lockers, consisting of not less than 18-gauge cold-rolled steel. Factory-finish trim to match lockers. Secure trim to lockers with concealed fastening dips. G. Fidler Panels: Provide filler panels where indicated, of not less than 18-gauge steel sheet, factory-fabricated and finished to match locker units. 2.06 LOCKER ROOM BENCHES A. Manufacturer's standard units with laminated hardwood tops appro)dmately 9-1/24nches wide by 1-1144nch thick, in lengths as indicated. Fumish steel pedestal supports not more than 67-0' o.c., with provisions for concealed fastening to floor and securing to bench. Fumish all anchors. Finish with dear coating on bench tops and baked enamel finish on pedestals. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Install metal lockers in accordance with manufacturers instructions for plumb, level, rigid, and flush installation. B. Space fastenings 484nches o.a., unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, and apply through back-up reinforcing plates where necessary to avoid metal distortion; conceal fasteners. C. Install trim, metal base, sloping top units, and metal filler panels where indicated, using concealed fasteners to provide flush, hairline joints against a*icent surfaces. D. Install benches in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices are operating properly. B. Touch-up marred finishes; replace units that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or famished by locker manufacturer. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 METAL LOCKERS Progress CD Set 10505 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10510 VAIL. COLORADO WOOD LOCKERS SECTION 10510 - WOOD LOCKERS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing custom wood wardrobe lockers in Spa. B. Related Sections: 1. Metal lockers are specified in Section 10505. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturers technical data and installation instructions for lockers. B. Samples: Minimum 12-inch square sample of specified wood veneer. C. Shop Drawings: Show individual locker construction, dimensions for installation, and installation details including filers, trim and accessories. Include locker numbering sequence information. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Un'►fomuty: Provide each type of locker as produced by a single manufacturer, including mounting accessories, fittings, and fastenings. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not deliver kxdkers until building is enclosed and ready for locker installation. Protect from damage during delivery, handling, storage, and installation. B. Store lockers in dry, ventilated area and protect finishes from soiling and damage during handling. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Warrant each wood wardrobe locker against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 3-years after the date of Substantial Completion. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a Imitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Classic Woodworft Inc., Fiberesin Industries, Inc., Holtman, Ideal Products, Inc., MultiSpace, Sports Unlimited Locker Systems, Treeforms Lockers or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A Locker Interior: Construct of 5184nch high-density, high4mpact, stain resistant Kortron. B. Door and Panels: 3I44nch A-2 plain-sliced hardwood veneer premium plywood to be selected by the Interior Designer, self-edged with matching hardwood edges with radiused comers. Panels shall be prefinislW with a catalyzed polymer lacquer applied in two coats with hand sanding between coats. 04-07-06 WOOD LOCKERS Ptog = CD Set 10510-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10510 ERS VAIL COLORADO WOOD LOCKERS C. Locker Frame: Exposed edges finished with matching hardwood. Tops, bottoms, sides, backs and shelves shall be precision machined, doweled and glued. D Hooks: Provide 2 side mounted double coat hooks in brass finish. E. Venting: Recessed shelves shall provide oontirmus natural air flow. F. Number Discs: 1-112=inch tamish resistant brass with black numbers routed in flush with the door surface. Indicate dimensioned location of number discs on shop drawings. G. Hinges: 2 heavy-duty concealed European style hinges allowing 130-deg. opening. H. Locks: Heavy duty carp keyed lock. Furnish 2 master keys and two keys per look. 1. Attachment: Provide necessary connecting bolts for securing lockers to wall backing plates and base. J. Size: As inducted. 2.03 FABRICATION A Fabricate lockers square, rigid, and without warp, with finished faces flat and tree of scratches and chips. B. Bolt joints and connections as standard with manufacturer, PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install lockers in accordance with manufacturer`s instructions for plumb, level, rigid, and flush installation. B. Space fastenings 484nches o.c., unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, and apply through back-up reinforcing plates. Conceal fasteners. C. Attach number in sequence after lockers are in place. D. Install benches in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN A Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without bind. B. Replace defective doors and other components. C. Clean inside and outside surfaces of lockers using cleaning materials and methods recommended by locker manufacturer. END OF SECTION J 0407.06 WOOD LOCKERS Progress DD Set 10510-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10520 VAIL, COLORADO FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES SECTION 10520 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing the following: Fire extinguishers. 2. Fire extinguisher cabinets. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Product Data: Furnish for each type of product specified. For fire extinguisher cabinets, include rough-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style, door construction, panel style, and materials. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets from one source from a single manufacturer. B. UL-Listed Products: Provide fire extinguishers which are UL-listed and bear UL "Listing Mark" for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. General: Provide fire extinguishers for each extinguisher cabinet and other locations indicated. Comply with requirements of governing authorities. B. Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 2A:10BC, 54b. nominal capacity, in enameled steel container. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Approved Manufacturers: J.L. Industries, Larsen's Manufacturing Co., Potter-Roemer, Inc. or approved equal. B. Construction: Manufacturer's standard enameled steel box. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Type: Recessed. D. Trim Style: Exposed trim, either square-edge or rolled-edge as standard with manufacturer for cabinet type and depth. E. Doors: 1. Back-of--House Areas: Manufacturer's standard enameled steel, full-glass panel with dear float glass. 2. Public Areas: Custom millwork as indicated on the Interior Design drawings. F. Door Hardware: Manufacturers standard door operating hardware for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style specified. Provide door pull, exposed or concealed, and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous type hinge permitting door to open 180-deg. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install items in locations and at mounting heights indicated, or N not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities. 0407.06 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES Progress CD Set 10520-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10520 VAIL, COLORADO FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES B. Prepare recesses in walls for fire extinguisher cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and style of trim in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Securely fasten fire extinguisher cabinets to structure, square and plumb, to comply with manufacturees instructions. END OF SECTION 1j 04-07-06 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES Progress CD Set 10520- 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10605 VAIL COLORADO WIRE MESH PARTITIONS SECTION 10605 - WIRE MESH PARTITIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing wire mesh partitions (icluding elevator hoistway divider screens). B. Related Sections: 1. Lock cylinders are specified in Section 08710. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications, technical data and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large scale details showing anchorage and accessory items. Furnish location template drawings for items supported or anchored to permanent construction. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer. Provide wire mesh partitions as complete units produced by a single manufacturer, including mounting accessories, fittings, and fastenings. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of work. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Acorn Wire and Iron Works, Inc., Indiana Wire Products Co., Miller Wire Works, Inc., Western Wire & Iron or approved equal. 2.02 STANDARD DUTY MESH PARTITIONS A. Mesh: I0-gauge crimped steel wire woven into 14nch mesh, securely clinched to frame members. B. Frames: Provide cutouts for pipes, ducts, beams, and other items shown or required for partition installation. Finish edges of cut-outs to provide a neat, protective edge. 1. Vertical Members: 1-1/44nch x 518-inch cold-rolled steel C-Section channels with 1144nch bolt holes appro)dmately I Nnches on center. 2. Horizontal Members: 1-inch x 1/24nch x 1/84nch cold-rolled steel channels, mortised and tenoned to vertical members. 3. Horizontal Reinforcing Members: 1-inch x 1/24nch x 1&inch cold-rolled steel channel with wire woven through, or two 1-inch x 1/24nch channels bolted or riveted to each side of mesh, and secured to vertical members. Provide number of horizontal reinforcing members to suit panel height as recommended by partition manufacturer. 0407-06 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS Progress CD Set 106D5-1 E PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS 8 RESORTS SECTION 10605 VAIL, COLORADO WIRE MESH PARTITIONS C. Top Capping Bars: 2-1144nch x 14nch cold-rolled steel channels, secured to top framing channel with 1/4-inch "U" bolts spaced not more than 2&4iches o.c. D. Comer Posts: 1-1/4-inch x 1-1144nch x 1/8-indh angles with floor shoe and 1/4-inch bolt holes to align with bolt holes in vertical frame members. E. Line Posts: Where partition runs exceed 20-feet without intersection or connection to overhead framing, furnish 3-inch x 4.1-pound channel line posts with 5-inch x 184nch x 1/44nch base plates located at recommended intervals to ensure partition rigidity and stability. F. Intersection Posts: Wherever three- or four-way intersections occur, use 1-1144nch x 1-1/44nch tubular steel post with floor shoe and 1/44nch bolt holes aligned for bolting to adjacent panels. G. Floor Shoes: Cast metal, sized to suit vertical framing and to provide approximately 3-inch dear space between finished floor and bottom horizontal frame members. Provide with leveling adjustments. 2.03 DOORS A. Hinged Door. Door frame of 1-114-inch x 1/24nch x 1/84nch channel with 1-114-inch x 118-inch flat bar cover plate on 3 sides, and 118-inch thick angle strike bar and cover on lock side. Provide 1-1/2 pair butt hinges riveted or welded to door and frame, and mortise type cylinder lock operated by key outside with recessed knob inside. Align bottom of door with bottom of adjacent panels. Cylinders are specified in Section 08710. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Provide bolls, hardware, and accessories for complete installation. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard shop-applied enamel finish, color as selected by Architect PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Erect partitions plumb, rigid, property aligned, and securely fastened in place, complying with drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. B. Provide additional field bracing as indicated or required for rigid, secure installation. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust moving components for smooth operation without binding. B. Touch,-up damaged finish after completion of installation using field-applied paint to match color of shop-applied finish. END OF SECTION 0407-06 WIRE MESH PARTMONS Progress CD Set 10605 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10652 VAIL, COLORADO OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS SECTION 10652 - OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for fumishing and installing manually operated, acoustically rated assemblies. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturers product literature and installation instructions. Include written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading, and flame resistance characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of operable panel partitions. Include plans, elevations, large-scale details of anchors, and accessory items. Show unit conditions at openings, typical and special details, and location and installation requirements for hardware and operators. C. Certificates of Compliance: Show compliance with STC requirements, evidenced by tests on prototype models of partitions of the type required. Include supporting detailed test reports certified by the testing agency. D. Maintenance Recommendations: Fumish as required. E. Template Drawings: Fumish location template drawings for items supported or anchored by permanent construction. F. Samples: Samples of each type of material exposed to view. Include samples of each panel facing material selected. 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide operable panel partitions with surface burning characteristics sped6e- d, as determined by testing assembled materials composed of surface coverings, backings, and other construction identical to those required in this Section, in accordance with ASTM E84. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. B. Acoustical Performance: 1. Sound Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested in a full-scale opening for laboratory sound transmission loss performance in accordance with ASTM E90, determined by ASTM E413 and rated for a STC plus or minus 1. a. Sound Transmission Class (STC): 54. 2. Noise Isolation Class (NIC): Operable panel partitions identical to those tessled for NIC of 42, plus or minus 2, when tested in accordance with ASTM E336. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer. Minimum 2-years experience installing operable walls similar to those required for this Project factory trained and authorized by partition manufacturer. Installer shall regularly maintain, repair, and service operable walls. B. Manufacturer: Minimum 3-years experience producing operable walls of type required for this Project 04.07.06 OPERABLE PANEL PARTMONS Progress CD Set 10652-1 PROJECT #02028 SECTION 10652 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS VAIL, COLORADO 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original factory wrappings and containers, dearly labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade, fire hazard classification, and lot number. B. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity. Lay panels flat and block off ground to prevent sagging and warping. C. Comply with manufacturer's special instructions and recommendations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Hufcor "Spectrum" Series 6603 or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Panel Configuration: Series of individual panels equipped with vertical ball-bearing wheels, curves, diverters, and switches for free-flowing operation. B. Panel Operation: Manual. C. Suspension System: ceiling, Track: Clear anodized ffit, or plenum sound barrier. dTraluminum, design to ack shall be connected to the structural ed support for b ~o adjoining Y pairs 1 so diameter threaded steel hanger rods. Each panel shall be supported by two 2-wheeled counter-rotating horizontal carriers. Wheels shall be precision ground steel ball bearings with heat treated and hardened races encased with molded polymer tires. D. Panel Constriction: Factory-fabricated panels of minimum 20-gauge steel face sheets laminated to gypsum board gypsum backing. Panel frames shall be minimum 18-gauge steel. Reinforce top as required to support hanging from suspension components. Provide internal insulation and gasketed edge construction to achieve specified acoustical ratings. Panel face finish shall wrap around the vertical panel edges and require no vertical trim. Panel Thickness: Nominal 34nches. 3. Panel Surfaces: To be furnished by the Owner for installation by the Contractor. E. Sound Seals: 1. Vertical Seal Between Panels. Dual durometer potyvinykhloride in a tongue-and-groove configuration with minimum 1-114-inch panel-to-panel interlock. 2. Horizontal Top Seal: Continuous contact multi-ply vinyl. Horizontal Bottom Seal: Retractable seal, extruded vinyl face, exerting positive pressure downward, assuring sealing and resisting panel movement. Bottom seal-shall automatically retract when wall is moved. OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 04-07-06 10652-2 Progim CD Set PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10652 VAIL, COLORADO OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install operable panel partitions and accessories in compliance with ASTM E557 after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. B. Install operable walls in conformance with drawings, reviewed shop drawings, and in compliance with manufac- turees instructions. C. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust to ensure smooth, easy operation. 3.02 FIELD TESTS A. Testing Laboratory: Owner will employ and pay an independent testing laboratory to perform field quality control testing. B. The testing laboratory will randomly select a typical operable panel partition installation and test in conformance with ASTM E336 for compliance with specified NIC rating. C. Repair or replace operable panel partitions where test results indicate partitions do not comply with requirements and retest at no additional cost lo the Owner. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean operable panel partition surfaces and adjacent surfaces soiled by work of this Section. Do not use abrasive cleaners or solutions containing corrosive solvents. Use cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer. END OF SECTION 04.07.06 OPERABLE PANEL PARTMONS Progress CD Set 10652-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10800 VAIL, COLORADO TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES SECTION 10800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing toilet and bath accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Sanitary sealant is specified in Section 07920. 2. Mirror glass for frameless applications is specified in Section 08800. 3. Toilet compartments are specified in Section 10160. 4. Shower doors are specified in Section 10822. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each toilet and bath accessory. B. Setting Drawings: Furnish setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage devices and cut-out requirements in other work. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 3021304, satin finish. B. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit or of galvanized steel where concealed. C. Keys: Unless otherwise directed by the Owner, provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring intemal access for servicing. Provide a minimum of six keys. 2.02 GUEST BATH ACCESSORY ITEMS A. To be selected by the Interior Designer. 2.03 STAFF TOILETS A. Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle: Bobrick B-4369 (for large areas) and B-43944 (for smaller areas). B. Toilet Tissue Holder. Bobrick B-686. C. Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser. Bobricc B-3013 (recessed). D. Soap Dispenser. Bobrick B-8266. E. Soap Dish: Recessed ceramic tie to match wall tie specified in Section 09310. F. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Bobrick B4354. G. Shelves: Bobrick B-298 x 18-inches long. 0407-06 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES s Progress CD Set 10800-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10800 VAIL, COLORADO TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES H. Electric Hand Dryer. World Dryer Corporation Model RA. 1. Electric Hair Dryer: World Dryer Corporation Model RB. 2.04 EMPLOYEE HOUSING UNIT ACCESSORY ITEMS A. Toilet Tissue Holder. Gamco 212, Recessed double roll holder. Satin stainless finish. B. Towel Bars: Gamco 5151.18" long at vanity, 30' long over toilet. Satin stainless finish. C. Robe Hooks: Gamco 5154 double hook. Satin stainless finish. D. Wall Mirrors: Gamco A -series. Sizes as indicated on drawings. Satin stainless finish. E. Shower Soap Dish: Ceramic comer unit by Dal-Tile or American Olean. White finish. 2.05 HEALTH CLUB TOILETS A. To be selected by the Interior Designer. 2.06 PUBLIC TOILET ACCESSORY ITEMS A. To be selected by the Interior Designer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Check wall openings for correct dimensions, plumbness of blocking or frames, and other preparation that would affect installation of accessories. B. Check areas to receive surface mounted units for conditions that would affect quality and execution of work. C. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures and toilet partitions that affect installation of accessories. 3.02 INSTALLATION Install toilet and bath accessory units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using tamper-proof fas- A . teners. Finish of exposed fasteners shall match accessory item secured. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Fit flanges of accessories snug to wall surfaces. Install sanitary sealant in gaps between 90-degree return flanges and finish wall surface after installation. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust toilet and bath accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Clean and polish exposed surfaces of accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations after removing temporary labels and protective coatings. END OF SECTION 0407-08 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES Progress CD Set 10800-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10801 VAIL, COLORADO ACCESSORY SELECTIONS SECTION 10801- ACCESSORY SELECTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the interior accessories as selected by the Interior Designer. In cases of conflict, the accessory selections and designations listed in the adjoining schedule and cutsheets supersede those listed in other individual specification sections. END OF SECTION 05-12-06 ACCESSORY SELECTIONS Summary Permit Set 10801-1 BH Brayton + Hughes DESIGN STUD 10 Four Seasons Vail Hardware Specifications Project No.: 200458 BATH ACCESSORIES SPECIFICATIONS ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS BA-1 Towel Bar Mfr.: GINGER Executive Suites Model: Synchro no.1960.26 One-Bedroom Suites Description: 12' Bath Grab Bar Typical Guestroom Finish: Polished Chrome Notes: See cut sheets for additional information BA-2 Towel Bar Mfr.: KOHLER Executive Suites Model: Antique K-206 One-Bedroom Suites Description: 24' Towel Bar Typical Guestroom Finish: Polished Chrome Notes: See cut sheets for additional information BA-3 Towel Ring Mfr.: KOHLER Executive Suites Model: Antique K-208 One-Bedroom Suites Description: Towel Ring Typical Guestroom Finish: Polished Chrome Notes: See cut sheets for additional information BA-4 Tissue Holder Mfr.: KOHLER Executive Suites Model: Antique K-211 One-Bedroom Suites Description: Tissue Holder Typical Guestroom Finish: Polished Chrome Notes: See cut sheets for additional information BA-5 Glass Shelf Mfr.: KOHLER Executive Suites Model: Antique K-218 One-Bedroom Suites Description: 27' Glass Shelf Typical Guestroom Finish: Polished Chrome Notes: See cut sheets for additional information BA-6.1 Soap Basket Mfr.: KOHLER Executive Suites Model: Antique K-213 One-Bedroom Suites Description: Soap Dish Typical Guestroom Finish: Polished Chrome Notes: See cut sheets for additional information Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 1 of 5 Al Revision: May 12, 2006 Four Seasons Vail a Brayton + Hughes Hardware Specifications DESIG N STUDIO Project No.: 200458 BATH ACCESSORIES SPECIFICATIONS ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS BA-7 Robe Hook Mfr.: KOHLER Executive Suites Model:Antique K-214 One-Bedroom Suites Description: Robe Hook Typical Guestroom Finish: Polished Chrome Notes: See cut sheets for additional information BA-8 Illuminated mirror Mfr.: Miroir Brot Condos Model:Reflect #Art#A24 12A1 110U-3x Executive Suites Description: Illuminated Mirror One-Bedroom Suites Presidential Suites Finish: Polished Chrome Residence Club Suites Notes: See cut sheets for additional information/ Two-Bedroom Suites Long arm w/ Nightlight option Typical Guestroom BA-9 Bath Caddie Mfr.: Cheviot Products Executive Suites Model:#31417 One-Bedroom Suites Description:Bath Caddie Typical Guestroom Finish: Polished Chrome Notes: See cut sheets for additional information BA-10 Towel Bar Pull Mfr.: C.R. Laurence Co. Inc. Executive Suites Model: BMNW18X18CH One-Bedroom Suites Description: 18" Back to Back tubular without metal Typical Guestroom washers Finish: Polished Chrome Notes: See cut sheets for additional information BA-10.1 Towel Bar Mfr.: Typical Guestroom BA-11 Towel Bar - 12" Mfr.: GINGER Condos Model: Chelsea no. 1160.04 Presidential Suites Description: 12" Bath Grab Bar Residence Club Suites Two-Bedroom Suites Finish: Polished Nickel Notes: 1J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 2 of 5 0 Revision: May 12, 2006 Four Seasons Vail BfH Brayton + Hughes Hardware Specifications D E S I G N S T U D 1 I O Project No.: 200458 BATH ACCESSORIES SPECIFICATIONS ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS BA-12 Towel Ring Mfr.: KOHLER Condos Model: IV Geores K-6817 Presidential Suites Dsecription: Towel Ring Residence Club Suites Two-Bedroom Suites Finish: Vibrant Polished Nickel (SN) Notes: BA-13 Tissue Holder Mfr.: KOHLER Condos Model: IV Georges K-6828 Presidential Suites Description: Toliet Tissue Holder Residence Club Suites Two-Bedroom Suites Finish: Vibrant Polished Nickel (SN) Notes: BA-14 Glass Shelf Mfr.: KOHLER Condos Model: IV Georges K-6829 Presidential Suites Description: Glass Shelf Residence Club Suites Two-Bedroom Suites Finish: Vibrant Polished Nickel (SN) Notes: BA-15 Soap Holder Mfr.: KOHLER Condos Model: IV Geoges K-6820 Presidential Suites Description: Soap Dish Residence Club Suites Two-Bedroom Suites Finish: Vibrant Polishe Nickel (SN) Notes: BA-16 Robe Hook Mfr.: KOHLER Condos Model: IV Georges K-6821 Presidential Suites Description: Robe hook Residence Club Suites Two-Bedroom Suites Finishes: Vibrant Polished Nickel Notes: BA-17 Open Mfr.: BA-18 Bath Caddie Mfr.: To Be Determined Executive Suites Model: Presidential Suites Description: Residence Club Suites Two-Bedroom Suites Finish: Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 3 of 5 Al Revision: May 12, 2006 Four Seasons Vail Brayton + Hughes Hardware S ecifications BH DESIGN STUDIO P Project No.: 200458 NJ BATH ACCESSORIES SPECIFICATIONS ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS BA-19 Towel Bar Pull Mfr.: C.R. Laurence Co. Inc. Condos Model: BMNW18X18 Executive Suites Presidential Suites Description: 18" Back to Back tubular without metal Residence Club Suites washers. Two-Bedroom Suites Finish: Polished Nickel Notes: BA-20 24" Towel Bar Mfr.: KOHLER Condos Model: IV Georges K-6826-C Presidential Suites Residence Club Suites Description: 24" Towel Bar Two-Bedroom Suites Finish: Vibrant Polished Nickel Notes: BA-21 Grab Bar - 36' Mfr.: GINGER Condos Model: Chelsea no. 1165.04 Presidential Suites Public Restrooms Description: Grab Bar Residence Club/Condo Finish: Polished Nickel Corridors Notes: Two-Bedroom Suites BA-22 Grab Bar - 42" Mfr.: Condos Model: Chelsea no. 1166.04 Presidential Suites Public Restrooms Description: Grab Bar Residence Club Lobby Finish: Polished Nickee Two-Bedroom Suites Notes: BA-23 "L' Grab Bar Mfr.: GINGER Condos Model: Chelsea "L' Angle Grab Bar no. 1168.04. Left Presidential Suites or right handle as shown on drawings. Residence Club Suites Description: L Shaped Grab Bar Two-Bedroom Suites Finish: Polished Nickel Notes: BA-24 ADA Shower Bench Mfr.: Gamco Condos Model: SS-6T Executive Suites One-Bedroom Suites Description: Shower Seat with Teak Slates Presidential Suites Finish: Stainless Steel w/ Teak Slates Residence Club Lobby Notes: Two-Bedroom Suites Typical Guestroom J Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 4 of 5 Q Revision: May 12, 2006 Four Seasons Vail 8 Brayton + Hughes Hardwares ec ARON D E S I G N S T U D I O p ifications Project No.: 200458 BATH ACCESSORIES SPECIFICATIONS ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS BA-25 "L" Grab Bar Mfr.: GINGER Typical Guestroom Model: Syncro 1968.26 Right or left facing as per drawings Description: "L' Shaped Grab Bar Finish: Polished Chrome Note: BA-26 Open Mfr.: BA-27 Open Mfr.: BA-28 Seat Cover Dispenser Mfr.: Bobrick Public Restrooms Model: B3013 Spa Description: Recessed Seat Cover Dispenser Finish: Stainless Steel Notes: BA-29 Soap Dispenser Mfr.: Bobrick Public Restrooms Model: LS650C Spa Description: Soap Dispenser Finish: Polished Chrome Notes: BA-30 Feminine Hygine Mfr.: Bobrick Public Restrooms Dispenser Model: B3500 Spa Description: Feminine Hygine Dispenser Finish: Stainless Steel Notes: BA-31 Feminine Hygine Mfr.: Disposal Model: B-4353 Description: Feminine Hygine Disposal Finish: Stainless Steel Notes: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 5 of 5 ldwk~ Al Revision: May 12, 2006 Kohler: K-6817: IV Georges Brass@: K-6817: IV Georges Brass® towel ring with Polish... Page 1 of 2 J THE BOLD LOOK OF WHLM Product Features K-6817 IV Georges Brass® towel ring with Polished or Brushed finishes Create a bath environment with elegance in every detail. Inspired by 18th century English designs, IV Georges Brass accessories portray a traditional Georgian style for the bath or powder room. For a unified decor, complement your IV Georges Brass faucets with the IV Georges towel ring and display your towels like works of art. Choose a Polished or Brushed finish. • 6" W x 4-1/2" D x 7" H towel ring Colors / Finishes & Prices COLOR FINISHES t Vibrant Polished Nickel (-SN) $293.45 SHADES OF GREY E Black Black (-7) $266.80 Vibrant Brushed Nickel (-BN) $293.45 Vibrant Brushed Bronze (-BV) $293.45 Vibrant Polished Brass (-PB) $266.80 *All prices are Manufacturer's Suggested List Prices in U.S. dollars. The price you pay at your local supply c may be different than the Manufacturer's Suggested List Price. These prices supersede previous prices and subject to change without notice. These prices do not include shipping. Any sales tax applicable will be add prices. Product Variations K-6817-A IV Georges Brass@ towel ring with Vibrant@ Polished Brass holder K-6817-B http://www.us.kohler.comlonlinecataloglprint.jsp?item=347502&prod num=6817&categor... 5/8/2006 Kohler: K-6828: N Georges Brass& K-6828: IV Georges Brass® horizontal toilet tissue THE RXD LOCK OF IMUL Product Features K-6828 IV Georges Brass® horizontal toilet tissue holder A touch of antiquity defines the IV Georges Brass toilet tissue holder. Available in an array of durable KOHLER finishes with an optional accent kit, the holder unifies bath or powder room decor. • 7-3/8" W x 4-1/2" D x 5" H toilet tissue holder • Complements IV Georges Brass faucets Colors I Finishes & Prices COLOR FINISHES s Vibrant Polished Vibrant Brushed Vibrant Brushed Vibrant Polished Nickel (-SN) Nickel (-BN) Bronze (-BV) Brass (-PB) $367.40 $367.40 $367.40 $333.95 Page 1 of 2 *All prices are Manufacturer's Suggested List Prices in U.S. dollars. The price you pay at your local supply c may be different than the Manufacturer's Suggested List Price. These prices supersede previous prices and subject to change without notice. These prices do not include shipping. Any sales tax applicable will be add prices. This page was printed from http://www.us.kohler.com/onlinecatalog/print.jsp? item= 349002&prod_num=6828&category=19&frm=&s_channel= Bathroom&s_prop2=Accessories&s--page 6828: %20IV%20Georges%20Brass(R)%20horizontal%20toilet%20tissue%20holder&s_prop3=K- 6828&s_prop4=Accessories&s_props=&s-prop7=IV%20Georges%20Brass(R) KOHLER Co. M/S 019 444 Highland Drive Kohler, WI 53044 Phone: 1-800-4-KOHLER (456-4537) Hours: 7:00 AM - 6:00 PM (Central Time) Monday to Friday This page was printed on 5/8/2006 4:41 PM http://www.us.kohler.comlonlinecatalog/print jsp?item=349002&prod_num=6828&categor... 5/8/2006 Kohler: K-6829: IV Georges Brass®: K-6829: IV Georges Brass® glass shelf Accessorie... Page I of 2 THE BOLD LOOK OFWHLER. X14 Product Features K-6829-1~r--~ IV Georges Brass® glass shelf A touch of antiquity defines the IV Georges Brass glass shelf. The tempered glass is strong enough to hold many of your favorite decorative pieces, and the durable finish on the wall mounts resists corrosion and wear. The accessory is available in an array of durable KOHLER finishes with an optional accent kit. • 32-1/2" W x 7" D x 2" H glass shelf • Complements IV Georges Brass faucets • Unifies bath and powder room decor Colors i Finishes & Prices COLOR FINISHES 9 s+ Vibrant Polished Vibrant Brushed Vibrant Brushed Vibrant Polished Nickel (-SN) Nickel (-BN) Bronze (-BV) Brass (-PB) $516.80 $516.80 $516.80 $469.90 *All prices are Manufacturer's Suggested List Prices in U.S. dollars. The price you pay at your local supply c may be different than the Manufacturer's Suggested List Price. These prices supersede previous prices and subject to change without notice. These prices do not include shipping. Any sales tax applicable will be add prices. This page was printed from http://www.us.kohler.com/onlinecatalog/print.jsp? item= 349102&prod_num=6829&category=19&frm=&s_channel=Bath room&s_prop2=Accessories&s_page 6829: %20IV%20Georges%20Brass(R)%20glass%20sheif&s_prop3= K- 6829&s_prop4=Accessories&s-props=&s-prop7=IV%20Georges%20 Brass(R) KOHLER Co. M/S 019 444 Highland Drive Kohler, WI 53044 Phone: 1-800-4-KOHLER (456-4537) Hours: 7:00 AM - 6:00 PM (Central Time) Monday to Friday This page was printed on 5/8/2006 4:42 PM 1J J http://www.us.kohler.comlonlinecatalog/print jsp?item=349102&prod num=6829&categor... 5/8/2006 Kohler: K-6820: IV Georges Brass®: K-6820: IV Georges Brass® soap dish: Accessories... Page 1 of 2 THE BOLD LOOK OFWHLEt Product Features K-6820 IV Georges Brass® soap dish Create a bath environment with elegance in every detail. Inspired by 18th century English designs, IV Georges Brass accessories portray a traditional Georgian style for the bath or powder room. For a unified decor, complement your IV Georges Brass faucets with the IV Georges Brass soap dish. It comes with a removable clear acrylic dish to make your luxurious bath complete. • 5" W x 5-1/2" D x 3-1/2" H soap dish Colors / Finishes & Prices COLOR FINISHES 3 Vibrant Polished Nickel (-SN) $279.85 Vibrant Brushed Vibrant Brushed Nickel (-BN) Bronze (-BV) $279.85 $279.85 3 Vibrant Polished Brass (-PB) $254.40 1-S *All prices are Manufacturer's Suggested List Prices in U.S. dollars. The price you pay at your local supply c be different than the Manufacturer's Suggested List Price. These prices supersede previous prices and are s change without notice. These prices do not include shipping. Any sales tax applicable will be added to the F Product Variations K-6796 IV Georges Brass® accent kit This page was printed from http://www.us.kohler.com/onlinecatalog/print.jsp? item= 348102&prod_nu m =6820&category=19&frm = nul I&s_cha nnel= Bathroom&s_prop2 =Accessories&s_p. 6820: %20IV%20Georges%20Brass(R)%20soap%20dish&s_prop3= K- 6820&s_prop4 =Accessori es&s_prop5 = &s_p rop7 = IV%20Georg es%20 Brass(R) KOHLER Co. M/S 019 444 Highland Drive Kohler, WI 53044 http://www.us.kohler.comlonlinecataloglprint.isp?item=348102&prod_num=6820&catego... 5/11/2006 Kohler: K-6821: IV Georges Brass& K-6821: IV Georges Brass® robe hook: Accessorie... Page 1 of 2 J THE BOLD LOOK OFIMProduct Features K-6821 IV Georges Brass® robe hook Create a bath environment with elegance in every detail. Inspired by 18th century English designs, IV Georges Brass accessories portray a traditional Georgian style for the bath or powder room. For a unified decor, complement your IV Georges Brass faucets with the IV Georges Brass robe hook. Your robe will be waiting for you in grand style. • 2" W x 4-1/2" D x 5-1/2" H robe hook Colors I Finishes & Prices COLOR FINISHES Vibrant Polished Nickel (-SN) $227.35 Co *All prices are Manufacturer's Suggested List Prices in U.S. dollars. The price you pay at your local supply c may be different than the Manufacturer's Suggested List Price. These prices supersede previous prices and subject to change without notice. These prices do not include shipping. Any sales tax applicable will be add prices. Product Variations K-6798 IV Georges Brass® accent kit This page was printed from http://www.us.kohler.com/onlinecatalog/print.jsp? item= 348202&prod_num=6821&category=19&frm=&s_channel=Bathrooms prop2=Accessories&s-page 6821: %20IV%20Georges%20Brass(R)%20robe%20hook&s_prop3=K- 68218es_prop4=Accessories&s_props=&s_prop7=IV%20Georges%20Brass(R) KOHLER Co. M/S 019 444 Highland Drive http://www.us.kohler.comlonlinecataloglprint jsp?item=348202&pro4_num=6821&categor... 5/8/2006 NMI. Vibrant Brushed Nickel (-BN) $227.35 Vibrant Brushed Bronze (-BV) $227.35 Vibrant Polished Brass (-PB) $206.60 J Kohler: K-6826-C: IV Georges Brass® 24" towel bar with Polished Brass or Satin Black Page 1 of I TFE B.DI= iMore k OF ICHLM _ . WHERE TO BUY SEARCH : Design & Create , K-6826-C IV Georges Brass® 24" towel bar BathrOOM prodUCtS (Photo shows Polished Brass towel bar with Brushed Nickel accents.) v Categories & Service Parts New Products Accessories Baths A Enlarge Photo Bidets Decorated Products REQUIRED & COLORS / FINISHES & DESCRIPTION & RECOMMENDED PRICES FEATURES Faucets Furniture IV Georges Brass@ 24" towel bar with Polished Performance Brass or Satin Black bar and accents Showers Showers The IV Georges Brass 24" towel bar is large enough to Sinks hold your thickest bath towels. Choose between Polished Suites & Ensembles Brass and Satin Black to unify your bath or powder room Toilets decor. Toilet Seats 30-1/2" W x 4-1/2" D x 2" H towel bar Whirlpool Baths Complements IV Georges Brass faucets Find Service Parts List price: $444.25 and up a Commercial Bathroom a Resources „ PRODUCT VARIATIONS 44- a } Ci len l7fOdllC1S sue,. V TECHNICAL INFORMATION & CAD SYMBOLS WARRANTY up for our trees, http://www.us.kohler.comlonlinecatalogtdetail jsp?from=thumb&frm=&module=Accessory... 5/8/2006 Gingerco.com Catalog GINGER catalog View by collection: » Ten » Canterbury » Cassandra » Circa » Circe » Empire » K2 » Barcelona » Chelsea - Bathroom Accessories - Cabinet Hardware - Grab Bars - Hotel Shelves - Lights - Mirrors - Shower Rods » Hotelier » Kubic » Metro » Sheffield » Stratford » Sussex » Splashables » Surface » Yorkshire » Synchro View by category: » Baskets » Bathroom Accessories » Bathroom Acessories » Cabinet Hardware » Grab Bars » Hotel Shelves » Lights » Mirrors » Shower Rods » Shower Shelves » Tank Levers » Vanity Items » Vanity Items/Complementos » Water Delivery/Faucets Grab Bars » Chelsea 12" Grab Bar (11604- * » Chelsea 16" Grab Bar (1161) » Chelsea 18" Grab Bar (1162) » Chelsea 24" Grab Bar (1163) » Chelsea 32" Grab Bar (1164) » Chelsea 36" Grab Bar (1165}. » Chelsea 42" Grab Bar (1166 » Chelsea 48" Grab Bar (1167) » Chelsea "L" Left Hand Angle Grab Bar (1168L)4- » Chelsea "L" Right Hand Angle Grab Bar (1168{._. » Chelsea Comer Grab Bar (1169) » Chelsea Grab Bar Decorative Ring (1172) Coyrtght 2(JOb Gr►gorAt l.,rights reserved .Srte design bji Catalog i -~-ZZ Page 1 of 1 wish list[( Collections or Categories or Keyword or Item Advanced Search Chelsea » Grab Bars A classic reimagined, the Chelsea collection coordinates seamlessly with a wid traditional faucets and enhances both traditional and contemporary decors. Tt is elegantly and meticulously rendered in solid forged brass. http://www.gingerco.conVcatalog.asp?type=col&col=73&catcol=397 5/11/2006 GAMCO USA SS-6 Shower Seat with Solid phenolic Slats Page 1 of 2 SS-6 Shower Seat with Solid Phenolic Slats Specifications: Framing fabricated of 1" (25mm) diameter, 18 gauge (1.2mm) type 304 stainless steel tubing with exposed surfaces #4 ~~jl® ml satin finished. Mounting brackets fabricated of 12 gauge (3mm) type 304 stainless steel with exposed surfaces #4 satin finished. Seat of 1/2" (13mm) thick solid phenolic plastic slats, 3" (76mm) wide, laminated with woodgrain color.* Stainless steel retaining clip holds seat inupright position. Overall Dimensions: 16" (406mm)W x 16" (406mm)H Mtg. Ht. 19" (483mm) to top of unit. *Note: Other colors are available. For real Teakwood, Add Suffix "T" SS-6 Shower Seat with Solid Phenolic Slats Data Sheet See the GAMCO Home page for PDF "How To" information. NOTE: See catalog for similar products and technical information. http://www.gamcousa.com/ss6.html 5/11/2006 CA/4CC SS-6 Shower Seat with Solid Phenolic Slats 16' 4oamm 15' 381mn 15' 381 mn I Jr 1. 7 5/16' lebmm 1 max 48 _ 483mm 6 3/4' 17" min 171 mm 1 I 12 1/8" 432 mm t 3 1/8' 308mm - - 79mm 53/8' ------------------Fl------------- oor 137mm Seat - 3 wood grain (or color) phenolic slats, 1/2" (13mm), x 3" (76mm) Materials: Frame- 1" (25mm) diameter, 18 gauge, (1.2mm), 18-8 type 304 stainless steel tubing, satin finished Wall Bracket- 12 gauge (3mm) plate, 18-8 type 304 stainless steel with 6 mounting holes, satin finished Operatim Shower seat folds up when not in use and is retained upright by wall bracket spring retainer lnstAtka Unit to be secured to wall with wall bracket plate (6 fasteners). For installation on stud walls, steel or fiberglass construction provide in wall backing at all fastener locations to comply with local building codes. For installation on solid walls, use expansion anchors and screws in compliance with local building codes. Fasteners not provided by GAMCO. Maa/xlrvxwm dM *lamb d&s le dWV r w1AeM kodoft General Accessory Manatoduriag Company • One Gmace Plan • Darant, Ok 74701 • Toll Free 1-1100-451-5766 • Fax SM920-2050 wwsgamcoasa.com 0 Bobrick BUILDING VALUE SINCE 1906 Celebrating 100 Years Information News & Views New Products Product & Service Information Specifications, Parts & Instructions General Information Contact Us Authorized User Sign-In Search - I Model NoJKeywords -4 Search Tips Representative & Distributor Search Home Hand Dryers Soap Dispensers ®9B-3013 http://www.bobrick.com/Bobrick/Category.asvx?sendingPageTvDe--Catalog Page 1 of 1 Toilet Partitions Washr Triml-ine''4 Series Recessed Seat. Satin-finish stainless steel. Door has 902 return, conceals flange. Dispenses 500 toilet seat covers. -,5KrZ-t9- 5/11/2006 J r06 PRODUCT SPECIFICATION Recessed toilet seat cover dispenser, Bobrick Model B-3013. Recessed toilet seat cover dispenser shall be constructed of type-304 stainless steel, welded construction. Exposed surfaces shall have satin finish. Door with 9/16" (14-mm) 90°return shall be equipped with full-length stainless steel piano hinge and tumbler lock. Capacity: 500 paper toilet seat covers. Manufacturer's service and parts manual shall be provided to building owner/manager upon completion of project. : kkkeLL AR B:(__?B 101-1 L The Experience of Authentic Luxury) ° www.rohihome.com Rohl IGtchen Accessories ~.-09 LS650C LS750L FEATURES COLORSIFINISHES WARRANTY • 3'/" spout provides greater reach • Extra strong pump for reliable operation -10-year warranty • 2-year warranty on finish • Manufactured in Switzerland • Dezincficated brass protects against aggressive components in the water • I%" cutout 3h 49 "Ur 3'/2" LS650C 15/8 . • Polished Chrome • Polished Nickel • Satin Nickel • Inca Brass • Tuscan Brass • White • Black (LS750L Only) • Biscuit (I.S7501. Only) • English Bronze LS750L • 10 Years' No Warranty on Tuscan Brass Finish (fCB) 2n 234n consult your local Rohl showroom for additional information and specifications. For complete warranty details and a fist of showrooms, go to www.mhihome.com. Bobrick Home Hand Dryers Soap Dispensers A -3500 25 NIB BUILDING VALUE SINCE 1906 Celebrating 100 Years Information 0 News & Views L New Products Product & Service Information Specifications, Parts & Instructions General Information Contact Us Authorized User Sign-In Search Model NoJKeywords GO Search Tips Representative & Distributor Search ~r Page 1 of 1 Toilet Partitions Washr TrimLineTre Series Recessed Sanr Napkin/Tampon Vendor Satin-finish stainless steel. Door has 904 return, conceals flange. Dispenses 31 napkins and 22 tampor Single-coin mechanisms for QS 254-0 Two tumbler locks; separate lock ant box. Patented. ~~1~ http://www.bobrick.conVBobrick/Category.aspx?sendingPaizeTyve=Catalog 5111/2006 PRODUCT SPECIFICATION Recessed sanitary napkin/tampon vendor, Bobrick Model B-35000 (free-operation mechanism), B-3500 (single-coin mechanism), B-3500x2 (double-coin mechanism). Recessed sanitary napkin/tampon vendor shall be constructed of type-304 stainless steel with satin finish. Dispensing mechanisms shall be pre-set at factory for (insert one: Free, 25¢, 50¢) operation, but shall be convertible in the field to allow the change of coin denomination without purchasing new mechanisms or removing unit from wall. Door shall be 18-gauge (1.2 mm) and have 7/8" (22 mm) 90° return edges. Door shall be secured to cabinet with a concealed, full- length, stainless steel piano hinge and be equipped with a stainless steel door-swing limiter and two tumbler locks. Coin mechanism pull knobs shall be satin finish aluminum. Pull knobs shall require less than five pounds of force and be operable with one hand without tight grasping, pinching or twisting motion of the wrist to comply with ADA Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG). Individual coin boxes shall be equipped with tumbler lock and slide out for easy coin collection. Manufacturer's service and parts manual shall be provided to building owner/manager upon completion of project. rB 70BRICI< Bobrick BUILDING VALUE SINCE 1906 Celebrating 100 Years Information News & Views New Products Product & Service Information Specifications, Parts & Instructions General Information Contact Us Authorized User Sign-In Search r-~ Model NoJKeywords Go Search Tips Representative & Distributor Search Home Hand Dryers Soap Dispensers ®#B-4353 Page 1 of 1 Toilet Partitions Washr ConturaT'" Series Recessed Sanit; Disposal Satin-finish stainless steel. Self-closing door pulls down for acct Furnished with removable, leak-proo plastic receptacle. http://www.bobrick.com/Bobrick/Category.aspx?sendingPageType=Catalog 5/11/2006 c PRODUCT SPECIFICATION Recessed sanitary napkin disposal, Bobrick ConturaTM Series Model B-4353. Recessed sanitary napkin disposal shall be constructed of 22-gauge (0.8- mm), type-304 stainless steel with satin finish. Front of sanitary napkin disposal door shall have same degree of arc and match other Bobrick ConturaTM Series accessories in the washroom. Radius on all corners and edges of flange and door shall be complementary and match other Bobrick ConturaTM Series washroom accessories. Flange shall be drawn, one- piece, seamless construction. Sanitary napkin disposal door shall be drawn, one-piece, seamless construction; secured to cabinet with a full-length, stainless steel piano hinge at bottom. Self-closing door of napkin disposal with international graphic symbol and stainless steel cable door swing limiter is pulled down for access to disposal. Napkin disposal shall be furnished with a removable, molded, leak-proof polyethylene receptacle. Manufacturer's service and parts manual shall be provided to building owner/manager upon completion of project. MRm PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10822 VAIL, COLORADO SHOWER DOORS AND ENCLOSURES SECTION 10822 - SHOWER DOORS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing shower doors and enclosures. B. Related Sections: 1. Toilet and bath accessories are specified in Section 10800. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturers' information on specialties and installation instructions. 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver shower doors until construction is ready for their installation. Protect from damage during delivery, storage, handling, and installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PUBLIC AREA SHOWER DOORS AND ENCLOSURES A. Approved Manufacturer. Kallista, Inc. `Imperial Ritz Shower Screen' or approved equal. B. Construction: Doors shall be frameless, 318-inch tempered glass. Mounting frame shall be as detailed on the interior design drawings. Door pull on both sides shall be custom to match bath trim hardware. 2.02 BACK OF HOUSE SHOWER DOORS AND ENCLOSURES A. Approved Manufacturers: American Shower Door, Century Shower Door, Ketcham or approved equal. B. Glass: 3116-inch thick obscure tempered float glass. C. Extrusions: 6463-T5 or 6063-T5 alloy depending on application. D. Hardware: Aluminum piano hinge and stainless steel pivot bolts. Fasteners shall be stainless steel. E. Finish: Satin anodized aluminum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install shower doors in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Touch-up marred finishes; replace units that cannot be restored to an acceptable appearance. Use materials and procedures recommended by manufacturers. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 SHOWER DOORS AND ENCLOSURES Progress CD Set 10822-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 10990 VAIL, COLORADO MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES SECTION 10990 - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES (includes roof snow melt system) PART1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing the following miscellaneous specialty items: 1. Roof eave and valley snow melt system. B. Related Sections: 1. Concrete roof ble is specified in Section 07321. 2. Electrical work is specified ki Division 16. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Roof eave snow melt system shall be a complete heating system on roof eaves for the prevention of ice dam and icicle formation. The heating cable and components shall be approved specifically for snow and ice melting on roofs. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's literature, including product description, illustrations, specifications, installation drawings, and utility and mounting rough4n information. B. Shop Drawings: Show dimensions, required dearances, location, mounting, finish and where required, size, location, and capacity of mechanical and electrical services. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer shall have a minimum 4-years experience in the design and manufacture of roof eave ice prevention panels and systems of the type required for this Project 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deriver, store, and handle products upright and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Protect items as required t0 prevent damage during storage and construction. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF EAVE SNOW MELT SYSTEM A. Approved Manufacturers: Bylin Engineered Systems, Inc. 'RIM Eave Panel' and *RIM Valley Panel or approved equal. B. Heating Panels: Pariels shall consist of an extruded heat cable track assembly, self-regulating heating cables and a 2Gounce copper cover panel. The extruded heat trade assembly includes cusinm designed guides to receive UL and CSA approved self-regulating heating cables. 04-07.06 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES Progress CD Set 10990-1 y I PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 10990 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES C. Heating Cable: Heating cables shall be self-regulating heaters specifically designed and engineered for this application. 1. Heating cable shall be UL and CSA listed specifically as electric de-icing and snow-melting equipment 2. The heating cable shall be of parallel resistance construction capable of being cut to length and terminated in the field. 3. The self-regulating heater shall consist of two 16 AWG (minimum) nickel-plated copper bus wires embedded in parallel in a radiation cross-linked self-regulating conductive polymer core specifically designed for snow and ice melting. The heater shag be capable of varying its heat output along its entire length. The heater shall include a polyolefin dielectric jacket rated 300-VAC at 105-deg. C., a tinned-copper braid (14 AWG equivalent wire size), and a UV stabilized polyolefin oveiJadket. 4. The heater shag be designed to operate on the lime voltage without the use of transformers. Coordinate available One voltage with Division 16. D. Junction Box / Power Termination: The heating cables shall be connected to the power source in an approved junction box with approved termination components. E. Power Distribution and Control: 1. The power supply to the heating cables shall be circuit protected with a minimum 10 mafiamp ground fault equipment protection device sized for the current load'mg required by this application. 5 milfiamp GFCI circuit breakers shall not be used. 2. Power to the snow melting circuits will be controlled by an ambient sensor and a RIM panel temperature sensor designed to control the heating system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Set specialty items securely in place, rigidly or flexibly mounted in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Installation shall conform to NEC and other applicable national or local lode requirements. B. Touch-up and restore damaged or defaced finishes. 3.02 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A Repair or replace items not acceptable to the Architect. B. Upon completion of installation, dean items in accordance with manufacturer's reoommendatlons, and protect from damage und'I final acceptance of work. END OF SECTION 04.07.06 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES Progress CD Set 10990 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT SECTION 11110 • LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Contract Documents applying to this Section include all Laundry Equipment and Rough-in Plans, these General Conditions and Specifications, all related Project Specifications and drawings, and all Addenda issued prior to execution of this Contract. The Laundry Equipment Contractor must not submit any Bids until they have carefully reviewed all Laundry Drawings, General Conditions, Specifications, Instructions to Bidders, or any other related documents. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.2.1 WORK INCLUDED (LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT CONTRACT): A. Laundry work is indicated on the Laundry Drawings and Specifications includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: B. Furnish all laundry equipment as per Itemized Equipment Schedule, labor, materials, and services necessary for the setting in place of laundry service and related equipment in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, including that which is reasonably inferred. All equipment to have optional correctional packages included, along with security screws. All equipment selections to be approved by owner before purchasing. Provide and set in place laundry equipment including the following: C. Install and provide laundry equipment bolt down hardware, bases, equipment leveling grout pads, equipment stands and supports as required throughout. Repair any damage to the building or equipment as a result of this installation. Remove any debris as a result of this installation. Clean and prepare laundry equipment for operation prior to final sign off and equipment approval by the Owners representative. Coordinate locations for wall reinforcement/backing (by the G.C.) as required for laundry equipment. Cut holes in laundry equipment for pipes, drains, electric outlets, etc. as required for installation, including welded sleeves, collars, ferrules, or escutcheons. Provide for rigging equipment and cost as required to install the specified laundry equipment in the specified locations. When specified, provide and install utility/electrical interconnections between related laundry equipment components to make ready for final single point connections by the G.C. (or other building trades). When specified, provide and install washer vacuum breakers, mechanical support equipment, and other required equipment, parts, or assemblies. For all laundry equipment provide and install all motor starters, switches, communication cables and dryer back draft dampers as required. Provide all additional work indicated in the Contract Documents. D. 1.2.2 RELATED WORK (NOT INCLUDED IN LAUNDRY CONTRACT): A. Electric services, including wiring to and final connection to the laundry equipment Water, water softening, waste, gas, steam/oondensate, and cooling water services to the laundry equipment, including all valves, hardware and fittings, and final connections to the laundry equipment. Vacuum breakers and shock absorbers except when supplied with the laundry equipment All space heating, ventilation, and air conditioning systems and direct connected supply/exhaust duct work to and from the connection position of the laundry equipment. Wall reinforcing or bracing required for wall mounted laundry equipment. Drain trough and trenches including trench frames, grating, and lint screens. Floor pad thickening, noise and vibration dampening construction, and structural reinforcing and thickening of floor slabs to accommodate heavy static and dynamic floor loading at the laundry equipment carts. All related laundry building construction, lighting, fire protection, mechanical/electrical system, and communication systems. Passage way and access for delivery and installation of the specified laundry equipment. Laundry detergent and related remote chemical dispensing equipment and piping system. Custom fabricated millwork desks, counters, wall shelving, and cabinets. All plumbing fixtures, including soak sinks, water fountains, hand sinks, hose bibs, and mop basins. 05.12-06 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11100-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1.3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS: A. In addition to the requirements of these Specifications, comply with Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for all phases of work. 1.3.2 QUALIFICATIONS: A. Manufacturer producing the laundry equipment of the Section shall have a minimum of five years experience in work of similar scope and nature to that specified. Laundry Equipment Contractor installer for the Work of this Section shall have a minimum of five years experience in work of similar scope and nature to that specified and shall have the approval of the Owners representative and the Laundry Equipment Consultant. 1.3.3 STANDARDS: A. All laundry equipment, work, and materials shall comply with the latest codes, laws, ordinances, regulations, and directions of any agency including national or local Building Inspection and Health Departments, State Regulations, or any other authority having jurisdiction. B. All laundry equipment, work, and materials shall comply with the latest national or local fire safety regulations of any agency having jurisdiction including. C. Electrical equipment shall comply U.L. listing and with the latest national or local electrical regulations of any agency having jurisdiction. D. Standard and high pressure steam heated equipment shall comply with the latest national or local regulations of any agency having jurisdiction. E. Gas heated equipment shall comply with A.G.A. and the latest national or local regulations of any agency having jurisdiction. F. All laundry equipment, work, and materials shall comply with the latest work national or local safety regulations of any agency having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: 1.4.1 BIDS: A. Bids shall be submitted on the equipment specified herein. In the event that the Bidder can not bid the specified item due to circumstances such as proprietary territories or limited sales agreements, the Bidder shall submit altemates "equal" in nature to the specified item including specified capacities, features, options, voltages, etc. Acceptance of any alternate is subject to written approval and suitability for this project Considerations will be based on quality and quantity differences compared to the original specification as well as available space and utility conditions. B. Any substitutions or alternates proposed must be submitted in writing as part of the Bid Proposal including literature describing the substitution. Include in writing any differences from the original specification such as different space, utility, or building requirements as well as any differences in specified options and features. C. No equipment alternates or substitutions from the original specifications shall be installed without prior approval based on analysis by the Architect, Owner's Representative, Laundry Design Consultant, Project Engineer, etc. 05-12-06 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11100-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT D. Refer to other sections for details describing acceptable substitutes/aiternates. E. In the event of model changes, the latest model shall be acceptable, with the provisions that the latest model conforms in quality and other features to the intent and purpose for which it was specified. Acceptance of a substitutes/altemates for any reason shall not relieve the Laundry Equipment Contractor of liability for all additional costs incurred as a result of redesign and all other work required to install the substitute/alternate items. 1.4.2 SPECIFICATION OR PROJECT DRAWING DISCREPANCIES: A. Where discrepancies exist in the project specifications and drawings, regarding quality or quantity, the higher quality or the greater quantity shall be furnished. A corresponding credit will be issued if a lesser quality or quantity is approved. The Laundry Equipment Contractor must notify the Owner's representative, Architect, General Contractor, and Laundry Design Consultant if any discrepancies exist on the Laundry Drawings, Specifications, or any other related documents prior to proceeding with this Contract. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: 1.5.1 GENERAL: The following data shall be submitted for approval in the quantity and at the time requested by the Architect or the Owner's representative. 1.5.2 EQUIPMENT BROCHURES: A. Submit, within ten working days after award of Contract, five (5) laundry equipment brochures, bound in sequence of the item numbers, clearly labeled in the upper right comer with the item and quantity to be furnished. Sheets for each item shall dearly highlight and indicate all appropriate information such as make, model no., accessories/options to be provided, electrical information, and special features or cautions. Where no printed data exists, submit the required information in the form described below for shop drawings. Included the Contractors name and project name on the brochure cover. 1.5.3 SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Submit shop drawings for all special manufactured or custom fabricated items. Prepare shop drawings at 3/4' or 1-112' scale, show dimensions, materials, and details of construction installation and relation of adjoining work requiring cutting or dose fitting. Indicate reinforcements, anchorage and related work required for the complete installation of laundry equipment. Submit five (5) sets of shop drawings package within ten working days after award of Contract 1.5.4 ROUGH-IN DRAWINGS: A. Submit five (5) sets of the utility rough-in drawings as related to laundry including plumbing, mechanical, electrical, architectural conditions, type rough-in drawings that shalt be drawn at 114' scale and shall be informatively labeled and filled. Every plumbing, mechanical, and electrical point of connection or location shall be clearly identified showing the necessary bad, size, and consumption data required and completely dimensioned for location. Caution Notations to all trades shall be dearly and completely identified for appropriate action by all trades at critical locations. All dimensions shall be related to finished surfaces, center lines and heights above the finished floor. 1.5.5 OTHER MANUALS A. After installation is completed and required testing, start-up, and operation instructions are completed, the Laundry Equipment Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of bound maintenance service and parts 05.12-06 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11100-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT manuals with operation instructions, replacement parts lists, maintenance schedules, and copies of laundry/valet/housekeeping equipment warranty cards. It is the responsibility of the Laundry Equipment Contractor to fill out and forward all warranty and registration forms required by the various Manufacturers. 1.5.6 WARRANTY REPAIR SERVICE: The Laundry Equipment Contractor shall provide a trained and qualified Service Agency facility and personnel to be available within 24 hours after request by an authorized representative of the Owner to repair or replace defective laundrylvaleYhousekeeping equipment (as specified in Section 11110) for the Warranty period without cost to the Owner's representative, including all costs such as labor, materials, parts, travel, travel time, lodging, out of pocket expenses, and other expenses, unless such service is required because of misuse, negligence, willful damage, improper maintenance or accident by other parties. Refer to other sections for further information regarding Warranty requirements. B. N Laundry Equipment Contract Warranty requirements are not detailed in any other sections, then the Warranty period shall be one full year past the date of installation and acceptance by the Owner's Representative. 1.5.7 SERVICE FACILITY: A. The Laundry Equipment Contractor shall submit the name, address and phone number of the qualified Service Agency for the Warranty period for approval. Prior to completion of the Laundry Equipment Contract, the Laundry Equipment Contractor shall post sign in the laundry/valet office area with the name, address and phone number of the approved Service Agency for repairs and service, during the Warranty period. A copy of this listing shall be sent to the General Contractor and to the Owner's representative. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING: 1.6.1 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver materials (except bulk materials) in Manufacturer's unopened containers fully identified with Manufacturer's name, trade name, make, model no., quantity, type, class, grade, size, and color of the product enclosed. B. Store materials, equipment, and fixtures in unopened containers. Store off the ground and under cover, protected from damage until authorized to deliver and install. 1.6.2 HANDLING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: Provide a Rigger for rigging all heavy or bulky laundry/valet equipment to be moved and set in place at the job site. Coordinate with General Contractor for use of building crane where possible, otherwise provide handling equipment as required. All expenses for use of the building crane or special handling equipment shall be the responsibility of the Laundry Equipment Contractor. 1.6.3 PROTECTION: A. The Laundry Equipment Contractor is responsible, during the progress of the project, to protect his equipment against theft or damage until final acceptance by the Owner's representative. The Owner's representative or General Contractor should sign for all items delivered to the job site prior to final acceptance. Verify conditions at the building, particularly door opening and passages, to assure access for all laundry equipment. Any pieces too bulky for existing facilities shall be hoisted or otherwise handled with apparatus as required. Coordinate with the General Contractor to provide openings for laundry/valet/housekeeping 05-12-06 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11100-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT equipment too large to fit through doors or passages. If this is not done in a timely manner, in writing, and approved by the General Contractor, any extra cost involved will be paid by the Laundry Equipment Contractor. Use all means necessary to protect the laundry equipment included in this Section before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. C. In the event of damage caused by the Laundry Equipment Contractor, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Owner's representative, General Contractor, and Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. See itemized Laundry Equipment Specifications at the end of this Section. 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS: A. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of the work of this Section, use new, first quality materials of their respective kinds, and subject to approval of the Owner's representative, General Contractor, and Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS: 3.1.1 INSPECTIONS: A. Prior to start of work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where the installation of laundry/valet equipment may properly commence. 3.1.2 DISCREPANCIES: Q In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the General Contractor and Architect. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.1.3 FIELD MEASUREMENTS: A. The Laundry Equipment Contractor shall verify delivery access, architectural, and utility dimensions before proceeding with the Laundry Contract work, obtain field measurements for work required to be accurately fitted to other construction, and shall be responsible for the accuracy of such measurements and precise fitting and assembly of finished work. 3.2 INSTALLATION: 3.2.1 JOINTING AND ANCHORING: A. Set each piece of non-mobile/non-portable laundry/valet equipment securely in place, leveled, and adjusted to correct height. Anchor to supporting substrate where indicated and where required for sustained operation and use without shifting or dislocation. Coordinate bolt down and anchoring details with the General Contractor. Conceal anchorages wherever possible. Adjust and level counter tops and other work surfaces. Non-tamper-proof hardware not accepted. 05-12-06 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Summary Pemut Set 11100-5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 3.3 CLEANING, RESTORING FINISHES: A. Restore exposed and semi-exposed finishes to removelrepair any dents, cracks, abrasions, dust, dirt, residues, and other damages. Polish exposed metal surfaces and touch up painted surfaces. Replace work that cannot be successfully restored. 3.4 TESTING, START-UP AND INSTRUCTIONS: A. Delay the start-up of laundry equipment until service lines have been tested, balanced, and adjusted for pressure, voltage and similar consideration, and until water and steam lines have been cleaned and treated for sanitation. Test each piece of laundrylvalet equipment to demonstrate that it is operating properly, and that controls and safety devices are functional. Repair or replace equipment that is found to be defective in its operation, including units, which are performing below specified capacity and standards or operating with excessive noise or vibration. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance procedures for each piece of laundry equipment. PART 4 ITEMIZED LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 4.1 Laundry Equipment shall be provided as specified as follows (seethe following pages for detailed Laundry Equipment Specifications): 05-12-06 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Summary Pemit Set 11100-6 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT ITEM #1: DETERGENT DISPENSING SYSTEM Quantity: Five (5) - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Purveyor. ITEM #2 JANITORS SINK ASSEMBLY WI FAUCET Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Eagle Group Model No.: EG20.01 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans And Details For Length, Width And Configuration, with Rack. Utilities Req'd.: Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. 4-pole mop holder. 2. Hose and Bracket. 3. Service Faucet. ITEM #3: Quantity: Manufacturer: Model No.: Specifier ID No.: Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: EYE WASH WITH TROUGH One (1) Bardley E19-310P *T022 12"x24" SFT-12-24 for Trough CW Fumish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: ITEM #4 SOAK SINK W/ FAUCET Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Eagle Group Model No.: 314-17.5-2-CFLDO Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Width And Configuration, Two Compartment, with Faucet Utilities Req'd.: Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. Kit C. 2. With T&S B-0231 faucet, B-3940 drain/ overflow. 3. Service Faucet. ITEM #5: IN FLOOR SCALE Quantity: One (1) OS12-O6 Summary Permit Set LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 11100-7 {6 F PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Manufacturer: Air Weigh Model No.: AW1620 Pertinent Data: Pit by General Contractor Utilities Req'd: Isolated circuit (100 waft load) 220 volts 50 hz 1 ph Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Minimum indicator and scale indicating capacity of 1000 lbs. And 220 lbs. Spring dial indication lbs. 2. 48" W x 48" L x 3' H overall scale dimensions. 3. Waterproof scale construction including waterproof load cell. 4. Provide scale with pit frame kit assembly. L.E.C. to coordinate exact pit dimensions with G.C. and coordinate exact installation requirements for pit frame and control wiring from scale to indicator. 5. L.E.C. to level the scale flush with the finished floor level and install waterproof grouting around pit frame and over floor cut-out for control wire after scale is installed as required. 6. G.C. to provide 100mm (4") deep depression in floor as shown on sheet L1.2 and cut out floor as required for control wire from scale to indicator. L.E.C. to provide G.C. with exact shop drawings for pit requirements, prior to pouring of the floor. 7. L.E.C. to provide and install waterproof control wire in conduit of adequate length to reach from indicator to scale via a floor cut out. Coordinate exact location for floor cut-out for control wire with G.C. 8. Indicator with automatic tare button to automatically subtract weight of laundry cart from total weight. Indicator to be capable of programming tare weights of four (4) minimum different cart types and selector control for different types of carts. 9. Indicator with data output option to add transfer printer in future if and when desired. 10. Indicator with automatic zero maintenance to insure a stable zero and motion detection. 11. 220 volts 50 hz 1 ph electrical operation. 12. Wall mounted indicator with wall mounting hardware, to be installed adjacent to scale on wall as shown on sheet L1.1. 13. Indicator with stainless steel wash down enclosure. ITEM #6: SORTING CART Quantity: Nineteen (19) Manufacturer: Model No.: 3916 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 16 Bushel, Poly Basket. Utilities Req'd.: Fumish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: Standard casters are 3" rubber. ITEM #7 CORNER GUARDS Quantity: Lot Manufacturer. Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plan For Locations and Configuration Utilities Req'd.: N/A Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard detail FSD1-40. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to 0512-06 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11100-8 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #9 SPARE NUMBER ITEM #13: WASHER/EXTRACTOR Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Minor Model No.: 30022X8J Pertinent Data: 55 Lb.capacity( 8.18 cu-ft.), Variable Speed, Soft Mount, End Loading Utilities Req'd.: 208W3PH,1"HW & 1"CW, 3"IW, ('/:"steam-optional), 5HP Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Washer/Extractor shall be and end loading, open pocket machine with a dry weight capacity of 50lbs (30" Diameter x 20" Deep Cylinder, (8.18 cu.ft.capacity Cylinder to be Stainless Steel. 2. Single motor drive (5.0 H.P).with Programmable variable speed Wash and Extract, 208 volts, 60Hz, 3 phase electrical operation. 3. Steam injection system (optional), to assist, control, and raise the hot water temperature (up to 180 deg. F) all controllable by the Microprocessor control. 4. Automatic permanent press cool down setting and cotton fabric setting. 5. Programmable Microprocessor must be able to control number, type, time, and temperature of baths, as well as chemical supply injection with a minimum of two programmable water levels. 6. Anti-siphon, vacuum break protection (bi-directional vacuum breakers) at all fill valves. 7. Provide (5) Liquid supply injector connections with Automatic Supply dispenser ( and control signals for 8 external supplies). 8. Provide (8) Chemical relays. Chemical dispensing assembly shall be equipped to prevent chemical concentrates from collecting or dripping on to washer's exteriorfinterior to avoid corrosion or damage to machine. 9. As a separate Add Alternate quote, a Bid price to provide manual feed supply injection with five compartments and water-flushing device, prior to ordering washer. Confirm with Owner what type of manual feed assembly is required, if any. 10. Provide Rear Drain (Standard). Piping from Washer drain to Drain trench by L.E.C. 11. Provide thermal cool down % speed (gentle action) for delicates with option for overnight soak. Machine to be equipped with door safety interlock and unbalance switch. 12. Washer/Extractor to be mounted on housekeeping pad (by G.C.) Mounting to floor without housekeeping pad will be unacceptable. Bolt-down hardware and grouting by L.E.C. 13. Place and install as per location on plan, verify with General Contractor before installation. ITEM #10: WASHER/EXTRACTOR Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Minor Model No.: 42032F7J Pertinent Data: 165 Lb. capacity( 8.18 cu.ft.), Variable Speed, Soft Mount, End Loading ( Steam Injected) Utilities Req'd.: 208V/3PH,1"HW & 1"CW, 3"IW, (Yz"steam-optional), 5HP Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Washer/Extractor shall be and end loading, open pocket machine with a dry weight capacity of 50lbs (30" Diameter x 20" Deep Cylinder, (8.18 cu-ft capacity Cylinder to be Stainless Steel. 2. Single motor drive (5.0 H.P).with Programmable variable speed Wash and Extract, 208 volts, 601-1z, 3 phase electrical 05-12-06 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11100-9 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT operation. 3. Steam injection system (optional), to assist, control, and raise the hot water temperature (up to 180 deg. F) all controllable by the Microprocessor control. 4. Automatic permanent press cool down setting and cotton fabric setting. 5. Programmable Microprocessor must be able to control number, type, time, and temperature of baths, as well as chemical supply injection with a minimum of two programmable water levels. 6. Anti-siphon, vacuum break protection (bi-directional vacuum breakers) at all fill valves. 7. Provide (5) Liquid supply injector connections with Automatic Supply dispenser ( and control signals for 8 external supplies). 8. Provide (8) Chemical relays. Chemical dispensing assembly shall be equipped to prevent chemical concentrates from collecting or dripping on to washer's exteriorlinterior to avoid corrosion or damage to machine. 9. As a separate Add Altemate quote, a Bid price to provide manual feed supply injection with five compartments and water-flushing device, prior to ordering washer. Confirm with Owner what type of manual feed assembly is required, if any. 10. Provide Rear Drain (Standard). Piping from Washer drain to Drain trench by L.E.C. 11. Provide thermal cool down % speed (gentle action) for delicates with option for overnight soak. Machine to be equipped with door safety interlock and unbalance switch. 12. Washer/Extractor to be mounted on housekeeping pad (by G.C.) Mounting to floor without housekeeping pad will be unacceptable. Bolt-down hardware and grouting by L.E.C. 13. Place and install as per location on plan, verify with General Contractor before installation. ITEM #11: TRENCH WITH COVER/ FRAME AND SCREEN Quantity: One (1) - Not In This Contract Section Provided by General Contractor. ITEM #7: LINT COLLECTOR Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Energenics Model No.: FRP-20 Pertinent Data: Top outlet exhaust with connection collars, fiberglass construction For multiple dryers up to 20,000 cfm exhaust, with stand & lint bag with wet fire suppression spray. Utilities Req'd.: 120V/1 ph, 3/4"CW, "IW,1" Compressed Air (minimum), 34" diameter exhaust Fumish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Single stage screen type filter sized for a maximum of 20,000 cfin exhaust coming from dryers as specified above. 2. Provide standard top outlet but as an add alternate provide optional side discharge as required based on existing room overhead dimensions and compatibility with exhaust ductwork as specified and detailed by the Mechanical Engineer. 2. Air solenoid valve electrically operated for automatic blow-down of lint from filter into collection bag. 3. Removable lint bag with 5 trash liners. 4. Wall mount control panel to house alarms, gauges, switches, airtwater solenoid valves, etc. Unit shall be purchased with the pre-plumbed option. 5. Water spray optional fire suppression system to activate in case of fire with shut off and r reset 6. Excess pressure alarm and control. 7. Air pressure gauge. 8. Manual blow-down switch. 9. 120 volt 60hz 1 ph, fire control system (including control panel) with water spray mist when excessive heat or fire occurs (activation temperature of 350 degrees F). 10. Access door for dean out. 11. Floor mount leg extensions and lint chute extension as required. 12. Fiberglass housing construction with fire rating of 1000 degrees F for 10 minutes. 05-12-06 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Summary Pemm Set 11100-10 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 13. Laundry Equipment Contractor (L.E.C.) shall provide leg extensions to floor mount the lint collector at an adequate height to accommodate easy hook-up of the in coming dryer exhaust ductwork and to allow the lint collection bag to be hung beneath the collector. 14. L.E.C. shall provide duct transition fittings as required and make ready lint collector for inlet and outlet hookups by M.C. 15. Lint collector must meet 1=1 fire safety codes or approval of kxxl Fire Marshal. 16. Mechanical engineer shall specify additional exhaust fans or ventilation hardware, interlocked to operate in conjunction with dryer operation and lint collector, as required for proper lint collector exhaust as indicated on sheet LD1.2 per mechanical and fire safety codes. 17. Mechanical Contractor shall provide for, connect, and install exhaust ducting from dryers to collector and from collector to building exterior as indicated on sheet LD1.2 per mechanical and fire safety codes. ITEM #13: AIR COMPRESSOR Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Ingersoll-Rand Model No.: RAND UP6-20-200 Pertinent Data: 240GL. TNK & 20 HP, W/ Dryer Inger Utilities Req'd.: 480 V Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Plumbin g and Mechanical Contractors shall provide and install compressed air dryer (down stream from the compressor) sized to provide dry and dean compressed air to the laundry area for the equipment as noted on Sheet LD1.3. Ark, T M # HAND SINK W/ EYE WASH I E 14 Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Eagle Group Model No.: HAS-10-FDPS Specifier ID No.: 'T022 Pertinent Data: With Soap & Towel Dispenser Utilities Req'd.: HW & CW, Waste Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: With wrist blade faucet, soap dispenser, folded paper towel dispenser, basket drain, and wall mounting brackets. ITEM #15: TUMBLE DRYER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Milnor Model No.: M190 Pertinent Data: 190 Lb. capacity Utilities Req'd: 13 hp ,208 volts 60 hz 3 ph, 20" diameter exhaust @ 4,200 c.f.m., 1.25" gas Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Gas fired. L.E.C. must adjust burner as suited to local gas supply conditions and altitude. Adjust burner orifice and assembly for local altitude and gas conditions. Verify exact gas type and conditions prior to ordering this dryer. 2. Electronic ignition system. 3. See-through, clear glass door. 05-12-06 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11100-11 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 4. Computer controls including: reverse or non-reverse control, self diagnostic function, programmable temperature control, push to start control, programmable drying and permanent press cool down timer control with L.E.D. readout, computer reset. 5. Reversing basket control. 6. Sealed bearing drive with separate fan and reversing basket motors, with electrical/ thermal overload protection. 7. 208 volt 60 HZ 3ph electrical operation. 8. Dry weight capacity of 122 lbs. with a 51-1/2" diameter x 42-112" deep (51.2 cu. ft.). 9. Double wall (insulated) construction on front, sides, and burner compartment. 10. Safety controls including: flame failure protection, exhaust air failure switch, overheat protection temperature safety thermostat, gas valve (AGA approved) and pressure regulator. 11. Automatic back draft damper. 12. Built-in, self-cleaning lint screen. 13. Built-in anti-wrinkle feature to tumble without heat periodically after the drying cycle is ended to prevent wrinkles. 14. Aluminized steel burner. 15. Adjustable leveling bolts. 16. Fire safety engineer shall locate fire protection at dryer area as required by code. 17. Mechanical Contractor shall provide lint ducting to building exterior as indicated on sheet LD1,2. 18. Plumbing Contractor shall provide and install fire control gas shut-off valves as required by code. 19. Tumbler to be supported and driven via roller wheels. 20. Unit to have Fire Suppression System. ITEM #16: HAND FOLDING TABLE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration, AFF 41" Utilities Req'd: Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard details; FSD1-1B, FSD1-5A, FSD1-7, FSD1-10, FSD1-15 and FSD2-1. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #17: LAUNDRY CART Quantity: Thirteen (13) Manufacturer: Model No.: 3916 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 16 Bushel, Poly Basket W/ Spring Platform. Utilities Req'd.: Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: Standard casters are 3" rubber. ITEM #18: MOBILE SCALE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. 05.12-06 Summary Permit Set LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 11100-12 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Model No.: 70PL Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 16 bushel capacity 200 lb capacity, all steel frame. Heavy gauge poly baskets. ITEM #19: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #20: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #21: SHEET FEEDER Quantity: One (1) Manufacture: Chicago Model No.: I ing Edge Pertinent Data: With folder/crossfolder & stacker, 2-Roll @ 32" Dia. x 120" W. rolls. Utilities Req'd.: 20 hp / 2.2 hp, 480 volt 60 hz 3 phase, 2" steam supply @ 29 bhp, 1-1/2" condensate return, 5" dia. exhaust @ 400 cfm., 3/4" compressed air @ 80 -100 psi. Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. 408 volt 60 hz 3 phase electrical operation. 2. Variable speed drive. 3. Steam heated with completely insolated chest and side panels. 4. Built-in exhaust canopy with fan. 5. Two primary fold setting with discharge to folder/crossfolder. 6. One, two, or three crossfold settings with side discharge and stacker to right of ironer (see sheet LD1.1 for orientation) with reprogrammable automatic crossfold setting based on size of linen being ironed or manual folding control mode. 7. Ironer shall be capable of folding items as small as 45" wide or as large as 120" wide. 8. Microprocessor control assembly with self diagnostics feature. 9. Safety finger guards front and ITEM #22: IRONER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Chicago Model No.: Imperial 32 Steam Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Gas Utilities Req'd: 208V/50-60HZ/3ph Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. Unit shall be capable of drying and ironing flatwork, including sheets, pillowcases, table linen and napkins. 2. Unit shall have one 32" (800mm) diameter heated ironing cylinder. 3. Usable cylinder ironing surface width shall be a minimum of 120" (3050 mm). 4. Unit shall be equipped with a doffer roll and two pneumatically controlled, padded compression rolls for-maximum linen 05.12.06 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11100-13 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT J stretch and finish quality. 5. Unit shall have a minimum of 84 linear inches (2130 mm) of ironing contact. 6. Unit shall deliver dried and ironed items to front or rear of unit as determined by selector switch. 7. Unit shall be steam heated and equipped with rotary steam union to admit steam and discharge condensate, flexible inlet and return hose, all internal piping, and steam traps. Steam shall be supplied from an external boiler source. Maximum steam consumption shall not exceedl6 BHP(157 kw). Unit can be operated at steam pressure up to 125 psi) (8.6 bar) Unit shall be equipped with a pressure gauge to indicate incoming steam pressures. 8. AC frequency inverter with soft start and dynamic braking shall be provided for less stress on drive components. No variable speed pulley, handle, or belt shall be used. Speed range shall be infinitely variable from 15-120 FPM (5-37 m/min) output speed, and displayed on a digital speed indicator for accurate speed setting and monitoring. Touch control speed dial shall be provided for smooth speed changes. Horse power of 4-113 HP (3.25 kM. 9. Unit shall be equipped with heat-lock entrapment system with complete exhaust canopy, exhaust blower and motor, and insulated rear heat shield. 10. Environmentally safe, temperature-resistant covers, pads, and ribbons. 11. Touch-control speed dial, digital speed readout, and jog forward/reverse. 12. 24 volt controls, four stop buttons, complete safety guards, full length finger guar, interlocked end panels, circuit overload protection on all motors, external disconnect switch, and bilingual/pictorial safety labels. 13. Not to exceed 95 sq. ft. (8.8m"2) (80"[2030mm] x 171' 14350 mm] 14. Cylinder shall be ASME tested and approved and display proper marking. 15. Unit shall be engineered and manufactured in the U.S. All components shall be manufactured to U.S. standards for prompt parts availability and compatibility. Formed and welded steel end frames with laser-cut openings for precise alignment of components. 16. Single point electrical connection, auto-adjust variable speed drive connection to large piece folder, stain/tear reject ITEM #23: FOLDER/ CROSSFOLDER/ STACKER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Chicago Dryer Company Model No.: Skyline 200 S14-S4 Pertinent Data: 32' dia. x 120" wide, one roll, Utilities Req'd: 5.5 Amps, 208 volts 60hz 3 ph, 1/2' compressed air, 7-112"" diameter exhaust(aux.), 10"diameter Exhaust (main) Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Due to tight architectural space, prior to ordering this ironer, field verify exact installation clearance between structural columns. Advise if ironer will fit in planned space and if stacker needs to be deleted or adjusted to fit space (prior to ordering this machine). Also, check for placement in terms of maintenance access (prior to ordering this machine). 2. 208 volts 60hz 3 ph electrical operation. 3. Drive and exhaust motor with electrical/thermal overload protection. 4. 120' usable ironing length x 32" diameter roll. 5. Built in primary fold, crossfold with side discharge large piece stacker. 6. Controls including: start/stop, forward, reverse, fan control, ammeter, microprocessor controlled roll speed with speed indicator and infinite speed control, emergency stops, and steam inlet and outlet pressure gauges, programmable folder/crossfolder adjustments and settings, stacker height adjustment, and trouble shooting function.. 7. Optional rear discharge. 8. Settings for all fold bypass (return to front or discharge to rear), primary fold only (return to front or discharge to rear), and crossfold (discharge to side stacker). 9. Automatic flatwork size compensation. 10. Infrared photoelectric measuring sensors. 11. Totalizing counter for stacker. 12. Stacker orientation per layout on Sheet LD1.1. 13. Maximum operating temperature range to 200 deg. 05.12-06 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11100-14 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 14. Heat resistant Nomex roll padding to withstand operating temperature at 125 p.s.i. 15. Built-in vacuum system with fan. 16. Ironer shall be capable of finishing/drying at least 720 max. Ibs/hr capacity (6 sheets/minute x 60 x 2 Ibs/sheet) with ironer fed with little or no gaps between sheets. 17. 20 to 120 fpm operating speed. 18. Static bar eliminator at folding devices. 19. Four safety stop buttons (total), two safety stop buttons to activate brake mechanism on front of ironer (one on each end) and two safety stop buttons on rear of ironer (one on each end). Ironer and folding mechanisms equipped to prevent injury of personnel operating or standing near the ironer and folding mechanisms. 20. Lockable drive access panels and finger safety guards on front and rear of ironer or any additional safety features to prevent any personnel from touching folding mechanisms or drive assembly or ironer roll (while operating) and to prevent any injury while operating or standing near the ironer. 21. Safety brake mechanism to stop all movement of roll immediately with no overrun if emergency stop buttons or finger guards are actuated. 22. Equipped with canopy to contain heat and lint. 23. L.E.C. to provide compressed air pressure regulator(s), gauges and air filters. L.E.C. to verify local altitude prior to purchasing equipment and make any adjustments to office sizes to gas piping to ensure proper gas flow. 24. Mechanical Contractor shall provide and connect exhaust connection to outside. ITEM #24: SMALL PIECE FOLDER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Chicago Model No.: Air Chicago Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd: 3 hp 2kw 480 volts 60 hz 3 ph, 1/2" compressed air @ 8 cfm. Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. 480 volts 60 hz 3 ph electrical operation. 2. Screw-in power cord and plug by Electrical Contractor with flexible air hose and quick disconnect by Plumbing Contractor. 3. Capable of folding, stacking three set sizes of tent' cloth and smaller table linen without resetting controls. 4. Piece counter for return conveyor. 5. Stack height adjustment for return conveyor. 6. Capable of french and quarter folds, and cross-folds in halves, thirds, or quarters. 7. Automatic stain/tear rejection device. 8. Digital display and control for face width, stacker eject setting, running count in each stack, total number of pieces. 9. Electric jam shut-off. 10. L.E.C. shall obtain samples of items to be folded from the Owner, for adjustment at the factor, prior to shipping. ITEM #31: STORAGE SHELVING Quantity: Seventeen (17) Manufacturer: Metro Seal III Model No.: Super Erecta Pertinent Data: Five Tier Utilities Req'd.: N/A Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: ITEM #26: SPARE NUMBER 05-12-06 LAUNDRY EQUIM ENT Summary Permit Set 11100-15 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL. COLORADO SECTION 11100 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT ITEM #27: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #28: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #29: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #30: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #31: DRY CLEANER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Columbia Model No.: 240-N Pertinent Data: With Safety Trough Utilities Req'd: 6 hp (verify) 480 volts 60 hz 3 ph, (2)112" cooling water inlets at 30 psi at 85 degree F at 15 gpm (verify), (2)1/2" cooling water outlets at 30 psi at 95 degree F at 15 gpm (verify), 1/4" compressed air, (2)1/2" steam supply, (2)1/2" condensate returns, l" indirect waste to bucket Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. 480 volts 60 hz 3 ph electrical operation. 2. Two (2) solvent tank with lighted sight glasses, 42.3 gallon Tank I and 25.1 gallon Tank ll . 3. Slimline layout arrangement orientation as shown on Sheet LD1.1. 4. Steam heated. 5. Slimabsorba absorber resulting in 2g/m3 or less residue in dry-cleaned fabrics. 6. 2 bath processing. 7. Eco carbon filtering. 8. Refrigeration unit with heat recovery. 9. Continuous distillation. 10. Inline solvent cooling. 11. Drystat automatic drying timer controller with adjustable drying sensor with indicator to prevent under drying and over drying. 12. Standard factory formula programs with reprogramming capability and including: key limit or password switch to limit program access, manual override, solvent level control, evaporator temperature indicator, still solvent temperature indicator and heater control, refrigeration indicator and control. Programmable formulas to automatically control wash, extract, dosing, and drying functions. 13. Safety shutdown when cooling water flow is insufficient and safety shut down to prevent over filling of still. 14. Door with glass viewing port and safety door interlock. 15. Button and lint trap. 16. Still and still solvent condenser. 17. Spraymatic SPP-1 Dosing (verify with Chemical Vendor prior to ordering machine). 18. 375 rpm extract speed. 19. Reversing, 35 lb. capacity (10.6 cu. ft.), stainless steel corrosion resistant basket. 20. Drive motor(s) with electricallthermal overload protection. 21. Prior to ordering this machine the L.E.C. shall contact the local Building/Health/Pollution Control Departments (or other applicable agencies) to insure that this machine meets local building, health, and pollution control codes and standards. 22. Provide with secondary vapor absorber, sniffer device, or other options as required to meet local code requirements. 23. Provide with adequate perciorethylene to completely fill working tanks so that machine is ready for normal operation. 05.12-06 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Summary Pemrit Set 11100- % PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 24. Mechanical Contractor shall provide water cooling system as indicated on Sheet LD1.3. 25. Bolt down hardware and grouting by L.E.C. for upper mezzanine type installations. ITEM #32: WATER CHILLER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: American Model No.: ACVP0503HT Pertinent Data: Packaged, (5.7.5) Ton, With Tank & Pump, Bypass Valve With Outdoor package. Utilities Req'd: 208V 3Ph 27.5 Amps, 1500 CFM Room Exhaust Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications if chilled water is not supplied to this area by mechanical engineers. 1. 208 volts 60 hz 3 ph electrical operation. 2. All water and steam piping to and from #40, dry cleaner installed and provided by plumbing contractor. 3. Coordinate installation with general contractor. ITEM #33 UTILITY PRESS Quantity: Manufacturer: Model No.: Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd: One (1) AJAX ADCF46 With iron and spray gun, with buck padding 800 watt .4 kw 120 volts 60 hz 1 ph outlet, 1/2" steam supply @ 1.5 BHP, 1/2* condensate return, 3/8' compressed air @.25 CFM,1-1/4' air vacuum Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Overhead water spray gun with suspension spring, water valve, hose and condenser. 2. Movable arm iron stand and 3 lb. S/S, 120 volt 1 ph electric/steam iron with cord and plug. 3. Safety two (2) hand activation required to prevent injury to operator. ITEM #34: TRIPLE PUFF PRESS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: AJAX Model No.: PIA 38 Pertinent Data: Triple Puffer, with buck padding #1 L, #2, & #4C Utilities Req'd: 1/2' steam supply @.25 BHP, 1/2' condensate return, 1-1/4' air vacuum Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. ITEM #35: VACUUM UNIT Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Rema Model No.: RP-4 Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd: 480 volts 60 hz 3 ph, 2-1/2" vacuum inlet, V indirect waste 0512-06 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11100-17 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. 480 volts 60 hz 3 ph electrical operation. 2. SIS motor shaft. 3. Dynamically balanced impeller. 4. Condenser tank with double epoxy and enamel coating. 5. Aluminum involuted outlet. 6. Rubber sleeves, seals and feet. 7. Vertical tank. 8. Lint proof, rust and corrosion proof construction. 9. [1] 314" hp motor with cooling fan with motor starter and electrical/thermal overload protection. 10. Sized to provide sufficient vacuum to laundry equipment as indicated on Sheet LD1.3. 11. Plumbing Contractor to provide and connect water tight vacuum piping as indicated on Sheet LD1.3 from vacuum to laundry equipment. ITEM #36: FORM FINISHER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. AJAX Model No.: ASAF3 Pertinent Data: Long form Utilities Req'd: 2.0 Amps 280 volts 60 hz 1 ph, 112" steam supply @ 2 BHP, 1/2" condensate return Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 2.0 amp 208 volts 60 hz 1 ph electrical operation. ITEM #37: UTILITY PRESS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: AJAX Model No.: ADCF45 Pertinent Data: With iron and spray gun, with buck padding Utilities Req'd: 800 watt .4 kw 120 volts 60 hz 1 ph outlet, 1/2" steam supply @ 1.5 BHP, 1/2" condensate return, 3/8" compressed air @.25 CFM,1-114" air vacuum Furnish and set in place per manufacturers standard specifications and the following: 1. Overhead water spray gun with suspension spring, water valve, hose and condenser. 2. Movable arm iron stand and 3 lb. S/S,120 volt 1 ph electric/steam iron with cord and plug. 3. Safety two (2) hand activation required to prevent injury to operator. ITEM# 38: MUSHROOM PRESS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Forenta Model No.: 191 SUH Pertinent Data: With buck padding Utilities Req'd: 3I8" steam supply @ .75 BHP, 3/8" condensate return, 3/8" compressed air @ .2 CFM 05-12-06 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Summary Permd Set 11100-18 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Safety two (2) hand activation required to prevent injury to operator. ITEM #39: SINGLE PUFF PRESS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: AJAX Model No.: ASBBY-MV Pertinent Data: Single Puffer, with #1 M buck padding Utilities Req'd: 1/2" steam supply @.25 bhp, 1/2" condensate return, 1-1/4" air vacuum Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. ITEM #40: COLLAR PRESS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Iowa Tech Model No.: HSLC Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd: .5 amps 100 volts 60hz 1 ph, 112" steam supply @ 1 BHP, 1/2" condensate return, 3/8' compressed air .25 CFM Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Safety control bar to prevent injury to operator. ITEM #41 CUFF/YOKE PRESS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: AJAX Model No.: ACCW-CX Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd: 20 amps 208volts 60hz 1 ph, 1/2R steam supply @ 1 BHP, 1/2' condensate return, 3/8" compressed air @ .25 CFM Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Safety control bar to prevent injury to operator. ITEM #42 DAMP BOX Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: AJAX Model No.: DMPBX Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd: Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 0512-06 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11100-19 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT ITEM #43 UTILITY PRESS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: AJAX Model No.: ADCF45 Pertinent Data: With iron and spray gun, with buck padding Utilities Req'd: 800 watt .5 kw 120 volts 60 hz 1 ph outlet, 1/2" steam supply @ 1.5 BHP, 1/2" condensate return, 3/8" compressed air @.25 CFM,1-1/4" air vacuum Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Overhead water spray gun with suspension spring, water valve, hose and condenser. 2. Movable arm iron stand and 3 lb. SIS,120 volt 1 ph electdc/steam iron with cord and plug. 3. Safety two (2) hand activation required to prevent injury to operator. ITEM #44: DRYER, 96 LBS. Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Speed Queen Model No.: LES37/LGS37 Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd: 2,800 CFM, 22,5,000 BTU, Gas inlet 1", Exhaust diameter 16.13", 208 V Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Gas fired. L.E.C. must adjust burner as suited to local gas supply conditions and altitude. Adjust burner orifice and assembly for local altitude and gas conditions. Verify exact gas type and conditions prior to ordering this dryer. 2. Electronic ignition system. 3. See-through, clear glass door. 4. Computer controls including: reverse or non-reverse control, self diagnostic function, programmable temperature control, push to start control, programmable drying and permanent press cool down timer control with L.E.D. readout, computer reset. 5. Reversing basket control. 6. Sealed bearing drive with separate fan and reversing basket motors, with electrical/ thermal overload protection. 7. 208 volt 60 hz 3 ph electrical operation. 8. Dry weight capacity of 96 lbs. with a 51-112" diameter x 42-112" deep (51.2 cu. ft.). 9. Double wall (insulated) construction on front, sides, and burner compartment. 10. Safety controls including: flame failure protection, exhaust air failure switch, overheat protection temperature safety thermostat, gas valve (AGA approved) and pressure regulator. 11. Automatic back draft damper. 12. Built-in, self-cleaning lint screen. 13. Built-in anti-wrinkle feature to tumble without heat periodically after the drying cycle is ended to prevent wrinkles. 14. Aluminized steel burner. 15. Adjustable leveling bolts. 16. Fire safety engineer shall locate fire protection at dryer area as required by code. 17. Mechanical Contractor shall provide lint ducting to building exterior as indicated on sheet LD1.2. 18. Plumbing Contractor shall provide and install fire control gas shut-off valves as required by code. 19. Tumbler to be supported and driven via roller wheels. 20. Unit to have Fire Suppression System. ITEM #45: WASHER Quantity: One (1) 05-12-06 Summary Permit Set LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 11100-20 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Manufacturer. Speed Queen Model No.: LWS45 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Clothes Type Semi-Commercial Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph, HW & CW, Stand Pipe Waste Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Furnish with heavy-duty cord and plug assembly, water hoses, and drain hose. ITEM 946: UNIFORM FINISHING TUNNEL Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Colmac Model No.: CFS 90 Pertinent Data: Designed to operate at conveyor speeds up to 150 hooks per hour. Utilities Req'd: 2.33 hp, 480 volts 60 hz 3 ph, 314' steam supply @ 7.25 bhp, 1/2* condensate return, 3/4" compressed air, 4 314" x 6-1/2" exhaust Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. 480 volts 60 hz 3 ph electrical operation. 2. Designed to operate at conveyor speeds up to 150 hooks per hour 3. "Right Hand Feed" option as oriented as indicated on Sheet LD1.1. 4. Equipped with #CAL-41 Autoloader at feed end. 5. Equipped with exhaust canopy. 6. Insulated stainless steel interior cabinet. 7. Stainless steel centering guide. 8. Corrosion resistant exterior finish. 9. Control package as follows: digital garment counter with reset, digital conveyor speed control and indicator, thermostatic temperature control with digital readout, on-off buttons, conveyor start control, steam timer, and individual on-off steam yoke controls. 10. Automatic garment unload and holding rail. 11. Reversible conveyor direction (if required in future). 12. Fiber optic hanger sensor, steam activation, and garment counting. 13. Removable lint screens. 14. Air damper. 15. Steam coil access door. 16. Fan-cooled electrictcontrol box. 17. Mechanical Contractor shall provide exhaust ducting to building exterior as indicated on sheet LD1.2. ITEM #47: GARMENT RACK Quantity: Lot Manufacturer: Leebaw Model No.: L-13-N, Heavy Duty Design Pertinent Data: 48" L Utilities Req'd: N/A Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 05-12-06 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11100-21 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT ITEM #48: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #49: BAGGER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Iowa Tech Model No.: BGC Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd: Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. ITEM #50: SPOTTING BOARD Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: AVSB Model No.: Pertinent Data: With low-boy iron and spray gun, with buck padding. Utilities Req'd: 1 kw 208volts 60 hz 1 ph outlet, 112" steam supply @ 1.25 bhp, 112" condensate return, 318" compressed air, 1-1/4" air Vacuum Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Overhead water spray gun with suspension spring, water valve, hose and condenser. 2. Movable arm iron stand and 3 lb. S/S, 120 volt 1 ph electric/steam iron with cord and plug. 3. Safety two (2) hand activation required to prevent injury to operator. 4. Double sleeve board. 5. Garment rest. ITEM #51: SEWING MACHINE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: AJAX Model No.: AVSB Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd: 120V11 PH, plug Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: ITEM #52: SEWING TABLE Quantity: ITEM #53: Quantity: Manufacturer: Model No.: Specifier ID No.: Pertinent Data: 05-12-06 Summary Permit Set Lot - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Owner/Operator. MARKING MACHINE One (1) Thermopatch Y-140-B *T022 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 11100-22 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Utilities Req'd.: 1PH,.1 CFM,.6AMP 115V Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: ITEM #54: MARKING TABLE Quantity: Lot - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Owner/Operator. ITEM #55 JANITORS SINK ASSEMBLY W/ FAUCET Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Eagle Group Model No.: EG20.01 Specifier ID No.: 'T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans And Details For Length, Width And Configuration, with Rack. Utilities Req'd.: Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. 4-pole mop holder. 2. Hose and Bracket. 3. Service Faucet ITEM #56: OFFICE FURNITURE Quantity: Lot - Not In This Contract Section, Provided by General Contractor. ITEM #57: WORK COUNTER WITH SINK Quantity: Lot - Not In This Contract Section, Provided by Millwork Division ITEM #58: UNDER COUNTER DISH MACHINE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Hobart Model No.: LX30C Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: With Detergent & Rinse Aid Pumps Utilities Req'd.: 120/208V 1Ph, HW, IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturers standard specifications and the following: 1. Shock arrestor and pressure reducing valve kit 2. With integral 700 rise booster heater for hot water sanitizing. 3. Install below Item # 57 Counter, as shown on plans. 4. Stainless steel base with legs. 5. Pressure regulator valve. 6. Optional detergent and rinse aid pumps. 7. Optional 70 degree rinse booster heater. 05-12-06 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11100-23 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT ITEM #59: LAUNDRY CHUTE LANDING COUNTER Quantity: One(1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Custom Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: N/A Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: Landing counter to be 14 gauge stainless steel with stainless tubular legs, reinforced galvanized gussets, sized per laundry volume, coordinate with Operator prior to fabrication. ITEM #60: GLASS RACK DOLLY Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Cres-Cor Model No.: 500-2020 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: With Corner Bumpers & Handle, For 20 x 20 Racks Utilities Req'd.: N/A Fumish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. Rigid or spring-back push handles. 2. Comer Bumpers. ITEM #61: WALL CABINETRY Quantity: Lot - Not In This Contract Section, Provided BY Millwork Division. ITEM #62: STORAGE SHELVING Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Metro Seal III Model No.: Super Erecta Pertinent Data: Five Tier Utilities Req'd.: N/A Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: ITEM #63: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #64: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #65: CONVEYOR ASSEMBLY Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: U Pick It, Whit Conveyors Model No.: 05-12-06 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11100-24 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11100 VAIL, COLORADO LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Single Conveyor may hold employee locker bags and dean garments. 2. Employee shall use one door to pickup dean garments and locker bag. 3. The same door shall be used to hang locker bag filled with street clothes. 4. Conveyors shall be stadkable to reduce floor space requirements. 5. System shall provide garments and locker bags in less than one minute after employee activates retrieval system. 6. System shall use standard hangers for clean garments (No escort devices or mother hooks) 7. Heavy Duty Conveyor with Double Yoke Steel Chain 8. Double yokes to roll on the outside of steel tubing 9. Hanging Weight Capacity of 60 LBS per foot of Chain 10. Steel Chain to be connected with Steel Hinge Pins (No plastic links or plastic wheels) 11. Chain Sections must be minimum 12" long, holding a minimum of five employees per section 12. Heavy Duty Inverter Drive Units with variable speed motor 13. Pre-mounted bar-code card readers 14. Numeric keypad for manual entry of employee's ID number 15. Lexan security door with magnetic locking device 16. Controls including proximity switches, sensors, and cables 17. UPI Hold Down Devices 18. Load station shall be located in an area easily assessable to operator. 19. Operator shall be able to load conveyor standing in one location. 20. Garments shall be hung directly on conveyor at employee location. 21. No escort hanger or "Mother" hook necessary to hang garments on conveyor 22. Load station shall notify operator when employee is calling for locker bag and dean garments. 23. Load station shall offer a single scan feature to integrate with Customer's Uniform Management Program. 24. System Computer Control with Backup, Sensors, Cables and Accessories 25. Program to be Windows based and compatible with Uniform Management programs 26. Display shall maintain system activity and show employee activity at each station 27. PC anywhere shall assist in maintaining programs as required. 28. System shall be manufactured substansually in the USA. 29. Company shall meet or exceed ANSI and ISO manufacturing quality standards. 30. Parts shall be available within the USA. 31. Service availability 24/7 32. See detailed drawing in Laundry Equipment Contract Drawing set. END OF SPECIFICATION SECTION 11110 05-12.06 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11100-25 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11132 VAIL, COLORADO PROJECTION SCREENS SECTION 11132 - PROJECTION SCREENS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for fumishing and installing the following: Electrically operated front projection screens. B. Electical wiring and installation of remote control switches for electrically operated screens is specified in Division 16. ' 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of projection screen. Include wiring diagrams for electrically operated screens. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of screen centerline, location of wiring connections, seams in viewing surfaces, connections to suspension systems for pendant-mounted and recess-mounted screens, anchorage details, and accessories. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide each type of projection screen as a complete unit produced by a single manufacturer, including necessary mounting brackets, accessories, fitting, and fastenings. B. Coordinate layout and installation of projection screens with other construction supported by, or penetrating through, ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partitions. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver projection screens until building is enclosed and ready for screen installation. Protect screens from damage during delivery, handling, storage, and installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FRONT PROJECTION SCREENS, ELECTRICALLY OPERATED A. Approved Manufacturers: Da-Lite Screen Co., Inc. "Executive Electrol", Draper Shade & Screen Co., Inc. "Ambassador" or approved equal. B. General: Provide manufacturer's standard UL-fisted and marked units consisting of case, screen, motor, controls, mounting accessories and other components required. Screens shall be designed and fabricated for recessed installation with bottom of case designed to open and dose automatically when screen is lowered and fully raised and to be removable for access to interior. C. Screen: 1. Screen Surface: Matte white vinyl-dated glass fiber fabric with minimum gain characteristics complying with FS GG-S01721)(1) for Type A screen surface, with black masking borders. 2. Mount top edge on rigid metal roller supported by self- l*. ning bearings in brackets. 3. Viewing Surface Size: As indicated. D. Screen Controls: Three position, UL-listed single station control with box and cover plate for flush wall mounting and connection to 120-VAC power supply. E. Screen Case: Wood sides and top, with metal-lined motor compartment and wood or aluminum bottom panels, factory primed. 04-07a PROJECrx)r SCREENS Progress CD Set 11132-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11132 VAIL, COLORADO PROJECTION SCREENS F. Motor. Instant reversing, gear drive of size and capacity recommended by screen manufacturer, with permanently lubricated ball bearings, automatic thermal overload protection, preset limit switches to automatically stop screen in "up" and "down" position, and positive stop action. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install projection screens and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install front projection screens with screen uses securely anchored to supporting substrate, in a manner which produces a smoothly operating screen with plumb and straight vertical edges and plumb and flat viewing surfaces when lowered. C. Test electrically-operated units to verify that screen, controls, limit switches, closure and other operating components are functioning properly. 3.02 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect projection screens after installation from damage. If damage occurs, remove and replace or restore to original undamaged condition. END OF SECTION OW-06 PROJECTION SCREENS Progress CD Set 11132-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11150 VAIL. COLORADO PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT SECTION 11150 - Error! Bookmark not defined.PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A This Section includes the followring types of parking control equipment: 1. Vehicle detectors. B. Related Sections: 1. Overhead coifing doors are specified in Section 08333. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Product Data: Manufacturer's product data, specifications, installation, and maintenance instructions for each type of parking equipment required. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and details of typical members and other components. Show layout and installation details, including anchorage details. C. Maintenance Instructions: Provide manufacturer's instructions for maintenance of parking control equipment Include recommended methods and frequency for maintaining equipment in optimum operating condition under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against materials and methods that may be detrimental to finishes and performance. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Manufacturer. Regularly providing equipment of the type specified for not less than 5-years, and maintaining repair and emergency services within 48-hours after service is requested. B. Installer. Authorized representative of equipment manufacturer. 1. Installer shah furnish maintenance and call-back service following installation and for duration of the one-year warranty period. 2. Service shall consist of examination of equipment, adjustments, supplies, and parts required to keep equipment in proper operation, except such adjustments, parts, or repairs made necessary by abuse, misuse, or any other causes beyond manufacturers or krshdlWs control. 3. Service shall be done by trained employees during regular working hours. 4. Emergency service shag be available when called for, at additional cost, except where attributable to faulty materials or equipment C. UL and NEMA Compliance. Provide internal electrical components required as part of parking control equipment that are listed and labeled by UL and comply with NEMA standards. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Fumish to jobsite wiring diagram and layouts necessary for properly looting service conduit stubouts. 04.07.06 PARIONG CONTROL EQUIPMENT Progress CD SO 11150-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL. COLORADO SECTION 11150 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT B. Instal below-grade and embedded portions of the work in advance of constriction of curbs, walks, and pavement PART 2 - PRODUCTS 201 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A American Parking Equipment, Cincinnati Time, Federal APD, Stanley Parking Systems, Division of the Stanley Works. 2.02 VEHICLE DETECTOR A. General: Provide solid state, electronic vehicle detector units designed to detect the presence or transit of a vehicle over an embedded loop of wire and emit an electrical pulse to dose the overhead coiling grille. Provide a 3-position sensitivity switch and detection indicator light on the front panel. B. Provide detector kops consisting of multiple strands of wire of the gauge, number of turns, size, and nvAhod of placement as recommended by the parking equipment manufacturer. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Fumish templates for anchor bob and other items encased ion concrete or below finished surfaces in sufficient time so as not to delay the work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install parking equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and placement drawings. 1. Coordinate placement of anchors and accessories encased in concrete with Division 3 Sections. 3.03 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of parking control equipment. Train the personnel in procedures to follow in the event of operational failures or malfunctions. 3.04 CLEANING A. After installation, dean finished surfaces. Touch up damaged shop-applied finishes as required to restore damaged areas. 3.05 SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT BY LANES A. Ingress Lane: Vehicle detector loop to open overhead caring door and vehicle detector loop to dose door. B. Egress Lane: Vehicle detector loop to open overhead coiling door and vehicle detector loop to dose door. END OF SECTION 0407-06 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT Progress CD Set '11150-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11160 VAIL, COLORADO LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT SECTION 11160 - LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing the following loading dock equipment: Dods bumpers. 2. Hydraulic dock levelers. B. Related Sections: Curb angles are specified in Section 05500. 2. Electrical wiring and connections for loading dock equipment are specified in Division 16. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Furnish manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each item of equipment, including installation details. Include rated capacities of each loading dock leveler required. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and erection of loading dock equipment. Include plans, elevations, and large scale details. Show anchors and accessory items. Fumish location template drawings for items supported or anchored to permanent construction. Furnish rough-in drawings for electrical service well in advance of concrete work. C. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance of dock levelers with requirements of ANSI MI-114.1 for rated capacity specified. D. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's maintenance and service data, including address and telephone number of nearest authorized service representative. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Doric Leveler Standard: Comply with the applicable requirements of ANSI MH14.1 for construction and operation except as otherwise indicated or specified. 1.04 WARRANTY A Dods Leveler. Furnish written warranty agreeing to repair or replace dock leveler components that fall in materials or workmanship within 2-years from the date of Substantial Completion. Failures include, but are not limited to, structural failures and hydraulic systems. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A Dods Bumpers: Blue Giant Equipment Corp., Durable Mat Company, Kelly Company, Inc., Pawling Corporation or approved equal. B. Dods Levelers: Blue Giant Equipment Corp., Kelly Company, Inc., Pioneer Manufacturing Co., Maguire, Rite-Hite Corp. or approved equal. 04-07.06 LOADING DOCK ECU NT Progress CD Set 11160-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11160 VAIL, COLORADO LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 2.02 DOCK BUMPERS A. Laminated Tread Bumpers: Fabricate from multiple plies cut from fabric-reinforced rubber truck tires to a uniform thickness of 4-1/24nches. Laminate plies under pressure on 314-inch diameter steel supporting rods welded and bolted to 1/4-inch thick structural steel angle closures with predrilled anchor holes. Size angles to provide not less than 14nch of tread plies extending beyond the face of the closure angles. Sizes as indicated. B. Anchorage Devices: Provide anchor bolts, nuts, washers, sleeves, cast-in-place and other anchorage devices required to fasten bumpers securely in place. Components shall be galvanized or cadmium plated. 2.03 DOCK LEVELERS A. General: Provide dock levelers of type, function, operation, capacity, size and construction specified, complete with controls, safety devices and accessories. B. Type: Recessed, hinged-lip dock levers designed for permanent installation in concrete pits. C. Size: As indicated. Coordinate required pit size with dock leveler manufacturer and indicate on shop drawings. D. Function: 1. Vertical Travel: Minimum working range of 12-inches above and below the adjoining platform level. Provide an operating range above the platform level of sufficient height to enable the lip to extend and dear the truck bed before contact. 2. Automatic Travel Compensation: The floating travel of the ramp with lip extended and resting on the truck bed shall automatically compensate for upward or downward movement of the truck bed during loading or unloading. 3. Automatic Lateral Compensation: Tilting of the ramp with lip extended and resting on the truck bed shall compensate automatically for canted truck beds up to 4-Itches over the width of the ramp. 4. Lip Operation: Manufacturer's standard mechanism for automatic extension and support of the hinged lip on the ramp edge that will enable the lip to rest on the truck bed over the dock levelers working range and allow the tip to yield under impact of the incoming truck, with the lip's automatic retraction upon the truck's departure. a. Length of Lip Extension: Minimum 16-inches from the ramp edge and not less than 124nches in front of the dock bumpers. 5. Automatic Ramp Return: Provide for automatic return of the unloaded ramp, from raised or lowered positions to stored position, level with the platform, upon truck's departure. E. Operation: 1. Hydraulic Operation: Electric hydraulic raising and hydraulic lowering of the ramp, controlled from a remotely located push-button station. a. Electrical Requirements: Coordinate wiring requirements and current characteristics with Division 16. b. Remote Control Stations: Provide a single button constant pressure type station. Holding depressed button shall cause the ramp to raise, releasing the button shall allow the ramp to lower at a controlled rate. C. Provide elecirio-powered hydraulic raising and lowering of the lip, controllable independently of raising and lowering of ramp. F. Rated Capacity: Gross moving load of 20,000-pounds without permanent deflection of distortion, determined by tests in compliance with ANSI MH14.1. 04.07A LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT Progress CD Set 11160-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11160 VAIL, COLORADO LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT G. Safety Devices: 1. Toe Guards: Protect open sides of the raising ramp over the entire operating range with metal toe guards mounted flush with the ramp edges projecting below the ramp. 2. Cross Traffic Support: Provide support of the ramp at platform level in the stored position with the lip retracted by manufacturer's standard method. 3. Maintenance Strut: Provide an integral strut for positive support of the ramp in the up position during maintenance. H. Construction: Frame made of structural and formed steel shapes, and a platform including a hinged lip, fabricated from non-skid steel plate. Design and fabricate the assembly to withstand deformation during operating and stored phases of service. Chamfer the lip edge to minimize obstructing wheels of material handling vehicles. Include two dock bumpers attached to the frame. 1. Finish and Color. Baked enamel finish system over steel surfaces which have been cleaned and pretreated. Paint toe guards yellow. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate installation of loading dock equipment to be attached to or recessed into concrete or masonry and furnish anchoring devices with templates, diagrams and instructions for installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. B. Dock Bumpers: Attach to the stricture as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Dods Levelers: Coordinate forming of pit to ensure that the recess is adequate to accommodate the leveler in proper relationship to the loading platform. Attach securely to the loading platform in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Make necessary adjustments for safe, efficient operation of loading dock equipment. B. After installation, restore marred and abraded surfaces to the original condition. 3.04 DEMONSTRATION A. Start Up Services: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative of the manufacturer to provide start-up service and to demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel. 1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment 2. Train the Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance. 3. Schedule training with the Owner with at least 7-days advance notice. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT Progress CD Set 11160-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 - FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Foodservice equipment. 1.02 RELATED DIVISIONS / SECTIONS: A. Refer to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and applicable provisions of Division 1 for additional instructions. B. Refer to Divisions 5, 6, and 9 - Interior Design; for applicable provisions and sections regarding interior design finish, applications, details, and special instructions relating to items specified in this Section. Contractor is responsible for obtaining these Sections and any associated drawings, and coordinating the pertinent information contained in them, with the applicable manufacturers and fabricators. (Applicable to Projects with items specified in this Section, and installed in or on items provided by other Sections, or with decor construction and/or finishes.) C. Refer to Division 15 - Mechanical; for applicable provisions and sections regarding mechanical services, including, but not limited to, rough-ins, grease traps, steam traps, drain traps, atmospheric vents, valves, pipes and pipe fittings, ductwork, and other materials necessary to complete final connections to individual items as specified in this Section. Not work of this Section. D. Refer to Division 16 - Electrical; for applicable provisions and sections regarding electrical services, including, but not limited to, rough-ins, wiring, disconnects and other materials necessary to complete final connections to individual items as specified in this Section. Not work of this Section. E. Work included in other Divisions - Provision of all wall, floor, and/or ceiling/roof openings, recesses, sleeves, and/or conduits; and equipment pads, as required for installation of items included in this section. Also sealing of these openings, recesses, sleeves, etc., after installation of the equipment items, as required. Not work of this Section. F. Work included in other Divisions - Disconnection of existing equipment to be relocated and/or reused; and disconnection and removal of existing equipment which will not be reused, shall be as determined and designated by the Architect in other Divisions. Not work of this Section. (Applicable to Projects with existing equipment.) 1.03 DEFINITIONS: A. Furnish - Supply and deliver to Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. B. Install (set in place) - Operations at Project Site including actual unloading, unpacking, assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations; ready for final utility connections by other Divisions as appropriate. C. Provide - Furnish and install complete, ready for intended use. D. Contractor - All references to the Contractor in this Section 11400, refers to the Kitchen Equipment (Sub-) Contractor. Reference to any other Contractor, will be specific; such as Plumbing (Sub-) Contractor, Electrical (Sub-) Contractor, Architect designated, etc. 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 1.04 SPECIFIER IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM: A. Each Item number in this specification section includes the Specifier ID number *T022, to identify Ricca Newmark Design, Englewood, Colorado, as the specifying consultant for this project. This code is part of the international Specifier Identification System (SIS) used throughout the foodservice' industry. Its purpose is to identify the specifier to equipment venders and manufacturers in the event that requests for clarification or other such communication with Ricca Newmark Design is necessary during bid preparation and/or project execution. Submission of a bid on this project requires maintenance of this number on all project correspondence, including fax and e-mail. Upon bid acceptance, the Contractor agrees to maintain this code number on all correspondence and submittals generated for this Project The Contractor is to include this code number on every quotation request, purchase order, and any correspondence with factories, manufacturers, fabricators, equipment representatives, or equipment vendors. 1.05 LAWS, ORDINANCES AND STANDARDS: A. STANDARDS: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following standards as applicable to the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of the work of this Section: 1. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (A.R.[): Comply with the applicable regulations and references of the latest edition of standards for remote refrigeration system(s), components and installation. 2. American Gas Association (A.G.A.): Comply with A.G.A. standards for gas heated equipment, and provide equipment with the A.G.A. seal. Automatic safety pilots to be provided on all equipment, where available. (Canadian Gas Association or alternate testing lab's seals may be accepted if acceptable to local code jurisdictions.) 3. American National Standards Institute (A.N.S.I.): Comply with A.N.S.I. Z21-Series standards for gas-burning equipment, and provide labels indicating name of testing agency. 4. American National Standards Institute (A.N.S.I.): Comply with A.N.S.I. 857.1 for compressed gas cylinder connections, and with applicable standards of the Compressed Gas Association for compressed gas piping. 5. American National Standards Institute (A.N.S.I.): Comply with A.N.S.I. A404 and A40.6 for water connection air gaps and vacuum breakers. 6. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (A.S.H.R.A.E.): Comply with the applicable regulations and references of the latest edition of standards for remote refrigeration system(s), components and installation. 7. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (A.S.M.E.): Comply with A.S.M.E. Boiler Code requirements for steam generating and steam heated equipment; provide A.S.M.E. inspection, stamp and registration with National Board. 8. American Society for Testing and Materials (A.S.T.M.): Comply with A.S.T.M. C1036 for flat glass. 9. American Society for Testing and Materials (A.S.T.M.): Comply with A.S.T.M. C1048 for heat- treated flat glass - Kind HS, Kind FT coated and uncoated glass. 10. American Welding Society (A.W.S.): Comply with A.W.S. D1.1 structural welding code. 11. National Electric Code (N.E.C.): Comply with N.F.P.A. Volume 5 for electrical wiring and devices included with foodservice equipment, A.N.S.I. C2 and C73, and applicable N.E.M.A. and N.E.C.A. 05-12.06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT standards. 12. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (N.E.M.A.): Comply with N.E.M.A. LD3 for high- pressure decorative laminates. 13. National Fire Protection Association (N.F.P.A.): Comply with the applicable sections of the N.F.P.A. for exhaust hood, ventilators, duct and fan materials, hoods fire suppression systems, construction and installation; as well as, local codes and standards. 14. National Sanitation Foundation (N.S.F.): Comply with the latest Standards and Revisions established by N.S.F. for equipment and installation. Provide N.S.F. Seal of Approval on each applicable manufactured item, and on items of custom fabricated work. (UL Sanitation approval and seal may be accepted if acceptable to local code jurisdictions.) 15. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (S.M.A.C.N.A.): Comply with the latest edition of S.M.A.C.N.A. guidelines for seismic restraint of kitchen equipment, and the applicable local regulatory agencies requirements. 16. Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.): For electrical components and assemblies provide either U.L. labeled products or, where no labeling service is available, "recognized markings" to indicate listing in the UL "Recognized Component Index". (Canadian Standards Association or alternate testing lab's seals may be accepted if acceptable to local code jurisdictions.) 17. UL 300 Standard: Wet chemical fire suppression systems for exhaust hoods/ventilators are to comply with these requirements. 18. American with Disabilities Act (ADA): Comply with requirements, as applicable to this Project 19. Refrigeration Service Engineers Society (R.S.E.S.): Comply with the applicable regulations and references of the latest edition of standards for remote refrigeration system(s), components and installation; and the 1995 requirements of the Montreal Protocol Agreement 20. All refrigerants used for any purpose is to comply with the 1995 requirements of the Montreal Protocol Agreement, and subsequent revisions and amendments. No CFC refrigerants will be permitted on this Project. 21. All refrigeration components installation, repairs, and/or associated work on any refrigeration system, self-contained or remote, is to be performed by a Certified Refrigeration Mechanic. 22. Comply with all applicable local codes, standards and regulations, and any special local conditions (example only: City of Los Angeles Testing Lab requirements). 23. Jails, prisons, and all detention facilities are to comply with Correctional Standards as applicable to the specific Project Verify the level of security and construction required with the Project Architect, and provide all items in compliance. As a minimum, no part or component of any item provided is to be easily removable and used as a weapon. 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS: A. In addition to requirements of Related Sections 1.02.A submit evidence of compliance with the following qualifications and conditions. Five (5) years minimum continuous operation under the same company name and ownership. Evidence of Company financial stability, and financial ability to complete this Project without 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPWNT Summary Permit Set 11400 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 1J endangering that stability. 3. List of comparable size and scope projects completed in the last five (5) years, with Owner's contact name and telephone number. 4. Have manufacturer's authorization to purchase, distribute, and install all items specified with this Project. 5. Maintain a staff or have access to personnel with a minimum of five (5) years experience in the installation of comparable size and scope projects, and meeting N.S.F. standards and requirements. (UL Sanitation standards and requirements may be accepted if acceptable to local code jurisdictions) 6. Maintain or have access to a fabrication shop meeting N.S.F. standards and labeling requirements. (UL Sanitation approval and seal may be accepted if acceptable to local code jurisdictions.) If other than the Contractor's own fabrication shop, they are to have five (5) years minimum experience in the fabrication of comparable size, scope, and level of quality projects; and the Contractor is to submit their company name and credentials to the Architect, which will have the right of approval or disapproval. 7. Maintain a staff or have access to personnel experienced in the preparation of professional style shop drawings and submittals. 8. Maintain or have access to manufacturer's authorized service personnel together with readily available stock of repair and replacement parts. Any sub-contractor employed by this Contractor, for this Project, is to comply with the same qualification requirements. 1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS: Submit itemized bids for the specific manufacturer and model specified. Any substitutions submitted are to be itemized at the end of the bid proposal as an "add" or 'deduct' amount; or provide an explanation for submittal of substitution. B. Requests for substitutions must be submitted and approved in writing by the Architect. All substitutions and request for substitutions are to comply with conditions and requirements as stated in article 1.08. C. If custom fabricated items are submitted and accepted as a substitute to standard manufactured items, these items are to meet the specifications of the specified manufactured items, and in general, the fabrication sections which follows. 1.08 APPROVED SUBSTITUTIONS AND/OR LISTED ALTERNATES: A. Substitutions approved as noted in article 1.07, and/or any Listed Alternate manufacturers listed in these Itemized Specifications, or added by Addendum, may be utilized, in lieu of the primary specified manufacturer with the following conditions and understanding. The Project Documents are designed and engineered using the primary specified manufacturer and model. The Contractor assumes total responsibility for any deviations required, due to the utilization of a substitution/alternate manufacturer or model; including, but not limited to, fitting alternates into the available space, providing directions for required changes, and assuming any associated cost for utility, building, architectural, or engineering changes. The Contractor is responsible for supplying the model, which is equal to the primary specified 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT model in regards to general function, features, options, sizes, accessories, utility requirements, finish, operation, and listing approvals. If it is determined by the Owner or their appointed representative at any time during the construction and installation, and prior to the final acceptance of the Project, that the substitution/altemate model submitted is not equal to the primary specified model, the Contractor will assume all associated cost and implications required to replace the model submitted, with the correct model. The bid proposal is to clearly state any substitutions/alternates, which will be utilized including the manufacturer and model number. The proposal is to also include a data sheet for each substitution/alternate, with any and all deviations between the primary specified manufacturer and the substitution/altemate manufacturer, itemized and listed on the data sheet. Submittal of the manufacturers' cut sheets only, will not be acceptable as the data sheet. Complex alternates such as utility distribution systems, exhaust hoods, ventilators, etc. are to include a shop drawing specific to the Project. Inclusion of an alternate manufacturer in the Itemized Specifications is not intended to indicate that there is an equal alternate unit to match every primary specified unit. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to insure that the alternate unit submitted matches the primary specified unit, and meets the conditions as stated above. Manufacturers not approved as substitutions, or listed as a Listed Alternate will not be permitted, unless submitted for prior approval, as described above and in the General and Supplementary Conditions, and applicable Division-1 Specifications Sections. 6. Submittal of a substitution/altemate manufacturer or model by the Contractor indicates agreement to the above stated conditions. Solely at the Owner's discretion, failure to comply with any of these conditions, or to supply complete and correct data information, can result in the Contractor being required to provide the primary specified manufacturer, at no additional cost to the Owner; or to adjust the Contract cost. 1.09 DISCREPANCIES: A. Where discrepancies are discovered between the drawings and the specifications, regarding quality or quantity, the higher quality or the greater quantity is to be included in the Bid Proposal. Contractor is responsible for verifying and coordinating all items provided in this Section, with the drawings, specifications, actual site conditions, adjacent items, and associated (Sub-) Contractors; to assure that there are no discrepancies or conflicts. This is to include, but not be limited to, quantities, dimensions, clearances, direction of operation, door swings, utilities, fabrication details and methods, installation requirements, etc. C. Notify the Architect, in writing, of any discrepancies discovered; and await clarification prior to proceeding with the items or areas in question. 1.10 SUBMITTALS: A. The Contractor is to review all submittals for basic compliance with the Contract Documents, and correct as required; prior to submitting to the Design Team (Architects/Engineers/ Consultants/Owner) for review. Failure to comply with this requirement, and submission of submittals which are significantly inconsistent with the Contract Documents, and which inconsistencies are discovered during review by a Design Team member, can be justification for reimbursement by the Contractor to the Design Team member's company, for the "lost" time; or for the time required for a second review. B. Contractor's use of any Design Team's AutoCAD contract drawings for basis of producing their submittal drawings, is with the following conditions and understanding: 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 1. Contractor assumes total liability and responsibility for accuracy, and for conformance and verification with Architectural and Engineering drawings, actual field conditions, and all equipment provided. 2. Contractor further assumes responsibility for coordination of their submittals with those of other Contractors and Sub-Contractors, as required. 3. Submittals to have Contractor's title block and information. 4. AutoCAD drawings obtained from the Design Team, or from an alternative source requires signing of an Agreement or Release Form, or written permission. Contact Team member responsible for producing desired contract drawings. 5. Failure to comply with any of these conditions could result in rejection of the submittals, and possible legal action. C. Equipment Plan and Rough-In Drawings: Submit one (1) set in reproducible transparency form for review by the Design Team. After review process, Contractor to reproduce and supply the required number of distribution prints for record and construction purposes. Drawings to include equipment plan(s) with detailed equipment list. Equipment plans are to be similar to Food Service Equipment Plans included in the Contract Drawings. Item numbers are to be the same as shown in the Contract Documents, and are to include Spare Numbers and associated items provided "by others", such as the Owner, General Contractor or other contractors; 1J and shown on the Contract Food Service Equipment Plans. Submit 1/4" (1:50) scale drawings for approval. These drawings are to include complete information on the work included in this Contract, and are to provide sufficient information for associated trades, contractors, and/or sub-contractors to complete their division of work associated with food service equipment included in this Contract. They are to be dimensioned; showing location of ducts, stubs, floor and wall sleeves, for ventilation, plumbing, steam, electrical, refrigeration lines, and concrete base and curb dimensions, as required for equipment so supported, and any additional information pertinent to the installation of this equipment Site-verify mechanical, electrical and ventilating rough-in and sleeve locations. The Contractor is responsible for the accuracy of the information on their submittals. In the event rough-ins have been accomplished before award of this contract, the Contractor is to examine the existing facility and make adjustments to their equipment to suit building conditions and utilities, where possible. If not possible, so state in a letter with reasons, and an alternate method and pricing, to the Owner, Architect and Foodservice Consultant. D. Shop Drawings: Submit one (1) set in reproducible transparency form for review by Design Team. After review process, Contractor to reproduce and supply the required number of distribution prints for record and construction purposes. Submit shop drawings for items of custom fabrication included in this contract. Shop drawings are to be submitted at 3/4" (1:20) and/or 1-1/2" (1:10) scale and are to show dimensions, materials, details of construction, installation and relation of adjoining work requiring cutting or close fitting. 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-6 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Shop drawings are to also indicate reinforcements, anchorage and related work required for the complete installation of fixtures. Submit shop drawings for any equipment requiring field assembly, including but not limited to, Waldorf cooking assemblies, pulper/extractor assemblies, remote refrigeration systems, walk-in coolers and/or freezers, exhaust hoods/ventilators, fire suppression system, utility distribution systems, pot/utility/ware washing assemblies/machines, and conveyors. Before proceeding with the fabrication or manufacture of any item, the Contractor is responsible for verifying and coordinating all dimensions and details, with site dimensions, conditions, and adjacent equipment E. Product Data Submittal Manuals: Reproduction of any part of the Contract Specifications will not be acceptable as part or total of the Contractor's Product Date Submittal Manuals. These Manuals are to be produced and assembled entirely by the Contractor, as noted in the next paragraph. Submit six (6) bound sets of Product Data Submittal Manuals with a cover sheet and detailed information on every item included in this Section. Detailed information is to include, but not be limited to, item number, description, quantity, model numbers, options and accessories provided, exact utility requirements, manufacturer's cut-sheets, reference to specific shop drawings, and etc. Distribute one additional copy of installation and start-up instructions to the Installer. Mark each data sheet with the applicable project equipment item number. Data sheet to include N.E.M.A. Pug and receptacle configuration for applicable items. Every cover sheet and associated detailed submittal is to provide sufficient and complete information to verify that the Contractor understands the Contract requirements, and is providing each item in compliance with the Contract documents. Cover sheets to also include associated items as listed on the Equipment Plan, but provided 'by others'; and are to be noted as 'Not In Section 11400 Contract Division'. Design Team's review of drawings, shop details, product data brochures, and service and parts manuals is for general conformance with the design concept and contract documents. Review markings or comments are not to be construed as relieving the Contractor from compliance with the contract documents, or departures there from. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy, confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, selecting fabrication processes, techniques of assembly, and performing their work in a safe, satisfactory, and professional manner. 1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA MANUALS: A. Operation And Maintenance Manuals (Service And Parts Manuals): Three (3) bound sets of manuals are to be furnished for items of standard manufacture on/or before the date of the first event to occur of the following: demo/start-up, start-up for intended use by the Owner/Operator, completion of installation of kitchen equipment contract package, or final acceptance of installation by Owner. Manuals are to be in alphabetical order according to manufacturer. Manufacturer's info is to include Tech Services telephone number, email and web site address, where available. Service Agency List: Submit, with the Service And Parts Manuals, a complete list of local service agencies for included manufacturers, complete with address and telephone numbers. Also provide email and web site addresses, where available. C. Provide videotapes and/or CD's for maintenance, training, operation, etc where available. 1.12 AS-BUILT/ RECORD DOCUMENTS: A. Maintain one record set of Foodservice Equipment Plans with any related corrections, revisions, additions, 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-7 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 1J deletions, changes, etc. noted during construction and installation. Provide an "as-built" set in reproducible transparency form and electronic computer disk form. B. Provide one (1) final set of Product Data Submittal Manual with any related corrections, revisions, additions, deletions, changes, etc. noted during construction and installation as a specifications record set. C. These documents are to be provided on/or before the date of the first event to occur of the following: demo/startup, start-up for intended use by the Owner/Operator, completion of installation of kitchen equipment contract package, or final acceptance of installation by Owner. 1.13 SCHEDULE: A. General: Time is of the essence in this agreement and acceptance constitutes assurance that the Contractor can and will obtain materials, equipment and manpower, upon notice to proceed, to permit overall completion of the entire building project on schedule. The Contractor is to coordinate their work with the progress schedule, as prepared and updated periodically by the General Contractor or Construction Manager. B. Anticipated delays, not within the realm of control of the Contractor, are to be noted in a written notification to the Foodservice Consultant and the Architect, immediately upon the Contractor's realization that delays are imminent. C. Failure of manufacturers to meet promised delivery dates will not grant relief to the Contractor for failure to meet schedules; unless the Contractor can establish, in writing, that orders were received by the manufacturer, with reasonable lead times. D. Extra charges resulting from special handling or air shipment in order to meet the schedule will be paid by the Contractor, if insufficient time was allowed in placing factory orders. 1J 1.14 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION RESPONSIBILITY: A. Contractor is responsible for coordinating with all applicable Design Team members, General Contractor, other Contractors and/or Sub-Contractors and Trades involved in this Project and associated with any items or work provided under this Section; as required for the successful provision, installation, completion, and functioning of these items and/or work, and the Project in general. This is to include, but not be limited to, exchange of shop drawings, details, and manufacturer's information, supplying templates or actual components to be installed in or on items provided by other Sections for coordination, and coordinating with and between their own internal staff, sub-contractors, trades, manufacturers, fabricators and installers, for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.15 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. Delivery Of Materials: Deliver materials (except bulk materials) in manufacturer's containers fully identified with manufacturer's name, trade name, type, class, grade, size, color, item number, and Specifier ID number. B. Storage Of Materials, Equipment And Fixtures: Contractor is responsible for receiving and warehousing of equipment and fixtures, until ready for installation. Store materials, equipment and fixtures in sealed containers. Store off the ground and under cover, protected from damage. C. Handling Materials And Equipment: Verify and coordinate conditions at the building site, particularly door and/or wall openings, and passages, to assure access for all equipment Pieces too bulky for existing facilities are to be hoisted or otherwise handled with apparatus as required. All special handling equipment charges will be arranged for and paid for by the Contractor. 1.16 PRODUCT PROTECTION: 05-12.06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-8 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT To the best of their abilities, the Contractor is responsible, during the progress of the project, to protect their equipment against theft or damage, until final acceptance by the Owner. Items delivered to the job site at the Owner's or Contract Manager's request before the site is ready for installation; should be signed for, as delivered by the Owner or Contract Manager. Use all means reasonable to protect the materials of this Section before, during, and after installation; and to protect the associated work and materials of the other trades. C. Pre-fabricated walk-in coolers/freezers, on-site and installed in advance of the rest of the equipment, are not to be available for or used as general storage by other trades; and should be locked before leaving the site after each day's work. Damage and theft resulting from the failure to secure units will be repaired or replaced at Contractor's own expense. 1.17 WARRANTY: Unless otherwise noted in Related Divisions / Sections 1.02.A, items furnished are to be fully guaranteed against defects in workmanship and materials for one full year from the date of the first event to occur of the following: date of issue of Certificate Of Occupancy (or the equivalent), start-up for intended use by the Owner/Operator, completion of installation of kitchen equipment contract package, or final acceptance of installation by Owner. Should a Temporary Certificate Of Occupancy be issued for partial completion of work, the items furnished within that designated area are to be under warranty from the date of issue of that Certificate. The Contractor or their service agent will make necessary repairs and replacements without charge to the Owner, and within a reasonable time. B. Refrigeration Additional Warranty: in addition to the one-year warranty requirements as stated above, provide start-up, and parts and labor for the first year; plus additional four-year extended warranty on compressors. Extended warranty is for provision of replacement for a compressor determined to be defective by a Certified refrigeration mechanic. However verification of defective compressor, installation of replacement compressor, recharging and repairs of system will be the responsibility of the Owner. This includes all refrigerators, ice cream makers and cabinets, ice makers, freezers, dispensers, walk-in coolers/freezers compressors, and/or any other items with a refrigeration system. Periodic routine maintenance, service, adjustments, cleaning, etc., as required by the various manufacturers included in this Project, are the responsibility of the Owner. The Owner, on their own behalf, and if desired, may negotiate with the Contractor for a separate and additional cost Maintenance Agreement D. Any and all parts or requirements for manufacturer's warranties to be in effect, are to be provided or complied with by the Contractor. This is to include, but not be limited to, requirements such as particular parts or accessories, or installation, installation supervision, start-up, and/or follow-up inspections required by factory trained, Certified, and/or authorized personnel. Factory training, Certification, and/or authorization is to be in effect at the time of bidding, installation, and start-up of this Project Manufacturer's warranties which comply with the requirements of this Warranty article 1. 17, are to be provided in lieu of Contractor's own warranties, wherever available. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT: Equipment schedule: Refer to schedule on Foodservice Drawings and Section 3.10 Itemized Specifications for equipment included in this Section. 2.02 MATERIALS: A. Metals: 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400 - 9 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 1. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, hardest workable temper, and No.4 directional polish. 2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A526, except ASTM A527 for extensive forming; ASTM A525, G90 zinc coating, chemical treatment. a. Where painted finish is indicated, provide mill phosphatized treatment in lieu of chemical treatment. 3. Steel Sheet: ASTM A569 hot-rolled carbon steel. 4. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or ASTM A120, welded or seamless, schedule 40, galvanized. 5. Steel Structural Members: Hot rolled or cold formed, carbon steel unless stainless steel is indicated. a. Galvanized Finish (G. I.): ASTM Al 23 hot-dipped zinc coating, applied after fabrication. 6. Aluminum: ASTM B209B221 sheet, plate and extrusions (as indicated); alloy, temper and finish as determined by manufacturer/fabricator, except 0.40-mil natural anodized finish on exposed work unless another finish is indicated. B. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD3, Type 2, 0.050" thick, except Type 3, 0.042" for post- forming smooth (non-textured). Color and texture as selected by the Architect/ Interior Designer. 1. Comply with N.S.F. Standard No. 35. 2. Veneered with approved waterproof and heat proof cement. Rubber base adhesives are not acceptable. 3. Applied directly over close grained plywood, such as solid Mahogany or solid Birch, of selected, smooth, sanded stock to ensure a smooth ripple-free laminated surface; or commercial grade furniture particle board, Cortron or equal. 4. If specified plywood or particle board is unavailable, submit specifications and sample of alternate material for approval. 5. Exposed faces and edges are to be faced with 1/16' (1.6 mm) thick material. Corresponding backs are to be covered with approved backing and balancing sheet material. C. Millwork: No unfinished millwork, plywood/particle board or wood framing (including backs, undersides, and any surfaces concealed from view) will be permitted. All unfinished surfaces or openings cut through finished surfaces are to be sealed to be water resistant with excess plastic laminate material, Cortron (Melamine) material, backing materials, sealers, primers, finish paint, etc., to blend with finish materials. D. Hardwood Work Surfaces: Laminated edge grained hard maple (Acer saccharum), NHLA First Grade with knots, holes and other blemishes culled out, kiln dried at 8 percent or less moisture, waterproof glue, machined, sanded, and finished with N.S.F. approved oil-sealer. E. Solid Surface Material (SSM): As indicated, provide DuPont Corian 1/2(12.7 mm) thick 100% homogeneous filled acrylic material meeting ANSI Z124.6 Type 6; or DuPont Zodiaq 314" (19 mm) thick quartz material, unless otherwise specified or selected. Colors and patterns as selected by the Architect/Interior Designer. The following guidelines and general requirements apply to DuPont SSM, in addition to granite, marble, or any other solid surface materials specified or selected; except fabricator and installer are to be thoroughly experienced and Certified in commercial foodservice installation of granite, marble, or other solid surface material specified or selected. 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-10 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 1. Comply with N.S.F. Standard No. 51. 2. Acrylic adhesive is to be used for all joints. 3. Install directly over 3/4" (19 mm) thick (minimum) substrate of close grained plywood, such as solid Mahogany or solid Birch, of selected, smooth, sanded stock to ensure a smooth ripple-free surface; or commercial grade furniture particle board, Cortron or equal. Additional bracing and support to be provided as required by the SSM manufacturer. 4. Fabricator to be trained by DuPont factory authorized training personnel and Certified as a Commercial Corian / Zodiaq Fabricator; or equivalent by other SSM manufacturers. If no Commercial Certification program is available from other manufacturer specified or selected, then fabricator is to be Certified as Commercial Corian / Zodiaq Fabricator. 5. Installer to be trained by DuPont factory authorized training personnel and Certified as a Commercial Corian / Zodiaq Installer, or equivalent by other SSM manufacturers. If no Commercial Certification program is available from other manufacturer specified or selected, then installer is to be Certified as Commercial Corian / Zodiaq Installer. 6. All fabrication and installation of Corian / Zodiaq, and all components attached to or installed in or through Corian / Zodiaq is to be in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and the DuPont Corian Food Service Guidelines and Design Manual. Of particular concern are the sections, details, and instructions on the installation of drop-in or built-in hot or cold components. The DuPont Corian Food Service Guidelines and Design Manual requirements are to also apply to any other SSM, in addition to that manufacturer's instructions. 7. Contractor to verify and coordinate overhead heat lamps and/or food warmers are installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations over solid surface materials, and solid surface materials manufacturer's recommendations. Insulation: 1. For low temperature applications, such as ice bins, cold pans, or fabricated under counter freezers, use urethane, rigid board foam or foamed-in-place; not less than 2" (50 mm) thick, except that vertical surfaces of cold pans and ice bins may be 1" (25 mm) thick. Insulation to be bonded at joints, to prevent condensation on exterior. 2. For refrigerated applications such as fabricated under counter refrigerators, use urethane rigid board foam or foamed-in-place, or Styrofoam rigid board foam 2" (50 mm) thick, bonded at joints. No fiberglass insulation will be permitted. 3. For heated type applications, such as plate warmers, use block type rock wool, minimum 1" (25 mm) thick. 4. At counters subject to direct or indirect heat from cooking equipment, use 1" (25 mm) thick BNZ Materials, Inc. (303-978-1199) Marinite I, or equal, to insulate between counter and heat source. In addition, there is to be a 1" minimum air space between the heat source and the insulation. 5. Marinite material is to be added between freezer or refrigerator, and 14 gauge (2 mm) stainless steel top. 6. All insulation is to be fully encased or enclosed in 16 gauge stainless steel. 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-11 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT G. Joint Materials: Sealants: 1-part or 2-part, polyurethane or silicone based, liquid elastomeric sealant, non-solvent release type, Shore A hardness of 30, except 45 if subject to traffic. Sealants to be N.S.F. Listed for use in food zones. Surfaces cleaning and sealants installation to comply with applicable requirements of N.S.F. Standards, and accepted foodservice installation practices. 2. Backer Rod: For 318" (9.5 mm) or larger joints, to be polyurethane rod stock, larger than joint width. 3. Gaskets: Solid or hollow (but not cellular) neoprene or polyvinyl chloride; light grey, minimum of 40 Shore A hardness, self-adhesive or prepared for either adhesive application or mechanical anchorage. H. Paint And Coatings: Provide the types of painting and coating materials which, after drying or curing, are suitable for use in conjunction with foodservice, and which are durable, non-toxic, non-dusting, non-flaking, mildew resistant, and comply with N.S.F. Standards and governing regulations for foodservice. 2. Galvanize Repair Paint: MIL-P-21035. 3. Sound Deadener: N.S.F. listed sound deadening material such as latex sound deadener, for internal surfaces of metal work, and underside of metal counters and tables between work top and underbracing. Verify sound deadening requirements or restrictions with local health authorities. 4. Pretreatment: SSPC-PT2 or PT3, of FS TT-C490. 5. Primer Coating for Metal: FS TT-P-86, type suitable for baking, where indicated. 6. Enamel for Metal: Synthetic type, FA TT-P-491, type suitable for baking, where indicated. 2.03 FABRICATED PRODUCTS: A. Hardware (also refer to article 2.04 Fabrication Of Metal Work in general, and paragraphs 0. Doors 1-3 and P. Drawer Assemblies 1-6 specifically, for additional requirements): 1. General: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than ANSI 156.9 Type 2 (Institutional), satin finish stainless steel or dull chrome finish on brass, bronze, or steel. 2. Hinged Door Hardware: Hinged doors to be mounted with heavy duty N.S.F. approved hinges with Component Hardware Group, Model No. P62-1010 pulls, or equal. Catches to be heavy-duty magnetic type, except as otherwise indicated. 3. Drawer Hardware: Slides to be 200 pounds (90 kilograms) minimum capacity per pair, 300 series stainless steel, full extension, side-mounting, self-closing type, with stainless steel ball-bearings, and positive stops; Component Hardware Group Series S52, or equal. Pulls to be Component Hardware Group, Model No. P62-1012, or equal. 4. Sliding Door Hardware: Sliding doors to be mounted on large, quiet ball bearing rollers in 14 gauge (2 mm) stainless steel overhead tracks, and be removable without the use of tools. Bottom of cabinet to have stainless steel guide-pins and not channel tracks for doors. 5. All hardware to be identified with manufacturer's name and number, so that broken or worn parts may be replaced. 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-12 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT B. Casters: Type and size as recommended by caster manufacturer, N.S.F. approved for the type and weight of equipment supported; normally 5' (127 mm) diameter heavy-duty, ball-bearing, solid or disc wheel with non-marking grease proof rubber, neoprene or polyurethane tire; unless otherwise specified. Minimum width of tread to be 1-3116' (30 mm). Minimum capacity per caster to be 250 pound (113.4kg), unless otherwise noted in itemized specifications. 2. Solid material wheels to be provided with stainless steel rotating wheel guard. 3. To be sanitary, have sealed wheel and swivel bearings and polished plated finish per N.S.F. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, equip each item with two (2) swivel-type casters and two (2) fixed casters, with foot brakes on two (2) casters. 5. Unless equipment item is equipped with another form of all-around protective bumper, provide circular rotating bumper above each caster, 5' (127 mm) diameter fire of light grey synthetic rubber (hollow or closed-cell) on cadmium-plated disc. C. Plumbing Fittings, Trim And Accessories: 1. General: Where exposed or semi-exposed, provide bright chrome plated brass or polished stainless steel units. Provide copper or brass where not exposed. 2. Vacuum Breakers: Provide with foodservice equipment as listed in the itemized specifications. 3. Water Outlets: At sinks and at other locations where water is supplied (by manual, automatic or remote control), furnish commercial quality faucets, valves, dispensers or fill devices, of the type and size indicated, and as required to operate as indicated. 4. Waste Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, furnish 2' (50 mm) remote-lever waste valve, and 3-112' (89 mm) strainer basket. D. Electrical Materials: 1. General: Provide standard materials, devices and components as recommended by the manufacturer or fabricator, selected and installed in accordance with N.E.M.A. standards and recommendations; and as required for safe and efficient use and operation of the foodservice equipment, without objectionable noise, vibration and sanitation problems. 2. Before ordering equipment, confirm with the serving electrical utility, pertinent electrical requirements, such as actual voltages available, number of phases and number of wires in the system. 3. Electrical work for fabricated equipment to be completely wired to a junction or pull box, wholly accessible, mounted on the equipment. Wiring to be labeled for outlet or item served. Verify local requirements for U.L. Listing on complete assembly, and provide if required. 4. Components to bear the U.L. label or be approved by the prevailing authority. 5. Custom fabricated refrigerator units to be provided with vapor tight light receptacles, shatterproof lamps and automatic switches. Wiring to be concealed. 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-13 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Controls and Signals: Provide recognized commercial grade signals, on-off push buttons or switches, and other speed and temperature controls as required for operation; complete with pilot lights and permanent signs and graphics to assist the user of each item. Provide stainless steel cover plates at control and signal electrical boxes. Controls and switches are to be located out of heat zones, easily accessible, and in locations that preclude accidental contact by employees. Internal Wiring of Fixtures and Equipment: a. The Contractor is responsible for internal wiring of electrical devices, built into or forming an integral part of fabricated equipment items. Wiring to be in metal conduit, to an accessible pull-box, tagged for intended use. Refer to Division 16 Specifications for color coding of wiring. b. Each standard item shipped in sections, to be properly connected internally, and verified by the Contractor. C. Furnish dish washers and conveyors internally wired to junction box or distribution panel as specified; including push button switches, motors, immersion heaters, solenoids, etc. d. Where light fixtures are specified or detailed as part of counters, cases or fixtures; light fixtures, lamps and shields to be furnished and installed. Warm white lamps to be provided, unless otherwise specified. If fluorescent light fixtures are specified, ballasts to be provided and shields included. Shields to be provided for all light fixtures. e. Wiring for built-in strip heaters or immersion-type elements to be provided as follows: In heat zone: to have U.L. approved insulation and be not less than 300-volt rated heat resistant insulation with nickel wire. Connection wiring extended in raceway or conduit to junction or pull box, to be not less than 600 volt rated heat resistant insulation covered wire, U.L. approved, or equal. Wiring for fabricated refrigerator and freezer cabinets to be U.L. approved, insulated, cable; from exterior junction box to internal components, within insulation, unless code requires metallic conduit: Conduit to be Electrical Metallic Tubing, rigid or flexible (Greenfield). For freezer applications, Seal-rite Flex or approved equal to be used. Internal wiring to be U.L approved rubber covered 600 volt rated conductor, except door heaters, which is to be Nichrome wire with silicone braided jacket, having resistance of 10.4 watts per lineal foot. Convenience outlets, lighting receptacles, (rubber or porcelain) and door switches, to be mounted in approved boxes. Convenience outlets for evaporators to be twist lock type. Solid connections, as for freezer evaporators, to be made vapor tight. Exposed flexible steel conduit on kitchen equipment to be neoprene jacketed Seal-rite conduit equal to Anaconda type "UA'. U.L. approved, complete with approved liquid-tight connectors on each end; designed to provide electrical grounding continuity. Exposed electrical conduit used in kitchen wet area applications, except for flexible connections, to be rigid galvanized steel. Thinwall conduit (EMT) will not be permitted for 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-14 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT wet areas. Exposed outlet boxes to be liquid-tight type, with threaded hubs. 8. Convenience and Power Outlets: a. Make cutouts and install appropriate boxes or outlets in fabricated fixtures, complete with wiring, conduit, outlet and stainless steel cover plate. b. Outlets and plugs to conform to N.E.M.A. standards. C. Electrical outlets and devices to be first quality "Specification Grade". d. GFCI outlets to be furnished where adjacent to sink compartments, as per the National Electrical Code. Plugs and Cords: Where cords and plugs are provided, they are to comply with National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (N.E.M.A.) requirements. Indicate N.E.M.A. configuration for each applicable item. 10. Heating Equipment: a. Electric and heating equipment to be installed as to be readily cleanable or removable for cleaning. b. Steam heated custom fabricated equipment to be a self-contained assembly, complete with control valves located in an accessible position. 11. Motors: Totally enclosed type, except drip-proof type where not exposed to a dust or moisture condition; ball bearings, except sleeve bearings on small timing motors; windings impregnated to resist moisture; horse-power and duty-cycle ratings as required for the service indicated. 12. Power Characteristics: Refer to Division 16 Specifications for project power characteristics. Also, refer to individual equipment requirements, for loads and ratings. 2.04 FABRICATION OF METALWORK: A. General Fabrication Requirements: Remove burrs from sheared edges of metalwork, ease the comers and smooth to eliminate cutting hazard. Bend sheets of metal, at not less than the minimum radius required to avoid grain separation in the metal. Maintain flat, smooth surfaces, without damage to finish. 2. Reinforce metal at locations of hardware, anchorages and accessory attachments wherever metal is less than 14 gauge (2 mm), or requires mortised application. Conceal reinforcements to the greatest extent possible. Weld in place, on concealed faces. 3. Exposed screws or bolt heads, rivets and butt joints made by riveting straps under seams and then filled with solder, will not be accepted. Where fasteners are permitted, provide Phillips head, flat or oval head machine screws. Cap threads with acorn nuts, unless fully concealed in inaccessible construction; and provide nuts and lock washers unless metal for tapping is at least 12 gauge (2.5 mm). Match fastener head finish with finish of metal fastened. 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-15 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 1J 4. Where components of fabricated metal work are indicated to be galvanized, and involve welding or machining of metal heavier than 16 gauge (1.6 mm), complete the fabrication and provide hot-dip galvanizing of each component, after fabrication, to the greatest extent possible (depending upon available dip-tank sizes). Comply with ASTM Al 23. 5. Welding And Soldering: a. Materials 18 gauge (1.3 mm), or heavier, to be welded. b. Seams and joints to be shop welded or soldered as the nature of the material may require. C. Welds to be ground smooth and polished to match original finish. d. Where galvanizing has been burned off, the weld is to be cleaned and touched up with high grade aluminum paint. 6. Provide removable panels for access to mechanical and electrical service connections, which are concealed behind or within foodservice equipment, but only where access is not possible and not indicated through other work. Closures: Where ends of fixtures, splash backs, shelves, etc., are open, fill by forming the metal, or welding sections, if necessary, to close entire opening flush to walls or adjoining fixtures. 8. Rolled Edges: Rolled edges are to be as detailed, with corners bull nosed, ground and polished. 9. Coved Comers: Stainless steel foodservice equipment to have 1l2" (12.7 mm) or larger radius coves in horizontal and vertical comers, and intersections, per N.S.F. standards. B. Metal And Gauges: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate exposed metalwork of stainless steel; and fabricate the following components from the gauge of metal indicated, and other components from not less than 20 gauge (1 mm) metal: a. Table and counter tops: 14 gauge (2 mm) b. Sinks and drainboards: 14 gauge (2 mm) C. Shelves: 16 gauge (1.6 mm) d. Front drawer and door panels: 18 gauge (1.3 mm) (double-pan type) e. Single pan doors and drawer fronts: 16 gauge (1.6 mm) f. Enclosed base cabinets: 18 gauge (1.3 mm) g. Enclosed wall cabinets: 18 gauge (1.3 mm) h. Exhaust hoods and ventilators: 18 gauge (1.3 mm) i. Pan-type insets and trays: 16 gauge (1.6 mm) j. Removable covers and panels: 18 gauge (1.3 mm) k. Skirts and enclosure panels: 18 gauge (1.3 mm) 1. Closure and trim strips over 4" wide: 18 gauge (1.3 mm) M. Hardware reinforcement: 12 gauge (2.5 mm) n. Gusset plates: 10 gauge (3.4 mm) C. Work-Surface Fabrication: Fabricate metal work surfaces by forming and welding, to provide seamless construction; using welding rods matching sheet metal, grinding and polishing. Where necessary for disassembly, 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-16 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT provide waterproof gasketed draw-type joints with concealed bolting. 2. Reinforce work surfaces 30" (762 mm) on center both ways, with galvanized or stainless steel concealed structural members. Reinforce edges, which are not self-reinforced, by formed edges. D. Metal Top Construction: 1. Metal tops to be one-piece welded construction, including field joints. Secure to a full perimeter galvanized steel channel frame cross-braced not farther than 30" (762 mm) on center. Fasten top with stud bolts or tack welds. If hat sections are used in lieu of channels, close ends. 2. Properly designed draw fastening, trim strip, or commercial joint material to suit requirement is to be used, only if specified. E. Structural Framing: Except as otherwise indicated, provide framing of minimum 1' (25 mm) pipe-size round pipe or tube members, with mitered and welded joints and gusset plates, ground smooth. Provide 14 gauge (2 mm) stainless steel tube for exposed framing, and galvanized steel pipe for concealed framing. 2. Where indicated, flange rear and end edges up to form splashes integrally with top, with vertical and horizontal comers coved of not less than 1/4" (6 mm) radius, die formed. Turn back splashes 1" (25 mm) to wall across top and ends with rounded edge on break, unless otherwise specified. 3. For die-crimped edges, use inverted 'V" 1/2" (13 mm) deep inside and 2" (50 mm) deep on outside, unless otherwise shown. For straight down flanges, make 1-3/4" (45 mm) deep on outside. For bullnose edges, roll down 1-314' (45 mm). 4. Edges: die-formed, integral with top. For rounded corners, form to 1 inch radius, weld, and polish to original finish. Field Joints: For any field joint required because of size of fixture; butt-joint, reinforce on underside with angles of same material, bolt together with non-corrosive bolts and nuts, field weld, grind and polish. G. Pipe Bases: Construct pipe bases of 1-5/8" (41 mm) diameter 18 gauge (1.3 mm) stainless steel tubing. Fit legs with polished stainless steel sanitary adjustable bullet feet to provide for adjustment of approximately 1-112" (37 mm), without exposing threads. Space legs to provide ample support for tops, precluding any possibility of buckling or sagging, and in no case more than 6'-0' (1829 mm) centers. H. Legs And Cross rails Equipment legs and cros srails to be 1-5/8" (41 mm), 16 gauge (1.6 mm) stainless steel tubing. 2. Welds at cross rails to be continuous and ground smooth. Please note; tack welds are not acceptable. 3. Bottom of legs to be wedged inward and fitted with a stainless steel bullet-type foot with not less than 2"(50 mm) adjustment 0512-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-17 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 4. Free standing legs to be pegged to floor with 1/4" (6 mm) stainless steel rod, or provided with bolt down type flanged feet anchored to the floor; depending on expected severity of use or abuse. 5. Components: a. Stainless Steel Gusset: Stainless steel exterior to fit 1-5/8" (41 mm) tubing, with Allen screw for fastening and adjustment. Not less than 3" (76 mm) diameter at top and 3-314" (95mm) long. Outer shell 16 gauge (1.6 mm) stainless steel, reinforced with 12 gauge (2.5 mm) mild steel insert welded interior shell, or approved equal. b. Stainless Steel Low Counter Legs: Stainless steel exterior 5-314" (146 mm) minimum, 7" (178 mm) maximum length with stainless steel 3-1/2" (89 mm) square plate with four counter-sunk holes, welded to top for fastening. C. Stainless Steel Adjustable Foot: Stainless steel 1-112" (37 mm) diameter tapered at bottom to 1" (25 mm) diameter, fitted with threaded cold rolled rod for minimum 1-1/2" (37 mm) diameter x 3/4" (19 mm) threaded bushing plug welded to legs, or approved equal. Push-in foot not acceptable. 6. Legs to be fastened to equipment with gussets, as follows: a. Sinks: Reinforced with bushings and set screw. b. Metal Top Tables and Dish Tables: Welded to galvanized steel channels, 14 gauge (2 mm) or heavier, anchored to top with screws through slotted holes. C. Wood Top Tables: Welded to stainless steel channels, 14 gauge (2 mm) or heavier, anchored to top with screws through slotted holes. Shelves: Construct solid shelves under pipe base tables of 16 gauge (1.6 mm) stainless steel, with 1-112" (37 mm) turned down and under edges on exposed sides, and 2" (50 mm) turn up against walls or equipment. Fully weld to pipe legs. 2. In fixtures with enclosed bases, turn up shelves on back and sides with 114" (6 mm) (minimum) radius and feather slightly to ensure a tight fit to enclosure panels. J. Sinks: 1. Construct sinks of 14 gauge (2 mm) stainless steel with No.4 finish inside and outside. 2. Form back, bottom and front of one piece, with ends and partitions welded into place. Partitions: double thickness, l" (25 mm) minimum space between walls. Multiple compartments to be continuous on the exterior, without applied facing strips or panels. 3. Cove interior vertical and horizontal comers of each tub not less than 1/4" (6 mm) radius, die formed. Outer ends of drain boards to have roll rim risers not less than 3" (76 mm) high. 4. Drill faucet holes in splashes 2-112" (63.5 mm) below top edge. Verify center spacing with faucet specified. 5. Sink insets to be deep drawn of 16 gauge (1.6 mm), or heavier, polished stainless steel. Weld into sink drain boards with 1A/2" (37 mm) x 1-1/2" (37 mm) x 14 gauge (2 mm) stainless steel angle brackets; securely welded to sinks and galvanized cross angles spot welded to underside of drain 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-18 J J J PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT boards to form an integral part of the installation. 6. The bottom of each compartment is to be creased such as to ensure complete drainage to waste opening. Slope bottom of sink bowls toward outlet. K. Drains And Wastes and Faucets: Furnish and install Chicago Faucets model 1367SS, or equal, stainless steel rotary drain assembly with connected overflow assembly, in die-drawn inset type sinks and bain mane sinks. 2. Other custom fabricated sinks to be furnished with Chicago Faucets model 1367SS, or equal, stainless steel rotary drain assembly, with stainless steel cap nut over overflow outlet. Waste connection shall have 2° (50 mm) external thread size, with 1-1/2" (37 mm) internal thread size. 3. Rotary Handle: Of sufficient length to extend to front edge of sink. No riveting, screws or soldering permitted to fit drains to sinks, with all parts of drains easily removable for servicing and replacement 4. Water pans for steam tables to be fitted with V (25 mm) drains with chrome-plated brass stand pipes. 5. All faucets furnished with equipment included in this Section to be lead free and comply with N.S.F. Standard #61, Section #9; such as manufactured by Fisher, Chicago, or T&S. Where the itemized specifications list a faucet by manufacturer and model, the Contractor is to verify that the listed faucet complies with this requirement If the listed faucet does not comply, the Contractor is to submit a similar model which does comply, from the same manufacturer where available or from one of the other listed manufacturers. L. Workmanship: Best quality in the trade. Field verify dimensions before fabricating; conform all items to dimensions of building; neatly fit around pipes, offsets and other obstructions. 2. Fabricate only in accordance with approved shop drawings, showing pipes, obstructions to be built around, and location of utilities and services. M. Enclosures: Provide enclosures, including panels, housings, and skirts for service lines, operating components and mechanical and electrical devices associated with the foodservice equipment, except as specifically indicated to be "open". 2. Where equipment is exposed to customer view, provide enclosure of service lines, operating components and mechanical and electrical devices. N. Casework: Enclosure: except as otherwise indicated, provide each unit of casework (base, wall, overhead and free-standing) with a complete-enclosure metal cabinet, including fronts, backs, tops, bottoms, and sides. 2. Bases to be made of 18 gauge (1.3 mm) stainless steel sheets reinforced by forming the metal. 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-19 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 0. 3. Ends, partitions and shelves are stainless steel. 4. Unexposed backs and structural members are to be galvanized, unless otherwise noted. 5. Vertical ends and partitions are single wall, with a 2" (50 mm) face. 6. Sides and through partitions are flush with bottom rail, welded at intersections. 7. Shelves: Provide adjustable standards for positioning and support of shelves in casework; except bottom shelf of cabinet mounted on legs or as specified. Turn back of shelf units up 2' (50 mm) and hem. Turn other edges down to form open channel. Reinforce shelf units to support 40 pounds per square foot (195 kgs/sq meter) loading, plus 100 percent impact loading. 8. Bottom front rail of bases set on masonry platform shall be continuously closed and sealed to platform. Doors: 1. Metal doors to be double-cased stainless steel. Outer pans to be 18 gauge (1.3 mm) stainless steel with comers welded, ground smooth and polished. Inner pan to be 20 gauge (1 mm) stainless steel fitted tightly into outer pan with a sound deadening material such as Celotex or Styrofoam used as a core. The two pans to be tack welded together and joints solder filled. Doors to finish approximately 3/4" (19 mm) thick, and be fitted with flush recessed type stainless steel door pulls. 2. Wood doors to be fabricated as detailed. If Formica or other plastic surfaces are used, sides and backs are to be laminated. 3. Hinged doors to be mounted on heavy-duty N.S.F. approved hinges, or as noted on plans or specifications. Drawer Assemblies: Assemblies to consist of removable drawer body mounted in a ball bearing slide assembly with fully enclosed housing. 2. Slide assembly consists of one pair of 200 pound (90 kilograms) capacity stainless steel roller bearing full extension slides, with side and back enclosure panels, front spacer angle, two drawer carrier angles, secured to slides and stainless steel front. 3. Drawers intended for tools and general non-food products storage are to have 20" x 20" x 6" deep (508 mm x 508 mm x 152 mm), 18 gauge (1.3 mm) minimum stainless steel drawer pans. 4. Drawers intended to hold food products are to have 12' x 20" x 6" deep (305 mm x 508 mm x 152 mm) stainless steel food pans. 5. All drawer pans to be easily removable without tools or disassembly of any drawer assembly components. 6. Drawer fronts are double cased, 3/4" (19 mm) thick, with 18 gauge (1.3 mm) stainless steel welded and polished front pan. Steel back pan is tightly fitted and tack welded. Sound deaden with rigid insulation material. Provide drawers with replaceable soft neoprene bumpers or for refrigerated drawers, a full J J 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400 - 20 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT perimeter replaceable refrigerator gasket. Q. Closed Base: Where casework is indicated to be located on a raised-floor base, prepare casework for support without legs, and for anchorage and sealant application, as required for a completely enclosed and concealed base. R. Support from Floor: Equip floor supported mobile units with casters, and equip items indicated as roll-out units, with manufacturer's standard one-directional rollers. Otherwise, and except for closed-base units, provide pipe or tube legs, with adjustable bullet-design feet for floor supported items of fabricated metalwork. Provide 1-112' (37 mm) adjustment of feet (concealed threading). Shop Painting: Clean and prepare metal surfaces to be painted; remove rust and dirt. Apply treatment to zinc coated surfaces, which have not been mill phosphatized. Coat welded and abraded areas of zinc coated surfaces, with galvanize repair paint 2. Apply 1.5 mil (dry film thickness) metal primer coaling, followed by 2, 1.0 mil (dry film thickness) metal enamel finish coatings. 3. Bake primer and finish coatings in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions for a baked enamel finish. T. Sound Deadening: Sound deaden underside of metal tops, drain boards, under shelves, cabinet interior shelves, etc., above the underbracing/reinforcing/framing only. 2.05 FILTER EXHAUST HOODS AND WATER WASH VENTILATOR FABRICATION: A. Filter Exhaust Hoods: 18 Gauge (1.3 mm) type 304 stainless steel external welded construction, in accordance with the latest edition of N.F.P.A. No.96 and International Mechanical Code, including all applicable appendices. Exposed welds to be ground and polished. Exhaust hoods to be U.L Listed as available for length specified. 2. Grease Removal: U.L. classified, non-adjustable, stainless steel grease filters, with drip-channel gutters, drains and collection basins. 3. Light Fixtures: Furnish type of fixture specified. Fixtures to be U.L. listed for cooking equipment exhaust hoods, N.S.F. approved, with sealed safety lenses, with stainless steel exposed conduit for wiring. 4. Exhaust Duct: Furnish welded stainless steel formed duct collars at ceiling or wall duct connections, where exposed. Furnish exposed to view ductwork as specified. Verify size and location of duct connections required in this contract, before fabrication. Other ductwork will be by the Mechanical Section. 5. Fire Extinguishing System: Pre-piped liquid chemical or water fire suppressant system, as specified; complying with applicable local and N.F.P.A. regulations. Wet chemical fire suppression systems to comply with UL 300 Standards. Water fire suppression systems to comply with U.L. Category Subject 199E. 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Swmmry Permit Set 11400-21 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Water Wash Ventilator: 1. 18 Gauge (1.3 mm) type 304 stainless steel external welded construction, in accordance with the latest edition of N.F.P.A. No.96 and International Mechanical Code, including all applicable appendices. Exposed welds to be ground and polished. Ventilator to be U.L. Listed as available for length specified. 2. Control panel to be by the same manufacture as the ventilator, with time clock control for automatic operation. Provide stainless steel trim strips for recessed control cabinet applications. Provide stainless steel chase for surface mounted control panel, from top of panel to ceiling, full width and depth of panel. 3. Light Fixtures: Furnish type of fixture specified. Fixtures to be U.L. listed for cooking equipment exhaust hoods, N.S.F. approved, with sealed safety lenses, with stainless steel exposed conduit for wiring. 4. Exhaust Duct: Furnish welded stainless steel formed duct collars at ceiling or wall duct connections. Verify size and location of duct connections required in this contract, before fabrication. Other ductwork will be by the Mechanical Section. 5. Fire Extinguishing System: Pre-piped liquid chemical or water fire suppressant system, as specified; complying with applicable local and N.F.P.A. regulations. Wet chemical fire suppression systems to comply with UL 300 Standards. Water fire suppression systems to comply with U.L. Category Subject 199E. 2.06 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT: General: Furnish either single or multiple compressor units, as specified or recommended by the manufacturer for the sizes and variations between connected evaporator loads as indicated. Furnish units of the capacities indicated, arranged to respond to multiple- evaporator thermostats and defrosting timers. Include coils, receivers, compressors, motors, motor starters, mounting bases, vibration isolation units, fans, dryers, valves, piping, insulation, gauges, winter control equipment and complete automatic control system. Refrigerant: Precharge units with type or types recommended by manufacturer for services indicated, with quick-disconnect type connections only where specified, ready to receive refrigerant piping runs to evaporators and (where remote) to condensers. All refrigerant and associated components to comply with the requirements of the Montreal Protocol Agreement. No CFC refrigerants or associated components will be permitted on this Project HFC refrigerants and components to be used where available. HCFC refrigerants and components, with a minimum 2010 phase-out date, and intermediate replacement refrigerants are to be used only when HFC refrigerants are not available. Contractor is responsible for coordinating these requirements with manufacturers. Foodservice equipment items included in this Section, with remote refrigerated systems, are to include interconnecting refrigeration lines, sizing, and insulation between components, as per manufacturer's installation instructions, and as determined by this Contractors Certified Refrigeration Sub-Contractor; and only after a thorough examination of actual site conditions and obstacles which might affect the routing. Routing should be as direct and short as possible and practical. Refer to additional requirements listed in this Section 11400, 1.05 LAWS, ORDINANCES AND STANDARDS. 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-22 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 5. The minimum outdoor operating ambient temperature for design of units is -10 degrees Fahrenheit (-23 Centigrade), or lower as applicable for extreme low local conditions. The maximum indoor design temperature for operation of compressor units is 95 degrees Fahrenheit (35 Centigrade). The maximum outdoor ambient design temperature is to be determined by the Contractor with prevailing conditions at mounting location of compressor, such as sun exposure, limited ventilation, high fences/walls, roof color and materials, local climatic extremes, etc.; but in no case is it to be less than 100 degrees Fahrenheit (37.8 Centigrade). B. Components: Coils: Coils for fabricated refrigerators to have vinyl plastic coatings, stainless steel housings; and be installed in such a manner as to be replaceable. 2. Expansion Valves: Remote refrigeration system to be complete with thermostatic expansion valves at the evaporator. 3. Thermometers: a. Fabricated refrigerated compartments to be fitted with flush dial thermometers, with chrome plated bezels. b. Thermometers to be adjustable, and shall be calibrated after installation. C. Thermometers to have an accuracy of + 2 degrees Fahrenheit (1 degree Centigrade). 4. Hardware: a. Refrigerator hardware for fabricated refrigerator compartments to be heavy-duty components. b. Self-closing hinges. C. Latches to be magnetic edge mount type, unless specified or detailed otherwise. 5. Locks: Doors and drawers for walk-in coolersifreezers, and reach-in refrigerated compartments, both fabricated and standard, to be fitted with cylinder locking type latches, and provided with master keys C. Colo Pans: Ice pans, refrigerated pans and cabinets to be provided with breaker strips, where adjoining top or cabinet face materials, to prevent transfer of cold. D. All mechanically cooled custom fabricated or standard buy-out refrigerators with openings in the top for cooling pans, and/or all built-in or drop4n mechanically cooled cold pans are to comply with, and be listed by N.S.F. Standard #7. The Contractor is to verity that the specified unit complies with this requirement. E. Ventilation Of Refrigerated Equipment: Adequate ventilation to be provided for custom fabricated equipment with integral refrigeration condensing units, both built-in and drop-in. If flow through ventilation cannot be provided, provide flow direction partitions and an additional fan capable of cooling the condensing unit. 2. If, in the opinion of the Contractor, additional room ventilation is required to ensure correct 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permft Set 11400-23 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT operating temperatures of standard buy-out, custom fabricated, or remote refrigeration condensing units, or compressor rack assemblies, they are to so state in a letter to the Architect, for evaluation and decision. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND FABRICATION: A. Nameplates: Whenever possible, locate nameplates and labels on manufactured items, in accessible position, but not within customer's normal view. Do not apply name plates or labels on custom fabricated work, except as required for compliance with governing regulations, insurance requirements, or operator performance. B. Manufactured Equipment Items: Furnish items as scheduled or herein specified. Verify dimensions, spaces, rough-in and service requirements, and electrical characteristics, before ordering. Provide trim, accessories and miscellaneous items for complete installation. C. Insert Pans: General: Cut-outs, openings, drawers, or equipment specified or detailed to hold stainless steel insert pans to be provided with a full complement of pans as follows: One (1) stainless steel, 20 gauge (1 mm) minimum, solid insert pan for each space, sized per plans, details, or specifications. b. Where pan sizes are not indicated in plans, details, or specifications, provide one full-size pan for each opening. C. Provide maximum depth pan to suit application and space. 2. Provide 18 gauge (1.3 mm) removable stainless steel adapter bars where applicable. 3. All cut-outs and openings, or equipment specified or detailed to hold stainless steel insert pans, shall be provided with a hinged stainless steel removable night cover. D. Tray Slides: Before fabrication of counters with tray slides, verify: Size and shape of tray with Owner/Operator. Edge of tray should not overhang outer support/slider by more than 2" (50 mm). If edge of tray exceeds this dimension, notify Architect, in writing, for evaluation and adjustment, if necessary. 2. Configuration of comers, turns, and shape of tray slides for proper support and safe guidance of trays. 3. Tray slide to be capable of supporting 200 pounds per linear foot (298 kgs/meter), live load. E. Self-leveling dispensers: Verify type, make, dimensions and weight of ware with Owner/Operator; and submit to the dispenser manufacturer, for proper sizing and calibration of dispensers. Carbon dioxide (CO2) equipment: Where equipment requires connection with compressed C02 cylinder for operation, provide 2-cylinder manifold and control system (integral with equipment) with proper connectors for Department of Transportation (DOT) approved type cylinders, complete with cylinder safety devices and supports. (Applicable to projects with C02 equipment included in Contractor's specified equipment.) G. Reasonable quietness of operation of equipment is a requirement, and the Contractor will be required to replace or repair any equipment producing out-of-the-ordinary intolerable noise. This also includes providing and installing bumpers and gaskets for doors and drawers on fabricated and standard manufactured items, 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-24 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT and sound insulation where feasible. Gas pressure regulator: All gas-fired equipment included with this Section is to be provided with a gas pressure regulating valve with a built-in vent limiting device. Contractor is responsible for coordinating this requirement with their manufacturers and suppliers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SUPERVISION: A. A competent supervisor, representing the Contractor, is to be present at all times during progress of the Contractor's work. 3.02 SITE EXAMINATION: A. Verify site conditions under the provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and applicable provisions of Division 1 Sections. Notify the Architect, in writing, of unsatisfactory conditions for proper installation of foodservice equipment. B. Verify wall, column, door, window, and ceiling locations and dimensions. Fabrication and installation should not proceed until dimensions and conditions have been verified and coordinated with fabrication details. C. Verify that wall reinforcement or backing has been provided, and is correct for wall supported equipment. Coordinate placement dimensions with wall construction Section. D. Verify that ventilation ducts are of the correct characteristics, and in the required locations. E. Verify that utilities are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the required locations. 3.03 INSTALLATION: A. Sequence installation and erection to ensure correct mechanical and electrical utility connections are achieved. B. Install items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Set each item of non-mobile and non-portable equipment securely in place, leveled and adjusted to correct height. Anchor to supporting substrate where indicated, and where required for sustained operation and use without shifting or dislocation. Conceal anchorages wherever possible. Adjust counter tops and other work surfaces to a level tolerance of 1116° (1.6 mm) (maximum offset, and plus or minus on dimension, and maximum variation in 24" (610 mm) run from level or indicated slope). Provide anchors, supports, bracing, clips, attachments, etc., as required to comply with the local seismic restraint requirements. The Guidelines For Seismic Restraint Of Ktchen Equipment, as prepared for the Sheet Metal Industry Fund of Los Angeles and endorsed by S.M.A.C.N.A., is to be followed. D. Complete field assembly joints in the work (joints which cannot be completed in the shop) by welding, bolting-and-gasketing, or similar methods as indicated and specified. Grind welds smooth and restore finish. Set or trim flush, except for "T" gaskets as indicated. E. Provide closure plates and strips where required, with joints coordinated with units of equipment. F. Provide sealants and gaskets all around each unit to make joints airtight, waterproof, vermin-proof, and sanitary for cleaning purposes. G. Joints up to 3/8' (9.5 mm) wide, to be stuffed with backer rod, to shape sealant bead properly, at 1/4" (6 mm) 0512-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400 - 25 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT depth. H. At internal comer joints, apply sealant or gaskets to form a sanitary cove, of not less than 3/8" (9.5 mm) radius. Shape exposed surfaces of sealant slightly concave, with edges flush with faces of materials at joint. J. Provide sealant filled or gasketed joints up to 3/8" (9.5 mm) joint width. Wider than 318" (9.5 mm), provide matching metal closure strips, with sealant application each side of strips. Anchor gaskets mechanically, or with adhesives to prevent displacement. K. Treat enclosed spaces, inaccessible after equipment installation, by covering horizontal surfaces with powdered borax at a rate of 4 ounces per square foot. L. Insulate to prevent electrolysis between dissimilar metals. M. Cut and drill components for service outlets, fixtures, piping, conduit, and fittings. N. Verify that the intended locations of approved dry pendant sprinkler heads in walk-in coolers and/or freezers, does not conflict with panel joints or refrigeration equipment installation. (Note: Sprinkler heads should be installed in coolers and/or freezers only if required by local codes.) 0. Verify and coordinate the mounting heights of all wall shelves and equipment, with equipment located below them, for proper clearances. Coordinate with the Plumbing and Electrical Divisions, and provide holes in food service equipment for plumbing and electrical service to and through the fixtures, as required. This includes welded sleeves, collars, ferrules, or escutcheons. These services are to be located so that they do not interfere with intended use and/or servicing of the fixture. 3.04 ADJUSTING: A. Test and adjust equipment, controls and safety devices to ensure proper working order and conditions. B. Repair or replace equipment which is found to be defective in its operation, including units which are below capacity or operating with excessive noise or vibration. 3.05 CLEANING AND RESTORING FINISHES: A. After completion of installation, and completion of other major work in foodservice areas, remove protective coverings and clean foodservice equipment, internally and externally. B. Restore exposed and semi-exposed finishes, to remove abrasions and other damages; polish exposed metal surfaces and touch-up painted surfaces. Replace work, which cannot be successfully restored. C. Polish glass, plastic, hardware and accessories, fixtures and fittings. D. Wash and clean equipment, and leave in a condition ready for the Owner to sanitize and use. 3.06 TESTING, START-UP AND INSTRUCTIONS: A. Delay the start-up of equipment until service lines have been tested, balanced, and adjusted for pressure, voltage and similar considerations; and until water and steam lines have been cleaned and treated for sanitation. 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 1 1400 - 26 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT B. Make arrangements for demonstration of foodservice equipment operation and maintenance, in advance with the Owner/Operator. C. Demonstrate foodservice equipment, to familiarize the Owner and the Operator on operation and maintenance procedures, including periodic preventative maintenance measures required. Include an explanation of service requirements and simple on-site service procedures, as well as, information concerning the name, address and telephone number of qualified local source of service. The individual performing the demonstration shall be knowledgeable of operating and service aspects of the equipment. D. Provide a written report of the demonstration, to the Owner, outlining the equipment demonstrated and malfunctions or deficiencies noted. Indicate individuals present at demonstration. E. Final Cleaning: After testing and start-up, clean the foodservice equipment, and leave in a condition ready for the Owner to sanitize and use. 3.07 CLEAR AWAY Throughout the progress of their work, the Contractor is to keep the working area free from debris, and remove rubbish from premises resulting from work being done by them. At the completion of their work, the Contractor is to leave the premises in a clean and finished condition. 3.09 STANDARD DETAILS: A. Refer to the individual Standard Details following the Itemized Specifications (or included in the Foodservice Equipment contract drawings), for general fabrication information; as referenced in the custom fabricated Itemized Specifications. 3.10 ITEMIZED SPECIFICATIONS: A. Refer to the following pages for specific specification information on each item included in this Section. (Remainder of page left blank intentionally) 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary PermN Set 11400-27 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEM #1: MOBILE HOT FOOD COUNTER Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Delfield Model No.: KH-4 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: With Food Guard Utilities Req'd.: 120/208V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Provide with heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. 2. 12" wide stainless steel fold-down tray slide. 3. Line-up interlock device. 4. Single service flip-up sneeze guard. 5. Incandescent light fixtures. 6. Drains from food wells, plumbed to common valve. 7. Stainless steel trim strips. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #2: MOBILE COLD FOOD COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Shelly Steel Model No.: SCSC-60B Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: With Food Guard Utilities Req'd.: 115/ 7A/ 1/4 HP Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Provide with heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. 12" wide stainless steel fold-down tray slide. 3. Line-up interlock device. 4. Single service flip-up sneeze guard. 5. Incandescent light fixtures. 6. Open under storage with shelf. 7. Stainless steel trim strips. ITEM #3: CORNER SERVING COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph, HW & CW, IW Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard details; FSD1-113, FSD1-3A, FSD1-7, FSD1-10, FSD1-23, FSD1-31A, FSD7-1, FSD7-2, FSD7-3, FSD7-4, FSD7-5, FSD7-9 and FSD7-10. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Send shop drawings to sneeze guard manufacturer for coordination of counter top cut-outs, equipment and sneeze 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Pertnd Set 1 1400- 28 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT guard flanges. ITEM #4: DISPLAY SHELVES/ FOOD GUARD Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Brass Smith Model No.: Z-9900 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Single Tier, See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard detail FSD16-2. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Install on Item # 3 Counter, as shown on plans. 3. 18 Gauge stainless steel channel frame on front and rear with stainless steel band ends welded to channels. Frame and end bands welded to 1" square 18 gauge stainless steel tubing uprights. Upright supports fastened to counter top with concealed fasteners. 4. 318" tempered safety plate glass with channel edges. Glass shelves cushioned by plastic bumpers. Adjustable for breath guards and for self-service. 5. Omit rear legs where possible with 5'-0" maximum between shelf supports. Coordinate support legs placement and mounting method, with the counter top and equipment. 6. Verify and coordinate with local Health Department requirements. 7. Contractor to coordinate installation with all other components. 8. Front glass panel to be 3/8" thick by 14' wide. 9. Finish to be brushed aluminum. 10. Surface mount stainless steel counter. 11. Under counter mount stainless steel counter 12. Surface mount millwork counter 13. Under counter mount millwork counter: 14. Glass: 1' radius corner and 3/8" tempered glass. ITEM #5: NAPKIN/TRAY/ FLATWARE CART Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Servolift - Or Equal Model No.: 715-2-P8 Specifier ID No.: *TO22 Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. The unit has two shelves and is supplied with eight silverware pans on one level. 2 Rotating, non-marking neoprene bumpers with stainless steel hubs, mounted just above the casters. 3. Two casters with brakes. 4. Stainless steel napkin dispensers mounted on ends of silverware dispenser. 5. Two-piece hinged transparent plastic cover for each row of silver ware containers. ITEM #6: REACH-IN REFRIGERATOR 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set IM-29 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traulsen. Model No.: AHT132WUT-HHS Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Single Section, Self-Contained, Water Cooled, Reach-In, Glass door Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. Doors hinged as shown on plans. 3. Set of four (4) 6" high casters in lieu of legs. 4. Clear glass doors in place of solid door. 5. Door locks. ITEM #7: BEVERAGE COUNTER WITH SINK Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd.: HW & CW, IW Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #8: ICE/SODA DISPENSER Quantity: One (1) - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Purveyor. PURVEYOR TO PROVIDE DROP-IN DISPENSEWCE BIN CARBONATOR, C02 SYSTEM, BAG-IN BOX TO FIT BELOW COUNTER. KEC TO COORDINATE WITH PURVEYOR ON ROUGH-IN REQUIREMENTS AND FABRICATION DETAILS ITEM #9: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #10: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #11: COFFEE BREWER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fetco Model No.: CB-52H15-2 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Two (2) Warmers Utilities Req'd.: 120/208/1PH/ CW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 1W-30 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 1. Furnish Easy Clear water filter system. 2. Furnish with two (2) sets of insulated decanters. ITEM #12: ICED TEA BREWER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Bunn Model No.: TU3QW1TD4T Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Single Utilities Req'd.: 120/14.87A/1680 WATTS Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Furnish Easy Clear water filter system. 2. Furnish with two (2) #TD4T tea dispensers. ITEM #13: MILK DISPENSER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Silver King Model No.: SK12MAJ Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Two (2) Valve, NSF Model Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturers standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. Drip tray. ITEM #14: GLASS RACK DOLLY Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Cres-Cor Model No.: 500-2020 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: With Corner Bumpers & Handle, For 20 x 20 Racks Utilities Req'd.: WA Fumish and set in place per manufacturers standard specifications. 1. Corner bumpers. ITEM #15: TRASH COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel ' Specifier ID No.: *T022 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT C Swnmry Pem* Set 11400-31 t S f PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd.: Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. Refer to any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #16: TRASH RECEPTACLE Quantity: Two (2) - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Owner/Operator. ITEM #17: ICE MACHINE WITH FILTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Manitowoc Model No.: SY-0424A Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Mounted on Purveyor Provided Dispenser Utilities Req'd.: 120V/60PH, CW, IW, 7,000 BTU Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Install ice machine on Item # 8 Soda Dispenser. Contractor to verify and coordinate with the Purveyor requirements for the dispenser. 2. Furnish one (1) Everpure ARE-2000 Single water filter assembly, for installation by the Plumbing Division. Coordinate installation location to insure easy access for cartridge replacement and servicing, and in compliance with local codes. 3. Minimum installation clearance: Top sides are 8" back is 5". ITEM #18: FURNITURE Quantity: Lot - Not In This Contract Section, Specified By Architect, Provided By General Contractor. ITEM #19: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #20: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #:21 SPARE NUMBER ITEM #22: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #23: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #24: SPARE NUMBER 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400 - 32 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEM #25: BEVERAGE WALK-IN COOLER Quantity: One (1) Assembly Manufacturer: Kolpak Model No.: Prefabricated Modular Panels Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans for Size and Configuration Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph, IW Furnish and set in place as per manufacturers standard specifications and the following: Walk-in box to be prefabricated of modular design and construction. Panels to be interchangeable, with U.L. Labeled, CFC free urethane insulation sandwiched between interior and exterior metal surfaces, with an overall thickness of 4 inches. Edges of panels to be high-density urethane "tongue and groove", with cam-lock assemblies, set-in-place at time of fabrication. The access ports are to be on the interior, for inside assembly of the walk-in, and shall be covered with "snap caps. Interior and exterior finishes are to be provided per manufacturer's drawings in CD documents. Floor panels to have 0.100" aluminum diamond treadplate high traffic reinforced heavy duty finished floor surface over FRP-structurally - reinforced insulated panels. Floor to be set into G. C. prepared 4" nominal slab recess. Entrance door(s) and frame(s) as indicated on manufacturer's drawings. Door(s) to be hinged as shown on plans. The door to be flush type, constructed and insulated in the same manner as the wall panels, and finished inside and out, to match adjacent walls. Door and door section to be equipped with the following: a. Magnetic gasket, hydraulic piston driven door closer and cam lift hinges. Hardware to have provisions for locking and a safety release to prevent entrapment of personnel within the box. b. Provide door section with an incandescent type vapor-proof light with dear globe and heavy-duty 100-watt dear bulb, pilot light switch and conduit between switch box and outlet box. All conduit and wiring to be concealed, where possible. C. Door to be complete with reinforced HD vinyl strip doors. d. Unheated pressure relief port (air-vent). e. Audio-visual alarm to be included in door section, with remote sensor and adjustable alarm points to indicate the temperature inside, and sound an alarm when the temperature is unsatisfactory. The alarm shall have a mute switch to silence the audible alarm and a reset button to reset the alarm once the temperature conditions are satisfactory. f. 12 gauge stainless steel threshold fully sealing finished floor of kitchen space to interior floor of refrigerated box. 4. Extra vapor-proof fluorescent light fixtures, number as indicated on manufacturer's drawings complete with heavy duty lamps, field installation by the Electrical Division. All light fixtures to be U.L. Listed for use inside walk-in cooler or freezer. All conduit and wiring is to be concealed, where possible. 5. Matching finish trim strips, from floor to ceiling, at all exposed vertical edges, comers, and joints to building wall(s). Contractor to verify dimensions. 6. Matching finish closure panels from top of walk-in to finished ceiling, on exposed sides. Contractor to verify dimensions. 7. Walk-in to be installed in 4' deep building floor recess. Installing Contractor to verify levelness of recess/floor, and provide sand and shims as necessary for a completely level walk-in floor. 8. Unit and all components to be N.S.F. Approved, U.L. and U.L. Classified with a flame spread of 25 or less, and meet the April 1, 1998 requirements of N.S.F. Standard #7. 9. For any installation requiring additional ceiling support, provide self-supporting ceiling structural framework over the top of the walk-in compartment(s), and supported by the walk-in walls. 10. Verify all dimensions with building conditions for proper fit. Provide maximum size possible to fit available space, using standard panels. ITEM #26: EVAPORATOR COIL Quantity: LOT Manufacturer: Kairak 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400 - 33 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Model No.: ADT130 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Air Cooled Utilities Req'd.: IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: Drain per P.C., heat trace fumished and installed by KEC. ITEM #27: STORAGE SHELVING Quantity: Thirty Six (36) Manufacturer: InterMetro Industries Model No.: Metro Max Polymer Design Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 86" High With Five Tiers Utilities Req'd.: N/A Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Length, width and configuration per plan and verified room dimensions. 2. Each section to be free standing with four legs, first shelf to start at 10" AFF. ITEM #28: STORAGE SHELVING Quantity: Nine (9) Manufacturer: InterMetro Industries Model No.: Metroseal III Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 86" High With Five Tiers, Wire Shelving Utilities Req'd.: NIA Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Length, width and configuration per plan and verified room dimensions. 2. Each section to be free standing with four legs, first shelf to start at 10" AFF. ITEM #29: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #30: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #31: STORAGE SHELVING Quantity: Seven (7) Manufacturer: InterMetro Industries Model No.: Metroseal III Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 86" High With Five Tiers, Wire Shelving Utilities Req'd.: N/A 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set t 1400 - 34 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Length, width and configuration per plan and verified room dimensions. 2. Each section to be free standing with four legs, first shelf to start at 10" AFF. ITEM #32: STORAGE SHELVING Quantity: Manufacturer. Model No.: Specifier ID No.: Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: Fourteen (14) InterMetro Industries Metroseal III *T022 86" High With Five Tiers, Wire Shelving N/A Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Length, width and configuration per plan and verified room dimensions. 2. Each section to be free standing with four legs, first shelf to start at 10" AFF. ITEM #33: DUNNAGE RACK Quantity: Three (3) Manufacturer: KelMax Model No.: DRC/G Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Free-Standing Utilities Req'd.: N/A Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Length, width and configuration per plan and verified room dimensions. 2. Channel Model DRC - Constructed of all welded aluminum 1-112"x1-314" x.072 wall tubing frame. Crosspieces are 4" wide x 1.4" x.080 "E" channel with center leg for additional load capacity. Two channel for 18" and 20" dunnage and 3" for the 24" wide. All legs mitered at the comers for maximum strength. 3. Gussets legs, formed from 0.125 aluminum with gussets shaped 12" wide at the top. Legs are continuously welded to the top not spot welded. Bottom of the leg is flanged in 1" for safety. ITEM #34: CAN RACK Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: New Age Model No.: 1256CK Specifier ID No.: *TO22 Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: N/A Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty casters. ITEM #35: 05.12-06 Summary Permit Set WALK-IN FREEZER FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-35 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Quantity: One (1) Assembly Manufacturer. Kolpak Model No.: Prefabricated Modular Panels Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans for Size and Configuration Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph, IW Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Walk-in box to be prefabricated of modular design and construction. 2. Panels to be interchangeable, with U.L. Labeled, CFC free urethane insulation sandwiched between interior and exterior metal surfaces, with an overall thickness of 4 inches. Edges of panels to be high-density urethane "tongue and groove", with cam-lock assemblies, set-in-place at time of fabrication. The access ports are to be on the interior, for inside assembly of the walk-in, and shall be covered with "snap caps Interior and exterior finishes are to be provided per manufacturer's drawings in CD documents. Floor panels to have 0.100" aluminum diamond treadplate high traffic reinforced heavy duty finished floor surface over FRP-structurally - reinforced insulated panels. Floor to be set into G.C. prepared 4' nominal slab recess. 3. Entrance door(s) and frame(s) as indicated on manufacturer's drawings. Door(s) to be hinged as shown on plans. The door to be flush type, constructed and insulated in the same manner as the wall panels, and finished inside and out, to match adjacent walls. Door and door section to be equipped with the following: a. Magnetic gasket, hydraulic piston driven door closer and cam lift hinges. Hardware to have provisions for locking and a safety release to prevent entrapment of personnel within the box. b. Provide door section with an incandescent type vapor-proof light with clear globe and heavy-duty 100-watt clear bulb, pilot light switch and conduit between switch box and outlet box. All conduit and wiring to be concealed, where possible. C. Door to be complete with reinforced HD vinyl strip doors. d. Unheated pressure relief port (air-vent). e. Audio-visual alarm to be included in door section, with remote sensor and adjustable alarm points to indicate the temperature inside, and sound an alarm when the temperature is unsatisfactory. The alarm shall have a mute switch to silence the audible alarm and a reset button to reset the alarm once the temperature conditions are satisfactory. f. 12 gauge stainless steel threshold fully sealing finished floor of kitchen space to interior floor of refrigerated box. 4. Extra vapor-proof fluorescent light fixtures, number as indicated on manufacturer's drawings complete with heavy duty lamps, field installation by the Electrical Division. All light fixtures to be U.L. Listed for use inside walk-in cooler or freezer. All conduit and wiring is to be concealed, where possible. 5. Matching finish trim strips, from floor to ceiling, at all exposed vertical edges, comers, and joints to building wall(s). Contractor to verify dimensions. 6. Matching finish closure panels from top of walk-in to finished ceiling, on exposed sides. Contractor to verify dimensions. 7. Walk-in to be installed in 4" deep building floor recess. Installing Contractor to verify levelness of recess/floor, and provide sand and shims as necessary for a completely level walk-in floor. 8. Unit and all components to be N.S.F. Approved, U.L. and U.L. Classified with a flame spread of 25 or less, and meet the April 1, 1998 requirements of N.S.F. Standard #7. 9. For any installation requiring additional ceiling support, provide self-supporting ceiling structural framework over the top of the walk-in compartment(s), and supported by the walk-in walls. 10. Verify all dimensions with building conditions for proper fit. Provide maximum size possible to fit available space, using standard panels. ITEM #36: EVAPORATOR COIL Quantity: LOT Manufacturer: Kairak Model No.: LET140 Specifier ID No.: *T022 05-12.06 Summary PermR Set FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-36 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Pertinent Data: Air Cooled Utilities Req'd.: Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: Drain per P.C., heat trace fumished and installed by KEC. ITEM #37: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #38: MOBILE PAN RACK CART Quantity: Seventeen (17) Manufacturer. Servolift - or equal Model No.: RIU69-202-S Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Open, Universal Angle Slides Utilities Req'd.: N/A Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Comer bumpers. ITEM #39: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #40: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #41: VEGETABLE/DAIRY WALK-IN COOLER Quantity: One (1) Assembly Manufacturer: Kolpak Model No.: Prefabricated Modular Panels Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans for Size and Configuration Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph, IW Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Walk-in box to be prefabricated of modular design and construction. 2. Panels to be interchangeable, with U.L. Labeled, CFC free urethane insulation sandwiched between interior and exterior metal surfaces, with an overall thickness of 4 inches. Edges of panels to be high-density urethane "tongue and groove", with cam-lock assemblies, set-in-place at time of fabrication. The access ports are to be on the interior, for inside assembly of the walk-in, and shall be covered with "snap caps". Interior and exterior finishes are to be provided per manufacturer's drawings in CD documents. Floor panels to have 0.100" aluminum diamond treadplate high traffic reinforced heavy duty finished floor surface over FRP-structurally - reinforced insulated panels. Floor to be set into G.C. prepared 4" nominal slab recess. 3. Entrance door(s) and frame(s) as indicated on manufacturer's drawings. Door(s) to be hinged as shown on plans. The door to be flush type, constructed and insulated in the same manner as the wall panels, and finished inside and out, to match adjacent walls. Door and door section to be equipped with the following: a. Magnetic gasket, hydraulic piston driven door closer and cam lift hinges. Hardware to have provisions for locking and a safety release to prevent entrapment of personnel within the box. 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400- 37 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT b. Provide door section with an incandescent type vapor-proof light with clear globe and heavy-duty 100-watt clear bulb, pilot light switch and conduit between switch box and outlet box. All conduit and wiring to be concealed, where possible. C. Door to be complete with reinforced HD vinyl strip doors. d. Unheated pressure relief port (air-vent). e. Audio-visual alarm to be included in door section, with remote sensor and adjustable alarm points to indicate the temperature inside, and sound an alarm when the temperature is unsatisfactory. The alarm shall have a mute switch to silence the audible alarm and a reset button to reset the alarm once the temperature conditions are satisfactory. f. 12 gauge stainless steel threshold fully sealing finished floor of kitchen space to interior floor of refrigerated box. 4. Extra vapor-proof fluorescent light fixtures, number as indicated on manufacturer's drawings complete with heavy duty lamps, field installation by the Electrical Division. All light fixtures to be U.L. Listed for use inside walk-in cooler or freezer. All conduit and wiring is to be concealed, where possible. 5. Matching finish trim strips, from floor to ceiling, at all exposed vertical edges, comers, and joints to building wall(s). Contractor to verify dimensions. 6. Matching finish closure panels from top of walk-in to finished ceiling, on exposed sides. Contractor to verify dimensions. 7. Walk-in to be installed in 4" deep building floor recess. Installing Contractor to verify levelness of recess/floor, and provide sand and shims as necessary for a completely level walk-in floor. 8. Unit and all components to be N.S.F. Approved, U.L. and U.L. Classified with a flame spread of 25 or less, and meet the April 1, 1998 requirements of N.S.F. Standard #7. 9. For any installation requiring additional ceiling support, provide self-supporting ceiling structural framework over the top of the walk-in compartment(s), and supported by the walk-in walls. 10. Verify all dimensions with building conditions for proper fit. Provide maximum size possible to fit available space, using standard panels. ITEM #42: EVAPORATOR COIL Quantity: LOT Manufacturer: Kairak Model No.: ADT156 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Air Cooled Utilities Req'd.: IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Drain per P.C., heat trace fumished and installed by KEC. ITEM #43: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #44: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #45: FISH WALK-IN COOLER Quantity: One (1) Assembly Manufacturer: Kolpak Model No.: Prefabricated Modular Panels Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans for Size and Configuration Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph, IW 0512-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Sunmry Pertnrt Set 11400 - 38 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Walk-in box to be prefabricated of modular design and construction. 2. Panels to be interchangeable, with U.L. Labeled, CFC free urethane insulation sandwiched between interior and exterior metal surfaces, with an overall thickness of 4 inches. Edges of panels to be high-density urethane "tongue and groove", with cam-lock assemblies, set-in-place at time of fabrication. The access ports are to be on the interior, for inside assembly of the walk-in, and shall be covered with "snap caps'. Interior and exterior finishes are to be provided per manufacturer's drawings in CD documents. Floor panels to have 0.100' aluminum diamond treadplate high traffic reinforced heavy duty finished floor surface over FRP-structurally - reinforced insulated panels. Floor to be set into G.C. prepared 4" nominal slab recess. 3. Entrance door(s) and frame(s) as indicated on manufacturer's drawings. Door(s) to be hinged as shown on plans. The door to be flush type, constructed and insulated in the same manner as the wall panels, and finished inside and out, to match adjacent walls. Door and door section to be equipped with the following: a. Magnetic gasket, hydraulic piston driven door closer and cam lift hinges. Hardware to have provisions for locking and a safety release to prevent entrapment of personnel within the box. b. Provide door section with an incandescent type vapor-proof light with dear globe and heavy-duty 100-watt dear bulb, pilot light switch and conduit between switch box and outlet box. All conduit and wiring to be concealed, where possible. C. Door to be complete with reinforced HD vinyl strip doors. d. Unheated pressure relief port (air-vent). e. Audio-visual alarm to be included in door section, with remote sensor and adjustable alarm points to indicate the temperature inside, and sound an alarm when the temperature is unsatisfactory. The alarm shall have a mute switch to silence the audible alarm and a reset button to reset the alarm once the temperature conditions are satisfactory. f. 12 gauge stainless steel threshold fully sealing finished floor of kitchen space to interior floor of refrigerated box. 4. Extra vapor-proof fluorescent light fixtures, number as indicated on manufacturer's drawings complete with heavy duty lamps, field installation by the Electrical Division. All light fixtures to be U.L. Listed for use inside walk-in cooler or freezer. All conduit and wiring is to be concealed, where possible. 5. Matching finish trim strips, from floor to ceiling, at all exposed vertical edges, comers, and joints to building wall(s). Contractor to verify dimensions. 6. Matching finish closure panels from top of walk-in to finished ceiling, on exposed sides. Contractor to verify dimensions. 7. Walk-in to be installed in 4' deep building floor recess. Installing Contractor to verify levelness of recess/floor, and provide sand and shims as necessary for a completely level walk-in floor. 8. Unit and all components to be N.S.F. Approved, U.L. and U.L. Classified with a flame spread of 25 or less, and meet the April 1, 1998 requirements of N.S.F. Standard P. 9. For any installation requiring additional ceiling support, provide self-supporting ceiling structural framework over the top of the walk-in compartment(s), and supported by the walk-in walls. 10. Verify all dimensions with building conditions for proper fit Provide maximum size possible to fit available space, using standard panels. ITEM #46: EVAPORATOR COIL Quantity: LOT Manufacturer: Kairak Model No.: ADT156 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Water Cooled Utilities Req'd.: IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: Drain per P.C., heat trace furnished and installed by KEC. 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-39 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERViCE EQUIPMENT ITEM #47: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #48: MEAT WALK-IN COOLER Quantity: One (1) Assembly Manufacturer: Kolpak Model No.: Prefabricated Modular Panels Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans for Size and Configuration Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph, IW Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: Walk-in box to be prefabricated of modular design and construction. Panels to be interchangeable, with U.L. Labeled, CFC free urethane insulation sandwiched between interior and exterior metal surfaces, with an overall thickness of 4 inches. Edges of panels to be high-density urethane "tongue and groove", with cam-lock assemblies, set-in-place at time of fabrication. The access ports are to be on the interior, for inside assembly of the walk-in, and shall be covered with "snap caps". Interior and exterior finishes are to be provided per manufacturer's drawings in CD documents. Floor panels to have 0.100° aluminum diamond treadplate high traffic reinforced heavy duty finished floor surface over FRP-structurally - reinforced insulated panels. Floor to be set into G.C. prepared 4" nominal slab recess. Entrance door(s) and frame(s) as indicated on manufacturer's drawings. Door(s) to be hinged as shown on plans. The door to be flush type, constructed and insulated in the same manner as the wall panels, and finished inside and out, to match adjacent walls. Door and door section to be equipped with the following: a. Magnetic gasket, hydraulic piston driven door closer and cam lift hinges. Hardware to have provisions for locking and a safety release to prevent entrapment of personnel within the box. b. Provide door section with an incandescent type vapor-proof light with dear globe and heavy-duty 100-watt clear bulb, pilot light switch and conduit between switch box and outlet box. All conduit and wiring to be concealed, where possible. C. Door to be complete with reinforced HD vinyl strip doors. d. Unheated pressure relief port (air-vent). e. Audio-visual alarm to be included in door section, with remote sensor and adjustable alarm points to indicate the temperature inside, and sound an alarm when the temperature is unsatisfactory. The alarm shall have a mute switch to silence the audible alarm and a reset button to reset the alarm once the temperature conditions are satisfactory. f. 12 gauge stainless steel threshold fully sealing finished floor of kitchen space to interior floor of refrigerated box. 4. Extra vapor-proof fluorescent light fixtures, number as indicated on manufacturer's drawings complete with heavy duty lamps, field installation by the Electrical Division. All light fixtures to be U.L. Listed for use inside walk-in cooler or freezer. An conduit and wiring is to be concealed, where possible. 5. Matching finish trim strips, from floor to ceiling, at all exposed vertical edges, comers, and joints to building wall(s). Contractor to verify dimensions. 6. Matching finish closure panels from top of walk-in to finished ceiling, on exposed sides. Contractor to verify dimensions. 7. Walk-in to be installed in 4" deep building floor recess. Installing Contractor to verify levelness of recess/floor, and provide sand and shims as necessary for a completely level walk-in floor. 8. Unit and all components to be N.S.F. Approved, U.L. and U.L. Classified with a flame spread of 25 or less, and meet the April 1, 1998 requirements of N.S.F. Standard V. 9. For any installation requiring additional ceiling support, provide self-supporting ceiling structural framework over the top of the walk-in compartment(s), and supported by the walk-in walls. 10. Verify all dimensions with building conditions for proper fit. Provide maximum size possible to fit available space, using standard panels. 051206 POODSERVICE EQUIPMENT - 40040 Summary Perm ft Set 11 ' PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEM #49: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #50: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #51: EVAPORATOR COIL Quantity: LOT Manufacturer. Kairak Model No.: ADT156 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Water Cooled Utilities Req'd.: IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: ITEM #52: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #53: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #54: BANQUET WALK-IN COOLER Quantity: One (1) Assembly Manufacturer: Kolpak Model No.: Prefabricated Modular Panels Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans for Size and Configuration Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph, IW Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Walk-in box to be prefabricated of modular design and construction. 2. Panels to be interchangeable, with U.L. Labeled, CFC free urethane insulation sandwiched between interior and exterior metal surfaces, with an overall thickness of 4 inches. Edges of panels to be high-density urethane "tongue and groove", with cam-lock assemblies, set-in-place at time of fabrication. The access ports are to be on the interior, for inside assembly of the walk-in, and shall be covered with "snap caps". Interior and exterior finishes are to be provided per manufacturer's drawings in CD documents. Floor panels to have 0.100" aluminum diamond treadplate high traffic reinforced heavy duty finished floor surface over FRP-structurally - reinforced insulated panels. Floor to be set into G.C. prepared 4" nominal slab recess. 3. Entrance door(s) and frame(s) as indicated on manufacturer's drawings. Door(s) to be hinged as shown on plans. The door to be flush type, constructed and insulated in the same manner as the wall panels, and finished inside and out, to match adjacent walls. Door and door section to be equipped with the following: a. Magnetic gasket, hydraulic piston driven door closer and cam lift hinges. Hardware to have provisions for locking and a safety release to prevent entrapment of personnel within the box b. Provide door section with an incandescent type vapor-proof light with clear globe and heavy-duty 100-watt clear bulb, pilot light switch and conduit between switch box and outlet box. All conduit and wiring to be concealed, where possible. C. Door to be complete with reinforced HD vinyl strip doors. d. Unheated pressure relief port (air-vent). e. Audio-visual alarm to be included in door section, with remote sensor and adjustable alarm points to indicate the temperature inside, and sound an alarm when the temperature is unsatisfactory. The alarm shall have a 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EOUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-41 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT mute switch to silence the audible alarm and a reset button to reset the alarm once the temperature conditions are satisfactory. f. 12 gauge stainless steel threshold fully sealing finished floor of kitchen space to interior floor of refrigerated box. 4. Extra vapor-proof fluorescent light fixtures, number as indicated on manufacturer's drawings complete with heavy duty lamps, field installation by the Electrical Division. All light fixtures to be U.L. Listed for use inside walk-in cooler or freezer. All conduit and wiring is to be concealed, where possible. 5. Matching finish trim strips, from floor to ceiling, at all exposed vertical edges, comers, and joints to building wall(s). Contractor to verify dimensions. 6. Matching finish closure panels from top of walk-in to finished ceiling, on exposed sides. Contractor to verify dimensions. 7. Walk-in to be installed in 4" deep building floor recess. Installing Contractor to verify levelness of recess/floor, and provide sand and shims as necessary for a completely level walk-in floor. 8. Unit and all components to be N.S.F. Approved, U.L. and U.L. Classified with a flame spread of 25 or less, and meet the April 1, 1998 requirements of N.S.F. Standard #7. 9. For any installation requiring additional ceiling support, provide self-supporting ceiling structural framework over the top of the walk-in compartment(s), and supported by the walk-in walls. 10. Verify all dimensions with building conditions for proper fit. Provide maximum size possible to fit available space, using standard panels. ITEM #55: EVAPORATOR COIL Quantity: LOT Manufacturer: Kairak Model No.: ADT180 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Air Cooled Utilities Req'd.: IW Fumish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: Drain per P.C., heat trace furnished and installed by KEC. ITEM #56: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #57: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #58: STORAGE SHELVING Quantity: Three( 3) Manufacturer. InterMetro Industries Model No.: Metro Max Polymer Design Specifier ID No.: "T022 Pertinent Data: 86" High With Five Tiers Utilities Req'd.: NIA Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Length, width and configuration per plan and verified room dimensions. 2. Each section to be free standing with four legs, first shelf to start at 10" AFF. 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-42 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEM #59: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #60: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #61: ROLL-IN BLAST CHILLER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traulsen Model No.: RBC-200 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Single Section, Roll-In, Remote Refrigeration with Rack. Utilities Req'd.: 115/60/1 Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Self-contained refrigeration system for holding temperature only. 2. Blast chilling remote by others. Contractor to verify and coordinate blast chiller requirements with rack manufacturer. 3. Door hinged as shown on plans. 4. Contractor to verify and coordinate pan rack carts provided (with Contract OR by Owner) will fit blast chiller. 5. Remote Refrigeration by Kairak. Water Cooled. ITEM #62: HAND SINK ASSEMBLY Quantity: Three (3) Manufacturer: Eagle Model No.: HSA-10-FDPS Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Automatic, Hands-Free Utilities Req'd.: HW & CW, Waste Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: Side splashes ITEM #63: WORK TABLE WITH SINKS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: HW & CW, IW Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard details; FSD1-1 B, FSD1-5A, FSD1-7, FSD1-8, FSD1-10, FSD1-13, FSD1-15, FSD2-5 and FSD2-9. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. One (2) 20" x 20" x 5" deep drawer assembly, located as per plans and details. 3. One (1) T&S B-3197 (or Fisher equal) deck mou0faucet (12" spout) with wrist handles and one (1) rotary waste assembly. 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPHEW Summary Permit Set 11400 - 43 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEM #64: FOOD PROCESSOR Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Robot Coupe Model No.: R6VNN Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Counter Top Utilities Req'd: 208V 3Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. Provide eight (8) standard cutting plates, final selection by Operator. 3. CL575 (Wall mounted plate rack) ITEM #65: WALL SHELF Quantity: Manufacturer. Model No.: Specifier ID No.: Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: Three (3) Fabricated Stainless Steel *T022 Plan For Length And Configuration. N/A Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard detail FSD12-1 one shelf. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #66: WORK TABLE WITH SINK Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: HW & CW, IW Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard details; FSD1-1 B, FSD1-5A, FSD1-7, FSD1-8, FSD1-10, FSD1-13, FSD1-15, FSD2-5 and FSD2-9. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. One (1) 20" x 20" x 5" deep drawer assembly, located as per plans and details..? verifyl 3. One (1) T&S B-3197 (or Fisher equal) deck mount faucet (12" spout) with wrist handles and one (1) rotary waste assembly ITEM #67 05.12-06 Summary Permit Set FIXED OVERSHELF FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400.44 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: N/A Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard detail FSD12-5. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Assembly to be mounted to Item #66, #71, as shown on plans. ITEM #68: CEILING HUNG POT RACK Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Ceiling Mounted/See Plan For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd.: N/A Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard detail FSD14-3. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Contractor to provide and install structural reinforcing and mounting framework in the ceiling, as shown on the standard detail. ITEM #69: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #70: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #71: WORK TABLE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: 120V 1Ph Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard details; FSD1-1 B, FSD1-7, FSD1-8, FSD1-10, FSD1-15 and FSD2-6. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. One (1) 20" x 20" x 5" deep drawer assembly, located as per plans and details. VERIFY NOT THREE DRAWER 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400 - 45 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ASSEMBLY 3. Table to have two (2) 120-volt duplex electrical outlets; one mounted on each end of table. Provide with stainless steel mounting brackets and cover plates, J-boxes, and interconnecting conduit with wiring, with pigtails ready for final connection by the Electrical Division. Attach conduit to underside of table. ITEM #72: 40 QT. MIXER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Hobart Model No.: D340 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 40 Quart, Floor Model Utilities Req'd: 208V 3Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Provide with one (1) stainless steel 40 quart bowl, one (1) "B" flat beater, one (1) "D" wire loop whip, one (1) "ED" dough hook, one (1) "1" heavy duty wire whip, one (1) pastry knife, and one (1) 20 quart accessories and one (1) 9" vegetable slicer. 2. Heavy-duty cord and plug. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #73: 20 QT. MIXER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Hobart Model No.: A200 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 20 Quart, Counter Model Utilities Req'd: 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Provide with one (1) stainless steel 20 quart bowl, one (1) "C" wing whip, one (1) "E" dough hook, 12 quart accessories 2. Heavy-duty cord and plug. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #74: WORK TABLE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard details; FSD1-1 B, FSD1-5A, FSD1-7, FSD1-8, FSD1-10, FSD1-15 and FSD2-5. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. One (1) three tier 20" x 20" x 5" deep drawer assembly, located as per plans and details. 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Pem>d Set 11400 - 46 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEM #75: FIXED OVERSHELF Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: NIA Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard detail FSD12-5. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Assembly to be mounted to Item #74, #82, as shown on plans. ITEM #76: CEILING HUNG POT RACK Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Ceiling Mounted/See Plan For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd.: N/A Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard detail FSD14-3. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Contractor to provide and install structural reinforcing and mounting framework in the ceiling, as shown on the standard detail. ITEM #77: SALAD SPINNER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Delfield Shellymatic Model No.: SALD-1 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: 115V/2.7A Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: Heavy-duty cord and plug. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #78: MOBILE SLICER STAND Quantity: One(1) Manufacturer: Bevies Model No.: RA35-ES17-FL4 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 0512-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-47 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Utilities Req'd.: Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. 5' plate-type, neoprene casters, all swivel, two with brakes. 2. Full perimeter bumper. 3. Vertical pan stop. 4. Polyurethane casters. 5. Floor locks( foot operated). ITEM #79: STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARD Quantity: Lot Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plan For Quantity Utilities Req'd.: N/A Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard detail FSD1-40. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #80: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #81: SLICER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Hobart Model No.: 2912 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Automatic Utilities Req'd: 120V 1Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. Food Chute, auto shut off. 3. High fence. ITEM #82: WORK TABLE WITH SINK Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: HW & CW, IW 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPIuENT Summary Permit Set 11400-48 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard details; FSD1-1B, FSD1-5A, FSD1-7, FSD1-8, FSD1-10, FSD1-13, FSD1-15, FSD2-5 and FSD2-9. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. One (1) three tier 20" x 20' x 5' deep drawer assembly, located as per plans and details. One (1) Fisher #3113 deck mount faucet (12' spout) and one (1) rotary waste assembly. (T&S THEN FISHER) ITEM #83: SERVING COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph/208/1 Ph, HW & CW, IW Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. Refer to fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Entire counter to be factory pre-wired to an accessible pull-box. This shall include au outlets, J-boxes, conduit, wiring, electrical components, and accessories attached to, or built into the counter. All conduits, with wiring, shall be concealed from view and installed in a manner, which will not interfere with the intended use of the counter. Electrical components and installation shall comply with the National Electrical Code. Verify and coordinate pull box location with rough-in location. Pigtails shall be tagged with the electrical requirements and identification of the equipment they serve; ready for final connection by the Electrical Division. ITEM #84: REFRIGERATED RAIL TABLE Quantity: One(1) Manufacturer: Kairak, Inc Model No.: KRP-96R Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Remote Refrigeration Utilities Req'd.: 115W3.9 A Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Double depth pan opening per operator. 2. Tray slides spacing, 2-112". 3. 2 Drawer assembly. 4. 3/4" richlite cutting board. 5. Door locks. 6. Refrigeration sleeve per G.C. Remote to Kairak rack. ITEM #85: REFRIGERATED RAIL TABLE Quantity: One(1) Manufacturer: Kairak, Inc Model No.: KRP-96R Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Remote Refrigeration Utilities Req'd.: 115V/3.9 A 05-12.06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPWENT Summary Permit Set 11400-49 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Double depth pan opening per operator. 2. Tray slides spacing, 2-1/2". 3. 2 Drawer assembly. 4. 314" richlite cutting board. 5. Door locks. 6. Refrigeration sleeve per G.C. Remote to Kairak rack. ITEM #86: COLD ISSUE WINDOW Quantity: One (1) - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By G.C. ITEM #87: P.O.S PRINTER Quantity: One (1) - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Owner/ Operator. ITEM #88: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #89: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #90: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #91: WORK TABLE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard details; FSD1-1B, FSD1-5A, FSD1-7, FSD1-8, FSD1-10, FSD1-15 and FSD2-5. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. One (1) three tier 20" x 20" x 5" deep drawer assembly, located as per plans and details. VERIFY ITEM #92: DISH DOLLY Quantity: Two(2) Manufacturer: Cres-Cor Model No.: 501 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 05-12-06 FQODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permd Set 11400-50 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Utilities Req'd.: N/A Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Adjustable adapters. 2. Vinyl dust cover. 3. Perimeter bumper. 4. Verify china selection with Operator. ITEM #93: GLASS RACK DOLLY Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Cres-Cor Model No.: 500-2020 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: With Comer Bumpers Utilities Req'd.: N/A Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications 1. Corner bumpers. ITEM #94: MOBILE ICE CADDY Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Follett Model No.: Smart Cart 125 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Mobile Utilities Req'd.: N/A Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications ITEM #95: ICE AND WATER STATION Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Delfield Model No.: 204 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Drop-In, 45 Lbs. Ice Storage Capacity Utilities Req'd.: CW, IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Install in Item # 104 Counter, as shown on plans. 2. Pitcher filler in lieu of glass filler. ITEM #96: WALL SHELF Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated 05.12-06 Summary Permit Set FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-51 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Plan For Length And Configuration. Utilities Req'd.: N/A SECTION 11400 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard detail FSD12-1-one shelf. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #97: ICED TEA BREWER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Bunn Model No.: T3 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Single Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph, CW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Furnish Easy Clear EQ-11-TL water filter system. 2. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #98: COFFEE BREWER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fetco Model No.: C62036 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Two (2) Warmers Utilities Req'd.: (120V 1Ph -120/208V 1Ph) CW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Furnish Easy Clear water filter system. 2. Two (2) additional insulated carafes. ITEM #99: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #100: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #101: UNDER COUNTER REFRIGERATOR Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Delfield Model No.: 406-CA Specifier ID No.: *T022 05-12-06 Summary Permit Set FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-52 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Pertinent Data: Self-Contained, Water Cooled. Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. Additional shelves. 3. 3.5' diameter casters. 4. Door lock. ITEM #102: ESPRESSO MACHINE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Acorto Model No.: 2500i Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Semi-Automatic Utilities Req'd.: 208V 1Ph, CW, IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Furnish with manufacturer's recommended water filter system. 2. Heavy-duty cord and plug. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #103: DIPPER WELL Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fisher Model No.: 3041 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: CW, DW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Coordinate with Item #104, place per plan. ITEM #104: BEVERAGE COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd.: HW & CW, IW Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard details; FSD1-1B, FSD1-5A, FSD1-7, FSD1-10, FSD1-18, FSD1-23, FSD1-24, FSD1-31A, FSD5-1, FSD5-2 and FSD5-7. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400.53 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 2. Hinged doors with recessed pulls and locks. 3. One (1) T&S B-3197 (or Fisher Equal) deck mount faucet (12" spout) with wrist handles and one (1) rotary waste assembly ITEM #105: REACH-IN REFRIGERATOR Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer. Traulsen Model No.: RHT232WUT Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Two Section, Self-Contained, Water Cooled Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. Door(s) hinged as shown on plans. 3. No. 2 type tray slide to accommodate (1) 18"x26" sheet pans, adjustable to 2" O.C right side only. 4. Additional chrome plated shelves, two (2) each. 5. Set of four (4) 6" high casters in lieu of legs. 6. Clear glass doors in place of solid doors. ITEM #106: P.O.S. SYSTEM Quantity: Two (2) - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Owner/ Operator. ITEM #107: P.O.S. PRINTER Quantity: Two (2) - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Owner/ Operator. ITEM #108: SERVICE COUNTER Quantity: One (1) - Not In This Contract Section, Fabricated By Millwork Division. ITEM #109: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #110: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #111: WALL CABINETRY Quantity: One (1) - Not In This Contract Section, Fabricated By Millwork Division. ITEM #112: BUFFET TABLE Quantity: One (1) - Not In This Contract Section, Fabricated By Millwork Division. 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400 - 54 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEM #113: CHAFING DISH WARMER Quantity: Six (6) Manufacturer: Spring USA Model No.: SR-12628-1 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: With chafing pans Utilities Req'd.: Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. SPECIFY TWO TYPES OF CHAFING PANS FOR EACH- SEE CUT SHEET. ITEM #114: CARVING STATION Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Alto-Shaam Model No.: 100-HSU7M Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: With lamp Utilities Req'd.: 50160 HZ, 6 Amps Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Provide heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. One (1) Richlite cutting board 18"x 24" x314", one (1) 250 watt lamp, one(1), one food guard. ITEM #115: FOOD GUARD Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Brass Smith Model No.: Z-Guard Custom Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration, Portable Utilities Req'd.: Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. 1" Diameter stainless steel tubing. 2. Install on Item #112 Counter, as shown on plans. 3. Adjustable top shelf to be 3/8" thick tempered glass with polished edges. 4. Adjustable front panels to be 114' thick tempered glass with polished edges. Exposed end(s) to have 318" thick tempered glass panels with polished edges. 5. Coordinate support legs placement and mounting method, with the counter top and equipment; and the counter fabricator. Provide shop drawings to the counter fabricator for their coordination. 6. Verify and coordinate with local Health Department requirements. 7. Actual finishes and food guard type to be selected by the Interior Designer and Operator. ITEM #116: HARVEST TABLE Quantity: Two (2) - Not In This Contract Section, Fabricated By Millwork Division. 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400 - 55 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEM #117: SERVICE COUNTER Quantity: One (1) - Not In This Contract Section, Fabricated By Millwork Division. ITEM #118: WALL CABINETRY Quantity: One (1) - Not In This Contract Section, Fabricated By Millwork Division. ITEM #119: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #120: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #121: SERVICE BAR DIE AND TOP Quantity: One (1) - Not In This Contract Section, Fabricated By Millwork Division. ITEM #122: COCKTAIL STATION Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Glastender Model No.: ALL-72B Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd: IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Combo ice bin, single wet waste sink with faucet and blender shelf, condiment dispenser, double speed rail, dry waste chute and towel ring. 2. Recessed drain board and liquor display. 3. Eight circuit cold plates ITEM #123: BLENDER STATION Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Glastender Model No.: Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: As a part of #122 Utilities Req'd: 120V 1Ph, HW & CW, IW Fumish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. ITEM #124: BAR HAND SINK 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-56 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Glastender Model No.: DHSB-12 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: With Soap and Towel Dispenser, For Folded Paper Towels Utilities Req'd: HW & CW, IW Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications. ITEM #125: BAR BLENDER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Waring Commercial Model No.: BC900S Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: With Stainless Steel Container Utilities Req'd: 120 V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division ITEM #126: TRASH RECEPTACLE Quantity: Lot - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Owner/Operator. ITEM #127: DRAINBOARD CABINET Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Glastender Model No.: Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: As part of 122 Utilities Req'd: IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: ITEM #128: LIQUOR DISPLAY Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Glastender Model No.: LDA-24D Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: As part of 122 Utilities Req'd: IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following ITEM #129: SPARE NUMBER 05.12.06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permk Set 11400-57 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEM #130: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #131: ICE MACHINE WITH BIN AND FILTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Scotsman Model No.: AFE325AS-1A Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Self-Contained, Air-Cooled Utilities Req'd.: 120VI60/1 Ph, CW, IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Mount bin on 6" adjustable stainless steel legs. 2. Furnish one (1) ARE-PRE Everpure, one(1) Insurice AR-1000 Single water filter assembly, for installation by the Plumbing Division. Coordinate installation location to insure easy access for cartridge replacement and servicing, and in compliance with local codes. ITEM #132: REACH-IN REFRIGERATOR Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traulsen Model No.: AHT226WUT-HHS Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Two Section, Two Door Glass, Self Contained Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturers standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. Doors hinged as shown on plans. 3. Stainless steel shelves in lieu of standard chrome plated. 4. Set of four (4) 6" high casters in lieu of legs. 5. Clear glass door in place of one or more solid doors with locks. ITEM #133: WALL SHELF Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Plan For Length And Configuration. Utilities Req'd.: N/A Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard detail FSD12-1 one shelf. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400- 58 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 APNI VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEM #134: BACK BAR REFRIGERATOR Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Glastender Model No.: B884-L6-55HLLR Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Sections, Self-Contained Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. 6" Adjustable legs and base plate kit. 2. Door locks. 3. Factory-applied finish as specified by the ArchitecttInterior Designer. Verify door and finish options with Interior Designer prior to ordering. 4. Locate compressor on left hand side, hinge per plan. ITEM #135: STORAGE SHELVING Quantity: Manufacturer: Model No.: Specifier ID No.: Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: Seven (7) InterMetro Industries Metro Seal 3 *T022 86" High With Five Tiers N/A Fumish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Length, width and configuration per plan and verified room dimensions. 2. Each section to be free standing with four legs, first shelf to start at 10" AFF. ITEM #136: BEER/ WINE/ WALK-IN COOLER Quantity: One (1) Assembly Manufacturer. Kolpak Model No.: Prefabricated Modular Panels Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans for Size and Configuration Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph, IW Fumish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Walk-in box to be prefabricated of modular design and construction. 2. Panels to be interchangeable, with U.L. Labeled, CFC free urethane insulation sandwiched between interior and exterior metal surfaces, with an overall thickness of 4 inches. Edges of panels to be high-density urethane "tongue and groove", with cam-lock assemblies, set-in-place at time of fabrication. The access ports are to be on the interior, for inside assembly of the walk-in, and shall be covered with 'snap caps'. Interior and exterior finishes are to be provided per manufacturer's drawings in CD documents. Floor panels to have 0.100" aluminum diamond tread plate high traffic reinforced heavy duty finished floor surface over FRP-structurally - reinforced insulated panels. Floor to be set into G.C. prepared 4" nominal slab recess. 3. Entrance door(s) and frame(s) as indicated on manufacturer's drawings. Door(s) to be hinged as shown on plans. The door to be flush type, constructed and insulated in the same manner as the wall panels, and finished inside and out, to match adjacent walls. Door and door section to be equipped with the following: 05.12.06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-59 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT a. Magnetic gasket, hydraulic piston driven door closer and cam lift hinges. Hardware to have provisions for locking and a safety release to prevent entrapment of personnel within the box. b. Provide door section with an incandescent type vapor-proof light with clear globe and heavy-duty 100-watt clear bulb, pilot light switch and conduit between switch box and outlet box. All conduit and wiring to be concealed, where possible. C. Door to be complete with reinforced HD vinyl strip doors. d. Unheated pressure relief port (air-vent). e. Audio-visual alarm to be included in door section, with remote sensor and adjustable alarm points to indicate the temperature inside, and sound an alarm when the temperature is unsatisfactory. The alarm shall have a mute switch to silence the audible alarm and a reset button to reset the alarm once the temperature conditions are satisfactory. f. 12 gauge stainless steel threshold fully sealing finished floor of kitchen space to interior floor of refrigerated box. 4. Extra vapor-proof fluorescent light fixtures, number as indicated on manufacturer's drawings complete with heavy duty lamps, field installation by the Electrical Division. All light fixtures to be U.L. Listed for use inside walk-in cooler or freezer. All conduit and wiring is to be concealed, where possible. 5. Matching finish trim strips, from floor to ceiling, at all exposed vertical edges, corners, and joints to building wall(s). Contractor to verify dimensions. 6. Matching finish closure panels from top of walk-in to finished ceiling, on exposed sides. Contractor to verify dimensions. 7. Walk-in to be installed in 4" deep building floor recess. Installing Contractor to verify levelness of recess/floor, and provide sand and shims as necessary for a completely level walk-in floor. 8. Unit and all components to be N.S.F. Approved, U.L. and U.L. Classified with a flame spread of 25 or less, and meet the April 1, 1998 requirements of N.S.F. Standard #7. 9. For any installation requiring additional ceiling support, provide self-supporting ceiling structural framework over the top of the walk-in compartment(s), and supported by the walk-in walls. 10. Verify all dimensions with building conditions for proper fit Provide maximum size possible to fit available space, using standard panels. ITEM #137: EVAPORATOR COIL Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Kairak Model No.: ADT104 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Air Cooled Utilities Req'd.: IW ITEM #138: STORAGE SHELVING Quantity: Four (4) Manufacturer. InterMetro Industries Model No.: Metro Seal 3 Polymer Design Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 86" High With Five Tiers Utilities Req'd.: N/A Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Length, width and configuration per plan and verified room dimensions. 2. Each section to be free standing with four legs, first shelf to start at 10" AFF. ITEM #139: WINE DISPLAY 14a) 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400 - 60 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Quantity: Lot - Not In This Contract Section, Millwork division. ITEM #140: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #141: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #142: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #143: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #144: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #145: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #146: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #147: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #148: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #149: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #150: DISH DOLLY Quantity: Twenty Seven (27) Manufacturer: Cres Cor Model No.: 501 Series Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Adjustable Adapters, Vinyl Dust Cover, and Perimeter Bumper Utilities Req'd.: N/A Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Adjustable adapters, vinyl dust cover, perimeter bumpers. 2. Coordinate Model # with operation and dish selection. ITEM #151: GLASS RACK DOLLY Quantity: Eighteen (18) Manufacturer. Cres Cor Model No.: 500-2020 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: N/A 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary PermR Set 11400-61 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. Rigid push handle. 2. Casters 5' diameter, swivel two equipped with brakes. ITEM #152: STORAGE SHELVING Quantity: Twenty One (21) Manufacturer: InterMetro Industries Model No.: Metro Max Super Erecta Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 86" High With Five Tiers Utilities Req'd.: NIA Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Length, width and configuration per plan and verified room dimensions. 2. Each section to be free standing with four legs, first shelf to start at 10" AFF. ITEM #153: FIXED OVERSHELF Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: 'T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: N/A Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard detail FSD12-5. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Assembly to be mounted to Item #155, as shown on plans. ITEM #154: REACH-IN REFRIGERATOR Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traulsen & Co. Model No.: AHT232WUT-HHS Specifier ID No.: 'T022 Pertinent Data: Two Section, Self-Contained, Air-Cooled, Reach-In, Glass door Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. Door(s) hinged as shown on plans. 3. Set of four (4) 6" high casters in lieu of legs. 4. Clear glass doors in place of solid doors. 5. Stainless steel shelves in lieu of standard chrome plated, two (2) extra. 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400 - 62 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 6. No. 2 Type Tray slides to accommodate (1) 18"x26" sheet pans adjustable to 2" O.C. (right side only) ITEM #155: WORK TABLE Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard details; FSD1-1 B, FSD1-5A, FSD1-7, FSD1-10, FSD1-15 and FSD2-1. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #156: MOBILE TRAY RACK Quantity: Manufacturer: Model No.: Specifier ID No.: Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: Two (2) Servolift or Equal RIU69-202-S *T022 Custom to FSH Tray Dimensions NIA Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Fabricate to specific Four Seasons Hotel RS tray dimensions. ITEM #157: WORK TABLE WITH SINK Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: HW & CW, IW Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard details; FSD1-1 B, FSD1-5A, FSD1-7, FSD1-8, FSD1-10, FSD1-13, FSD1-15, FSD2-1 and FSD2-7. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. One (1) 20" x 20" x 5" deep drawer assembly, located as per plans and details. 3. One (1) T&S B-3113 deck mount (or Fisher equal) faucet (12 goose neck spout) with wrist handles and one (1) rotary waste assembly. ITEM #158: WALL SHELF Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400 - 63 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plan For Length And Configuration. Utilities Req'd.: N/A Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard detail FSD12-1 (one shelf OR two shelves double-stacked). This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #159: REMOTE REFRIGERATION SYSTEM Quantity: One (1) Assembly Manufacturer: Kairak Model No.: KMR-10 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Remote, Water Cooled Assembly Utilities Req'd: 208V 3Ph Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Construction: Unit to utilize multi-circuited air-cooled condensers. The frame and base is to be comprised of 16 gauge and 10 gauge all welded sheet steel, respectively. Hot air discharge from condenser fans is to be vertical. A Venturi-contoured air-scoop is to be provided for each fan to reduce air turbulence and fan loading. Fan blades are to be covered with a plastic coated fan guard. 2. Condensing System: Each condensing system is to be equipped with a Copeland semi- hermetic compressor, dual pressure control, sight glass, liquid-line drier, suction and discharge vibration eliminators, floodback head pressure control and crankcase heater. All compressor units to be new. Multi-circuited condensers to be sized to operate at 15 degrees Fahrenheit T.D. over ambient Each condensing unit is to be equipped with an over-sized receiver large enough to accept the total liquid volume of refrigerant for all systems without exceeding 80% of its volumetric capacity at its designed operating pressures and temperatures. Each receiver is to be equipped individually with a fusible plug and shut-off valves with service ports. 3. Piping: All refrigerant lines are to be extended to one side of the package in a neat and orderly manner, easily identified by system. All tubing is to be securely supported and anchored with damps. All copper tubing is to be refrigerant grade A.C.R. or type "L". Silver solder or sil-fos is to be used for all refrigerant piping. Soft solder is not acceptable. All piping is to be pressure tested. After the condensing unit and coil have been connected, the balance of the system is to be leak tested with all valves open. 4. Control Panel: The package is to have factory mounted and pre-wired control panel complete with compressor circuit breakers, remote fan motor capacitors, contractors, thermal sensing fan cycle control as necessary and time clocks wired for single point power connection. 5. Furnish and install rack and evaporators, freezer drain line heater kits, refrigeration lines, insulation, thermo-expansion valves, refrigerant and accessories as required. All refrigeration lines are to be extended through ceilings and concealed spaces, wherever possible. All refrigeration work is to be accomplished by a Certified Refrigeration Mechanic. 6. Condensing units included on the rack have been engineered and sized with the best known information and plans available at the time of design. Installing Refrigeration Mechanic is to verify actual line run sizes, lengths, and routings with site conditions and final location of compressor rack; and that lengths are within maximum recommendations for the condensing units selected for the rack. If it is determined that any line run lengths may exceed these recommended maximum lengths, installing Mechanic is to research alternative routing to reduce lengths, and if this is still not possible, is to inform the Contractor, who in turn is to notify the rack manufacturer, General Contractor, Architect, and Kitchen Designer, for possible solution. ITEM #160: REMOTE REFRIGERATOR SYSTEM 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400 - 64 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Quantity: One (1) Assembly Manufacturer: Kairak Model No.: KMR-8 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Remote, Water Cooled Assembly Utilities Req'd: 208V 3Ph Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Construction: Unit to utilize multi-circuited air-cooled condensers. The frame and base is to be comprised of 16 gauge and 10 gauge all welded sheet steel, respectively. Hot air discharge from condenser fans is to be vertical. A Venturi-contoured air-scoop is to be provided for each fan to reduce air turbulence and fan loading. Fan blades are to be covered with a plastic coated fan guard. 2. Condensing System: Each condensing system is to be equipped with a Copeland semi- hermetic compressor, dual pressure control, sight glass, liquid-line drier, suction and discharge vibration eliminators, floodback head pressure control and crankcase heater. All compressor units to be new. Multi-circuited condensers to be sized to operate at 15 degrees Fahrenheit T.D. over ambient. Each condensing unit is to be equipped with an over-sized receiver large enough to accept the total liquid volume of refrigerant for all systems without exceeding 80% of its volumetric capacity at its designed operating pressures and temperatures. Each receiver is to be equipped individually with a fusible plug and shut-off valves with service ports. 3. Piping: All refrigerant lines are to be extended to one side of the package in a neat and orderly manner, easily identified by system. All tubing is. to be securely supported and anchored with damps. All copper tubing is to be refrigerant grade A.C.R. or type V. Silver solder or sil-fos is to be used for all refrigerant piping. Soft solder is not acceptable. All piping is to be pressure tested. After the condensing unit and coil have been connected, the balance of the system is to be leak tested with all valves open. 4. Control Panel: The package is to have factory mounted and pre-wired control panel complete with compressor circuit breakers, remote fan motor capacitors, contractors, thermal sensing fan cycle control as necessary and time clocks wired for single point power connection. 5. Furnish and install rack and evaporators, freezer drain line heater kits, refrigeration lines, insulation, thermo-expansion valves, refrigerant and accessories as required. All refrigeration lines are to be extended through ceilings and concealed spaces, wherever possible. A I refrigeration work is to be accomplished by a Certified Refrigeration Mechanic. 6. Condensing units included on the rack have been engineered and sized with the best known information and plans available at the time of design. Installing Refrigeration Mechanic is to verify actual line run sizes, lengths, and routings with site conditions and final location of compressor rack; and that lengths are within maximum recommendations for the condensing units selected for the rack. If it is determined that any line run lengths may exceed these recommended maximum lengths, installing Mechanic is to research alternative routing to reduce lengths, and if this is still not possible, is to inform the Contractor, who in turn is to notify the rack manufacturer, General Contractor, Architect, and Kitchen Designer, for possible solution. ITEM #161: DIPPER WELL Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Fisher Faucets Model No.: 3041 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: CW, DW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400 - 65 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEM #162: ESPRESSO MACHINE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Accorto Model No.: 2500 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Fully Automatic, Grinders Included Utilities Req'd.: 200-240 VAC, 30A,1 Ph, CW, IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Furnish with manufacturer's recommended water filter system. 2. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #163: STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARD Quantity: Lot Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plan For Locations and Configuration Utilities Req'd.: NIA Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard detail FSD1-40. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #:164 HOT WATER DISPENSER Quantity: Three(3) Manufacturer: Bunn Model No.: HW2 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 2 Gallon Utilities Req'd.: 120W1 Ph, CW, IW Fumish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Furnish Easy Clear water filter system. 2. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #165: ICED TEA BREWER/ DISPENSER Quantity: Three (3) Manufacturer. Bunn Model No.: T3 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Single Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph, CW 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Pemul Set 11400-66 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 C VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Furnish Easy Clear water filter system. 2. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #166: COFFEE BREWER/ DISPENSER Quantity: Three (3) Manufacturer: Fetco Model No.: C62036 Specifier ID No.: `7022 Pertinent Data: With Six (6) Insulated Dispensers Utilities Req'd.: 120/208V 3Ph, CW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Furnish Easy Clear water filter system. 2. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #167: MICROWAVE OVEN Quantity: Manufacturer: Model No.: Specifier ID No.: Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: One (1) Amana RFS12MPS *T022 Pre-Set And Programmable Touch Control Panel 120V 1Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #168: HAND SINK ASSEMBLY Quantity: Seven (7) Manufacturer. Eagle Model No.: HSA-10-FDPEE Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Automatic, Hands-Free Utilities Req'd.: HW & CW, Waste Furnish and set in place per manufacturers standard specifications and the following: 1. Side splashes ITEM #169: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #170: SPARE NUMBER 05.12-06 Summary Permit Set FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-67 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 1J ITEM #171: ROOM SERVICE TABLE Quantity: Three (3) Manufacturer: Forbes Model No.: 4959 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Bi -Fold Oval Portable Room Service Table Utilities Req'd.: NIA Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. ITEM #172: ICE MACHINE FLAKER WITH FILTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Manitowoc Model No.: QF-0806A Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Self-Contained Utilities Req'd.: V -Ph, CW, IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Install ice maker on S-570 with appropriate bin top. Mount bin on 6' adjustable stainless steel legs. 2. Furnish one (1) Everpure AR-4000 water filter assembly, for installation by the Plumbing Division. Coordinate installation location to insure easy access for cartridge replacement and servicing, and in compliance with local codes. 3. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #173: FLOOR TROUGH Quantity: One(1) Manufacturer. IMC Teddy Model No.: SFT-12-96 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Configuration, Anti-Slip Utilities Req'd.: Waste Furnish as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: Heavy-duty non-slip subway grating. ITEM #174: ICE MACHINE WITH BIN AND FILTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Follett and Manitowoc Model No.: Manitowoc QY-1304A Follet Model 1TS135OG-60 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Remote, Two Ice Caddies Utilities Req'd.: V -Ph, CW, IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Install ice maker on S-970 with appropriate bin top. Mount bin on 6" adjustable stainless steel legs. 05.12{16 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-68 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 2. Furnish one (1) Everpure AR-4000 water filter assembly, for installation by the Plumbing Division. Coordinate installation location to insure easy access for cartridge replacement and servicing, and in compliance with local codes. 3. Follett ice storage and transport system ITS1350G-60, two additional carts with totes. 4. Coordinate installation with planned ceiling height. 5. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #175: WALL SHELF Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plan For Length And Configuration. Utilities Req'd.: NIA Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard detail FSD12-1 one shelf. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #176: JANITORS SINK ASSEMBLY W1 FAUCET Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Eagle Group Model No.: F1916 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans And Details For Length, Width And Configuration. Utilities Req'd.: Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: T&S #665 faucet (or Fisher equal) with hose assembly. (312690) 4-Pole mop holder. (321561) ITEM #177: ROOM SERVICE TABLE Quantity: Manufacturer: Model No.: Specifier ID No.. Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: Seventeen (17) Forbes 4959 'T022 Bi -Fold Oval Portable Room Service Table NIA Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. ITEM #178: Quantity: Manufacturer: Model No.: 05.12A Summary Permit Set ROOM SERVICE HOT BOX Ten (10) Forbes 6271 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-69 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Heated Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #179: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #180: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #181: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #182: LINEN CABINET Quantity: One (1) - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Millwork Division. ITEM #183: PASTRY WALK-IN FREEZER Quantity: One (1) Assembly Manufacturer: Kolpak Model No.: Prefabricated Modular Panels Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans for Size and Configuration Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph, IW Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Walk-in box to be prefabricated of modular design and construction. 2. Panels to be interchangeable, with U.L. Labeled, CFC free urethane insulation sandwiched between interior and exterior metal surfaces, with an overall thickness of 4 inches. Edges of panels to be high-density urethane "tongue and groove", with cam-lock assemblies, set-in-place at time of fabrication. The access ports are to be on the interior, for inside assembly of the walk-in, and shall be covered with "snap caps". Interior and exterior finishes are to be provided per manufacturer's drawings in CD documents. Floor panels to have 0.100" aluminum diamond treadplate high traffic reinforced heavy duty finished floor surface over FRP-structurally - reinforced insulated panels. Floor to be set into G.C. prepared 4' nominal slab recess. 3. Entrance door(s) and frame(s) as indicated on manufacturer's drawings. Door(s) to be hinged as shown on plans. The door to be flush type, constructed and insulated in the same manner as the wall panels, and finished inside and out, to match adjacent walls. Door and door section to be equipped with the following: a. Magnetic gasket, hydraulic piston driven door closer and cam lift hinges. Hardware to have provisions for locking and a safety release to prevent entrapment of personnel within the box. b. Provide door section with an incandescent type vapor-proof light with clear globe and heavy-duty 100-watt dear bulb, pilot light switch and conduit between switch box and outlet box. All conduit and wiring to be concealed, where possible. C. Door to be complete with reinforced HD vinyl strip doors. d. Unheated pressure relief port (air-vent). e. Audio-visual alarm to be included in door section, with remote sensor and adjustable alarm points to indicate the temperature inside, and sound an alarm when the temperature is unsatisfactory. The alarm shall have a mute switch to silence the audible alarm and a reset button to reset the alarm once the temperature 05.12-06 FOODSERACE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-70 J J PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT conditions are satisfactory, f. 12 gauge stainless steel threshold fully sealing finished floor of kitchen space to interior floor of refrigerated box 4. Extra vapor-proof fluorescent light fixtures, number as indicated on manufacturer's drawings complete with heavy duty lamps, field installation by the Electrical Division. All light fixtures to be U.L. Listed for use inside walk-in cooler or freezer. All conduit and wiring is to be concealed, where possible. 5. Matching finish trim strips, from floor to ceiling, at all exposed vertical edges, corners, and joints to building wall(s). Contractor to verify dimensions. 6. Matching finish closure panels from top of walk-in to finished ceiling, on exposed sides. Contractor to verify dimensions. 7. Walk-in to be installed in 4" deep building floor recess. Installing Contractor to verify levelness of recess/floor, and provide sand and shims as necessary for a completely level walk-in floor. 8. Unit and all components to be N.S.F. Approved, U.L. and U.L. Classified with a flame spread of 25 or less, and meet the April 1, 1998 requirements of N.S.F. Standard #7. 9. For any installation requiring additional ceiling support, provide self-supporting ceiling structural framework over the top of the walk-in compartment(s), and supported by the walk-in walls. 10. Verify all dimensions with building conditions for proper fit. Provide maximum size possible to fit available space, using standard panels. ITEM #184: STORAGE SHELVING Quantity: Seven (7) Manufacturer: InterMetro Industries Model No.: Metroseal III (Polymer) Specifier ID No.: 'T022 Pertinent Data: 86" High With Five Tiers, Wire Shelving Utilities Req'd.: N/A Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Length, width and configuration per plan and verified room dimensions. 2. Each section to be free standing with four legs, first shelf to start at 10" AFF. ITEM #185: EVAPORATOR COIL Quantity: Lot Manufacturer. Kairak Model No.: ADT120 Specifier ID No.: '7022 Pertinent Data: Air Cooled Utilities Req'd.: Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: Drain per P.C., heat trace furnished and installed by KEC. ITEM #186: PASTRY WALK-IN COOLER Quantity: One (1) Assembly Manufacturer: Kolpak Model No.: Prefabricated Modular Panels Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans for Size and Configuration 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-71 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph, IW Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: Walk-in box to be prefabricated of modular design and construction. Panels to be interchangeable, with U.L. Labeled, CFC free urethane insulation sandwiched between interior and exterior metal surfaces, with an overall thickness of 4 inches. Edges of panels to be high-density urethane "tongue and groove", with cam-lock assemblies, set-in-place at time of fabrication. The access ports are to be on the interior, for inside assembly of the walk-in, and shall be covered with "snap caps". Interior and exterior finishes are to be provided per manufacturer's drawings in CD documents. Floor panels to have 0.100" aluminum diamond treadplate high traffic reinforced heavy duty finished floor surface over FRP-structurally - reinforced insulated panels. Floor to be set into G.C. prepared 4' nominal slab recess. Entrance door(s) and frame(s) as indicated on manufacturer's drawings. Door(s) to be hinged as shown on plans. The door to be flush type, constructed and insulated in the same manner as the wall panels, and finished inside and out, to match adjacent walls. Door and door section to be equipped with the following: a. Magnetic gasket, hydraulic piston driven door closer and cam lift hinges. Hardware to have provisions for locking and a safety release to prevent entrapment of personnel within the box. b. Provide door section with an incandescent type vapor-proof light with clear globe and heavy-duty 100-watt clear bulb, pilot light switch and conduit between switch box and outlet box. All conduit and wiring to be concealed, where possible. C. Door to be complete with reinforced HD vinyl strip doors. d. Unheated pressure relief port (air-vent). e. Audio-visual alarm to be included in door section, with remote sensor and adjustable alarm points to indicate the temperature inside, and sound an alarm when the temperature is unsatisfactory. The alarm shall have a mute switch to silence the audible alarm and a reset button to reset the alarm once the temperature conditions are satisfactory. f. 12 gauge stainless steel threshold fully sealing finished floor of kitchen space to interior floor of refrigerated box. 4. Extra vapor-proof fluorescent light fixtures, number as indicated on manufacturer's drawings complete with heavy duty lamps, field installation by the Electrical Division. All light fixtures to be U.L. Listed for use inside walk-in cooler or freezer. All conduit and wiring is to be concealed, where possible. 5. Matching finish trim strips, from floor to ceiling, at all exposed vertical edges, comers, and joints to building wall(s). Contractor to verify dimensions. 6. Matching finish closure panels from top of walk-in to finished ceiling, on exposed sides. Contractor to verify dimensions. 7. Walk-in to be installed in 4" deep building floor recess. Installing Contractor to verify levelness of recess/floor, and provide sand and shims as necessary for a completely level walk-in floor. 8. Unit and all components to be N.S.F. Approved, U.L. and U.L. Classified with a flame spread of 25 or less, and meet the April 1, 1998 requirements of N.S.F. Standard #7. 9. For any installation requiring additional ceiling support, provide self-supporting ceiling structural framework over the top of the walk-in compartment(s), and supported by the walk-in walls. 10. Verify all dimensions with building conditions for proper fit. Provide maximum size possible to fit available space, using standard panels. ITEM #187: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #188: EVAPORATOR COIL Quantity: Lot Manufacturer. Kairak Model No.: LET120 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Air Cooled Utilities Req'd.: 05-12.06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Perm ft Set 11400 - 72 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 Arl- VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Drain per P.C., heat trace fumished and installed by KEC. ITEM #189: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #190: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #191: MOBILE PAN RACK CART Quantity: Four (4) Manufacturer: Servolift or Equal Model No.: RIU69-202-S Specifier ID No.: 'T022 Pertinent Data: Open, Universal Angle Slides Utilities Req'd.: N/A Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Comer bumpers. ITEM #192: STORAGE SHELVING Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: InterMetro Industries Model No.: Metroseal III (Polymer) Specifier ID No.: 'T022 Pertinent Data: 86" High With Five Tiers, Wire Shelving Utilities Req'd.: N/A Furnish and set in place per manufacturers standard specifications and the following: 1. Length, width and configuration per plan and verified room dimensions. 2. Each section to be free standing with four legs, first shelf to start at 10" AFF. ITEM #193: WALL SHELF Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: 'T022 Pertinent Data: Plan For Length And Configuration. Utilities Req'd.: N/A Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard detail FSD12-1 one shelf. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and 05.12-06 FOODSERACE EQUIPMENT Summary Pertnk Set 11400-73 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #194: POT SINK ASSEMBLY Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plan For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: HW & CW, IW Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard details; FSD1-4B, FSD1-5C, FSD1-7, FSD1-8, FSD1-10, FSD1-13, FSD1-14, FSD3-1, FSD3-3, FSD3-4 and FSD3-5. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to any and all fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Integral sinks to have two (2) T&S #13-0231 (or Fisher equal) splash mount faucets (14" spout) with wrist handles and three (3) rotary waste assemblies. ITEM #195: WALL SHELF Quantity: Manufacturer: Model No.: Specifier ID No.: Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: One (1) Fabricated Stainless Steel *T022 Plan For Length And Configuration. N/A Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard detail FSD12-1 one shelf. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #196: WORK TABLE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: HW & CW, IW Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard details; FSD1-1B, FSD1-5A, FSD1-7, FSD1-8, FSD1-10, FSD1-13, FSD1-15, FSD2-1 and FSD2-7. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to-these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. One (1) T&S #B-0221-CC (or Fisher equal) deck mount faucet (12" spout) with wrist handles and one (1) rotary waste assembly. ITEM #197: SILVER BURNISHER 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPb1ENT Summary Permit Set 11400-74 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Blakeslee Model No.: BB-1224 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: 115V/1/60 Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. ITEM #198: MOBILE PAN RACK CART Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Servolift Model No.: RIU69-202-S Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Open, Universal Angle Slides Utilities Req'd.: N/A Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Comer bumpers. ITEM #199: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #200: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #201: CLEAN DISH TABLE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No. Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd.: N/A Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard details; FSD1-413, FSD1-5C, FSD1-7, FSD1-10, FSD4-2 and FSD4-9. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #202: WALL SHELF Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Plan For Length And Configuration. Utilities Req'd.: N/A 05.12-06 FOODSERWE EQUIPMENT Summary Perm ft Set 11400-75 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard detail FSD12-1 one shelf. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #203: BOOSTER HEATER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Hatco Model No.: S-45 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Floor Mount Utilities Req'd: 48OV, 3Ph, HW, IW Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Shock absorber. 2. All stainless steel body, base, and (legs OR slide brackets). 3. Brass pressure reducing valve with bypass. 4. Floor mounting hardware. 5. Adjustable stainless steel legs. 6. 600 rise, verify MEP. 7. Blended phosphate water treatment system. ITEM #204: DISH MACHINE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Stero Model No.: SCT-76S Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Single Tank, Single Rack, Flanged Feet Utilities Req'd.: 280/60/3, HW & CW, IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Electric tank heat. 2. Shock arrestor and pressure reducing valve kit 3. Drain water-tempering kit. 4. Hot water sanitizing. 5. Flanged feet. 6. Kit 5, a complete plumbing system installed that contains a pressure reducing valve, shock arrester and a flow pressure gauge. 7. Auto shutdown device starts the machine when racks enter and shuts the unit off if no racks are being washed. 8. Common drain provides a single 2inch waste connection. 9. Stainless Steel front enclosure panel. 10. Rack limit switch. ITEM #205: CONDENSATE EXHAUST HOOD ASSEMBLY Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No. Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 05-12-06 Summary Pemut Set FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-76 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd.: N/A Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard detail FSD15-1. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. EC to inter wire exhaust hood fan to dishwasher on/off switch. ITEM #206: WALL FLASHING Quantity: Lot Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plan For Size And Configuration Utilities Req'd: N/A Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard detail FSD1-39. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Cover wall behind (and adjacent to) the cooking equipment, from the finished floor to the bottom of the exhaust hood, the length (and width) of the exhaust hood. ITEM #207: DISPOSER WITH CONTROL Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Hammerall Model No.: HI-200 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 15" Cone Utilities Req'd: 480V 3Ph, CW, Waste Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Install assembly in Item #171, as shown on plans. 2. Switch CA 60SS 3PH, 208-230V configuration. 3. Remote switch mounting bracket. ITEM #208: SOILED DISH TABLE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length, Width And Configuration, With Trough and Over Shelving Utilities Req'd.: HW & CW, 3" DW Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 0512-06 FOODSEMACE EQUIPMENT Summary Pemdt Set 11400 - 77 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 1. Similar to standard details; FSD1-4A, FSD1-4B, FSD1-5C, FSD1-7, FSD1-10, FSD1-14, FSD4-2, FSD4-3 and FSD4-6. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. One (1) T&S #13-0133 with wrist handles (or Fisher equal) pre-rinse. Scrap sink to be complete with rack glides. 3. Provide rack turning radius assembly in comer of tabletop. Assembly to consist of 3/8" wide by 2' high curved stainless steel bar mounted on 3/8' diameter by 2" high stainless steel bar supports at 6' centers. Curved bar and supports to be fully welded and polished at each joint and to tabletop. Face of turning bar to have 1/4' thick replaceable low- friction polycarbonate slider material. Verify that loaded racks will turn comer with minimal assistance from operator. ITEM #209: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #210: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #211: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #212: FLATWARE SOAK SINK Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Eagle Group Model No.: MSS2424SC Specifier ID No.: 'T022 Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications: ITEM #213: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #214: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #215: QUEEN MARY CART Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Servolift or Equal Model No.: 1360-6ES-56 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Six Tier Shelves Utilities Req'd.: N/A Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. ITEM #216: REACH-IN FREEZER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traulsen & Co. Model No.: ALT132WUT-HHS 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-78 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Single Section, Casters Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. Door hinged as shown on plans. 3. Set of four (4) 6" high casters in lieu of legs. 4. Clear glass door in place of solid door. 5. Additional chrome plated shelves, two (2) each. 6. No. 2 Type tray slides to accommodate (1) 18"x26" sheet pans, adjustable to 2" O.C, bottom only. ITEM #217: DIPPER WELL Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fisher Faucets Model No.: 3041 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: CW, DW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. ITEM #218: MARBLE TOP WORK TABLE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: 1" Marble Top/Stainless Steel Frame Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard details; FSD1-5A, FSD1-7, FSD1-8, FSD1-10 (3 rows) and FSD2-13. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #219: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #220: ISSUE WINDOW AND LEDGE Quantity: One (1) - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By General Contractor. ITEM #221: Quantity: Manufacturer. Model No.: 05-12.06 Summary Perm ft Set REFRIGERATED COLD PAN One (1) Delfield N8144-FA FOODSERVICE EQUIPWENT 11400-79 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Remote, WaterCooled Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph, IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. Install in Item # 218 counter, as shown on plans. 3. Contractor to verify and coordinate ventilation requirements with counter fabricator. ITEM #222: P.O.S. PRINTER Quantity: Lot - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Owner/Operator. ITEM #223: P.O.S. SYSTEM Quantity: Lot - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Owner/Operator. ITEM #224: REACH-IN REFRIGERATOR Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Traulsen & Co. Model No.: AHT132WUT-HHS Specifier ID No.: *T022 1J Pertinent Data: Single Section, Self-Contained, WaterCooled, Reach-In, Glass door Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. Door hinged as shown on plans. 3. Set of four (4) 6" high casters in lieu of legs. 4. Clear glass door in place of one or more solid door. 5. Additional chrome plated shelves, two (2) each. 6. No. 2 Type tray slides to accommodate (1) 18"x26" sheet pans, adjustable to 2" O.C, bottom only. ITEM #225: WALL SHELF Quantity: One(1) Manufacturer. Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Plan For Length And Configuration. Utilities Req'd.: WA Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard detail FSD12-1 one shelf. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-80 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEM #226: UNDER COUNTER REFRIGERATOR Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Kairak, Inc. Model No.: UCR-CUSTOM Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Remote Refrigeration, Two Section Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. Tray slides. 3. Door lock. ITEM #227: INDUCTION BURNER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Spring USA Model No.: SR-12613-1 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Drop-In Utilities Req'd.: 2080 PH Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: Install in Item # 228 Counter, as shown on plans. ITEM #228: WORK COUNTER WITH SINKS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd.: HW & CW, IW Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard details; FSD1-1 B, FSD1-5A, FSD1-7, FSD1-10, FSD5-1 and FSD5-2. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. One (1) T&S #B-0221-CC (or Fisher equal) deck mount faucet (12" spout) with wrist handles and one (1) rotary waste assembly. ITEM #229: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #230: SPARE NUMBER 05-12-06 Summary Permit Set FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-81 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEM #231: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #232: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #233 MOBILE PROOFER CABINET Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Doyon Model No.: E2330 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 20 Pans Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph, CW, IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Doors hinged as shown on plans. 2. Heavy-duty cord and plug. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #234: FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Ansul Model No.: R-102 Ansulex Liquid Fire Suppressant Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Automatic and Manual Utilities Req'd: 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Surface appliance nozzles, hood and duct protection nozzles in Exhaust Hood(s)Nenfilator(s), Item #237. 2. Manual pull station and micro-switches with two sets of normally open and two sets of normally closed contact points. 3. All exposed pipe and fittings to be chrome plated or stainless steel. 4. Six-month and twelve-month inspections, servicing, and replacement of components as per N.F.P.A.-96, latest edition. 5. All components and labor necessary for completely installed system in accordance with manufacturer's listings and instructions, U.L. Standard 300, UL Standard 1254, NFPA-17A, NFPA-96, and all applicable local codes, standards, and regulations. 6. Components inside exhaust hood(s)/ventilator to be installed at hood manufacturer's shop during fabrication. 7. Provide with automatic mechanical gas shut-off valves (not electric solenoid valves) for equipment below exhaust hood/ventilator. Coordinate size and installation with Plumbing Division. 8. Electrical Division to provide shunt trip breakers at main power panel, or disconnects, as designated by the Electrical Engineer; interconnected with micro-switch at fire system control panel, for all electricity in and under exhaust hood/ventilator. Shunt trips/disconnects to accomplish shut off of electricity in event of fire system activation. ITEM #235: WALL SHELF Quantity: Two(2) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: SeePlan For Length And Configuration. Utilities Req'd.: N/A 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-82 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard detail FSD12-1 one shelf. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #236: DECK OVEN Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Doyon Model No.: 3TCA Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Electric, Three Deck Capacity with Steam Injection Utilities Req'd.: (3)208V, 3PH 19.5KW,1/2' Water inlet, 112" drain Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Delete top lid. 2. Water connection required for each. ITEM #237: EXHAUST HOOD ASSEMBLY Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Halton Model No.: KVC Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: With Make-Up Air Utilities Req'd: 120V 1Ph Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Canopy sized per manufacturer's drawings in CD set, includes make-up air plenum. 2. 18 Gauge type 304 stainless steel, including any exposed back. 3. External welded construction in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 96. All welds to be ground and polished. 4. U.L. Classified, removable, stainless steel cyclonic grease extractors. 5. Stainless steel, removable grease can. 6. Sloped grease trough, full length below filters to grease can. 7. Hangers, supports and miscellaneous accessories as required for installation. 8. Air space at wall to accommodate requirements of the latest edition of NFPA 96 clearance to combustibles. 9. All welded duct collar, collars to be field cut. 10. Pre-piping for hood fire suppression system. 11. Final connections to hood duct collar by the Mechanical Division. 12. Hood construction and components to be UL and NSF listed. 13. Mounting height of bottom edge of hood to be 6'-6' above finished floor (minimum and normal) to 7'-0' above finished floor maximum. 14. Recessed fluorescent light fixtures and tubes, U.L. listed for use in commercial cooking hoods, NSF approved. 15. Verify and coordinate all dimensions, and duct requirements and locations with site conditions and Mechanical Division. 16. See ventilation drawing sheet for general size and location of duct. 17. If not installed against the finished ceiling, provide matching stainless steel closure panels above hood to finished ceiling, to conceal duct and hood fire suppression system piping; verify height. If finished ceiling is more than 24" above the top of the hood, or ceiling is open type ceiling, verify requirement for closure panels with Architect/Interior Designer. 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPWNT Summary Permit Set 11400-83 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEM #238: INGREDIENT BIN Quantity: Five (5) Manufacturer: Wilder Model No.: 217SW/P17NF Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: Polymer liner. ITEM #239: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #240: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #241: BAKER'S TABLE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: 2" Maple Top/Stainless Steel Frame, Open Legs Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard details; FSD1-313, FSD1-7, FSD1-8, FSD1-10 (3 rows) and FSD2-11. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #242: FIXED OVERSHELF Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: N/A Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard detail FSD12-5. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Assembly to be mounted to Item #-241 and Item#245, as shown on plans. ITEM #243: 40 QUART MIXER 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-84 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Hobart Model No.: D-340 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 40 Qt. With Hub Attachment Utilities Req'd: 208V 3Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Provide with one (1) stainless steel 40 quart bowl, one (1) bowl guard, one (1) "B' beater, one (1) "D" wire loop whip, one (1) "ED" dough arm, one (1) "P" Pastry Knife, one (1) heavy duty wire whip and 20 quart Accessories. 2. Heavy-duty cord and plug. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #244: CEILING-HUNG POT RACK Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Ceiling Mounted/See Plan For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd.: N/A Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard detail FSD14-3. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Contractor to provide and install structural reinforcing and mounting framework in the ceiling, as shown on the standard detail. ITEM #245: BAKER'S TABLE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: 2'Maple Top/Stainless Steel Frame, Open Legs Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard details; FSD1-313, FSD1-7, FSD1-8, FSD1-10 (3 rows) and FSD2-11. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #246: FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Ansul Model No.: R-102 Ansulex Liquid Fire Suppressant Specifier ID No.: *T022 05.12-08 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-85 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Pertinent Data: Automatic and Manual Utilities Req'd: 120V 1Ph Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Surface appliance nozzles, hood and duct protection nozzles in Exhaust Hood(s)/Ventilator(s), Item #247. 2. Manual pull station and micro-switches with two sets of normally open and two sets of normally closed contact points. 3. All exposed pipe and fittings to be chrome plated or stainless steel. 4. Six-month and twelve-month inspections, servicing, and replacement of components as per N.F.P.A.-96, latest edition. 5. All components and labor necessary for completely installed system in accordance with manufacturer's listings and instructions, U.L. Standard 300, UL Standard 1254, NFPA-17A, NFPA-96, and all applicable local codes, standards, and regulations. 6. Components inside exhaust hood(s)/ventilator to be installed at hood manufacturer's shop during fabrication. 7. Provide with automatic mechanical gas shut-off valves (not electric solenoid valves) for equipment below exhaust hood/ventilator. Coordinate size and installation with Plumbing Division. 8. Electrical Division to provide shunt trip breakers at main power panel, or disconnects, as designated by the Electrical Engineer; interconnected with micro-switch at fire system control panel, for all electricity in and under exhaust hood/ventilator. Shunt trips/disconnects to accomplish shut off of electricity in event of fire system activation. ITEM #247: EXHAUST HOOD ASSEMBLY Quantity: Manufacturer: Model No.: Specifier ID No.: Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd: One (1) Halton KVC *T022 With Make-Up Air, Integrated front face supply, 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Canopy sized per manufacturer's drawings in CD set, includes make-up air plenum. 2. 18 Gauge type 304 stainless steel, including any exposed back. 3. External welded construction in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 96. All welds to be ground and polished. 4. U.L. Classified, removable, stainless steel cyclonic grease extractors. 5. Stainless steel, removable grease can. 6. Sloped grease trough, full length below filters to grease can. 7. Hangers, supports and miscellaneous accessories as required for installation. 8. Air space at wall to accommodate requirements of the latest edition of NFPA 96 clearance to combustibles. 9. All welded duct collar, collars to be field cut. 10. Pre-piping for hood fire suppression system. 11. Final connections to hood duct collar by the Mechanical Division. 12. Hood construction and components to be UL and NSF listed. 13. Mounting height of bottom edge of hood to be 6'-6" above finished flow (minimum and normal) to 7'-0" above finished floor maximum. 14. Recessed fluorescent light fixtures and tubes, U.L. listed for use in commercial cooking hoods, NSF approved. 15. Verify and coordinate all dimensions, and duct requirements and locations with site conditions and Mechanical Division. 16. See ventilation drawing sheet for general size and location of duct. 17. If not installed against the finished ceiling, provide matching stainless steel closure panels above hood to finished ceiling, to conceal duct and hood fire suppression system piping; verify height. If finished ceiling is more than 24" above the top of the hood, or ceiling is open type ceiling, verify requirement for closure panels with Architect/Interior Designer. ITEM #248: CONVECTION OVEN 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400 - 86 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Quantity: One (1) Assembly Manufacturer: Garland Model No.: MCO-E-5125 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Counter Model Utilities Req'd.: 208V11 PH 7.5 KW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Extra oven racks. 2. Stainless steel main back. 3. Heavy-duty cord and plug. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #249: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #250: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #251: CONVEYOR TOASTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: APWIWyott Model No.: BT-15-2 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Rotary Utilities Req'd.: 208V119.5 AMP Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. 4" Adjustable legs. ITEM #252: WORK COUNTER WITH SINKS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd.: Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard details; FSD1-1B, FSD1-5A, FSD1-7, FSD1-10, and FSD5-1. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #253: REFRIGERATED DRAWER ASSEMBLY Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-87 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plan For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph, IW Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard details; FSD1-3C, FSD1-19, FSD1-20, FSD1-21, FSD1-24, FSD1-26, FSD5-3 and FSD5-4. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Undercounter refrigerated drawers to have compatible coil(s) with thermo-expansion valve and a Copelaweld 120V 1 Ph (As required) HP, med-temp, air-cooled condensing unit complete with air drier, sight glass, pressure and temp controls, interconnecting tubing, refrigerant and any accessories necessary for a completely functional system for a box temperature of +35 to +40 degrees F., with a 15 degree T.D. 3. Compressor compartment to have hinged louvered access panels, dividers and additional fan for proper ventilation. Provide 1" minimum insulation on top and sides of compressor compartment to prevent the transfer of heat. 4. Provide drawers with 4" deep, full size stainless steel pans. 5. Provide top opening with 4" deep stainless steel pans, dividers and removable stainless steel night cover. Verify the number, type and configuration of pans and dividers with the Owner/Operator. 6. Cooling of top insert pans and maintained temperature shall be in compliance with April 1, 1998 requirements of NSF Standard #7. ITEM #254: DROP IN HOT WELL Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Wells Model No.: MOD-100TD/AF Specifier ID No.: `T022 Pertinent Data: Single Well, Auto Fill,Drop-In Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph 1/2"CW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. Install in Item # 252 Counter, as shown on plans. ITEM #255: FIXED OVER SHELF ASSEMBLY Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: 'T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: N/A Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard detail FSD12-5. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Assembly to be mounted to Item #-255, as shown on plans. ITEM #256: HEATED DRAWER ASSEMBLY 1j 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400- n PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Alto-Sham Model No.: 500-2DN Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Two Drawer, Built-in Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: Install in Item # 252 Counter, as shown on plans. ITEM #257: P.O.S PRINTER Quantity: One (1) - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Owner/ Operator. ITEM #258: Quantity: Manufacturer: Model No.: Specifier ID No. Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: HEATED CABINET One (1) Alto-Shaam 750-TH-11 *T022 Heated, Portable 120V 1Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. Casters 5' 3. Stainless steel flat wire racks. ITEM #259: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #260: MODULAR CHAR BROILER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Jade Range Model No.: JMRH-48B Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Modular, Range Match Utilities Req'd.: Gas Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Verify altitude and type of gas. 2. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 3. 3/4" Rear gas connection. Cap and cover both ends of front manifold. 4. Heavy-duty casters, front with brakes. 5. Provide stainless steel high (back riser, single plate shelf, double plate shelf). 6. One (1) Dormont #1675KIT2S-48 commercial use A.G.A. and N.S.F. approved poly coated flexible stainless steel gas hose assembly 48" long, with swivel links on both ends, quick disconnect assembly on one end, and with 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400 - 89 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT installation/restraining kit. Install the restraining device and provide instructions and coordination for the Plumbing Division's use in installing the hose components. 7. Common plate shelf. 8. Gas pressure regulator. 9. Stainless steel high riser. ITEM #261: REFRIGERATED RAIL TABLE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Kairak Model No.: KRP-96R Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Remote Refrigeration Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Double-depth pan openings. 2. Tray slides,1 cavity. 3. 3 drawer MOD. 4. Richlite cutting board. 5. Door/drawer locks. ITEM #262: REACH-IN REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Traulsen & Co. Model No.: ADT132WUT Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Single Section, Self-Contained, Air-Cooled, Reach-In, Glass doors Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. Door hinged as shown on plans. 3. Set of four (4) 6" high casters in lieu of legs. 4. Clear glass door in place of solid doors. 5. No. 2 Type Tray slides to accommodate (1) 18"x26" sheet pans adjustable to 2" 0. C. ITEM #263: FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Ansul Model No.: R-102 Ansulex Liquid Fire Suppressant Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Automatic and Manual Utilities Req'd: 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Surface appliance nozzles, hood and duct protection nozzles in Exhaust Hood(s)Nentilator(s), Item #273. 2. Manual pull station and micro-switches with two sets of normally open and two sets of normally closed contact points. 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-90 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 3. All exposed pipe and fittings to be chrome plated or stainless steel. 4. Six-month and twelve-month inspections, servicing, and replacement of components as per N.F.P.A.-96, latest edition. 5. All components and labor necessary for completely installed system in accordance with manufacturer's listings and instructions, U.L. Standard 300, UL Standard 1254, NFPA-17A, NFPA-96, and all applicable local codes, standards, and regulations. 6. Components inside exhaust hood(s)/ventilator to be installed at hood manufacturers shop during fabrication. 7. Provide with automatic mechanical gas shut-off valves (not electric solenoid valves) for equipment below exhaust hood/ventilator. Coordinate size and installation with Plumbing Division. 8. Electrical Division to provide shunt trip breakers at main power panel, or disconnects, as designated by the Electrical Engineer, interconnected with micro-switch at fire system control panel, for all electricity in and under exhaust hood/ventilator. Shunt trips/disconnects to accomplish shut off of electricity in event of fire system activation. ITEM #264: SPREADER CABINET Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Jade Range Model No.: JMPR-18 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Range Match Utilities Req'd.: N/A Furnish and set in place per manufacturers standard specifications and the following: 1. Spreader cabinet to be installed as shown on plans. 2. Heavy-duty casters, front with brakes. 3. Provide stainless steel high back riser, single plate shelf, double plate shelf. 4. Mount on equipment stand. ITEM #265: REFRIGERATED EQUIPMENT STAND Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: JADE Model No.: JRLH-04S-T-84 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: 120 V, 12.6 Amps. Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: 1. HD casters, two locking. 2. Restraining kit and securing device. 3. Provide heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 4. 6" casters, front locking. ITEM #266: SIX BURNER RANGE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Jade Model No.: JTRH-6-36C Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 6 Open Burners, Con base. Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph, Gas 05.12-06 FOWSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-91 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Verify altitude and type of gas. 2. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 3. 314" Rear gas connection. Cap and cover both ends of front manifold. 4. Heavy-duty casters, front with brakes. 5. Provide stainless steel high back riser, single tubular plate shelf. 6. Provide heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 7. One (1) Dormont #1675KIT2S-48 commercial use A.G.A. and local code approved poly coated flexible stainless steel gas hose assembly 48" long, with swivel links on both ends, quick disconnect assembly on one end, and with installationlrestraining kit. Install the restraining device and provide instructions and coordination for the Plumbing Division's use in installing the hose components. 8. Stainless steel sides. 9. Cap and cover manifold left and right. 10. 6" casters, front locking. ITEM #267: Quantity: Manufacturer: Model No.: Specifier ID No.: Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: SALAMANDER One (1) Jade JSB-36RM *T022 Mounted Gas Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Verify altitude and type of gas. 2. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 3. Gas interconnected with range below. 4. Mount to flue riser assembly as specified with Item #266. ITEM #268: FRENCH HOT TOP RANGE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Jade Model No.: JTRH-2FHT-36C Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Two (2) French Tops w/ Convection Oven Base Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph, Gas Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Verify altitude and type of gas. 2. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 3. 3/4" Rear gas connection. Cap and cover both ends of front manifold left and right. 4. Heavy-duty casters6", front with brakes. 5. Provide stainless steel high back riser, single tubular plate shelf. 6. Provide heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 7. One (1) Dormont #1675KIT2S-48 commercial use A.G.A. and local code approved poly coated flexible stainless steel gas hose assembly 48" long, with swivel links on both ends, quick disconnect assembly on one end, and with installation/restraining kit. Install the restraining device and provide instructions and coordination for the Plumbing 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-92 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Division's use in installing the hose components. ITEM #269: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #270: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #271: CHEESE MELTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Jade Model No.: JCM-72 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Wall Mount and Stainless Steel Top Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph, Gas Furnish and set in place per manufacturers standard specifications and the following: 1. Verify altitude and type of gas. 2. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 3. Wall mounted. ITEM #272: SEVEN BURNER STEP-UP RANGE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Jade Model No.: JTRHE4-3-36C Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Convection Oven Base Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph, Gas Furnish and set in place per manufacturers standard specifications and the following: 1. Verify altitude and type of gas. 2. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 3. 3/4" Rear gas connection. Cap and cover both ends of front manifold (Left and Right). 4. Heavy-duty casters 6", front with brakes. 5. Provide stainless steel high back riser, single tubular plate shelf. 6. Provide heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 7. One (1) Dormont #1675KIT2S-48 commercial use A.G.A. and local code approved poly coated flexible stainless steel gas hose assembly 48' long, with swivel links on both ends, quick disconnect assembly on one end, and with installation/restraining kit. Install the restraining device and provide instructions and coordination for the Plumbing Division's use in installing the hose components. ITEM #273: EXHAUST HOOD ASSEMBLY Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Halton Model No.: KVC Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: With Make-Up Air, Integrated front face supply. 05.12-06 Summary Permft Set FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-93 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Utilities Req'd: 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Canopy sized per manufacturer's drawings in CD set, includes make-up air plenum. 2. 18 Gauge type 304 stainless steel, including any exposed back. 3. External welded construction in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 96. All welds to be ground and polished. 4. U.L. Classified, removable, stainless steel cyclonic grease extractors. 5. Stainless steel, removable grease can. 6. Sloped grease trough, full length below filters to grease can. 7. Hangers, supports and miscellaneous accessories as required for installation. 8. Air space at wall to accommodate requirements of the latest edition of NFPA 96 clearance to combustibles. 9. All welded duct collar, collars to be field cut. 10. Pre-piping for hood fire suppression system. 11. Final connections to hood duct collar by the Mechanical Division. 12. Hood construction and components to be UL and NSF listed. 13. Mounting height of bottom edge of hood to be 6'-6" above finished floor (minimum and normal) to T-0" above finished floor maximum. 14. Recessed fluorescent light fixtures and tubes, U.L. listed for use in commercial cooking hoods, NSF approved. 15. Verify and coordinate all dimensions, and duct requirements and locations with site conditions and Mechanical Division. 16. See ventilation drawing sheet for general size and location of duct. 17. If not installed against the finished ceiling, provide matching stainless steel closure panels above hood to finished ceiling, to conceal duct and hood fire suppression system piping; verify height. If finished ceiling is more than 24" above the top of the hood, or ceiling is open type ceiling, verify requirement for closure panels with Architect/interior Designer. ITEM #274: FRYER BATTERY Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Ultra Fryer Model No.: ZRT Express 75 VERIFY WITH CUTS Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Floor Fryer, With Filter, Mobile. Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph, Gas Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Verity altitude and type of gas. 2. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 3. Heavy-duty casters 6", front with brakes. 4. Sediment tray. 5. One (1) Dormont #16100KIT2S-48 commercial use A.G.A. and N.S.F. Approved poly coated flexible stainless steel gas hose assembly 48" long, with swivel links on both ends, quick disconnect assembly on one end, and with installation/restraining kit Install the restraining device and provide instructions and coordination for the Plumbing division's use in installing the hose components. 6. Automatic vat cleaner and Ultra fryer self-contained filter. ITEM #275: SPREADER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Jade Model No.: JMPR-12 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 05-12.06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-94 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Utilities Req'd.: Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Spreader cabinet to be installed as shown on plans. 2. Cap and cover both ends of front manifold ( left and right). 3. Provide stainless steel high back riser, single tubular plate shelf.. ITEM #276: MODULAR CHAR BROILER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Jade Range Model No.: JMRMB-24 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Modular, Cabinet Base Utilities Req'd.: Gas Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Verify altitude and type of gas. 2. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 3. 3/4" Rear gas connection. Cap and cover both ends of front manifold. 4. Provide stainless steel high riser base. 5. One (1) Dormont #1675KIT2S-48 commercial use A.G.A. and N.S.F. Approved poly coated flexible stainless steel gas hose assembly 48" long, with swivel links on both ends, quick disconnect assembly on one end, and with installation/restraining kit. Install the restraining device and provide instructions and coordination for the Plumbing Division's use in installing the hose components. 6. 6" casters, front two locking. ITEM #277: SALAMANDER BROILER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Jade Model No.: JSB-36RM Specifier ID No.: 7022 Pertinent Data: Flue Riser Mounted Utilities Req'd.: Gas Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Verify altitude and type of gas. 2. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 3. Gas interconnected with range below. 4. Mount to flue riser assembly as specified with Item #278 5. Stainless steel top. ITEM #278: GRIDDLE RANGE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Jade Model No.: JTRH-36GT-36C Specifier ID No.: *T022 05-12-06 Summary Perm ft Set FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-95 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Pertinent Data: With Convection Oven Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph, Gas Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Verify altitude and type of gas. 2. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 3. 314' Rear gas connection. Cap and cover both ends of front manifold ( left and right). 4. Heavy-duty casters 6", front with brakes. 5. Provide stainless steel high riser for salamander. 6. Provide heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 7. One (1) Dormont #1675KIT2S-48 commercial use A.G.A. and local code approved poly coated flexible stainless steel gas hose assembly 48" long, with swivel links on both ends, quick disconnect assembly on one end, and with installation/restraining kit. Install the restraining device and provide instructions and coordination for the Plumbing Division's use in installing the hose components. ITEM #279: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #280: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #281: STAINLESS STEEL WALL FLASHING Quantity: Lot Manufacturer. Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plan For Size And Configuration Utilities Req'd: N/A Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard detail FSD1-39. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Cover wall behind (and adjacent to) the cooking equipment, from the finished floor to the bottom of the exhaust hood, the length (and width) of the exhaust hood. ITEM #282: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #283: WALL SHELF Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plan For Length And Configuration. Utilities Req'd.: N/A Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-96 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Similar to standard detail FSD12-1 (one shelf OR two shelves double-stacked). This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #284: FRENCH HOT TOP RANGE Quantity: Manufacturer: Model No.: Specifier ID No.: Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: Two (2) Jade JTRH-2FHT-36C *T022 Two (2) French Tops w/ Convection Oven Base 120V 1 Ph, Gas Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Verify altitude and type of gas. 2. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 3. 3/4" Rear gas connection. Cap and cover both ends of front manifold left and right. 4. Heavy-duty casters6", front with brakes. 5. Provide stainless steel tubular high shelf. 6. Provide heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 7. One (1) Dormont #1675KIT2S-48 commercial use A.G.A. and local code approved poly coated flexible stainless steel gas hose assembly 48' long, with swivel links on both ends, quick disconnect assembly on one end, and with installation/restraining kit. Install the restraining device and provide instructions and coordination for the Plumbing Division's use in installing the hose components. ITEM #285: SPREADER CABINET Quantity: One(1) Manufacturer: Jade Range Model No.: JTPR-12 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Range Match Utilities Req'd.: N/A Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. HD casters, front locking. 2. Provide stainless steel high riser, stainless steel tubular shelf. 3. Cap and cover both ends of front manifold left and right. ITEM #286: FRYER BATTERY WITH FILTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Ultra Fryer Systems Model No.: PAR3F001 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 2 Vats 14+14, With Filter Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph, Gas Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Perm ft Set 11400 - 97 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 1. Verify altitude and type of gas. 2. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 3. Heavy-duty casters 6", front with brakes. 4. Sediment tray. 5. One (1) Dormont #16100KIT2S-48 commercial use A.G.A. and N.S.F. Approved poly coated flexible stainless steel gas hose assembly 48" long, with swivel links on both ends, quick disconnect assembly on one end, and with installation/restraining kit. Install the restraining device and provide instructions and coordination for the Plumbing division's use in installing the hose components. 6. Central filtration system. 7. Controller type: default to manual reset. ITEM #287: TILTING FRY PAN Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Groen Model No.: NHFP-4 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 40 Gallon Utilities Req'd.: 115V 1 Ph 5 Amps, CW & HW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Hot and cold water fill faucet with 60" hose and mounting bracket. 2. Provide pan carrier. 3. Contractor to coordinate installation of tilting fry pan to ensure that pour pattern discharges into trough directly. 4. Manual tilt. 5. 2" tangent draw off valve. ITEM #288: FLOOR TROUGH WITH GRATE Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: IMC Teddy Model No.: ASFT Anti-Splash Trough With SGAS Subway Grating-ASFT-24-36 Specifier ID No.: 'T022 Pertinent Data: 24" W 36" L /See Plans For Configuration Utilities Req'd.: Waste Furnish as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Verify and coordinate dimensions with site conditions and General Contractor. 2. General Contractor to install. ITEM #289: HOSE REEL ASSEMBLY Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: 29610 Model No.: Fisher Faucets (or T&S Equal) Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: With Mixing Valve, Wall Mount Utilities Req'd.: Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400 - 98 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 1. Coordinate mounting with plumbing and general contractor. ITEM #290: REACH-IN REFRIGERATOR Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer. Traulsen & Co. Model No.: AHT132WUT-HHS Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Single Section, Self-Contained, Air-Cooled, Reach-In, Glass door Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. Door hinged as shown on plans. 3. Set of four (4) 6" high casters in lieu of legs. 4. Clear glass door in place of solit door. 5. Two (2) additional chrome plated shelves. ITEM #291: STEAM KETTLE Quantity. One (1) Manufacturer: Groen Model No.: DH/60 Specifier ID No.: 'T022 Pertinent Data: Tilting, Floor Mounted, 60 Gallon Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph, HW & CW, Gas Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Verify altitude and type of gas. 2. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 3. Hot and cold water fill faucet with swing spout and mounting bracket 4. 2' Tangent draw-off valve. 5. No. 51 Counterbalanced hinged cover. 6. Contractor to coordinate installation of kettle to ensure that draw-off and pour pattern discharges directly into trough. ITEM #292: EXHAUST HOOD ASSEMBLY Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Halton Model No.: KVC Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: With Make-Up Air Utilities Req'd: 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Canopy sized per manufacturer's drawings in CD set, includes make-up air plenum. 2. 18 Gauge type 304 stainless steel, including any exposed back. 3. External welded construction in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 96. All welds to be ground and polished. 0512-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400 - 99 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 4. U.L. Classified, removable, stainless steel cyclonic grease extractors. 5. Stainless steel, removable grease can. 6. Sloped grease trough, full length below filters to grease can. 7. Hangers, supports and miscellaneous accessories as required for installation. 8. Air space at wall to accommodate requirements of the latest edition of NFPA 96 clearance to combustibles. 9. All welded duct collar, collars to be field cut. 10. Pre-piping for hood fire suppression system. 11. Final connections to hood duct collar by the Mechanical Division. 12. Hood construction and components to be UL and NSF listed. 13. Mounting height of bottom edge of hood to be 6'-6" above finished floor (minimum and normal) to T-0" above finished floor maximum. 14. Recessed fluorescent light fixtures and tubes, U.L. listed for use in commercial cooking hoods, NSF approved. 15. Verify and coordinate all dimensions, and duct requirements and locations with site conditions and Mechanical Division. 16. See ventilation drawing sheet for general size and location of duct. 17. If not installed against the finished ceiling, provide matching stainless steel closure panels above hood to finished ceiling, to conceal duct and hood fire suppression system piping; verify height. If finished ceiling is more than 24" above the top of the hood, or ceiling is open type ceiling, verify requirement for closure panels with Architect/lntedor Designer. ITEM #293: COMBINATION OVEN Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Alto-Shaam Model No.: Single 6-10 /Stacked on 10-10 Gas Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Dual Stack with Filter Assembly Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph, HW & CW, IW, Gas Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Verify altitude and type of gas. 2. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 3. Furnish with two (2) carts total. 4. Side heat shield for control compartment. 5. Furnish one (1) Everpure Kleensteam AR-X water filter assembly for each unit, for installation by the Plumbing Division. Coordinate installation location to assure easy access for cartridge replacement and servicing, and in compliance with local codes. 6. Coordinate with exhaust hood height. ITEM #294: CONVECTION OVEN Quantity: One (1) Assembly Manufacturer: Blodgett VERIFY WITH CUTS Model No.: DFG-100 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Double Stack Unit, Casters Utilities Req'd.: 2080 PH 7.5 KW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Extra oven racks. 2. Stainless steel main back. 3. CH-Pro 3- programmable solid state digital control with LED display, cook and hold, Pulse Plus, 3 programmable product keys. 05.12-06 FooDSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400 -100 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 4. 6" casters. 5. Extra oven racks, two (2) ITEM #295: BEVERAGE COUNTER Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: HW & CW, IW Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard details; FSD1-18, FSD1-5A, FSD1-7, FSD1-8, FSD1-10, FSD1-18 and FSD2-19. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. One (1) T&S &3197 deck mount faucet (12" spout) with wrist handles and one (1) rotary waste assembly. ITEM #296: FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Ansul Model No.: R-102 Ansulex Liquid Fire Suppressant Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Automatic and Manual Utilities Req'd: 120V 1 Ph Fumish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Surface appliance nozzles, hood and duct protection nozzles in Exhaust Hood(s)/Ventilator(s), Item #292. 2. Manual pull station and micro-switches with two sets of normally open and two sets of normally dosed contact points. 3. All exposed pipe and fittings to be chrome plated or stainless steel. 4. Six-month and twelve-month inspections, servicing, and replacement of components as per N.F.P.A: 96, latest edition. 5. All components and labor necessary for completely installed system in accordance with manufacturer's listings and instructions, U.L. Standard 300, UL Standard 1254, NFPA-17A, NFPA-96, and all applicable local codes, standards, and regulations. 6. Components inside exhaust hood(s)/ventilator to be installed at hood manufacturer's shop during fabrication. 7. Provide with automatic mechanical gas shut-off valves (not electric solenoid valves) for equipment below exhaust hood/ventilator. Coordinate size and installation with Plumbing Division. 8. Electrical Division to provide shunt trip breakers at main power panel, or disconnects, as designated by the Electrical Engineer; interconnected with micro-switch at fire system control panel, for all electricity in and under exhaust hood/ventilator. Shunt trips/disconnects to accomplish shut off of electricity in event of fire system activation. ITEM #297: 60 QUART MIXER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Hobart Model No.: H600 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 60 Quart Mixer Utilities Req'd: 208V 3Ph 05-11-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Perm ft Set 11400-101 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Provide with one (1) stainless steel 60 quart bowl, one (1) 'C" Wing Whip, one (1) "ED" Dough hook, one (1) "1" heavy duty Wire Whip, and one (1) 9" vegetable slicer. ITEM #298: CEILING HUNG POT RACK Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Ceiling Mounted/See Plan For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd.: N/A Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard detail FSD14-3. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Contractor to provide and install structural reinforcing and mounting framework in the ceiling, as shown on the standard detail. ITEM #299: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #300: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #301: WORK TABLE WITH SINK Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: HW & CW, IW Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard details; FSD1-1 B, FSD1-5A, FSD1-7, FSD1-8, FSD1-10, FSD1-13, FSD1-15, FSD2-5 and FSD2-9. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. One (1) 20' x 20' x 5' deep drawer assembly, located as per plans and details. 3. One (1) T&S B-3113 deck mount faucet (12" spout) with wrist handles and one (1) rotary waste assembly. ITEM #302: MOBILE WORK TABLE Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: 'T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: N/A 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-102 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Ask V Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard details; FSD1-1 B, FSD1-7, FSD1-8, FSD1-10, FSD2-6 and FSD2-21. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. 5" Heavy-duty casters, two (2) with brakes. ITEM #303: SLICER STAND Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Bevies Model No.: RA35ES17-FL4 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd: Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Full perimeter bumper. 2. Vertical Pan Stop. 3. Polyurethane casters. 4. Floor locks( foot operated). 5. Vpan supports on 1" spacing. ITEM #304: SLICER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Hobart Model No.: 2812PS Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Automatic Utilities Req'd: 120V 1Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. High fence. ITEM #305: HEATED BANQUET CART Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Carter Hoffmann Model No.: BR150- ENDURAHEAT Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Portable Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: Retractable cord reel with heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-103 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEM #306: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #307: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #308: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #309: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #310: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #311: BAR BLENDER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Waring Commercial Model No.: BC900S Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: 120V,50/60HZ Fumish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division ITEM #312: THREE-COMPARTMENT SINK Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Glastender Model No.: TSA-72 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd: HW & CW, IW Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Provide #8033 slip nut and part #W 573P washer. 2. With one (1) speed rack. 3. Stainless steel bullet feet. 4. 16 gauge stainless steel parts include leg channels and legs. 5. 20 gauge stainless steel parts include: backsplash, backlash stiffener, sides, front skirting front rail, work surface, drain pains and perforated inserts. 6. Sink bowl 9-112"x14-1/2"x9-7/8", faucet "A" 19" deep, backsplash mounted on 4" centers, accepts 318" sink leads, hot and old water connections required. 7. With speed rail. ITEM #313: GLASS WASHER 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-104 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Glastender Model No.: GT24 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: High Temperature Utilities Req'd: 120V 1 Ph, CW, HW, IW Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 16 gauge legs and leg channels, 18 stainless steel floor and tanks, 20 and 22 gauge stainless steel cabinet. ITEM #314: WET WASH HANDLING STATION Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Glastender Model No.: SWB-I8-DW Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: CW Fumish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. 1-1/2" I.PS. Threaded drain will fit Dearborn part #8033 slip nut and part #W-573 washer. 2. Deck mount on 4" centers accepts 3/8" sink leads, hot and cold water connections required. 3. Sink bowl 9-1/4"x11-1/2"x6' deep, strainer perforated plastic. 4. 16 gauge stainless steel legs, 18 gauge leg pads, 20 gauge stainless steel back, backsplash, sides, bottom, front rail, work surface, bowl and perforated insert. ITEM #315: DRY WASTE CHUTE Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Glastender Model No.: DWB-12 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 20 gauge stainless steel front, backsplash, top, front rail, front door and sides. ITEM #316: BAR HAND SINK Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Glastender Model No.: DHSB-12 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: With Soap And Towel Dispenser Utilities Req'd: HW & CW, IW Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 05-12-06 FOOOSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400.105 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 1. 16 gauge stainless steel leg mounting brackets and legs, 18 gauge leg pods, and 20-gauge stainless steel back, back splash, sides, bottom, front skirting, front rail, and bowl. 2. Sink bowl 9-114"x11-1/2"x 6" deep. 3. Faucet deck mount on 4" centers, accepts 3/8" sink leads, hot and cold-water connections required. 4. 1-112" I.P.S. Threaded drain will fit Dearborn part #8033 slip nut and part #W 573P washer. ITEM #317: COCKTAIL STATION Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Glastender Model No.: All-72B Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: With Sealed-In Cold Plate Utilities Req'd: IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Standard model 1-112" tail piece. 2. Cold plate model CP2 or CP81/2" MPT. 3. Drain board and wet waste sink 1-112"I.P.S, threaded drain will fit Dearborn part #8033 slipnut and part # W573-P washer. ITEM #318: BLENDER STATION Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Glastender Model No.: Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: As a part of #317 Utilities Req'd: 120V 1 Ph, HW & CW, IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. ITEM#319: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #320: BACK BAR CABINETRY Quantity: Lot - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Millwork Division. ITEM #321: DRAINBOARD Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Glastender Model No.: Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: As part of 317 Utilities Req'd: IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-106 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEM #322: TRASH CHUTE Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Glastender Model No.: DWB12 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Trash Receptacle Provided By OwnerlOperator Utilities Req'd: N/A Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: Mount to adjacent bar work board section on both sides. ITEM #323: FIVE FLAVOR BEER TEE TOWER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Perlick Model No.: Tee Tower (4006-5B), Bridge Tower (4006-10B) and Drainers (C32357) Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Remote Dispensing, Refrigerated, Air-Cooled, Complete with Lines and Insulation Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph (208V 1 Ph if over 500') Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Coolant connector kit. 2. Line trunk housing. 3. One (1) 4006-56 stainless steel-- faucet "T" tower. Install on Item #325, Counter/Bar Top 4. One (1) C32357 stainless steel counter drainer. Install on Item #325 as above, verify with architect/ interior design finish. 5. One (1) C02 drum regulator OR step down primary (if bulk co2 is used.) 6. One (1) pump and C02 vent kit per faucet, as required. 7. All stainless steel NSF approved faucets and tapping hardware devices with automatic beer shut offs. 8. Beer drain tubing. 9. One (1) cord kit. 10. 5 Year compressor warranty. ITEM #324: GLASS FROSTIER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Glastender Model No.: MF48-52 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Self-Contained, Air-Cooled Utilities Req'd: 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. 20 gauge stainless steel type 304 parts top, door, interior floor, back, front, and sides. 2. Casters. 3. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 0512.06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-107 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEM #325: BAR TOP AND DIE Quantity: One (1) - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Millwork Division. ITEM #326: BACK BAR REFRIGERATOR Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Glastender Model No.: ND52-L6-GN(LR) Specifier ID No.: '7022 Pertinent Data: Sections, Self-Contained Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. 6" Adjustable legs and base plate kit; verify legs and finish with architect / interior design. 2. Door locks. 3. Factory applied finish as specified by the Architect/Interior Designer. Door option per Architect and ID. 4. Locate compressor per plan. 5. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 6. Verify legs and finish with Architect. ITEM #327: BAR TOP AND DIE Quantity, Three (3) - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Millwork Division. ITEM #328: P.O.S SYSTEM Quantity: Two (2) - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Owner/ Operator. ITEM #329: P.O.S PRINTER Quantity: Two (2) - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Owner/ Operator. ITEM #330: BACK BAR REFRIGERATOR Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Glastender Model No.: BB60-R6-GNH(LR) Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Sections, Self-Contained Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturers standard specifications and the following: 1. 6" Adjustable legs and base plate kit; verify legs and finish with architect / interior design. 2. Door locks. 3. Factory applied finish as specified by the Architect/Interior Designer. Door option per Architect/Interior Department. 4. Locate compressor per plan. 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Parm t Set 11400-108 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 5. Verify with Architect/Interior Department. ITEM #331: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #332: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #323: BOTTLE RISER Quantity: One(1) - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Millwork Division. ITEM #:334 SPARE NUMBER ITEM #335: BUSSING CART Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Servolift or Equal Model No.: 979-3 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. One Piece, wrap around non marking vinyl bumper. 2. Two (2) swivel casters with brakes. ITEM #336: BEER WALK-IN COOLER Quantity: One (1) Assembly Manufacturer: Penick Model No.: US10KP Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans for Size and Configuration, Modular with Floor Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph, IW Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Walk-in cooler to be prefabricated of modular design and construction. 2. Verify all dimensions with building conditions for proper fit. Provide maximum size possible to fit available space, using standard panels. 3. Oak Floor Rack, R22 Condensing Unit W/ expansion valve, and keg shelf. 4. Beer line conduit by Electrical Division. ITEM #337: DRAFT BEER CHILLING SYSTEM Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Penick 05-12-06 Summary Permit Set FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-109 I i t PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Model No.: 4410 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Conduit by Electrical Division Utilities Req'd.: Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. 4430115V pump kit for 4410 power packs (Field Installed). 2. C22296A-20 cord kit -single pump power packs only. ITEM #338: WATER AND ICE STATION Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Delfield Model No.: 204 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Drop4n, 45 Lbs. Ice Storage Capacity Utilities Req'd.: CW, IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Install in Item # 347 Counter, as shown on plans. 2. Pitcher filler in place of glass filler. ITEM #339: UNDER COUNTER REFRIGERATOR Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Delfied Model No.: 406-CA Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Self-Contained, Air-Cooled Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. Additional shelf 3. 3.5' diameter casters. 4. Door Lock. ITEM #340: ICED TEA BREWER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Bunn Model No.: T3-QOTD Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Single Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph, CW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Furnish Easy Clear EQ-11-TL water filter system. 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-110 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 qj~ VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 2. Furnish with two (2) #TD4T tea dispensers. 3. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #341: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #342: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #343: COFFEE BREWER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fetco Model No.: C12031 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 2 Warmers Utilities Req'd.: 120/208/1 PH/ CW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Furnish Easy Clear water filter system. 2. Furnish with two additional sets of decanters. 3. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #344: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #345: GLASS RACK DOLLY Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Cres-Cor Model No.: 500-2020 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: With Comer Bumpers & Handle, For 20 x 20 Racks Utilities Req'd.: N/A Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. Comer Bumper 2. Rigid or spring back push handle. ITEM #346: ESPRESSO MACHINE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Ac corto Model No.: 2500 Series. Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Fully Automatic with Grinders Utilities Req'd.: 208V 1Ph, CW, IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Furnish with manufacturer's recommended water filter system. 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Swmiary Pemrt Set 11400 -111 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEM #347: WORK COUNTER WITH SINK Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd.: HW & CW, IW Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard details; FSD1-113, FSD1-5A, FSD1-7, FSD1-10, FSD5-1 and FSD5-2. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. One (1) T&S #&0221-CC (or Fisher equal) deck mount faucet (12" spout) with wrist handles and one (1) rotary waste assembly. ITEM #348: WALL SHELF Quantity: Manufacturer. Model No.: Specifier ID No.: Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: One (1) Fabricated Stainless Steel *T022 Plan For Length And Configuration. NIA Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard detail FSD12-1 one shelf. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #349: REACH-IN REFRIGERATOR Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traulsen & Co. Model No.: AHT232WUT-HHS Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Double Section, Self-Contained, Air-Cooled, Reach-In, Glass door Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. Doors hinged as shown on plans. 3. Set of four (4) 6' high casters in lieu of legs. 4. Clear glass door in place of solid door. 5. Universal type tray slides4eft side. 6. Door locks. 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permft Set 11400-112 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEM #350 HAND SINK ASSEMBLY VERIFY THAT POWER IS AT ALL SINKS!!! Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Eagle Model No.: HSA-10-FDPS Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Automatic, Hands-Free Utilities Req'd.: HW & CW, Waste Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Side splashes. 2. Wrist handles. ITEM #351: MOBILE ICE CADDY Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Follett Model No.: Smart Cart 125 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Mobile Utilities Req'd.: NIA Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. ITEM #352: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #353: REFRIGERATED RAIL TABLE Quantity: One(1) Manufacturer: Kairak, Inc Model No.: KRP-96R Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Self Contained Utilities Req'd.: 115V13.9 A Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Double depth pan opening per Operator 2. Tray slides spacing, 2-112" 3. 2 Drawer 4. 314" richlite cutting board 5. Door locks 6. 4" casters. 7. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #354: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #355: STORAGE SHELVING 0512-06 Summary Permit Set FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-113 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: InterMetro Industries Model No.: Stainless Steel Shelves, Flat Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 86" High With Five Tiers Utilities Req'd.: N/A Furnish and set in place per manufacturers standard specifications and the following: 1. Length, width and configuration per plan and verified room dimensions. 2. Each section to be free standing with four legs, first shelf to start at 10" AFF. ITEM #356: ICE MACHINE WITH FILTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Manitowoc Model No.: SY-08554A Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Remote Utilities Req'd.: V -Ph, CW, IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturers standard specifications and the following: 1. Install ice maker on S-570 bin with appropriate bin top. Mount bin on 6" adjustable stainless steel legs. 2. Furnish one (1) Everpure AR-PRE, AR-4000 water filter assembly, for installation by the Plumbing Division. Coordinate installation location to insure easy access for cartridge replacement and servicing, and in compliance with local codes. ITEM #357: FLOOR TROUGH Quantity: One(1) Manufacturer. IMC Teddy Model No.: Custom 12"x120" Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Configuration, Non Slip Grate Utilities Req'd.: Waste Furnish as per manufacturers standard specifications: ITEM #358: CAN WASHER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Jet Can Model No.: 5-13 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Utilities Req'd.: HW & CW, IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturers standard specifications. ITEM #359: PRESSURE SPRAY UNIT 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Perm ft Set 11400-114 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: SMT Model No.: 300-5106 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Deluxe Utilities Req'd.: 230V,1PH HW & CW, Furnish and set in place per manufacturers standard specifications and the following: 1. Stainless steel cover. 2. 3 Cylinder CAT super flow plunger pump. 3. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 4. Refer to cut sheet. ITEM #360: STAINLESS STEEL WALL FLASHING Quantity: Lot Manufacturer. Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plan For Size And Configuration Utilities Req'd: NIA Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard detail FSD1-39. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Cover wall behind (and adjacent to) the cooking equipment, from the finished floor to the bottom of the exhaust hood, the length (and width) of the exhaust hood. ITEM #360-400: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #401: MOBILE BAR Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Forbes Model No.: 4865-5 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Verify with Four Seasons Hotel OPS Utilities Req'd.: Furnish and set in place per manufacturers standard specifications and the following: 1. Stainless steel sheet construction with reinforced steel base. 2. Highest quality materials used throughout to create unique appearance- verify with Owner/Operator prior to order. ITEM #402: TRASH RECEPTACLE 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-115 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Quantity: Four (4) - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Owner. ITEM #403: WALL SHELF Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Plan For Length And Configuration. Utilities Req'd.: NIA Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard detail FSD12-1 one shelf. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #404: REACH-IN REFRIGERATOR Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Traulsen & Co. Model No.: AHT226-WUT-FHD Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Narrow, Two Section, Self-Contained, Air-Cooled, Reach-In, Glass door Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. Door(s) hinged as shown on plans. 3. Set of four (4) 6" high casters in lieu of legs. 4. Clear glass doors in lieu of solid doors. 5. Four (4) additional chrome plated shelves. 6. Door Locks. ITEM #405: BEER DISPENSING SYSTEM Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Glastender Model No.: KC24-NC-SS2(L) Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Remote Dispensing, Refrigerated, Air-Cooled Utilities Req'd.: 115V,1 PH, 60HZ Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. Dedicated 15Amp circuit is required. ITEM #406: BACK BAR COUNTER 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-116 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Quantity: One (1) - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Millwork Division. ITEM #407: COFFEE BREWER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fetco Model No.: CBS-12H Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 2 Additional Warmers Utilities Req'd.: 120/208/1 PH/ CW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Furnish Easy Clear water filter system. 2. Furnish with two sets of decanters. 3. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #408: ICED TEA BREWER/ DISPENSER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Bunn Model No.: T3-QTOD Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Single Utilities Req'd.: 120/14.87A/1680 WATTS Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Furnish Easy Clear EQ-11-TL water filter system. 2. Furnish with two (2) #TD4T tea dispensers. 3. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #409: WORK COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd.: Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard details; FSD1-1 B, FSD1-5A, FSD1-7, FSD1-10, and FSD5-1. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #410: WALL SHELF Quantity: One(1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel OS12-06 Summary Perm ft Set FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-117 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Specifier ID No.: "T022 Pertinent Data: Plan For Length And Configuration. Utilities Req'd.: N/A Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard detail FSD12-1 one shelf. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #411: P.O.S SYSTEM Quantity: One (1)- Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Owner/ Operator. ITEM #412: P.O.S PRINTER Quantity: One (1) - Not In This Contract Section, Provided By Owner/ Operator. ITEM #413: UNDERCOUNTER DISH MACHINE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Hobart Model No.: LX30H Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: High Temperature with 6" Legs Utilities Req'd.: 120/208V 1 Ph, HW, IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Stainless steel base with 6" legs. 2. Pressure regulator valve. 3. Detergent and rinse aid pumps. 4. 70 degree rinse booster. ITEM #414: MOBILE GRILL WITH BURNERS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Viking Model No.: B00053T1 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Modular Utilities Req'd.: Gas Furnish and set in place per manufacturers standard specifications and the following: 1. Verify altitude and type of gas. 2. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 3. HD Casters, cover. ITEM #415: HAND SINK ASSEMBLY 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-118 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Eagle Model No.: HSA- I0-FDPS Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Automatic, Hands-Free Utilities Req'd.: HW & CW, Waste Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: Side splashes. Wrist handles. ITEM #416: STORAGE SHELVING Quantity: Four (4) Manufacturer: InterMetro Industries Model No.: Metroseal 3 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: 86' High With Five Tiers Utilities Req'd.: N/A Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: AWN 1. Length, width and configuration per plan and verified room dimensions. 2. Each section to be free standing with four legs, first shelf to start at 10' AFF. ITEM #417: JANITORS SINK ASSEMBLY W/ FAUCET Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Eagle Group Model No.: F1916 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans And Details For Length, Width And Configuration. Utilities Req'd.: Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. 4-pole mop holder. (321561) 2. Hose and racket. (312689) 3. Service faucet. (312690) ITEM #418: POT WASH SINK Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plan For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd: HW & CW, IW Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard details; FSD14B, FSD1-5C, FSD1-7, FSD1-8, FSD1-10, FSD1-13, FSD1-14, FSD3-1, FSD3-3, 05-12.06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit: Set 11400-119 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT FSD3-4 and FSD3-5. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to any and all fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. Integral sinks to have two (2) T&S #&0231 (or Fisher equal) #3253 splash mount faucets (12" spout) with wrist handles and three (3) rotary waste assemblies. ITEM #419: CHEMICAL WALL SHELF Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plan For Length And Configuration. Utilities Req'd.: NIA Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard detail FSD12-1. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #420: REACH-IN REFRIGERATOR Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer. Traulsen & Co. Model No.: AHT232WUT-HHS Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Two Section, Double Door, Casters, Self-Contained, WaterCooled, Reach-In, Glass door Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. Doors hinged as shown on plans. 3. Set of four (4) 6" high casters in lieu of legs. 4. Clear glass door in place of solid doors. 5. No.2 Type tray slide to accommodate (1)18'x26" sheet pans, adjustable to 2" O.C , right side only. 6. Additional chrome plated shelves, two (2) each. 7. Door locks. ITEM #421: WALL SHELF Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: '7022 Pertinent Data: Plan For Length And Configuration. Utilities Req'd.: NIA Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard detail FSD12-1 one shelf. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and 05.12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-120 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #422: WORK COUNTER WITH SINK Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: See Plans For Length And Configuration Utilities Req'd.: HW & CW, IW Fabricate and set in place per plans, details and the following: 1. Similar to standard details; FSD1-1 B, FSD1-5A, FSD1-7, FSD1-10, FSD5-1 and FSD5-2. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. One (1) T&S #B-0221-CC (or Fisher equal) deck mount faucet (12' spout) with wrist handles and one (1) rotary waste assembly. ITEM #423: WALL SHELF Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model No.: Stainless Steel Specifier ID No.: 'T022 Pertinent Data: Plan For Length And Configuration. Utilities Req'd.: N/A Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details and the following: Similar to standard detail FSD12-1 one shelf. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM #424: PANINI GRILL Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Sodir Model No.: Italian Toaster Grill APG-1 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Counter Top Utilities Req'd.: 120V, 14AMPS Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: Provide heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #425: MICROWAVE OVEN Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Amana 05.12-06 Sunvwry Permit Set FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-121 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Model No.: RFS12MPS Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Pre-Set And Programmable Touch Control Panel Utilities Req'd.: 120V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. ITEM #426: REFRIGERATED RAIL TABLE Quantity: One(1) Manufacturer: Kairak, Inc Model No.: KRP-96R Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Self Contained Utilities Req'd.: 115V/3.9 A Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Double depth pan opening per operator 2. Tray slides spacing, 2-1/2" 3. 2 Drawer 4. 3/4" richlite cutting board 5. Door locks 6. 4" casters. ITEM #427: UNDER COUNTER FREEZER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Delfied Model No.: 407-CA Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Single Section, Self-Contained, Air-Cooled Utilities Req'd.: 115V 1 Ph Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heavy-duty cord and plug assembly. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrical Division. 2. Door hinged as shown on plans with lock. ITEM #428: DISPENSER ICE MACHINE WITH FILTER Quantity: Six (6) Manufacturer: Manitowoc Model No.: QPA-160 Specifier ID No.: *T022 Pertinent Data: Self-Contained, Water-Cooled Utilities Req'd.: 115V -Ph, CW, IW Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 0512.06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Permit Set 11400-122 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11400 VAIL, COLORADO FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Install ice machines in tower per Architectural drawings. Furnish one (1) Everpure AR-2000 Single water filter assembly, for installation by the Plumbing Division. Coordinate installation location to insure easy access for cartridge replacement and servicing, and in compliance with local codes. ITEM #429: SPARE NUMBER ITEM #430: SPARE NUMBER END OF SECTION 11400 05-12-06 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Summary Pend Set 11400-123 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11452 VAI! COLORADO RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES SECTION 11452 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing residential appliances as indicated and specified. B. Related Sections: 1. Food service equipment is specified in Section 11400. 2. Plumbing requirements are specified in Division 15. 3. Electrical requirements are specified in Division 16. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of appliance. Include operating and maintenance instructions for each item. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certification Labels: Furnish residential appliances with UL labels. Provide gas-burning appliances with American Gas Association seal of approval. B. Uniformity Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of residential appliance required. Where specfied, provide residential appliances by a single manufacturer for the entire Project 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver appliances to Project site in manufacturer's undamaged protective containers, after spaces to receive them have been fully enclosed. B. Store appliances in a dry protected area in manufacturer's protective containers, away from construction traffic and debris areas, until installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPLIANCES A. As selected by the Interior Designer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install appliances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Securely anchor built-in appliances to supporting cabinetry or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper operation and rough openings are completely concealed. 0407A RESIDENTIAL APP MMS Progress CD Set 11452-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS& RESORTS SECTION 11452 VAIL COLORADO RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES C. Place freestanding appliances in final locations after fishes have been completed in each area Verify that clearances are adequate for proper operation. D. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for plumbing, venting, and electrical requirements. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Test each appliance to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. B. Remove packing material from appliances and leave in dean condition, ready for operation. END OF SECTION MV-06 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES Progress CD Set 11452 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 11453 VAIL, COLORADO RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCE SELECTIONS SECTION 11453 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCE SELECTIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the residential appliances as selected by the Interior Designer. In cases of conflict, the residential appliance selections and designations listed in the adjoining schedule and cutsheets supersede those fisted in other individual specification sections. END OF SECTION 0"7-06 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCE SELECTIONS Progress M Set 11453-1 BH Brayton + Hughes D E S I G N S T U D I O Four Seasons Vail General Accessories Manufacturer's List GENERAL ACCESSORIES MANUFACTURER'S LIST Sub Zero Appliances Sub Zero Contact: T: F: E: Whirlpool Corporation Whirlpool Corporation 2000 N. M-63 Benton Harbor, MI 49022.2692 USA Wolf Appliances Wolf Contact: T: 269-923-5000 F: E: Contact: T: F: E: Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 1 of 1 Four Seasons Vail BfH Brayton + Hughes Hardware Specifications ® DESIGN STUDIO Project No.: 200458 N GENERAL ACCESSORIES SPECIFICATIONS ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS GA-1 Refrigerator at Mfr.: Sub Zero Appliances Condos Condos Model: 695/0 Description: 695 Side by Side Refrigerator Finish: Custom overlay to match kitchen Cabinets Notes: See cut sheets for additional information GA-2 Refrigerator at Mfr.: Sub Zero Appliances Residence Club Suites Residence club units Model: 661/0 Description: 661 Side by Side Refrigerator Finish:Custom overlay to match kitchen cabinet Notes: See cut sheets for additional information GA-3 Wine Cooler Mfr.: Sub Zero Appliances Condos Model: 315W Wine Cooler Description: Wine cooler Finish: Custom Overlay to match Kitchen cabinet Notes: See cut sheets for additional information GA-4 Stove Mfr.: Wolf Appliances Condos Model: CT36G/S Description: 36' Gas Cooktop Finish:Classic Stainless Steel Notes: See cut sheets for additional information GA-5 Stove at Residence Mfr.: Wolf Appliances Residence Club Suites Club units Model: 30' Gas Range Description: 30' Gas Range Finish: Classic Stailess Exterior Notes: See cut sheets for additional information GA-6.1 Ventilation Hood Mfr.: Wolf Appliances Residence Club Suites Model: CTWH30 Description: Cook top Ventilation Hood Fin ish:Stain less Steel finish Notes: See cut sheets for additional information Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 1 of 3 BH Brayton + Hughes DESIGN STUDIO Four Seasons Vail Hardware Specifications Project No.: 20045' GENERAL ACCESSORIES SPECIFICATIONS ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS GA-6.2 Ventilation Hood Mfr.: Wolf Appliances Condos Model: CTWH36 Description:Cooktop Ventilation Hood Finish: Stainless Steel Finish Notes: See cut sheets for additional information GA-9 Microwave Mfr.: Wolf Appliances Condos Model: MW24 Residence Club Suites Description: Non Convection Microwave Ovem Finish: Optional Trim in classic Stainless Steel finish Notes: See cut sheets for additional information GA-10 Double Oven Mfr.: Wolf Appliances Condos Model: D030F Description: 30" (762) Built in Double ovens Finish: Classic Stainless Steel Finish Notes: See cut sheets for additional information GA-11 Warming Drawer Mfr.: Wolf Appliances Condos Model: WDFRONT/1 Description: Warming Drawer Finish: Integrated Wood Panel Notes: See cut sheets for additional information GA-12 Dishwasher Mfr.: Meile Appliances Condos Model: Incognito G858SCVi Residence Club Suites Description: Incognito Series Dishwasher Finish: Stainless Steel Finish Notes: See cut sheets for additional information GA-13 Washer / Dryer Mfr.: Whirlpool Corporation Condos Model: GHW9400P Description: Front Load Washer Finish:Dove Grey on White Notes: See cut sheets for additional information Issued: April 7, 2006 Page 2 of IV) BH Brayton + Hughes ® D E S I G N S T U D I D GENERAL ACCESSORIES SPECIFICATIONS Four Seasons Vail Hardware Specifications Project No.: 200458 ITEM CODE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION AREAS GA-14 Washer / Dryer Mfr.: Whirlpool Corporation Condos Model: GEW9250P Description: Dryer Finish: Dove Grey on White Notes: See cut sheets for additional information GA-15 Washer / Dryer Mfr.: Whirlpool Corporation Restaurant Model:LTE6234D Description: Stacked Washer and Dryer Finish:White Notes: See cut sheets for additional information Issued- April 7, 2006 Page 3 of 3 Sub-Zero 695 Side-By-Side Page 1 of 3 695 Side-By-Side mint I Close Our model 695 is our newest 48" side-by-side offering ice and water dispensing through the refrigerator door. The storage capacity of this unit is ample with 18.2 cubic feet of storage in the refrigerator and 9.8 cubic feet of storage in the freezer section. Refrigerator This product is available in your choice of framed, partial framed, overlay or classic stainless steel Model Options: Framed or Partial Framed Desig odes 695/F Overlay Design Model 695/0 Classic Stainless Model 6951S Features: - Framed, partial framed, overlay and stainless steel applications provide complete design flexibility - If you choose not to use custom wood panels above or below the glasswell in the framed application, stainless steel inset handle panels are available in the optional partial framed accessory kit - With the framed retrofit accessory kit, existing Model 690 door panels can be used on a new Model 695 framed unit - Sub-Zero's dual refrigeration system ensures the freshest food and energy efficiency - Shallow-depth design means access is easy to any area of the refrigerator of . . . - - Sub=Zero 695 Side-By-Side Page 2 of 3 - Electronic controls are up front and easy to use - Bright interior lighting - High-humidity compartment is large with smooth sides for easy cleaning - there's even and added storage drawer - Door alarm will let you know with an audible beeping if your refrigerator or freezer door is left ajar - Automatic icemaker provides an ample supply of crescent -shaped ice - also has a bulk ice dispenser - Front venting allows unit to be completely built in and serviced from the front - Meets strict Department of energy requirements - uses less energy than a 100-watt light bulb - UL listed for US and Canada - Two, five and twelve-year residential warranty - exclusions apply - see warranty terms Accessories: - FRAMPAR - Partial framed kit includes molding and stainless steel inset handle panels for above and below giasswell for framed design - FRAMRET - Framed retrofit kit includes moldings and stainless steel inset handle panels to accommodate existing Model 690 framed door panels - Front, side and grille panels for framed design in white, almond and classic stainless steel - Louvered, panel or stainless steel grilles in 1" (25mm) increments from 10" (254mm) to 15" (381 mm) high - Galion door shelf - Dozen egg container with lid - 90 degree and 105 degree door stop kits 695 Dimensions Overall Size: H 84" (2134 mm) W 48" (1219 mm) D 24" (610 mm) Door Swing Clearance: 29-1/4 (743 mm) Storage Capacity: Refrigerator: 18.2 cubic feet (515 L) Freezer: 9.8 cubic feet (278 L) Electrical Requirements: 115 VAC, 60 Hz, 15-amp circuit Annual Energy Usage: 747 kWh/$62 Sub,Z w 695 Side-By-Side Page 3 of 3 Shipping Weight: Framed/Overlay - 610 lbs (277 kg) Stainless - 656 lbs (298 kg) Available in Overlay, Stainless and Framed. O 2005 Sub-Zero Freezer Company, lnm www-uftem oom Sub-Zero 661 Side-By-Side Page I of 3 - 661 Side-By-Side Print I Close If you like the strong vertical lines of side-by-side refrigerator freezers, Sub-Zero has the most complete line available for your consideration. It all starts with the Model 661 that is our 36" wide side-by-side with electronic controls. Refrigerator With 12.5 cubic feet of refrigerator capacity and 8.8 cubic feet of freezer capacity, this product is designed to fit your needs if your desire is a side-by-side and you only have a 36" width to work with. Available in framed, overlay and stainless. Model Options: Framed design Model 661/F Overlay design Model 661/0 Classic stainless steel Model 661 Platinum stainless steel Model 661/P' Carbon stainless steel Model 661B• -M iV%4_P4 lc Note: Allow 90 days from order to delivery for platinum and carbon finishes Features: - Electronic controls are up front and easy to use - Sub-Zero's dual refrigeration system ensures the freshest food and energy efficiency - Shallow-depth design means access is easy to any area of the refrigerator c,A -z Sub-Zero 661 Side-By-Side Page 2 of 3 - Bright interior lighting - High-humidity compartment is large and deep with smooth side for easy cleaning - Door alarm will let you know with an audible beeping if your refrigerator or freezer door is left ajar - Automatic ice maker provides an ample supply of crescent-shaped ice - Front venting allows unit to be completely built in and service from the front - Front venting allows unit to be completely built in and serviced from the front - Meets strict Department of energy requirements - uses less energy than a i 00-watt light bulb - UL listed for US and Canada - Two, five and twelve-year residential warranty - exclusions apply - see warranty terms Accessories: - Front, side and grille panels for framed design in white, almond and classic steel - Lowered, panel or stainless steel grille in 1" (25 mm) increments from 10" (254 mm) to 15" (381 mm) high - Extended framed handles Decorative overlay handles Dozen egg container with lid - 90 degree and 105 degree door stop kits 661 Dimensions Overall size: H 84" (2134 mm) W 36" (914 mm) d 24" (610 mm) Door swing clearance: 20-3/4" (527mm) Storage Capacity: Refrigerator: 12.5 cubic feet (354 L) Freezer 8.8 cubic feet (249 L) Annual Energy Usage 640kWh/$53 (Based on 8.29 cents per kilowatt hour) Shipping Weight: Framed/Overlay: 500 Ibs (227 kg) Stainless: 538 lbs (244 kg) Sub-Zero 661 Side-By-Side Page 3 of 3 Available in Overlay, Stainless and Framed. O 2005 Sub-Zem Freezer Company, bie. www.aubzero.c= J Sub-Zero 315W Wine Cooler Page 1 of 2 Ark, lUfi~ 315W Wine Cooler Print Close For those areas, where you may not have room for larger wine storage, our Model 315W, an undercounter single-zone wine cooler unit, comes in the overlay or classic stainless steel design application with a full-view glass door. Refrigerator This Sub-Zero Model 315W wine cooler unit is available in overlay and classic stainless. The model number 315W followed by the finish letter denotes what type of finish can be ordered. On the overlay (O) model, no panel is provided; this gives you the ability to finish this unit with front insert panels of your choice. Classic Model 315W/S Overlay Model 315W/0 A* Features - Compact width -15' (381) width allows for placement in locations with limited space available - Storage capacity - 26 (750ml) bottle capacity - Design options - overlay and classic stainless steel design options - Interior lighting - low-voltage lighting is independent of door opening - Roller glide shelves - natural cherry wood facing on roller glide shelves - Easy access-sturdy rustproof, wire shelves pull out to three-quarter extension - LIV resistant glass-sealed double-wall tempered glass-high attitude compatible Accessories JdW 18" Stainless Steel Handle in 3/4" diameter (STASTEL 18)614/ ) 24" Stainless Steel Handle in 3/4" diameter (STASTEL 24-1/8x314! ) GA -3 Sub-Zero 315W Wine Cooler Page 2 of 2 24" Stainless Steel Handle in 1" diameter (STASTEL 24-5/16x1/ ) 23-1/2" Stainless Steel Handle (STASTEL 23-1/2/-) - Matches Wolf warming drawer handle 18" Polished Chrome Handle (POLCHROMI8) *When ordering the stainless steel handles, you must include the letter of the proper finish with the part number. Classic (/S) 315W Dimensions Specifications Wine Storage Capacity: 26 (750 ml) bottles Overall Dimensions: W 15-1/4" (387) H 34-1/16" (865) D 24" (610) Rough-in Dimensions: W 15-1/4" (387) H 34-1/2"(876) D 24"(610) Door Swing: 16-5/8" (422) door clearance at 90 degrees- specify RH or LH swing Shipping Weight: Overlay -114 Ibs (52 kg); Stainless -118 Ibs (54 kg) Note: Dimensions in parentheses are in millimeters unless otherwise specified. ® 2005 Sub-Zero Freezer company. kv. www.subzero.corn Wolf 36" Gas Cooktop Page 1 of 2 U%J 0 LF' 36- Gas Cooktop Print Close New features make cooking a greater pleasure than ever. At higher settings, the dual stacked burner design uses its new 15,000 Btu upper-level burner for maximum heat transfer. Merely turn down the illuminated knob and the lower-tier bumers deliver fine- tuning control and True Simmer. This patented feature allows you to have the slightest of flame and enjoy a simmer with no boiling or scorching. Options This Wolf Model CT36G 36- (914 mm) gas cooktop is available in natural or LP gas with Classic or Platinum Stainless steel finish. The model number followed by (-LP) denotes an LP model. Classic Stainless Model CT36G/S (for LP add -LP) Platinum Stainless Model CT36G/P (for LP add -LP) . Features The sealed bumers and deep recess of the seamless drawn pan area make dean up of any of these previous unsightly spills a snap. Grates are also dishwasher safe. - Five automatic electronic re-ignition patented dual stacked sealed bumers - One large 15,000 Btu/hr (4.4 kWh) sealed burner with 700 Btwbr (.2 kWh) delivered at simmer - One medium 12,000 Btu/hr (3.5 kWh) sealed burner with 700 Btu/hr (.2 kWh) delivered at simmer - Three small 9,200 Btu/hr (2.7 kWh) sealed burners with 300 Btu/hr (.1 kWh) delivered at simmer - Illuminated control panel with two-tiered control knobs that clearly indicate when the go 4 11 wolf 36" Gas Cooktop burners are on and active - True Simmer setting on all burners - Individual spark ignition system Page 2 of 2 - Low profile cast iron continuous bumer grates with matte porcelain finish that make it easy to slide pots from burner to burner without lifting - Seamless drawn burner pan - Certified by Star-K to meet strict religious regulations -for additional information, go to www.star-k.org - CSA certified for US and Canada - Two and five year residential warranty - exclusions apply - see warranty terms Ventilation Options: 36" or 42" Cooktop Wall or Island Hood 36" Downdraft Ventilation System 36" or 42" Pro Wall or Island Hood Accessories: One-Piece Wok Grate and Single Burner Grate (CTWOK) Filler strip (IFILLER/S) High altitude conversion kit (HIGHKIT/CT) - for natural gas cooktops only. No high altitude conversion kit is necessary for LP gas cooktops:' 36" (914) Gas Cooktops Classic Stainless Steel CT36G/S Platinum Stainless Steel CT36G/P 02006 WON AppMa IM UJM www.woNappManeeAM . Wolf 30" Gas Range Page 1 of 2 LM 0 LF' 30" Gas Range Print ( close It's compact, but the Wolf 30" range in Classic Stainless is a giant when it comes to performance. The. roomy convection oven features our infrared broiler. The four dual burners handle cooktop duties with the precision you expect of Wolf. Options Classic Stainless exterior. Porcelain oven interior. Natural or LP gas units. Features This roomy convection oven features our infrared broiler. Four dual bumers handle cooktop duties with the precision you expect of Wolf. Our dual brass bumers have automatic re-ignition at all settings. The bumers can produce 16,000 BTUs for professional cooking heat and turn down to 500 BTUs for those delicate jobs like melting chocolate. Cast Iron porcelain top grates. The stainless steel drip tray pulls out on ball bearing slides, providing a smooth glide to and from the locked position and making it easy to remove and clean. The large red control knobs have four position settings. Chrome bezels surround all knobs. I--.,L_. 1 . . . Wolf 30" Gas Range Page 2 of 2 J Door windows and interior lights in ovens. Three-inch stainless steel legs in front and adjustable-rear casters. Full side panels and skirt. 02M won Appliance, u.C. www.wonappNance.com J 0 WOLF COOKTOP VENTILATION HOODS Powerful multi-speed blowers draw odors and smoke into the five-layer mesh filter. Filters remove easily for cleaning. The sculpted classic stainless steel shape not only provides the power you expect from.Wolf, but also the beauty you have come to appreciate as well. Model CTWH30 Waif chimney-style cooktop wall and island hoods are reconxnended for use with Wolf electric and gas cooktops and integrated modules. For Wolf dual fuel ranges. gas ranges and rangetops a Pro ventilation hood is required. Modal CTWH3e Model M42V WOLF - WARRANTY COOKTOP VENTILATION HOOD FEATURES Model CTVOM shown VVW products are covered by a two and five year residential warranty (exclusions applyl. See warranty details at the end of this guide. 68 Classic stal steel finish Transition % backdraft d Rating plau location FEATURES WOLF COOKTOP VENTILATION Classic stainless steel finish Internal or remote blower options Front-mounted controls with LED indicator Heavy-duty stainless steel seamless construction Three-speed blower control Variable-speed blowers Filter clean timer lets you know when the filter needs cleaning Dek"ff feature automatically turns unit off Sealed halogen lighting with three settings Stainless steel filter cover with dishwasher safe aluminum mesh filter Heat sentry feature automatically turns unit on when heat is sensed and automatically adjusts blower speed Transition with back draft damper included Fits 8' (2.4 m) to 9' (2.7 m) ceilings-flue extension to accommodate 10' (3 m) ceilings is available UL listed to US and Canadian safety standards eandess onstructlon oleseoplo chimney us extension IumlroArl esh filter orK-rnomrlied V&ds wee-speed oww control E MODEL OPTIONS Cookwp VenWation Hoods Wall Hoods 30" (762) wRdth CTWWO 36- (914) Width CTWH36 Island Hood IN4227 Halogen fighting LED kx8cators WOLF COOKTOP VENTILATION PLANNING INFORMATION Chimney-style cooktop wall hoods are 21' (533) deep and come in 30' (762) and 36' (914) widths. The island hood is 42' (1067) wide by 27' (686) deep. IMPORTANT NOTE: Wolf cooktop wail and island hoods are recommended for use with Wolf electric and gas cooktops along with inte- grated modules, and should be at least as wide as the cooking surface. A Pro ventilation hood must be used with Wolf dust fuel ranges, gas ranges and rangetops. Refer to pages 75-83 for Pro ventilation specifications. Wolf cooktop wall ar'rd•island hoods come with a telescopic chimney .l ub wctenslon that allows you to reach a ceiling height of 8' (2.4 m) to 9' (2.7 m) with a finished look. A flue extension to accommodate 10' (3 m) ceilings is available. Specifications on the following pages provide overall dimensions, blower and ducting consider- ations, and installation specifics for cooktop wall and Island hoods. Also refer to the cooktop ventilation recommendations on page 84. Installation of the cooktop wall or island hood should be 24' (610) to-30" (762) from the bottom of the hood to the cooking surface. ACCESSORIES Contact your Wof Dssisr FAro extension to accommodate 1 W (3 m) cellhVs 30'(704 and 35' (1114) wall shields' -Wall hoods only. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Wolf cooktop wall and island hoods require a separate, grounded 120 V. 60 Hz power supply. The service should have its own 15 amp circuit breaker. Placement of the electrical supply is not critical, as long as you provide a minimum of 6' (1.8 m) of 120 V AC power cable. Locate electrical within the shaded area shown in the Installation Specifications illustration for your model. IMPORTANT NOTE: A ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) is not recommended and may cause interruption of operation. You must follow all National Electrical Code regulations. In addition, be where of local codes and ordinances when installing your service. ACCESSORIES Optional acct are avaial" dealer, or call WoH Appliance at 600.332-11513. You can also visit our webske at wolfapplance.com and dick on the accessories section for your specific model. VENTILATION GUIDE For detailed specifications on all Wolf Ventilation products, refer to the VVW Ventilation Gukle found on the Wolf webs". wolfappilance.com. 0 Dhnensions in parentheses are In millimeters unless otherwise specified 67 WOLF COOKTOP VENTILATION SPECIFICATIONS Model CTWH30 Overall Width 30-(762) Overall Height 67/e' (175) (excluding chimney) Overall Height 301/x' (775) (including ehlmney) Maximum Height 481/2' (1232) (full extension) Overall Depth 21-(533) Bottom of Hood to Cooking Surface 24'(810) to 30'(762) Duct Size 8- (203) Round Discharge Vertical Blower Options. 450 CFM Internal 600, 900, 1200 or 1500 CFM Remote Electrical Supply 110/120 V AC, 80 Hz 15 amp dedicated circuit Shipping Weight 85 bs (39 kg) (shag only) 'Refer to the cookrop ventilation recommendations on page 84. SPECIFICATIONS Model CTWH36 Overall Width 357/14' (900) Overall Height 91/4-(235) (excluding chimney) Overall Height 3211fte' (830) (including chimney) Maximum Height 507/3' (1292) (full extension) Overall Depth 21- (833) Bottom of Hood to Cooking Surface 24' (810) to 30' (782) Duct Size 8- t=) Round Discharge Vardeei Blowsy Options. 600 or 900 CFM Internal 800.800. 1200 or 1500 CFM Remote Elecvical Supply 11 O/ 120 V AC 80 Hs 15 wnp dedicated circuit Shipping Weight 100 be (45 kg) (shell only) 'Rehr to the Cooktop vanylstion recommendations on page 84. 68 OVERALL DIMENSIONS Cooktop Wall Hoods Model CTWH30 IV ir 4'Wmk (tn4l 301)• W 481W 191AF OVERALL HERW J pal M I ~-.u way N iww Model CT M436 I HsO ~ ~Ir 4s/t4'mb (Ito) 3211/x4' 177 so1M ov[ L1NEEWIT ~91i4• ~-OVEPLALLam, 4 INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS Cooktop Wall Hoods 48th' aR 3Rje pa0wtm NH61Rer MOOD tr 1o>r ttw w• t7» naaRlo eEaeoNewr ,3 301/x' oR 3211/NI' lion E Pts 4'Itorn NBa17rOFN00e I P...4 ar' 7030' M1s- moooiwa SUWAM WOLF COOKTOP VENTILATION OVERALL DIMENSIONS Cooktop Island Hood lir 12' Nstl t f~l Seen V i n 339he 1o 4711W 11►S 4e (e60- IMS) iat) OVEN"Heaw J L She OWEPALLWOnt I ~ovavs~oemt~t ) ~P54 NOM" Mecca OF H= 0 SPECIFICATIONS Model M227 Overall Width 42-(1007) Overall Height 91/4,035) (excluding chimney) Overall Height 3391s' (963) (Including chimney) Maximum Height 471+9' (1195) (full extension) Overall Depth 27' (898) Bottom of Hood to Cooking Surface 241 (610) to 30' (782) Duct Size 8' (203) Round Discharge Vertical Blower Options' G00 or 900 CFM Internal 600, 900, 1200 or 1 SOD, CFM Remote Electrical Supply 110112O V AC, GO Hz 1S amp dedicated ci )ma Shipping Weight 110 be (50 kg) (shell only) -Refer to the cooktop vent&ODn recommendations on page 84. VENTILATION GUIDE For detailed spee)fleatkone on all Won ventilation products, refer to the Won Ventilation Guide found on the Waif webake, woNappllanceAmm. INSTALLATION Refer to the installa- tion irntruedone shipped with each Wolf product far detailed specifica- tions. Oimens►ons in parentheses are in mlp►meters unless otherwise specified. 6a W TOW zr Tow oM;;L 7/N~oUGM PAS-W" P194M TWOFMOOO ROHM Tocoo"a CBDRi HOOK SURFACE INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS Cooktop Island Hood C d BLOWER CONSIDERATIONS Wolf cooktop wall and island hoods are shipped without the blower assembly. Internal or remote blower assemblies are available. For wall hoods, the remote blower can be mounted on the roof or an exterior wall. For Island hoods, the remote blower wiN be mounted on the roof. The blower will vary in size and is dictated by the cooking surface. the volume of air that needs VENTILATION to be moved and the length of the duct run. A GUIDE straight, short duct run with a limited number of elbows and transitions will allow the ventilation For detailed hood to perform most efficiently. spectticadons on A remote mounted blower will minimize the all Wolf ventilation products, refer to the amount of blower noise, but will not eliminate wolf VentNatton the noise completely. All remote blowers will Guide found on the require a transition to a 10* (264) duct. Wolf webafte. waltappllance.cotn. IMPORTANT NOTE: Install this ventilation hood only with a Wolf blower. WOLF COOKTOP VENTILATION DUCTING CONSIDERATIONS IMPORTANT NOTE: All Wolf ventilation hoods must be vented to the outside. Use only metal ductwork. Wolf cooktop wall hoods have an 8* (203) round vertical discharge. Ducting can run through the roof or an external wall. The island hood has an 8' (203) round vertical discharge. Ducting can run through the roof or through an save. Refer to the illustrations below. Local building codes may require the use of make-up air. Consult your local WAC profes- sional for specific requirements in your area. Refer to the cooktop ventilation recommenda- tions on page 84. DUCTING CONSIDERATIONS Cooktop Wall Hoods Cooktop Island Hood DUCMIORKRISOK1AMON 7NIIOUG" OOF ! ' NOIWOWN SWALMON 7t610lIBNRODF ROWCAPORR13107EBLOWER ROOF CAP OR REMOVE KOO" i t r 0" ROUND DUCt I rpes►ROUNDOUOT , 1 VOLL CAP 1 j CIPANEY FLUE EXTENB10D OR RENOIE PLOWER I x1208) FMNO ELBOW r d 7EEBOOPIO CNa80EY FLUE-i N CHIMNEV FLUE EXiE1NION ( OUt7WOlK ELBOW 1 EAYEVENT AEIOIIBAMOM V 008) ROUND ELBOW --T tAIC7WORICBI50U0A71O 'DwMaNW" 1 IELEBOOPIO OMMIEY FLUE } - rt"ROUNDDUOr i r1208) ROUNDDUCT i r p"ROUND rpmFOM° - vEmlcx DlBaUr+6E ---i--- Vew"CAL Dls awRDE ` d OR eve yr CHONAM NDOO j .+a•TR~aI Bs i 21' a ' 2r as 04 r airio3V ~ . OOq q•11~R1ACE - COOP N~D•s NVACE - mstmatw VEeINg10NNOOD 1 loeataFa VeFRARONNOOD i I f i I 70 0 WOLF PRO VENTILATION WOLF PRO VENTILATION HOODS Wolf Pro wall and island hoods provide the ultimate in ventilation. With standard elements MODEL OPTIONS like heat sentry and dual-setting halogen lighting, Pro Ventilation Hoods Wolf elevates the need for ventilation to an enjoyable perk. Low Profile Pro Wall Hoods L prMpe yyay ►lood The deepest of the Wolf Pro wail hoods, the 30" 17821'' W302ZtOP 38' (914) Width W382210 27• (886) model provides an additional exclusive W3822101• feature-heat lamps. Hosting your dream dinner - ' party end the warming drawer is already filled? 42 (1067) Width W422210 ' Not a problem. TUm on your heat lamps and (1219) Width W482210 48 tcr,rProlHe VWN Ileod relax. 24'(610) Deep Pro Wag Hoods 04 pelt OpUm Pro wall and island hoods are recommended for 30" (782) Width W302418 use with all Wolf cooking appliances with the 36" (914) Width W362418 the following exceptions. The low-profile wall 42" (1067) Width W422418 CZ7~ hoods cannot be used with dual fuel ranges, 48 (1219) Width VV482418 gas ranges and rangetops with a charbroiler or 54" (1372) Width W542418 24" (e101 was Hood griddle. The 24' (810) deep wall hoods are not 60' 11524) Width VVM418 recommended for use with dual fuel ranges. 66' (1676) Width W662418 gas ranges and rangetops with a charbroiler 27• (610) Deep Pro Wall Hoods or griddle. 30" (762) Width W302718 All Pro wall and island hoods are available in 36" (914) Width W362718 classic stainless steel. Rail option hoods (R) 42' (1067) Width W422718 24' 010) V64 Hood come with a classic stainless steel decorative rail 48-11219) Width W482718 W4 Rail Option and stand-offs. Optional platinum and brass rails 54" (1372) Width W547718 to match the dual fuel range bezels are available 60' (1524) Width W602718 as sales accessories. 66' (1876) Width W662718 IS7~ j Pro Island Hoods 36' (914) Width 1383418 27.19" Ws4 Hood 42'(1087) Width 1423418 54'(1372) Width 1543418 68'(1676) Width !683418 cz~~ '(1) Modeis include 6000FM internal blower. Well Hood Models without decorative raWs) fisted,- for IM Option RA ai hoods with rail(s) add (R) to the model number. IMPORTANT NOTE: The bw-profile wall hoods cannot be used with duel fuel ranges, 9" ranges and rangotops with a dwbnoilsr or griddle. The 24' (610) daw wall hoods we rat recommended for use with dual fuel ranges. gas ranges and rangetops with a chwbroiler or grid Island Hood <C~~- Wan.' Hood (10 Rai Option r Dimensions in parentheses are in millimeters unless otherwise specified. 0 0 WOLF WARRANTY Wolf products are covered by a two and five veer residential warranty (excktslons apply). see warranty details at the end of this guide. FEATURES 22' (559), 24" (610), 27' (686) deep wall ventilation hoods in a variety of widths with classic stainless steel finish Island ventilation hoods in a variety of widths with classic stainless steel finish Roll option wall hoods (R) come with a classic stainless steel decorative rail and stand-offs- optional platinum or brass rail available to match dual fuel range bezels Rail option island hoods (R) come with classic stainless steel decorative rails and stand-offs for both sides of the hood-optional platinum or brass rails available to match dual fuel range bezels Internal or remote blower options Heavy-duty 16-gauge brushed stainless steel construction Stainless steel enclosed liner PRO VENTILATION HOOD FEATURES Model W482718R shown Beckdraft damper Stainless baffle fine eo seams and % and hemmed edges Halogen lighting Infnhrspeed Ventfatol control WOLF PRO VENTILATION Continually welded seams, hemmed edges and sides, and hand-finished craftsmanship Recessed easy-access controls Infinite-speedventilator control heat sentrtftsiuie automatically turns unit on when heat is'llpUW and automatically adjusts blower speed Halogen lighting with two settings Hest lamps on 27' (686) deep wall hoods- two R40 250-watt maximum bulbs required (bulbs not included) Removable, easy-to-clean restaurant-grade stainless steel baffle filters and drip trays Transition with backdraft damper included UL listed to US and Canadian safety standards UL approved for covered outdoor applications Ive rai- ots Recessed easy- case convols ACCESSORIES E Contact your Wbff Dealer z Platfmsn or brass datorstiw raft 1 and standoffs, 6' (tab end 112'0M classic stakdoos stool duct covers 38' (gee) high classic stainless steel bseksplash 38' (965) high classic stainless stool backsplash with warming rack 'Accessory not available for every model. 76 Hand-fkiished Classic stainless craftsmanship steel finish WOLF PRO VENTILATION PLANNING INFORMATION Pro 22' (569) deep low-profile wall hoods are available in 30' (762), 36' (914).42' (1067) and 48' (1219) widths. (1) models include a 600 cfm internal blower. These hoods cannot be used with dual fuel ranges, gas ranges and rangetops with a charbroiler or griddle. Pro 24' (610) deep well hoods are available in 30' (762). 36' (914), 42" (1067). 48' (1219), 54' (1372), 60' (1524) and 66' (1676) widths. These hoods are not recommended for use with dual fuel ranges, gas ranges and rangetops with a charbroiler or griddle. Pro 27' (686) deep wall hoods we available in 30' (762), 36' (914), 42' (1087). 48' (1219). 64- (1372). 60" (1524) and 66' (1676) widths. Pro island hoods are available in 36' (914),42' (1067). 54" (1372) and 66' (1676) widths. Specifications on the following pages provide overall dimensions, blower and ducting consider- ations, and installation specifics for Pro wall and island hoods. Also refer to the Pro ventilation recommendations on pages 86-86. The overall dimensions illustrations include the optional rail dimensions. Overall width, height and depth dimensions will remain the same if a decorative rail is not to be used. Pro wall hoods should be at least as wide as the cooking surface; an overlap of 3' (76) on either side is recommended. Island hoods should always be larger then the cooking surface by a minimum of 3' (76) on each side. Installation of all Pro wall and island hoods should be 30' (762) to 36" (914) from the bottom of the hood to the cooking surface. Optional classic stainless steel duct covers are available in heights of 6' (152) and 12' (305) for all Pro wall and Island hoods. Dimensions in parentheses are in minimeters unless orherwlse specified. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Wolf Pro wall and island hoods require a separate, grounded 120 V. 60 Hz power supply. The service should have its own 16 amp circuit breaker. Placement of the electrical supply is not critical, as long as you provide a minimum of 6' (1.8 m) of 120 V AC power cable. Note that for some wall hoods, placement of the electrical supply will differ between vertical and horizontal discharge locations. Refer to pages 82-83 for blower and ducting considerations to determine discharge location. Locate electrical within the shaded area shown in the Installation Specifications illustration for your model. IMPORTANT NOTE: A ground fault circuit Interrupter (GFCI) is not recommended and may cause interruption of operation. You must follow all National Electrical Code regulations. In addition, be aware of local codes and ordinances when installing your service. VENTILATION GUIDE For detail" specNicathwa on all WbIf ventiatom products.-fa to the Wolf Ventilstlon guide found on the Wolf website, woHapplianoe.com. ACCESSORIES Optional accessories are available through your Wolf dealer, or call Wolf Appliance at 8110.332.9613. You can also visit our v+ebsits at Wolfapp0arrce.corn and click on the accessories section for your specific model. 77 j WOLF PRO VENTILATION SPECIFICATIONS Low-Profile Pro Wan Hoods Overall Width W3022101• 30' (782) W382210 30'1914) W3=1010 38-(814) W422210 42' (1067) W482210 48'(1218) Overall Height 10-9254) Overall Depth 22' (568) exckx*V rail Bottom of Hood. to Cooking Surface 30' (782) to 38' (814) Duct Size 8- (203) Round Discharge Vertical or Horizontal Blower Options'' 600 or 800 CFM Rsmwta Electrical Supply 1101120 V AC, 80 Hz 15 amp dedicated circuit Shipping Weight 39-55 lbs (18-25 kg) (shell only) -Models W30221 Of and YV3622IOf include a 800 CFM internal blower and are vertical discharge only. "Blower options vary with the size of hood and cooking surface. Refer to the Pro ventilation recommendations on pages 85-86. SPECIFICATIONS 24' (610) Deep Pro Wen Foods Overall Width W302418 30'(762) W362418 38- (814) W422418 42'(1087) W482416 48"(1219) W542418 54'(1372) W602418 80-(1624) W662418 88' (1676) Overall Height 18-(457) Overall Depth 24.4610) exekxlkq rall Bottom of Hood to Cooking Surface 30- (782) to 38' (914) Duct Size 10' (264) Round Discharge Vertical or Horizontal Bkmw Optional 900 or 1200 CFM Internal 800.900 1200 or 1600 CFM Remote Electrical Supply 110/120 V AC, 80 Hz 15 amp dedicated circuit Shipping Weight 67-126 be (30-57 kg) (shell only) 'Blower options vary with the size of hood and cooking surface. Refer to the Pro ventilation recommendations on pages 85-86. NOTE: The 900 CFM internal blower is vertical discharge only. 78 OVERALL DIMENSIONS Low-Profile Pro Wan Hoods 12, 3/r itch DUMEIER irk OF RAIL OVERALL Irma "Dow OVER"INNUM ~ I r 24- (610) Deep Pro Wag Hoods F-30 tr"M 3,• tilt OVERALL D)MIETER HEX*1r OF RVL rtia4 -ONERAIIYathTN~ k-7.~.RIALNEEM ~bt) 27- (686) Deep Pro Wall Foods ~1r~ 13os1 trs *epq OVERIIII DWAIETER htEKatT OF RAIL ~OwEl11LLYYID7/t~ OVERALL 9") Pro Wand Hoods TOPYADTH ~IMfWWTKN01~~1~ -T-~~ 1 1 woo DtANE161 OVERALL Hoff OFRAL malt - f-- ovEtwt tatq►t Old ~orEaaDEaat~ ~fftl Dlmenaions may vary to t'A' 0L Dimensions in parentheses are In rMlkrheters unless otherwise speeiNed WOLF PRO VENTILATION INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS Pro Wall Hoods SPECIFICATIONS 27' (886) Deep Pro Well Hoods a onn t C r M 1 OWALOtOVAM "M D) a~ locama I 4 t r Honnaocu w~at IMMaHDOD 30'103r Z:.*." Ssmrx4 1 INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS Pro Island Hoods wrolHaHOOO INSTALLATION Refer to the Installation instructions shipped with each Wolf product for detailed specifications. it l(•snh aaooD 30' To3a' IaL To~cooi" ~ la9 sueaca Dance HOOD I MEOW / haahn OF Horn - 3$ peg - DEPIH or HooD 3w W 31r (M-0141 T0oo01aia BLWFN t Overall Width W302718 30' (762) W352718 36' 014) W422718 42'(1067) W492718 48'(1219) W542719 54' (1372) W602718 60'(15241 W662718 88' (1676) Overall Height 19' (457) Ovend Depth 27' (686) excluding rail Bottom of Hood to Cooking Surface 30' (782) to 36' (914) Duct Size 10' 0254 Round Discharge Verdeal Blower Options* 900 or 1200 CFM Internal 600. 900.1200 or 1500 CFM Rertwts Electrical Supply 110/120 V AC, SO Hz 15 amp dedicated circuit Shipping Weight 69-128 be (31-58 kg) (shell only) '81ower options vary with the size of food and cooking surface Refer to the Pro vanNletion recommendations on pages 86-86. SPECIFICATIONS Pro Isbnd Hoods Overall Width 1363418 36-(914) 1423418 42'(1OiM 1543418 54'(1372) 1683418 68'(1876) Overall Height 18" (457) Overall Depth 34' 0") excluding raft Bottom of Hood to Cooking Surface 30' 0182) to 36' (914) Duct size 10- (254) Round Discharge Vertical Blower Options- 1200 CFM Internal 900 1200 or 1500 CFM Remab Electrical Supply 110/ 120 V AC- eO Hz 15 arnp dedicated circuit Shipping Weight 95-168 be (43-76 kg) (shell only) ,1310 r options vary with the size of hood arid cooking surface. Refer to the Pro ventilation recornrnendabons on pages 85-88. 79 J LOCATIMM 68CTFICAL CENTEAED71 FURM1o►a HOW WOLF PRO VENTILATION 0 Pro Hood Liner VENTILATION GUIDE For detailed speaficatImm on all Wolf ventilation products, refer to the Wolf Verkiation Gulde found on the Wolf websits, wol►eppliance.corn. WOLF PRO HOOD LINERS Wolf Pro hood liners allow you to incorporate superior ventilation within your kitchen design. Whether you prefer French country or modernist. the Pro hood liners take care of the interior design, with true superior ventilation. AN you have to do is decide what it will look like. Sometimes referred to as power packs, these liners bring all of the controls, fighting end convenience of our new ventilation line for those applications with a custom exterior treatment. Wolf Pro hood liners are recommended for use with all Wolf cooking appliances and are avail able to accommodate 30' (762), 36' (914), 42' (1067).48" (1219), 54' (1372) and 60' (1524) wide hoods. PLANNING INFORMATION Pro hood liners are available to accommodate 30' (762), 36" (914). 42' (1067), 48' (1219). 54' (1372) and 60' (1524) wide hoods. (1) models include a 600 cfm internal blower. The ventilation hood should be at feast as wide as the cooking surface. It is recommerxied that the hood overlap the cooking surface by 3' (76) on either side. Installation of all Pro hood liners should be 30' (762) to 36' (914) from the bottom of the deco- rative hood to the cooking surface. The specifications provide overall dimensions and Installation specifics for Pro hood friers. Refer to pages 82-93 for blower and ducting considerations and pages 85-88 for Pro ventilation recommendations. ACCESSORIES Optimal secesaortes are available through your Wont dealer, or call Wolf Appliance at 800.332.8813. You can also visit our webeite at woifappRance.com and click on the accessories section for your specNio model. FEATURES Stainless steel enclosed finer with seamed construction internal or remote blower options Recessed easy-access controls Variable-speed ventilator control Heat sentry feature automatically turns unit on when heat is sensed and automatically adjusts blower speed Halogen fighting with two settings Removable, easy-to-clean restaurant-grade stainless steel baffle fillers Transition with backdraft damper included MODEL OPTIONS Pro Hood Liter For 30" (782) Hood L28221210 For 36' (914) Hood L342212 For 42' (1087) Hood L402212 For 48' (1219) Hood L462212 For 54'(1372) Hood L522212 For 80' (1524) Hood L582212 '(I) Model kwkxdes 6000FM internal blower. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Wolf Pro hood liners require a separate, grounded 120 V. 60 Hz power supply. The service should have its own 15 amp circuit breaker. Placement of the electrical supply is not critical, as long as you provide a minimum of 6' (1.8 m) of 120 V AC power cable. Locate electrical within the shaded area shown in the Installation Specifications Illustration. IMPORTANT NOTE A ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) is not recommended and may cause interruption of operation. You must follow all National Electrical Code regulations. In addition, be aware of local codes and ordinances when installing your service. ACCESSORIES Contact your Wont Dseler 38' (986) high cessls stainless i steel beckspissh 38' (866) high Classic Stainless steel backsplash with warming rack 40 WOLF PRO VENTILATION OVERALL DIMENSIONS Model L2a22721 SPECIFICATIONS 22W MR Pro Hood Liners Pei Inl I POR Overall Width L2822121 28%'(721) L342212 34%* (M) rp" 1eL L402212 4031s' 1102g) neestr 4'0M L462212 46%* (1178) t L522212 52318'(1330) (1 o v oiN I t` L L682212 O5v82212 erall ) ' MS) Height 1 122' 51 Overall Depth 22112' (572) Pro Hood Uners (except Model L2822121) rawont ausrtNerr pall ttnwaeuatwont (h om ----I xM Bottom of Hood to Cooking Surface 30' (762) to 38' (814) Duct Size 8' (203) and 10' (264) Round Discharge Vertical Blower Options' 1200 CFM Internal 900, 1200 or 1500 CFM Remote Electrical Supply 1101120 V AC, 601-1z 15 amp dedicated circuit Shipping Weight 39-65 be (18-29 kg) (shell only) it goal ovEMfl HELM r 4'nozl 22th' SS>4 svsr+ur_oErm Dimensions may vary to t h/s' (3). INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS Pro Hood Lkrers LOCIU NerhlEC"WX r Ihtoi Ell, oEeohvane:N000 --is, ~ M hwoottrEa WDMOFLgm 37 to3r Oet-eM tocaaeha 18lower options vary with the size of hood and cooking surface. Refer to the Pro vonb7ation recommendations on pages 85-M DECORATIVE HOOD A decorative hood can be created out of wood, plaster, the or metal. The shape of the decorative hood is not critical. The only place where the liner and outside cover must meet is at the bottom edge of the metal toner. The decorative hood and finer must fit at the bottom edge In both width and depth. The height of the Mnsr dose flat have to be the same as the height of the decorative hood and Is generally shorter. The top depth of the Miter, which Is 12' PM standard, must be lose than the interior depth of the decorative Med. Measure the interior dapdh of the hood at the top height of the toner to maize suss the Ww will fit inside the decorative hood. The hood toner conies standard with a 4' (102) lower reveal. Be aura to km*bft this dimension in your decorative hood salvo tion. Always use the Interior messuretnents of the decorethm hood and measure In multiple places. Use the smallest dimen- sions to verify hood liner specHice0ons. Dimensions in parentheses are in 1j nvNinetars hatless otherwise specified 81 WOLF PRO VENTILATION 0 0 VENTILATION GUIDE For detailed spsciflontlons on as Wolf ventilation products. refer to the V" veno"lon Guide found on the Wolf webeke. woUappsance.corn. BLOWER CONSIDERATIONS Wall hood Models W3022101 and W3622101 come with internal blowers. AN other Pro wall and island hoods are shipped without the blower assembly. Internal or remote blower assemblies are available. For Pro well hoods, the remote blower can be mounted on the roof or an exterior wall. For island hoods, the remote blower will be mounted on the roof. Hood liner Model L2822121 comes with an internal blower. AN other Pro hood liners are shipped without the blower assembly. Internal or remote blower assemblies are available. For Pro hood liners, the remote blower will be mounted on the roof. DUCTING CONSIDERATIONS Pro 22' (559) and 24' (610) Deep Wad Hoods i RDDrcAVORREAIDIEelavel r 1101eODUGrpt OHOOD) wRODUOwcr W oNOOOI sofnanemwer ORDUOTCOPM w tall-z""WD 16'1168-WDN=0 WALLNOOD le / 1 ~--uL- oenMaaooo 3rioar Me-eM ooORrl9SWV%= VEMAM"Now 3r aa► IOCO , SUMACS DUcwjom IffWALM M 1 TRAMSmolr• I~.~uwTOrROUO 22-14WxrD~70 W FKx IO ` WH OM HOCO - VERRCALDISMARDE rAULCA► oRREiroreeiorrER oucR+arMr~swLMnM 7NgUCIrVMIL D~SC7YVIDE COUM i ~ 0L cocomner -wina~onsmRiRNamDM ~ INOUNKen A N" The blower assemblies are quite varied, and depending on the amount of air you want to move and the length of the duct run, you have many options. A straight, short duct run with a limited number of elbows and transitions will allow the ventilation hood to perform most efficiently. A remote-mounted blower will minimize the amount of blower noise. but will not eliminate the noise completely. IMPORTANT NOTE: Install this ventilation hood or hood liner only with a Wolf blower. Refer to the Pro ventilation recommendations on pages 85-86. Pro 27' (686) Deep Wall Foods ~ Duc~wo7ecMSauMIOM ROOF CAP OR FIEN OTE KAXAM I 7r ROLMD DUOt 1090 ON, SOFTFORGAeSET u-ra N.roIownano OAD=Coum am VENWJ&DISOIMRSE t wArLHOOo R OF HOOD HEK 3o•TO3r CoacrlsoiRRlc e toeonown VOM MONHOO D i I t IMFI JNDI MOVAGEISOW APPOCAUR ONWWALL HOODS j0*ftW2=W WA ' "I" ' MOWWALLHOODSUSEDWRHAWKQVMW M M47MORMMWWRESOre KW WK0NER4UW P0MQ a ROT FORUSE IN NDFRONpLOMMAAGEA PUCAMM 3T pal 7000Qeie SUAFAL! M MCALDISOOM CNIr F0A2r PM 0EEP WAIL HOODS TMENWNS FOR 7RANUMN MCILCES FLANGE& 82 WOLF PRO VENTILATION DUCTING CONSIDERATIONS IMPORTANT NOTE: AU Wolf ventilation hoods must be vented to the outside. Use only metal Wolf Pro 22" (558) and 24" (610) deep W80 hoods have an adjustable discharge location that can run vertically or horimntally. Horizontal discharge is only applicable on 22" (669) wall hoods (excluding W3022101 and W3622100 and 24" (610) wall hoods used with a WBLOWER- 120INT or any Wolf remote blower. WBLOWER- 901NT is not for use in horizontal discharge applications. in a horizontal discharge application. additional framework may be needed to accommodate the remote blower. Consult your local HVAC professional for specific requirements in this application. DUCTING CONSIDERATIONS Pro Island Hoods i I I RDOFCWpf ReJDI[BlOr1ER \ i W ROUND MVP A I Wolf Pro 27" (686) deep wall hoods and Pro island hoods have a vertical discharge location. Wolf Pro hood liners also have a vertical discharge location. Refer to the illustrations below for ducting considerations for Pro wall and island hoods and hood liners. Local building codes may require the use of make-up air. Consult your local HVAC profes- sional for specific requirements in your area. Refer to the Pro ventilation recommendations on pages 85-86. Pro Hood Liners OUCIIWIYI NSOULLATpN ~ 7HROt10H ROOF i TRAMPnOIr - SOF7[CANN"Un 14-VWWxW07OWROUND DUCTOOER 1/'IL I DISCHARGE 7ri4m MLANDHOOD IEMKOFHOOD 3W'PD 9r 7oeDnDMOr Ve11e/Y10R HOM 3rolo -W, I SURFAM i vEfO1CK DeCIRRriON.Y POR MIND HDO0.i Dimensions in parentheses are in ffmAmeters unless otherwise specified ROOFCAPOR R1DAOM SLOWER rRaE000Crltatt7sl- w RdeO ollCr yu OiIli1U ►Ney SOMORCANOW ORMW OVER OF.CONNVEHDOO Irma j HOOOURBI HEWWOFLINFR 1 I I-- 222W PM - pit. t•M 7oeorlDEa OEOORMIFEMOD INSTALLATION Refer to the J 0 Instniatlorls sh%W" with each Wolf product for detailed speclfleatlons. i l 7RMlTOM t 17dY1ra4-HPD7erROUNO ! on R +RI 1 i MWWAVDIOW ODEII INER$ VOWALOMOVF" INMEIONNS FOR7RA1 NIM NCIUDFS FINUOES e~ WOLF VENTILATION RECOMMENDATIONS COOKTOP VENTILATION © Minimum CFM Recommendations for Cooktops and Modules Cooktop Wall Hoods Downdraft Systems CT WH30 00301 CTiSE/S, CT15G/S. CT151/S 215 CFM• CT15E/S, CT15G/S, CT151/S, IM75/S 215 CFM• IS15/S, IM15/S 215 CFM' CT30E. CT30G 500 CFM IG15/S, IF15/S 400 CFM• OD30R CT30E, CT30EU, CT30(i 450 CFM CT15E/S, Cf15G/S. CT15VS, IM15/S 215 CFM• CTWH38 CT3OE. CT3OG 800 CFM CFM CT15E/S. CT15G/S, CT15US 216 CFM• DD381 Recommendations 0151S, IM15/S 216 CFM• . CT15E/S, CT15G/S, CT15VS, IM15/S 216 CFM• ere based on total iG16/S , tF1 tF15/3 51S Cam 400 CT30E. CT30G. CT36E, CT3BG 500 CFM Btupw output. wolf CT30G, CT38G CT30E. 800 CFM recommends 1 CFM Cf30EU. CT36EU 600 CFM DD36R per 100 Stu/hr CT15E/S. CT15G/S, CT15VS. IM15/S 215 CFM' C03 kWh). Additional CT3OE, Cf30G, CT36E. CT35G 900 CFM CFM may be required Cooktop Island Hood for eharbroilers, Downdraft systems cannot be used with Models griddles and long IH4227 C730EU or CT36EU and are not recommended for use duct runs. CT15E/S. CT15G/S. Cr15VS 215 CFM• with Models 1G 15/S fS15/S or 1FIU& IS151S, IM15/5 215 CFM• IG15/S, IF15/S 400 CFM• Pro Ventilation Hoods CT30E, CT36E, CT30G, CT36G 600 CFM HVAC CT30EU. CT36EU 600 CFM Wal Hoods / Island Hoods / Hood Liners CT15E/S, CT75G✓S, CT15VS 215 CFM• Slower eonffguretions IM15/S 215 CFM• 'Use these recommendations to determine total CFM IG15/S iF15/S 400 CFM' are, for reference , for installation of mLddpfe cooktops or modules. a~ Freese refer to 800 CFM Cr30EU, CT3 G CT30E• mkdmum CFM nxom- mendatlons for your Natural s cooktop models listecg CFM recommendations ~ C(36E, Cf 38EU. CT35 800 CFM G are the same for LP gas models. specific cooktop or module. Always consult a qualified HVAC Engineer for- specHtcapplications. COOKTOP VENTILATION BLOWER OPTIONS Cooktop Ventilation Hoods Blower Description Bower Number Cooktop Hood Models 450 CFM Internal CfSLOVVER-451NT (801843) CTVVH30 600 CFM Internal CPBLOWER-601NT (801644) CTWH38 / IH4227 - - - - - 800 CFM Internal CTWHW / IN4227 CTSLOWER-90WT (801646) 600 CFM Remote CTBL0WER460REM (801840) CTWH30 / CTWH38 / IH4227 900 CFM Remote CTBLOWER-90REM (801641) CTWH30 / CTWH30 / IH4227 - V 1200 CFM Remote CTWH30 / CTVVH36 / IH4227 CT13LOWER-120REM (801642) - _ - - 1500 CFM Remote y C WH30 / CTYVH381 IN4227 CTBLOWER-15OREM (604701) - - A*ntsble diachega %#th 8- W M round duct for well hoods. vertical dochorge for Island hood. Dsrultion he not required for Internal blowers remote blowers requwa TRANS-8-10. Backdraft drnpn kxdudsd with we/ and island hoods. Dowrldraft Systems BkwAw Description 500 CFM Internal Included with p) Models DD301 / DD301 900 CFM Remote CTBLOWER-90REM (801641) DD30R / D03SR 1200 CFM Remote CTBLOWER-12OREM (801642) DD30K / DD36R 1500 CFM Remote CTBLOWER-15OREM (804701) OD30R / D0369 Adjustable discharge. 3114" (83) x 10" (2641 duct for lntemal blo,"r, no transition required. 3'1." (83) x 14" (254) duct for remote bknwers, TRANS-14.10 required. Dimensions in parentheses we in 04 millimaters unless otherwise specified. WOLF VENTILATION RECOMMENDATIONS PRO VENTILATION Minimum CFM Recommendation for Ranges and Rangetops Low-Profile Pro W20 Hoods W3022101 / W3622101 / W362210 DF304, 8304 600 CFM W3622101 / W362210 / W422210 DF366, 8366. RT388. RT382F 900 CFM W41=10 DF484F, R484F, RT484F 800 CFM Low,prof" WON hoods cannot be used with a range or rangerop with charbroger (C) or griddle (G)- 24' (610) Deep Pro WON Hoods W302418 / W362418 DF304. R304 800 CFM W362418 / W422418 DF366. DF364C'. DF364G' 900 CFM 8366. R364C', R364G' 900 CFM RT365, RT364C'. RT364G', RT362F 900 CFM W4824181 W542418 DF484CG', DF484DC', DF484DG'. DF484F 900 CFM R484CG', R484DC'. R484DG•. PA84F 900 CFM R482CF ; RT484CG', RT484DC. RT484DG' 900 CFM RT484F, RT482CF- 900 CFM DF486C'. DF486G' 1200 CFM R488. R486C', R486G' 1200 CFM RT488, RT488C', RT486G' 1200 CFM W602418 / W662418 DF604CF'. OF604GFN 1200 CFM R604CF'. R604GF' 1200 CFM DF605CG', DF606OC'. DF606OG', DF606F 1500 CFM RSO6CG•, R6OBDC•, MWDG'. R606F 1500 CFM '24' (610) deep wag hoods are not recommended for use with a range or rangotop with charbroiler (C) or griddle (G). 27' (688) Deep Pro Wall HOW* VV302718 / W362719 DF304, 11304 600 CFM VV382718 / W422718 DF368. OF364C, DF3840 800 CFM R366. R364C. R3840 900 CFM RT366. RT364C. RT384G. RT362F 900 CFM W482718 I W542718 DF484CG. DF48413C, DF484DM DF484F 900 CFM R484CG. R4840C, R484DG. R484F 900 CFM R482CF. RT484CG. RT484M RT484OG 800 CFM RT484F, RT482CF 800 CFM DF48M DF4WG 1200 CFM R486. R488C. R48BG 1200 CFM RT488. RT486C. RT486G 1200 CFM W802718 / VVSW18 DF604CF. DF604GF 1200 CFM 11604CF, R604GF 1200 CFM DF606CG. DF606DC. DF606DG, DF60OF 1500 CFM R606CG. R606DC.116061)(3, R606F 1500 CFM Pro Island Hoods 136341811423419 DF304, 8304 800 CFM 1423418 DF366, DF364C. DF384G 800 CFM 8388. R384C. R364G 900 CFM RT388. RT364C. RT364G. RT382F 900 CFM 1643418 DF484CG, DF48413C. DF484DG. DF484F 900 CFM R484CG, R484DC. R484DG, R484F 800 CFM R482CF, RT484CG, RT484DC, BT484DG 900 CFM RT484F.RT482CF 900 CFM DF486C. OF48OG 1200 CFM R488, R486C, R48OG 1200 CFM RT48B. RT486C. RT486G 1200 CFM 1663418 DF604CF. DF604GF 1200 CFM R604CF,R604GF 1200 CFM DF606CG, DFWSDC, DFWSDG. DF606F 1500 CFM R606CG. R60613C. RB08DG. R606F 1500 CFM Pro Hood Liners L2822121 DF304. 8304 600 CFM L3422t2 / L402212 DF368, DF384C, DF384G 900 CFM 11368. R364C. R384G 900 CFM RT366, RT364C, RT364G, RT362F 800 CFM L462212/L522212 DF484CG. DF48413C, DF484DG. DF484F 900 CFM R484CG. R484DC, R484DG, R484F 900 CFM R482CR RT484CG, RT484DC. RT484DG 900 CFM RT484F, RT482CF 900 CFM DF488C, DF48OG 1200 CFM 1`1411% R486C, R486G 1200 CFM RT488. RT486C. RT4B8G 1200 CFM LG=12 DF804CF, DF804GF 1200 CFM R804CF. R604GF 1200 CFM OF608M DF606DC. DF806DG. DF606F 1500 CFM R808CG. R606DC, R60800. R606F 1500 CFM #*UWsl gas range and mrWtop modals listed; CFM recommendations are dw same for LP gas mods)s. md CFM Reeonmendstions are based an total recommends 1 CFM per 100 Btu/hr 1.03 ItWhl_ Additional CFM may be required for charbroliers, griddles and long duet runs. VENTILATION GUIDE For detailed speciflcathma on an Wolf ventilation products. . refer to the Wolf Ventilation Quids found an the Wolf wsbsite. wolfappgsnes.conu 85 C 0 HVAC Blower configurations are for reference onl% Plesae refer to minimum CFM recom- mondedons for your specific cooktop or module. Always consult a qualified HVAC Engineer for specific applications. PRO VENTILATION BLOWER OPTIONS Low-Profile Pro Wall Hoods WOLF VENTILATION RECOMMENDATIONS Blower Description Blower Number Wall Hood Models 600 CFM Internal' Incktded with 0) Models VV3022101 / 03622101 600 CFM Remote CT13LOVVER-GORF-M (801640) VV362210 / W422210 / 0482210 800 CFM Remote - - CTBL0WER480REM (801641) - - - VV362210 / 0422210 / W482210 'Vertical discharge with 8- (203) round duct Remote blowers are adjustabb discharge with 8- (203) round duct: 24' (610) Deep Pro Wall Hoods Blower Description Blower Number Wall Hood Models 900 &M Interna * WBLOWER-809fT (806086) ^ VV302418 / W362418 / W422418 1200 CFM Internal VVBLOVVER-1201NT (804702) W482418 / W542418 / 0602418 / We62418 800 CFM Remote ~CTBLOWER-60REM (801640) - VV302418 900 CFM Remote - CTBLOWER-90REM (801841) W302418 / W362418 / W422418 / W482418 / 0542418 1200 CFM Remote CTBLOWER-12OREM (901642) AN 24- (610) Deep Wall Hoods 1500 CFM Remote -CTBLOWER-150REM (80470i) AN 24' (810) Deep Wa11 Hoods 'Vertical discharge with 10'(264) round duct. All other blowers are adustable discharge with 10' 1254) round duct. VENTILATION 27' (686) Deep Pro Wall Hoods GUIDE Blower Description Blower Number Wall Hood Models ^ For detailed 900 CFM Internal WSLOWER-BWNT (805086) 0302718 / VV382718 / W422718 speaRcations on ale Wolf ventilation 1200 CFM Internal WBLOVVEFI-120INT (804702) W482718 / VV542718 / W602718 / WGW718 pry refer to the 600 CFM Renate CTBLOWER-80REM (801640) 0302718 Wolf Wntilstion Guide found on the 900 CFM Remote CTBLOWER-90REM (801841) W302718 / WW2718 / VV422718 /W482718 / 0542718 VYcIL wsbeite' 1200 CFM Remote ~ CTBLOWER-12OREM (801642) All 27' (886) Deep Wall Hoods woMappilance.com, 1500 CFM Remote CTBLOWER-15OREM (804701) AN 27' (688) Deep VOM Hoods Vertical discharge with 1 0' (254) round duct Pro Island Hoods Blower Description - Blower Number - - Island Hood Models v-----~ 1200 CFM Internal ISLOWER-12WNT (804703) All Island Hoods ' - - - 900 CFM Remote - -CTBLOWER-90REM (801841) - 1383418 / 1423418 /1543418 1200 CFM Remote CTBLOWER-12OREM (801842) AN Leland Hoods 1500 CFM Remote CTBLOWE1-15OREM (804701) AN Island Hoods - _ VbrNcsl discharge with 10' (264) round duct. Pro Hood Linen Blower Description Slower Number Hood Liner Models 800 CFM Internal' btcklded with (h Mode( 1.2822121 1200 CFM Internal LBLOVVER-120INT (805087) AN Hood Liners (except L2822121) 900 CFM Remote CTBLOWER-80REM (801841) - - AN Hood Liners (except L2822121) 4 ^ _ 1200 CFM Remote-.._ CTBLOWER-12OREM (801642) _ AN Hood Linen (,...pt 1.2922121) 1500 CFM Remote CTBLOWER-15OREM (804701) All Hood Liners lexcept L28221211 'Vertical discharge with 8'(2031 round duct Altother blowers are adjustable discharge with 10'(254) round duct. Wall and island hood models without decorative rai)(s) listed; blower options are the same for (R) models. Transition with backdraft damper included Dimensions in parentheses an In Ile millimeters unless otherwise specified. UIJ O LF" Non-Convection Microwave Oven MODEL MW24 Model MW24 (free-standirg) Model MW24 (optional WM) Rating plate Safety door latches Oven door with window Door seals and Ventliatim seating surfaces openings (rear) Oven light Interactive dbplay Control panel One touch door open pad The Wolf Model MW24 24' (610) What hat sort of microwave oven can you expect from non-convection microwave oven can be a cooking company? This is the only non-convection used free-standing or with optional 30' microwave that deserves the Wolf name. (762) trim, It can be built in to fit above a Waif 30" (762) single oven. o Dural aim It's fast-1200 watts on high. Roomy-a full 2.0 cu ft is available In the dassic stainless steel (56 L) and it is a true cooking instrument with a vast fiMsh. range of advanced features including sensor cooking controlled from an interactive display. The unit Is black with optional trim available in the classic stainless steel finish. With the trim in place, the microwave oven is Identical in width to our 30' (762) oven, so it can be easily mounted above the oven to offer an attractive combination look. oWOLF PLANNING GUIDE 2005 (REV 1.1) GNP Door hinges Turntable Wavegulde cover LJ O LF' Non-Convection Microwave Oven MODEL MW24 FEATURES ► Built-in or free-standing non-convection microwave oven with 2.0 cu ft (56 L) capacity and 1200 watts of power ► Classic stainless steel trim finish ► Sensor cooking ► Easy to operate control panel and program- mable power options j ► Interactive display-99 minute-% 99 seconds ► Warming feature ► Menu label and recipe guide ► Muki-language-English, French and Spanish ► Removable 16" (406) turntable and turntable support ► Oven door with window ► Safety door latches-oven will not operate unless the door is securely closed ► Oven light comes on when oven Is operating or door Is open ► Tight door seals with one touch door open pad ► Rear ventilation openings ► Two and five year residential warranty- exclusions apply, see warranty at the end of this guide OVERALL DIMENSIONS V F~spwoaom+ -u"ro+ovm~ 21VW IM t 1a3)4" 133A r Tnu FFAF~STAPON40 2n/t~ (an t 297/e (1 191le ► Dimensions may vary by! 1/a" (3). ► Dimensions in parentheses are in millimeters unless otherwise specified. *WOLF PLANNING GUIDE 2005 (REV 1.1) 2 ' LJ o LF" Non-Convection Microwave Oven MODEL MW24 SPECIFICATIONS 1 Overall Microwave Width (free-standing) 24" (610) Model MW24 Overall Microwave Width (free- ►v) with 30" (762)TPIm 297/a" (759) - Overall Microwave Height (free-standing) Overall Microwave Height with Trim - ' 133/8" (340) 183/4" (476) ~ Overall Microwave Depth - , _ 191/a" (486) • Model MW24 Interior Capacity 2.0 cu ft (57 L) (optional tHr") Interior Dimensions 17 3/s" W x 101/2"H x 185/a" D TRIM OPTION T Classic Stainless Steel MWTRIM/S Trim Mows Model MW24 to be built in to fit a 30" (762) wide space. Optional trim kit is ordered and shipped as a sales accessory. (441 x 267 x 473) Recommended Cabinet Width with 30" (762) Trim 33" (838) Minimum Cabinet Width with Trim 30-(762) Power 1200 W Electrical Supply Requirements , - 120 V AC, 60 Hz 15 amp dedicated circuit Power Cord - - 3 ft (.9 m) power cord with 3-prong grounded plug Shipping Weight- 50 Ibs Ibs (23 kg) Special Note T Optional trim allows microwave to be built in to fit a 30" (762) wide space identical to the Wolf 30" (762) single oven ► Specifications are subject to change without notice. ► Dimensions in parentheses are in millimeters unless otherwise specified. DWOLF PLANNING GUIDE 2006 (REV 1.1) 3 t.,IJDLF- Non-Convection Microwave Oven INSTALLATION INSTALLATION ABOVE 30" (782) SINGLE OVEN T W I1 OPElNNO DEPTH HEIGHT 24'min (610) (32) 27th' (ese) MX;FKWIAM OPENNO WbT 4 E 266th' (724) OVEN OPENNO WIDTH 273 /te' le st) (102) -H (1~ E RECOMMENDEDCABINET WldT/t 30'mM (782) I L UNDERCOUNTER INSTALLATION OPENING OPENNO DEPTH HOW ROOM CO NTER NEWIT T ► Dimensions may vary by ± I/s' (3). ► Dimensions in parentheses are in millimeters unless otherwise speed. ► Dimensions shown in the Illustrations are for installation of the microwave oven with trim. OWOLF PLANNING GUIDE 2005 (REV 1.1) 4 WOLF" Non-Convection Microwave Oven INSTALLATION INSTALLATION NOTES ► Refer to the Illustrations and specifications for overall dimensions, rough openings and installation specifics. ► The Wolf non-convection microwave oven can be used free-standing or with optional 30" (762) trim. can be built in to fit above a Wolf 30" (762) single oven. The base platform must be able to support 125 Ibs (57 kg). IMPORTANT NOTE: In all Instances, where the microwave oven is built in, you must use the Wolf 30" (762) trim kit to ensure proper ventilation. ► Refer to the installation instructions provided with the trim kit for detailed specifications. These instructions can also be found on the Wolf website at wolfappliance.com. ► When using the Wolf microwave oven as a free-standing unit, allow 2` (51) of airflow space on top, rear and both sides. A minimum 20" (SOS) cabinet depth is required. ► The Wolf non-convection microwave oven requires a separate, grounded 120 V AC, 60 Hz power supply. The service should have Its own 15 amp circuit breaker and a grounded 3-prong receptacle should be located within the reach of the 3' (.9 m) power cord. Locate electrical within the shaded area shown in the Installation Illustration. IMPORTANT NOTE: A ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) Is not recommended and may cause Interruption of operation. ► The Wolf non-convection microwave oven with trim may be installed in combination with a 30" (762) single oven and/or warming drawer. Refer to the General Applications section for additional installation specifications. ► You must follow all National Electrical Code regulations. In addition, be aware of local codes and ordinances when installing your service. ► Refer to the installation instructions shipped with each Wolf product for detailed specifica- tions. DIMENSIONS V Rough Opening Width 271/2" (699) Rough Opening Height - 17` (432) Rough Opening Depth (minimum) 20-(508) Recommended Cabinet Width 33-(838) Minimum Cabinet Width 30-(762) Location of Electrical Within shaded area ► See installation Instructions shipped with unit for detailed specifications. ► Dimensions in parentheses are in millimeters unless otherwise specified 1j *WOLF PLANNING GUIDE 2005 IREV 1.1) W O LF- 30" (762) Built-In Double Ovens MODELS 0030F / D030U Electronics and Rotating electronic door coodng vents control panel Recessed broil - - Oven door eight switch element w or, U Thermostat R80V plate location Model D03OF asks atone Probe receptacle iitL Framed element receptacle Three reprovable Nakrgen 9ghts racks per oven Hidden bake element D" hinge with hydraulic damper ' Six-level rack Model D030U Exhaust vent guide poi oven Unframed Gasket Inset W*X:bW Aenel The Wolf Model D03OF framed 30' It's hard to put into a few words the differences you (762) bu,7t-in double oven is available in will see in Wolf compared to other cooking appliances. the classic stainless steel finish, The Wolf Some of those differences are very dramatic and some Model D03OU unirmned 30- (762) bul" are very subtle. Suffice to say that you and your clients double oven h available In ckrsai4 will notice the differences. platinum or carbon atainle" steel finish. One of the more prominent highlights is the patent pending Wolf Dual Convection System that is in all of our built-in ovens. It delivers even temperature and r>>rs appeisnce Is prtiW by Sto-K to meat strict reffokm reguhrd" In airflow throughout the oven. Two fans and four heating - with spw tc k1sn„eriorRs elements operate either simultaneously or in sequence, found on vwvwtstarkorg. depending on which one of the eight different cooking modes your client chooses. The cooking modes include bake, roast. broil, convection bake, convection roast, convection broil, convection and bake stone. Bake stone mode requires a bake- stone accessory, available from your Wolf dealer. Let Wolf, the corporate companion and kitchen soul mate of Sub-Zero, fuel your passion for cooking and kitchen design. OSU9-ZERO/WOLF PLANNING GUIOE 2004 (REV 1.0) 1 &A- to 1:!OLF' 30' (782) Built-In Double Ovens MODELS D030F / D030U FEATURES ► Patent-pending dual convection logic control system ► Eight cooking modes - bake, roast, broil, convection bake, convection roast, convection broil, convection and bake stone (with bake stone accessory) ► Rotatifig glass touch control panel ► Cobalt bku 'porcelain oven interiors ► Three removable racks, six-level rack guide and full-extension bottom rack in each oven ► Large viewing triple pane windows ► Dual interior halogen lighting ► Hidden, dual ribbon bake element in each oven, makes it easy to clean any spillover OVERALL DIMENSIONS V ► Recessed broil element in each oven ► Temperature probe and receptacle in each oven ► Delayed start, self-clean and sabbath features ► Patent-pending, door hinge with hydraulic damper assures smooth opening and closing of the doors ► Factory installed trim ► Certified by Star-K to meet religious regulations ► UL certified for US and Canada ► Two and five year residential warranty - exclusions apply, see warranty at the end of this guide s0' (W1 ► Dimensions may vary by t 1/8' (3). ► Dimensions in parentheses are in millimeters unless otherwise specified. TOP YIEMW 17/e (49) T - 26ahe (no) 28' (711) 24' (tea) I ' M - I~ J OSUB-ZERO/WOLF PLANNING GUIDE 2004 (REV. 1.0) 1 2971e T-0. (7H 1 k__MSlw(s1F1i )ME~ W O LF- 30" (762) Built-In Double Ovens MODELS D030F / D030U Model 003OF Mode! 003OU Framed Unframed FINISHES - FRAMED 7 Classic Stainless Steel D030F/S FINISHES - UNFRAMED V Classic Stainless Steel D03OU/S Platinum Stainless Steel D030U/P Carbon Stainless Steel D030UB ACCESSORIES ► Bake stone accessory, includes stone, element, rack and peel ► Set of three oven racks ► Two-piece broiler pan Contact your Wolf dealer for additional information on accessories. SPECIFICATIONS T Overall Oven Width 297/x' (759) Overall Oven Height - 60-0270) Overall Oven Depth 24' (610) V~ ~ Open Oven Door Clearance 209/4" (527) Oven Interior Capacity (per oven) 4.5 cu ft (127 L) Oven Interior Dimensions (per oven) 25' (635) W x 16 _ 1/4* (413) H x 19' (483) D Recommended Cabinet Width 33' (838) Minimum Cabinet Width 30' (762) Minimum Cabinet Depth 24' (610) Electrical Supply Requirements _ 120/240 V AC, 60 Hz, 50 amp dedicated circuit Conduit 5 ft 0.5 m) flexible 4-wire Total Connected Load 8.9 Kw at 240 V 6.7 Kw at 208 V - Total Amps 37 Shipping Weight 466 Ibs (211 k9) Special Note Maintain a minimum clearance to adjacent cabinet doors/drawers of 1/9' (3) ► Specifications are subject to change without notice. ► Dimensions in parentheses are in millimeters unless otherwise specified. *SUB-ZERO/WOLF PLANNING GUIDE 2004 (REV 1.0) 3 u o LF- 30" (762) Built-In Double Ovens INSTALLATION WALL INSTALLATION T FPN= "no ► Dimensions may vary try t 7/8" (3). r DIMENSIONS V Rough Opening Width 281/2" (724) Rough Opening Height - - ^r 496/4" (1260) Recommended Cabitiat Width 33-(838) Minimum Cabinet Width - 30' (762) _ _ Minimum Cabinet Depth A 24-(610) Location of Electrical thin shaded area ► See installation instructions shipped with unit for detailed specifications. ► Dimensions in parentheses are in millimeters unless otherwise specified. OSUB-ZEROlWOLF PLANNING GUIDE 2004 (REV 1.0) 4 ~roLF- c 30" (762) Built-In Double Ovens INSTALLATION INSTALLATION NOTES ► Wolf recommends using 33' (838) cabinets with the 30" (782) double oven. Also, you need a minimum 24' (610) of usable cabinet depth. ► The bottom cabinet support must be able to support 400 Ibs (181 kg). ► Door clearance for the 30' (762) double oven is 20-3/4" (527). ► The Wolf 30' (762) double oven has a face trim on all four sides and will overlap stiles and rails. The trim overlaps 3/16" (5) on the bottom, 5/16' (8) on the top and 3/4" (19) on each side. ► The 30- (762) double oven requires a separate, grounded 4-wire 24OV, 50 amp service with Its own circuit breaker. It is provided with a 5' (1.5 m) flexible 4-wire conduit, which can make a connection at a junction box. Locate electrical within the shaded area shown in the illustration. ► The electrical outlet must be flush with the back wall to allow for proper installation. The outlet can be placed in an adjacent cabinet as long as it is within reach of the 5' (1.5 m) conduit, and a 2' (51) diameter hole is provided. For a 24" (610) depth cabinet application, electrical conduit must be kept to the right (viewed from front of cabinet) for a flush installation. ► You must follow all National Electrical Code regulations. In addition, be aware of local codes and ordinances when installing your service. ► Dimensions in parentheses are in millimeters unless otherwise specified. OSUB-ZERO/WOLF PLANNING GUIDE 2004 (REV 1.0) Wolf Warming Drawer Page I of 3 r• L*J 0 LF Warming Drawer PM I Close round O~ draw *VW P-14 for stag wv food Afftw W -V 30' wamung oro'w Superior airflow and large capacity. From a design perspective, you have four choices for the drawer front. Choose from the Classic Stainless steel look or the premium finishes of Platinum or Carbon Stainless steel. Also new and now available is the integrated drawer front, which allows for a custom wood panel. Options Our 3(" (762 mm) wide Model WD30 warming drawer is sold as a base unit only; a drawer front accessory is required. The integrated drawer front allows for a custom wood panel and handle hardware. Important Note: Specifications are different for stainless steel drawer front and integrated drawer front applications (see Specifications/Installations pdf file that outlines the differences). Warming drawers have a dear mission in life to take good care of good food until it's time for you to eat. Our improved air control helps keep moist foods moist and crisp foods crisp. In addition, Wolf warming drawers are some of the most capacious on the market so you wilt have little problem storing items. From a design perspective, you have four choices for the drawer front. Choose from the Classic Stainless steel look or the premium finishes of Platinum or Carbon Stainless steel. Also new and now available is the integrated drawer front, which allows for a custom wood panel. Regardless of your panel selection, electronic controls are hidden. Features - 450 Watt heating element - Hidden electronic touch control panel ban-//www c-ivsPm nn+..i.•••lr/.._:_~__- full extettsw &aow 9NM Wolf Warming Drawer - Moisture selection control - Preset and variable temperature control - Preset four-hour automatic shut-off - Stainless steel interior - Rack for storing food - Removable stainless steel drawer tub - Full extension, ball bearing drawer glides Page 2 of 3 - Can be installed in combination with a 30" (762 mm) or 36" (914 mm) Wolf single oven and Wolf convection microwave oven (see design guide for additional details) - CSA certified for US and Canada - Two and five year residential warranty - exclusions apply - see warranty terms Drawer Fronts: Classic Stainless steel - WDFRONT/S Platinum Stainless steel - WDFRONT/P Carbon Stainless steel - WDFRONTB Integrated - WDFRONT/I (accepts wood panel) Note that the 30° (762 mm) warming drawer Model WD30 is sold as a base unit only; one of the above drawer front options is required. Accessories: - Decorative handle for Integrated drawer front in Classic, Platinum or Carbon Stainless steel - Five-piece container set - includes five commercial pans with lids: one large 14-quart pan, two medium 8-quart pans and two small 3-quart pans Model WD30 Overall Dimensions: H 10-1/4" (260 mm) W 29-7/8" (759 mm) D (behind frame) 23-1/6" (586 mm) Heating Element: 450 Watts Electrical Supply Requirements: 120V AC, 60 Hz -15 amp dedicated circuit Shipping Weight: 75 Ibs (34 kg) httn-//www C11MPM -3 C Wolf Warming Drawer Model WD30 with Drawer Front Panel Options: Classic Stainless Steel WDFRONT/S Platinum Stainless Steel WDFRONT/P Carbon Stainless Steel WDFRONTB Integrated (accepts wood panel) WDFRONT/I Page 3of3 Optional drawer front panels are ordered and shipped as sales accessories. Stainless steel drawer front panels include tubular handles. 0 2006 WON AppNwm, LLC. www.w0lf8ppNWW.WM htM•/him.... ~..t.....~.. ,.,._._6_._tts__r.... Page 1 of 2 incognito Series Dishwashers Model: G858SCVI Resl wftl Pmk cb lnconno G858SCVI vacuum cl mwe . 14 place setting capacity Des • 6 wash programs Coo*V Pmducta • 4 wash temperatures Cates Sys . Toe Solo function • Update function tarn*y Produces . 9 hour delay start Dealer L ocaeor . Flow through heater • Convection brying -system Miele syae • High grade stainless steel interior with number one polish . Built-in water softener 1 Produras P . Double waterproof system . Water softener salt indicator Lab GhumAmrs Washers . Rinse aid refill indicator Dental Din' :ckors • Intake/Drain fault indicator . Optical cycle indicator Wet Cieafft . 46 dB (ref pW} operational noise level Iriduserisl Parts . 331.1 kWh consumption per year Cleaning Basket configuration . Separate cutlery tray . Adjustable upper_basket . PlateGuard Plus lower basket Optional accessories not included • Rinse Aid • Salt Design considerations . Pre-made door options • Winnerl Best On The Best 2005 Awardl . Requires custom-made door panel Learn more Consuawr AftJ • REBATE . About Miele Dishwashers . Find an appliance dealer selling this product now! Enter your zip code Miele (dick coftd panel to zoom) sms ?Z Addtiorw'Pfofi' hie desigr► also avaMabl.: Page 2 of 2 FuW07peralad DWrmashers pol on require a wader program I Ca Idgck the ENERGY STAR® logo for detaft) Tld o Of RW@ Back to Incognito Series Index t)peMft Mdanuak I AbmiU,s I Telgphorte Numbers I Enmff I Showrooms I AM" Literature Product Dimensions I Miele Service I Et>lw Star I warranty R tdon I Carom I Pressroom I Unh I Ie Intl Miele Mexico ®1998-20116 Miel& brc. I Wye Privacy POI Problems at questions about our websft? CorMad MieWs Webmaster Product and Cut-out Dimensions G800 Series Dishwashers Fully Integrated Dishwashers Location Codes C - Cutout (2 f/4' x 47 for Water, Drain and Beak p=K*rough. Att according to water and rbaln location. D - 5 toot flemble drain hose connects kmer center row. E - 5 foot -120 Volt -15 Amp 3-wire molded plug power supply connects lower left rear. W - 5 W -Double Waterproof flexbbb waterfntake hose connects lower enter rear. Notes - A9lnstallatlons must be done in accordance with local codes - Additional Yin height may be attained by ordering extension feet (#2702600). - Ahvays use skis (Included) during installation to Insure proper leveffing. 'I Mzele -7f/I• NOTE. &"Ing Is not 10 =810- SPECnFICAMN SHEETS 010404 Panel Information Fully Integrated Models Fully Integrated Installations I Tjo UT M Mfele Fully h9egrated cffa%vashers do not came equipped with any front panel. These dishwashers are designed to accept a bill height panel supplied by the custom cabinet maker. Panel size is determined in the following manner. Wldth: 23 318" in all cases Thlclvtess: 314" in all cases Height Determined using the folowing calculation: Panel Height = HTC - TKH HTC = Height to the underside of countertop TKH = Toe lGck Height GFVI Panel Installations Note 1: Control Panel is along top edge of unit. R is not visible when the unit is closed. A handle MUST be located on the front panel in order to open the unit Maximum Panel Weight 21 Pounds All Miele dishwashers do not come equipped with a front panel. Miele offers pre-fabricated stainless steel panels for all tufty integrated units. These panels are designed for either 4` or 6' toekicks and are delivered with or without handles. NOTE: Drawing is not to scale. SPECIFICATION SHEETS 01040 Technical Information: Dishwashers GBOO Series W W ao CO N r Miele HsWto WxW8ids OfCOW01top 32% 33 331A 3! 34'h 35 351"/2 36 2'fi 3 3'h 4 4'R 5 5W 6 6'h 7 7'h 8 8'h 9 Interior cabinet height For Integrated instapations Acceptable combinations _ Typical American installation NOTE Drawfng Is not to scale. SPECIFICATION SHEETS 010404 Connection Information All Dishwasher Types Water Connection ~J Optlon A VFrisn'dR) aT opUan 9 ff Connect via 314' hose bib [D P CConnect via 3/4' adapter with 318" compression filling Waterproof System Box Dimensions Width (A): 3114' Height (B): 3112' Thk kness. 134' Cutout 2114'x4" NOTE. Waterproof system box should ONLY be installed in a vertical manner to prevent build-up of water within box and possible leakage. Waterproof System Temperature. 110--130-F Pressure. 4.5 -145 PSI Drain hose: 7/8' ID - 5 feet long Electrical Connection L- ici Terminal A. Live 1(Black) Terminal a Na" ftmft) Terminal C: Ground (Green) Voltage. 1101120 volts Fuse: 15 Amperes 5 foot cable with molded plug provided. N07E. &Owbg Is not to scab. SPECIFWAMN SHEETS 010404'v * Whirlpool OWN is ' tick to GHW9400P ♦Ii1M!,!►P~!G;: home > urodugtl > iaundrY9 lalery > washers > GHW9400P GHW9440P 0 *1 Rated Front-Load Washer In America Wash up to 16 pairs of jeans in a single load*. The Duet@ Fabric Care System otters Incredible capacity and cleaning power. Plus, the Duet HT® washer Is the first washer In North America certified by Woolmark for machine-washable wools. *Various sizes. Pewter Biscuit-on-Biscuit Model: GHW9400PL Model: GHW9400PT MSRP: $1399.00 MSRP: $1399.00 Dove Gray On White Model: GHW9400PW MSRP: $1399.00 Prices shown are Manufacturer's Suggested Retail Price. Dealer alone determines actual price. PR00UIT fEAtuRES Features ENERGY STARO Qualified #1 Rated Front-Load Washer In America Ultra Capacity Plus AccuWash" Temperature Control Catalyst® Cleaning Action with Direct Infect Quiet Wash Plus Noise Reduction Stainless Steel Wash Basket with Limited Lifetime Warranty Built-In Water Heater Delay Wash Feature 13 Factory Pre-Set Cycles araf Options Add-A-Garment Feature Active Wear Cycle Auto Soak & Pre-Wash Cycles Bulky Items Cycle ~ tia mn 27in Dimensions Depth: 31 112 In. Height: 38 in. Width: 27 In. Page 1 of 3 Electricd Requirements 1S OR 20 Ampere, 120 Volts, 60 Hertz (1/second). GROUNDED CIRCUIT IS REQUIRED. A TIME- DELAY FUSE OR CIRCUIT BREAKER AND SEPARATE CIRCUIT 15 RECOMMENDED. Deilcate/Hand Washables Cycle Heavy Duty Cycle Normal/Casual Cycle Quick Wash Cycle I................................................................... Sanitary Cycle Silk Cycle *A 2~ 13 httn•/%alwasr aar{a:r{......1 .....,~./....~..t....l.......1.._. r • - - - Whirlpool _ Whitest Whites Cycle Wool cycle Adjustable End-of-Cycle Signal 5 Temperature Selections Drain/Spin Option On/Off Extra Rinse option Rinse and Spin Option 4-Tray Prewash, Detergent, Bleach, Fabric Softener Dispenser Automatic Water Level Control 1,200 RPM Maximum Spin Speed y~.......... Variable-Speed Motor Child Lockout Door Lock Door Window Optional Storage Pedestals Stackable Installation with Matching Dryer Si►ECIiI[A?1DN5 Appearance Matching Dryer Capacity Capacity (Size): 3.8 CU. FT.-IEC EQUIVALENT Capacity (Weight): 20 Construction Front Access Stack" Stainless Steel Tub Controls AccuWash'" - Temp. Control System Electronic Controls Dimensions Depth: 31 1/2 in. Height: 38 M. Capacity a a.a a_. CU. Fl. - KC EQUKWASnT Whirlpool Customer Support For shopping assistance can 1-800- 253-1301 Page 2 of 3 httn://WWW.Whirlrux~l rnm/rataln•+h+....1••..• • Whirlpool Maximum Height: 381n. Overall Depth: 31 1/2 in. Width: 27 In. Performance HORIZONTAL Agitator Type Bleach Dispenser Catalyst® 13 Cycles Delicate Cycle On/Off End-of-Cycle Signal ENERGY STAR® Qualified Extra Rinse Option Fabric Softener Dispenser Handwashable Cycle Heavy Duty Cycle Lint Filter Prewash Cycle Quick Wash Soak Cycle Quiet Wash Plus Sound Package Sound Reduction 5 Temperature Settings _ Catalyst@ Wash System 5 Wash/Spin Speeds AUTOMATIC Water Level Selections Wool cycle Warranty One Year Full Parts & tabor Warranty gM51EPED IP \DlMAME OF WI-IRLPOOL. U-SA. 1' back to GHW9400P AL: CD"W#75 7CK IbMtLPOOL COAPOnAVC14. `-~-x' M~IIIIXt , Page 3 of 3 httn'//WWW - r • n Whirlpool GEW9250P (..tRIMfi MOYi?:. bs~+s > products > laundry oenerv > dry ers > GEW9250P GEW9250P Dry clothes In the time it takes to wash them*. Moisture-sensing strips and rr~ temperature sensors In the Senseon"' drying system allow this Duet* dryer to monitor how fast clothes are drying, how hot the air should be, and when the clothes are dry. *Based on a 9 lb. load, Normal wash and Senseon°' Heavy Duty dry cycles. Pewter Biscuit-on-Biscuit Model: GEW9250PL Model: GEW9250PT MSRP: $849.00 MSRP: $849.00 Dove Grey on White Model: GEW9250PW MSRP: *"9.00 Prices shown are Manufacturer's Suggested Retail Price. Dealer alone determines actual price. C PRODUCT FEATURES Features stem TM Sensin S AccuDr g y y SenseonTM Drying System Matches Duet* Washer 8 Automatic Cycles Bulky Items Cycle Adjustable End-of-Cycle Signal On/Of Wrinkle ShleldTM Plus Feature (120 Min.) 5 Temperature Selections Quiet Dry Plus Noise Reduction Dry Rack Dryer Door Window Reversible Skle-Swing Door Electronic Controls Front-Mounted Lint Screen Interior Drum Light 4-Way Venting Porcelain SpillGuard' Top Optional Storage Pedestals Stackable Installation with Matching Washer 0 xt trs 27 In Dlme"ons Depth: 31 1/2 in. Height: 38 In. Width: 27 in. Electrical Requirements 30 re, 120/240 Volts, 60 Hertz, second). AC-ONLY. USE COPPER WIRE ONLY. A FOUR- WIRE OR THREE-WIRE, SINGLE PHASE ELECTRICAL SUPPLY REQUIRED. A TIME-DELAY FUSE OR CIRCUIT BREAKER AND SEPARATE CIRCUIT IS RECOMMENDED. Page I of 3 9r~% 14 Whirlpool SPEiliItATI01I5 Appearance capacity Matching Washer . 531.4 7.4 Porcelain Top and Lid - r 7.• N. R. Capacity Capacity (Size): 7.0 Cubic foot Construction Front Access Reversible Side-Swing Door Style r55~ J.~......-.SV.. Powder Coat Drum Material 4 Dry Rack Extra Large Front Mount Lint Screen Power Cord & Venting Accessories Stackable Controls Electronic Controls Dimensions Depth with Door Open: 51 1/2 In. Depth: 31 1/2 in. Height: 38 In. Maximum Height: 38 In. Width: 27 In. Performance Auto Dry Control Cool Down Cycle 8 Cycles Damp Dry Delkate Cycle Drum Light Electronic Sensor Drying Variable End-of-Cycle Signal Energy Saver Whirlpool Customer Support For shopping assistance call 1-800- 253-1301 Page 2 of 3 111M'//W~+~ tvl+irl»rv+1 n...../....~..1^^~/ ~ . Whirlpool Extended Tumbling Cycle Interior Light 1/3 HP Motor Electric Power _ Quiet Dry Plus Sound Package Senseon- Drying System Temperature Control 5 Temperature Settings Wrinkle Free Cycle Wrinkle Guard Cycle WaTTanty One Year Full Parts & Labor Warranty 3LMSTER.EU MMEMAM 4K WH14.POUL. =:5 A. )back to GEW9250P ALL CONTEPlft C 2601 WHIRLPOOL COHPONAMA. Page 3 of 3 httn-//www whirh",..t .•.,...1...,~..t..,,~..... L._. „ . - - - MWK;Zli0 Electric Washer/Dryer PRODUCT MODEL NUMBER LTE6234D Electrical: A 3 or 4 wire, single phase,120/240- vob, 60412, AC-only electrical supply (or 3 or 4 wire, 12Q2 0 specified on these rag per) on a separate 30-amp circuit, fused on both sides of the line must be provided. A time-delay fuse or drain breaker is recommended. Connect to an individual branch circuit. Do not have a fuse in the neutral or grounding circuit. Exhaust venting Exhaust your dryer to the outside. Four-hick diameter vest is required. Rigid or flexibb metal exhaust vent must be used. Do Not use plastic or metal toll vent. Exhaust outlet hood must be at least 12 inches from the ground or any object that may be in the path of the exhaust. The dryer can be corverted to exhaust out fight or left side. EXHAUST VENTING Select the route that WIN provide the straightest and most direct path otd100rs. Plan the instaAatlon to use the fewest number of elbows and iumS. Use the fewest 90• toms possible. Do not use vent runs longer than specified in vent length chart. Determine the number of elbows you will need. Recommended hood styles e Angled hood style is acceptable. l~ r o uma t"•w A. Louvered hood stye B. Box hood 3" Vwd Lerrgar Cron Mryld H& of Type of Vwd Omar 90' ho Lawmd hooea aebovm hoods 0 fiigid mwi 37 R (11.3 uil 35 R (10.7 ra) n lble rr.W 25 a (7.0 art 20 R (e.t rya 1 Rigrd mist 32 R 19.7 nj 27 R ph.2 m) ~ »msW 21R(e.4n# 1aR(4.9m) 2 Rigid metal 24 R (7.3 m) 19 R (5.8 m) Flewbte metal 15 R (4.8 at 10 R (3.o m) NOTE: Sale eAm wt adds a 90' lull belie the washer/dnec To detarnhe ma wksn w4wi5l Wwjft acid one 90' tum to the ehaA. OVERALL DIMENSIONS 713i• (191.9 an) - l ~ rR) „'I T 3rti• (91.0 em) 1 ' Mod installations require a • JJJ--- m 5''W (14 cm) dearance behind Ow dryer W (91.3 ern) 7' th e exluu t verd wmh ebbm (,BA cm) RECESSED AREA AND CLOSET INSTALLATION Additional ciearances might be required for walk door and floor moldings. Rear dearance may be 0' (0 cm) when house exhaust system Is lined up directly with dryer exhausL A B- 8 1•~32'~ 0- 2r (0c" (69.6cm) (0 an) (2.6 un) (81.3 err) C 48 tr►.2 (3101 24 R1.= (155 one) [tv (14 cm) A Recessed area a Side view - closet or con&W area CL Closet door with vw& DRAIN SYSTEM CM) (7.9 cm) Standpipe croft system - wall or door The sfandpP drab requires a mMhirmrrr diameter standpipe of z (5 cm). The daiinu carry-array cwwoity can be no less than 17 gal. (64 L) per ndnute. A r (Son) diameter to 1' (U 00) diameter standpipe adapter irk Is awllable. The top Of the standpipe must be at least 39' (99 cm) high and no higher than gic (2.4 m) from the bottom of 1st wasbec Laundry tub drain system The laundry tub needs a minimum 20 gal. (76 L) capacity. The top of the b air lry tub must be at last 34' (811.4 cm) above the floor and no higher than 96' (2.4 m) from the bottom of the washes Floor drain system The floor drain system requires a siphon break that may be purchased separately. The siphon break must be a minimum of 29' (71 cm) from the bottom of the washer. Additional hoses might be needed. 044-t S um" wnfdpoa corporation peeg ieduft a Continuous eom* t m te knp" Dinbnslms am nor owme pwposss only. Pot eompkh ddrils. we kwftem Map"" our D►odkh Ire reserve 1st right te Ciorgs meterf>IS a~ apetstlgtlons vriutow nova. Insttuc%a p *W with product. Sp lone 301*01e dWrpe wihhost noes 08440 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 13052 VAIL, COLORADO SAUNAS SECTION 13052 - SAUNAS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing saunas, on a design/build basis, including the following: 1. Finish wall and ceiling construction. 2. Finish floor construction. 3. Doors. 4. Heaters and controls. 5. Interior lighting. B. Related Sections: 1. Electrical service for sauna heater and lighting systems is specified in Division 16. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions. Include electrical roughing-in information for heater and lighting systems. B. Design/Build Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plans, elevations, wall and oiling sections and other information and details required for coordinated installation. Indicate finishes, materials, and joinery methods. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide sauna units made of components of standard construction, furnished by one manufacturer as complete assemblies. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. B. Do not deliver materials until painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate materials have been completed in installation area. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Finnish American Sauna, Helo Sauna and Fitness, Inc., McCoy, Inc., Viking Leisure Products, Inc. or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Finish Wall and Ceiling Construction: 1. Interior Finish: T&G,'V' joint boards machined from dear softwood lumber, kiln-dried to average 12- percent or less moisture content, sanded smooth. 2. Wood Species: Clear Heart Western Red Cedar. B. Insulation: Foil-faced glass fiber blanket or board insulation, thickness required to fill cavity between interior and exterior finish. MTN Progress CD Set SAUNAS 13052-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 13052 VAIL, COLORADO SAUNAS C. Floor Constriction: Removable wood duclkboards constructed of vertical-grain boards of same species as interior finish, laid loose over permanent finish flooring. D. Bench Construction: Manufacturer's standard construction consisting of spaced boards with eased edges, machined from kiln-dried, dear vertical-grain lumber of same species as interior finish. E. Door. Custom tempered glass door and window system in cedar frames as indicated. F. Sauna Heater. Manufacturer's standard UL listed electric heater unit, in metal enclosure finished on exterior with baked enamel finish. Provide wood guard rails to protect against user contact 1. Capacity: As recommended by manufacturer for size of sauna; gravity heat flow. 2. Electrical Requirements: Coordinate with wiring requirements and current characteristics of budding electrical system as indicated and specified in Division 16. 3. Konno Rocks: Provide heater unit containing shatterproof igneous rocks recognized as durable and effective in maintaining uniform sauna temperature. G. Interior Lighting: Manufacturer's standard incandescent lighting fixture, recessed mounted. H. Controls and Signals: UL-labeled control system and signal equipment, including master disconnect switch, circuit breaker, adjustable room temperature control, on-off switch, light switch, and heat indicator fight. Provide emergency signal button. 1. Locate controls where indicated or directed by the Architect. 2. Provide timer to control heater, connected to input circuit to automatically shut off heater unit after each heating cycle of maximum 60-minute duration. 3. Provide manufacturer's standard, tamper-resistant, lockable control cover. 1. Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard accessories as follows: 1. Thermometer on interior, for each sauna unit 2. Hygrometer on interior, thermometer, for each sauna unit 3. One back rest for each bench indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for assembly of sauna units and for installation of heating system, fighting system, controls, and accessories. B. Install sauna units plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Secure with concealed fasteners and blind nailing. C. Securely attach finish materials to supporting framing with hot-dip galvanized fasteners. 3.02 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION A Repair damaged and defective materials where possible to eliminate defects; where not possible to repair property, replace. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean materials on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch-up shop applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 04-07-06 SAUNAS Progress CD Set 13052 - 2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 13052 VAIL, COLORADO SAUNAS C. Operate heating and lighting systems including controls through all modes of operation and make adjustments as necessary to ensure proper functioning. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 SAUNAS Progress CD Set 13052-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 13054 VAIL, COLORADO STEAM ROOMS SECTION 13054 - STEAM ROOMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for the following: 1. Constructing tiled steam rooms, including doors, steam generating equipment, and controls. 2. Steam generators in guest unit steam showers. B. Related Sections: 1. Vapor barrier and insulation is specified in Section 07210. 2. Joint sealants are specified in Section 07920. 3. Metal studs are specified in Section 09110. 4. Tile is specified in Section 09300. 5. Lighting system and wiring are specified in Division 16. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's information on proprietary products. B. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plans, elevations, wall and ceiling sections, and other information and details required for coordinated installation. Indicate materials, finishes and joinery methods. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Qualifications: A minimum of 3-years experience constructing steam rooms of the types specified, and a minimum of 5 installations of a magnitude similar to or larger than the work of this Section. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. B. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions and under cover to prevent damage or con- tamination. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Ambient Temperature: At least 50-deg. F. and rising, when setting and grouting with portland-cement mortar. B. Follow manufacturer's requirements for ambient temperature when setting and grouting with other than portland- cement mortar. C. Moisture Conditions: In accordance with the and installation materials manufacturers' requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Tile: As specified in Section 09300. B. Installation Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1. 0407-06 STEAM ROOMS Progress CD Set 13054-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 13054 VAIL, COLORADO STEAM ROOMS 2. Sand: ASTM C144. 3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C206 or C207, Type S. 4. Water: Clean, dear, potable. 5. Reinforcing: Floors: 2-inches x 2-inches x 16116-gauge galvanized welded wire mesh. b. Walls and Ceiling: Minimum 3.4-pounds per square yard galvanized expanded metal lath. Secure to previously placed penal rods with No. 16-gauge galvanized steel be wires. 6. Mortar: Cement Mortar. Job mixed, portland cement, sand, water, and hydrated lime at Contractor's option, proportions specified in ANSI A108.1. Dry-Set Mortar: ANSI A118.1. Latex Portland-Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4. Scratch Coat: Job mixed, portland cement, sand, water, and hydrated lime at Contractor's option, proportions specified in the applicable referenced TCA and ANSI standards. Bond Coat: Portland cement paste on a plastic setting bed, or dry-set or latex-portand cement mortar on a cured setting bed, except where any one type is specified in referenced TCA installation method. Grout Commercial portland cement, dry-set, or latex-portland cement, color as selected by Architect. C. Doors: Custom tempered glass door in aluminum door and frame. Doors shall include weatherstripping and seals to prevent steam from escaping. Finish doors and frames with a Kynar finish in a custom color to match color sample furnished by the Architect. D. Steam Equipment Sussman "Mr. Steam' CU Series or approved equal, size as recommended by manufacturer for room volume, 3-phase, 208-volts (verify electrical requirements). Provide. operating controls including room temperature controllers, steam solenoid valves, sized as required, automatic blow down assembly for automatic pressure drainage of boiler at the end of each day, stainless steel capillary bulb holders, stainless steel high-temperature rated conditioning water filters. Provide emergency button to ring at Health Club Reception desk. E. Steam Generator for in Guest units: Roma Spa or approved equal, size as recommended by manufacturer for room volume, single-phase, 208-volts (verify electrical requirements). Provide operating controls consisting of timer and stainless steel steam head outlets. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to commencing work, protect adjoining surfaces. B. Grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers, and mechanical and electrical work in or behind file in the completed work shat be installed prior to the installation of tile. C. Surfaces on which Me will be installed shall be firm, dry, dean, and free of oily or waxy films and foreign matter. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for construction of steam rooms and for installation of equipment, controls and accessories. 0407-06 STEAM ROOMS Progress CD Set 13054-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 13054 VAIL, COLORADO STEAM ROOMS B. Tile: 1. Install tile in accordance with the requirements of the specified TCA Method from the TCA" M - 2004 Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation". 2. Joint Width: Approximately 1/16-inch, unless otherwise indicated or specified. 3. Set the to produce solid bedding, smooth even surfaces, and uniform joints, accurately aligned and symmetrically arranged. Do not use file less than half size. Cut file neatly, grind exposed edges smooth. Terminate file at center lines of doors, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Establish lines of borders where applicable, prior to spreading setting bed, centering field work in both directions. Lay file from center line of wall or floor surface outward, with adjustments made at junction with other floor or wall surfaces. 5. Do not install floor file until wall file installation is complete. 6. Install waterproofing membrane as indicated. 7. Lay the to edges of expansion joints. Keep expansion joints free of mortar or grout. 8. Sound file after setting. Replace hollow sounding tile. 9. Construct walls, floors, and ceilings in accordance with ANSI Al 08.11 using TCA Method SR613-03. C. Expansion Joints: Comply with TCA Method EJ171-03. Provide in comers between walls, floors, and ceilings and to divide areas exceeding 16-feet in length. Seal with materials specified in Section 07920. D. Steam Showers in Residential Club and Condominiums: Install in accordancewith ANSI A108.1 and A108.6 using TCA Method SR614-03, modified as indicated. 3.03 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT A. Clean surfaces after installation as recommended by file manufacturer. B. Do not use acid, metal cleaning tools, or harsh abrasives on tile. C. Replace damaged file surfaces before time of final acceptance. D. Operate equipment through all modes of operation and make adjustments necessaryto ensure proper operation. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Prohibit foot traffic for a minimum of 3-days after file has been installed. END OF SECTION 0407.06 STEAM ROOMS Progress CD Set 13054-3 t PROJECT #02028.65 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL. COLORADO SECTION 13080 - SOUND CONTROL MATTING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION SECTION 13080 SOUND CONTROL MATTING A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing sound control matting, isolation barrier, acoustical sealant and related products below "hard' flooring (stone, tile, wood) where located directly above hotel guestrooms, Residence Club units, condominium units, and public area, and where indicated. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Provide sound control flooring system that has been manufactured and installed to achieve IIC performance levels of not less than 52 when applied over 6-inch concrete with ceramic tile. -1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data with independent testing of actual floor assembly and laboratory results of sound control system. Provide report of tested IIC level. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, profiles and product components, including accessories for sound control system and termination of system. C. Test Reports Certification: Certified test reports from an independent testing laboratory indicating compliance with applicable results of performance characteristics and physical properties. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer. Minimum of 3-years experience installing sound control matting of the type required for this Project. B. Manufacturer. Capable of providing job service during construction, approving installer, recommending appropriate application methods and conducting a final inspection of the sound control system. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. B. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer. PART 2 - GENERAL 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Dodge Regupol "Regupol-QT" or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sound Control Matting: 1 0-mm thick single ply system made from I00-percent recycled rubber. 1. Weight 1.5-pounds per sq. ft. 2. Compression (Deflection) at 100-psi: 25- to 35-percent, ASTM F36. 3. Tensile Strength: 10&0 minimum, Die C, ASTM D412. 04-07-06 SOUND CONTROL MATTING Progress CD Set 130M - I PROJECT #02028.65 SECTION 13080 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SOUND CONTROL MATTING J 4. Shore A Hardness: 45-55 durometer, ASTM D2240. 5. Tear Strength: 40-pounds per in., ASTM D624. 6. Compression Set: 40-percent mapmum, ASTM D394. 7. TCA Robinson Test Light Commercial, ASTM D627. B. Perimeter Isolation Barrier. As recommended by sound control matting manufacturer. PART 3 - GENERAL 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Subfioor shall be structurally sound, with deflection not more than 11360 of the span, including live and dead loads. B. Subfloor shall be dry and free of debris. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Perimeter Isolation Strip: 1. Install perimeter isolation material at the perimeter of the entire subfloor, including door frames, and around any protrusions through the installation. 2. Adhere the perimeter isolation strip to the wall in accordance with manufacttuer's recommendations. B. Sound Control Matting: 1. Cut the sound control matting to appropriate lengths. 2. Lay the sound control matting over the subfloor or waterproofing and push the matting up tightly to the isolation barrier. 3. But adjoining edges of the sound control matting together. Tape the 34nch wide longitudinal fabric overlap sung to the adjoining sound control matting strip. 4. Do not attach sound control matting to the subfloor with nails, screws, staples, glue or any type of attachment C. Coordinate installation of radiant heating system with the work of Section 09300. D. Finish Flooring: Floor Ole as specified in Section 09300. 1. There shall be no grout contact between the edge of the last floor file and wall. After grouting the field, but before the perimeters are sealed, trim the perimeter isolation barrier bads %44nch below the finished surface of the Ole. Fill the groove with a bead of acoustical sealant 2. If a flat base is adhered to the wall, space 118-inch up from the file surface, and run a bead of acoustical sealant into the void. 3. If a coved base is used, fill the joint between the last course of floor file and the base with acoustical sealant 04-07-06 SOUND CONTROL MATTING Progress CD Set 13080 - 2 PROJECT #02028.65 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 13080 SOUND CONTROL MATTING Damp cover cure the finished installation for at least 72-hours and keep traffic off the floor for at least 72-hours. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 SOUND CONTROL MATTING Progress CD Set 13080 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 13082 - ACOUSTIC FLOOR SYSTEM PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes the following: SECTION 13082 ACOUSTIC FLOOR SYSTEM Floating f m system isolated from building structure by means of jack-up neoprene isolators and perimeter isolation board in mechanical equipment rooms / areas as indicated. 2. Build sound barrier walls on the floating floors. B. Related Sections: Elastomeric liquid flooring on isolated flooring is specified in Section 09671. 1.02 DESIGN A. Intent 1. The floating floor system shall consist of a 4-inch thick concrete slab isolated from and supported 2- inches above the structural slab by resilient neoprene isolators within cast iron housings designed to jack up the floor after pouring on the sub-floor. Sound barrier walls, as indicated, shall rest on the floating floor. The floating floor will receive an elastomeric liquid flooring specified in Section 09671. 2. The floating floor slab shall be isolated from adjoining walls, columns and curbs by means of perimeter isolation board. 3. Any floor drains, piping, conduit and duct penetrations shall not short circuit the isolation system. 4. Any equipment within these rooms shall be mounted on housekeeping pads on the floating floor as shown on the drawings. 5. In seismic zones the floating floor shall be restrained horizontally by curbs or walls designed to withstand the horizontal seismic forces. Solid bridge bearing neoprene pads shall be interspersed between perimeter isolation fiberglass to withstand the seismic forces with a maximum deflection of 0.24nches. 6. In seismic zones 2, 3 and 4 or equivalent Av, the floor shall be protected by embedded double acting resilient floor snubbers set in opposition to the overturning moments at the equipment snubbers in all locations where the center of gravity of major equipment is high. - B. Performance Requirements: The floating floor system shall have a minimum rating of STC-79 and INR+17 as verified by an independent laboratory in prior tests. C. Floor System Construction Procedure 1. The setting of isolation materials and raising of the floor shall be performed by or under the supervision of the isolation manufacturer. 2. Set drains and lower pipe seals. 0407-06 ACOUSTIC FLOOR SYSTEM Progress CD Set 13062-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS VAIL. COLORADO SECTION 13082 ACOUSTIC FLOOR SYSTEM 3. Cement perimeter isolation board around walls, columns, curbs, etc. a. In seismic zones intersperse the perimeter isolation board with bridge bearing quality neoprene pads the thickness of the isolation board. 4. Cover entire floor area with 6-mil plastic sheeting and carry sheeting up perimeter isolation board. 5. Place belt-shaped castings on a maximum of 544nch centers in the general areas in accordance with the approved layout drawings prepared by the isolation manufacturer. Spacing can be increased to straddle machinery locations. Additional reinforcement shall be detailed on isolation manufacturer's shop drawings when required. Perimeter isolators shall be selected to support the wall weight in addition to the perimeter of the floating floor. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 1.03 SUBMITTALS a. In seismic zones attach double acting resilient seismic snubbers to the structural slab on either side of high center of gravity equipment to withstand the overturning moment generated by the machinery snubbers and prevent failure of the floating floor. Place reinforcing as indicated and pour floor monolithically. Raise floor 2-inches by means of the jack-screws. If construction sequence dictates raising the floor before placing machinery, heavy planking shall be used to protect floor while machinery is being rolled into position. Caulk perimeter isolation board in all locations and grout jack-screw holes. Construct sound walls on the floating floor as indicated. In seismic zones adjust the double acting snubbers after machinery is in place to provide a maxmum up and down clearance of 0.125-inch. A. Detailed product drawings and load and deflection curves of isolators and in seismic zones double acting floor snubbers. B. Certification of the elastomedc compound to the fisted AASHO specifications, see Table 1. C. Dynamic frequency test data verifying 10 cycle frequency. D. Acoustical test data from an independent laboratory showing a minimum STC of 79 and a minimum INR of 17 using a 4-inch concrete floating floor, a 64nch structural floor and a 24nch air gap. E. Shop Drawings showing: 1. Dead, live and concentrated loads. 2. Isolator sizes, deflections, frequencies and locations and in seismic zones, locations of seismic snubbers. Wall sway brace and isolated angle iron trace sizes, locations and frequencies. 3. Drain and penetration locations. 4. Size, type, elevation and spacing of concrete reinforcement. 5. Caulking details. J 04-07-06 ACOUSTIC FLOOR SYSTEM Progress CD Set 13082-2 PROJECT #02028 SECTION 13082 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS ACOUSTIC FLOOR SYSTEM VAIL, COLORADO 6. Floor or floor and wall construction procedure. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Floating floor system components shag be designed and fabricated by a manufacturer with at least 5-years experience in 50 similar installations. B. The floating floor isolation materials shall be installed and the floor raised by or under the supervision of the isolator manufacturer. 1.05 SITE CONDITIONS A. If site conditions are unsatisfactory or raise questions about the installation of the floating floor, the work will not proceed until the condition has been corrected in a manner acceptable to the isolation manufacturer. The sub-floor shall have the same pitch as the top of the floating floor or special provisions shall be made for isolator housings of different height 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate work with other trades and coordinate scheduling with the construction supervisor to minimize delays. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Mason Industries or approved equal. 2.02 ISOLATORS A. Bell shaped castings with integral lugs to locate reinforcing, shrouding 24nch thick Du Pont Neoprene isolators molded to the following AASHO bridge bearing specifications.. Housings shall have'/,-inch minimum diameter jackscrews. Deflections shall not exceed 0.3-inches nor the frequency 10Hz. Isolators shall be Mason Industries Type FSN or approved equal. Table 1. AASHO BRIDGE BEARING SPECIFICATIONS ORIGINAL PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OVEN AGING (70h12120F) OZONE COMPRESSIO N SET Tests. ASTM D-676 and D-412 ASTM D-573 ASTM D-1149 ASTM D-395 Tensile Elongation Tensile Elongation 1 ppm in air by Durometer Strength at Break Hardness Strength at break volume 20% 22 hours 1580E Shore A (min) (min) (max) (max) (max) strain 1000F Method B 40±5 2000 psi 450% +15% ±15% -40% No Cracks 30% (max) 50±5 2500 psi 400% +15% ±15% -40% No Cracks 25% (max) 60±5 2500 psi 350% +15% ±15% 40% No Cracks 25% (max) 04.07.06 ACOUSTIC FLOOR SYSTEM Progress CD Set 13082 - 3 PROJECT #02028 SECTION 13082 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS ACOUSTIC FLOOR SYSTEM VAIL, COLORADO B. In seismic zones double acting resilient cast in floating floor snubbers shall consist of a ductile iron housing locked into the floating floor. The housing shall have a removable cover plate to provide access lo the adjustment of clearances in both the up and down directions of the resilient stops. Resilient stops shall be attached to a restraining bolt attached to the structural floor with an approved anchor. Double acting snubbers shall be Mason Industries Type SFFS or approved equal. C. Angle Brackets: 1-1/2-inch x 2-inch angle iron sections with provision for bolting to the structure and a minimum thickness of 3/8-inch sponge cemented to the vertical leg. Angle Brackets shall be Mason Industries AB-716 or approved equal. 2.03 BOND BREAKER MATERIAL A. Provide one layer of 6-mil polyethylene sheeting. 2.04 PERIMETER ISOLATION BOARD A. Minimum'/.-inch thick 10 IbJcu.fL fiberglass isolation board. Isolation board shall be Mason Industries AFG-10 or approved equal. B. In seismic zone perimeter isolation board shall be interspersed with '/.-inch thick, 60 durometer bridge bearing pads the height of the perimeter material. Bridge bearing pad shall be made to the same AASHO specifications, as shown for the FSN mountings and sized for a maiamum deflection of 0.2-inch at maximum earthquake forces. Interspersed pads shall be Mason Industries Type BBP or approved equal. 2.05 PERIMETER CAULKING COMPOUND A. Non-hardening, drying or bleeding. Troweling or pouring grade. Caulking compound shall be Mason Industries Type CC-75 or approved equal. 2.06 FLOATING FLOOR DRAINS A. Cast iron design. The upper funnel section cast into the floating floor. Lower bucket, built into the structure, shall retain water surrounding the upper section as a between floors sound seat. Weep holes are required to drain the structural floor. Floor drains shall have water proofing membrane camps. Floor drains shall be Mason Industries Type CFD-18591 or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Instal the floating floor systems according to the installation and adjustment procedures and drawings submitted by the isolator manufacturer and approved by the Architect. B. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 3 Sections. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 ACOUSTIC FLOOR SYSTEM Progress CD Set 13082-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 13156 VAIL, COLORADO SWIMMING POOL SPAS AND FOUNTAINS SECTION 13156 - SWIMMING POOL SPAS AND FOUNTAINS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A Related Requirements: Review the General Contract Conditions and Division One, General Requirements, which contain information and requirements that apply to this Section. B Work Included: Design and conshct an operable swimming pool, spas, and fountains complete as shown and as specified. C Related Work in Other Sections: Fine Grading - Section 02210 Excavating and Backfilling - Section 02220 Soil Preparation - Section 02920 Cast-in-Place Concrete - Section 03300 D Work Under Another Contract: Equipment room Electrical wiring to equipment room, and related electrical services. Gas, water, and sewer lines and related services. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE latest rules and A Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: All work and materials shall be in full accordance with regulations of State Department of Health Services, and all other applicable laws and regulations. B Fees and Permits: Secured and paid for by Contractor. C Applicable Standards: Apply the current or latest editions of the standards described below: 1. Standard Specifications - Standard Specifications of the State of Colorado. 2. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials. 3. ACI - American Concrete Institute, Manual of Concrete Practice. 4. NEC - National Electric Code. 5. ANSI - American National Standards Institute, Inc., Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile. 6. IBC - International Building Code. 04.07-2005 SWIMMING POOL, SPASAND FOUNTAINS Progress Construction Doo nents 13156-1 PROJECT #02026 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 13156 VAIL, COLORADO SWIMMING POOL SPAS AND FOUNTAINS 1.03 COORDINATION A Items of Other Trades: Coordinate with General Contractor items of other trades to be all or in part embedded, built-in, attached to, or supported by the work. Perform all cutting or patching made necessary to comply with this injunction. B Accessories: Provide holes, openings, etc., necessary to the execution of the work of the trades. Properly install all accessories embedded in the pool and spa. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A Samples and Product Data: Plaster Finish Coat: Two (2) color samples for each type. 2. Pool Tile: Four (4) for each type and color. 3. Pool Cover: 6 inch square cover sample in specified color. B Test Data: Copies of all laboratory test data and reports of all materials. C Shop Drawings: 1. Layout plan. 2. Mechanical and Electrical plan. D Operations of Maintenance Manual: Upon completion of this portion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance, compile four copies of a Manual listing all items of Swimming Pool, Spa and Fountain equipment furnished, including a cut or photograph of each item, and a listing of the vendor's name. Include a detailed outline of operations and maintenance procedures for each feature and the specified related equipment. 1.05 ANALYSES OF SAMPLES AND TESTS A Testing Laboratory Selected and paid for by contractor. B Notification: Cooperate in making tests and be responsible for notifying the designated laboratory in sufficient time to allow taking samples at time of pour. C Reiected Work: Full costs of removal of rejected material, its replacement with material of specified strength and oonformation, and retesting shall be bom by Contractor. Remove all such construction work off the site. 1.06 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A Review: Hold in conjunction with the final completion of all related work for Swimming Pool, Spas and Fountain. 04-D7-2006 SWIMMING POOL, SPASAND FOUNTAINS Progress Construction Documents 13156-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 13156 VAIL, COLORADO SWIMMING POOL SPAS AND FOUNTAINS B Final Acceptance Date: The date on which the Owners representative accepts satisfactory completion and operation of all work. Upon Final Acceptance, Contractor shall give the Owner the complete pool, spa and fountain operating instructions. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A SwimQuip A Division of Wylain, Inc. El Monte, CA 91732 - (213) 443-4211 Atlanta, GA 30318 - (404) 355-0480 Dallas, TX 75229 - (214) 357-3801 B Hydrel Corporation Sun Valley, CA 91352 - (213) 875-0131 C Bryan Steam Corporation Peru, IN 46970 - (317)473-6651 D Pool Tech. Inc. Lafayette, CA 94549 - (415) 2841400 E Sta-Rite Richards-Wilcox, Inc. San Francisco, CA 94125 - (415) 486-0600 2.02 PORTLAND CEMENT AND AGGREGATES: See - Cast-in-Place Concrete - Section 03300. 2.03 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A Reinforcing Steel: Standard sizes of deformed bars equal to the requirements of the Standard Specifications for Billet Steel, Concrete Reinforcement; Intermediate Grade, Serial Designation A15-39. B Electrical Bonding: Per NEC code. 2.04 GUNITE: Per design prepared by Pool Contractor. 2.05 PIASTER A lication: All exposed interior surfaces of the pool. B Thickness: 114 in. to 318 in. thick troweled into the truing coat of the rough gunite, floated t0 a uniform plane and troweled to a smooth, dense surface. C Type: 'Diamond Brite" plaster finish. D Color. Ivory; final approval by the Landscape Architect 04.07-4005 SWIMMING POOL, SPASAND FOUNTAINS Progress Construction Documents 13156-3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 13156 VAIL, COLORADO SWIMMING POOL SPAS AND FOUNTAINS 2.07 CERAMIC TILES A Water Line Tile: 1. Manufacturer. Heath Ceramics Inc., 400 Gate 5 Rd., Sausalito, California 94965, (415) 332-3732. 2. Tyke: 3 x 3 3. Color: To be selected by Landscape Architect. 4. Grout: Natural Gray 5. Locations: Pool and Spas B Pool & Spa Step Accent Tile: 1. Manufacturer. Heath Ceramics Inc., 400 Gate 5 Rd., Sausalito, California 94965, (415) 332-3732. 2. Type:1 x 1 at pool step 3. Color: To be selected by Landscape Architect 4. Grout: Natural Gray 5. Finish: Manufacturer to supply file with light application of fine white sand to make slip resistant 6. Location: As detailed at pool and spas. C Depth Marker Tile 1. Wall file depth markers shall be six inches square with background color matching the waterline file. Numbers are stenciled in white characters. 2. All numbers and figures shall be three inches in height D Portland Cement ASTM C150, grey for grout, and for setting mortar, Type 1 unless otherwise noted. E Sand: ASTM C144, washed dean and graded: d. 1. Pointing and Grouting: 100% shall pass No. 30 sieve, not over 5% shall pass No. 100 sieve; natural. 2. Setting: 100% shall pass No. 8 sieve, not over 5% shall pass No. 100 sieve, natural. F Grout : AN file grout shall be waterproof grout emptying with the recommendations of referenced standards. Grout color shall be gray for gray background, white for white background (verify colors with Landscape Architect) 04-07-2005 SWIMMING POOL, SPASAND FOUNTAINS Progress Construction Documents 13156-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 13156 VAIL, COLORADO SWIMMING POOL SPAS AND FOUNTAINS G Water. Clean and Free of deleterious acids, alkalies, or organic materials H Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type 1, L&M ceramic file adhesive, solvent type. I Primers. Underiayment and Solvents for Adhesive Setting: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer. 2.08 STONE COPING: A Source: Cold Springs Granite Contact: Jerry Cunningham, ph: 425.836.0670 B Color. Amber Gold C Finish: Diamond 10 finish, sawn edges with eased pool edge D Size: 2 Thick x 15" wide x 24" long 2.09 PIPES A Lateral Piping: PVC Schedule 40. B Face Piping: Copper Type "L". 2.10 DECK EQUIPMENT A. Figure 4 Grab Rails: Kiefer 70005110,1.9W-- O.D. x.109" wall, or equal. B. Recessed Steps: Kiefer 700031, or equal. C. Hand Rails: Custom Dimension Equivalent to ?refer 70035465, 1.90" O.D. x.065 " wail, or equal. D. Anchor Sockets for Grab Rails & Hand Rails: IGefer 700101, or equal. E. Anchor sockets for rope floats: Hayward SP-1040, or equal F. Escutcheon Plates for Grab Rails & Hand Rails: Kiefer 700302, or equal. G. Handicap Hoist Aquatic Access Model IGAT 180, or approved equal. Furnish complete with anchors. H. Quick Coupler for Handicap Hoist Rainbird #5RC or equal 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT: Supply the signage, filter, pump, motor, heater, vent, chlorinator, meter, timer and any and all other standard equipment required for proper operation of the pool, spa and all fountains in conformance with the Colorado Code. 2.12 SAFETY SIGNS: Per State and Federal Codes. 2.13 AUTOMATIC POOL COVER 0407-2005 SWIMMING POOL, SPASAND FOUNTAINS Progress Construction Documents 13156 - 5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 13156 VAIL, COLORADO SWIMMING POOL SPAS AND FOUNTAINS A. Track Mechanism:: Undertrack 'Save-T Cover 11 automatic pool cover system as manufactured by Cover Pools, 1-800-447-2838 with Extended Vanishing Lid. B. Motor: Cover Pools Hydraulic system with keyed motor control. C. Cover. Coved Pools Extended Life Premium Grade Fabric, Dusky Blue PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A Pool construction shall be in full compliance with Colorado Code. B Discrepancies or omissions on Drawings and conditions on the site that would prevent proper drainage of water away from pool shall be brought to the attention of the Landscape Architect in writing. 3.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A Pool Excavations: Continuously shore or excavate and backfill in accordance with the Soils Report and as approved by the Soils Engineer. B Rough Excavation and Hand Trim: Cary on as one operation to aid in eliminating over-excavation. C Templates: Use templates to form the vertical and curved excavation of the pool structure. D Voids: Fill with gunite all voids which may occur from over-excavation. E Drainage Conduit: Provide for subsurface drainage to storm system. 3.03 GUNITE A Pool Structure: Apply all gunite in one continuous operation. B. - Application 1. Apply structural gunite as approved by the Soils Engineer. Apply gunite to vertical surfaces at right angles to the surface. 2. Start at the pod bottom and continue upward onto the wall surfaces. 3.04 POOL EQUIPMENT A Supply and install items of swimming pod equipment in strict accordance with pertinent codes and regulations. Install per manufacturer's specifications, anchoring firmly and securely for long life under hard use. 007-M SWIMMING POOL, SPASAND FOUNTAINS Progress Construdon Documents 13156 - 6 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 13156 VAIL, COLORADO SWIMMING POOL SPAS AND FOUNTAINS B Carefully coordinate with all other trades to insure proper and adequate interface of the work of other trades with the work of this Section. C Insure timely delivery of all metal fabrications which must be installed in other work so as not to delay that work. 3.05 POOL COVER A Gage coping shone to rpovdie level surface for mounting undertrack system. B Instal per manufacturer's recommendation, provide shop drawings for review and approval prior to installation. 3.06 INSTRUCTION: A Upon final inspection and approval of the Owner's Representative, carefully instruct the Owner's maintenance and operations personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of installed equipment. 3.05 CLEAN-UP A Keep all areas of work dean, neat and orderly at all times. B Clean up and remove all deleterious materials and debris from the entire work area prior to Final Acceptance to the satisfaction of the Landscape Architect END OF SECTION 0407-2005 SWIMMING POOL, SPASAND FOUNTAINS Progress ConsUuction Documents 13156-7 SECTION 13650 SWIMMING POOLS SWIMMING POOL/SPA EQUIPMENT PART1-GENERAL 1.1 Description: Supply and install swimming pool miscellaneous equipment items as required for this Work as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.2 Quality Assurance: A. All Work of this Section shall be performed by the swimming pool contractor/subcontractor. 1.3 Submittals: A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01330. B. Substitutions: Include with request specified item, design, catalog number, and finish for each item on which approval is being requested ten (10) days prior to bid opening. Blanket review by manufacturer's name only will not be given. Substitutions will not be granted after the ten day period or after the project bids. 1.4 Product Handling: A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect swimming pool equipment items before, during and after installation and to protect the installed Work of all other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, Immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Safety Equipment: A. First Aid Kit for 50 Persons: Recreonics, United Industries, or approved equal. One (1) required. B. 30" Dia. Life Ring Buoy, U.S. Coast Guard Approved: Recreonics, United Industries, or approved equal. One (1) required. C. 60' Throw Rope for use with Life Ring Buoy: Recreonics, United Industries, or approved equal. One (1) required. 05/12/06 Swimming Pools Summary Permit Set Section 13650 - 1 D. Rescue Hooks: 12' long x 1-1/2" aluminum pole and mounting hardware. Recreonics, United Industries, or approved equal. One (1) required. E. Pool Safety Signs: As required by Health Department. Submittal required. 2.2 Maintenance Equipment: A. Utility Pole: 24' fiberglass with connectors. Recreonics, United Industries, or approved equal. Two (2) required. B. Pool Wall Brush: 36" wide professional quality. Recreonics, United Industries, or approved equal. One (1) required. C. Leaf Skimmer: 30" x 8" x 12", professional quality. Recreonics, United Industries, or approved equal. One (1) required. D. Water Quality Test Kit, Professional Grade: Recreonics #56-300, United Industries #P031081, or approved equal. One (1) required. E. Portable Vacuum System: Maxi-Sweep III Little Electric model with 1 hp electric pump, flexible vacuum head, 50' vacuum hose, and telescopic pole. 2.3 Pool Fittings: A. Main Drain Frame & Grate for pool and spas (9" x 9"): Hayward #SP-1062, or approved equal. B. Booster Suction Fitting: Hayward SP-1062, or approved equal. C. Wall Return Inlet 1-1/2" Adjustable: Swimquip #8429, Hayward #1419-C or approved equal. D. Surface Skimmer: Hayward Skimmaster SP-1082FVE, 2" or approved equal. E. Water Level Control System: Levelor or equal. F. Hydrotherapy Jets: Hayward' #SP-1437, or equal. G. Spa air intake: Paramount `Airport' or equal. 2.4 Deck Equipment: A. Grab Rails: As shown on the drawings, SR Smith or equal. B. Hand Rails: Custom Dimension Equivalent by SR Smith, 1.90" O.D. x.065 " wall, or equal. C. Anchor Sockets for Grab Rails & Hand Rails: SR Smith, or equal. D. Escutcheon Plates for Grab Rails & Hand Rails: SR Smith, or equal. 05/12/06 Swimming Pools Summary Permit Set Section 13650 - 2 E. Handicap Hoist: Aquatic Access Model IGAT-180, or approved equal. Furnish complete with anchors. F. Quick Coupler for Handicap Hoist: Rainbird #5RC or equal. 2.5 Cold Plunge and Whirlpool Spa Pools A. Stainless steel tiled pools manufactured by Bradford Products, Inc 6502 Windmill Way, Wilmington, NC, 800-438-1669. B. Sizes as shown on the drawings with tile finishes as approved by the Architect. C. Contractor is to coordinate the location of the booster switch and emergency stop button with the electrical contractor and Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Surface Conditions: A. Inspection: 1. Prior to installing the items of this Section, carefully inspect the installed Work of other trades and verify that all such Work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that the swimming pool equipment items may be installed in strict accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and the manufacturers' recommendations. 3.2 Discrepancies: A. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Landscape Architect. B. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies are fully resolved. C. Failure to notify the Landscape Architect and give written notice of discrepancies shall constitute acceptance by the Installer of existing conditions as fit and proper to receive its Work. 3.3 Installation: A. Supply and install items of swimming pool and spa equipment in strict accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the manufacturer's published recommendations, anchoring firmly and securely for long life under hard use. Coordinate with other trades to insure all imbedded items are set plumb and flush. Railing ends must have anchor sockets and escutcheon plates. Be certain that deck equipment and railings are properly bonded prior to imbedding. 05/12/06 Swimming Pools Summary Permit Set Section 13650 - 3 3.4 Instruction: J A. Upon final inspection and approval of the Owner's Representative, carefully instruct the Owner's maintenance and operations personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of installed equipment. SWIMMING POOIJSPA MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Description: Provide labor, materials, and equipment as required to install swimming pool mechanical equipment as detailed on the Drawings and herein specified. 1.2 Quality Assurance: A. All Work of this Section shall be performed by the swimming pool contractor/subcontractor. 1.3 Qualifications of Workers: A. The contractor/subcontractor for this portion of the Work shall have been successfully engaged in the business of installing swimming pool mechanical equipment for at least five (5) years immediately prior to commencement of this work, and shall demonstrate to the approval of the Landscape Architect that its' record of workmanship is satisfactory. B. For actual construction operations, use only thoroughly trained and experienced workers completely familiar with the materials and methods specified. C. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during the execution of this portion of the Work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the materials and methods specified, and who shall direct all Work performed under this Section. 1.4 Submittals and Substitutions: A. Provide submittals in conformance with requirements of Section 01330. 1.5 Product Handling: A. Delivery: Deliver materials to the Project Site in the manufacturer's original unopened containers with all labels intact and legible. B. Storage: Store materials under cover in a manner to prevent damage and contamination, and store only the specified materials at the Project Site. 05/12/06 Swimming Pools Summary Permit Set Section 13650 - 4 C. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect swimming pool mechanical equipment before, during and after installation and to protect the installed Work of all other trades. D. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Landscape Architect. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 Swimming Pool Filter system: A. Astral Hi-Rate permanent media sand filter with 3 inch face piping rated at 186 GPM @ 20 GPM per square foot. Complete with influent and effluent gauges, 9.26 sq. ft. filter area and filter sand. 1. Provide with 4 valve manifold system as manufactured by Astral. 2.2 Pool Filter Pump: A. Pentair C series self priming pump, 5 hp, 208 V, 3450 rpm, rated at 200 gpm @ 55' TDH. 2.3 Spa Filter Pump: A. Pentair Whisperflo self priming pump, 3 hp, 208 V, 3450 rpm, rated at 140 gpm @ 55' TDH. 2.4 Spa Booster Pump: A. Speck Pump model 21-80 BS, 4 hp, 200 gpm @ 50' TDH with integral basket strainer. 2.5 Spa Filter: A. Pentair Triton 11 TR 140C Hi-Rate permanent media sand filter with 2-1/2 inch face piping and backwash rated at 106 GPM @ 15 GPM per square foot. Complete with influent and effluent gauges, 7.06 sq. ft. filter area and filter sand. 2.6 Spas and Plunge Pool UV sanitizer: A. Provide an auxiliary ozone sanitizer for the spas and plunge pools as manufactured by Delta Ultraviolet Corporation. B. Model EP-20, quantities as shown on the drawing. 2.7 Chlorine Feed Systems: A. Main Pool: Goldline or Biolab salt chlorine generator. 05/12/06 Swimming Pools Summary Permit Set Section 13650 - 5 B. Spas and Cold Plunge pools: Rainbow brominator. 2.8 Swimming Pool/Spa Water Chemistry Controllers: A. Chemtrol Model PC2000 pH and Orp controller with water box assembly. 2.9 Flowmeter: A. Spa: "Blue/White Industries #F-300 series horizontally mounted flow meter; for 3". 2.10 Pool and Spa Controller: A. As manufactured by Pentair Pool Products, Compool Controller. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Surface Conditions: A. Inspection: 1. Prior to installing the items of this Section, carefully inspect the Work of other trades and verify that such Work is complete to the point where this installation can properly commence. 2. Verify that swimming pool mechanical equipment can be installed in accordance with the original design and all referenced standards. 3.2 Discrepancies: A. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. B. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. C. Failure to notify the Landscape Architect and give written notice of discrepancies shall constitute acceptance by the Contractor of existing conditions as fit and proper to receive the work. 3.3 Installation: A. Supply and install all items of swimming pool mechanical equipment in strict accordance with all applicable codes and regulations, the original design, and the manufacturer's published recommendations, anchoring firmly and securely for long life under hard use. 05/12/06 Swimming Pools Summary Permit Set Section 13650 - 6 B. All equipment shall be braced and/or anchored to resist a horizontal force acting in any direction using the criteria shown on the Drawings, 3.4 Instruction: A. Upon final inspection and approval of the Owner's Representative, carefully instruct the Owner's maintenance and operations personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of installed equipment. 3.5 Clean-Up: A. Upon completion of swimming pool mechanical equipment, remove all debris, materials and equipment occasioned by this Work to the approval of the Landscape Architect. SWIMMING POOL START-UP AND OPERATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Description: Provide start-up and operation instructions to Owner and properly balance pool chemistry upon start-up. Until the Owner takes occupancy. 1.2 Quality Assurance: A. Retain a qualified chemistry consultant, familiar with operation and maintenance of aquatic facilities, to supervise and properly balance pool chemistry. B. Demonstrate to the Architect and appropriate officials that all systems are fully operational and that calcium hardness, chlorine residual and pH levels are within specified limits. C. Standards: Contractor shall furnish labor and chemicals as required to condition the water properly to the following specifications: 1. Calcium Hardness: 150 to 300 ppm 2. Total Alkalinity: 100 ppm 3. Chlorine Residual: 1.00-1.50 ppm 4. pH Factor: 7.2 to 7.5 1.3 Equipment Activation: A. All water chemistry and filtration mechanical equipment shall be operational upon filling of pool after plaster. Chemicals and other related support items as supplied by Contractor, shall be in supply at start-up. 05/12/06 Swimming Pools Summary Permit Set Section 13650 - 7 B. Start-up and provide qualified personnel to operate pool equipment for a period not less than r„ fourteen (14) days after the pool is placed in operation, or until the Owner takes occupancy of the facility or letter of substantial completion. During which time instruct and supervise the Owner's personnel in the various operating and maintenance techniques involved. Pool Contractor shall be responsible for supply of chemicals during this not less than fourteen (14) day period and at time of turnover to Owner, chemical storage tanks shall be full. (And Owner's personnel fully trained and capable of assuming pool maintenance tasks, training may begin before Owner takes occupancy). SWIMMING POOL/SPA MECHANICAL PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Description: A. Provide swimming pool mechanical piping as indicated on the Drawings for filtration and circulation systems, chemical control systems, and all appurtenances. B. Furnish and install domestic water system from points of connection within pool equipment area to make-up water system, hose bibs and miscellaneous items as required. C. Furnish and install filter backwash system to point of connection with sanitary sewer within pool equipment area as required and as shown on the drawings. D. Fumish and install heat exchanger piping and appurtenances as required for an operating system. E. Furnish and install all containment conduits from the chemical storage area in the service yard to the appropriate filter system. In the case of the main pool the filter system is located at the east end of the pool, deep end. 1.2 Quality Assurance: A. All Work of this Section shall be performed by the swimming pool contractor/subcontractor. B. Qualifications of Workers/Work: 1. Employ only experienced competent and properly equipped workers on Project. 2. Use only new materials in perfect condition. Inspect all materials and immediately remove defective items from the Project Site. 1.3 Standards: A. Work shall be performed in accordance with the applicable editions of all National, State and local codes, laws, regulations and ordinances, including the following: 05/12/06 Swimming Pools Summary Permit Set Section 13650 - 8 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) American Waterworks Association (AWWA) American Welding Society B. Do not construct anything in the Drawings or Specifications to permit Work not conforming to these requirements. 1.4 Submittals: A. Provide submittals and substitutions in accordance with Section 01330. 1.5 Product Handling: A. Protection: Use means necessary to protect the swimming pool mechanical piping items before, during and after installation and to protect the installed Work of other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Landscape Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.6 Job Conditions: A. Cooperation: Cooperate with other trades in coordinating their respective Work, so that no conflict of new construction or occupied space may occur. Should any installation Work be done without such craft coordination, that Work so installed shall be removed and reinstalled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Product Quality: A. Materials and equipment shall be new, of the best quality for the purpose intended, and shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer's name and nameplate data or stamp and rating. As far as practicable, materials and equipment shall be of one manufacturer. 2.2 Pipe and Fittings: A. PVC Schedule 40: Type 1, normal impact, NSF approved for solvent welding applications, ASTM Specification D-1785, color shall be white. Spears, Dura, Lasco, or approved equal. B. PVC Schedule 80: Type 1, normal impact, NSF approved for solvent welding applications, ASTM Specification D-1785, color shall be gray. Spears, Dura, Lasco, or approved equal. C. Copper Tubing: ASTM Specification B-88, hard drawn, with ANSI Standard B 16.22 wrot copper fittings. 05/12/06 Swimming Pools Summary Permit Set Section 13650 - 9 D. Steel: ASTM Specification A-120, Schedule 40 black or galvanized pipe with ASTM A-47 150 lb. banded malleable iron threaded fittings. E. Cast Iron: ASTM Specification B 16. 1, cast iron flanged fittings, provide epoxy coating as required for use with chlorinated water. 2.3 Valves: A. Gate Valves: Epoxy coated cast or ductile iron body, 316 stainless steel gate and stem, viton seat material. DeZurick, Keystone, or approved equal. B. Butterfly Valves: Epoxy coated cast or ductile iron body, 316 stainless steel disc and stem, viton seat material, furnish hand wheel/gear operators on all valves 6" and larger. DeZurick, Keystone, or approved equal. C. Check Valves: Wafer-type, epoxy coated cast or ductile iron body, 316 stainless steel plates and shaft, viton seat material. Centerline, Metraflex, or approved equal. D. R-P Backflow Preventer: Febco #835-B for 2" and smaller; #825 for 2 1/2" and larger. Febco, Watts, or approved equal. 2.4 Pressure Gauges: A. 4-1/2" dial, bottom connection, chrome ring and shut-off cock. Ranges shall be selected to indicate between mid-point and two-thirds of maximum range under design conditions. Marsh, Trerice, or approved equal. 2.5 Piping and Supports: A. General: 1. Use Kin-Line, Grinnel, or approved equal. 2. Support all pipe line individually with hangers, each branch having at least one hanger. Lateral brace as noted and required. 3. Support piping near floor with steel stanchions welded to end plates secured to pipe and floor. 4. Support vertical piping at each floor level. Install coupling in piping at each support. Coupling shall rest on and transmit load to support. Isolate copper from steel supports with vinyl electrician's tape around pipe and coupling. 5. Use Stoneman "Trisolator," Unistrut, or approved equal, isolators at each hanger and other support points on bare copper tubing system. 6. For PVC pipe, space hangers four (4) feet apart for pipe sizes V and under, five (5) feet apart for pipe sizes 1-1/4" to 2", and six (6) feet apart for pipe sizes over 2". Space hangers for horizontal pipes at a maximum of six (6) feet for copper 2" and smaller and for steel 1-1/4" and smaller; ten (10) feet for copper 2-1/2" and larger and for steel 1-1/2" and larger. 7. Size hanger rods, screws, bolts, nuts, etc., according to manufacturer's sizing charts. 8. Trapeze hangers may be used for parallel lines. 05/12/06 Swimming Pools Summary Permit Set Section 13650 - 10 9. Use galvanized or cadmium plated hangers, attachments, rods, nuts, bolts, and other accessories in pool mechanical room, high humidity areas, or where exposed to weather. Hot dip galvanize all items which are not factory furnished. Plating for hinged movements must be done at the factory. 10. Lateral Bracing: To prevent swaying of the piping systems, provide angle iron bracing and anchor into wall or overhead framing. Piping shall be braced or anchored in such a way as to resist a horizontal force of 50% of its operating weight in any direction. 11. Do not use wire or other makeshift devices for hangers. 2.6 Sleeves and Waterstops: A. Provide sleeves where work of this Section passes through fire rated partitions, floors and ceilings, concrete slabs or exterior of structure. Caulk clearance space using sealant appropriate for application in conformance with manufacturer's. 3m, Dow Coming, or approved equal. In lieu of sleeves and caulking, "Link Seal" products may be used. B. Provide prefabricated waterstops as indicated on the Drawings at all pipe penetrations through structures containing stored water (i.e., swimming pools, balance/surge tanks, etc.) to insure leak-proof seals, PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Surface Conditions: A. Inspection: 1. Prior to Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed Work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that items of this Section may be installed in accordance with the original design and referenced standards. 3.2 Discrepancies: A. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. B. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. C. Failure to notify the Architect and give written notice of discrepancies shall constitute acceptance by the Contractor of existing conditions as fit and proper to receive his work. 3.3 General Piping Requirements: A. Size any section of pipe for which size is not indicated or any intermediate section erroneously shown undersized the same size as the largest pipe connecting to it. Sizes listed are nominal. V 05/12/06 Swimming Pools Summary Permit Set Section 13650 -11 B. Cut pipe accurately to job measurements and install without springing or forcing, true to line and grade, generally square with building and/or structures and adequately supported to prevent undue stress on pipe, fittings and accessories. C. Make changes of direction with manufactured fittings. Street ells, bushings, reducing flanges, close nipples or bending of pipe is not allowed. D. Use great care to install piping in accordance with best practice. Plastic pipe shall be "snaked" in trenches to allow for thermal expansion. E. All above grade, below grade and buried or imbedded PVC shall be installed using solvent weld fittings. Also, each and every fitting and pipe end shall be prepared with solvent primer. Fittings shall be joined individually and with enough time between assembly of adjacent joints to allow them to sea] solidly. After joining, an even ring of primer must be visible around the entire fitting. If any fittings are installed without visible primer, the fitting shall be removed and discarded and piping recut, rechamfered, and joint made up again using a new fitting. All procedures, methods and techniques used to make up solvent weld joints shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. F. Arrange pipe and hangers to allow for expansion, contraction and structural settlement. No pipe shall contact structure except penetrations as shown on the Drawings. G. Provide dielectric connections between copper and dissimilar metals. In copper systems, threaded piping including connections to equipment shall be brass pipe and fittings. Install dielectric connections in vertical sections of piping only. H. Run pipe full size through shut-off valves, balancing valves, etc. Change pipe size within three (3) pipe diameters of final connection to control valves, fixtures and other equipment. I. Provide unions or flanges at connections to equipment, on service side of valves and elsewhere as required to facilitate ease of maintenance. Locate equipment shut-off valves as close to equipment as possible maintaining easy valve access. K. Make all connections between domestic water systems and equipment or face piping with approved backflow prevention devices as required. 3.4 Trench Excavation and Backfill: A. Excavation: 1. Excavate and backfill trenches as required for the Work of this Section. Conform to requirements of Section 02221. 2. The Contractor shall perform all excavation of every description and of whatever materials encountered, to the depths indicated on the Drawings or as necessary. The Contractor shall dispose of the excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill as directed, and shall perform such grading as may be necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into the trenches. The Contractor shall provide adequate equipment for the removal of stones or subsurface waters which may accumulate in the excavated areas. 05/12/06 Swimming Pools Summary Permit Set Section 13650 - 12 3.5 Trenching: A. Excavate trenches to lines and grades as indicated on the Drawings and with banks as nearly vertical as practicable. B. Bottoms of trenches shall be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing on undisturbed soil for the entire length of each section of pipe. C. The width of the trench at and below the top of the pipe shall be such that the clear space between the barrel of the pipe and the trench wall shall not exceed 8" on either side of the pipe. The width of trench above the top of pipe may be wider if necessary. D. Over-depth excavations shall be filled with tamped sand to required grades. E. Excavations of 5 feet or more in depth shall be shored or supported in conformance with rules, and regulations of State and Federal Governments. Shoring shall be constructed, maintained and removed in a manner to prevent caving of the excavation walls or other load on the pipe. Backfilling: 1. Material for backfilling of pipes shall be approved granular material less than 2" in diameter obtained from the excavation. No material of a perishable, spongy or otherwise unsuitable nature shall be used as backfill. 2. Backfilling of pipe trenches shall commence immediately after installation and testing to preclude damage to the installed pipe. Backfill around pipe shall be carefully placed so as not to displace or damage the pipe, and shall be carried up symmetrically on each side of the pipe to one foot above the top of the pipe. The material shall be carefully compacted or consolidated before additional backfill is placed. 3. Backf ll above an elevation of one foot above the top of pipe in conformance with requirements of Section 02221. Material for balance of backfill shall be approved granular material less than 6" in diameter taken from the excavation. F. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, all pipe shall have a minimum of 36" of cover. 3.6 General Equipment Requirements: A. Position equipment to result in good appearance and easy access to all components for maintenance and repairs. B. Install piping, flues, breeching and ducts so that they do not interfere with equipment access. C. Install level, secure and out of moisture. Provide shims, anchors, support straps, angles, grouted bases, or other items as required to accomplish proper installation. D. All screws, nuts, bolts and washers shall be galvanized, cadmium plated or stainless steel. After fabrication, hot-dip galvanize unfinished ferrous items for outdoor, below grade or other use subject to moisture. E. Extend 1/2" Schedule 40 black steel pipe lubrication tubes from all hard to reach locations to front of equipment or to access points. Terminate with proper type of lubrication fitting. 05/12/06 Swimming Pools Summary Permit Set Section 13650 - 13 3.7 Valves and Strainers: A. If no shut-off is indicated, provide gate valves at inlet connections and balance valves at outlet connections to fixtures and equipment. Provide proper valve trim for service intended. B. Use no solder end valves unless noted otherwise; provide adapters in copper tubing systems. C. Locate valves with stems above horizontal plane of pipe. In general, locate valves within six (6) feet of floor, out from under equipment, in accessible locations with adequate clearance around hand wheels or levers for easy operation. D. Provide all valves, cocks and strainers, full pipe size unless indicated otherwise. E. Provide hand wheel operators on all valves 6" and larger, under 6" ]ever operators may be used. 3.8 Identification of Piping: A. Identify each valve by a numbered brass tag with hole and brass chain mounted on valve stem or handle. Tag to be a minimum of 1-1/2" in diameter and numbers at least 1/4" high stamped into tag. B. Install an identification chart in a plastic or glass framed enclosure which schematically illustrates the proper operation of all piping systems and indicates number and location of all valves and control devices within the system. 3.9 Tests: A. Perform tests in presence of Owner's Representative with no pressure loss or noticeable leaks. B. Do not include valves and equipment in tests. Include connection to previously tested sections if systems are tested in sections. C. Perform tests as follows: System Test Pressure Test Medium Duration Pool Piping 50 psig Water 4 hours Domestic Water 50 psig Water 4 hours Gas Piping 50 psig Air 4 hours 3.10 Pipe Material Application: A. PVC Schedule 40: Below grade pool piping and domestic water piping up to 12" line size; use standard solvent weld fittings. . B. PVC Schedule 80: Above grade pool piping up to 12" line size; use flanged Schedule 80 or epoxy coated cast iron fittings or standard solvent weld fittings per plans. C. Type L Hard Copper: Above grade domestic water piping. 05/12/06 Swimming Pools Summary Permit Set Section 13650 - 14 D. Schedule 40 Steel: Natural gas piping. E. CPVC: Above grade pool heater piping. 3.11 Cutting and Drilling: A. Cutting or drilling necessary for installation of Work of this Section shall be done only with Architect's approval. 3.12 Closing-In of Uninspected Work: A. Do not cover or enclose Work before testing and inspection. Re-open Work prematurely closed and restore all Work damaged. 3.13 Quietness: A. Quietness is a requirement. Eliminate noise, other than that caused by specified equipment operating at optimum conditions, as directed by Architect. 3.14 Flushing of Lines: A. Flush or blow out pipes free from foreign substances before installing valves, stops or making final connections. Clean piping systems of dirt and dust prior to initial start-up. 3.15 Clean-Up: A. After all Work has been tested and approved, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all parts of the equipment installations. Exposed parts shall be cleaned of cement, plaster and other materials and all grease and oil spots removed with solvent. B. The Contractor shall remove debris from the Project site. Cartons, boxes, packing crates and excess materials not used, occasioned by this work shall be disposed of to the satisfaction of the Architect. C. If the above requirements of clean-up are not performed to the satisfaction of the Architect, the Owner reserves the right to order the work done, the cost of which shall be borne by the Contractor. END OF SECTION 05/12/06 Swimming Pools Summary Permit Set Section 13650 - 15 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section. B. Work Included in This Section: Provide electric traction elevators and hydraulic elevators complete as shown and specified. C. Related Work Interfaced With This Section: Life Safety or Public Address Speakers: Furnished by others; wire from machine room to car, accommodations and installation in car canopy by this Section. 2. Card Readers: Furnished by others; wire from machine room to car, interfacing with elevator controls and installation in elevator car by this Section. Connection in machine room and testing by others. 3. Close Circuit T.V.: Furnished by others; wire from machine room to elevator car by this Section. Connection in machine room and testing by others. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Qualifications of Bidders: 1. General: The entire elevator installation shall be manufactured, installed and maintained by an acceptable manufacturer listed or as qualified by addendum. No portion of the work shall be subcontracted unless qualified and accepted by addendum. Equipment proposed must have a history of successful operation under similar conditions for the last two (2) years. 2. Acceptable Bidders: One of the following or as approved by addendum. Those not listed must pre-qualify ten (10) days prior to bid date. Submit list of at least three (3) projects representing equivalent equipment that has been operational for at least two (2) years. Include Owner's name, person to contact and telephone number. a. Kone Elevator Company. b. Otis Elevator Company. C. Schindler Elevator Company. d. ThyssenKrupp Elevator Company. 3. Maintenance Qualifications: Performed by manufacturer installing elevator a. Show evidence of successful experience in complete maintenance of elevators. 05-12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permk Set 14200-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS SECTION 14200 VAIL, COLORADO ELEVATORS b. Directly employ sufficient competent personnel within 50 miles of project to handle service. C. Maintain local stock of parts adequate for replacement on permanent or emergency basis. d. Respond to trouble calls within one hour. e. Offer the Owner agreement for continuing maintenance after expiration of maintenance period under this contract. 4. Elevator Cars and Entrances: One of the following or accepted equal: a. Elevator Manufacturer. b. Brice Southern C. Hauenstein and Burmeister. d, Tyler Elevator Products. B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Codes: In accordance with the latest applicable edition requirements of the following and as specified: a. A.D.A.: Americans with Disabilities Act. b. ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers - A17.1; Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. C. NEC: National Electric Code. d. IBC: International Building Code. e. All local odes, which govern. 2. Permits: Arrange and pay for inspections by governing authorities and obtain operating permits. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Submit as required by the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative reserves the right to require any details of any portion of the equipment. 1. Layouts: Plan and section of hoistways, pits and machinery spaces; include impact and static loads imposed on building structure location of hoistway ventilation and required clearances around equipment. 2. Details: Submit details of cabs, fixtures and entrances. 3. Data: Indicate on layouts or separate data sheets; machine spaces heat release, power requirements, conduit runs outside of hoistways and machine rooms, car and counterweight roller guides and door operators. J 05.12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200-2 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS SECTION 14200 VAIL, COLORADO ELEVATORS B. Samples: Provide samples of materials and finishes exposed to public view and additional, if specifically requested, 6 inch x 6 inch panels, 12 inch lengths or full size if smaller, as applicable. C. Operating Instructions: Submit manufacturer's literature describing system operations and special operations as specified. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Protect equipment during transportation, erection and construction. Store under cover to prevent damage due to weather conditions. Replace damaged materials. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: Schedule and be responsible for coordinating related work with other trades to avoid omissions and delays in job progress. 1.06 WARRANTY: Provide special project warranty, signed by Contractor, Installer and Manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair/restore defective materials and workmanship of elevator work which may develop within one (1) year from final date of completion and acceptance of the entire installation. "Defective" is hereby defined to include, but not by way of limitation, operation or control system failures, performances below required minimums, excessive wear, unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes, unsafe conditions, the need for excessive maintenance, abnormal noise or vibration and similar unusual, unexpected and unsatisfactory conditions. 1.07 ALTERNATES: A. Alternate No. 1; Continuing Full Maintenance Contract: Quote cost and submit manufacturers proposal for full maintenance contract for a period of five (5) years after expiration of 12-month maintenance provided with this new installation. 2. Provide weekly examinations, lubrication and replacements in accordance with manufacturers standard practice. Include a minimum of one and one-half hour per traction elevator and one-half hour per hydraulic elevator per visit performing only preventative maintenance. Any work required performing repairs or answering trouble calls shall be in addition to the preventative maintenance hours. 3. Provide 24-hour emergency call back (entrapments) service and trouble callbacks after hours during normal working hours at no cost to Owner. Trouble callbacks after hours shall be billable for the premium time portion only. PART 2-PRODUCTS: 2.01 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS: A. Elevator No. RP1-RP2; Residence Passenger: 1. Type: Machine Room-Less Traction 2. Capacity: 3500 Pounds 3. Speed: 350 FPM 4. Stops: 9 at 1, 3-10 5. Openings: 9 In Line 6. Travel: As Shown 7. Control: ACNVVF 8. Operation: Group Operation 9. Machine Location: Within Hoistway Above 0511-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200 - 3 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS 10. Compensation: 11. Special Operations: a. Independent Service b. Fire Emergency Service C. Standby Emerg. Power d. Anti-Nuisance Service e. Tenant Security 12. Car Enclosure Type: a. Platform Size b. Inside Clear 13. Sign als and Fixtures a. Car Operating Panels b. Car Position Indicator C. Communication Sys. d. Service Cabinet e. Hall Pushbuttons f. Hall Lanterns g. Hall Pos. Indicators 14. Passenger Entrance Type a. Size b. Frames (1) Main Floor (2) Typical Floors C. Doors (1) Main Floor (2) Typical Floors d. Sills (1) Main Floor (2) Typical Floors 15. Miscellaneous Items: a. Disabled Access Requirements b. Key Operated Hoistway Access C. Card Reader Provisions B. Elevator No. RS1; Residence Service: 1. Type: 2. Capacity: 3. Speed: 4. Stops: 5. Openings: 6. Travel: 7. Control: 8. Operation: 9. Machine Location: 10. Compensation: 11. Special Operations: a. Independent Service b. Fire Emergency Service C. Standby Emerg. Power d. Anti-Nuisance Service 05-12.06 Summary Permit Set As Required By Manufacturer Passenger 7'-0" W by 6'-2" D by 10'-0" H 6'-8" W by 5'-5" D by 9'-0" H Design as Specified 2 Per Car; Swing Type Integral with Each Car Panel Integral with Car Panel Integral with Car Panel 1 Riser All Floors Main Floor Center Open, Single Speed 3'-6" W by 7'-0" H Bronze Bronze Bronze Bronze Bronze Bronze Machine Room-Less Traction 4500 Pounds 350 FPM 9 at 2-10 10 (Front 2-5, 7, 8; Rear 4, 6, 9,10) As Shown ACNVVF Group Operation with RS2 Within Hoistway Above As Required, By Manufacturer ELEVATORS 14200-4 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS SECTION 14200 VAIL, COLORADO ELEVATORS e. Tenant Security 12. Car Enclosure Type: Service a. Platform Size 6'-0" W by 9'-4 D by 10'-0' H b. Inside Clear 5'-8" W by 7'-10" D by 10'-0" H 13. Signals and Fixtures Design as Specified a. Car Operating Panels 1 Per Car; Applied Type b. Car Position Indicator Integral with Each Car Panel C. Communication Sys. Integral with Car Panel d. Service Cabinet Integral with Car Panel e. Hall Pushbuttons 1 Riser f. Hall Lanterns All Floors g. Hall Pos. Indicators Main Floor 14. Passenger Entrance Type Side Open, Two Speed a. Size 4'-0" W by 7'-0" H b. Frames (1) Main Floor Stainless Steel (2) Typical Floors Stainless Steel C. Doors (1) Main Floor Finish Paint (2) Typical Floors Finish Paint d. Sills (1) Main Floor Aluminum (2) Typical Floors Aluminum 15. Miscellaneous Items: a. Disabled Access Requirements b. Key Operated Hoistway Access C. Card Reader Provisions C. Elevator No. RS2; Residence Service: 1. Type: Machine Room-Less Traction 2. Capacity: 4500 Pounds 3. Speed: 350 FPM 4. Stops: 7 at 2-10 5. Openings: 8 (Front 2-5, 7, 8; Rear 4, 6) 6. Travel: As Shown 7. Control: ACNVVF 8. Operation: Group Operation with RS1 9. Machine Location: Within Hoistway Above 10. Compensation: As Required By Manufacturer 11. Special Operations: a. Independent Service b. Fire Emergency Service C. Standby Emerg. Power d. Anti-Nuisance Service e. Tenant Security 12. Car Enclosure Type: Service a. Platform Size 6'-0" W by 9'-4 D by 10'-0" H b. Inside Clear 5'-8" W by 7'-10" D by 10'-0" H 13. Signals and Fixtures Design as Specified a. Car Operating Panels 1 Per Car; Applied Type 05-12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200-5 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS b. Car Position Indicator Integral with Each Car Panel C. Communication Sys. Integral with Car Panel d. Service Cabinet Integral with Car Panel e. Hall Pushbuttons 1 Riser f. Hall Lanterns All Floors g. Hall Pos. Indicators Main Floor 14. Passenger Entrance Type Side Open, Two Speed a. Size 4'-0" W by 7'-0" H b. Frames (1) Main Floor Stainless Steel (2) Typical Floors Stainless Steel C. Doors (1) Main Floor Finish Paint (2) Typical Floors Finish Paint d. Sills (1) Main Floor Aluminum (2) Typical Floors Aluminum 15. Miscellaneous Items: a. Disabled Access Requirements b. Key Operated Hoistway Access C. Card Reader Provisions D. Elevator No. RS3; Residence Service: 1. Type: Machine Room-Less Traction 2. Capacity: 4500 Pounds 3. Speed: 350 FPM 4. Stops: 2 at 3 and 5 5. Openings: 4 (Front and Rear at 3 and 5) 6. Travel: As Shown 7. Control: ACIVVVF 8. Operation: Selective Collective 9. Machine Location: Within Hoistway Above 10. Compensation: As Required By Manufacturer 11. Special Operations: a. Independent Service b. Fire Emergency Service C. Standby Emerg. Power d. Anti-Nuisance Service e. Tenant Security 12. Car Enclosure Type: Service a. Platform Size 6'-0" W by 9'-4 D by 10'-0" H b. Inside Clear 5'-8" W by 7'-10" D by 10'-0" H 13. Signals and Fixtures Design as Specified a. Car Operating Panels 1 Per Car, Applied Type b. Car Position Indicator Integral with Each Car Panel C. Communication Sys. Integral with Car Panel d. Service Cabinet Integral with Car Panel e. Hall Pushbuttons 1 Riser f. Hall Lanterns All Floors g. Hall Pos. Indicators Main Floor 05-12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permft Set 14200 - 6 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS 14. Passenger Entrance Type Side Open, Two Speed a. Size 4'-0" W by 7'-0" H b. Frames (1) Main Floor Stainless Steel (2) Typical Floors Stainless Steel C. Doors (1) Main Floor Finish Paint (2) Typical Floors Finish Paint d. Sills (1) Main Floor Aluminum (2) Typical Floors Aluminum 15. Miscellaneous Items: a. Disabled Access Requirements b. Key Operated Hoistway Access C. Card Reader Provisions d. Counterweight Safeties E. Elevator No. CPI-CP2; Condo Passenger: 1. Type: Machine Room-Less Traction 2. Capacity: 3500 Pounds 3. Speed: 350 FPM 4. Stops: 10 at 1-10 5. Openings: 10 In Line 6. Travel: As Shown 7. Control: AC/VVVF 8. Operation: Group Operation With H1 9. Machine Location: Within Hoistway Above 10. Compensation: As Required By Manufacturer 11. Special Operations: a. Independent Service b. Fire Emergency Service C. Standby Emerg. Power d. Anti-Nuisance Service e. Tenant Security f. Condo VIP Access Service 12. Car Enclosure Type: Passenger a. Platform Size 7'-0" W by 6'-2" D by 10'-0" H b. Inside Clear 6'-8" W by 5'-5" D by 9'-0" H 13. Signals and Fixtures Design as Specified a. Car Operating Panels 2 Per Car, Swing Type b. Car Position Indicator Integral with Each Car Panel C. Communication Sys. Integral with Car Panel d. Service Cabinet Integral with Car Panel e. Hall Pushbuttons 1 Riser f. Hall Lanterns All Floors g. Hall Pos. Indicators Main Floor 14. Passenger Entrance Type Center Open, Single Speed a. Size 3'-6" W by 7'-0" H b. Frames (1) Main Floor Bronze 05.12.06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set '14200-7 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS SECTION 14200 VAIL, COLORADO ELEVATORS (2) Typical Floors Bronze C. Doors (1) Main Floor Bronze (2) Typical Floors Bronze d. Sills (1) Main Floor Bronze (2) Typical Floors Bronze 15. Miscellaneous Items: a. Disabled Access Requirements b. Key Operated Hoistway Access C. Card Reader Provisions in Car and Hall on Floors Common with Hotel Elevator No. HP1; Hotel Passenger: 1. Type: Machine Room-Less Traction 2. Capacity: 3500 Pounds 3. Speed: 350 FPM 4. Stops: 7 at 2-8 5. Openings: 7 In Line 6. Travel: As Shown 7. Control: AC/VVVF 8. Operation: Group Operation with C1-C2 9. Machine Location: Within Hoistway Above 10. Compensation: As Required By Manufacturer 11. Special Operations: a. Independent Service b. Fire Emergency Service C. Standby Emerg. Power d. Anti-Nuisance Service e. Tenant Security 12. Car Enclosure Type: Passenger a. Platform Size 7'-0" W by 6'-2" D by 10'-0" H b. Inside Clear 6'-8" W by 5'-5" D by 9'-0" H 13. Signals and Fixtures Design as Specified a. Car Operating Panels 2 Per Car, Swing Type b. Car Position Indicator Integral with Each Car Panel C. Communication Sys. Integral with Car Panel d. Service Cabinet Integral with Car Panel e. Hall Pushbuttons 1 Riser f. Hall Lanterns All Floors g. Hall Pos. Indicators Main Floor 14. Passenger Entrance Type Center Open, Single Speed a. Size 3'-6" W by 7'-0" H b. Frames (1) Main Floor Bronze (2) Typical Floors Bronze C. Doors (1) Main Floor Bronze (2) Typical Floors Bronze d. Sills (1) Main Floor Bronze 05.12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200 - 8 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS (2) Typical Floors 15. Miscellaneous Items: a. Disabled Access Requirements b. Key Operated Hoistway Access C. Card Reader Provisions Bronze G. Elevator No. HS1; Hotel Service: 1. Type: 2. Capacity: 3. Speed: 4. Stops: 5. Openings: 6. Travel: 7. Control: 8. Operation: 9. Machine Location: 10. Compensation: 11. Special Operations: a. Independent Service b. Fire Emergency Service C. Standby Emerg. Power d. Anti-Nuisance Service e. Tenant Security 12. Car Enclosure Type: a. Platform Size b. Inside Clear 13. Signals and Fixtures a. Car Operating Panels b. Car Position Indicator C. Communication Sys. d. Service Cabinet e. Hall Pushbuttons f. Hall Lanterns g. Hall Pos. Indicators 14. Passenger Entrance Type a. Size b. Frames (1) Main Floor (2) Typical Floors C. Doors (1) Main Floor (2) Typical Floors d. Sills (1) Main Floor (2) Typical Floors 15. Miscellaneous Items: a. Disabled Access Requirements b. Key Operated Hoistway Access C. Card Reader Provisions d. Counterweight Safeties Machine Room-Less Traction 4500 Pounds 350 FPM 9 at 2-10 9 In Line As Shown ACNVVF Group Operation with HS2 Within Hoistway Above As Required By Manufacturer Service 6'-0" W by 8'-10 D by 10'-0" H 5'-8" W by 7'-10" D by 10'-0" H Design as Specified 1 Per Car, Applied Type Integral with Each Car Panel Integral with Car Panel Integral with Car Panel 1 Riser All Floors Main Floor Side Open, Two Speed 4'-0" W by 7'-0" H Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Finish Paint Finish Paint Aluminum Aluminum 05-12-06 Summary Permit Set ELEVATORS 14200-9 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS SECTION 14200 VAIL, COLORADO ELEVATORS H. Elevator No. HS2; Hotel Service: 1. Type: Machine Room-Less Traction 2. Capacity: 4500 Pounds 3. Speed: 350 FPM 4. Stops: 6 at 3-8 5. Openings: 6 In Line 6. Travel: As Shown 7. Control: ACNVVF 8. Operation: Group Operation with HS1 9. Machine Location: Within Hoistway Above 10. Compensation: As Required By Manufacturer 11. Special Operations: a. Independent Service b. Fire Emergency Service C. Standby Emerg. Power d. Anti-Nuisance Service e. Tenant Security 12. Car Enclosure Type: Service a. Platform Size 6'-0" W by 8'-10 D by 10'-0" H b. Inside Clear 5'-8" W by 7'-10" D by 10'-0" H 13. Signals and Fixtures Design as Specified a. Car Operating Panels 1 Per Car; Applied Type b. Car Position Indicator Integral with Each Car Panel C. Communication Sys. Integral with Car Panel d. Service Cabinet Integral with Car Panel e. Hall Pushbuttons 1 Riser f. Hall Lanterns All Floors g. Hall Pos. Indicators Main Floor 14. Passenger Entrance Type Side Open, Two Speed a. Size 4'-0" W by 7'-0" H b. Frames (1) Main Floor Stainless Steel (2) Typical Floors Stainless Steel C. Doors (1) Main Floor Finish Paint (2) Typical Floors Finish Paint d. Sills (1) Main Floor Aluminum (2) Typical Floors Aluminum 15. Miscellaneous Items: a. Disabled Access Requirements b. Key Operated Hoistway Access C. Card Reader Provisions d. Counterweight Safeties Elevator No. VS1; Valet Service: 1. Type: Machine Room-Less Traction 2. Capacity: 3500 Pounds 05-12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200-10 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO 3. Speed: 4. Stops: 5. Openings: 6. Travel: 7. Control: 8. Operation: 9. Machine Location: 10. Compensation: 11. Special Operations: a. Independent Service b. Fire Emergency Service C. Standby Emerg. Power d. Anti-Nuisance Service e. Tenant Security 12. Car Enclosure Type: a. Platform Size b. Inside Clear 13. Signals and Fixtures a. Car Operating Panels b. Car Position Indicator C. Communication Sys. d. Service Cabinet e. Hall Pushbuttons f. Hall Lanterns g. Hall Pos. Indicators 14. Passenger Entrance Type a. Size b. Frames (1) - Main Floor (2) Typical Floors C. Doors (1) Main Floor (2) Typical Floors d. Sills (1) Main Floor (2) Typical Floors 15. Miscellaneous Items: a. Disabled Access Requirements b. Key Operated Hoistway Access C. Card Reader Provisions 2.02 MATERIALS: 350 FPM 4at1,2,3,5 4 In Line As Shown ACMNF Selective Collective Within Hoistway Above As Required By Manufacturer Service 7'-0" W by 6'-2" D by 10'-0" H 6'-8" W by 5'-5" D by 9'-0" H Design as Specified 1 Per Car; Applied Type Integral with Each Car Panel Integral with Car Panel Integral with Car Panel 1 Riser All Floors Main Floor Center Open, Single Speed 3'-6" W by 7'-0" H Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Finish Paint Finish Paint Aluminum Aluminum A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper best suited for anodizing finish specified. B. Bronze: CDA Alloy 280, muntz metal. C. Glass: Laminated Safety Glass meeting ANSI Z97.1. D. Nickel Silver: CDA Alloy 796, leaded nickel silver. 05-12-06 Summary Permit Set SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS ELEVATORS 14200-11 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS E. Plywood: PS-1, A-D exterior Grade Douglas Fir, fire retardant treated. F. Sheet Steel: ASTM A366, uncoated, pickled, free from defects. G. Sound Deadener: Fire retardant; spray, roller or adhesive applied; 3116 inch thick. H. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167; type 302 or 304. 2.03 FINISHES: A. Exposed-to-View Surfaces. Provide as follows unless otherwise specified. 1. Aluminum: Clear anodized finish. 2. Bronze: Satin brushed finish. Clear lacquer coat. 3. Nickel Silver. Satin brushed finish. 4. Sheet Steel: a. Shop Prime: Degrease clean of foreign substances and apply one coat of corrosion inhibiting primer compatible with finish paint selected. Hoistway items visible to public shall be painted one additional coat of black paint. b. Finish Paint: Factory applied baked enamel or powder coat; color as selected. 5. Stainless Steel: a. Plain: Satin, directional polish, No. 4 finish unless otherwise specified. b. Patterned: Rigidized Metal's No. 5 WL, RIMEX Metals No. 5-SM or equal. 6. Touch-Up: a. Prime Surfaces: Use same paint as factory for field touch-up. b. Finish Painted Surfaces: Refinish whole panel with shop prime and finish paint as specified above. B. Non-Exposed-to-View Surfaces: Degrease and shop paint manufacturer's standard corrosion inhibiting primer. 2.04 AUTOMATIC OPERATION: A. General Operation of Individual Elevators: 1. Provide a non-proprietary microprocessor-controlled dispatching system designed to monitor all types of traffic and sufficiently flexible so that it can be modified to accommodate changes in traffic patterns. Include hardware necessary to protect hoist motors, motor drives and door operators. Software shall control group and simplex program operations. 2. The system shall continuously monitor the demand based on real time calculations to assign and reassign 05-12.06 ELEVATORS Summary PertnR Set 14200-12 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS SECTION 14200 VAIL, COLORADO ELEVATORS the elevators to handle the traffic in the most efficient manner. Provide "anti-nuisance service" whereby all car calls will be cancelled if the bad-weighing device detects that an abnormal number of calls are registered given the number of passengers in the car. System using false call answering to accomplish this is not acceptable. Serial Link Communications: Provide a distributed processing network consisting of localized processors located in machine rooms, car stations, hall stations and top of car to allow system to make fast decisions based on data shared by the processor involved in the different operations of the elevators. For group dispatch operations, all elevators in the group shall be capable of acting as a group common dispatcher as the need arises. Fault Diagnostic System: Provide Owner with all hardware such as on-board LED. Diagnostics, hand held device or laptop computer, as standard with manufacturer, and supporting software documentation. Diagnostic system shall be capable of determining faults most difficult to find. B. Group Automatic Operation; For Two or More Cars: 1. Provide an "on-demand" hall call response system that will continuously scan the hall calls and assign the closest elevator in time to respond to that call. The system shall be capable of reassigning the elevator if demand changes the real time calculation. 2. A car with no car calls registered arriving at a floor where both "up" and 'down' hall calls are registered shall respond to the hall call in the direction of travel and illuminate the appropriate lantern. If no car call is registered for that direction, the lantem shall be extinguished, the lantern for the other direction shall light and the car shall respond to the call in that direction. The doors shall not close and reopen. 3. The system shall be capable of monitoring hall and car calls to monitor coincidental calls. The cars will continuously scan the whole system to determine the closest elevator in time taking into account the coin- cidental car and hall call. 4. Other Required Features: Should a car be delayed from leaving a floor for any reason, other cars shall respond to the hall calls at that floor and shall be dispatched in a normal manner. Provide each car with an adjustable load-weighing device, which will immediately dispatch cars and bypass hall calls when car is loaded to predetermined load. General Program Adjustments: After each group of elevators have been placed in regular service and the building substantially occupied, the elevators shall be regularly observed under normal operating conditions and minor adjustments shall be made as found necessary to ensure that the elevators operate at maximum efficiency. If zones are employed, arrangements shall be made in the control circuits of the elevators for the division between each zone to be raised or lowered if found necessary due to uneven distribution of traffic between the zones and/or staffing requirements. C. Simplex Selective Collective Operation: 05.12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200-13 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS 1. Provide a microprocessor-based control system to perform functions of elevator motion, car operation dispatching and door control. 2. Arrange for Simplex Selective Collective automatic operation. Operate elevators from a single riser of landing buttons and from operating device in car. 3. Momentary pressure of one or more car or landing buttons, other than those for landing at which car is standing, starts car, and causes car to stop at first landing for which a car or landing call is registered corresponding to direction in which car is traveling. Stops made in order in which landings are reached, irrespective of sequence in which calls are registered. 4. Double door operation not permitted. If an up traveling car has a passenger for an intermediate floor and a down call is registered at that floor, with no calls above car, it travels to floor, opens door to let passenger out, then lights down direction arrow in hall lantern and accepts waiting passenger without dosing and reopening doors. Two-Stop Collective Operation: Provide a microprocessor-based control system to perform functions of elevator motion, car operation dispatching and door control. Operate elevator from single button landing stations and operating buttons in car. Landing or car button causes car to start and proceed to that floor. Doors open automatically when car arrives. When car is traveling away from a registered landing call, call remains registered and car responds on next trip. 2.05 SPECIAL OPERATIONS: A. Inspection Operation: Provide key-operated hoistway access device and car top operating device. Key switches shall be mounted in doorframes with only ferrule exposed at terminal landings. B. Independent Service: Independent service operation shall be provided so that, by means of a switch located in the car service cabinet, the car can be removed from automatic operation and be operated by an attendant. The attendant shall have full control of the starting, stopping and direction of car travel. The car shall respond to car buttons only. The hall signals for the car on independent service shall not operate. C. Operation Under Fire or Other Emergency Conditions: Provide special emergency service to comply with ASME A17.1 UBC and local codes having jurisdiction. Provide Phase 1 recall switch at Main Floor Elevator Lobby and Fire Control Life Safety Room. Interlock recall switches to prevent simultaneous activation. Key switches at main floor shall be integrated in hall button station with engraved instructions. D. Operation Under Emergency Power System: General: The standby power system is sized to operate one elevator in each group simultaneously. When normal power fails and standby power becomes available, a signal will be given to the controllers, all elevators will shut down, and all car lights, etc., will be extinguished. When emergency power comes onto the line, power for lighting car fan and alarm bell shall be 05-12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200-14 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS automatically transferred and all cars on automatic operation shall be sequentially returned one at a time from each group, to the main floor. C. After all cars are parked at main floor, one car of each group shall resume normal operation, d. Provide interlocking illuminated strip switches to permit manual selection of desired elevator to operate on emergency power. e. When normal power fails and emergency power is used, or when normal power is restored, the Elevator Manufacturer shall provide all circuitry necessary, including time delay or auxiliary relays required to accomplish safe, continuous elevator operation. The cars will start in sequence, not simultaneously; allow 10 seconds between starts. Fire service and derailment devices shall be operable when system is on emergency power operation. E. Tenant Security: Provide CRT and keyboard in Guard Control Station to enable and disable car call buttons as follows: Function, which locks out all cars in a group so that all car buttons are inoperative, except the main floor. 2. Function which locks out any selected car button for all elevators in a group serving that floor. 3. Tenant security operations can be overridden by cars on independent, any special emergency service or by card reader access. 2.06 DOOR OPERATION: A. Passenger Type Horizontal Sliding: Door Operator: Provide heavy-duty master type operators with direct current motor. Provide closed-loop door operators, equal to Otis I-Motion, ThyssenKrupp HD98, GAL-MOVFR or MAC AMD. a. Provide door times available as specified under "Design Criteria". b. Car and hoistway doors shall open and dose simultaneously, quietly and smoothly; door movement shall be cushioned at both limits of travel. Door operation shall not cause cars to move appreciably. C. Door hold open times shall be readily and independently adjustable when car stops for a car or hall call. Main floor door hold times shall be adjustable independent of other floors. 2. Hangers and Tracks: Sheave type with two-point suspension. Steel sheaves with flanged groove and resilient sound-absorbing fires. Minimum 2-1/2 inch diameter for hoistway, 3 inch for car. Manufacturer's heavy-duty tracks and ball or roller bearing with adjustable up thrusts. B. Door Protection; Passenger Type: Electronic Scanning Type: a. Provide a door protective system, which does not rely on physical contact with a person or object to 05-12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200-15 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS SECTION 14200 VAIL, COLORADO ELEVATORS inhibit door movement or initiate door reversal. Provide system equal to the Otis "Lambda II", Adams "I.C.U." or Janus "Panaforty". b. The system shall be able to detect a 2-inch diameter rod introduced at any position within the door movement and between the height of 2 inches and 63 inches above sill level. C. Detection of intrusion into the protected area shall cause the doors, if fully open, to be held in the open position and, if closing, to reverse to fully open position. d. If doors are prevented from closing for an adjustable period of 15 to 45 seconds or upon activation of Fire Emergency Service, they shall proceed to dose at reduced speed and a loud buzzer shall sound. Door closing force shall not exceed 2-112 ft: Ibs. when door re-opening device is not in operation. e. For side-opening doors, the detector for the strike jamb side shall be recessed, flush with strike jamb. 2.07 SIGNALS AND OPERATING FIXTURES: A. General: Provide signals and fixtures as shown and specified. Location and arrangement of fixtures shall comply with handicap requirements. Passenger Elevator Buttons: Provide minimum 1-inch diameter mechanical, white illuminated with engraved identifications. Operation of car or hall button shall cause button to illuminate. Response of car to car or hall call shall cause corresponding button to extinguish. 2. Service and Freight Elevator Buttons: Provide vandal-resistant stainless steel minimum 1 inch diameter mechanical buttons and integral illumination equal to Adams, EPCO or GAL fixtures. Operation of car or hall button shall cause button to illuminate. Response of car to car or hall call shall cause corresponding button to extinguish. 3. Switches: Toggle type typically or key operated where noted. 4. Faceplates: Provide of material and finish as indicated and specified; 1/8 inch minimum thickness with sharp edges relieved. Unless otherwise specified provide bronze faceplates for passenger cars and stainless steel faceplates for service. 5. Fastenings: Provide with concealed fasteners for passenger cars and with flush tamper-proof screws of material and finish matching faceplates for service elevators. 6. Cabinets: Provide with pulls, concealed hinges and doors mounted flush with hairline joints to adjacent surface. Arrangement: Arrangement of fixtures shall generally conform to that specified, but components may be rearranged, if desired, subject to Owner's Representative's approval. 8. Engraving: Of size indicated; color backfill with epoxy paint in contrasting color as selected. 9. Lamps: Miniature LED type. 10. Audible Chimes: Electronic adjustable audible chimes; bell type gong not acceptable. 05-12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200-16 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO 11. Provide floor passing signal of the adjustable electronic audible chime type. SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS 12. Tactile Markings: Provide raised Braille and alpha characters, numerals or symbols to the left of operating buttons and devices used by the public. Indications may be engraved directly on faceplates or separate plates flush mounted with hairline joints and concealed mechanical fasteners. Plates shall be of same size and shape as buttons. B. Car Operating Panels: 1. General: Provide buttons numbered to conform to floors served and the following: a. Locate top operating button at 48 inches above floor; maximum 54 inches when required. b. Locate emergency stop and illuminated alarm button in bottom row at 35 inches above floor. Wire emergency stop to ring alarm bell. C. Provide "Door Open", "Door Hold", and "Door Close" buttons located above emergency stop and alarm of same design as car button. d. Engrave main panel with capacity, number of passengers and elevator number in 114-inch letters. Engrave auxiliary panel with NO SMOKING in 1-inch letters. All other signage required by local codes shall be engraved as directed by Owner's representative. e. Provide fire emergency key switch, engraved instructions and call cancel button with audible/visual signals and fire department phone jack located below emergency stop and alarm. f. Make provisions for card readers in all elevators. 2. Swing Type: Integrate cabinets, buttons and engraving into swing front return panels without applied faceplate. Entire front return shall swing on concealed hinges with concealed locking means for servicing. 3. Applied Type: Integrate cabinets, buttons and engraving into hinge single piece faceplate mounted to front return panel or sidewall adjacent to strike jamb. C. Car Position Indicators: Provide car position indicators with indications corresponding to floor designations with matching direction arrows and floor passing chimes. Provide digital type direct readout indicator with minimum one4nch high indications mounted integral with each car-operating panel. D. Hall Position Indicators: Digital type with 2-inch high indications. Combine with hall lanterns. Service Cabinet: Provide cabinet door with a lock and concealed hinge as an integral part of car operating panel mounted with flush hairline joints. Cabinet door shall be provided with a flush glazed window of required size to hold elevator-operating permit. Service cabinet shall contain the following: Independent service switch. 2. Two-speed ventilation switch. 3. Light switch or dimmer as applicable. 05-12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200-17 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO 4. Inspection switch, key operated. 5. Duplex convenience outlet. 6. Buzzers as required. Constant pressure test switch for emergency car lighting. 8. Card reader over-ride switch-key operated. SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS Speaker Phone: Provide a complete communication system in compliance with A.D.A. regulations consisting of a combination speaker/microphone, amplifier, automatic dialer with 4 number rollover capability and matching car station push button with telephone symbol to activate system and call-acknowledgement lights. Mount behind a pattern of holes as selected as an integral part of car operating panel. Wire to machine room and program automatic dialer as directed by Owner. G. Hall Button Fixtures: Each fixture shall contain buttons, which light to indicate hall call registration and extinguish when call is answered. Engrave fire-exiting instructions on faceplates. H. Hall Lanterns: Provide with single chime for up and double chime for down direction. Lantern illuminates white for up and red for down. As car approaches floor, lantern shall illuminate and chime approximately 4 seconds prior to doors opening to indicate next direction of travel. Provide hall lanterns with equilateral triangular lenses. Car Lanterns: Manufacturer's standard car riding lantern mounted at a maximum height above floor. Lens shall be flush with faceplate or face of jamb. Lantem illuminates and chimes as doors open. Provide single chime for up direction and double chime for down direction. J. Remote Control Stations: Provide indicator and control panels with wiring from elevator hoistways to and between remote stations as specified. Engrave operating instructions for controls, indicators, elevator numbers and floors served by each elevator or group of elevators. Coordinate quantity and size of conduit runs as specified under "Related Work Included In Other Sections". Provide manufacturer's system utilizing CRT device and keyboard incorporating all features specified. Panel shall be sized to suit space available and design as approved. Guard's Lobby Control Stations: Locate as directed. Include the following devices for each elevator or group of elevators as applicable. a. Display showing status, position and direction of each elevator. b. Function to call and shut down each car at lobby with doors closed. C. Function to place cars on independent service operation and call car to lobby and park with doors open. d. Function for tenant security operation as specified under Special Operations. 2. Life Safety Control Station: Locate in Fire Control Room as indicated; size panel to suit space available, design as approved. Include the following for each elevator or group of elevators as applicable. a. Display showing status position and direction of each elevator. 05.12.06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200-18 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS b. Three-position fire key switch with visual indication. Interlock with lobby key switch to prevent simultaneous activation. C. Display reading EMERGENCY POWER to illuminate as soon as main power fails. Manual selection switches for each car and display indicating which car are operating on standby (emergency) power. d. A compartment containing properly identified keys to operate all fire service switches. Provide tags with legible instructions on each key. Lock on compartment shall be subject to house master key or fire department key as approved. 2.08 WIRING: A. General: Provide all necessary wiring with 15% or a minimum of four spares between cars and controllers and to all remote control stations. Furnish shielded wires in cables for all communications card readers and speakers. Include two additional pairs of shielded spares for each car. B. Traveling Cables: Use minimum number of traveling cables with flame retarding and moisture resisting covers. Include shielded wires and spares as noted above. Cord thoroughly and protect cables from rubbing against hoistways or car items. Provide with steel cable core and properly anchored to relieve strain on individual conductors. C. Work Light and Convenience Outlet: Provide on top of car with wire lamp guard. D. Stop Switch: Provide in each pit and on top of car. E. Alarm Gong: Six-inch size, 110 volt. Provide on top of each car and one per group inside of hoistway at main landing to be actuated by corresponding alarm button or emergency stop switch. F. Auxiliary Disconnect Switches: Provide as required in remote controller rooms or at remote equipment not in view of mainline switches; include all wiring and conduit. G. Coaxial Circuit: Provide for closed circuit television camera in elevators. Run from elevator car to machine room. 2.09 CAR ENCLOSURES: A. General: Fabricate finish work smooth and free from warps, buckles, squeaks and rattles; joints lightproof. Car shall be sound isolated from car frame. Apply outside of car with 3/16-inch thick sound deadener. No visible fastenings, except as indicated. B. Passenger Cars: Provide passenger car enclosures as described below with final interior design and finishes as shown on drawings. Steel Shell: Fabricate walls of 14-gauge sheet steel from floor to canopy. Canopy 12 gauge reinforced. Paint shell in color as selected by Owner's representative. 2. Emergency Exit: Top of car per code. 3. Ventilation: Two-speed squirrel cage exhaust blower, Morrison model AA or equal, with sound isolation mounting on canopy. Provide concealed vents above base or ceiling as designed. 05-12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200-19 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS 1j 4. Car Doors: Fabricate from 16-gauge sheet steel on front and back of each panel sufficiently reinforced with steel to insure rigidity and sound deadened. Provide two guides per panel located one inch from each end. Provide full-length neoprene astragals. Finish car side with bronze and return finish 1/2 inch around edge of doors. 5. Protective Pads: Provide one set of heavy quilted protection pads for each group of elevators. Total set of pads required. Pads shall cover all walls with cut-out sections for car operating panels. Provide pads with rubber-coated V type hooks sewn into top of pad for mounting on top of removable panels. 6. Front Return Panels: Provide full integral swing type front return panels fabricated from 14 gauge stainless steel. 7. Interior Panels, Ceiling, Lighting, Handrail, and Special Trim as shown on drawings. 8. Sills: Provide extruded bronze threshold plate. Mount with concealed mechanical fasteners. Allow for installation of finish flooring. 9. Finish Flooring: Provided by others. C. Service/Passenger Cars: Steel Shell: Fabricate walls of 14 gauge patterned stainless steel. Extend from floor to canopy and heavily reinforce to withstand severe service. 2. Canopy and Lighting: 12 gauge reinforced stainless steel with recessed fluorescent light fixtures with protective lens. Protect light housing from damage. 3. Emergency Exit: Top of car per code. 4. Car Doors: Fabricate from 16-gauge sheet steel on front and back of each panel sufficiently reinforced with steel to insure rigidity and sound deadened. Provide two guides per panel located one inch from each end. Provide full-length neoprene astragals. Mount doors on structural header, not on car enclosure. Finish car side with stainless steel and return finish 1/2 inch around edge of doors. 5. Entrance Columns and Front Return: Provide front return panels fabricated from 14 gauge stainless steel. 6. Ventilation: two-speed squirrel cage exhaust blower, Morrison model AA or equal, with sound isolation mounting on canopy. Provide vent slots in base. 7. Bumper Rails: Provide 1/2 inch by 6-inch stainless steel No. 4 finish bar located at 12 inches above floor on all walls without entrances. Mount flat with countersunk mechanical fasteners securely attached to car shell. 8. Handrail: Provide a 1-1/2 inch diameter stainless steel rail on all walls without entrances mounted with matching brackets securely attached to car shell. 9. Sills: Provide extruded aluminum threshold plate. Mount with concealed mechanical fasteners. Allow for installation of finish flooring. 10. Finish Flooring: Tile as selected by Owner's Representative. 05-12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200 - 20 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS D. Emergency Lighting; All Elevators: Provide an emergency car lighting unit mounted on top of car, battery driven and self-rechargeable. Upon outage of normal power the unit shall, within 5 seconds, light two lamps as part of normal car lighting or separate lights mounted above drop ceiling. The unit shall have sufficient capacity to keep the lights in continuous operation for four hours and also the alarm bell for one hour. Provide a readily accessible means for testing the unit in service cabinet. Light fixtures mounted in car front returns or operating panels are not acceptable. 2.10 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES; PASSENGER TYPE: A. General: Fabricate finish work smooth with flush surfaces and free from warps and buckles. Entrance assemblies shall bear 1-112 hour U.L. rating. Provide entrances of size and type as scheduled. B. Struts and Closer Angles: As required for entrance installation and door closer mechanism. Use full-length struts. Hanger headers, minimum 3116 inch material extending from strut to strut. C. Dust and Hanger Covers: Provide as required of minimum 16-gauge sheet steel. Provide hanger cover plates extending full length of door track. Paint black. D. Fascia, Toe and Head Guards: Minimum 16 gauge sheet steel; reinforce fascia. Paint black. Provide blind fascia in express zones or for reverse openings as required, E. Sills: Extruded sills with non-slip surfaces and grooves suitable for guides. Extend strut to strut and mount without exposed screws. Provide all support angles and levelers for a complete installation. Sill material as scheduled. Frames: Fabricate from 14-gauge material with side jambs in one continuous piece from sill to head section. Head and jamb flush bolted with hairline joint to provide unit frames with neat appearance from corridor side. Standard bolted frame for service elevators will be acceptable. Material and finish of frames as scheduled. G. Doors: Fabricate from 16-gauge material sufficiently reinforced with steel to insure rigidity and sound deadened. Provide two guides per panel, which will remain engaged in sill if guiding member is destroyed. Provide full-length neoprene astragals on leading edge and non-vision wings of material and finish to match doors. There shall be no keyholes in the door unless required by governing authority. Corridor side of door panel material and finish as scheduled. Return finish a minimum of 112 inch around edges of door. H. Tactile Markings: Provide raised Braille and alpha characters, numerals or symbols similar to those for car stations of size required by governing authority. Locate on each entrance jamb at 60 inches above floor indicating floor designation. Material and finish of plates shall have contrasting background and mounting means similar to those on car panels. 2.11 TRACTION ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT: A. Design Criteria: Performance: a. Contract Speed: Maximum five percent (6%) speed variation under any loading condition in either direction, b. Motion Time: Brake release to brake set as measured in both directions for a typical one floor run under any loading condition. After make-up of hoistway door interlock, initiate movement of car 05-12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200- 21 E PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS within 0.7 second for geared elevators. (1) 350 FPM: 5.6 seconds. C. Door Open Times: (1) 3'-6° Center Open: 1.8 seconds. (2) 4'-0" Side Open: 2.5 seconds. d. Door Close Times: Minimum, without exceeding kinetic energy and closing force, allowed by code. e. Door Dwell Times: Comply with A.D.A. formula and provide separate adjustable timers with initial settings as follows: (1) Main Lobby Hall Call: 5.0 seconds. (2) Upper Lobby Hall Call: 5.0 seconds (3) Car Call: 5.0 seconds. (4) Interruption of Door Protective Device: Reduce dwell to 1.0 second after all ADA requirements have been met. f. Leveling: Within 1/4 inch under any loading condition. Level into floor at all times, do not overrun floor and level back. g. Releveling: Provide smooth and accurate releveling required due to cable stretch. 2. Operating Qualities: Owner's Representative will judge riding qualities of cars and enforce the following requirements. Make all necessary adjustments. a. Acceleration and Deceleration: Starting and stopping shall be smooth and comfortable, without obvious steps of acceleration. Slowdown, stopping and leveling shall be without jars or bumps. Stopping upon operation of emergency stop switch shall be rapid but not violent. (1) Vertical Acceleration: Maximum 4 ft. per second squared. Maximum jerk 8 ft. per second cubed. (2) Horizontal Acceleration: Maximum 15 mg peak-to-peak measured at full speed for full travel in both directions. b. Full Speed Riding: Free from vibration and sway. 3. Motor Control: a. Equipment: Capable of operating at plus or minus ten percent of normal feeder voltage and plus or minus three percent of feeder frequency without damage or interruption of elevator service. b. Control System: Closed loop feedback control incorporating positional and velocity selector system that is capable of operating continuously at contract speed and load for one hour without exceeding 05-12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200-22 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS 50 degrees Centigrade from ambient machine room temperature. Design system to not adversely affect stability of voltage and frequency controls of emergency generator set or loads connected to emergency power bus during standby power operation, c. Car Load Sensing: (1) The control system shall sense the actual load condition of the elevator prior to any movement of the elevators. The start/acceleration pattern shall be adjusted to reflect the carload to achieve a smooth start/acceleration under all load conditions and location in the hoistway. (2) Provide load-sensing devices that utilize crosshead deflection or hoist rope pressure. System shall be accurate within 100 pounds and stable over extended periods. (3) Systems using pre-torquing of the D.C. motor armature are acceptable; variable voltage control of the brake energization is not acceptable. 4. Sound Controf: a. Vibration: Sound isolate machines and motor drives from beams and building structure to prevent objectionable noise and vibration transmission to occupied building spaces. b. Airborne Noise: Maximum acoustical output level of (1) 75 dba measured in machine room. (2) 60 dba measured in elevator cars during all sequences of operation. (3) 50 dba measured in elevator lobbies. B. Guide Rails: Size: Standard steel tees with backs machined for splice plates. Extend rails full depth of pits and mounted to continuous pit channels with adjustment bolts to allow for building settlement. Minimum weight in pounds per foot shall be 15 pounds for car and counterweight. 2. Installation: Drawings indicate basic hoistway framing and special supports for rail brackets. Guide rails shall be sized or reinforced to span a distance of 14'-0". The Elevator Contractor shall provide all additional supports and/or rail backing required. Install plumb within 1/16 inch. File joints smooth. C. Guide Shoes: Roller type with rubber composition tires, minimum 3/4 inch wide and fully adjustable spring loaded to provide continuous contact with rail surfaces. Balance car to insure equal guide shoe pressure on all wheels and not exceed manufacturer's recommendations. D. Hoist and Governor Ropes: Size and number to insure proper wearing qualities; minimum eight strands wound around hemp core. Pre-formed cables will be permitted. Minimum size: Hoist ropes, 1/2 inch for hoist ropes and 3/8 inch for governor ropes. E. Buffers: Mount on continuous pit channels with required blocking and supports. For deep walk-in pits, provide platforms with access ladders for servicing car buffers as acceptable to Elevator Code authorities. or12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200-23 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS SECTION 14200 VAIL, COLORADO ELEVATORS F. Counterweights: Sectional metallic weights securely fastened in structural frame. G. Safeties: Flexible guide clamp type mounted on underside of car frame. Provide counterweight safeties of same type as car safeties where required. H. Governor: Centrifugal speed type self resetting with protective covering over sheave, jaws and exposed gears. Pit tail sheave frame shall be ratchet or tension type held under 200 pounds tension. 1. Car Frame and Platform: Passenger Elevators: Steel frame with steel or double wood floor, isolate platform from car frame by rubber pads and provided with jacking bolts for pad replacement. 2. Service/Passenger Elevators: Freight type construction with heavy channels front and rear, metal stringers and double wood floor. Design for Class A freight loading. J. Traction Machines: Provide machines with heavy structural steel bedplates and motors rated for 30 minute with maximum 50 degree Centigrade rise or better. Provide manufacturer's standard double wrap or single wrap traction machines. K. Controller: As standard with approved manufacturer; overload relays in three legs of power circuit and in loop circuit; cabinets with NEMA-1 enclosures and doors arranged with locks or mechanical latches. Provide permanently marked symbols or letters identical to those on wiring diagrams adjacent to each component The controller wiring shall be carried out in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with relevant requirements of National Electric Code. 2. All external connections to the equipment on each controller shall be made by means of approved cable thimbles and/or solderless cable lugs, depending on the current to be carried. 3. Condenser activated or dashpot timers, motors or incandescent globes for dampening acceleration and deceleration steps are unacceptable. 4. Main contactors or starter switches shall be horsepower rated and are not to be mounted directly to the steel cabinets, to ensure quiet operation of controllers. 5. The controllers must be properly shielded from line feeder pollution. L. Power Conversion and Regulation Unit: All circuitry shall be as approved by the enforcing code. Operation shall be quiet and the performance standards herein specified shall be provided. 2. Design system to control starting and stopping and to prevent damage to motor from overload or excess current and to automatically disconnects power supply. Apply brake and bring car to rest in event of power failure or safety device operation. 3. Controllers shall not have failure modes which results in full power being applied to drive machine operation in event of phase reversal, phase failure or low voltage, which might result in elevator malfunction. 05-12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200.24 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS Provide system to convert 3 phase, 60 Hz, A.C. building power supply to a fixed D.C. voltage and then invert from D.C. voltage to a variable voltage, variable frequency, distortion-free, smooth A.C. current output to the A.C. hoist motor. Varying the frequency input to the motor shall control motor speed; varying the voltage to the motor shall control torque. System shall be provided with necessary devices to insure quiet operation not exceeding noise level specified in "Design Criteria' and to protect building system power line against line voltage transients. M. Machine Beams and Sheaves: Provide all structural steel machine and sheave beams with dead end hitch plates, bearing plates, anchors and blocking as required to support equipment Secondary, overhead and deflecting sheaves with roller bearings and means for lubricating bearings from machine rooms as required where secondary levels are not provided. N. Selector: 1. The system shall utilize a device to establish incremental car position to an accuracy of .1875 inches or better using quadrature signal for the entire length of the hoistway. Absolute floor number encoding with parity shall be provided at each floor in order to establish exact floor position to the computer. The system shall not require movement to a terminal landing for the purpose of finding the correct car position. 2. The system shall utilize an automatic two-way leveling device to control the leveling of the car to within 114 inch above or below the landing sill. Over travel, under travel, or rope stretch must be compensated and the car brought level to the landing sill. 3. The individual car controller shall be capable of leaming the position of each floor in the building to an accuracy of .1875 inches. 4. The individual car controller shall have the software program that uses mathematical methods to create an idealized optimum velocity profile of the car travel from any floor to any other floor providing a smooth and stepless elevator ride. All the system motion parameters (such as jerk, acceleration, deceleration rates etc.) shall be field programmable with parametric limitations for the system dynamics, and be stored on EPROM as non-volatile memory. 5. The drive control system shall utilize the optimized velocity profile in a dual-loop feedback system based on car position and speed. A velocity feedback device shall permit continuous comparison of car speed with the calculated velocity profile to provide accurate control of the acceleration and deceleration, right to the final stop without discomfort, regardless of direction of travel or load in the car. 6. The individual car controller shall have an independent safety processor that monitors the speed of the car and creates a phantom speed contour near the terminal landing, so that the car would not be capable of traveling faster than the phantom speed contour. This processor should work independently of any other logic or motion control processors in the system. 7. The controller shall utilize a solid-state drive unit using solid-state power devices to control the motor field and machine brake. 8. The controller shall provide the required electrical operation of the elevator control system including the 05-12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200 - 25 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS automatic application of the brake, which shall bring the car to rest upon failure of power. 9. In addition, the power control shall be arranged to continuously monitor the actual elevator speed signal from the velocity transducer and to compare it with intended speed signal to verify proper and safe operation of the elevator. 10. During operation of the elevator with overhauling load (empty car up or loaded car down), precision speed control shall be obtained by the regulation system utilized in the power control. The automatic leveling zone shall not extend more than 12 inches above or below the landing level nor shall the doors begin to open until the car is within 12 inches of the landing. In addition, the inner leveling zone shall extend not more than 3 inches above or below the landing. The car shall not move if it stops outside the inner leveling zone unless the doors are fully closed. 11. An electro-mechanical switch shall open all power feed lines to the brake. A single ground, short circuit, or solid-state control failure shall not prevent the application of the brake in the intended manner. Systems that do not apply the brake when the car stops at a landing are not acceptable. 12. A motor field current sensing means shall be provided which shall cause electric power to be removed from the armature and brake unless the direct current flowing in the shunt field of the motor is sufficient to prevent over speeding of the motor. 2.12 HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT: A. Design Criteria: Performance: a. . Contract Speed: Maximum twenty percent (20%) speed variation under any loading condition in either direction. b. Motion Time: From start to stop of elevators motion as measured in both directions for a typical one floor run under any loading condition. Initiate movement of car within 1.5 second after make- up of hoistway door interlock. (1) 150 FPM: 8.5 seconds. C. Door Open Times: (1) 3'-6° Center Open: 1.8 seconds. (2) 4'-0" Side Open: 2.5 seconds. d. Door Close Times: Minimum, without exceeding kinetic energy and closing force, allowed by code. e. Door Dwell Times: Comply with A.D.A. formula and provide separate adjustable timers with initial settings as follows: (1) Main Lobby Hall Call: 5.0 seconds. (2) Upper Lobby Hall Call: 5.0 seconds. J 05.12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200-26 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS (3) Car Call: 5.0 seconds. (4) Interruption of Door Protective Device: Reduce dwell to 1 second after all ADA requirements have been met. f. Leveling: Within 318 inch under any loading condition. Level into floor at all times, do not overrun floor and level back. g. Hydraulic Pressure: Hydraulic components shall be factory tested for 600 PSI. Maximum operating pressure shall be 425 PSI. 2. Operating Qualities: Owner's representative will judge riding qualities of cars and enforce the following requirements. Make all necessary adjustments. a. Starting and stopping shall be smooth and comfortable. Slowdown, stopping and leveling shall be without jars or bumps. (1) Vertical Acceleration: Maximum 4 ft. per second squared. Maximum jerk 8 ft. per second cubed. (2) Horizontal Acceleration: Maximum 10 mg peak-to-peak measured at full speed for full travel in both directions. b. Full Speed Riding: Free from vibration and sway. 3. Sound Control: a. Vibration: Sound isolate the power units from building structure to prevent objectionable noise and vibration transmission to occupied building spaces. b. Airborne Noise: Maximum acoustical output level of. (1) 85 dba measured in machine room. (2) 60 dba measured in elevator cars during all sequences of operation. (3) 50 dba measured in elevator lobbies. B. Guide Rails: 1. Size: Standard steel tees with backs machined for splice plates. Extend rails full depth of pits. Do not bottom on pit floor. Minimum weight shall be 15 pounds per foot. 2. Installation: Drawings indicate basic hoistway framing and special supports for rail brackets. Guide rails shall be sized or reinforced to span a distance of 14'-0". The Elevator Contractor shall provide all additional supports and/or rail backing required. Install plumb within 1/16 inch. File joints smooth. C. Guide Shoes: Roller type with rubber composition tires, minimum 3/4 inch wide and adjustable spring loaded to provide continuous contact with rail surfaces. Nominal roller diameters shall be 6 inches. D. Buffers: Spring type mounted on cylinder support channels with required blocking and supports. For deep walk-in 05.12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200 - 27 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS SECTION 14200 VAIL, COLORADO ELEVATORS pits provide platforms with access ladders for servicing plunger assembly. Car Frame and Platform: Passenger Elevators: Manufacturer's standard steel members, steel frame with steel or double wood floor. Service/Passenger Elevators: Freight type construction with heavy channels front and rear, metal stringers and double wood floor with heavy embossed rubber floor. Design for Class A freight loading. Platen Isolation: Provide minimum 3/4-inch thick steel plates between top of plunger and car frame with one inch rubber or neoprene isolation material between. G. Cylinder Well and Casing: 1. Well: The Elevator Installer shall familiarize himself with existing conditions and be responsible for drilling cylinder wells. 2. Casing: Provide steel casing, 12 inches greater in diameter than wrapped cylinder and proper depth to retain hole and provide structural integrity of PVC casing. Provide minimum 10 gauge corrosion resistant well casing having minimum 0.2 percent copper content, watertight joints and closed bottom. Weld seams solid at multiple casing joints. Provide a steel ring at top of casing to be keyed into pit floor. Provide watertight seal at bottom using 2 feet 0 inches thick non-shrink concrete plug of type for installation under water where drive casing is required and closed bottom casing cannot be installed. 3. Provide minimum 318 inch thick PVC casing with watertight sealed couplings and bottom end caps. Inside diameter shall be 6 inches greater than outside diameter of cylinder. Extend PVC above pit floor. Seal top of PVC and provide an inspection port of 2-inch diameter by 4-inch long PVC pipe with threaded cap. 4. Installation: Set cylinder and PVC casing within steel casing. Backfill between hole and steel casing with natural soils the full height of hole. Backfill between PVC casing and steel casing with clean dry pea gravel at bottom 2'-0" of casing to stabilize PVC with casing. Plunger and cylinder shall be plumb within 1/16 inch. H. Cylinder: Steel pipe, factory tested for 600-pounds/square inch working pressure. Sandblast or wire brush outside of cylinder to remove rust and scale. Paint with heavy coat of epoxy or mastic. Wrap with 20-mil wrapping of Trantex, Tapecoat, Glasswrap or approved equal. Work shall be done in shop and repaired in field if coating is damaged. 1. Plunger. Use seamless steel pipe or tubing, minimum Schedule 80. Plunger shall be no more than 0.010 inch out of round and straight within 1/16 inch. Protect during shipping and installation to avoid damage. If plunger is gouged, scarred or shows visible tool marks, it shall be replaced. Finish shall be 20 micro inches or finer. Plunger top shall be isolated from car frame. Plungers with follower guides are not acceptable. J. Packing: Provide packing, which inhibits leaking of oil with drip ring. K. Scavenger Pump: Provide electrically operated scavenger pump with storage reservoir and float activated or other automatic means to return oil to system. Provide 1/2 inch copper tubing for oil return line. L. Oil: Provide Hydro Safe biodegradable hydraulic vegetable oil or approved equal specifically designed and 05-12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200 - 28 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS formulated for hydraulic elevator use. M. Piping: Minimum Schedule 80 steel pipe suitable for 600 pounds pressure. No hoses shall be used in any part of piping. Provide sound isolating couplings in oil line between jack and pumping plant. Support piping using vibration isolating mounts or hangers with integral felt or neoprene at least 1/4 inch thick. Use threaded or welded joints throughout except at the connections to power unit and cylinder unit Use no more than two victaulic type connections in the machine room and two in the pit area. 1. Overhead and Exposed Piping: Provide drip deflectors at pipe joints where pipes run above ceiling areas to prevent damage to these areas in case of joint leakage. 2. Underground Piping: Protect with extruded high density polyethylene coating having a thickness of 25 to 60 mills applied with a minimum 8 mill thickness of modified rubber adhesive material all as manufactured by Plexco or equal. Install piping on three-inch bed of clean, dry sand and backfill with additional three inches of sand. Testing: Before enclosing pipe system, dose ends, fill with fluid, establish 600 PSI pressure and allow to stand for 24 hours. Make corrective repairs to leaks or pressure drop. N. Pit Valves: Provide in each elevator pit a gate valve to shut off oil between cylinder and pumping plant. 0. Pumping Plant: General: Self-contained unit with sound reducing cabinet and sound isolated base. 2. Pump: IMO, Roper or accepted equal for 150 SSU oil, belt driven or submersible. Maximum speed 3600 RPM. Maximum pressure 425 pounds per square inch. 3. Tank: Capacity equal to plunger displacement plus 25°x. Provide strainers, oil level sight gauge and device to maintain uniform oil temperature. 4. Valves: Integral type by Elevator Equipment Company, Maxton Company or by elevator manufacturer. Provide conveniently located manual lowering valve accessible without removing pumping plant enclosure panels. 5. Motor. General Electric, Imperial, Westinghouse or accepted equal; maximum speed 1800 RPM for belt driven and 3600 RPM for submersible. Provide minimum 120 start heavy-duty motor, continuous rated, 50 degrees C. temperature rise, Class A insulation or 70 degrees C. rise for Class B insulation. 6. Controller: Integral, floor or wall mounted as applicable to space conditions. Include door-operating relays combined with controller. Provide SCR solid-state soft start starting. Provide three (3) manual reset overload relays, one in each line and reverse phase relay. Provide externally mounted permanently identified junction boxes on controller cabinets for termination of communication circuits. Muffler: Blowout proof type between pumping plant and cylinder. P. Oil Cooling System: Provide an oil cooling system utilizing heat pipe technology similar to HyTec Oil Coolers as manufactured by Noren Products, Inc. of Menlo Park, California or equal. Q. Hydraulic Elevator Protective Circuit: In the event the car should stall due to low oil in the system or, if for other cause the car fails to reach the top landing within a predetermined time while traveling "up", a special circuit shall 05-12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permft Set 14200 - 29 j t i G f PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS be provided which shall automatically return the car to the bottom landing and open the doors for 10 seconds after which the elevator will close doors and completely shut down. Recycling the mainline switch shall restore Service. R. Hydraulic Elevator Battery Emergency Lowering Operation: Provide a battery driven unit which will initiate operation of the Protective Circuit and lower elevator to bottom landing in the event of a power failure. Service shall be restored automatically upon restoration of normal power supply. Arrange with an exposed method of testing. Arrange circuitry so that, if the mainline switch is open when the power transfer takes place, the elevator will not respond to the operation of the protective circuit. Provide a double pole-isolating switch on the battery unit to disconnect the battery output PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL: A. Bidding Documents: Bidders shall examine architectural, structural, electrical and mechanical plans and specifications. Any discrepancies which affect the elevator work or conditions adverse to the bidder's equipment shall be brought to Owner's Representative's attention at least seven (7) days prior to the bid date. If no discrepancies are presented, changes required to accommodate bidders equipment become the responsibility and cost of the Elevator Contractor. 3.02 PREPARATION: A. Field Measurements: Field-verify dimensions before proceeding with the work. Coordinate related work by other trades. Verify the following to be acceptable for installation of elevators. Hoistway has been correctly sized and otherwise properly prepared. 2. Equipment supports are satisfactory. 3. Electrical rough-ins are correct. 4. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.03 INSTALLATION: A. General: Install per manufacturer's requirements, those of regulatory agencies and as specified. B. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installation of elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustments, inspection, maintenance and replacement of wom parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators. C. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating elevator equipment and components on vibration-absorption mounts, designed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby, eliminate sources of structure-borne noise from elevator system. D. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by manufacturer. E. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails, for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills and doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe workable dimensions at each landing. OS12-06 Summary Permit Set ELEVATORS 14200 - 30 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS Erect guide rails plumb and parallel with maximum deviation of 1/16 inch. Anchorage of guide rails shall not compromise waterproofing. Do not bottom rails on pit floor. G. Grout sills with non-staining, non-shrink grout. Set units accurately aligned with finished floor at landings. H. Graphics: Provide graphics visible to public as selected by Owner's Representative. Manufacturer's Nameplates: Manufacturer's nameplates, trademarks or logos not permitted on surfaces visible to public. 3.04 TEMPORARY ELEVATOR USE DURING CONSTRUCTION: A General: Should the General Contractor require the use of any elevator during construction, Contractor shall make arrangements directly with the Elevator Contractor, coordinate temporary facilities and pay all costs associated with the protection, operation and use of elevators. B. Maintenance: Elevators shall be maintained on a regular basis during the temporary construction use. A minimum of two hours per week per elevator shall be spent on examination, lubrication, adjusting and cleaning the elevator equipment. C. Damage: The Owner is entitled to receive new elevator equipment upon final acceptance of the entire project. The Owner's representative will thoroughly examine all elevator equipment upon completion of temporary use and col provide a punch-list outlining items that must be repaired or replaced to ensure the equipment is in new condition. Final acceptance and payment will not be made until all items have been satisfactorily completed. D. Schedule: Sufficient time must be allowed to prepare and adjust temporary elevators so that the entire elevator installation is ready for final acceptance. 3.05 TEMPORARY ACCEPTANCE AND USE BY OWNER: A. When an elevator is near completion and declared ready for service, before completion of other elevators, Owner agrees to accept elevator and place it into automatic service. B. The elevator must be tested and inspected by regulatory agencies and a permit to operate issued. C. A walk-through examination will be performed in the presence of Owner's Representative, General Contractor and Elevator Contractor to determine present condition of elevator. D. The Owner agrees to sign or cause the General Contractor to sign a temporary acceptance form that is mutually agreeable to all parties. E. During this temporary acceptance period, the Owner agrees to pay or cause the General Contractor to pay an agreed amount per day per elevator for regular maintenance. The cost for this maintenance per elevator, per day, shall be stated in the Elevator Contractor's bid. F. The guarantee and full maintenance period will be effective upon final acceptance of the entire installation 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Regulatory Agencies Inspection: Upon completion of elevators, Contractor shall provide instruments, weights and 05.12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200 - 31 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS personnel to conduct test required by regulatory agencies. The Contractor shall submit a complete report describing the results of the tests. B. Examination and Testing: When installation is ready for final acceptance, notify and assist Owner's Representative in making a walk-through review of entire installation to assure workmanship and equipment complies with contract documents. Provide equipment to perform the following tests: One-hour heat and run test with full load in car. Perform for one car of each duty. a. Stop car at each floor in each direction. b. Provide well-shielded thermometers for motor and verify that temperatures do not exceed 50 degrees Centigrade above ambient. C. Performance and leveling tests shall be made before and after heat and run test. 2. Check and verify operation of all safety features and special operations. a. Measure horizontal acceleration. b. Measure acoustical output levels in machine room, lobbies and cars. C. Measure voltage transients and harmonics feedback into building electrical system. C. Correction: Make corrections to defects or discrepancies at no cost to Owner. Should discrepancies be such that re-examination and retesting is required, the Elevator Contractor shall pay for all costs including those of Owner's representative fees. D. Final Acceptance: Final acceptance of the installation will be made only after all corrections are complete, final submittals and certificates received and the Owner is satisfied and the installation is complete in all respects. Final payment will not be made until the above is completed. 3.07 INSTRUCTIONS: Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use of each system. 3.08 MAINTENANCE: A. General: Provide complete continuing maintenance on entire elevator equipment during regular working hours on regular working days for a period of 12 months after filing Notice of Completion. B. Examination: Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of elevator equipment whenever required and replacement of defective parts with parts of same manufacture as required for proper operation. Contractor not responsible for repairs to car enclosures, door panels, frames, sills or platform flooring resulting from normal usage or misuse, accidents and negligence for which Contractor is not responsible. C. Performance Standards: Maintain the performance standard set forth in this Specification and maintain correct operation of the dispatching system. 2. Maintain smooth starting and stopping, smooth riding qualities and accurate leveling at all times. 05-12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200-32 } c PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS D. Callbacks: In event of failures, provide 24-hour callback service at no additional cost to Owner. E. Elevator Shutdowns: 1. Should any elevator become inoperative, repair within 24 hours of notification of such failure. Breakdown of major components shall be completed and service restored within 72 hours. 2. Failure to comply with above, Owner may order the work done by other contractors at the Contractor's expense. 3. Devices repaired or replaced by others shall, nevertheless, be provided with maintenance by the Contractor who shall become completely responsible for correct operation of such devices for lifetime of this contract. F. Follow-Up Tests: Test all safety devices and emergency operations at six (6) month intervals or oftener and submit written report on each test. Make tests at times which do not interfere with building operation. G. Maintenance Materials: 1. Expendable Parts: The Elevator Contractor shall provide a metal cabinet in at least one machine room on project premises containing the following expendable parts required for prompt replacement. Parts used for routine maintenance shall be replenished and stored in machine room to ensure an adequate supply is available. a. One set starter contacts and coils. b. Two resistors of each type installed. C. One set hanger sheaves for car and hoistway doors. d. Two relays and relay bases of each type installed. e. Twenty-four lamps of each type installed. f. Car and hall buttons with identical graphics installed; six for manufacturer's standard buttons, one of each type for special buttons. g. Twelve fuses of each type installed. h. One set motor brushes of each type installed. I. Any other parts required for prompt replacement, j. Lubricants and cleaners of all types used for maintenance. 2. Replacement Parts: Keep the following parts in a warehouse within 50 miles of the project premises. a. One door operator motor of each type used. b. Transformers of each type installed. 05.12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200 - 33 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS AND RESORTS VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS C. Two complete door interlocks. d. Parts for motor drive units. e. Parts for door protective devices. One set of packing for each size cylinder. g. Such other parts as are needed to insure prompt replacement in event of elevator shutdown such as spare control boards for computer-operated systems. H. Maintenance Data: After completion and prior to final acceptance, submit three sets of complete and accurate maintenance data specific for each elevator. Final payment will not be made until received. Manuals: Describe proper use and maintenance of equipment, lubrication points, types of lubricants used and frequency of lubricant application. 2. Parts Catalogs: Complete listing of all parts of equipment and components used in the installation. 3. Wiring Diagrams: One laminated set mounted in machine room, one reproducible mylar set and one blue line set delivered to Owner. Wiring diagrams shall be as built, specific for this installation, and reference identification on drawings shall match points identified on terminals of controllers. 4. Maintenance Tool and Software Manuals: Provide maintenance tools and supporting software documentation required for the complete maintenance of the entire system including diagnostics ad adjusting. Maintenance tool may be hand held or built into control system and shall be of the type not requiring recharging or reprogramming nor of the automatic destruct type. The tool and supporting software may be programmed to operate only with this project's identification serial numbering. Final Service and Inspection: Two weeks before expiration of the year's maintenance, the equipment shall be lubricated, fully serviced, adjusted to the standards designated and emergency service operation devices shall be checked. A representative of the Owner will make a complete inspection. Quotation: Base bid shall include cost of maintenance and materials as described above. END OF SECTION 05-12-06 ELEVATORS Summary Permit Set 14200 - 34 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 14560 VAIL, COLORADO LINEN CHUTES SECTION 14560 -LINEN CHUTES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing linen chutes. B. Related Sections: 1. Access doors are specified in Section 08310. 2. Firestopping materials are specified in Section 07840. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product specifications, standard details, installation instructions, and maintenance instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Include sections, elevations, and details of chute fabrication and installation including roof flashing. Show required piping connections for sprinklers and sanitizer unit. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the applicable provisions of IBC; provide UL labels on fire-rated doors. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Cutler-Federal, Inc., Midland-Metalcraft Corp., U.S. Chutes Corp., Van-Packer Company, Wilkinson Chutes, Inc. or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Non Fire-Rated Chutes: Provide manufacturer's standard chute system of type, service, sizes and shapes indi- cated; fabricated of specified metals and finishes and including support units, expansion joint materials, roof counterflashing and retainer band, roof-termination vent unit, special intake chute throat sections located where indicated to accommodate door units as specified, discharge door units of type indicated; sprinkler heads where indicated, and accessories, fasteners and installation materials. B. Chute Metal: Aluminum-coated cold-rolled steel sheet, Type 1, ASTM A463, commercial quality, 16-gauge. C. Chute Intake Door/Frame Units: 1. Provide self-dosing units at each landing where indicated, heights above floor as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Provide hinged doors with 180-degree swing. 3. Equip doors with positive latch and latch handle. 4. Provide manufacturer's standard stainless steel door units, AISI Type 3021304 with standard satin finish or No. 3 directional polish. 5. UL Labeled Door Units: Provide UL 'B' labeled door units 1-112- hour with 30-min temp. rise of 650-deg. F., complete with closers; comply with NFPA 82. 6. Locks: Equip door latch units with manufacturer's standard keyed cylinder locks, key removable only with cylinder locked. 04-07-06 LINEN CHUTES Progress CO Set 14560-1 PROJECT #02028 FOUR SEASONS HOTELS & RESORTS SECTION 14560 VAIL, COLORADO LINEN CHUTES D. Chute Discharge Door Units: 1. Provide manufactureeslfabricator's standard fusible-link, fire-protection, self-closing steel door unit; match chute size and construction, and provide "B" label construction. 2. Direct (Vertical) Discharge: Provide inclined horizontally rolling shutter-type door. E. Termination Venting: 1. Provide termination venting system to roof as indicated on drawings, as recommended by chute manufacturer, and as approved by AHJ (authorities having jurisdiction). 2. Provide nonferrous metal roof counterflashing and clamping ring, compatible with chute metal. F. Chute Accessories: 1. Fire Sprinklers: Equip chute with sprinkler heads in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 13. Provide access for maintenance of heads. Except as otherwise indicated or required by code, provide 1/24nch I.P.S. heads, one located in chute above highest intake door, and one located at intake door on alternate floors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations; and comply with applicable recommendations and details of SMACNA. B. Assemble components with tight, non-leaking joints; and anchor securely to supporting structure with sufficient anchors to withstand impacts from uses, and wind loading stresses on vent units. C. Provide for thermal expansion movement of chute sections. D. Install chutes plumb, without offsets or obstructions, for free fall of materials within chutes. E. Install chute systems compete with doors, and with safety, and fire-resistive components and accessories. F. Firestopping: Fill annular space between chute wall and each floor/roof deck construction with firestopping material. Install fire stopping prior to installation of chute enclosure walls/ceilings. G. Coordinate installation of vent units with roofing work. H. Intake and Discharge Doors: Install doors at heights and locations indicated. Provide anchors, wall/chute interfaces, self-closing operation, self-latching and similar features to comply with labeling and fire-resistive requirements. 3.02 TESTING, ADJUSTING, CLEANING A. Test operate components of chute system upon completion of installation; demonstrate use and safety features to Owner. Operate doors, locks to demonstrate that hardware is adjusted. B. Cleaning: Following completion of enclosure walls and ceilings, clean exposed surfaces of finished metal components of chute system. Remove foreign substances and repair imperfections in finishes, but do not remove UL labels. END OF SECTION 04-07-06 LINEN CHUTES 14560 Progress CD Set -2